CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 GIFT OF 
 Alfred C. Barnes 
 

 Date Due 
 
 
 flpfi^ 
 
 ^^virfMr 
 
 
 
 > •*- t 
 
 • la/c ™ F 
 
 
 
 -WflU Oft 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^^''^^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 PRINTED IN 
 
 U. 3. A. 
 
 (t^ 
 
 NO. 23233 
 
 Cornell University Library 
 BS2650 .E46 1888 
 
 St. Paul's epistles to the Phllippians 
 
 olin 
 
 3 1924 029 292 856 
 
'A Cornell University 
 J Library 
 
 The original of tiiis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924029292856 
 
ST PAUL'S EPISTLES TO THE 
 
 PHILIPPIANS, THE COLOSSIANS, 
 AND PHILEMON: 
 
 WITH A CRITICAL AND GRAMMATICAL 
 COMMENTARY, 
 
 C. J. ELLICOTT, D.D. 
 
 BISHOP OP GLOnOESTEE AND BEISTOL. 
 
 THE FIFTH EDITION. 
 
 LONDON 
 LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO. 
 
 AND NEW YOEK: 15 EAST 16* STREET 
 
^■/^f 
 
 
 ■ /AcJ-- -f^^n\ (P-'^'^'^^o 
 
 0--' 
 
 PBINTEE BY C. J. OLA¥, M.A. AND SONS, 
 AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. 
 
 JX5 
 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIFTH EDITION. 
 
 THIS fifth edition has been brought up to the standard 
 of the recently published Commentary on the First 
 Epistle to the Corinthians. The whole work has been, in 
 consequence, again carefully revised, both in regard of the 
 Text and of the notes. Additions, suggested by the labours 
 of those who have followed me in the interpretation of these 
 Epistles, have been made to the notes wherever amplification 
 seemed to be called for, or reconsideration required. Still 
 the original character and structure of the work has been 
 carefully maintained. It remains a critical and grammatical 
 Commentary, with just so much of the exegetical and his- 
 torical element as is absolutely required by the student for a 
 due perception of the mind of the inspired Original. The 
 Text will be found to present a few distinct changes. These 
 are, in all cases, due to that greatly improved knowledge of 
 the critical value of our materials, which the conscientious 
 labours of recent editors of the Text have freely supplied to 
 us. Former principles remain substantially the same; but 
 the manner in which they have been applied has been modi- 
 fied by fuller knowledge. 
 
 The Translations of the three Epistles are republished 
 with the addition of references to the Revised Version. 
 The corrections in the Translation are very few, and almost 
 entirely confined to those passages in which changes 
 of reading in the original Text necessitated changes in 
 the Translation. 
 
 GliOUOESIEB, 
 
 May, 1888. 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 THE present volume forms the fourth portion of my Com- 
 mentary on St Paul's Epistles, and contains an exposition 
 of the important Epistles to the Philippians and Oolossians, 
 and of the graceful and touching Epistle to Philemon. 
 
 The notes will be found to reflect the same critical and 
 grammatical characteristics, and to recognise the same princi- 
 ples of interpretation, as those which I endeavoured to follow 
 in the earlier portions of this work, on which the experiences 
 slowly and laboriously acquired during this undertaking have 
 taught me year by year more confidently to rely. There is 
 however a slight amount of additional matter which it is 
 perhaps desirable briefly to specify. 
 
 In the first place, I have been enabled to carry out more 
 fully and completely a system of reference to the great Ver- 
 sions of antiquity, and have spared no pains to approach a 
 little more nearly to those fresh and clear, yet somewhat 
 remote well-heads of Christian interpretation. In the notes 
 on the Pastoral Epistles it was my endeavour to place before 
 the reader, in all more important passages, the interpretations 
 adopted by the Syriac, Old Latin S and Gothic Versions. To 
 these in the present volume I have added references to the 
 Coptic (Memphitic) and Ethiopic Versions ; to the former as 
 found in the convenient and accessible edition of Botticher, 
 to the latter as found in Walton's Polyglott, but more espe- 
 cially and exclusively to the excellent edition of the Ethiopic 
 New Testament by the late Mr Pell Piatt, published by the 
 Bible Society in 1 830. These have been honestly and labo- 
 riously compared with the original ; but, as in the preface to 
 the Pastoral Epistles, so here again will I earnestly remind 
 
 1 I have now adopted this term, feel- 'vetua Itala' really belonged to a 
 
 ing convinced that the term ' Italic ' Eeoension and not to an independent 
 
 is likely to mislead. The latter I re- Version. In the present Epistles I 
 
 tained in the previous Epistles as have derived the Old Latin from the 
 
 sanctioned by common usage ; I was Version of the Codex Claromontanus. 
 however fully aware that the term 
 
 E. & 
 
VI 
 
 PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 the reader that though I have laboured unflinchingly, and 
 have spared no pains faithfully to elicit the exact opinion of 
 these ancient translators, I still am painfully conscious how- 
 very limited is my present knovs^ledge, and how many must 
 needs be my errors and misconceptions in languages where 
 Hterary help is scanty, and in applications of them where I 
 find myself at present unaided and alone. Poor however 
 and insufficient as my contributions are, I still deem it neces- 
 sary to offer them ; for I have been not a little startled to find 
 that even critical editors of the stamp of Tischendorf ' have 
 apparently not acquired even a rudimentary knowledge of 
 several of the leading Versions which they conspicuously 
 quote : nay more, that in many instances they have positively 
 misrepresented the very readings which have been followed, 
 and have allowed themselves to be misled by Latin transla- 
 tions, which, as my notes will passingly testify, are often 
 sadly and even perversely incorrect. I fear indeed that I 
 am bound to say that on the Latin translations attached to 
 the now antiquated edition of the Coptic New Testament by 
 Wilkins, from which Tischendorf appears to have derived his 
 readings, little reliance can be placed ; and on that attached 
 to the Ethiopic Version in Walton's Polyglott even less, be- 
 cause not only as a translation is it inexact, but as a repre- 
 sentative of the Ethiopic Version worse than useless, as the 
 text was derived from the valueless Roman edition of 1 548, 
 which in its transfer to the Polyglott was recruited with a 
 fresh stock of inaccuracies. 
 
 It is fair to say that in this latter Version Tischendorf ap- 
 pears to have also used the amended translation of Bode, but 
 even thus he is only able to place before the reader results 
 derived from an approximately accurate translation of a care- 
 less reprint of a poor original ; and thus to give only inade- 
 quately and inaccurately the testimony of the ancient Ethi- 
 opic Church. The really good and valuable edition of Pell 
 Piatt has lain unnoticed and unused, because it has not the 
 convenient appendage of a Latin translation. The same 
 remark applies to the edition of the Coptic Version by 
 Schwartze and Bbtticher, which, though differing consider- 
 ably less from that of Wilkins than the Ethiopic of Piatt 
 from the Ethiopic of the Polyglott, is similarly devoid of a 
 Latin translation, and in consequence has I fear received 
 proportionately little attention. 
 
 1 The f ovtrth volume of the new and what pains he has taken to secure 
 
 edition of Home's Introduction shows an accurate knowledge of Versions in 
 
 how conscientiously our countryman languages with which he himself did 
 
 Dr Tregelles has acted in this respect, not happen to be acquainted. 
 
PKEFAOE TO THE FIEST EDITION. vii 
 
 Under these circumstances, when our knowledge even of 
 the true readings of these two Versions is still so very limited, 
 I do not shrink from offering my scanty contributions, which, 
 though intentionally exegetical in character, may be found to 
 some extent useful even to a critical editor. Gladly, most 
 gladly, should I welcome other labourers into the same field, 
 nor can I point out to students in these somewhat intractable 
 languages a more really useful undertaking than a correct 
 Latin translation of Piatt's Ethiopic Version, and a similar 
 translation of the portions of the Coptic New Testament pub- 
 lished by Schwartze and his less competent successor. 
 
 I will here add, for the sake of those who may feel at- 
 tracted towards these fields of labour, a few bibliographical 
 notices, and a few records of my own limited experiences, as 
 these may be of some passing aid to novices, and may serve 
 as temporary finger-posts over tracts where the paths are not 
 well-trodden, and the travellers but few. 
 
 In Coptic, I have used with great advantage the grammar 
 of Archdeacon Tattam, and the lexicon of the same learned 
 Editor. The more recent lexicon of Peyron has, I believe, 
 secured a greater reputation, and as a philological work seems 
 deservedly to rank higher, but after using both, I have found 
 that of Tattam more generally useful, and more practically 
 available for elementary reading, and for arriving at the cur- 
 rent meaning of words. The very valuable Coptic grammar 
 of Schwartze cannot be dispensed with by any student who 
 desires to penetrate into the philological recesses of that sin- 
 gular language, but as a grammar to be put into the hands 
 of a beginner it is of more than doubtful value. 
 
 In Ethiopic, the old grammar of Ludolph still maintains 
 its ground. The author was a perfect Ethiopic enthusiast, 
 and has zealously striven, by the most minute grammatical 
 subdivisions, to leave no peculiarities in the Ethiopic language 
 unnoticed and unexplained : the student however must not 
 fail to exercise his judgment in a first reading, and be careful 
 to confine himself to the general principles of the language, 
 without embarrassing himself too much with the many ex- 
 ceptional characteristics which this difi&cult' language pre- 
 sents. These leading principles, especially in the second edi- 
 tion, are sufficiently well-defined, and will easily be extracted 
 by any reader of moderate sagacity and grammatical experi- 
 ence. The recent Ethiopic grammar of Dillmann has passed 
 
 1 This epithet must be considered difficulties. TheArabic scholar would 
 
 as used subjectively. To me, who am very likely entirely reverse my judg- 
 
 unf ortunately unacquainted with Ara- ment. 
 bic, this language has presented many 
 
 &2 
 
viii PEEFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 through my hands, but my acquaintance with it is far too 
 limited for me to pronounce on it any opinion. As far as I 
 could judge, it seems to be very similar to that of Schwartze 
 in Coptic, and only calculated for the more mature and scien- 
 tific student. With regard to lexicons, there is, I believe, no 
 better one than that of Ludolph (2nd ed.). That of Castell, 
 alluded to in the preface to the Pastoral Epistles, I have 
 since found to be decidedly inferior. 
 
 I do venture then to express a humble hope, that even 
 with no better literary appliances than these earnest men 
 and thoughtful scholars may be induced to investigate pa- 
 tiently and carefully the interpretations of these ancient wit- 
 nesses of the truth. Surely the opinion of men who lived in 
 such early ages of the Church as those to which the chief 
 ancient Versions may all be referred cannot be deemed un- 
 worthy of attention. Surely a Version like the Old Syriac, 
 parts of which might almost have been in the hands of the 
 last of the Apostles, a venerable monument of nearly equal 
 antiquity like the Old Latin, a Version so generally accurate 
 as that of Ulfilas', a Version so distinctive as that of the 
 Coptic, and so laborious as Piatt's Ethiopic^, cannot safely be 
 disregarded in the exposition of a Divine Revelation, where 
 antiquity has a just and reasonable claim on our attention, 
 and where novelty and private interpretation can never be 
 indulged in without some degree of uncertainty and peril. 
 
 With these three earthly aids, first, an accurate knowledge 
 of Hellenic Greek ; secondly, the Greek commentators, and 
 thirdly, the five or six principal ancient Versions, we may 
 (with humble prayer for the illuminating grace of the Eternal 
 Spirit) address ourselves to the task of a critical exposition of 
 the Covenant of Mercy; we may trust that, though often 
 with clouded and holden eyes, we may yet be permitted to 
 see and to recognise some sure and certain outlines of Divine 
 Truth : but without any of these, or with one, or even two, to 
 the exclusion of what remains, dare we hope that our inter- 
 pretations will always be found free from uncertainties and 
 inconsistencies, and will never exhibit the tinges of individual 
 opinion, and the often estimable, but ever precarious subjec- 
 tivity of religious predilections ? 
 
 1 Some tinges of Arianism have ^ I regret that I cannot in any way 
 been detected in this Version, e.g. agree with my valued acquaintance 
 Phil. ii. 6, ' ni vulva rahnida visan Dr Tregelles in his judgment on the 
 sikpaieifto [surely not a correct trans- Ethiopic Version : in St Paul's Epi- 
 lation of iira\ gu^a,' but are not suffi- sties I have found it anything but 
 ciently strong to detract seriously 'the dreary paraphrase' which he 
 from the general faithfulness of the terms it in his remarks in Home, 
 Version. Introdimtion, Vol. iv. p. 319. 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. ix 
 
 I fear indeed that these remarks are but little in unison 
 with popular views and popular aspirations ; I fear that the 
 patient labour necessary to perform faithfully the duty of an 
 interpreter is unwelcome to many of the forward spirits of 
 our own times. To be referred to Greek Fathers, when sua- 
 sive annotations of a supposed freer spirit and a more flexible 
 theology claim from us a hearing, — to be bidden to toil on 
 amid ancient Versions, when a rough and ready scholarship is 
 vaunting its own independence and sufficiency, — to weigh in 
 the balance, to mark and to record the verging scale while 
 religious prejudice is ever struggling to kick the beam, all this 
 seems savourless, unnecessary, and impracticable. I fear such 
 is the prevailing spirit of our own times ; yet, amid all, I 
 seem to myself to descry a spirit of graver research winning 
 its way among us, a more determined allegiance to the truth, 
 a greater tendency to snap the chains of sectarian bondage ; 
 and it is to those who feel themselves animated by this spirit, 
 who are quickened by the desire at every cost to search out 
 and to proclaim the truth, who think that there is no sacrifice 
 too great, no labour too relentless, in the exposition of the 
 word of God, — to them and to such as them I would fain 
 with all humility commend the imperfect and initial efforts 
 to elicit the testimony of the Ancient Versions which these 
 pages contain, and it is from them that I hopefully look for 
 corrections of the errors and inaccuracies into which my in- 
 experience will I fear be often found to have betrayed me. 
 
 Another addition which I have striven to make, and 
 which the profound importance of the subject has seemed to 
 require, consists in the introduction of a few doctrinal com- 
 ments upon the passages in these Epistles which relate to our 
 Saviour's divinity — and this I trust no one will deem super- 
 erogatory. The strongly developed tendencies of our own 
 times towards humanitarian conceptions of the nature and 
 work of our divine Master, — tendencies often associated with 
 great depth of feeling and tenderness of sympathy, — seem 
 now to demand the serious attention of every thoughtful 
 man. The signs of the times are very noticeable. The di- 
 vinity of the Eternal Son is not now so much assailed by 
 avowed heretical teaching, as diluted by more plausible, per- 
 haps even more excusable, but certainly no less destructive 
 and pernicious developments of human error. The turmoil 
 of Arian and semi-Arian strife has comparatively ceased, to 
 be succeeded however by a more delusive calm, and a more 
 dangerous and enervating repose. In the popular theology 
 of the present day the Eternal Son is presented to us under 
 aspects by no means calculated to rouse any active hostility 
 
X PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 or provoke any earnest antagonism. All is suasive and se- 
 ductive : our Lord is claimed as united to us by human affi- 
 nities of touching yet precarious application ; He is the prince 
 of sufferers, the champion of dependence and depression, the 
 representative of contested principles of social union; His 
 Crucifixion becomes the apotheosis of self-denial, the Atone- 
 ment the master work of a pure and sublimated synapathy, — 
 principles and aspects all the more dangerous from involving 
 admixtures of partial truth, the more_ harmful from their 
 seeming harmlessness. It is against this more specious and 
 subtle form of error that we have now to contend ; it is this 
 plausible and versatile, theosophy that seeks to ensnare us by 
 its appeal to our better feelings and warmer sympathies, that 
 seems to edify while it perverts, that attracts while it ruins, 
 that it is now the duty of every true servant of Jesus Christ 
 to seek to expose and to countervail. And this can be done 
 in no way more charitably, yet more effectually, than by sim- 
 ply setting forth with all sincerity, faithfulness, and truth, 
 those portions of the word of life which declare the true na- 
 ture of the Eternal Son in language that no exegetical artifice 
 can successfully explain away, and against which Arian, semi- 
 Arian, Deist, and Pantheist, have beaten out their strength 
 in vain. 
 
 Under these feelings then, in the important doctrinal 
 passages in these Epistles which relate to our Lord's divinity 
 I have spared no pains in the endeavour candidly and truth- 
 fully to state the meaning of every word, and to put before 
 the younger reader, in the form of synopsis or quotation, the 
 great dogmatical principles and deductions which the early 
 Greek and Latin Fathers, and more especially our own 
 Divines of the seventeenth and early part of the eighteenth 
 century, have unfolded with such meek learning, such per- 
 spicuity, and such truth. I need scarcely remark that here 
 I have had to rely solely on my own reading; for in the 
 works of the best German commentators sound dogmatical 
 theology will I fear too often be sought for in vain, and even 
 in the more recent productions of our own country sub- 
 jective explanation and an inexact and somewhat diffiuent 
 theology have been allowed to displace the more accurate 
 and profound deductions of an earlier day. On this portion 
 of my labours more than on any other may the Father of 
 Lights be pleased to vouchsafe His blessing, and to overrule 
 these efforts to issues beyond their own proper efficacy, and 
 to uses which my earnest aspirations, but not my sense of 
 their realization, have presumed to contemplate. 
 
 A few additions will be found in what may be termed 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. xi 
 
 the philological portion of this Commentary. Wherever the 
 derivation of a word has seemed obscure, and an exact 
 knowledge of its fundamental meaning has seemed of im- 
 portance to the passage, I have noted in brackets its pro- 
 bable philological affinities, and stated, with all possible 
 brevity, the opinions of modern investigators in this recently 
 explored domain of literature. Gladly would I have found 
 this done to my hand in the current lexicons of England or 
 Germany, as it would have saved me not only much labour, 
 but many unwelcome interruptions ; but upon the philology 
 of modem lexicons I regret to say very little reliance can be 
 placed. Even in the otherwise admirable lexicon of Rost 
 and Palm, which, I may here remark, is now brought to a 
 completion, it is vexatious to observe how much philology 
 has been neglected by its compilers, and how uncertain and 
 precarious are the derivations of all the more difficult words. 
 
 With regard to references to former notes, which, now 
 that my work has extended to eight Epistles, have neces- 
 sarily become somewhat numerous, I have endeavoured to 
 observe the following rule. Where the reference has ap- 
 peared of less moment, I have contented myself with a 
 simple allusion to the former note. Where the reference has 
 seemed of greater moment, and the note referred to contains 
 any critical or grammatical investigations, I have generally 
 endeavoured to embody briefly in the note before the reader 
 the principles previously discussed, leaving the fuller detail 
 to be sought for in the note referred to. My desire is thus 
 to make each portion of this work as much as possible an 
 independent whole, and while avoiding repetition, still to 
 obviate, as far as is compatible with the nature of a conti- 
 nuous work, the necessity of the purchase or perusal of fore- 
 going portions. 
 
 A few concluding words on the Translation. I have 
 more than once had my attention called to passages in for- 
 mer commentaries, where the translation in the notes has 
 not appeared in perfect unison with that iu the Revised 
 Version. In most instances these seeming discrepancies 
 have arisen from the fact that the fixed principles on which 
 I venture to revise the Authorised Version do not always 
 admit of an exact identity of language in the Version and in 
 the note. In a word, the translation in the note presents 
 what has been considered the most exact rendering of the 
 words taken per se ; the Revised Version preserves that 
 rendering as far as is compatible with the lex operis, the 
 context, the idioms of our language, or lastly, that grave 
 and archaic tone of our admirable Version which, even iu a 
 
xii PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 revised form of it designed only for the closet, it seemed a 
 kind of sacrilege to displace for the possibly more precise, yet 
 often really less expressive phraseology of modern diction. 
 Needlessly to divorce the original and that Version with 
 which our ears are so familiar, and often our highest asso- 
 ciations and purest sympathies so intimately bound, is an 
 ill-considered course, which more than anything else may 
 tend to foster an unyoked spirit of Scriptural study and 
 translation, alike unfilial and presumptuous, and to which a 
 modem reviser may hereafter bitterly repent having lent his 
 example or his contributions. 
 
 I desire in the last place to record a few of my many 
 obligations. These however are somewhat less than in ear- 
 lier portions of this work, as the great and unintermitting 
 labour expended in the examination of the ancient Versions, 
 especially the Coptic and Ethiopic, has left me little time, 
 and perhaps I might say little need, for consulting commen- 
 taries of a secondary character. These it is not necessary to 
 specify, but the student who may miss their names on my 
 present pages will I truly believe have gained far more 
 from the ancient Versions that have been adduced, than lost 
 by the writers that have been left unnoticed. 
 
 Of the larger commentaries, I have carefully and thought- 
 fully perused the excellent commentary of my friend Dean 
 Alford. From it I have not derived much directly, as I 
 deemed it best, for the cause of that truth which we both 
 humbly strive to advance, to consult for myself the original 
 authorities and various exegetical subsidies that were alike 
 accessible to us both, that so my adhesion to the opinions of 
 my able predecessor, or my departure from them, might be 
 the result of my own deliberate investigations. At the 
 same time I have been particularly benefited by the ad- 
 mirable perspicuity of his notes, and have felt rejoiced when 
 our opinions coincide, and unfeignedly sorry when I have 
 deemed myself compelled to take a contrary or antagonistic 
 side. 
 
 To the commentaries of De Wette and Meyer, but espe- 
 cially to those of the latter, I am, as heretofore, greatly 
 indebted for grammatical and exegetical details, but in the 
 dogmatical portions I have neither sought for nor derived 
 any assistance whatever. To German commentaries the 
 faithful and candid expositor of Scripture is under great 
 obligations,^ but for theology he must turn to the great doc- 
 trinal treatises of the Divines of our own country. 
 
 Of separate commentaries on the Philippians, the learned 
 and laborious production of Van Hengel has been on many 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. xiii 
 
 occasions extremely useful from its affluence of grammatical 
 examples ; but it is rather deficient in that brevity and per- 
 spicuity of critical discussion which is nowhere more indis- 
 pensable than in the aggregation of parallel passages, and 
 the comparison of supposed, but perhaps illusory similarities 
 of structure. 
 
 The commentary of Wiesinger is thoughtful and sensible, 
 and not unfrequently distinguished by a sound and persua- 
 sive exegesis. Those of -Rilliet and Holemann, but especially 
 the former, deserve consideration, but have been still so far 
 superseded by more modern expositions, that it will in all 
 cases be advisable for the student to read them with some 
 degree of caution and suspended judgment. 
 
 Of commentaries on the Golossians, I must first specify 
 the learned and exhaustive work of Bishop Davenant, which 
 has certainly not received that attention from modem ex- 
 positors which it so fully deserves. Its usefulness is some- 
 what interfered with by the scholastic form in which the 
 notes are drawn up, nor is it free from the tinge of theolo- 
 gical prejudice, but there is a thoroughness and completeness 
 of exegetical investigation which renders it an exposition 
 which no student of this profound Epistle will be wise to 
 overlook. 
 
 Of modern commentaries, that of Huther will well repay 
 the trouble of perusal, but both this work and that of Bahr 
 have been so thoroughly examined by De Wette and Meyer, 
 and in many passages so incorporated into their writings, 
 that a separate study of them is rendered somewhat less 
 necessary. They will however always be referred to with 
 advantage, but should not be used without due consideration 
 of the opinions of their successors, and of the various recti- 
 fications which a more accurate scholarship has occasionally 
 been found to suggest. 
 
 The commentary of Professor Eadie has been of occa- 
 sional service to me; but, as in the commentary on the 
 Ephesians, so here also I fear I am compelled in candour to 
 say that the grammatical comments do not always appear to 
 be quite exact, nor are the doctrinal passages always discussed 
 with that calm precision and dignified simplicity of language 
 which these subjects seem to require and suggest ; still most 
 of the exegetical portion is extremely good, nor will any 
 reader rise from the study of this learned, earnest, and not 
 unfrequently eloquent volume, unimproved either in head or 
 in heart. 
 
 Notices of the other and larger commentaries on the New 
 Testament, or on St Paul's Epistles, to which I have been in 
 
xiv PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 the habit of referring, will be found in the prefaces to the 
 preceding portions of this work. 
 
 It now only remains for me to commit this volume to the 
 reader, with the earnest prayer to Almighty God that He 
 who has so mercifully sustained me with health and strength 
 during the anxieties of continued research, and the pressure 
 of protracted labour, may be pleased to grant that this re- 
 search may not prove wholly fruitless, this labour not utterly 
 vain. 
 
 TPIAS, MONAS, 'EAEHSON. 
 
 Cambkidqb, 
 
 October 2o, 1857. 
 
npos ^lAinniisioYs. 
 
INTKODUCTION. 
 
 THIS fervent, affectionate, and, in parts, pathetic Epistle was 
 written by the Apostle to his liberal and warmhearted con- 
 verts in the Roman colony of Philippi towards the close of his 
 first captivity at Rome (see Introd. to i Tim.), and at a time when, 
 as it would seem, his imprisonment was of a closer and harsher 
 character, and his earthly prospects were, though not by any means 
 without hope (ch. i. 25, 26, ii. 24), yet in many respects more 
 cheerless and depressing than when he wrote to the Colossians 
 and Philemon, and to the Ephesians (ch, i. 20 sq., ii. 17, 28; see 
 notes on Eph. vi. 21, and Introd. to Col.). It has thus been sup- 
 posed with some probability to have been written after the death 
 of the Praetorian Prefect (Burrus) to whom it has been thought 
 the Apostle was at first entrusted, and by whom, as we may per- 
 haps infer from Acts xxviii. 16, he had been treated with leniency 
 and consideration. 
 
 As the death of Burrus took place in a.d. 62 (Clinton, Fasti 
 Rom. Vol. I. p. 44), and as there are some expressions in the 
 Epistle that seem distinctly to imply that the captivity had been 
 of some duration (ch. i. 13 sq., comp. ii. 26), we may fix the date 
 of the Epistle towards the close of, or more probably about the 
 middle of a.d. 63, and may thus place it as the last in order of the 
 fowr Epistles written during the first captivity at Rome: see 
 Davidson, Introd. Vol. 11. p. 373. This however is not the opinion 
 of Bp Lightfoot, who, in a dissertation specially devoted to the 
 question of the order of the Epistles of the Captivity {Introd. to 
 
xviii INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Ep. to Phil. pp. 30—40), has decided in favour of placing this 
 Epistle first. The question is argued with great impartiality and 
 close consideration of the arguments commonly relied on for the 
 earlier date. Still the reasoning does not carry with it conviction. 
 The arguments usually relied on for the later date, viz. the pro- 
 gress of the Roman Church, the absence of the names of St Luke 
 and Aristarchus (Col. iv. 10, 14, Philem. 24), the implied journeys 
 between Rome and Philippi, and the probability of a more oppres- 
 sive severity in the Apostle's confinement after the death of 
 Burrus, — are all shown to be less conclusive than they may have 
 been usually deemed to be, but they are by no means disposed of. 
 To most minds, as the Bishop's own reasoning seems to admit, 
 they still seem to retain a large residue of validity. This residue 
 might of course be still further reduced by strong positive argu- 
 ments. But of the two arguments, the relation of the Epistle to 
 the earlier group of Epistles, and the tenor of the Epistles to the 
 Oolossians and Ephesians, the first seems alone to have real weight, 
 the resemblance of this Epistle to the Epistle to the Romans be- 
 ing certainly not inconsiderable. The second argument, founded 
 on the apparent relations between the subjects of the Epistles to 
 the Colossians and Ephesians and the subjects of the Pastoral 
 Epistles, is not convincing. The general characteristics of the 
 Church in a Roman colony like Philippi would seem to call for 
 such a very different tenor of letter to that of the letters addressed 
 to the Asiatic Churches, that we may just as naturally conceive 
 the former letter to have been written after the two latter, as we 
 may conceive it to have been written before. Where the subject 
 matter would thus almost certainly be different, arguments derived 
 from any supposed sequence or evolution in the Apostle's teaching 
 cannot but be deemed precarious. We thus retain the prevalent 
 opinion that this Epistle is last in the order of the Epistles of the 
 Captivity. 
 
 The circumstances that gave rise to the Epistle appear to have 
 been simply the fact of Epaphroditus having come from the 
 Church of Philippi with contributions to alleviate the necessities 
 of the captive Apostle, — contributions which, as we learn from 
 the Epistle itself (ch. iv. 15, 16; comp. 2 Cor. xi. 9), this liberal 
 Church had promptly sent on other and earlier occasions. Moved 
 by this fresh proof of love evinced by his dearly-beloved Philip- 
 pians, — his 'joy and crown' as he affectionately terms them 
 
INTRODUCTION. xix 
 
 (ch. iv. i), the Apostle avails himself of the return of Epaphrodi- 
 tus, who now after a dangerous illness (ch. ii. 27) was on his way 
 back to Philippi, to send to that Church and its chief officers 
 (ch. i. I ; see notes in he), by the hand of their own messenger, 
 his warm and affectionate thanks, mingled with personal notices 
 relative to bis own state, earnest commendations, pointed but 
 kindly warnings, and varied expressions of consolation and en- 
 couragement. No Epistle written by the inspired Apostle is 
 pervaded with a loftier tone of cheering exhortation (see notes on 
 ch. iii. i); in none is the pressing forward for 'the prize of the 
 high calling of God in Christ Jesus' set forth in language of 
 greater animation, in none is imitation of his own love of his 
 Master urged upon his converts in strains of holier incentive 
 (comp. ch. iii. 17 — 21). The supposition that there were definite 
 parties and factions in the Church of Philippi, and that the 
 Epistle was designed to expose their errors and especially those of 
 the Judaists, does not seem tenable. It is clear that Judaizing 
 teachers had intruded into the Church of Philippi (ch. iii. 2), but 
 it seems also clear that their teaching had at present met with but 
 little reception. 
 
 The contents of the Epistle are thus very diversified. After 
 a brief introduction (ch. i. i — 11), in which thanksgiving for the 
 state of the Philippian converts and prayer for them are blended 
 together (ver. 3 — 11), the Apostle alludes to his personal circum- 
 stances, his sufferings and their results, his feelings and his hopes 
 (ch. i. 1 2 — 26). He then passes to exhortation and doctrine (ch. i. 
 27 — ii. 18), the exhortations referring to life and practice (ch. i. 
 27 — 30), unity and humility (ch. ii. i — 1 1 ), salvation and a blame- 
 less course of life (ver. 12 — 18). The Apostle then alludes to in- 
 tended movements and plans (ch. ii. 19 — 30), including the mission 
 of Timothy (ver. 19 — 24), and the mission of Epaphroditus (ver. 
 25 — 30). Solemn warnings then follow; — against Judaism and 
 all trust in the flesh (ch. iii. i — 16), against earthliness and sensu- 
 ality (ver. 17 — 24), concluding with the exhortation to stand fast 
 (ch. iv. i). The Epistle closes with exhortations to individuals 
 (ver. 2, 3), and to the Church at large (ver. 4—9), with expres- 
 sions of gratitude for the contributions (ver. 10 — 20), salutations 
 (ver. 21, 22), and benediction (ver. 23). 
 
 The genuineness and authenticity of the Epistle are very 
 convincingly demonstrated by external testimony (Polycarp, ad 
 
XX INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Philipp. § 3, Irenseus, Hcer. iv. i8. 4, ed. Mass., Clem. -Alex. 
 Pcedag. I. p. 129, ed. Pott., TertuU. de Reswrr. Ga/rn. § 23), and 
 even more so by the individuality of tone and language. Doubts 
 have been urged by a few modern writers, but they have been 
 justly pronounced by all competent critics as not calling for any 
 serious attention: see Bp Lightfoot, Introduction pp. 74 sqq. 
 The same may be said of the doubts as to the unity of the 
 Epistle: see Davidson, Introd. Vol. 11. p. 387 sq. 
 
npos ^lAinnHsioYs. 
 
 Apostolic address and 
 salutation. 
 
 nAYAOS /caJ TifjLodeoi SovXoi Xpi- I. 
 CTTOV It](70v iraciv toIs ciyioii ei/ 
 
 I. XpiffToS 'lijtroC] So Lachm. (with marg.), TiseJu, Treg., Rev., Westc. 
 and Hort, on very clearly preponderating authority: Rec, 'IijaoO XptaToO. 
 
 Introductoby (ch. i. i — n). 
 Chap. i. i — 2. Opening address. 
 I . navXos Kal Ti)i.o6eos] Timothy is 
 here associated with the Apostle (as in 
 2 Gor. i. I, Col. i. i, i and 2 Thess. i. 
 1 , Philem. i),being known to, and pro- 
 bably esteemed by the Philippians 
 (Grot.), whom he had already visited, 
 apparently twice, o'nce in company 
 with St Paul (Acts xvi. i, 12), and 
 once alone, or aooompanied by Eras- 
 tuB (Acts xix. 22, comp. xx. 4). The 
 association seems similar to that 
 with Sosthenes in i Cor. i. i ; Timo- 
 thy beiBg neither the joint avithor 
 of the Epistle (Menooh.), nor the 
 'comprobator' of its contents (Zanoh.; 
 comp. notes on Gal. i. 2), nor again 
 the mere transcriber of it (comp. 
 Eom. xvi. 22), but simply the 'socius 
 salutationis,' Est. Two verses below 
 the Apostle proceeds in his own per- 
 son, and in ch. ii. 19, when Timothy 
 reappears, he speaks of him simply in 
 third person. It may be re- 
 
 marked that it is only in this Ep. , i 
 and 2 Thess., and, as we might expect, 
 Philem. , that St Paul omits his official 
 designation, d.ir6a'ToKos...Sioi. 'Irja-. Xp. 
 (Gal. i. i), or iTroaru^os Xp. 'Iricr. (re- 
 maining Epp. except Eom.). This 
 seems due, not to 'modestia' in the 
 
 K. 
 
 ^l 
 
 choice of a title common to himself 
 and Timothy (Grot.), for see i and 2 
 Cor. i. I, Col. i. i, but simply to the 
 terms of affection and familiarity on 
 which he stood with the churches 
 both of Thessalonica (i Thess. ii. 19, 
 20, iii. 6 — 10) and PhiUppi : he was 
 their Apostle, and he knew from their 
 acts (Phil. iv. 14 sq.) and their wishes 
 (i Thess. iii. 6) that they regarded 
 him as such. On the modes of salu- 
 tation adopted by St Paul, see EiLck- 
 ert on Gal. i. i, and comp. notes on 
 Eph. i. I, and on Col. i. i. 
 SovXoi X. '!.] bond-servants of Christ 
 Jesus; 'servi proprie erant qui toti 
 obstricti erant Domino inperpetuum,' 
 Zanch. ap. Pol. Syn.; so Eom. i. i, 
 and sim. Tit. i. i ; comp. Gal. i. 10, 
 and also James i. i, 2 Pet. i. i, Jude 
 I. The interpretation of Fritzsche 
 (Rom. i. i), ' Jesu Christi cultor,' soil. 
 ' homo Christianus, ' is tenable (coinp. 
 Dan. iii. 26), but, like so many of that 
 commentator's interpretations, hope- 
 lessly frigid ; comp. Gal. i. 10, where 
 to translate Xp. SovXos ote ctv ^/ir/K 
 ' ' non essem homo Christianus ' is to 
 impair all the vigour of the passage. 
 The term is used in its ethical, rather 
 than mere historical sense, ' an Apo- 
 stle,' (&c. (see Meyer on Gal. I. c. ), and 
 
 B 
 
npo2 $iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 Xpia-T$ 'ha-ov TOty ovtrtv ev ^iXiTnroit cri/v iirta-KOTroig 
 
 the gen. is strongly possessive : they 
 belonged to Christ as to a master, 
 comp. I Cor. vii. 22: His they were; 
 yea, His very marks they bore on 
 their bodies; comp. Gal. vi. 17, and 
 see notes in loc. The formula SoO' 
 \os GeoO (eomp. rm\ nDJJ Ps. oxiii. 
 I, al.) is naturally more general; 
 SoCXos XpuTToO somewhat more per- 
 sonal and special: comp. notes ore 
 Tit. i. I. irdo-iv 
 
 TOis oyCois K.T.X.] to all the Saints, 
 &c., 'to all that form part of the 
 visible and spiritual community at 
 Philippi;' 117104 being used in these 
 salutationsin its most inclusive sense: 
 see notes cm Eph. i. i. Though iiyios 
 in addresses of this kind does not ne- 
 cessarily imply any special degree of 
 moral perfection, being applied by the 
 Apostle to all his converts, except the 
 Galatians and Thessal. {ayioii in i 
 Thess. V. 2 7 being more than doubtful) , 
 yet still the remark of Olsh. (ore Rom. 
 i, 7) is probably true, that it always 
 hints at the idea of a higher moral 
 life imparted by Christ. This in the 
 present case is made stiU more appa- 
 rent by the addition iv XpiarQ): it 
 was 'in Him' {iv not being for 5ia, 
 Est., Eheinw.) , in union with Him and 
 Him alone, that the wyuornt was true 
 and real ; 0! yi,p h "S-p. 'Ir]<r. 07101 Svtus 
 elffLv, Theoph. : comp. Koch ore i 
 Thess. i. i, p. 59. The inclusive irAv- 
 res, repeated several times in this Ep., 
 ch. i. 4, 7, 8, 25, ii. 17, 26, well ex- 
 presses the warmth and expansive- 
 ness of the Apostle's love. 
 ^iVCirirois] Philippi, now Filibah or 
 Filibejih (or, according to some wri- 
 ters, an uninhabited site near Bereket- 
 li) and anciently KpriviSes (not Airos, 
 Van Heng. after Appian, Bell. Civ. 
 IV. 106, which was the ancient name 
 of its port Neapolis), was raised to a 
 
 position of importance by Philip of 
 Macedon about B.C. 356, and called 
 after his name. In later times it was 
 memorable as overlooking the scene 
 of the battle between Antony and 
 Ootavius against Brutus and Cassius, 
 when the cause of the republic was 
 finally lost (b.c. 42 ; Merivale, Hist. 
 Vol. in. p. 208): soon afterwards it 
 became a Eoman colony (Colonia Au- 
 gusta Julia Philippensis) and received 
 the 'Jus Italicum.' It was however 
 still more memorable as being the first 
 city in our continent of Europe in 
 which the Gospel was preached, Acts 
 xvi. g, 12. A few ruins are said stiU 
 to remain; see Forbiger, Alt. Geogr. 
 Vol. III. p. 1070, and the article by 
 the same author in Pauly, Encycl. Vol. 
 v.p. 1477; comp. also Leake,2ir. Greece, 
 Vol. m. p. 216. cnv kiruTK. 
 
 Kal SiaK.] together with the bishops 
 and deacons ; not merely ' in company 
 with' (/i6Td), but 'together with' 
 ('unacum,'Beza), — specially included 
 in the same friendly greeting ; comp. 
 notes ore Eph. vi. 23. Various reasons 
 have been assigned why special men- 
 tion is made of these church-officers. 
 The two most plausible are, (a) be- 
 cause there were tendencies to division 
 and disunion even among the Philip- 
 pians, which rendered a notice of 
 formally constituted church-officers 
 not unsuitable (Wiesinger, al.); (6) 
 because the 4iri<TK. and Siix. had natu- 
 rally been the principal instruments 
 in collecting the alms(Chrys.,Theoph., 
 and recently Mey., Bisping). The 
 latter seems most probable; at any 
 rate the late date of the Ep. is not 
 enough to account for the addition 
 (Alf.), nor does the position of the 
 clause warrant any contrast with ' the 
 hierarchical views ' (ib. ) of the Apost. 
 Ff. (now by no means critically cer- 
 
±. 2, 
 
 ^lUWf /caJ Kvplov lijeroO li.pi<Trov. 
 
 "StTraye^^'fS Ei;xa/)«o-T« Tw Gew MOW eTfJ Tra'o-p 3 
 
 your present fellowship in the Gospel, and my love makes me 
 confident for the future. May ye abound yet more and more. 
 
 tain), for oomp. [Ignat.] Philad. In- 
 trod.: — the shepherds are naturally 
 mentioned after the sheep. On the 
 meaning of the title of office, ivUrKO- 
 TTos, here appy. perfectly interchange- 
 able with the title of age and dignity, 
 irpecr^irepos (Acts xx. 17, 28, i Pet. 
 V. i), see notes on i Tim. iii. i, and 
 the detached note of Bp Lightfoot, 
 Comment, p. 95. On dtdKovos, see 
 notes on i Tim. iii. 8. The reading 
 iTweTurKdvois (B^D'K; many mss.) for 
 iriii iin.<TK., retained and noticed by 
 Chrys. , seems meaningless and inde- 
 fensible, and arose probably from 
 the epistolary style of later times; 
 oomp. Chrys. in loc, 
 
 2. xapis v(itv K.T.X.] On the spiri- 
 tual significance of this blended form 
 of Occidental and Oriental salutation, 
 see notes on Gal. i. 3, and on Eph. i. 
 2 : see also Koch on i Thess. p. 60, 
 and the interesting treatise of Otto, 
 Jahrb. filr Deutsche Theol. (for 1867), 
 Vol. XII. p. 678 sqq. The formula is 
 substantially the same in aU St Paul's 
 Epp. except in Col. i. 2, and i Thess. 
 i. I, where the reading is uncertain. 
 In the former, Kal Kvp. 'Ii^ir. Xp. may 
 be an insertion, and in the latter 
 (the Apostle's earliest Epistle) it is 
 doubtful whether the simple x^P^^ 
 Kal elp^vri, without any further addi- 
 tion, is not the more probable read- 
 ing, Kal Evp^ov] Scil. 
 Kal dirb Kvptov k.t.X. The Sooinian 
 interpr. Kal {varplis) Kvplov, found 
 also in Brasm. on Bom. i. 7, is 
 rendered highly improbable by the 
 use of OeoO varpis without ijiuiv in 
 2 Tim. i. 2, Tit. i. 4, most probably 
 in I Tim. i. 2, and possibly in 2 
 Thess. i. 2 : comp. i Thess. iii. 11, 2 
 
 Thess. ii. 16. 
 
 3 — II. Thanksgiving for their 
 spiritual state, and prayer for them. 
 3. Evx'"'?''*'^'* T^0«u K.T.X.] Aclosely 
 similar form of commencement occurs 
 in Rom. i. 9, i Cor. i. 4, Philem. 4; 
 compare also Eph. i. 16, Col. i. 3, 
 I Thess. i. 2. Indeed in all his Epp. 
 to churches, with the single and sad 
 exception of that to the Galatians, the 
 Apostle either returns thanks to God 
 or blesses Him for the spiritual state 
 of his converts; toCto 5^ iroiet ix 
 ToO TToXXct aifTols avvuMvai &,ya06., 
 Chrys. The present use of eixaptarav 
 ('quod pro gratias agere ante Poly- 
 bium usurpavituemo,' Lobeok) is con- 
 demned by the Atticists ; see Lobeok, 
 Phryn. p. 18, Thom. M. p. 913 (ed. 
 Bern.), Herodian, p. 400 (ed. Koch), 
 but consider Demosth. de Cor. p. 257. 
 Pollux (Onom. v. 141) admits it for 
 biSbvai. x^pt", l>'Jt condemns it for elSi- 
 vai. x^P^" ; see however Boeckh, Corp. 
 Inscr. Vol. i. p. 521, and notes on 
 Col. i. 12. T^ 0«u (lov] 
 
 So Eom. i. 8; oomp. Acts xxvii. 23, 
 06 ei/i(, (J Kal Xarpeia. ' Significat 
 Paulus quants, fiduciS, vero Deo adhsa- 
 reat. Sunt euim qui sentiunt Deum 
 miserieordem quidem esse per Chris- 
 tum Sanctis homiuibus nescio qui- 
 bus, non autem sentiunt Deum ipsis 
 esse miserieordem,' Calv. «irl 
 
 iroo-n rf K.T.X.] on the whole of my 
 remembrance of you, not ' every re- 
 membrance,' Auth. (but not the older 
 English Vv.), — a translation incom- 
 patible with the use of the art.; comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 18. 4. The prep, ivl 
 with the dat. (which we can hardly 
 say ' answers to the same prep, with 
 a gen. in Eom. i. 9, Eph. i. 16,' Alf.) 
 
 B2 
 
nP02 *IAIIinH2IOYS. 
 
 4 T? nvela vfiwv, Travrore ev iracrri dericrei fiov virep 
 
 is not here temporal (Heb. ix. ■26), 
 ocraKis ifuQv Ayo/ixijo-^WjChFys., Winer, 
 Gr. § 48. c, — a meaning favoured 
 by the incorrect interpr. of ira/rri tJ 
 /iv., but semilocal, and correctly ex- 
 presses the idea of close and complete 
 connexion, ' my giving thanks is 
 based upon my remembrance of you,' 
 ' remembrance and gratitude are 
 bound up together ' (comp. Isaiah 
 xxvi. 8, LXX), the primary idea 
 being, not addition (Alt. ), but super- 
 position, Donalds. Cratyl. § 172, 
 Gram. § 483 : see notes on ch. iii. 9, 
 and on Eph. ii. 20. In Eom. i. 9, 
 and Eph. i. 16 (see notes), where iirl 
 is used with the gen. in a very similar 
 sentence, a certain amount of tem- 
 poral force seems fairly recognisable. 
 The causal meaning, ' de eo quod vos 
 meireeordaminij'Homberg, Michael., 
 al. (comp. I Cor. i. 4), according to 
 which i/iSv is a gen. subjecti, is exe- 
 getioaUy untenable, as ver. 5 gives the 
 reason for the evx'^P'' ^^^ specifies 
 something which far more naturally 
 elicited it. iwda i(»wv] 
 
 remembrance of you, i Thess. iii. 6, 
 2 Tim. i. 3 ; not ' commemorationem 
 vestri' (Van Hengel), — a meaning 
 which, as Meyer rightly observes, it 
 only receives when associated with 
 iroteiffeai ; comp. Eom. i. 9, Eph. i. 
 16, I Thess. i. i, Philem. 4. 
 
 4. iTttVTOTe — 'iroioi))ievos] Participial 
 sentence defining and explainingmore 
 fully when the eix^-picTw k.t.X. takes 
 place, viz. on every occasion that he 
 prayed for them i the eixapurrla was 
 based on and inseparable from the 
 livela, and this thankful remembrance 
 ever found an utterance in every 
 prayer. IIoi'TOT-e is clearly not to be 
 joined with eiSxapitrTw (Wiesing.), — a 
 construction which interferes with the 
 studied and affectionate cumulation 
 
 irdvTOTe, irdffrj, iravrav (comp. 2 Cor. 
 ix. 8), in the participial clause; see 
 Col. i. 3, where it also seems best 
 (contr. Meyer, De W. ; see notes) to 
 join the adverb with the participle. 
 It may be remarked that no inference 
 can be drawn from the position of 
 iravTOTt (a favourite word with the 
 Apostle), it being as often used by 
 him after, as before the verb with 
 which it is connected: in the other 
 writers of the N. T. (except John viii. 
 29, where it is emphatic) it precedes 
 the verb. On the emphatic repeti- 
 tion, iravTore, Trdarj, irditTiav, see the 
 copious list of exx. in Lobeck, Pa- 
 ralip. p. 51 sq. virJp irdvTWv 
 
 v|i,(Sv] These words may be connected 
 either (a) with T'i]v dhiatv iroioijfiej'os, 
 Calv., De W., Alf., al., or (6) with 
 Seiyffet /lov, Auth. and all Engl. Vv., 
 Meyer, al. Both are grammatically 
 tenable; the omission of the article 
 before virip iravTuiv justifying (a), and 
 being according to rule in (6); see 
 notes on Eph. i. 1 5, and Winer, Gr. 
 § 20. 4. The latter however seems 
 much more simple and natural ; the 
 iravTOTc is defined by irda-ii Seqa-ei, 
 and Trdo-g 5. again is limited by vwip 
 IT. v/iuv, while the art. attached to 
 Siijcw (Alf. seems here to argue 
 against himself ; comp. with Meyer) 
 refers it back to the dh/ffis thus pre- 
 viously limited : so most of the an- 
 cient Vv., Syr., Clarom., Vulg., Copt. 
 Theconnexion advocated by Est. , al., 
 eixap....i''''ip irdvT. vp,., though else- 
 where adopted by St Paul (Eph. i. 
 16, comp. Eom. i. 8, i Thess. i. 2, 
 2 Thess. i. 3), seems here very unsa- 
 tisfactory. On the meaning of diij^is, 
 ' petition ' (a special form of irpoirev- 
 Xv), see notes on i Tim. ii. i. 
 |j.eri xapas] These words serve to 
 depict the feeling he bore to his chil- 
 
Travrav ufiwv fiera ^a|oa? rr/v Setja-iv iroiovfievoi, eir\ 5 
 xp Koivwvia vfiwv ei? to euayyeXiov airo rrjg ttjOcotj?? 
 
 5. T^s trpiiriis] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on pre- 
 ponderating authority: Rec, and former edd. of this Commentary, irpiirijs. 
 
 dreu in the faith at Philippi ; he 
 prays for them alway, yea, and he 
 prays with joy ; SirivfKos iii.av lie/ivii- 
 fiivos SvfirjSLas dTrainjs iiiTrlfiirXa/iai,, 
 Theodoret. 
 
 5. «7rl Tg Koiv. {I|iuv] for your 
 fellowship; M correctly marking 
 the cause for which the Apostle re- 
 turned thanks, i Cor. i. 4, 2 Cor. ix. 
 15; see Winer, Gr. § 48. c, p. 351. 
 This clause is most naturally con- 
 nected with eixap. (Beng., al., and 
 appy. Greek commentt.) not with ttjv 
 S^r/iT. TToioii/j,. (Van Heng., De W. ; 
 comp. Green, Gr. p. ip'z), as there 
 would otherwise be no specific state- 
 ment of what was the subject of the 
 Apostle's evxapio-Tla. De Wette urges 
 as an objection the use of eixo-p. M 
 in two different senses in ver. 3 and 
 5, but this may be diluted by observ- 
 ing that the first iivl is not (as with 
 De W.) temporal, hutsemilocal (ethico- 
 local), defining the subject on which 
 the thanks rest, and with which they 
 are closely united, the diff. between 
 which and the present simply ethical 
 use is but slight. Thus then ver. 4 
 marks the object on which the eixap. 
 rests, ver. 5 defines when it takes 
 place, ver. 6 why it takes place. Such 
 slightly varied and delicate uses of 
 prepp. are certainly far from being 
 unusual in the style of St Paul. 
 KoiV(i>vC<}...els TO eia^Y.] fellowship 
 toward the Gospel ; not ' in the Gos- 
 pel,' Syr., Vulg. (but not Olarom.), 
 Auth., but 'in reference to,' or per- 
 haps more strictly 'toward' (Hamm.), 
 the eh marking the object toward 
 which the Kou/oivla was directed 
 (Winer, Gr. § 49. a),— the fellowship 
 
 of faith and love which they evinced 
 toward the gospel, primarily and 
 generally in their concordant action 
 in the furtherance of it, and secon- 
 darily and specially in their contri- 
 bution and assistance to St Paul. 
 So in effect Chrys., S.pa, to awam- 
 \a/ji,p6,ve<r0ai Koivavla iffrtv els rh eiay- 
 Y^XiOK, except that he too much limits 
 the (rvvavTiKap,^. to the particular as- 
 sistance rendered to the Apostle (so 
 Theoph., Bisping), which rather ap- 
 pears involved in than directly con- 
 veyed by the expression. On the other 
 hand, the absence of the article be- 
 fore els TO eiayy., which confessedly 
 involves the close connexion of koiv. 
 and els to eiayy. (Winer, Gr. § 20. 2; 
 comp. ch. iv. 15), coupled with the 
 exegetical consideration, — that in an 
 Ep. which elsewhere so especially 
 commemorates the liberality of the 
 Philippians (ch. iv. 10, 15, 16) such 
 an allusion at the outset would be 
 both natural and probable (comp. De 
 W.), — renders it difficult to restrict 
 Koivuvla, with Mey. and Alf., to ' una- 
 nimous action' (Alf.), 'bon accord' 
 (Eilliet), and not to include that par- 
 ticular manifestation of it which so 
 esp. marked the liberal and warm- 
 hearted Christians of Philippi ; comp. 
 Wiesing. in ioc.,and Neand. Phil. p. 
 25. Koivwyta is thus absolute (Acts 
 ii. 42, Gal. ii. 9, al.) and abstract, 
 — 'fellowship,' not 'contribution' 
 (Bisp.), a translation which is defen- 
 sible (see Fritz. Rom. xv. 26, Vol. ni. 
 p. 287), but which would mar the 
 studiedly general character of the 
 expression. The interpr. of Theod. 
 (not Chrys.), al., according to which 
 
6 ripoz «i>iAinnHsioY2. 
 
 6 rinepai; ayjpi rod vvv, ireiroidMi avTO tovto, oti o 
 
 els rh eiayy. is a periphrasis for a 
 gen. {Koiyiaviav 5^ tov eiiayy. t^v trieTiv 
 ^raXeire), is grammatically untenable ; 
 oomp. Winer, Gr. § 30. 3. 5, p. 174- 
 diri TTJs vpiorr\%T\f,ipa,%\fromt}ie first 
 day in which it was preached among 
 them (o0' o5 iina-TeiaaTe, Theoph.), 
 Acts xvi. 13 sq., oomp. Col. i. 6. 
 This clause, which obviously seems 
 to be closely united with the pre- 
 ceding words, is connected by Lachm. 
 (ed. stereot., but altered in larger ed.) 
 and Meyer with ireToiBiK k.t.\., on 
 account of the absence of the article. 
 This is hyperoritioism, if not error ; 
 OTTO Tijs vpilrrrii k.t.X. is a subordinate 
 temporal definition so closely joined 
 with the KoLvuvla, as both naturally 
 and logically to dispense with the 
 article. The insertion of the article 
 would give the fact of the duration 
 of the Koivuiula a far greater promi- 
 nence than the Apostle seems to have 
 intended, and indeed would suggest 
 two moments of thought, — ' commu- 
 nionem, eamque a prima die,' c&c; 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 20. z, and notes 
 on 2 Tim. i. 13. Even independently 
 of these grammatical objections, the 
 use of iriirotda, which De Wette and 
 Van Heng. remark is usually placed 
 by St Paul first in the sentence (oh. 
 ii. 24, Eom. ii. 19, 2 Cor. ii. 3, Gal. 
 V. 10, 2 Thess. iii. 4, Philem. 21), 
 would certainly seem to suggest for 
 the part, a more prominent position 
 in the sentence. The connexion with 
 eixap. (CEcum., Beza, Beng.) seems 
 equally untenable and unsatisfactory; 
 such a temporal limitation could not 
 suitably be so distant from its finite 
 verb, nor would d?rd irpiliTiis k.t.X. be 
 in harmony with the pres. eixap. , or 
 the prior temporal clause wAvTOTe 
 K.T.X.; comp. De Wette in loc. 
 
 6. irciroiOils owTo toOto] heing 
 
 confi,dent of this very thing, viz. that 
 He, who d;c., comp. Col. iv. 8; not 
 ' confident as I am,' Alf., but with 
 the faint causal force so often couched 
 in the participle, ' seeing I am conf.;' 
 'hffic fiducia nervus est gratiarum 
 actionis,' Beng. This clause is thus, 
 grammatically considered, the causal 
 member of the sentence (Donalds. Gr. 
 § 615) appended to eCxapt-f^riv k.t.\., 
 standing in parallelism to the tem- 
 poral member, irdvroTe — Troioiifieros, 
 and certainly requires no supple- 
 mentary Kal (Tynd., Cov., c^c, Flatt, 
 al.), nor any assumption of an asyn- 
 deton (Van Heng.). The accus. airo 
 TOVTO is not governed by ireToiBilis 
 (Baphel, Wolf), but is appended to it 
 as specially marking the ' content 
 and compass of the action ' (Madvig, 
 Syni. § 27. a), or, more exactly, ' the 
 object in reference to which the action 
 extends' (Kruger, Sprachl. § 46. 4. 
 I sq.), which again is more fully de- 
 fined by the following Srt k.t.X.; 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 23. 5, where 
 several exx. of this construction are 
 cited. It is mainly confined to St 
 John and St Paul, and serves to di- 
 rect the attention somewhat specially 
 to what follows ; comp. EUendt, Lex. 
 Soph. Vol. II. p. 461. 
 6 cvap|d|ji(vos] He who began; ob- 
 viously God : see oh. ii. 13, and 
 comp. I Sam. iii. 12, Sp^o/iai, Kal iwi- 
 TeXiffia ; not ' each better one of the 
 Philippians ' (Wakef. Srjlv. Grit. Vol. 
 II. p. 98), — an interpr. to which the 
 following Ipyov dyaSov (see below) 
 need in no way compel us. The 
 verb ivapx- occurs again in connexion 
 with iiriTcX. in Gal. iii. 3, and the 
 compound irpoevapx- in 2 Cor. viii. 6 
 (where B reads ivdpx.). The com- 
 pound verb does not appear to mark 
 the ' vim divinam hominum in ani- 
 
evap^afievoi ev vfiiv epyov ayaQov eirireXivei a)(^pis 
 
 mis agentem,' Van Heng. (for see 
 Gal. I.e., and comp. Polyb. Hist. v. 
 I- 3> S)> tiut perhaps only differs from 
 &pXfa-0aL in this, that it represents 
 the action of the verb as more di- 
 rectly concentrated on the object, 
 whether (as here) expressed ; or un- 
 derstood ; see Eost u. Palm, Lex. 
 s.v. ii>, E, Vol. I. p. gi2. 
 Iv vjiiv] in you, sc. ' in animis ves- 
 tris,' comp. i Cor. xii. 6 ; not 
 'among you,' Hamm., which would 
 scarcely be in harmony with vT^p 
 iravTwv ifiwv, ver. 7. The commence- 
 ment of the good work was not 
 limited to instances among the Phi- 
 lippian Christians, but was spoken 
 generally in reference to all. 
 ^P'yov a7a6dv] a. good work, — not 
 ' the good work,' Lnth. ; not else- 
 where used in ref. to God (yet comp. 
 John X. 32), but only in ref. to man ; 
 comp. Acts ix. 36, Eom. ii. 7, 2 Cor. 
 ix. 8, Eph. ii. 10, Col. i. 10, Heb. 
 xiii. 21, al. Still there is no impro- 
 priety in the present use ; the Ipyov 
 ayadov, though here stated indefi- 
 nitely, does not appear to refer sub- 
 jectively to the good works (Syr. ; ret 
 KaTopOii/iaTa, Chrys.), the Ipyop ttjs 
 Triff-rews (i Thess. i. 3) of the Philip- 
 pians generally (Eeuss, Theol. Chret. 
 Vol. II. p. 172), but rather objectively 
 to the particular Koivuvla eh eiayy. 
 previously specified: God had vouch- 
 safed unto them, among other bless- 
 ings, that of an open hand and heart 
 (Ta&TTjv Ofily Scop7}<rdfieyos rrpi irpodv- 
 li,iav, Theod.) ; this blessing He will 
 continue. This declaration however 
 is expressed in a general form ; comp. 
 Eom. ii. 7. eiriTeX^o-Ei] will 
 
 accomplish, will perfect it, not merely 
 'wiU perform it,' Auth., but 'will 
 bring it to a complete and perfect 
 end,' 'explebit,' Syr.; see notes on 
 
 Gal. iii. 3. With regard to the dog- 
 matical application of the words, 
 which, owing to their probable spe- 
 cific reference, cannot safely be press- 
 ed, it seems enough to say with 
 Theoph., taro rdv irapeXB&vrav xal 
 Tepl tQv fievovTUP ffToxajTeTai : the in- 
 ference is justly drawn, that God who 
 has thus far blessed them with His 
 grace will also bless them with the 
 gift of perseverance ; comp. i Cor. i. 
 8 ; ' Gottes Art ist es ja nicht, etwas 
 halb zu thun,' Neand. The charge 
 of semi-Pelagianism brought against 
 Ohrysostom in loc. has been satisfac- 
 torily disproved by Justiniani, who 
 thus perspicuously sums up that great 
 commentator's doctrinal statements ; 
 'vult Chrysostomus Deum et incipere 
 et perficere : illud excitantis, hoc ad- 
 juvantis est gratias; ilia liberi arbitrii 
 conatum prsevertit, hsec comitatur.' 
 On the doctrine of Perseverance ge- 
 nerally, see the clear statements of 
 Bbrard, Chnstliche Dogmatik, § 513, 
 5 14, Vol. II. pp. 534—549. The con- 
 clusions arrived at are thus stated; 
 'Perseverantia est effeetus sanctifica- 
 tionis. Sanctifioatio est conditio per- 
 severantise. Datur apostasia regeni- 
 torum, uempe si in sanctificatione 
 inertes sunt,' p. 548; comp. also some 
 admirable comments of Jackson, 
 Greed, x. 37. 4 sq. 
 
 axpis ii|iepas 'It)cr. Xp.] unto, or up 
 to, the day of Jesus Ghrist, scil, dxpt 
 Trjs irapovo'las tov Kvpiov, Theoph. 
 ThatSt Paul in these words ' assumes 
 the nearness of the coming of the 
 Lord' (Alf.) cannot be positively as- 
 serted. It is certainly evasive to 
 refer this to future generations (rots 
 i^ ip,i2v, Theoph.), but it may be 
 fairly said that St Paul is here using 
 language which has not so much a 
 mere historical, as a general andpmc- 
 
riP02 ^lAinnHsioYs. 
 
 7 fiixepa^ 'Ua-oxi Xpicrrov- KaOooi icrriv SUatov ifJi.o\ toSto 
 (^povelv virep ttoivtwv vfJiwv, Sia to ex^iv i«e ev t^ KapSla 
 
 Heal reference : the day of Christ, 
 whether far off or near, is the decisive 
 day to each individual ; it is practi- 
 cally coincident with the day of his 
 death, and becomes, when addressed 
 to the individual, an exaltation and 
 ampUfication of that term. Death in- 
 deed, as has been well remarked by 
 Bishop Eeynolds, is dwelt upon but 
 little in the N.T., it is to the resur- 
 rection and to the day of Christ that 
 the eyes of the believer are directed ; 
 'semper ad beatam resurrectionem, 
 tanquam ad soopum, referendi sunt 
 ocvdi,' Calv. To maintain then that 
 this is Tiot the sense in which the 
 Apostle wrote the words (Alf.) seems 
 here unduly and indemonstrably ex- 
 clusive. See notes on i Tim. vi. 14, 
 and compare (with caution) Usteri, 
 Lehrb. u. 2. 4. B, p. 326 sq. On dxpi- 
 and liixph see notes on 2 Tim. ii. 9. 
 The reading 'Iijff. Xp. is doubtful; the 
 addition of X to APGK; al., may 
 perhaps warrant our retention (with 
 Iiec.,Rev.,Westc. and Hart, — but with 
 marg.) of the above order. 
 
 7. KaSios K.T.X.] even as: expla- 
 natory statement of the reason why 
 such a confidence is justly felt ; comp. 
 I Cor. i. 6, Eph. i. 4. On the nature 
 of this particle, see notes on Gal. 
 iii. 6, and on Eph. I. c. 
 SCKaiov] right, meet, soil, 'secun- 
 dum legem caritatis,' Van Hengel ; 
 it is in accordance with the genuine 
 nature of my love (i Cor. xiii. 7) to 
 entertain such a confident hope : 
 comp. Acts iv. 19, Eph. vi. i, 2 Pet. 
 i. 13. Alford (with Meyer and De W.) 
 remarks that the two classical con- 
 structions are SUaiiiv iariv i/ii toOto 
 (pp. (Herod, i. 39), and SIkmos elfu 
 TouTO (pp. (Herod, i. 32). The last 
 construction is the most idiomatic 
 
 (comp. Kriiger, Spraehl. § 55. 3. 10), 
 and perhaps the most usual in the 
 best Greek, but there is nothing un- 
 classical in the present usage; comp. 
 Plato, Republ. i. p. 334 °> SIkmov 
 Tore ToijTOis rois Tovripois li^cXeiv. 
 toCto <)>pov£iv] to think this, Auth., 
 'hoc sentire,' Vulg., Syr.; i.e. to en- 
 tertain this confidence : 'tppovelv hie 
 non dicitur de animi affectu sed de 
 mentis judicio,' Beza ; comp. Gal, v. 
 10. To refer rodro to the prayer in 
 ver. 4, 'hoc curare pro vobis,' Wolf 
 (comp. Conyb.), or to the expectation 
 in ver. 6, 'hoc omnibus vobis ap- 
 petere, scil. omni curS, et precibus' 
 (Van Heng.), is unsatisfactory, and 
 is certainly not required by iirip, 
 which occurs several times in the 
 N.T. (2 Cor. i. 6, 8; 2 Thess. ii. 1, 
 al.) in a, sense but little different 
 from that of irepl; see Winer, Gr. 
 § 47. 1. The probable distinction, — 
 'Trepl Bolam mentis ciroumspectio- 
 nem, iwkp simul animi propensionem 
 significat ' (Weber, Demosth. p. 130), 
 is perfectly recognisable in the pre- 
 sent case, but cannot be expressed 
 without a periphrasis, e.g. 'to enter- 
 tain this favourable opinion about 
 you,' 'ut ita de vobis sentiam et 
 confidam,' Est. On the uses of iieip 
 and irepl, see notes on Gal. i. 4, and 
 on (^poj'Eij', see Beck, SceJcnJ. iii. 19, p. 
 61 sq. Sia Ti t%o.v k.t.X.] because 
 
 I have you in my heart, 'quod in 
 corde meopositiestis' Syr.; not 'be- 
 cause you have me,' Eosenm., Conyb.: 
 the Apostle is throughout clearly the 
 subject and agent (comp. ver. 8) ; the 
 depth of his love warrants the fulness 
 of his confidence. In all cases the 
 context, not the mere position of the 
 accusatives, will be the surest guide; 
 comp. John i. 49 : see also Winer, 
 
I. 7. 
 
 vfia^, ev re tois Seo'fxoti fjLOu Ka) ev t^ airoXoylif 
 Ka< fJe/Satwarei tov evayyeXioii avvKoivwvoii fiov t^<; 
 
 7. in Trj 0x0X07/51] So [Lachm.], Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, 
 on preponderating authority: jRec. omits ^. 
 
 Gi: § 44. 6. The translation of Beza, 
 ' in animo tenere '=' quasi insoulptum 
 habere memorise ' (aa-^earov Tepitp^poj 
 rijv nvTiiJuriv , Theod. ; see esp. Justin 
 in toe), is opposed both to the similar 
 afEeetionate expressions, 2 Cor. iii. i, 
 yii. 3, and to the prevailing use of 
 KapSia (comp. Beck, Bibl. Seelenl. 
 in. 24, p. 89 sq., notes on ch. iy. 7, 
 and on i Tim. i. 5) in the N.T. It is 
 the fervent love of the Apostle that 
 is expressed; and in this his re- 
 membrance of them is necessarily in- 
 volved; comp. Chrys. in loc. 
 8v Tt Tots Sto-nois K.T.X.] It is doubt- 
 ful whether these words are to be 
 connected with the preceding Sua, to 
 ^X*'" K.T.X. (Chrys., Theoph.), or 
 with the succeeding (rvvKoipavoiis p.ov 
 K.T.X. (Calvin, Auth., Lachm., Tisch.). 
 Neander and the majority of modern 
 commentators adopt the former ; the 
 latter however seems more simple 
 and natural. The Apostle had his 
 confidence because he cherished them 
 in his heart ; and he cherished them 
 because their liberality showed that 
 whether in his sufferings (Sea-fioLs) 
 which they alleviated, or in his exer- 
 tions for the Gospel {t§ awoK. Kal 
 ^ep.) with which they sympathised, 
 they all were bound up with him in 
 the strictest spiritual fellowship. On 
 re... Kal, which here serve to unite 
 two otherwise separate and distinct 
 notions, slightly enhancing the latter, 
 see Hartung, Partik. Vol. 11. p. 98, 
 and comp. notes on i Tivi. iv. 10. 
 Iv Tt] diroXoyC9i k.t.X.] in my defence 
 of and confirmation of the Gospel. 
 These words have been somewhat per- 
 versely interpreted. 'ATroXo-yia and 
 
 pe^aliiiins are certainly not synony- 
 mous (Eheinw.), — nor do they form 
 an hendiadys, so. dTroX. ds Pe|3. 
 (Heinr.; comp. Syr., 'defensionequse 
 est in veritatem [confirmationem] 
 evangelii'), — nor can rrj diroX. be 
 dissociated from tou €iayy. (Chrys.), 
 both being under the vinculum of a 
 common article (Green, Gr. -p. 211), 
 — nor finally does it seem necessary 
 to restrict the clause to the judicial 
 process which resulted in the A- 
 postle's imprisonment (Van Heng.). 
 It seems more natural to ,give both 
 words their widest reference ; to un- 
 derstand by dwo'Koyli} St Paul's de- 
 fence of the Gospel, whether before 
 his heathen judges (comp. 2 Tim. iv. 
 16) or his Jewish opponents (comp. 
 Phil. i. 16, 17), and by /3e;8aiii(rci his 
 confirmation and establishment of 
 its truth [Heb. vi. 16], — not by his 
 sufferings (Chrys., Theod.), but by 
 his teaching and preaching among 
 his own followers and those who 
 resorted to him (comp. Acts xxviii. 
 ■23, 30) ; see the good note of Wiese- 
 ler, Ghronol. p. 429, 430. 
 oT)VKoivwvovs K.T.X.] Seeing that both 
 in my defence of, and, &o. ye are all 
 partakers with me of my grace; 'ut 
 qui omnes meoum consortes estis 
 gratise,' Schmid; comp. Hamm., and 
 Scholef. Hints, -p. 104. The preceding 
 tjfias, further characterised as §v re — 
 o-vcKoic, is rhetorically repeated (see 
 Bernhardy, Synt. vi. 4, p. 275 sq.) to 
 support iravras ; the whole clause 
 serving to explain the reason for the 
 ^eiv iv Tji KapSlq.. It is doubtful 
 whether /iou is to be connected (a) 
 with TTii xapiTos (comp. ClarOm., 
 
10 
 
 npos $iAinnH2ioYs. 
 
 8 j^apiTOi TravTai vfioii ovras. ft-aprvs yap fiov 6 Geo?, 
 wf i-irnrodw iravrai v/nas iv a-irXdyx^i'oit Kpia-rov 
 
 8. ydp iiov] So [Lachm.], Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on pre- 
 ponderating authority : Rec. [and so former add. of this Commentary] adds 
 k(jTlv. XpuTToS 'IijffoC] So all the above-cited edd., on very clearly pre- 
 
 ponderating authority. 
 
 Vulg.), the pronoun being placed out 
 of its order (Winer, Gr. § 22. 7. 
 note I, p. 140) to mark the reference 
 of the prep, in <twkow., or (6) with 
 avvKoivuvovs as a second genitive (Syr., 
 Copt.). As awKoiv. is found in the 
 N.T. both with persons (i Cor. ix. 23) 
 and things (Rom. xi. 17), the context 
 alone must decide: this, in conse- 
 quence of the meaning assigned be- 
 low to xapis, seems in favour of (6); 
 comp. ch. ii. 30: so Hammond, De 
 Wette. 
 
 TTJs x»P'''''°s] The reference of this 
 subst. has been differently explained : 
 the Greek commentators refer it 
 more specifically ' to the grace of 
 suffering,' comp. ver, 29; Eosenm., 
 al., to the 'munus apostolicum,' 
 scil. 'ye are all assistants to me in 
 my duty,' Storr, Peile; others again 
 to the 'evangelii donatio,' comp. Van 
 Heng. ; others to grace in its widest 
 acceptation, Eph. ii. 8, Col, i. 6 (De 
 W., Alf.). Of these the first is too 
 restrictive, the others, esp. the last, 
 too vague. The art. seems to mark 
 the x"/"' S'S that vouchsafed in both 
 the cases previously contemplated, 
 sufferings for (ver. 29), and exertions 
 in behalf of the Gospel. The trans- 
 lation 'gaudii,' Clarom., Vulg., Am- 
 brst., al., is apparently due to the 
 reading xapas, though no MSS. have 
 been adduced in which that variation 
 is found. 
 
 8. (idprvs 7dp K.T.X.] For God is 
 my witness; earnest confirmation of 
 the foregoing verse, more especially 
 of St4 7-i Ix^Lv fic iv rf KapSlt/. vfias. 
 
 Chrys. well says, o6x ws dviffToi/ievos 
 imprvpa KoXet rbv Geoc, aKK tV iroW'ris 
 diadia-eus. The same solemn form 
 of words (but with iffrlv) occurs Bom. 
 i. 9 : comp. 2 Cor. i. 23, i Thess. ii. 
 5. 10. 
 
 «s eirnroBm] how I long after; comp. 
 ch. ii. 26, Eom. i. 11, 2 Cor. ix. 14, i 
 Thess. iii: 6, 2 Tim. i. 4. The force 
 of iirl in this compound does not 
 mark intension ('vehementer desi- 
 dero,' Van Heng. ; 'expetam,' Beza), 
 but, as in inSvimv and similar words, 
 the direction of the tcoBos ; see notes 
 on 2 Tim. i. 4, and Fritz. Rom. i. 9, 
 Vol. I. p. 31. Again, it seems quite 
 unnecessary with Van Heng. to re- 
 strict the TToSos to 'vestrse consuetu- 
 dinis desiderium;' the longing and 
 yearning of the Apostle was for 
 something more than mere earthly 
 reunion, it was for their eternal 
 welfare and blessedness, and the re- 
 alization, in its highest form, of the 
 xdpis of which they were now avv- 
 KoivavoL. The context seems clearly 
 to decide that us here, and probably 
 also in Eom. i, 9, is not 'quod' 
 (Eosenm., De W.) but 'quomodo' 
 (Syr.jCopt.), scil. 'quantopere,' 'quam 
 propense,' Corn, a Lap. ; compare 
 Chrys., oi5 Svywrhv clirelv irws iin- 
 
 Iv o-irXctYXvois X. '!.] This forci- 
 ble expression must not be under- 
 stood merely as qualitative, — 'op- 
 ponit Christi viscera carnali affectui,' 
 Calv., but as semilocal, ' in the bowels 
 of Christ,' in the bowels of Him with 
 whom the Apostle's very being was 
 
I. 8, 9. 
 
 11 
 
 Iij(rov, KaJ TOVTO ir poaevy^Ofiat, Iva ^ ayair^ vfiwv 9 
 cTt fiaWov Kot fxaXXov irepitT<revri iv e-Kiyvuxrei Koi 
 
 so imited (Gal. ii. 20), that Christ's 
 heart had, as it were, become his, 
 and beat in his bosom : oomp. Meyer 
 in loc, who has well maintained this 
 more deep and spiritual interpreta- 
 tion. 'E;' thus retains its natural 
 and usual force (contr. Eilliet), and 
 the gen. is not the gen. auctoris or 
 onginis (Hartung, Casus, p. 17), as 
 appy. Chrys., cnrXayx^^ 7^P avrrj \ij 
 ffxrf^iveia 17 Karh. Xp.] Ti^iXv xap/^erat, 
 but simply possessiwe. We can hardly 
 term this use of ffifKayx^"- (CPOl) 
 completely Hebraistic, as a, similar 
 use is sufficiently common in classical 
 Greek (see exx. in Kost u. Palm, Lex. 
 8. v.. Vol. II. p. 1504) ; the verb 
 <rT\ayxvli;oiMt however, and the ad- 
 jectives iroMffirXayxi'OS and eS<nr\ay- 
 Xvos (when not in its medical sense, 
 Hippocr. p. 89) , are Hellenistic, while, 
 on the contrary, the subst. eu(nrXay- 
 Xvla occurs in Eurip. Rhes. 192. For 
 a list of Hebraisms of the N.T. 
 judiciously classified, see Winer, Gr. 
 § 3, where will be found a very full 
 discussion of the whole subject. 
 
 9. Kal TOVTO irpoo-.] Et hoc pre- 
 cor, but not 'propterea precor,' as 
 Wolf, 2 : the koi with its simple copu- 
 lative force introduces the Apostle's 
 prayer (ver. 9 — 1 1) alluded to in verse 
 4, while the toCto prepares the reader 
 for the statement of its contents, ' and 
 this which follows is what I pray.' 
 The Kal (as Meyer observes) thus 
 coalesces more with tovto than wpoir- 
 ci5xoM**i» ^^^ ^**^ Trpoff. TOVTO J but Kal 
 TOVTO Trpoff. To connect the clause 
 closely with what precedes (Eilliet) 
 destroys all the force of ver. 8. 
 tva] the particle has here what has 
 been called its secondary telic force 
 (see notes on Eph. i. 17); i.e. it does 
 not directly indicate the purpose of 
 
 the prayer, but blends with it also 
 its subject and purport : Theodorus in 
 loc. paraphrases it by a simple infin. 
 It may be again remarked that this 
 secondary and blended use (esp. after 
 verbs of prayer), though not recog- 
 nized by Meyer and Fritzsohe, cannot 
 be safely denied in the N. T.: there 
 are numerous passages (setting aside 
 the disputed use after a prophecy) in 
 which the full telic force (' in order 
 that') cannot be sustained in transla- 
 tion without artifice or circumlocu- 
 tion ; e.g. comp. Meyer on John xv. 8. 
 We may observe further, that this 
 use of ha is not confined to the N. 
 T. : it was certainly common in Hel- 
 lenistic Greek (see exx. in Winer, Gr, 
 § 44. 8), and in modern Greek, under 
 the form vd, with the subj., it lapses 
 (after a large class of verbs) into a 
 mere periphrasis of the infinitive; 
 see Corpe, Gramvi. pp. 129, 130. 
 11 oYdirT) v|j^v] your love, not 'to- 
 ward the Apostle' (Chrys.), — which 
 had been so abundantly shown as to 
 leave a prayer for its increase almost 
 unnecessary ; nor again ' toward God ' 
 (Just.), nor even 'towards one ano- 
 ther,' Meyer, Alf. (Theodorus unites 
 the two: comp. Wiesing.), both of 
 which seem unnecessarily restrictive. 
 It is rather 'towards all' (comp. De 
 W.), — a love which, already shown 
 in and forming an element of their 
 Koiviavla, ver. 4 (not identical with it, 
 AH.), the Apostle prays may still 
 more and more increase, not so much 
 per se, as in the special elements of 
 Jfnowledge and moral perception. Ex- 
 amples of the very intelligible /iaWov 
 Kal fiSXKov wUl be found in Kypke, 
 Ohs. Vol. II. p. 307. 
 x€pio-o-eii^ iv k.t.X.] may abound in 
 knowledge and all (every form of) per- 
 
12 
 
 nP02 $iAinnH2roY2. 
 
 lO iraa-tj aia-O^a-ei, ek to SoKifxa^eiv vfiai ra Siacpipovra, 
 
 ception,not ' in all kn. and perception,' 
 Luther, -an attraction for which there 
 seems to be no authority. The exact 
 force of iv is somewhat doubtful ; it 
 can scarcely (a) approximate in mean- 
 ing to /ierd, Chrys. (who however fluc- 
 tuates between this prep, and i^), 
 Corn, a Lap., al. ; for this use, though 
 grammatically defensible (comp. exx. 
 in Green, Gr. p. 289), is not exegeti- 
 oally satisfactory, as ver. 10 shows 
 that it is not to dydini together xoith 
 iTlyv. and oiirB., but to iirlyv. and 
 ataO. more especially, as insphering 
 and defining that love, that attention 
 is directed ; nor (6) does it exactly de- 
 note .the manner of the increase (De 
 W.), as this again seems to give too 
 little prominence to iirh/v. and cdaB. ; 
 nor (c) is iv here instrumental, Flatt, 
 Heinr., — as love could hardly be said 
 to increase by the agency of know- 
 Jedge. The prep, is thus not simply 
 equivalent to /ierd, Kard, or Sid {much 
 less to eis, comp. Winer, Gr. § 50. 5, 
 p. 370), but with its usual force marks 
 the sphere, elements, or particulars, in 
 which the increase was to take place ; 
 comp. Winer, G?'.§ 48. a. 3, p. 345. It 
 was not for an increase of their love 
 absolutely that the Apostle prayed, 
 for love might become the sport of 
 every impulse (comp. Wiesing.), but it 
 was for its increase in the important 
 particulars, a sound knowledge of the 
 truth and a right spiritual perception, 
 of both of which it was to have still 
 more and more. Hcpio-ireieiv is thus 
 not absolute, but closely in union with 
 ^i- and its dat., and may be considered 
 generally and practically as identical 
 with abundare and an abl., the sub- 
 stantives defining the elements and 
 items in which the increase is realized ; 
 comp. 2 Cor. viii. 7, Col. ii. 7, al. 
 Lachm. (Treg. marg. Westc. and 
 
 Hort, marg.) reads iripiaaeiari with 
 BDE ; al., but as DE adopt the aor, 
 in ver. 26 without critical support, 
 their reading is here suspicious. 
 e'iri7V<4cr«i...al(r8ii<r£i] These two sub- 
 stantives may be thus distinguished ; 
 iwiyvoicns, ' acourata cognitio ' (see 
 notes on Eph. i. 17), denotes a sound 
 knowledge of theoretical and prac- 
 tical truth (Mey.), rrjc TpoaiiKovaav 
 yvSciv t£v els dperiii' (rvvreivdnTUv, 
 Theodoras. AStrBriais , 'sensus'(Vulg., 
 Clarom.), is more generic, but here, 
 as the context implies, must be lim- 
 ited to right spiritual discernment 
 {'intelligentia spiritus,' Syr.), — a sen- 
 sitively correct moral perception {v6- 
 Tjffis, Hesyoh.) of the true riature, good 
 or bad, of each circumstance, case, or 
 object, which experience may pre- 
 sent ; comp. Prov. i. 4, where it is in 
 connexion with Ivi/oia, and Exod. 
 xxviii. 3, where it is joined with ffo- 
 tfila. It only occurs here in the N. 
 T.; the instrumental derivative ai- 
 aS-qTripiov ('organ of feeling,' d'c.) is 
 found in Heb. v. 14; comp. Jer. iv. 
 19. The adj. vdcri is not intensive 
 ('plena et solida,' Calv.), but, as ap- 
 parently always in St Paul's Epp., 
 extensive, ' every form of ; ' comp. 
 notes on Eph. i. 8. 
 
 10. els TO SoKipLd^eiv k.t.X.] fm' 
 you to prove things that are excellent; 
 purpose of the iripiaa. iv iinyv. Koi 
 alad. (not result, — a meaning gram- 
 matically admissible, but here in- 
 applicable; comp. Winer, Gr. § 44. 
 6, note), to which the further and 
 final purpose fra ^re k.t.\. is append- 
 ed in the next clause. The words SoK. 
 rk dm<p. both here and Eom. ii. 18 
 may correctly receive two, if not three 
 different interpretations, varying with 
 the meanings given to Sia^iipovTo., and 
 the shade of meaning assigned to So- 
 
I. lO. 
 
 13 
 
 1m >jTe elXtKpiveii kqi airpoaKOwoi eh f,fiepav Xpiarrov, 
 
 KitiA^av. Thus they may imply either 
 (a) to prove (distinguish between) 
 things that are different, i.e. to diseri- ■ 
 minate (SoKi/idfeii' Kal Siaxplveiv, Ar- 
 rian, Epict. i. 20), — whether simply 
 between what is right and wrong 
 (Theoph. on Mom. ii. 18, De W.), or 
 between different degrees of good and 
 their contraries {elS4vai rha tj.ii> KaXA, 
 Tiva Si KpeiTTom, Hva Sk iravravaai. 
 duKpopdv irpbs SXK'qXa ^xoora, Theod.); 
 so Beza, Van Heng., Alf., al. ; {!>{) 
 to approve things that are excellent, 
 Auth., 'ut probetis potiora,' Vulg., 
 TO Siatpipovra being used in the same 
 sense as in Matth. x. 31, xii. 12, Luke 
 xii. 7, 24, I Cor. XV. 41, Gal. iv. i 
 (Mey. adds Xen. Hier. i. 3, ri SLa<p., 
 Dio Cass. xLtv. 25), and SoKina^cLv in 
 its derivative sense, oomp. Eom. xiv. 
 22, I Cor. xvi. 3, and exx. in Eost u. 
 Palm,i«a;.s.v.; soMey.,al.; or lastly 
 (62) to prove, bring to the test, things 
 that are excellent, Syr. [ut discernatis 
 prasstantia],iEth. [utperpendatis qu£B 
 prjestant], the primary meaning of Sok. 
 being a little more exactly preserved ; 
 see Eom. xii. 2, Bph. v. 10. Bxegeti- 
 eal considerations must alone decide ; 
 these seem slightly in favour of the 
 meaning of dunpipovra ('prsestabilia, 
 in bonis optima,' Beng.) adopted in 
 (61) and (63), — the prayer for the in- 
 crease of love being more naturally 
 realized in proving or approving what 
 is excellent, what is really worthy of 
 love, than in merely discriminating be- 
 .tween what is different. Between (bj) 
 and (62) the preceding ala-e-^iret and 
 the prevailing lexical meaning of doK. 
 decide us in favour of the latter; so 
 Theoph. (to crviupipov SoKijx&aai koX 
 iinyvwvai. rlvas fiiv xpri ^CKetv koL tI- 
 pas li-fj), and appy. Chrys., Beng. ('ex- 
 plorareei amplecti'), al., who appear 
 correctly to hold to the more exact 
 
 meaning of SoKi/iAt^iv : comp. notes on 
 liph. V. 10. elXiKpiveis] 
 
 2)ure, 2 Pet. iii. i; oomp. i Cor. v. 
 8, 2 Cor. i. 12, ii. 17. The derivation 
 of this adj., though it is a word not 
 uncommon either in earlier or later 
 Greek, is somewhat doubtful. The 
 most probable is that adopted by 
 Stallbaum (Plato, Phced. p. 77 a), who 
 derives it from el\os [he must mean 
 dSXi}] and Kptvoi, with reference to a 
 root eiXeiv. , As however the primary 
 meaning of this root is not quite cer- 
 tain, elXiKp. may refer either to ' what 
 is parcelled off by itself ' (gregatim), 
 with reference to eV^r) (see esp. Butt- 
 mann, Lexil. § 44, and comp. Eost u. 
 Palm, Lex, s. v.), or more probably 
 'volubili agitatione secretum,' with 
 ref. to the meaning volvere, which has 
 recently been indicated as the primary 
 meaning of elXew; see esp. PMlol. 
 Museum, Vol. i. p. 405 sq., and oomp. 
 Trench, Synon. Part 11. § 35 . So appy. 
 Hesych., eiXcKpivh' rd KaBapbv Kal d/u- 
 7^s iripov ; see Plutarch, Qucest. Bom. 
 § 26, elXiKpivh Kal d/Myh; ib. Is. et 
 Osir. § 54, Kadapis oid' elXiKpirfis, and 
 esp. § 61, where ra cCXiKpivf; and rk 
 /juktA, are opposed to each other ; comp. 
 also Max. Tyr. Diss. 31. The more 
 usual but less probable derivation is 
 from etXni, 'splendor' ['ba-, cogn. with 
 2EA,' Benfey, Wurzellex. Vol. i. p. 
 460], in which case the rough breath- 
 ing would be more suitable; comp. 
 Schneider on Plato, Bep. 11. p. 123. 
 Several exx. of the use of elXiKp. wUl 
 be found in Loesner, Obs. p. 350, 
 Eypke, Obs. Vol. 11. p. 308, and 
 Eisner, Obs. Vol.11, p. 10, of which the 
 most pertinent are those cited above. 
 dirpoo-Koiroi] without offence, stum- 
 bling; 'inoffensooursu,' Beza; intran- 
 sitively as in Acts xxiv. 16, Hesych. 
 d,(TKavS6,Xi,(TTov ; comp. Suieer, Theshur, 
 
14 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 II ireir\.tipte/i,evoi Kupirov StKatocrvvtii rbv Sta 'Ir/crov Apt- 
 CTTOV, eh So^av kui eiraivov Qeov. 
 
 II. Kapvbv SiK. t6v] So Lachm. (placing, however, rbv in brackets), 
 Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hwt, on very greatly preponderating 
 authority: Rec, Kapirdv Sj/c. tCov. 
 
 s.v. Vol. I. p. 495. Chrys. and others 
 give an active meaning, as in i Cor. a. 
 32, 'givingno offence,' eiXiKp. marking 
 their relation to God, &Tp6<rK. their 
 relation to men. Thishardly accords 
 with the context, in which their in- 
 ward state and relations to God form 
 the sole subject of the prayer. It will 
 behest then, in spite of i Cor. I.e., to 
 maintain the intrans. meaning; so 
 appy. Vulg., Syr., Copt. ; but this is 
 a case in which the Vv. scarcely give 
 a definite opinion. els ijii^pav 
 
 Xp.] against the day of Christ; 'in 
 diem Christi,' Vulg., scil. tva. rbre ei- 
 peSTJre Kaffapol, Chrys.; — not 'till the 
 day of Chr.,' Auth. (comp. Beza), 
 which would rather have been ex- 
 pressed by axpts Tjiiipas, as in ver. 6. 
 The preposition has here not its tem- 
 poral, but its ethical force ; comp. oh. 
 ii. 16, Gal. iii. 23, Eph. iv. 30, and 
 notes on 2 Tim. i. 12. On the ex- 
 pression iifiipa Xp. see the notes on 
 ver. 6. 
 
 II. ireirXripMiiivoi k.t.X.] being 
 filled with the fruit of righteousness ; 
 modal clause defining more fully 
 el\i.Kp. Kal airpba-K. , and specifying not 
 only on the negative but also ou the 
 positive side the fuDest and eom- 
 pletest Christian development. The 
 accus. Kaprbv is that ' of the re- 
 moter object,' marking that in which 
 the action of the verb has its realiza- 
 tion ; so Col. i. 9, TrXTipaBrjre rijv iirl- 
 yvtiiaiv Tov BeMjixaTos oi)toC; comp. 
 Hartung, Casus, p. 62 sq. and notes 
 on I Tim. vi. 5, where this construc- 
 tion is discussed. If we compare Eom. 
 XV. 14, veirKripiiinhioi wdaris yvdi(reus, 
 we may recognize the primary dis- 
 
 tinction between the cases : the gen., 
 the ' whence-case, ' marks the absolute 
 material out of which the fulness was 
 realized (comp. Kriiger, SpracH. § 47. 
 16); the aceus., the ' whither-case,' 
 the object towards which and along 
 which the action tended, and, as it 
 were, in the domain of which the ful- 
 ness was evinced ; see Scheuerlein, 
 Synt. § 9. I, p. 63. The gen. dtxaio- 
 aivris is the gen. originis, that from 
 which the Kapirbs emanates (Hartung, 
 Casus, p. 63), or perhaps more strictly 
 that of theoriginating cause (Scheuerl. 
 SynL^iy. i,p. 125), — a Ko/jxis which 
 is the production of SiKaioo-iJcij ; comp. 
 Gali V. 22, Eph. V. 9, James iii. 18, 
 and on the meaning of Kapirbs, notes 
 on Gal. I.e. 
 
 With regard to the strict meaning of 
 diKaio(r6v7j it maybe briefly remarked 
 that we must in all cases be guided 
 by the context : here verse 10 and 
 the apparent emphasis on Kaprbv 
 point to 81K. as a moral habitus (comp. 
 Chrys. ), as in Eom. vi. 13, Eph. v. 9, 
 al., — not 'justification' proper (Eil- 
 liet), but the righteousness which re-' 
 suits from it and is evinced in good 
 works ; so Calv., Mey., De W. On the 
 distinction between the 'righteous- 
 ness of sanctification' and the 'right- 
 eousness of justification,' see esp. the 
 admirable sermon of Hooker, § 5, Vol. 
 III. p. 6n (ed. Keble), and ou the 
 doctrine of justification generally, the 
 short but comprehensive treatise of 
 Waterland, Works, Vol. vi. pp. i — 38. 
 tJv Btd "I. X. serves to specify the 
 Kapirbv as coming only and solely 
 through Christ; comp. notes on 2 Tim. 
 i. 13. Thisfruit is a communication of 
 
I. II, 12. 
 
 15 
 
 xivmtTKeiv Se vfias ^ovKofnat, aSeXcpoi, on ra /cot 13 
 SgsV^e' fathered ^'z*^ f^^Wov «y irpoKOTrhv ToS evayyeXiou 
 
 the Gospel, for Christ Is preached by all. I Indeed would 
 fain depart to Christ, but for your sake I shall remain. 
 
 the life of Clirist to His own (Wie- 
 sing.) ; it results from ' the pure grace 
 of Christ our Lord whereby we were in 
 Him [by the working of the Spirit He 
 sent] made to do those good works 
 that God had appointed for us to walk 
 in,' King Edw. VI. Catech., cited by 
 Waterl. Justif. Vol. vi. p. ,3 1 . els 
 
 So^av Kol 2ir. 0Eov] to the glory and 
 praise of God ; the glory and praise 
 of God is the ' finis primarius ' of the 
 weirKyifmtrBai.. Hence ' ad gloriam, ' 
 Beza, is more exact than ' in gloriam,' 
 Vulg., Clarom. ; see notes on Eph. i. 6. 
 Aijo is here, as Meyer pertinently re- 
 marks, the 'majesty' of Godiperse,lirai.- 
 Kos the ' praise and glorification ' of the 
 same; comp.Eph.i.6, 12, 14, iPet.i. 7. 
 Pebsonaij circumstances 
 (oh. i. 12 — 26). 
 12 — 26. The Apostle's sufferings and 
 their results ; his feelings and hopes. 
 riv<aa-K€iv 8^ K.T.X.] Now I loould 
 have you know; the transitional 5^ 
 (Hartung, Partik. U, 2, 3, Vol. i. 
 p. 165) introduces the fresh subject 
 of the Apostle's present condition at 
 Eome, his hopes and fears; comp. 
 Eom. i. 13, I Cor. xii. i, i Thess. iv. 
 13, al. It seems rather far-fetched 
 in Meyer, followed by Alf., to refer 
 yiViiiTK. to iv iinyv, above, 'and as 
 part of this knowledge I would have 
 you know,' <Sec. There seems to be no 
 peculiar emphasis in yiviSisKeiv; the 
 order is the natural one (oomp. Jude 
 5)whenj3oi}Xo/iaiisunemphatic; con- 
 trast I Tim. ii. 8, v. 14, al. Though 
 few minor points deserve more atten- 
 tion in the study of the N. T. than the 
 collocation of words, we must stiU be 
 careful not to overpress coUooations 
 which arise not so much from design 
 as from a natural and instinctive 
 
 rhythm ;_comp. 2 Cor. i. 8._ 
 T(i KOT en^] my circumstances, ' re- 
 rum mearnm conditio,' Wolf; oomp. 
 Eph. vi. 21, Col. iv. 7, Tobit x. 8, 
 and see illustrations in Eisner, Obs. 
 Vol. II. p. 234, Wetst. in Eph. I. c. 
 In such cases Karb, is local, and 
 marks, as it were, an extension along 
 an object; comp. Acts xxvi. 3, and 
 see Winer, Gr. § 49. d. In late 
 writers, Kara with a personal pro- 
 noun becomes almost equivalent to 
 a possess, pronoun, and with a subst, 
 almost equiv. to a simple geu. ; comp. 
 2 Maco. XV. 37. 
 
 )i,dWov] rather ; not ' maxime ' or 
 ' excellenter ' (comp. Beza), but 
 'potius,' rather than what might 
 have been expected, — viz. hindrance : 
 see Winer, Gr. § 35. 4, where this 
 use of the comparative is well illus- 
 trated. irpoKOTriiv] advance, 
 furtherance; a substantive of later 
 Greek condemned by the Atticists, see 
 notes on i Tim. iv. 15, and comp. 
 TriUer on Thorn. M. s. v. p. 741 (ed. 
 Bern.), who, though perhaps justly 
 pleading for the word as an intelligible 
 and even elegant form, is unable to 
 cite any instance of its use in any 
 early writer, Attic or otherwise. 
 Numerous exx., esp. out of Plutarch, 
 are cited by Wetst. in loc. 
 IXrjXuBev] liave fallen out, Auth. ; 
 oomp. Wisdom xv. 5, els SveiSos Ipxe- 
 rai. Further but doubtful exx. are 
 cited by Eaphel, Annot. Vol. 11. p. 
 499 ; at any rate from them take out 
 Mark v. 26, Acts xix. 27 (cited even 
 by Meyer), in which iXdetv certainly 
 implies nothing more than simple 
 (ethical) motion. Alford adduces He- 
 rod. I. 120, is Affffevis Ipxerat, which 
 seems fully in point. 
 
16 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 13 eX^XvOev, wtTTe rous Se&ntovg fJLOV (pavepovt ev XjOktto) 
 yevecrOai ev Shui rSr irftmruipia) ica\ TOii Xonroii iracriv, 
 
 13. ucTTe Tois 8Eir|i. K.T.V] so 
 
 that my boniis have become m,anifest in 
 Christ ; illustrations of the above- 
 mentioned vpoKoir-fi ; first beneficial 
 result of his imprisonment : ' duos 
 nunc singillatim Apostolus fortunse 
 suffi adversEB memorat effectus,' Van 
 Heng. The order of the words seems 
 clearly to imply that iv Xp. must be 
 joined, — not with 5e(r/itoi5s, Auth. , al., 
 soil. ' ad provehendum Christi ho- 
 norem,' Calv., but with tpavepois, on 
 which perhaps there ia a slight em- 
 phasis; the Seaixol were not KpvirTol, 
 but (pavepol ; nor ipavipol only, but 
 (pavepol iv Xp., ' manifesta, in Christo,' 
 Clarom., manifest — not 'through 
 Christ,' Theoph., CEoum., but 'in 
 Christ,' manifestly borne in fellow- 
 ship with Him, and in His service. On 
 this important qualitative formula, 
 which must never be vaguely ex- 
 plained away, see notes on Gal. ii. 
 1 7, and for a brief explanation of its 
 general force, comp. Hooker, Serm. 
 iii.Vol. iii.'p. 763(ed.Keble). Theva- 
 riation ^av. yevicB. (Chrys. adds roiii) 
 iv Xp. with DEFG ; Aug., Boern. , 
 Vulg., al., shows perhaps that some 
 difficulty has been felt in the con- 
 nexion. Iv oX<j> Tu irpaiT.] in 
 the whole Prcetorium. The meaning 
 of irpaiTiiptop in this passage has been 
 abundantly discussed. Taken per se, 
 the adjectival subat. Praetorium has 
 apparently the following meanings : 
 (a) 'the general's tent,' sc. 'tentorium 
 or tabernaculum ' (Livy, vii. 12), and 
 derivatively 'the council of war' held 
 there (Livy, xxvi. 15); (6) the 'palace 
 of aprovincialgovernor' (Cicero, Verr. 
 IV. 28; comp. Matth. xxvii. 27, Mark 
 XV. 16, al.), sc. 'domicilium,' and 
 thence derivatively, (a) 'the palace 
 of a king' (Juv, x. i6r ; comp. Acts 
 
 xxiii. 35), and even (/3) 'the mansion 
 of a private individual' (comp. Suet. 
 Octav. 72); lastly (c) ' the body guard 
 of the emperor' (Tacit. Hist. iv. 46); 
 and thence not improbably (d) 'the 
 guard-house or barracks where they 
 were stationed ; ' comp. Scheller, l,ex. 
 s. v., from which this abstract has 
 been compiled. In the present pas- 
 sage Chrys. and the patristic exposi- 
 tors all adopt (6, a) and refer the term 
 to 'the emperor's palace' (to jSoiri- 
 Xeia), but since the time of Perizonius 
 (de Prat, et Prcetorio, Franeq. 1687) 
 nearlyall m odern commentators adopt 
 (d), and refer irpan. to the 'oastrnm 
 Pra3torianorum ' built and fortified by 
 Sejauus, not far from the 'Porta 
 Viminalis;' comp. Suet. Tiber. 37, 
 Tacit. Ann. rv. i, Dio Cass. Lvn. 19. 
 The patristic interpretation, on ac- 
 count of the lax use of Prsetorium, 
 seems fairly defensible: as however 
 there is no proof that the imperial 
 palace at Eome was ever so called, 
 it seems more probable that the Apo- 
 stle is here referring to the ' castrum 
 Prsetorianorum,' — not merely to the 
 smaller portion of it attached to the 
 .palace of Nero (Wieseler, Chronol. p. 
 403, followed by Howson [Vol. 11. p. 
 510, ed. 2], and Alf. in loc), but as 
 o\tp and the subsequent generic toTs 
 XoiTTo?! Traffic seem to imply, — to the 
 whole camp of the Prsetorians, whether 
 inside or outside the city, — in which 
 general designation it is not improba- 
 ble that the oMix Kaitrapos (oh. iv. 22) 
 may he included; see notes in loc. 
 Bp Lightfoot (Comment, pp. gg— 
 104) urges with considerable plausi- 
 bility that the word here refers to 
 the Prajtorian guards rather than to 
 the Pra3toriau camp. It is difScult, 
 however, to think that a word which 
 
I. 13, 14. 
 
 17 
 
 Kai Tovi TrXetovay toJi/ aaeXcpSiv ev Kvplw ireiroiOoTai 14 
 TOii oecTftoii fiov irepiera-OTepwi ToX/uai/ d<pd^w<! rov \6- 
 
 certainly does, in another sense, im- 
 ply locality, has here wholly lost all 
 trace of it; and this the use of the 
 preposition with the word (rather 
 than a simple dative) seems, to some 
 extent, to confirm. The argu- 
 
 ments based on this passage by Baur 
 {der Apost. Paul. p. 469 sq.) against 
 the genuineness of this Bp. must be 
 pronounced very hopeless and un- 
 convincing. Kal rots Xoiirois 
 irdo-iv] and to all the rest, beside 
 the Praetorian camp, ' reliquis omni- 
 bus Eomse versantibns,' oomp. Ne- 
 ander, Planting, Vol. i. p. 317 
 (Bohn): not 'the rest of the Prae- 
 torians' (Wieseler, Chronol. p. 457), a 
 meaning too limited, nor 'hominibus 
 exteris (gentihbus) quibuscunque,' 
 Van Heng., a meaning which ol 
 XoiTTol certainly does not necessarily 
 bear, ^th., Auth., and appy. Vulg., 
 refer rots Xoiirois to locality, ' in other 
 places' {iv ry irdXei. irAarj, Chrys.), 
 the dative being under the vinculum 
 of ev : this is grammatically possible, 
 but, as AoiTTos is not elsewhere ap- 
 plied to places in the N. T., not very 
 probable ; comp. 2 Cor. xiii. -i. 
 
 14. Kal rous irXeCovas k.t.X.] and 
 that the greater part of the brethren : 
 second beneficial effect of the Apostle's 
 imprisonment. The presence of the 
 article obviously shows that irXelovai 
 must here retain its proper com- 
 parative force, — not 'many,' Auth., 
 'multitudo,' Syr., but 'the greater 
 portion,' 'the more part,' as Auth. 
 in Acts xix. 32, xxvii. 12,1 Cor. ix. 19, 
 XV. 6. See also i Cor. x. 5, 2 Cor. 
 ii. 6, iv. 15, ix. i, where both Luther 
 and Auth. incorrectly retain the 
 positive. «v Kvp. ireiroiS. k.t.X.] 
 
 having in the Lord confidence in my 
 bonds : not ' in regard of my bonds ' 
 
 (Flatt, Bill.), which vitiates the con- 
 struction ; the dative not being a dat. 
 ' of reference to ' (comp. notes on Gal. 
 i. 22), but the usual transmissive 
 dat. At first sight it might seem 
 more simple and natural, with Syr., 
 to connect iv Kvpiifi with AdeKipwv, 
 ' brethren united with, in fellowship 
 with the Lord,' — a construction ad- 
 missible in point of grammar (Winer, 
 Gr. § 20. 2), but open to the serious 
 objection that though the important 
 modal adjunct ^x Kvpltfi occurs several 
 times in St Paul's Epp. with sub- 
 stantives or quasi-substantives, e.g. 
 Bom. xvi. 8, 13, Eph. iv. i, vi. 21, 
 Col. iv. 7, it is never found with 
 d5eX0o's: Eph. vi. 21, cited in opp. 
 by Van Heng., is not in point; see 
 Meyer in loc. On the contrary, 
 TCToiO. is found similarly joined 
 with iv Kvp. in oh. ii. 24, Gal. v. 10, 
 2 Thess. iii. 4, comp. Bom. xiv. 14. 
 The objection that in these and simi- 
 lar cases ireiroiB. stands first in the 
 sentence (Alf.) is not here of any 
 moment ; the emphasis rests on iv 
 Kvplif, and properly causes its pre- 
 cedence: surely it must have been 
 'in the Lord' and in Him only that 
 confidence could have been felt — 
 when he to whom it referred was in 
 bonds : so rightly Meyer, and very 
 decidedly Winer, Gr. § 20. 2. 
 irepwro-OTlpcas ToXpxv] are more a- 
 bundantly bold, soil, than when I 
 was not in bonds; not 'are very 
 much emboldened,' Couyb., a, need- 
 less dilution of the comparative ; 
 'h&c freti plus solito audere debe- 
 mus, jam in persona fratrum pignus 
 victoriae nostrae habentes,' Calv. The 
 construction adopted by Grot., B.- 
 Crus., al., ireptaa: iipd^ws, i.e. d0o- 
 puripus, is eminently unsatisfactory; 
 
 C 
 
18 
 
 ripos «i)iAinnHsiOYS. 
 
 15 yov Tov Qeov \a\eiv. Ttves fxev Kai Sia (fydovov Ka\ 
 epiv, Tivey Si kuI Si evSoKiav tov 'Kpicrrov Ktipva-(rov(riv 
 
 14. \67o>' ToB GcoC] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Sort, 
 on greatly preponderating authority : Rec. omits toC GeoO. It was also 
 omitted in former edd. of this Commentary as having the appearance of a 
 gloss, a view deriving some support from the existence of the alternative 
 reading Kvplov : the great preponderance of authority, however, must be 
 regarded as final. 
 
 each verb naturally takes its own 
 adverb. With a.<p6^ois \a\uv comp. 
 Acts iv. 31, i\A\ow rbv \6yov toO 
 GeoO i^ercL ira^prifflas. 
 
 15. Tivis |i^v K.T.X.] Some indeed 
 even from envy and strife : exceptions 
 to the foregoing; 'this is not the 
 case with all ; some preach from bad 
 motives.' The previous definition iv 
 Kvp. Treiroi.0. seems to render it im- 
 possible that the Tt;/^s /Jiiv should be 
 comprised in the dSeK^oi, ver. 14. 
 The mention of ' speaking the word ' 
 brings to the Apostle's mind all who 
 were doing so; he pauses then to 
 allude to all, specifying under the 
 Twh liiv (obs. not ol ij.ii> as in ver. 16) 
 his Judaizing — not his unbelieving 
 (Chrys.) — opponents, while in rivh Si 
 he reverts to the sounder majority 
 mentioned in ver. 14. Kai, with its 
 common contrasting force in such 
 collocations (see notes on ch. iv. 12 ; 
 comp. Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 636, 
 and exx. in Hartung, Partik. Vol. i. 
 pp. 136, 137), marks that there were, 
 alas! other motives beside the good 
 ones that might be inferred from the 
 preceding words. Alford joins Kai 
 with Tivis tkiv, as meaning 'besides 
 those mentioned ver. 14.' This how- 
 ever does not seem tenable. 
 Sid <)>6dvov] on account of envy, or 
 more idiomatically, 'from envy,' 'for 
 envy,' — to gratify that evil feeling; 
 so Matth. xxvii. t8, Mark xv. 10, 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 49. c, and notes 
 nn Gal. iv. 13. Alberti adduces 
 
 somewhat pertinently Philemon [the 
 elder, a comic poet, B.C. 330] TroXXd 
 jLte didaffKeis atpdovojs 8ta tjidovov, see 
 Meineke, Com. Fragm. Vol. iv. p. 55. 
 It is scarcely necessary to add that 
 the transl. 'amid envy' (Jowett on 
 Gal. iv. 13) is quite untenable: SlIi, 
 with an accus. in local or quasi-local 
 references is purely poetical; comp. 
 Bernhardy, Synt. v. 18, p. 236. 
 81' evSoK^av] ore account of, from, good 
 will, diri wpoBviilas avcurris, Chrys., — 
 towards the Apostle ; not towards 
 others in respect of their salvation 
 (Est.). De Wette objects to this 
 meaning of eiSoxla as not sufficiently 
 confirmed, and adopts the transl. 
 'good pleasure,' scil. of me and my 
 affairs. This seems somewhat hy- 
 percritical ; surely the opposition 
 dia tpdovotf compared with i^ dyatnjs, 
 ver. 16, seems sufficient to warrant 
 the current translation; see Fritz. 
 Rom. Vol. II. p. 372, whose note how- 
 ever is not in all points perfectly 
 exact ; comp. notes on Eph. i. 5, and 
 the quaint but suggestive comments 
 of Andrewes, Serm. xiii. Vol. i. p. 
 230 (A.-C. Libr.). The koI refers to 
 contrary motives just enunciated; 
 and the party specified under ru/h 
 Si, though practically coincident with 
 the irXeioves, is yet, as De W. rightly 
 observes, put under a slightly dif- 
 ferent point of view, as forming the 
 opposite party to those last mention- 
 ed. Thus of those who spake the 
 word, Tiph fiiv were factious and 
 
I. 15—17- 
 
 19 
 
 01 (/.ev e^ ayavtji, eiSores on etj airoXoylav tov evayye- 16 
 \lov Kei/xat, 01 3e e^ epiOelas tov Xpiarov KUTayyeWov- 17 
 
 16, 17. of /iiv i^ ayairiis k.t.X.] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and 
 Hort, on very greatly preponderating authority : Bee. inverts the two mem- 
 bers, placing 0! /liv ii ipiBetas k.t.\. first, and oi di i^ iyairris k.t.X. 
 second. In ver. 17 the riiv hefore Xpurrbv is bracketed by Lachm. and 
 
 envious, nvis Si full of good will 
 and kindly feeling, and these latter 
 were they who constitute the irXeloras 
 Tuv dSc\<pi3v, ver. 14. 
 
 16. 01 |j.iv l| dYcCiTTis] those indeed 
 that are of love {do so) ; sc. ocres, 
 comp. Bom. ii. 8, Gal. iii. 7. The two 
 classes mentioned in the last verse are 
 now by oi fi,h and oi Si a little more 
 exactly specified, the order being in- 
 verted. Auth., with apparently near- 
 ly all the older expositors, makes 
 oi fiiv the subject, and refers 4^ 
 dyairris to the supplied clause tSv 
 Xp. Krip. : so also Matth. , Alf ., and 
 other modern commentators. This 
 is plausible at first sight, but on a 
 nearer examination can hardly be 
 maintained. For first, i^ dydirr]s 
 would thus be only a kind of re- 
 petition of Si' eiSodav, as also i^ 
 ipi8. of Sid, <p86vov\ and secondly, the 
 force of the causal participial clause 
 would be much impaired, for the ob- 
 ject of the Apostle is rather to spe- 
 cify the motives which caused this ' 
 difference of behaviour in the two 
 classes than merely to reiterate the 
 nature of it. See esp. De Wette in 
 loc, by whom the present interpre- 
 tation is ably maintained ; so Mey., 
 Wies., and (in language perhaps 
 too confident) Van Heng. : where 
 appy. aU the ancient Vv. are on the 
 other side, it is not wise to be too 
 positive. On the expression oi i^ 
 ■dyairti^, 'qui ab amore originem du- 
 cunt,' see notes on Gal. iii. 7, and 
 Fritz. Rom. ii. 8, Vol. 1. p. 105. 
 (IS6t€$ oTi K.T.X.] as they know that 
 
 I am appointed for the defence of the 
 Gospel, i.e. 'set to defend the Gospel,' 
 Tynd., Gran.; participial clause ex- 
 plaining the motive of the behaviour, 
 comp. Rom. v. 3, Gal. ii. 16, Eph. vi. 
 8, al. They recognise in me the ap- 
 pointed defender of the Gospel, — not 
 the incapacitated preacher whose po- 
 sition claims their help (Est., Fell 2), 
 but the energetic Apostle whose ex- 
 ample quickens and evokes their co- 
 operation. KeTficu has thus a purely 
 passive reference, not ' jaoeo in oon- 
 ditione misery, ' Van Heng. (a mean- 
 ing lexically defensible, see exx. in 
 Eost u. Palm, Lex. a. v.), but ' con- 
 stitutus sum,' iEth., ' I am set,' Auth., 
 Geo's /Me Kex^i-poTovijKe, Theod. : so 
 Luke ii. 34, i Thess. iii. 3. The 
 Apostle was in confinement, but not, 
 as far as we can gather, either in 
 misery or in suffering; comp. Conyb. 
 and Hows. St Paul, Vol. 11. p. 515 sq. 
 diroXoY^av toB euow. is referred by 
 Chrys., Theoph., and (Ecum., to the 
 account (rds eidivai) of his ministry, 
 which the Apostle would have to 
 render up to God, and which the co- 
 operation of others might render less 
 heavy. This seems artificial : diro- 
 \o7ia is nowhere used in the N.T. in 
 reference to God, and can hardly 
 have a different meaning to that 
 which it bears in ver. 7 ; see Wieseler, 
 Chronol. p. 430 note. 
 
 17. 01 Si i^ IpiSetas] but they that 
 are of party-feeling or dissension ; op- 
 posite class to oi i^ dyaTTTjs, ver. 16. 
 On the derivation and true meaning 
 of ipWeia, —not exactly ' contention,' 
 
 2 
 
20 
 
 npos <i)iAirinH2ioYs. 
 
 a-tv ouj^ dyvm, olofievoi OXlyptv eyelpeiv to/? Secr/xoig fiov. ri 
 
 Treg. (Westc. and Hort omit rbv in marg.), but has preponderating authority 
 in its favour. The reading iydpuv (Eec. ewKpipeiv) rests on very greatly pre- 
 ponderating authority. i8. ir\Tiv Sti] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., 
 Westc. and Hort, on very clearly preponderating authority : Rec. omits on. 
 
 Auth. (comp. Vulg., Syr., Copt.), 
 followed by many modern commen- 
 tators, but 'intrigue,' 'party-spirit' 
 {di/aiduts KarSu ttjv dyopb,v Trepttopres, 
 Theod.), as appy. felt by Clarom., 
 which gives 'dissensio,' and perhaps 
 JEth., — see notes on Gal. v. 20. On 
 the most suitable rendering, comp. 
 notes on Traiisl. KaTtt^y- 
 
 ■y^Wouo-iv] declare, proclaim ; in effect 
 not different from Kripicraav, ver. 15 
 (Ka7-a77^\X6TOt ■ KrjpiffaeTaL, Hesych.), 
 but perhaps presenting a little more 
 distinctly the idea of ' promulgation,' 
 ' making fuUy known ' (Xen. Andb. 11. 
 5. 38, Karayy. ttjv i-m^ovK'^v)', comp. 
 I Cor. ix. 14, Col. i. 28, and Acts xvii. 
 3, 23, in which latter book the word 
 occurs eleven times. It is peculiar to 
 the Acts and St Paul's Epp. In this 
 compound the prep, appears to have 
 an intensive force, as in KaroKiyav, 
 KaTOLtpaye'iv k.t.\. ; see Eost u. Palm, 
 Lex. s. v. iv. 4. ovx ci'yvws] 
 
 insincerely, 'with no pure intention' 
 (oiiK elXiKpivus oiSi di kutA to Tpdy/ia, 
 Chrys): it belongs closely to Karayy., 
 and marks the spirit in which they 
 performed the xarayyeXla. On the 
 meaning of ayvos ('in quo nihil est 
 impuri'), see notes on i Tim. v. 22, 
 Tittm. Synon. i. p. 22, and Trench, 
 Synon. Part 11. § 38. 
 otojicvoi K.T.X.] thinking (tftm) to 
 raise up, &o. ; not exactly parallel to 
 eidores, ver. 16, but explanatory of 
 ovx ayvSs. The verb oUadai, seems 
 here to convey a faint idea of inten- 
 tion, though of an intention which 
 was not realized ; e.g. Plato, Apol. 
 p. 41 D, oloixevoi p\dirTei,v (cited by 
 De W.) : fcal fcc(\us (Tire rh olopLevoi' 
 
 ov yhp ovTus i^i^aivev, Chrys. 
 Tots Seo-jiots |iov] to my bonds, dat. 
 incommodi, Jelf, Gr. § 602. 3; they 
 were endeavouring to make a state 
 already suflSciently fuU of trouble yet 
 more painful and afflicting. There 
 is some little doubt as to the exact 
 nature of this e\i\pi.i. Is it outward, 
 i.e. dangers from the inflamed hatred 
 of heathen enemies (Chrys.), or in- 
 ward, i.e. 'trouble of spirit' (Alf.)? 
 Not the latter, which is not in har- 
 mony with the studiedly objective 
 Sefffioi!, or with the prevailing use of 
 BXl'I'is in the N.T.; — nor yet exactly 
 as Chrys., al., which seems too re- 
 stricted, if not artificial, but more 
 probably ill-treatment at the hands 
 of Jews and Judaizing Christians, 
 which the false teaching of the o£ i^ 
 ipiSelas would be sure to call forth. 
 Calvin very prudently observes, ' plu- 
 rimas ocoasiones [Apostolo nocendi] 
 nobis esse incognitas qui tempormn 
 oircumstantias uon tenemus.' 
 
 18. tC Yop] What then? 'quid 
 euim,' Vulg., or perhaps more ex- 
 actly 'quid ergo;' not 'quid igitur,' 
 Beza, which is not commonly thus 
 used in independent questions. The 
 uses of t£ y&p may be approximately 
 stated as three; (a) argumentative, 
 answering very nearly to the Lat. 
 'quid euim,' and while confirming 
 or explaining the preceding sentence, 
 often serving to imply tacitly that an 
 opponent has no answer to make ; 
 see Hand, Tursell. Vol. 11. p. 386. 
 It is thus often followed by another 
 interrogation ; comp. Eom. iii. 3, 
 Job xxi. 4; (6) affirmative, answer- 
 ing very nearly to ' profeeto ' or the 
 
I. 18. 
 
 21 
 
 yap; TrKfjv on ttui/tI Tpoira etre Trpocpaaei eiVe aXtiOeia 18 
 
 It was also omitted in former edd. of this Commentary on plausible internal 
 grounds : the weight of authority, however, is so clear, that we are fully justi- 
 fied in retaining both particles. 
 
 occasional 'quid ni' of the Latins 
 (Hand, Tursell. Vol. iv. p. 186); 
 comp. Eurip. Orest. 482, Soph. (Ed. 
 Col. 542, and see Herm. Viger, No. 
 io8, and Ellendt, Lex. Soph. Vol. i. 
 V- 537i wlio however has not suf- 
 ficiently discriminated between the 
 exx. adduced ; (c) rhetorical, as appy. 
 here, answering more nearly to ' quid 
 ergo' or 'quid ergo est' (Hand, 
 Tursell. Vol. 11. p. 456), and marking 
 commonly either a startled question 
 (comp. CEd. Col. 539, 546), or, as 
 here and appy. Job xviii. 4, a brisk 
 transition ('ubi quis eum alaoritate 
 quadam ad novam sententiam trans- 
 greditur,' Kiihner on Xen. Mem. 11. 6. 
 2), and thus perhaps differing from 
 the calmer tI oSv. In every one of 
 these cases however the proper force 
 of y&p ('sane pro rebus oomparatis'), 
 though at each succeeding step be- 
 coming more obscure, may stiU be 
 recognised ; here, for example, the 
 question amounts to, 'things being 
 then as I have described them, what 
 is my state of feeling?' See Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 247 sq. All sup- 
 plements, dia(p4pei, (Chrys.), /uoi fi,i\ei 
 (Theoph.), <j)iiaoiiev (Van H.), <&c., 
 are perfectly unnecessary, if not un- 
 critical. irXiJv oTi] only that; 
 so in Acts XX. 23, the only other 
 passage in the N.T. where the two 
 particles are thus associated : comp. 
 Plato, Phced. p. 57 B, The<et. p. 183 
 A (cited by Bp Lightfoot). The par- 
 ticle irX-ljv, probably connected with 
 irKiov (Pott, Etym. Forsch. Vol. 11. 
 pp. 39, 32 3), not withTT^as (Hartung, 
 Fartik. Vol. 11. p. 30), has properly 
 a comparative force, especially re- 
 cognisable in the disjunctive com- 
 
 parison T\rjv ■q (see Donalds. Gratyl. 
 § 100), and its use with the gen., e.g. 
 Mark xii. 32, Acts viii. 1. This might 
 be termed its prepositional use. It 
 however soon passed by an intelli- 
 gible gradation into an adverbial use, 
 and came to imply little more than 
 dWd, 'nevertheless,' 'abgesehen da- 
 von ' (ch. iii. 16, iv. 14, i Cor. xi. 11, 
 Eph. V. 33), with which particle it is 
 not unfrequently joined ; see Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. n. p. 725. 
 iravrl rpoirip] in every way, soil, of 
 preaching the Gospel, more exactly 
 defined by ef re... ef re. At first sight 
 there might seem some difficulty in 
 this lenity of St Paul towards false, 
 and perhaps heterodox teachers, — 
 men against whom he warns his 
 converts with such emphasis in oh. 
 iii. i. The answer seems reasonable, 
 that St Paul is here contemplating 
 the personal motives rather than 
 alluding to the doctrines of the 
 preachers ; nay more, that perverted 
 in many respects as this preaching 
 might be, Chbist was still its subject, 
 and to the large heart of the Apostle 
 this was enough ; this swallowed up 
 every doubt and fear : 'let then the 
 word be preached, and let it be heard ; 
 be it sincerely, or be it pretensedly, 
 so it be done, it is to him [St Paul], 
 and should be to us, matter (not 
 only of contentment, but also) of 
 rejoicing,' Andrewes, Serm. ix. Vol. 
 v. p. 191 (A.-C. Libr.) ; see esp. 
 Neander, Planting, Vol. 1. p. 318 
 (Bohn), and comp. Stier, Reden Jem, 
 Vol. III. p. 29. etre 
 
 irpo<|>do'£i K.T.X.] whether in pretence 
 or in truth; datives expressive of 
 the manner, technically called modal 
 
22 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioYs. 
 
 XjOJo-TOS KaTayyiWeTai, Koi ev tovtui yaipoD' aWa 
 19 Koi j(^ap^(rofjLar oiSa yap on tovto fioi airo^tiereTai 
 
 datives ; see Winer, Gr. § 31. 6, and 
 especially Jelf, Gr. § 603, by whom 
 this use of the dat. is well illustrated ; 
 compare also Hartung, Casus, p. 69. 
 The phraseological annotators, esp. 
 Wetst. and Baphel (Vol. 11. p. 500), 
 adduce numerous instances of a 
 similar opposition between irpoifxiuns 
 and oKriBua or ToKiiOh ; these are 
 quite enough, independently of the 
 context, to induce us to reject the 
 transl. of wpo(j>aj7ei adopted by Grot., 
 al., 'ocoasione,' i.e. 'be the good not 
 intended but only occasioned by 
 them,' Hammond. On the more 
 general meaning of the here more 
 limited oXiyffeio, comp. Eeuss, Theol. 
 Ghret. iv. 16, Vol. 11. p. 169. 
 (V rovTif] therein, 'in this state of 
 things, ' scil. that Christ is preached, 
 though from different motives ; comp. 
 Luke X. 20. This use of iv roirif 
 (nearly = Germ, 'dariiber'), though 
 apparently not very common in the 
 best prose, is certainly no Hebraism 
 (Eilliet) ; see Winer, Gr. § 48. a. 
 Meyer compares Plato, Eepubl. x. p. 
 603 0, iv Todrots dr/ Trdatv rj Xvirov- 
 fiivovs TJ xo-^povras. dXXci Kal 
 
 \ap.] yea, and I shall rejoice; not 
 exactly del vvip To&rwv xO'P^'^of^^t 
 Chrys., but, in more strict connexion 
 with the following fut., token the 
 aVo;8. els hot. is being realized. The 
 punctuation is here not quite certain. 
 Lachm., followed by Tisch. and Mey., 
 places a fuU stop before aWd, and a 
 colon after x<»/'-i thus connecting 
 oi6a yiip more immediately with the 
 present clause. This seems right in 
 principle on grammatical as well as 
 exegetioal considerations : a colon 
 however, as in the text, seems pre- 
 ferable to a full stop, for there is a 
 kind of seqiienoe in the x«ipw and 
 
 xapTJffo/ioi which can hardly be com- 
 pletely interrupted. De W., Van 
 Heng., and others who retain the 
 comma (Alf. has a comma in text 
 but a colon in transl.) suppose an 
 pUipsis of oi fwpov before xoi/i&i. 
 This is very unsatisfactory. 'AXXd 
 Kal has here its idiomatic meaning 
 'at etiam,' the faintly seclusive force 
 of oXXck serving specially to confine 
 attention to the new assertion which 
 the Kal annexes and enhances ; see 
 Fritz. Eom. vi. 5, Vol. i. p. 374. It 
 may be observed that in these words, 
 and also in some uses of the idiom- 
 atic aXXA yap, dXX4 /iiv, the primary 
 force of dXXct ('aliud jam hoc esse 
 de quo sumus dicturi,' Klotz, Devar. 
 Vol. II. p. 2) is so far obscured that 
 it does practically little more than 
 impart a briskness and emphasis to 
 the declaration ; see Klotz, I.e. p. 8, 
 Hartung, Partik. Vol. 11. p. 35. 
 Lastly, we should be careful to dis- 
 tinguish between the present use of 
 dXXct and its use (a) where a hypo- 
 thetical clause precedes, evoking a 
 more distinct opposition, e.g. i Cor. 
 iv. 15, 2 Cor. iv. 16 ;• (6) where an 
 opposition is involved in the terms 
 themselves, e.g. Diod. Sic. v. 84 
 (Fritz.), iv rais v^ffois dXXd Kai Kara 
 TTJv 'Aa-lav ; or (c) where aWd oc- 
 curs in brisk exhortation, e.g. Soph. 
 Philoct. 807, dXX' (5 riKvov Kal Sdpa-os 
 iffx^; in which passage Hermann's 
 proposed emendation n Bdpcos does 
 not seem either plausible or ne- 
 cessary. 
 
 19. olStt 7i£p] Confirmation of 
 the words immediately preceding, the 
 ydp having its simple argumentative 
 force. If with Calv., Bisp., al. this 
 clause be referred to ver. 17, ydp 
 must have more of an explanatory 
 
r. 19. 
 
 23 
 
 e/y a-ioTtiplav Sia t?? vf^wv Se^crecoi Kat eiri-^^optiyia^ toO 
 
 force (eomp. notes on Gal. ii. 6): such 
 a ref . however is un duly retrogressive ; 
 toOto here can only mean the same as 
 Toirij) ver. 18, — the more extended 
 preaching of the Gospel of Christ. 
 The words toCto — (Tuniplav occur in 
 Job xiii. 16, and may have been a 
 reminiscence. tls o-<i)n]p£av] 
 
 to salvation. The exact meaning of 
 aorrtipla has been very differently ex- 
 plained. It has been referred to (a) 
 'salus corporea,' soil, 'escape from 
 present danger,' diraWay^v, Chrys., 
 who however fluctuates; 'preserva- 
 tion in life,' rd oaov oliSi ttu /iafyri- 
 piov, (Ecum., and appy. Syr.; (6) 
 'salus spiritualis,' ' Seelenheil,' De 
 W., 'his own fruitfulness for Christ,' 
 Alf.; (c) both united, 'for good, 
 whether of soul (Eom. viii. 28) or of 
 body' (Acts xxvii. 34), Peile, Bloomf.; 
 (d) ' salus sempiterna, ' whether (a) in 
 reference to others (Grot., Hamm.), 
 or (;8) in ref. to himself, 'suam salu- 
 tem veram et perennem,' Van Heng. 
 The last of these meanings alone 
 seems to satisfy the future reference 
 (ctTTo/S.), and is most in accordance 
 with the prevailing meaning of <ria- 
 TTipla in St Paul's Epp. : comp. ver. 
 ■28, ch. ii. 12, and els crur. Eom. i. 
 16, 2 Thess. ii. 13. Sid 
 
 •riis K.T.X.] through your supplication 
 and the supply of the Spirit of J. C. ; 
 the two means by which the awT-ripla 
 is to be realized, intercessory suppli- 
 cation on the part of man, and sup- 
 ply of the Spirit on the part of God. 
 Meyer and Alf ord regard the gen. iiri.- 
 Xopiiytas as dependent on i/jiuv, 'your 
 supply to me (by that prayer) of, c&e.,' 
 on the ground that Sid Trjs, or at least 
 T^s, would have been inserted. Inde- 
 pendently of the very unsatisfactory 
 meaning in a dogmatical point of 
 view, this is not grammatically ex- 
 
 act. No article is required. Each 
 substantive has its own defining gen., 
 and on this account the second may 
 dispense with its art. ; so Winer, Gr. 
 § 19. 5. Meyer is unfortunate in re- 
 ferring to Winer in support of his in- 
 terpr., as that grammarian expressly 
 adopts the more natural construc- 
 tion. 4irL)(^opT|^Cas toO 
 IIv.]. supply of the Spirit. These 
 words admit of two interpretations 
 according as roO ni/. is considered a 
 gen. ohjecti or suhjecti; comp. Winer, 
 Gr. § 30. 1 . If the former, the mean- 
 ing will be 'the supply which is the 
 Spirit,' the gen. being that of identity 
 or apposition (Scheuerl. Synt. § 12. i, 
 p. 82, 83); so Chrys., Theoph., (Ecum. 
 If the latter, the meaning will be 'the 
 supply which the Spirit gives,' the 
 gen. being that of the origin or agent 
 (Hartung, Casus, p. 17); so Theod., 
 De W., Mey. This latter interpr. is 
 on the whole to be preferred, as the 
 parallelism, 'the prayers you offer... 
 the aid the Spirit supplies,' is thus 
 more exactly retained. Wiesing. and 
 Alf. urge Gal. iii. 5, but this can 
 hardly be considered sufficiently in 
 point to fix the interpretation. Still 
 less tenable is the assertion that the 
 gen. subjecti would have required the 
 order toO IIp. 'I. X. iinxop. as in Eph. 
 iv. 16 (Alf.) ; for in the first place exx. 
 of the contrary (and indeed usual) or- 
 der are most abundant, see Scheuerl. 
 Synt. p. 126, Winer, Gr. § 30. i ; and 
 in the next place the gen. in Eph. I.e. 
 is confessedly of a different gram- 
 matical class ; see notes in loc. The 
 Spirit is here termed t6 Kc. 'It/ct. 
 Xp., not merely because Christ gives 
 Himself spiritually in and with the 
 Holy Ghost (Meyer ore Eom. viii. 
 9), but because that eternal Spirit 
 proceeds from the Son; so Pearson, 
 
24 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioYS. 
 
 20 HvevfiaTOt 'Ii/ffoO XptcrTOV, Kara t^i/ awoKapaSoKiav 
 Kal iXtrlSa nov oti iv ovSevi ai(r)(yvd^tTO/J.ai, a\\' ev 
 
 Creed, Vol. i. p. 383 : in a word the 
 gen. is not so much a definitive or 
 quasi-possess. gen., as a simple gen. 
 originis, Hartung, Cams, p. 23. Last- 
 ly, on iirixopvyt"'! which perhaps re- 
 tains a slight shade of the primary 
 meaning of x^PVy- in the ampleness 
 and liberality which it seems to hint 
 at on the part of the gift and giver, 
 see notes on Col. ii. 19, and Harless 
 on Eph. iv. 16. The ^irl is direc- 
 tive, not intensive ; see notes on 
 Col. I. c. 
 
 20. Kard Ti'v diroKap. k.t.X.] ac- 
 cording to my expectation and hope, 
 BO. ' even as I am hoping and expect- 
 ing,' Syr., 'sicut speravi et confisus 
 sum,' Mih. The curious word diroica- 
 paSoda (Hesych. irpoaSoKla, direxSo- 
 xi), only here and Eom. viii. 19 in 
 the N. T., is derived from Kipa and 
 SoKiia [possibly allied to a root die, 
 ' moustrare,' Pott, Etym. Forsch. Vol. 
 I. p. 185, 267], and properly denotes 
 ' capitis, soil, oculorum animique, ad 
 rem ab aliquo loco expeotandam at- 
 tenta conversio,' and thence deriva- 
 tively ' patient, persistent, looking for ' 
 (Eom. viii. 19), and, with a further 
 weakened force, 'calm expectation,' 
 as in this place ; the meaning neces- 
 sarily varying with that of the simple 
 KapaSoKelv, which, from the ideas of 
 'attention' (Eur. Troad. 93) and 'ob- 
 servation' (Polyb. Hist. i. 42. 6), 
 passes to those of 'suspense' (Eur. 
 Med. H17) and simple 'expectation' 
 (Eur. Iph. Aul. 1433). The prep. 
 diri is not properly intensive, as in 
 airoBepl^w, aTro^eiiSo^oi, k.t.X. (Tittm. 
 Synon. p. 106 sq., and even Meyer on 
 Rom. viii, 19), but local; it primarily 
 (so to say) localises the KapaSoKeiv, by 
 marking either (a) the place from 
 which the observation is maintained, 
 
 e.g. Joseph. Bell. Jud. iii. 7. 26, comp. 
 Polyb. Hist, xviii. 31. 4, or (6) the 
 quarter whence the thing or issue is 
 looked for, e.g. Polyb. Hist. xvi. 2. 
 8, — and comes thence, as in ottekS^- 
 xo/iai (Germ. ' aftwarten,' see notes om 
 Gal. V. 5), with a gradual but intelli- 
 gible evanescence of the local idea 
 ('quidquid enim expectes alicunde te 
 id expectare oportet,' Fritz.), to imply 
 little more than the fixedness, perma- 
 nence, SknA patience (not 'solicitude,' 
 Tittm.), with which the observation 
 is continued, or the expectation enter- 
 ttiined; see Winer, de Verb. Compos. 
 IV. p. 14, and esp. the excellent dis- 
 cussion of Fritz. Fritzsch. Opusc. pp. 
 150 — 157- Sti ev oiSsvl 
 
 atcrx.] that in nothing I shall he put 
 to shame. These words adnait of 
 various possible interpretations ; for 
 example (a) on may be either rela- 
 tival, 'that,' tA iXvl^av on, Chrys., 
 or argumentative, 'because,' appy. 
 Vulg., Clarom.; (6) oidevl may be 
 either neuter (Syr., Auth., al.), or 
 masc. in reference to the preachers 
 of the Gospel (Hoelem.) ; again (c) al- 
 ax^vB. may be either passive, 'con- 
 fundar,' Vulg., or with a middle 
 force, 'pudore oonfusus ab officio 
 deflectam,' Van Heugel. In this va- 
 riety of interpretation we must be 
 guided solely by the context : and this 
 seems certainly in favour of the above 
 translation : for (a) on far more natu- 
 rally follows i\wU as defining the sub- 
 ject to which it refers (comp. Eom. 
 viii. 21) than as supplying the reason 
 why it is entertained; the latter in- 
 terrupts the sequence, vitiates the 
 logic, and leaves the object of hope 
 undefined. Again (5) oiSevl cannot 
 be masc. ; for if so, it would have to 
 be arbitrarily referred only to the bet- 
 
20. 
 
 25 
 
 iraa-i^ irappticria wy vavrore Koi vvv fieyaXvvd^aeTai 
 XpioTTOi iv Ttp a-w/Aarl fiov, elre Sta ^co?? e^re Sia Qa- 
 
 ter class of those mentioned above, 
 whereas if neuter it remains perfectly 
 general and inclusive, not merely oihe 
 if TiJ) f^K offre h ry Bafeii/, Theoph., — 
 but, 'in no respect, in no particular' 
 (oomp. ver. 28), thus forming an an- 
 tithesis to kt> irdaji irafip. Lastly, (c) 
 alax- cannot logically be taken with 
 any middle force; St Paul can scarce- 
 ly know that the preaching will turn 
 out to his salvation (ver. 19), and yet 
 only hope and expect that he shall not 
 fall from his duty. What the Apostle 
 does hope and expect is, not merely 
 oTt 01) irepUaovTai oStoi, Chrys., on 
 KpeUraiav Icro/iai rav Bvirxepwv, Theod., 
 but more generally, that he shall not 
 be brought to a state of shame (2 Cor. 
 X. 8, I John ii. 28), that he shall not 
 be put to shame in the highest duties 
 and aims of his life; see De Wette in 
 loc, who aptly compares the Hebrew 
 ma Psahn XXXV. 4, Ixx. 2 (LXX. al- 
 axwSelriffav), and contrasts St Paul's 
 favourite term KavxaaSai. 
 aXX' Iv ira<r[| irapp.] but on the con- 
 trary in all boldness; antithesis to 
 the foregoing clause introduced with 
 the full force of the adversative dWd. 
 Hcio-r;, as has often been remarked 
 (see ver. 9), is not qualitative, 'uue 
 pleine liberty,' Bill., but, as usual, 
 quantitative, ' every form and mani- 
 festation of boldness,' forming an ex- 
 act opposition to iv oidevi above. 'Ec 
 IT. Tra/ipijo-ij is thus not merely 'in 
 all joy fulness' (Wiesing., comp. Bph. 
 iii. 12), and certainly not (ra<j>S>s <pa- 
 jiepas, (Ecum. (comp. Syr., 'revelata 
 facie'), but, as the contrast and con- 
 text both imply, 'in omni fiducia,' 
 Vulg., 'in all boldness of speech and 
 action;' comp. Eph. vi. 19. 
 «ls irdvTOTE KaV vuv] Temporal clause, 
 following close on the foregoing mo- 
 
 dal predication (comp. Donalds. 6r. 
 % 444). The addition Kal vvv gives 
 a dignifying and consoling aspect 
 to the Apostle's present condition, 
 cheerless as it might seem, and sup- 
 plies a retrospective corroboration of 
 ver. 12. ixcyaXwdijirE- 
 
 Tai K.T.X.] Christ shall be magnified 
 in my body; not tv Ifiol, but, in ac- 
 cordance with the studiedly passive 
 aspect given to the whole declara- 
 tion (obscured by fith.), — h t(^ <rt6/i. 
 fiov, 'in my body;' 'my body shall 
 be, as it were, the theatre on which 
 Christ's glory shall be displayed,' 
 comp. John xxi. 19, and in illustra- 
 tion of this use of h ('substratum 
 of action'), see notes on Gal. i. 24, 
 Winer, Gr. § 48. a. Me7aX. is thus 
 not 'shall be enlarged,' 'augebitur,' 
 Copt. (comp. Luke i. 58, 2 Cor. x. 
 15), with reference to the develop- 
 ment and growth of Christ within 
 (EiU. ; comp. Gal. ii. 20, Eom. viii. 
 10), which here would not harmonize 
 with the modal ev ira^p., and still less 
 with the local iv (rd/i., — but, as in 
 Acts xix. 17, 'shall be glorified,' Sei- 
 xS'^<reTai, o's iim, Theod., 'gloriosior 
 apparebit,' Just., the meaning being 
 here appy. a little more forcible than 
 ' be praised ' (Alf . ; comp. Luke i. 46, 
 Acts V. 13), and pointing more to 
 the general, than to the merely oral 
 spread of the Lord's glory and king- 
 dom among men. efre 
 8id K.T.X.] whether by life or by 
 death; two alternatives, suggested 
 by and in explanation of the pre- 
 ceding (V Tij! <rd>ii. fiov : 'in my body,' 
 — whether that body be preserved 
 alive as an earthly instrument of my 
 Master's glory, or be given up to 
 martyrdom for His name's sake: 8ta 
 fiiv foi^s, on e^elXeTo- Sid ffav&rov di, 
 
26 
 
 21 varov. 
 
 npos *iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 'E/UtfJ yap TO ^^i/ XjOJo-TO? /cai 
 
 6Vi 0^5^ ddvaros ^ireuri fjte dpviiaaaBai, 
 airbv, Chrys. Well then might the 
 Apostle say dlSa on — eh iraT-rjptav 
 when he could entertain a hope and 
 an expectation so unspeakably bless- 
 ed. The whole verse, and especially 
 this clause, is strongly confirmatory 
 of the fuller meaning of (roinipU. 
 
 21. 'E|io1.7((p] Confirmation and 
 elucidation of the last clause of ver. 
 2o. The yap has no reference to any 
 omitted clause, — ever a doubtful and 
 precarious mode of explaining this 
 particle, — but simply confirms the 
 preceding assertion by showing the 
 real nature of fw?; and Bdvaros accord- 
 ing to the Apostle's present mode of 
 regarding them ; ' in my view and de- 
 finition of the term, Life is but an- 
 other name for Christ,' Peile. The 
 emphatic i/u>l ('to me, in my merely 
 personal capacity,' see Wiesing.) is 
 thus the pronominal dat. jtidicii (De 
 W.), or perhaps more correctly and 
 more comprehensively the dat. of c*7m'- 
 cal relation {oorcnp. Gal. vi. 14); not 
 merely ' in my estimation, ' but ' in my 
 case,' 'life in my realization of it,' — a 
 dat. which is allied to, and more fully 
 developed in, the dative commodi or 
 incommodi; see Bernhardy, Synt. iii. 
 g, p. 85, and esp. Kriiger, Sprachl. § 
 48. 6. I sq., by whom this use of the 
 dative is well illustrated. 
 TO Jijv Xpio-Tos] to live is Christ, i.e. 
 living consists only in union with, 
 and devotion to Christ; my whole 
 being and activities are His ; ' quicquid 
 vivo Christum vivo,' Beng. : see Gal. 
 ii. 20, but observe the difference of the 
 application ; there the reference is to 
 faith, here rather to worts (De W.), 
 the context showing that Xpioris, be- 
 side the idea of union with Him, must 
 also involve that of devotion to His 
 service. So, perhaps too distinctly, 
 
 Mth., 'si vixero, Christo.' T6 i^c is 
 clearly the subject ('vita mea,' Syr., 
 Copt.) , the natural lite (Beng.) alluded 
 to in the preceding, and more specifi- 
 cally in the following verse. It can- 
 not refer to spirittial life (EiU., comp. 
 Chrys., Theoph.), as the antithesis 
 f^i'...o7roS. is thus obscured, and the 
 argument impaired; what fu^ is in 
 ver. 20, that must rb f^K be here. 
 Koi T& diroB. K^pSos] and [simple 
 copulative] to die is gain; death is 
 gain, as I shall thus enjoy a still 
 nearer and more blessed union with 
 my Lord ; (ra^iffrepov airrif avviffoiiai, 
 Chrys. , Theoph. K^pSos belongs only 
 to this latter clause, the full meaning 
 of which is very easily collected from 
 the context; compare verse 23. To 
 make X/). the subject to both members 
 of ther sentence and rb f^ and rb 
 dvoS. accusatives of 'reference to' 
 (Kriiger, Sprachl. § 46. 4), so. 'ut 
 [Christus] tam in vita quam in morte 
 lucrum esse prjedioetur ' (Calv. ; comp. 
 Beza), is to mar the perspicuity, and 
 to introduce a difficulty in point of 
 grammar, as rb diroB. could scarcely 
 be 'in moriendo:' such accusatives 
 commonly point to things or actions 
 which may, so to say, be conceived as 
 extensible, and over the whole of 
 which the predication can range ; see 
 Scheuerl. Synt. § g. 3, p. 68, Kriiger, 
 Sprachl. § 46. 4. 1. Numerous exam- 
 ples of similar expressions are cited by 
 Wetst. in loc. , the most pertinent of 
 which is Joseph. Bell. vn. 8. 6, avp,- 
 ^opi, rb f^c i<TTiv avSpdirois oixl Sava- 
 Tos, as it hints at the purely substan- 
 tival character of rb ^rji/ and to uto- 
 BaveCv (opp. to Alf.). The practical 
 aspects of the subject will be found 
 in Heber, Serm. xvi. xvii. 
 
 22. el 8J TO Jii]v K.T.X.] But if my 
 living in tlie flesh — (if) this is to me the 
 
I. 
 
 21, 22. 
 
 27 
 
 TO aTToOaveiv KepSof. el Se to Tnv ev a-aoKi, tovto %2 
 
 (the medium of) fruit from my labour; 
 so Vulg., Clarom., Goth., and (with 
 obscured tovto) Syr., Copt. : antithe- 
 tical sentence suggested by the re- 
 membrance of his callingas an Apostle. 
 There are difficulties in this verse in 
 the individual expressions, as well as 
 in the connexion and sequence of 
 thought. We will (i) briefly notice 
 the fornier : (a) d is not problematical, 
 'if it chance,' Tynd., Gov. Test., 
 Gran., but as Meyer correctly observes, 
 syllogistic, and virtually assertory, (p) 
 The addition h crapd does not imply 
 any qualitative difference between to 
 f^K here and to ^tjv in ver. 21 (Bill.), 
 but guards against it being under- 
 stood in the higher sense, which the 
 preceding to airoO. KipSos ('to die, i.e. 
 to Hve out of the flesh with Christ, is 
 gain ') might otherwise seem natural- 
 ly to suggest. (7) ToCro is not a re- 
 dundancy 'per Hebraismum' (see 
 Glasse, Phil. Sacr. p. 738 [219]), but 
 is designed to give special prominence 
 and emphasis to the idea contained in 
 the preceding words; oomp. Winer, 
 (^- § 23. 4, p. 144. (S) In Kapwhs ^pyov 
 the gen. is not a gen. of apposition 
 ('ipsum opus pro fruotu habet,' Beng.) , 
 nor a gen. objecti (' profit for the work,' 
 Bill.), but a simple gen. subjecti [pi-i- 
 ginis], 'proventus operis,' De W., 
 'fructus in operibus meis,' Syr., i.e. 
 ' conveys with it, is the condition of, 
 fruitfromapostolical labour,' the ^/^OK 
 referring to the laborious nature of 
 the apostolic work (Acts xiii. i, i 
 Thess. V. 13, 2 Tim. iv. 5); Kap-rroipopu 
 SiSacTKuv Kal (poiTl^oii' irdvTas, Theoph.: 
 comp. Baphel, Obs. Vol. 11. p. 622. 
 (2) The connexion then seems to be as 
 follows: in ver. 21 the Apostle had 
 spoken of life and death from a strictly 
 personal point of view {ifiol) ; in this 
 aspect death was gain. The thought 
 
 however of his official labours re- 
 minds him that his life bears bless- 
 ings and fruitfulness to others; so 
 he pauses ; ' objects, spe conversionis 
 multorum,h£eretatqueh£esitat,'Just.: 
 so in substance Theoph. (who has ex- 
 plained this clause briefly and perspi- 
 cuously), Chrys., Theod., (Ecum., and 
 after them, with some variations in 
 detail, De W., Meyer, and the best 
 modern editors. Of the other inter- 
 pretations the mos«plausibleis (a) that 
 of Auth., Beng., al., according to 
 which TOVTO K.T.X. forms the apodosis, 
 ia-rl fioi being supplied after iv capd, 
 ' but if I live in the flesh, this is,' (&c. ; 
 the lea^t so (i) that of Beza, and the 
 Genevan Version(amended by Gonyb., 
 but satisfactorily answered by Alf.), 
 according to which d is 'whether,' 
 and Kapirbs lpyov='o'peiss pretium' 
 (comp. Grot., Hamm., Soholefield, 
 Hints, p. 105, — a more than doubtful 
 translation), seil. ' and whether to live 
 in the flesh were profitable for me, and 
 what,' dtc. The objection to (a) is the 
 very harsh and unusual nature of the 
 ellipsis; to (6), independently of gram- 
 matical objections, the halting and 
 inconsequent nature of the argument; 
 see Alf. in loc. 
 
 Kal t( atpi](ro|i,ai k.t.X.] then, or 
 why, what lam to choose [observe the 
 middle] I know not; apodosis to the 
 foregoing. The principal difficulty lies 
 in the use of Kai. Though no certain 
 example of an exactly similar use of 
 ei...Ka,l has been adduced from the N. 
 T. (2 Cor. ii. 2 [De W.] is not in point, 
 the Kal being there used in rapid in- 
 terrogation, Hartung, Partik. Vol. i. 
 p. 147), yet the use of Kal at the be- 
 ginning of the apodosis is so common 
 (see Bruder, Gone. s.v. Kal, d, p. 455) 
 as to render such a use after ei by no 
 means improbable; see examples in 
 
28 
 
 IIPOS $IAinnH2IOY2. 
 
 23 fioi Kupirbi e'pyov Kal r'l alp^tronai ov yvmp'i^w avv- 
 e^ofJiat Se eK twv Svo, ri/v eviQvfjLlav e-)(oov eh to ava- 
 il. (Tw^xo/tai S^] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 vastly preponderating authority: Bee. o-w^o/iai yap. iroWifi yap] So 
 
 Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Bev., Westc. and Hort, on preponderating authority : 
 Bee. omits yap. 
 
 Hartung, Partik. s.v. xai, s, 6, Vol. 
 I. p. 130, and comp. the somewhat 
 similar use of 'atque,' Hand, Tursell. 
 Vol. I. p. 481 sq. In such oases the 
 proper force of koI is not wholly lost. 
 Just as in brief logical sentences it 
 constantly implies that if one thing be 
 true then another will be true also, 
 e.g. el (jiiaei Kifelrai k&v ^Iq, Kivqddyj, 
 Khi el pi<f Kal <pi<Tei, Arist. de Anim. 
 oh. 3, p. 9 (ed. Bekk.), — so here, if life 
 certainly subserve to apostolic useful- 
 ness, there will also be a difficulty as 
 to choice. It is thus unnecessary to 
 assume any aposiopesis after the first 
 member, soil, 'non repugno,' 'non 
 segre fero,' Muller, EiU. There is only 
 a slight pause, and slight change from 
 the expected to a more emphatic se- 
 quence, which this semi-ratiocinative 
 Kal very appropriately introduces. 
 On the use of the less exact H for 
 TTOTepov, see Winer, Gr. § 25. i, and 
 on that of the future in a delibera- 
 tive clause, Winer, ib. § 41. 4. b. 
 The strict alliance between the 
 future and the Bubj. renders such an 
 interchange very intelligible. 
 ov 'yvupC^u] J do not recognise, I do 
 not clearly perceive, — an exceptional 
 use in the N. T. of yvap., which is 
 nearly always 'notum facio.' Por 
 exx. of the present use, see Ast, Lex. 
 Plat. s.v. ; comp. Job xxxiv. 25 (LXX), 
 iv. 16 {Symm.). 
 
 23. o-vvcx<>K'°'i' 8^ K.T.X.] yea, I 
 am held in a strait by the two; anti- 
 thetical explanation of the last mem- 
 ber of ver. 22; the faintly oppositive 
 Si (not ' metabatio ' [Mey .] on the one 
 
 hand, nor equiv. to dWi, on the other) 
 placing the emphatic <rvv4xofi,ai in 
 gentle contrast with the preceding ov • 
 yvwpl^a. The reading y^p (Bee.) has 
 scarcely any critical support, and is 
 only a correction of the less under- 
 stood 5^. On the real difference be- 
 tween these two particles in sentences 
 like the present, see esp. Elotz, Devar. 
 Vol. II. p. 363. The prep. iK is here 
 not used for otto (Bloomf.), nor yet for 
 Sia (Heinr., — instrumentality would 
 have been expressed by a simple dat., 
 e.g. Matth. iv. 24, Luke viii. 37, Acts 
 xviii. 5, xxviii. 8), but with its proper 
 force points to the origin of the (tvv- 
 oxii, the sources out of which it arises ; 
 see notes ore Gal. ii. 16, where the uses 
 of this prep, in N. T. are briefly no- 
 ticed. Lastly, the article is not pro- 
 spective (comp. Syr.) but retrospective 
 (Mey., al.), referring to the two alter- 
 natives previously mentioned. This 
 is confirmed by the apparent emphasis 
 on avvix-t and the illustrative con- 
 nexion with it of the two clauses 
 which follow. TTiv liriBv- 
 
 |iCav ^x™''] J>^ving my desire; not 
 merely 'a desire,' Auth., nor 'the 
 desire previously alluded to,' Hoel., — 
 as no iiriSv/iia, strictly speaking, has 
 been alluded to, — but'thedesirewhioh 
 I now feel,' 'my desire.' The iwi- 
 Bv/da thus stands absolutely, its direc- 
 tion being defined in the words which 
 follow. A very eloquent and feeling 
 application of this text will be found 
 in Manning, Serm. xx. Vol. iii. p. 
 370 sq. els TO dvciXvo-ai] 
 
 towards departing, 'tmned to de- 
 
I. 23. 29 
 
 Xvcrat Ka) avv Xpta-rw elvat, ttoWcS yap fiaWov Koeia-- 
 
 parture;' not 'solvendi' (toO avaX., 
 Origeu, in a free citation), not even 
 quite 'to depart,' Auth., Conyb. 
 (comp. Winer, Gr. § 44. 6),— both of 
 which would seem to imply the not 
 unusual definitive gen. after iwiS. 
 (comp. Thuoyd. vii. 84, rod irmv 
 iin6.), but with the proper force of 
 the prep, els, ' desiderio tendens ad 
 dimissionem;' compare Winer, Gr. § 
 49. a. The prep, ei's is omitted in 
 DEFG; Ghrys. (comm.), apparent- 
 ly by accident, as the construction 
 would not thus be made more easy. 
 'AvaXOffM is not 'dissolvi,' Vulg., nor 
 even 'dimitti,' Syr. (comp. Schoettg. 
 in toe), but perhaps with primary 
 reference to breaking up a camp or 
 loosing an anchor, 'migrare,' ^th. 
 (comp. Judith xiii. i, ^lian, Var. 
 Hist. IV. 23), and thence, with a 
 shade of meaning imparted by the 
 context, 'disoedere a vita,' ri ivrevSep 
 aTraWay^, Theod. ; comp. notes on 
 2 Tim. iv. 6, and see Suicer, Tliesaw. 
 Vol. I. p. 286 sq., by whom this word 
 is copiously illustrated ; add too Peri- 
 zonius, on .Sllian, Var. Hist. I. c. 
 The transl. adopted by TertuU. 're- 
 cipi' has perhaps reference to the 're- 
 ceptui canere,' and is thus virtually 
 the same; comp. Mill, Prolegom. p. 
 Lxvii. KaV (riv Xp. ctvai] 
 
 From the immediate connexion of this 
 clause with waXvaai dogmatical de- 
 ductions have been made in reference 
 to the intermediate state; 'clare os- 
 tenditur animas sanctorum ex h§,c 
 vit& sine peccato migrantium statim 
 post mortem esse cum Christo,' Est. ; 
 comp. Cyr.-Alex. cited by Forbes, In- 
 struct. XIII. 8. 33, Bull, Engl. Works, 
 p. 42 (Oxford, 1844), Eeuss, ThSol. 
 Chret. IV. 21, Vol. 11. p. 240. With- 
 out presuming to make hasty deduc- 
 tions from isolated passages, we may 
 
 safely rest on the broad and sound 
 opinion of Bishop Pearson, that life 
 eternal may be regarded as initial, 
 partial, and perfeotional, and that the 
 blessed Apostle is now in the fruition 
 of that second state, and 'is with 
 Christ who sitteth at the right hand 
 of God,' Creed, Art. xii. Vol. i. p. 
 467, and comp. Clem. Bom. i Cor. § 
 5, iwopeieT) [II^Tpos] els rbv 6<l>ei\. t6- 
 irov T^s So'fijs, Polyc. ad Phil. § 9, els 
 TO" 6<j>H\6iJ,evov avToTs tottov elal vapi, 
 T(f Kvptij) : see, however, Dorner, Chr. 
 Doctr. § 153, Vol. IV. p. 403 sq., 
 and comp. Burnet, /State of Departed, 
 ch. ni. p. 58. For a practical appli- 
 cation of the verse, Fariudon, Serm. 
 Lxix. Vol. III. p. 193 (Tegg). The 
 meaning involved in the words criiv 
 Xp. elvai, in reference to the soul's in- 
 corporeal state, is explained profound- 
 ly, though perhaps somewhat singu- 
 larly, by Hofmann,ScArt7t6. II. 2, Vol. 
 II. p. 449, 'selbst korperlos, wird er 
 den Leib, in welcbem die Fville der 
 Gottheit wohnt, zu seiner Wohnung 
 haben ; ' comp. Delitzsoh, Bibl. Psy- 
 chol. VI. 6, p. 383 sq. 
 TToXXu Yap K.T.X.] for it is very far 
 better, soil, being with Christ is so 
 (for me) ; explanation of the foregoing 
 desire. The comparative strengthened 
 by iJ,S,\\or gives a force and energy to 
 the assertion that is here very notice- 
 able and appropriate; comp. Mark vii. 
 36, 2 Cor. vii. 13, and Winer, Gr. § 
 35. I, p. 214. The reading is doubt- 
 ful: y&p is omitted by DBFGKLNi; 
 great majority of mss. ; Aug., Vulg., 
 Syr., and some Ff. {Steph., Griesb.hut 
 very doubtfully); as however it is 
 found in ABCN^; jj. 67**; Copt.; 
 Clem., Or. (2), Aug. (often and explicit- 
 ly), — as D'FG show in this passage 
 marks of incertitude by reading irdirtp 
 for iroXX^, and lastly, as yiip might 
 
30 
 
 npos <i)iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 24 a-ov TO 06 eTTi/xeveiv ev rrj erapKt avajKaiorepov 01 
 a_5 vfiaq. Koi tovto ireTroiOws oTSa OTi juevS) Kai irapa- 
 
 25. Trapa/ievu] So Lachni., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 greatly preponderating authority : Rec. avii.irapaii.evQ. 
 
 have been thought to interrupt the 
 sequence, we may perhaps acquiesce 
 in its insertion, with Lachm., Tisch., 
 and even Bee, and Scholz. 
 
 24. t6 Si eiTLfilvEiv K.T.X.] yet to 
 tarry in my flesh. In the former 
 verse the Apostle stated what is Kpela- 
 aov for himself, now he turns to 
 what is avayKatbrepov in regard of 
 his converts. A^ is thus simply ' but, ' 
 'yet,' — scarcely 'nevertheless,' Auth., 
 which is commonly a more suitable 
 translation -of dXXd : on the difference 
 between these particles ('verum... 
 sed '), see Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. pp. 
 33, 361. The iirl in im/ji.. implies 
 rest in a place (comp. notes on Gal. 
 i. 18), and hints at a more protracted 
 stay; comp. Bom. vi. i. The next 
 words in rg (rapd are, as Meyer cor- 
 rectly observes, scarcely quite the 
 same as iv aapd in ver. 22 ; there the 
 expression was general, here more 
 specific and individualizing ; see 
 Kriiger, Sprachl. § 50. 2. 3. 'Ek be- 
 fore rg iro/wrf is omitted by ACX ; 10 
 mss. ; Clem., Orig. [Tisch., Rev., 
 Westc. and Hort), but is appy. genu- 
 ine. dva^KaidTcpov 81 
 vjias] is more needful on your ac- 
 count; not an inexact comparative 
 (De W.), nor to be diluted into a 
 positive (Vulg., Clarom., comp. Syr.), 
 nor with reference to the Apostle's 
 own feelings, soil. ' quam ut meo de- 
 siderio satisfiat,' Van Heng.,Beng., 
 — ^but simply 'more needful,' soil, 
 than the contrary course, than ava- 
 XOtrot K.T.X. The latter course St 
 Paul might have thought ovayKaiov on 
 his own account, a thing to be prayed 
 for and hastened ; his continuance in 
 
 life however was dvayKaiirepov on 
 account of his converts. The mean- 
 ing proposed by Loesn., ' prsestat,' 
 ' melius est ' (comp. iEth.), has no 
 lexical authority, and is not sup- 
 ported by the exx. adduced, Ois. 
 
 P- 353- 
 
 25. KoX TOVTO 'TTEiroiSus] And 
 
 being persuaded, being sure, of this ; 
 scil. that my iirtfiivet,v iv t'Q ffapxl is 
 more necessary on your account. 
 IZcTroiSis has thus its natural force 
 and construction, and is not to be 
 explained away adverbially, ttcttoi- 
 BoToit Kal aSiaraKTUs otSa, Theoph., 
 ' oonfidenter,' Syr., Goth., Copt., or 
 blended with otSa (iEth.), hut is 
 to be closely connected with toOto, 
 while oTda is joined only with 6ti ; 
 ' persuadens mihi vitam meam vobis 
 esse [magis] necessariam, scio quod 
 Deus me vobis adhuc concedet,' 
 Corn, a Lap. 
 
 ot8a] 7 know; not with any undue 
 emphasis, ' prse video,' Van Heng., 
 for see ch. ii. r 7, but simply ' I know,' 
 so. it is my present feeling and con- 
 viction; comp. Acts XX. 25. For 
 somewhat analogous uses of oUa, 
 see the exx. adduced by Van Heng., 
 but observe that even in the strongest 
 (Hom. II. VI. 447) olSa still refers 
 more to the persuasions of the 
 speaker than to any absolutely pro- 
 phetic certitude. irapa- 
 fuva] continue here (on earth), ' blei- 
 ben und dnbleiben,' Meyer, who aptly 
 cites Herod. I. 30, rixva iKyendfieva 
 Kal TraiTa irapa/ietvavTa ; add Plato, 
 Phcedo, p. 115 D, ivaSav irlw to tpdp- 
 fMKOv, oiKiri ifuv irapancvu, ib. Grito, 
 p. 51 D, Tapa/iclvri, opp. to fi.eroi.KeTi' 
 
24 2( 
 
 31 
 
 fievw iraa-iv vfuv ejy t^v vfivov irpoKOirriv Kai -^apav Tit 
 TTicrTetot, Iva to Kaif^ifia vnwv irepiaaevri ev XjOiffTijiJ a6 
 
 aXXo76. On the reading see critical 
 note, xaciv i|ji.tv may be the dative 
 of interest, ' to support and comfort 
 you ' (Kriiger, Sprachl. § 48. 4), but 
 is here far more naturally governed 
 by the irapd in the compound ; see 
 Plato, Plimdq, I.e., Apol. p. 39 e, 
 appy. Protag. p. 335 d, and contrast 
 I Cor. xvi. 6, irpbs v^S,s...irapaiievw, 
 where the irpds gains its force from 
 the intended journey to them just 
 before mentioned ; here the Apostle 
 is mentally present with those he is 
 addressing.. This is a somewhat more 
 common construction than Kriiger 
 {Sprachl. § 48. 11. 9) seems inclined 
 to admit. 
 
 tls Trpi v\Laiv K.T.X.] for your further- 
 ance in, and joy of the faith ; not ' for 
 your furth., and for your joy, (£e.,' 
 Van Heng., — there being here no 
 reason whatever to depart from the 
 ordinary rule ; see Winer, Gr. § 19. 
 4. d, and comp. Middleton, Gr. Art. 
 p. 368. It is scarcely necessary to 
 say that there is not here any kind 
 of inversion (' for your joy and for 
 the increase of your faith ') as in 
 Syr., nor any disjunction (' for your 
 furth., and for your faith, and for 
 your joy'), as in .^th., nor any con- 
 junction ( ' for the advancement of the 
 joy of your f.'), as Mackn. : still the 
 relation of the gen. to the two sub- 
 stantives seems slightly different ; in 
 the first case it is a gen. suijecti, 
 referable perhaps to the class of the 
 possess, gen.; in the latter it is a gen. 
 originis, ' quod ex fide promanat,' 
 Zanch., and belongs to the general 
 division of the gen. of ablation; 
 comp. Scheuerl. Synt. § 11. 1, p. 79, 
 Donalds. Gr. § 448 sq. On xapd, 
 comp. Beuss, Thgol. Ghrit. iv. 18, 
 Vol. II. p. 202, whose definition how- 
 
 ever, ' cette sdr^nit^ de l'4me qui la 
 preserve de tout d^oouragement dans 
 I'adversitS,' imparts to x"-?^ too P*^- 
 sive a character. Xapd is rather that 
 active emanation of love and thank- 
 fulness which forma a sort of spi- 
 ritual equipoise to elprfvi] and uVo- 
 
 26. iva tA KaiJxif)i.a k.t.X.] in 
 order that your matter of boasting 
 may abound in Christ Jesus in me; 
 more specific statement of the pur- 
 pose of the Apostle's continuance 
 with his converts; the previous ab- 
 stract eh TTjv vfjMV irpoK. k.t.\. being 
 expanded into the more definite and 
 concrete 'Iva k.t.X. These words, 
 simple as they seem to be, have not 
 been always clearly understood. 
 In the first place Kavx^K'"' ^^ ^°^ 
 the same as Kaixt'"-^ > iiot ' gloriatio 
 quS, gloriamini,' Corn, a Lap., but 
 'gloriandi materies ' (n?nri, Jerem. 
 xvii. 14), as in Eom. iv. 'z, 1 Cor. ix. 
 IS, and appy. everywhere in the 
 N. T. (see notes on Gal. vi. 4), this 
 ' materies ' being to' ia-rriplx^ai en tJ 
 iriffTei, Chrys., or generally, their 
 possession of the Gospel (Mey.), 
 their condition as Christians. Again, 
 ev XpuTTu is not to be connected 
 directly or indirectly with Ka&xVf-a 
 (Toccasion de vous glorifier d'etre 
 unis k Christ,' Bill.), but with Trep<.<T- 
 aeiy, the qualitative iv Xp. defining, 
 as it were, the blessed sphere in which 
 the increase takes place, and out of 
 which, Christianly speaking, it has 
 no existence. Lastly iv i\i.o\ is 
 
 neither =5i' i/jiov, Heinr., nor 'prop- 
 ter me,' Grot., nor even ' de me,' 
 Beza, but 'in me,' Vulg., — the pre- 
 position here marking the substratum 
 of the action, the mirror, as it were 
 (Zanch.), in which the whole gra- 
 
32 
 
 npo2 $iAinriH2ioY2. 
 
 'Iri<rov iv ifioi Sia Ttjt efirjif irapovcriai -jraXiv irpoi vfj.af. 
 
 27 M.6l'0V a^lCOt TOV evayyeXlOV TOV Live as becpmeth the 
 
 ' 's II Gospel, that whether 
 
 you. Be not dismayed, ye are sufferers for (jhrist. 
 
 cious procedure was displayed; see 
 notes ore Gal. i. 24. It is thus not to 
 be connected with Kai5xw» directly, 
 or as in Chrys. by inversion, iva. I^w 
 Kavx^ffBai h vfuv fiei^ovusj nor even 
 with TTcpurff. alone, but with the com- 
 plete idea to Kaix- Trepura. iv Xp. 
 Thus the whole seems clear : the Kai- 
 XW is their condition as Christians ; 
 iv Xp. defines the holiness and purity 
 of its increase ; iv i/iol the seat and 
 substratum of the so purified action. 
 Sia Ttjs K.T.X.] through my presence 
 with you again ; these words are to 
 be closely connected with i/iol, as de- 
 fining the exact means by which the 
 increase of matter of boasting, thus 
 specifically Christian, is to take place 
 iv i/j.ol. Passages like the present, 
 in which different predications are 
 grouped closely together, will repay 
 careful analysis. Here it will be seen 
 that iv Xp. is the mystical and gene- 
 ric predication of manner, iv i/wl of 
 place, Sid, rrji Trap, of special instru- 
 mentality, involving also in its sub- 
 stantive the predication of time ; 
 eomp. notes onEph.i.^, and Donalds. 
 Gr. § 444. 
 
 ExHOBTATION AND DOCTRINE 
 
 (ch. i. 27— ii. 18). 
 ^1 — 30' Exhortations as to life 
 and practice. 27. Mdvov] 
 
 Only : my persuasion then being as I 
 have told you, this is the sole thing 
 that I specially press upon you, and 
 exact from you as indispensable ; 
 TovTo iffTL TO ^7yro6^evov flOVOV Kal 
 oiSiv oXXo, Chrys.; compare Gal. ii. 
 10, V. 13, in which latter passage, as 
 here ' verborum tanquam agmen ab 
 illo ducitur,' Van Heng. In this one 
 requisition many weighty duties are 
 
 involved. 
 
 ToO eJaYY- tow Xp.] the Gospel of 
 Christ, i.e. which relates to, which 
 tells of Christ ; toC Xp. being the gen. 
 objecti, not, as ^th. would seem to 
 imply, subjecti, ' the Gospel taught by 
 Him.' In such cases the nature of 
 the gen. is not perfectly certain, but 
 from the analogy supplied by the 
 partially similar use of ^077. with 
 other genitives, it is more probably 
 objecti; see Winer, Gr. § 30. i, p. 
 168, but observe that the ref. to Bom. 
 i. 3 is of doubtful pertinence. 
 iro\iT{ve(r6e] have your conversation, 
 behave yourselves, or more exactly 
 ' lead your life of (Christian) citizen- 
 ship;' oomp. Acts xxiii. r. It can 
 scarcely be doubted that this word, 
 occurring only this once in St Paul's 
 Epp., though examples of very si- 
 milar exhortations are not wanting 
 (Eph. iv. I, Col. i. 10, I Thess. ii. 12) 
 has been studiedly used instead of 
 the more common irepiirarecv, to give 
 force to the idea of fellow-citizen- 
 ship, — not specially and peculiarly 
 with Christ (Heinr.), but with one 
 another in Him, — joint membership 
 in a heavenly iroXfreu^a, comp. ch. 
 iii. 20. Numerous exx. of a similar 
 metaphorical use of the word (' vi- 
 vere, non quoad spiritum et animam, 
 sed quoad mores,' Loesn., 'ad nor- 
 mam institutorum^ in EepubhcS. 
 mores vitaeque rationem componere, ' 
 Krebs) will be found in Wetst. in 
 loc, Krebs, 06s. p. 245, Loesn. 06s. 
 p. 226, and esp. in Suicer, Thesaur. 
 Vol. II. p. 799 sq. 
 
 tva €(t6 4X6uv K.T.X.] in order that, 
 whether having come and seen you or 
 else remaining absent, I may hear the 
 
T. 27. 
 
 33 
 
 idwv vfiat ene airwv aKOvw ra irept vftoov, on a-TtjKere 
 ev evt irvevfjiaTt, ftta y^X^ o'vvaOXovvTet Tp iriarei tov 
 
 27. aKoiui] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Bev., Westc. and Hort, on pre- 
 ponderating authority: Bee, and former add. of tliis Commentary, axoia-a. 
 
 things concerning you. This clause, 
 though perfectly intelligible, is appy. 
 somewhat inexact in structure. It- 
 would seem that dicoiJw really per- 
 forms a kind of double office ; in the 
 one case it stands in antithesis to 
 ISiiv (perorat. variat.) ;. in the second 
 place it repeats itself (Van Heng.), 
 or suggests some appropriate verb 
 (ei<t>p6.vBoi, Chrys., yviS, De W.) im- 
 mediately before Srt: in a word, 
 quoad sensuvi it seems to belong to 
 airdv, quoad structuram to IVa. At- 
 tempts have been made to defend 
 the construction as it stands, either 
 (a) by referring axoiiji zeugmatically 
 to both clauses, 'j'apprenne £l, votre 
 sujet que,' Bill.; or (/3) by under- 
 standing it to imply ' hearing /rom 
 themselves ' in reference to the first 
 clause, ' hearing from others ' in the 
 second, Mey. This last explanation 
 is ingenious, but is appy. precluded 
 by the opposition between ISCnv vfMs 
 and d/coiiw rk wepl i/iuv, which seems 
 too distinct to have been otherwise 
 than specially intended. There must 
 be few however who do not prefer the 
 warm-hearted incuria of such a bre- 
 vity of expression to restorations like 
 e?re 4\Si)i>. Kal iSiiv, eire dirOiv aKoiau) 
 rk irepl iixwv, aKoiiia 8n k.t.X., or still 
 worse, oTric Kal 6,Korj(ras tci it. v/i. 
 yva in k.t.X., suggested by modern 
 commentators. on <mJK6T€] 
 
 that ye are standing, fuller expansion 
 and definition of t& vepl vfiiSv ; the 
 explanatory clause being in struc- 
 tural dependence upon the principal 
 member, according to the ordinary 
 and simplest form of attraction ; see 
 esp. Winer, Gr. § 66. e,, where this. 
 
 E. 
 
 and other forms of attraction and 
 assimilation are perspicuously dis- 
 cussed. The present form of attrac- 
 tion is especially common after verbs 
 of knowledge, perception, t&c, e.g. 
 Mark xii. 34, Acts iii. 10, i Cor. xv. 
 3, I Thess. ii. 1 , al. STiixeic, it may 
 be observed, is not per se ' to stand 
 fast,' Auth., 'perstare,' Beza, but 
 simply ' stare,' Vulg., Syr., Goth., 
 the ideas of readiness (oomp. Chrys.), 
 persistence, cfcc, being imparted by 
 the context; comp. ch. iv. i, i Cor. 
 xvi. 13, Gal. V. I, I Thess. iii. 8, 
 2 Thess. ii. 15. €v tvi 
 
 irv£v|xaTi] in one spirit; in one com- 
 mon higher principle of our nature. 
 The addition /jiif ^vxS seems cer- 
 tainly to show that irveS/ia is here 
 the human spirit, the higher part of 
 our immaterial nature (see Schubert, 
 Gesch. der Seele, § 48, Vol. 11. p. 498), 
 that in which the agency of the Holy 
 Spirit is especially seen and felt. 
 This common unity of the spirit is 
 however so obviously the effect of the 
 inworking of the Holy Spirit, that an 
 indirect reference to rb Hvevfxa (comp. 
 Bph. iv. 4) becomes necessarily in- 
 volved. Indeed in most cases in the 
 N. T. it may be said that in the men- 
 tion of the human vpeu/ia some refer- 
 ence to the eternal Spirit may always 
 be recognised; see notes on 2 Tim. i. 
 7, and comp. Delitzsoh, Bihl. Psychol. 
 IV. 5, p. 144 sq. |x.i^ »|»»)XTi 
 
 K.T.X.] with one soul striving together 
 for the faith of the Gospel; making 
 your united efforts for the common 
 faith from one common centre and 
 seat of interests, afiections, and ener- 
 gies. As the higher Tvev/ia which 
 
 D 
 
34 
 
 npo2 $iAmnHsioYS. 
 
 28 evayyeXlov, kui fiij irTvpoixevoi ev fAi]Sev\ viro twv avri- 
 Kei/xevm, i}Tii ecrTiv avroii evSei^ii aTrwXe/of, vfiwv Se 
 
 28. i(TTlp aiiTots] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 very greatly preponderating authority : Bee, airoh pAv iffTiv. v/iSk] So 
 
 the above-mentioned edd. on clearly preponderating authority: Mec, v/uv. 
 
 gave direction was to be one and 
 common to them all, so was the 
 lower fvx^ which obeyed those be- 
 hests to be one, — one common seat 
 of concordant affections and ener- 
 gies. The remark of Bengel is true 
 and deep ; ' est interdum inter sanc- 
 tos naturalis aliqua antipathia : h£ec 
 vinoitur ubi unitas est non solum 
 spiritus sed etiam animae.' On the 
 difference between the TveO/ia, ' vis 
 superior, agens, imperans in homiue,' 
 and the 'pvxv, the sphere of the will 
 and affections, the centre of the per- 
 sonality, see Olshausen, Opuscula, 
 Art. VI. p. 145 sq., Beck, Bibl. See- 
 lenlehre, 11. 12, 13, p. 30 sq. 
 (TuvaOXovvTes must be united with 
 lju.g. fvxvt thus forming a participial, 
 and indeed psychological parallel to 
 (TT-fiK. iv hi TTv. It is somewhat sin- 
 gular that the best ancient Vv. (Syr., 
 Vulg., Clarom., MWa.., Copt.), with 
 Chrys., al., agree in referring /uq, 
 ^vxv *'" ffTiyKere. Such a construction 
 however has but little to recommend 
 it in point of grammar, and still less 
 in point of psychology: /uf fuxv 
 stands correctly in a prominent 
 place after the semi-emphatic iv hi 
 irv. (comp. Jelf, Gr. § 902), and 
 forms a modal adjunct to the unde- 
 fined trvvaBXovvTes, especially signifi- 
 cant and appropriate; cT-fiKeiv iv 
 TTveOfuiTL, (TVvadXetv r^ ^iJXV' The 
 force of the prep, (rdv has been dif- 
 ferently estimated ; it is referred by 
 the Greek expositors to the fellow- 
 ship of the Philippians {(rvnirapaXa/jt,- 
 ^cwere dXXijXous, Chrys.); by Meyer 
 aud others to fellowship with St 
 
 Paul ; the former seems more suit- 
 able to the context. rf 
 irfoTtt] for the faith ; dat. commodi : 
 not under the regimen of triv, ' adju- 
 vantes fidem, ' Erasm., ' striving in 
 concert with the faith,' Lightf., — a 
 personification of ir/o-ris of which no 
 example has been adduced ; — a dat. 
 instrum. (more precisely termed by 
 Kriiger a ' dynamic ' dative, Sprachl. 
 §48. 15), 'fide Bvang.,' Calv., 'per 
 fidem Evang.,' Beza, — this construc- 
 tion having previously occurred in 
 the case of fu.^ ^vxv- Hio-tis here, as 
 nearly always in the N. T., has a 
 subjective reference : see notes on 
 Gal. i. 23. 
 
 28. TTTupopievoi] being terrified: 
 air. '\ey6/ji,. in N. T. ; properly used 
 in reference to scared horses (Died. 
 
 Sic. XVII. 34, TTTVpO/ievOL TO, x^X'"^ 
 
 SieffdovTo), thence generally, though 
 often with some tinge of its more 
 special meaning, as in Plut. Mor. p. 
 800 Cj ;ti^Te o\pei jJ.ilTe (piaii^ WTvpo- 
 fievov, and lastly, as here, in a purely 
 general sense, e.g. [Plato] Axioch. p. 
 370 A, ovK dv wore irrvpet'qs tov Bava- 
 Tov; compare Hesych. irTiperaf crel- 
 erai, 0o/3eiToi, (pplTTei, and Kypke, 
 Obs. Vol. II. p. 312. It is not im- 
 probably derived from a root nTY-, 
 and allied with irToioi ; see Benfey, 
 Wurzellex. Vol. 11. p. 100. 
 T«v dvTiKEiii^vuv] the opposers, your 
 adversaries; comp. 1 Cor. xvi. 9, 2 
 Thess. ii. 4, i Tim. v. 14, Luke xiii. 
 17, xxi. 15. Who these were is not 
 perfectly certain. The context and 
 general use of the word seem both 
 to point to open and avowed enemies 
 
I. 28, 29. 35 
 
 a-u)Ttipiai, Kul TOVTO airo Qeov' on vfiiv i)(apla6>] rb 2,g 
 
 of Christianity; not Judaists, but 
 unbelieving Jews (Usteri, Lehrb. p. 
 332, oomp. Acts xvii. 5), or, perhaps 
 even more probably, Gentiles; comp. 
 Acts xvi. 19 sq. ■tJTis 
 
 IotCv K.T.X.] the which is to them, 
 seeing it is to them; viz. when they 
 see, as they cannot fail to do, if they 
 will pause to consider, that they 
 cannot intimidate you; orav yi.p 0! 
 SiiljKovTes tQv BictiKOfi^vuv fiij vepiy^- 
 vdivrai, oi iTipovKeioiTet twv iiri^ov- 
 "Kevofi^fioVj ol Kparovvres rdv Kparov- 
 fi^vuiv, oiK airbOev ^irrai SrjKov airols 
 Sn diroKoOvTai, Sri ovSiv l<rxi<rov(Tiv ; 
 Chrys. The Sms, as in Eph. iii. 13 
 al., has here a faint explanatory 
 force (see esp. notes on Gal. iv. 24), 
 and is the logical relative, to liTJ 
 vTvpdn. K.T.\., though grammatically 
 connected (by attraction) with the 
 predicate Mei^ts ; see exx. of this 
 species of a,ttraotion in Winer, Gr. 
 § 24. 3 ; oomp. also § 66. 5. 2, and 
 Madvig, Synt. § 98. The dative 
 avTols is the dat. incomm., or of 
 'interest' (Eruger, Sprachl. § 48. 4), 
 and is dependent on IvSk^is, not on 
 airiaXelas (Holem.) — a needlessly in- 
 volved construction. vjiuv 
 81 <r<i)TT)p£as] but of your salvation; 
 scil. of final salvation, as opp. to the 
 preceding airuXeia ; ' ipsos perdet et 
 ducet in gehennam, vos autem ducet 
 ad salutem et gloriam,' Corn, a Lap.; 
 compare similar antitheses, Eom. ix. 
 22 sq., I Cor. i. 18, al., and on the 
 force of aTukeia, notes on 1 Tim. vi. 
 9. Kal toOto K.T.X.] and 
 this from God, comp. Eph. ii. 8 ; i.e. 
 not merely 'vos salutem consecu- 
 turos esse,' Calv., which would ar- 
 bitrarily limit TOVTO to the latter 
 member ; nor even ' illud, adversarios 
 quidem perituros, vos vero salutem,' 
 <&c.. Grot., but, as the consolatory 
 
 nature of the context seems to re- 
 quire, with reference to the tohole 
 preceding (certainly not succeeding, 
 Syr., ^th., Clem.-Alex. Strom, iv. 
 p. 604, ed. Pott.) declaration, in fact 
 to &S«fts (Peile, De W., Alf.); 'et 
 hoc sane non augurium humanum 
 est, sed divinum,' Van Heng., and 
 similarly Michaelis. Whether it be 
 recognised or not as such, there still 
 is this token of the issue for either 
 side, and it is from God; comp. 
 Wiesing. in loc. 
 
 29. oTi u|itv K.T.X.] Eeason for 
 the declaration immediately preced- 
 ing, by an appeal to their own cases : 
 not exactly motives to steadfastness 
 (De Wette) ; as, in the first place, 
 the exhortation to be steadfast is 
 implicit rather than explicit; and, 
 secondly, such motives would have 
 been more naturally introduced by 
 yap. The Apostle says, the ?;'5eifis 
 K.T.X. is verily not a 'humanum' 
 but a 'divinum augurium,' because 
 the grace given to you (observe the 
 slightly emphatic position, — what- 
 ever it may be to others) is such 
 that you are thereby enabled not 
 only to believe in Christ, but also to 
 suffer for Him : the double favour 
 you have received affords the surest 
 proof of the essentially divine nature 
 of the token ; see Meyer in loc. 
 i\apltr9r\] it was freely given; rb 
 irdv avandels T(p Oeip, Kal x^pu' ehai 
 \4ywv Kal xapicr/ia xal dupe&v ri iri/j- 
 Xav vTckp XpuxTov, Chrys. The aorist 
 is used as referring to the period 
 when the initial grace which has 
 since wrought in the hearts of the 
 Philippians was first given : xap'ffTai 
 would be too present, and indeed 
 prospective (comp. Kriiger, Sprachl. 
 § 53- 0' *° s'^i' *^^ actual circum- 
 stances ; KexapuTTai would express 
 
 D 2 
 
36 
 
 npo2 *iAinnHsiOY2. 
 
 virep 2\.pi(TTOV, ov jxovov to ejj avTov iricrreveiv, aWa 
 30 Kai TO virep avrov vao'yeiv, top avTov a-yoij'a e^oi'Tey 
 
 oiov ei'ocTe ev e/jLoi xa) vvv uKovere ev i/j,o[, 
 II. E? Tii odv -TrapiKXricrii iu Xpmrw, f„Xin'ht??i?^w^aI 
 
 Christ, who humbled Himself unto death, and 
 was exalted with every measure of exaltation. 
 
 30. etdere] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on very 
 clearly preponderating authority: Rec, iSere, — a reading whicli appears only 
 to have arisen from the interchange of ei and i (itacism) ; see Scrivener, Col- 
 lation, &a. III. 3, p. Ixix. 
 
 that the effects of the x^pi^'^l'^ ^.re 
 remaining, which, though probahly 
 really the case, less perfectly har- 
 monizes with the language of implied 
 exhortation than the simple reference 
 to what they once received, and must 
 show that they now possess. The es- 
 sential character of the tense (' quod 
 prseteriit, sed ita ut non definiatur 
 quam late pateat id quod actum est,' 
 Fritz, de Aor. Vi, p. 17 sq.) may 
 here be easily traced. 
 TO liirip XpioTov is not 'in Ohristi 
 negotio,' Beza (comp. Auth.), but is 
 logically dependent on the following 
 iraffx"") ^^^ would have been struc- 
 turally associated with it if the 
 Apostle had not paused to interpo- 
 late a clause {ov fiovov — vTrip airov) 
 that serves materially to heighten 
 the assertion and add to its signifi- 
 cance : iK€t fi^v 6tp€L\iT7js elfd, ivrav6a 
 6^ 6<p€i\h-7jv ^x^ ^^^ "Kpicrrov, Chrys. 
 So expressly Syr., Mth., both of 
 which suppress in translation the 
 prefixed to vir^p Xp. 
 
 30. 8xovT€s] as you have : further 
 specification of the preceding iraa- 
 Xeiy, with a consolatory turn sug- 
 gested by the associated example ; 
 Kal TO jrapiSeiyfm ^ere. vaKiv airois 
 ivalpei, Chrys. The structure is ' ad 
 sensum' rather than 'ad verbum;' 
 the participle being constructed with 
 the u/teis which is practically in- 
 volved in the preceding verse, rather 
 
 than with the ipuv which immediate- 
 ly precedes : see esp. Eph. iii. 18, iv. 
 2. Such relapses of the participle into 
 the nominative are far too coromon 
 to render it necessary for us, with 
 Beng., Lachm., al., to enclose 57TIS — 
 airov irda-xciv in a parenthesis : see 
 exx. in Winer, Gr. § 63. 2, Jelf, Gr. 
 § 707. The frequent and almost 
 idiomatic occurrence of such anaco- 
 lutha seems to be referable to the 
 practically weaker force of the ob- 
 lique cases of participles. 
 oW etScTc Iv IfioC] such as you saw 
 in me, sc. when I was with you at 
 Philippi: comp. Acts xvi. 16 sq. : 
 OVK elirev aKTjKdare, oW etdere' Kal 
 yap eicei TJOXtjo-ev iv ^AItitiis, Chiys. 
 In the expression iv 4/iol the prep, 
 marks as it were the substratum of 
 the action ; see Winer, Gr. § 48. a, 
 and comp. notes on Gal. i. 24. There 
 is thus no need, with Vulg., Syr., 
 Mth. , to translate the second iv i/iol 
 ' de me : ' as the Philippians saw the 
 dyiiv when he was present with them, 
 so now they hear of it in his Epistle, 
 in which he as it were personally 
 speaks to them ; comp. Meyer in loc. 
 
 Chap. 11. i — n. Exhortation to 
 unity, and to humility, after the 
 pattern of Christ. i . EC tis o6v] 
 If then, &o. The oSv, which has 
 here its reflexive rather than collective 
 force, recalls the readers to the con- 
 
I. 30, II. I. 37 
 
 ei Tt irapa/JivOiov ayairrn, el m KOivwvia Tlveu/xaTos, 
 
 sideration of what their duty ought 
 to be under existing circumstances, 
 ■with a retrospective reference to the 
 exhortation in ch. i. 27; 'revocat oSi/ 
 lectorem ad rem prsesentem, id est, 
 qu» nunc cum maxime agitur, eodem 
 prorsus modo quo Latina particula 
 igitur,' Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 717. 
 Beza's correction of the Vulg. 'ergo' 
 to ' igitur ' is therefore judicious. On 
 the exact difference between these 
 particles, see Hand, Tursell. Vol. iii. 
 p. 187. irapaK\. Iv Xp.] 
 
 exhortation in Christ, i.e. exhorta- 
 tion specified and characterized by 
 being in flim as its sphere and ele- 
 ment. This important modal ad- 
 junct defines the 7rapa,K\rjtns as being 
 essentially Christian, 'quam [qualem] 
 dat conjunotio cum Christo,' Wahl ; 
 it was only 'in Him' that its highest 
 nature was realisable; oomp. notes 
 on Eph. iv. - 1. IlapdKKii<ns is ap- 
 parently here 'exhortation' (comp. i 
 Cor. i. 10, Eom. xii. 8, and Fritz. 
 Bom. Vol. I. p. 32), not 'consolatio,' 
 Vulg., Syr. (comp. Goth., Copt.), 
 which, though lexically tenable (see 
 Knapp, Script. Var. Arg. Vol. i. 
 p. 132 sq., and comp. notes ore 
 r Thess. v. 11), seems here some- 
 what tautologous when wapafi-iBtov so 
 immediately follows. The exact 
 
 distinction between the clauses is 
 worthy of notice : the first {iv Xp.) 
 and third (Xlvei/j..), as Meyer ob- 
 serves, certainly point to the ohjective 
 principles of Christian life, while the 
 second (d7a7r7;s) and fourth (ff7rXa7- 
 Xva. n.. oIkt.) point to the subjective 
 elements: so also Wiesing., who 
 however somewhat unsatisfactorily 
 refers the first two members to St 
 Paul, the last two to the Philippians. 
 Surely the very terms of the ex- 
 hortation seem to imply that all 
 
 must be referred to the Philippians. 
 It is the hoped-for and indirectly 
 assumed existence of these four ele- 
 ments among his converts that leads 
 the Apostle so pressingly to beseech 
 them to fulfil his joy : oomp. Chrys., 
 who very well illustrates the force 
 and meaning of the appeal. 
 irapapvOiov d^.] comfort, or consola- 
 tion, of love; 'solatium caritatis,' 
 Vulg., compare Syr. ('loquutio in 
 cor'), Mth., and appy. Copt.; not 
 'winning persuasion,' Wiesing., — a 
 meaning which is defensible (oomp. 
 Plato, Legg. ix. p. 880 a, iropo/tuffZois 
 eiireiOris yiyveffOai), but here appy. 
 precluded by the parallelism crirXdy- 
 XPa KoX oIkt. in the fourth clause. 
 The gen. ayairris is the gen. of the 
 source or agent, 'comfort such as 
 love supplies;' see Scheuerl. Synt' 
 § 17, p. 126. KoivwvCa IIv.] 
 
 fellowship of the Spirit; gen. objecti, 
 communion with, participation in, 
 the gifts and influence of the Holy 
 Spirit ; ttiv /j^ctoxv" cvtov Kal t^c 
 p.eTaK-i]\piv Kaff ijv d7iafd|Ue0a, Theoph. 
 on 2 Cor. xiii. 14: so expressly jEth., 
 'partioeps fuit in Spiritu;' oomp. 
 Chrys. The gen. at first sight might 
 seem a gen. subjecti as above, — a 
 construction both lexically and gram- 
 matically defensible (comp. Fritz. 
 Bom. Vol. III. p. 81, 287), but here 
 somewhat at variance with the pre- 
 vailing use and reference of Koivuivla 
 and Kou'ui'os (comp. i Cor. i. 9, 2 Pet. 
 i. 4) in passages of this doctrinal 
 aspect ; see Meyer on 1 Cor. xiii. 14, 
 comp. Pearson, Greed, Vol. i. p. 419 
 (ed. Burton), and the good sermon 
 of Waterland, Works, Vol. v. p. 351. 
 The Spirit here is not the human 
 spirit, 'animorum conjunctio,' Tirin. 
 (Pol. Syn.), Be W., al., but the per- 
 sonal Holy Spirit, as the parallelism 
 
38 
 
 npos $iAinnH2ioYs. 
 
 3 el Tty (TirXay^va Koi oiKTipinoi, TrXijpuxTaTe /xov 
 Tijv ^apav, iva to aiiTO cf)poviJTe, t^v avrhv ayuTTtjv 
 
 i. 6? T« <TT\dyx'"^} So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and HorJ, 
 on the singularly preponderating authority of aU the uncial MSS., at least 
 50 mss., and several Ft. It seems to have arisen from an erroneous (para- 
 diplomatic) repetition of the preceding tis, a supposition somewhat confirmed 
 by the fact that D^L; 15 mss., read ns for ti. before wapa/iiBiov. The fact 
 that all MSS. support so manifest an error need not shake our faith in ' viere 
 MSS. testimony' (Alf.); it rather seems to hirit at the general fidelity of the 
 transcribers. They could scarcely have aU made the same error ; but may 
 very probably have studiously perpetuated it on the authority of two or three 
 more ancient documents, which may have derived it, in the first instance, 
 from the error of the very first writer down of the fervently dictated words. 
 At any rate, it would seem that ns must go into the text, instead of the nva 
 of former edd. of this Commentary. Even in such a, case as this we must 
 leave, and not mend, what seems to be the true text. 
 
 to the first clause, and the recurrence 
 of the expression in 2 Cor. xiii. 14, 
 seem very distinctly to suggest. So 
 Mth. (Pol., but not Piatt), which 
 expressly inserts Syios. 
 et Tis <rirX. k.t.X.] if any bowels 
 (tender mercies) and compassions, — 
 the translation being, in this singular 
 instance, in accordance with the 
 sense and not the exact words : see 
 critical note. By comparing James 
 V, II, and especially Col. iii. 12, 
 (nr\ayxva olKTLpfiov, it would seem 
 that there is some distinction be- 
 tween the two words, and that the 
 latter is not a mere explanation of 
 the former (Zanch.). That advanced 
 by Tittmann (Synon. 1. p. 69) seems 
 satisfactory, 'o-ttX. amorem vehe- 
 mentiorem quemcunque denotat 
 {(TTOfryliv, comp. Philem. 12) ; oIkt. 
 misericordiam proprie denotat, seu 
 sensum doloris ex malis seu incom- 
 modis aliorum;' comp. Grot, in 
 loc. 
 
 2. irXT]puo-aTe] fulfil, make com- 
 plete; o6k elire iroi-ljaaTi iioi, dXXd 
 irXTjpJjffaTe* ToureoTtc ^p^atr^e ^vreveiv 
 in i/wt.' ■^dr] /itoi jiiTediliKaTe rb elp-q- 
 veiav, dXX' eis tAos iiri6vfi,ui ftffeix, 
 
 Chrys. The position of /lov before 
 Xapou/ does not seem intended to con- 
 vey any emphasis ; see the long list 
 of similar exx. in Winer, Gr. § 22. 
 7, note I. 
 
 %va TO avTo K.T.X.] that so ye be 
 liJee-minded. The particle iva does 
 not here denote simple purpose 
 (Mey.), — a forced and unsatisfactory 
 interpretation which ignores the 
 usage of later Greek and the analogy 
 of the modern vd (see Gorpe, Gr. p. 
 129 sq.), — but, with a weakened 
 force, blends the subject of the en- 
 treaty, (tc, with the purpose of 
 making it : so rightly Chrys., tI /3ou- 
 Xet; tva (re Kiv^vvcov diraWd^CiifieVj tva 
 
 ffol Tt X^PVy^^f^f^^^ ') OitSh TOVTtOV tpij- 
 
 fftv, dXX' tva ufieU t6 aiirb tppovijre. 
 See notes ore Eph. i. 17, where this 
 and other uses of iva are briefly in- 
 vestigated. Van Heng. refers 'ii>a to 
 an omitted ravrriv, so. x^po'' ravTriv 
 tva K.T.\.: this seems very unsatis- 
 factory. To airo ^pov. is rightly ex- 
 plained by Tittm. {Synon. p. 67) as 
 ' eandem sententiam habere, idem 
 sentire, velle, et quserere,' while 
 the following participial clauses, TT)y 
 air^v 117. ?x- S'l'i cit"!/. to fr ^p.. 
 
II. 2, 3- 
 
 39 
 
 e^^ovrei, (rvvy^v)(oi to iv (ppovovvTe^, firiSev /cara epi- 3 
 Oeiav fit/Se' Kara KevoSo^lav, aWa t^ TaTreivocppocrwri 
 
 3. /ii)5^ /cord] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 clearly preponderating authority: Rec. ij. The internal argument, that 
 this /jiriSi is a conformation to the preceding furid^v, is not sufficiently strong 
 to suggest any modification of the above decision. 
 
 more nearly define its essence and 
 characteristics. See Fritz. Rom. 
 xii. 16, Vol. in. p. 87, who how- 
 ever does not appear quite exact 
 in separating (r\jv\//. from to Iv ippov. ; 
 see below. 
 
 Ti]v aiTi]vd7. ?x-] having the same 
 love ; closer definition of to airb ippo- 
 velv : iarl yd,p Kal to airro ^poveTv Kal /it) 
 Ayiirijv Ix^iv, Chrys. The true nature 
 of such love is well defined by the 
 same able commentator as o/iolois Kal 
 (pik^LV Kal 0i\et(r^at. On the na- 
 ture of Christian love as delineated 
 in St Paul's Bpp., the most sum- 
 mary and comprehensive definition 
 of which is found in ver. 4, see Us- 
 teri, Lehrb. n. i. 4, p. 242 sq., 
 Beuss, Theol. Ghret. iv. 19, Vol. 11. 
 p. 203 sq. o-tivi|mxoi k.t.X.] 
 
 with accordant souls minding the one 
 thing; second defining clause, and 
 parallel to Tijv air. iy. ?x- Moat of 
 the ancient Vv. (Syr., Copt., jEth., 
 al.), appy. the Greek expositors, and 
 several modem commentators, regard 
 (rvv\l>vxoi and to Iv (pp. as separate 
 predications ; it seems however best, 
 with Mey., to regard them as united, 
 the slightly emphatic ffvmp. forming 
 a quasi-adverbial or secondary predi- 
 cation to TO Iv ipp. There is thus no 
 necessity for any artificial distinc- 
 tions between to airo <pp. and to Iv 
 (pp. (Tittm. Synon. i. p. 69), nor for 
 the assumption of a studied tauto- 
 logy (comp. Chrys.) : (rvvxpvxoi serves 
 to illustrate the participial clause 
 with which it is associated, while t6 
 Iv (pp. remands the reader to the to 
 
 ai^To (pp. above, with which it is prac- 
 tically synonymous, and of which it 
 is possibly a more abstract expres- 
 sion ; comp. Green, Gram. p. 201. 
 Middleton (Gr. Art. p. 368) follow- 
 ing Grot, refers this latter clause to 
 what follows : this is not satisfac- 
 tory, and mars the symmetry of the 
 sentence. On the distinction between 
 (Tvv^vxos and Itrd^poxost see notes on 
 ver. 20. 
 
 3. |i,r]8iv Kord Ipi6.] [meditating] 
 nothing in the way of dissension, or 
 contentiousness; not ttoiouktcs. Van 
 Heng., Scholef. {Hints, p. 105), or 
 still worse irateiTe, Luth., but simply 
 (ppovovvTes, continued from the pre- 
 ceding verse ; see Winer, Gr. § 
 64. 2. The prep. Kari. primarily de- 
 notes the model or rule, and thence, 
 as here, by a very intelligible grada- 
 tion, the occasion or circumstances in 
 accordance with it ; see notes on Tit. 
 iii. 5, and Winer, Gr. § 49. d. On 
 ipi$eia see notes on ch. i. 17, and 
 esp. ore Gal. v. 20 ; compare too 
 Theoph. in loc, who appears to have 
 caught the true force and meaning 
 of the word ; <rTrovSd<rai, ^lo iva ix-q 
 lie viKrjjri 6 Sava' tovto ItTTiv t) ipi- 
 6ela. V-^^^ Kara kcvo 
 
 So^iav] nor in the way of vain-glory, 
 Kfj/oS., an d'jr. XsySp.. in the N. T 
 (adj. Gal. v. 26), is sufficiently de- 
 fined by Suidas as /iarala tis irepl 
 iavToO oiTims ; comp. Polyb. Hist. iii. 
 81. 9, X. 33. 6. TTJ Tair€i- 
 
 vo(t)po(rvVT|] with, under the influence 
 of, (due) lowliness ; modal dative 
 (comp. notes on eh. i. 18), or perhaps 
 
40 
 
 I1P02: *iAinnHsiOYS. 
 
 4 a\A^\owf ^yovfj-evoi WTreoe^oi/Tay eavToliv, fxt] to eavTWV 
 sKaa-TOi (TKOirbvvTes, aWa /cat ra erepcov eKacrroi. 
 
 4. iKOdToi. o-TOTTowTes] So Lochm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Weste. and Hort, 
 the Ikcuttoi on slightly, and the o-KoiroSyTes on very greatly, preponderating 
 authority: Bee., J/cao-Tos a-KOTare. TregeUes and Westc. and iforf place 
 SxaffTos in their margins. It is certainly proper to notice that in all other 
 eases in the N. T. (Eev. vi. 11 [Eec] is more than douhtful) iKao-ros is only 
 found in the singular. The second l/cao-Toi (so, all the above-mentioned 
 
 edd.) has still stronger critical support: Bee, iKaaros. 
 
 more precisely dat. of the subjective 
 cause, thus falling under the general 
 head of the ' dynamic ' dative, see 
 Kruger, Spi-achl. § 48. 15. 5. On 
 this causal dative, which though 
 allied to, must not be confounded 
 ■with the instrumental dat. (as appy. 
 Mey., Alf.), see Bernhardy, Synt. iii. 
 14, p. loi sq., Soheuerl. Synt. § 22. 
 c, p. 181, and Kruger, I. c. The 
 article here prefixed to the abstract 
 TaTreivoipp. may have its collective 
 force ( Jelf, Gr. § 448) and mark ' low- 
 liness ' in its most abstract form, 
 ' the virtue of lowliness ' (Mey., 
 oomp. Middl. Gr. Art. p. 90), but 
 more probably only characterizes 
 the Taireiv. as that due and befitting 
 lowliness by which each one ought 
 to be influenced: comp. Rom. xii. 10 
 sc(., and Fritz, in loc. On T-aireico- 
 <j)f>oirivr}, ' the thinking lowly of our- 
 selves because we are so,' and its 
 distinction from wpavT-ris, see notes 
 on Eph. iv. i. Trench, Synon. § 42, 
 and the more spiritually profound 
 discussion of Neander, Planting, Vol. 
 I. p. 483 sq. (Bohn). 
 vircp^^ovTas eavTcov] superior to your- 
 selves ; comp. Eom. xii. 10, Eph. v. 
 21, I Pet. V. 5. The query of Calvin, 
 how those who really and obviously 
 excel others in certain points can 
 conform to this precept, is satisfac- 
 torily answered by considering the 
 true nature of Tairuvo<l>p. The rairet- 
 vbtjipoiy is one so conscious of his de- 
 
 pendence on God, and of his own 
 imperfections and nothingness, that 
 his own gifts only remind him that 
 others must have gifts also, while his 
 sense of his own utter nothingness 
 suggests to him that these gifts may 
 well be superior to his own, and 
 higher in nature and degree : see 
 esp. Neander, Planting, Vol. i. p. 
 485 (Bohn). 
 
 4. («' TCI «avr«3v...o-K0Tr.] not re- 
 garding, looking to, your oivn in- 
 terests : a warning against a selfish 
 regard for themselves, following suit- 
 ably on the exhortation to ran-etpo- 
 (l>poiTiviri. Pride, as Miiller well ob- 
 serves, is the most naked form of 
 selfishness : see the excellent remarks 
 on selfishness as the essence of sin, 
 and as specially developing itself in 
 pride and hatred, ib. Doctr. of Sin, 
 I. 3. I and 2, esp. Vol. 1. p. 175 sq. 
 (Transl.). SKOTrtly is here scarcely 
 different in sense from ^Tireiv in eh. 
 ii. 21, I Cor. X. 24, 33, xiii. 5; comp. 
 2 Mace. iv. 5, TO di avii,<j>ipov...(TKo- 
 irwv. Numerous exx. of similar forms 
 of expression will be found in Wetst. 
 ire loc, the most pertinent of which 
 is from a writer whose diction is said 
 often to reflect that of St Paul, 
 Plotin. Enn. 1. 4. 8, 01) to ixdvuiv in 
 <rKOTTo\iiJ,ivwv, dXXA rh iavrCiv. 
 aXXd Ka£] but also: a somewhat 
 weakened form of the adversative 
 clause, the Kal perhaps pointing to 
 the thought that it was natural that 
 
n. 4, 5, 6. 
 
 41 
 
 TowTO (ppovetre ev vfiiv o Kai ev Xpta-TM 'Ij/trou, oy ev 5,6 
 
 TouTo ^poxeiTe] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 clearly preponderating external authority, in regard of the absence of a yhp 
 after tovto, and on greatly preponderating authority, in regard of (ppovelre : 
 Bee, TouTo 7ctp <ppovelo-6a. In the former edd. of this Commentary yip was 
 retained as slightly more probable, the decision being influenced by internal 
 grounds. Eeconsideration of the nature of the external evidence leads to a 
 reversal of this opinion. 
 
 a man should look after his own in- 
 terests ; see Winer, Gr. § 55. 8, 
 Fritz, Marc. exc. 11. p. 788. On the 
 difference between oiK...&\\d, oi /mS- 
 i>ov...&\\d, and oi n6mv...&\\A, Kai, 
 see the acute remarks of Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 9. It is perhaps 
 scarcely necessary to controvert the 
 position of Raphel {Obs. Vol. 11. p. 
 503) that t4 kavTwv are ' sua dona; ' 
 such an interpr. is less in harmony 
 with the context, and would tend to 
 make xal appear redundant. What 
 the Apostle condemns is not so much 
 a reasonable regard for their own in- 
 terests as the selfish exhibition of it ; 
 comp. Waterl. Serm. v. Vol. 11. p. 
 503, Harless, Chr. Eth. § 6. b, p. 38 
 (Transl.). 
 
 5. TouTo <^povetT€ iv v(i.iv] Enter- 
 tain this mind in yourselves, sc. ' in 
 animis vestris,' Van H., not 'intra 
 vestrum coetum,' a construction 
 which seems distinctly precluded by 
 the following iv Xp. Meyer com- 
 pares the Homeric ivl (ppeffl, ivl 
 6v/juf, thus similarly combined with 
 ippovein, Odys. vi. 313, xiv. 82, al. 
 On the meaning of the verse in re- 
 ference to the imitation of Christ, 
 see Martensen, Chr. Eth. Part i. 
 § 9S> P- 294 SI- (Transl.). 
 S KoX Iv X. 'I.] which was also in 
 Christ Jesus, sc. i<j>poveho or i<ppo- 
 vrjBri. The Kai is not ' cum maxime,' 
 Van Heng., but simply correlative, 
 indicating the identity of the dispo- 
 sition that is to be between the Phi- 
 lippians and Christ (Wies.): on the 
 
 insertion of xal after relative par- 
 ticles, and the form of comparison 
 it indicates, see Klotz, Devar, Vol. 
 II. p. 636. The interpr. of Hofmann 
 [Schriftb. Vol. i. p. 130), according 
 to which 8 is to be referred to ^po- 
 vuv, not i<ppovfi8-ri, scil. ' welches ein 
 (fipoveiv in ihnen selbst nioht ist, ohne 
 auch in Christo Jesu ' (compare Gal. 
 ii. 20), seems artificial and unsatis- 
 factory. 
 
 6. os] In this important, and it 
 is to be feared much perverted pas- 
 sage, nearly every word has formed 
 the subject of controversy. In no 
 portion of Scripture is it more neces- 
 sary to follow the simple and plain 
 grammatical meaning of the words. 
 The first question is, to what does 8s 
 refer? To Christ as (a) the A670S 
 iaapKos, Christ in His pre-incarnate 
 state (Chrys. and majority of Ff.), 
 or, as (6) the A670S haapKos, — what 
 is now usually, but not very rever- 
 ently, termed the ' historical Christ ' 
 (Novatian, De W., al.) ? The true 
 answer seems to be, — to neither ex- 
 clusively, but, as the appropriately 
 chosen antecedent (Xp. 'Itjo-.) sug- 
 gests, and the profound nature of 
 the subject requires, to (a) and (6), 
 to the riXcios Tios (Hippolyt. ap. 
 Eouth, Opusc. Vol. I. p. 73) in either 
 form of His eternal existence ; it 
 being left to the immediate context 
 to define the more immediate refer- 
 ence ; comp. Col. i. 13, 15, and see 
 Thomasius, Ghristi Person, Vol. 11. 
 p. 1 36. In the present verse the re- 
 
42 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioYs. 
 
 /xop(p^ Qeou virap-^wv ovy_ dpTrayfibv ^y^craro to elvai 
 
 ference seems plainly to (a) : for as 
 the tertium comparationis is mani- 
 festly TaT€LVO^po(ruv7j, BO this cannot 
 be completely evinced in the case of 
 Christ, unless His prior state be put 
 in clear contrast with that to which 
 He was pleased to condescend ; comp. 
 2 Cor. viii. g, where, while 'Irja: Xp. is 
 similarly the subject, irXoio-ios ui' can 
 scarcely admit any other reference 
 than to Christ's pre-inoarnate state; 
 so even Usteri, Lehrb. ii. 2. 4, p. 295. 
 In verses 8 — 11 the reference is as 
 obviously to (6) : the A670S aaapKos, 
 which is the more immediate subject 
 of verse 6, passes into the Abyos iv- 
 (rapKos in ver. 7, and, as the slight 
 break in the continuity of the sen- 
 tence {Kal {rxviMTi K.T.\.) fittingly 
 and significantly indicates, remains 
 so to the end of the clause. Other 
 opinions, esp. that of Origen, will be 
 found in the admirable sermon of 
 Waterland {Works, Vol. 11. p. 109), 
 in which the whole passage is very 
 clearly discussed. See also Pear- 
 son, Greed, Art. 11. Vol. i. p. 155, 
 Bull, Prim. Trad. vi. 21, Jackson, 
 Greed, Book viii. i, Thomasius, 
 Ghr. Pers. Vol. 11. p. 136 sq. Befer- 
 enoe to the older monographs on 
 this subject will be found in Wolf 
 in loc, and to the more recent in 
 Meyer in loc. Iv 
 
 |jiop<|>f ©eoS iirapx-] subsisting in 
 the form of God, ' iirstandend u. s. w.,' 
 Thomasius, I. c, soil, from all eter- 
 nity, in reference to His pre-incar- 
 nate existence, the participle not 
 having so much a causal ('inas- 
 much as he was') as a concessive 
 reference (' although he was '), a 
 sufficiently common solution of the 
 participle; see Donalds. Gr. § 621. 
 The use of iirdpxav, not uk, is espe- 
 cially noticeable. In the following 
 
 words p-opipti QeoS there is but little 
 difficulty, if we adhere simply and 
 honestly to the true lexical meaning 
 of nopipfi, and properly attend to the 
 subsequent antithesis. With respect 
 to /lopcpTj [probably derived from the 
 Sanscr. Varpas, ' form,' comp. Ben- 
 fey, Wurzellex. Vol. 11. p. 309], we may 
 first observe that it is not perfectly 
 identical with ^v<ris or ovaia (Chrys., 
 al., Jackson, I. c), being in fact one 
 of its two essential elements (see esp. 
 Aristot. de Animd, 11. i), but desig- 
 nates ' form,' ' appearance ' (^th.), 
 ' likeness ' (Syr.), and may be com- 
 pared with elKiiv, Col. i. 15, and x"-- 
 paKTTJp Trjs viroaT&aeas, Heb. i. 3 ; 
 comp. Thomasius, I.e., p. 137 ; and 
 see Trench, Synon. Part 11. § 20, 
 and esp. the detached note of Bp 
 Lightfoot, Comment, pp. 127 — 133. 
 As however both these allied ex- 
 pressions stand in connexion with 
 a reference to the eternal Son-ship 
 (Waterl. I.e.), as iJ.op<j>T) Qeov stands 
 in distinct and undeniable antithesis 
 to nop^tiv SoiXov (Bull, I.e.), and as 
 this latter expression is referred by 
 the Apostle himself to the assump- 
 tion of human nature, so no candid 
 man can doubt that both ante-Nicene 
 and post-Nicene writers were right in 
 their deduction that juo/i^i) 6coO has 
 reference to the divine nature, and 
 does express as much as 9cos ix BeoS 
 (Hippol. Vol. II. p. 29, ed. Fabr.) 
 and vios GeoO (Dionys. Alex, apud 
 Labb. Vol. j.. p. 853), and hence what 
 is truly and essentially divine ; see 
 esp. Waterl. Serm. v. Vol. 11. p. 
 103 sq. ov\ dp7ra7|x6v 
 
 K.T.X.] did not deem His being on an 
 equality with God a thing to be 
 seized on, or to be grasped at. On 
 this important clause we must pre- 
 mise the following remarks; (i) the 
 
II. 6. 
 
 43 
 
 slightly emphatic apway/idv is the 
 predicate, and to eTvcu k.t.\. the im- 
 mediate object to ifyqaaTo, see Winer, 
 Gr. § 44. 3; (2) the word dpTT., if con- 
 sidered apart from the context, does 
 not seem merely = apTray/ia or ApTrd- 
 yiliov (CaUimachus, Hymn. Cer. 9), 
 but, with the usual force of its ter- 
 mination (Donaldson, Craiyl. § 253), 
 would seem to denote ' the act of 
 seizing; ' oomp. Plut. (?) de Educ. p. 
 120 A, Tw iK S.priTTis KaXoifievov ap- 
 Tay/Mv: (3) iffa is used adverbially 
 (Winer, Gr. § 27. 3), ^x"" i^"'"' ^^V> 
 ' sequaliter Deo esse,' Thomas. I. c, 
 p. 140, but involves nothing in such 
 a usage on which any particular 
 stress can be laid (' spectari tanquam 
 Deum,' Grot.), as the whole force of 
 the assertion of equality lies in the 
 use of the verb, subst. to ehai ; see 
 Pearson, Greed, Vol. 11. p. 88, ed. 
 Burton ; (4) ^i* fi°P'l>V 6^0'' vwdpx- and 
 TO elcoi tffa Qeip are virtually, though 
 not precisely, identical. Both refer 
 to "the Divine Nature; the former 
 however (perhaps with a momentary 
 glance of thought to its iiiXla) points 
 to it in respect of its form and pre- 
 existence ; the latter, with exquisite 
 precision, to its state and present 
 continuanee, referring the reader, as 
 it were, to the very moment of the 
 Tfyiiaaro. On these premises the 
 
 translation would be, — (a) He thought 
 the being equal to God no act of 
 robbery, — no usurpation of any dig- 
 nity which was not His own by right 
 of nature (Jackson, Creed, vin. i ) ; 
 'non rapiuam existimavit pariari 
 Deo,' TertuUian, see Waterl. I. c, p. 
 107 sq. : so appy. Syr., ' direptio,' 
 Vulg., 'rapinam,' Goth., 'vulva,' and 
 perhaps Copt. ' hSlem' (but appy. = 
 apiray\i.a. Lev. vi. 4), Auth. , and many 
 of the older commentators. To this 
 however the logical consideration 
 that a condition cannot properly be 
 regarded as an act (comp. Hofmann, 
 
 Schriftb. Vol. 1. p. 131), and the 
 still graver contextual considerations, 
 — (o) that the above rendering of 
 odx ^/"T. ijy^a. not only affords no 
 exemplification of yn-i; ret iavTui' (tkott. 
 (ver. 4) but really implies the very 
 reverse ; (|8) that the antithesis oix 
 ^71)17. ...dXXoi Mv. is thus wholly de- 
 stroyed (see below) — present objec- 
 tions so serious, and appy. insur- 
 mountable, that we seem justified in 
 reconsidering (2), and in assigning 
 to the rare word apirayp,6s a mean- 
 ing approaching that of the verbal 
 in -Tos (Hesiod, Op. 318) or the 
 subst. in -/ia [consider Oea-fids, XPV"'- 
 iws, and permutations of -/la and 
 -/nos, such as dluyixa, Siiayubs], so 
 that the phrase may be considered 
 closely allied to apwayixa Tyyettrdac 
 (Heliod. ySffe. vii. 20) and the si- 
 milar expressions apiray/xa iroteTffBai, 
 Euseb. Comt. 11. 31, apvayiM BicrBai, 
 Buseb. Hist. viii. 12; oomp. aprraX^a 
 Soffis, Find. Pyth. viii. 65 [94], and 
 see esp. Donalds, in loc. The mean- 
 ing then will be (6) He did not deem 
 the being on an equality with God a 
 thing to be seized on, a state to be 
 exclusively (so to speak) clutched at, 
 and retained as a prize ; the expr. 
 oix ^P""' 'by- being perhaps studiedly 
 used rather than ovx ■tjpvtx.ae (JEth.), 
 ' ut senteutiam etiam graviorem red- 
 deret, et Christum de illo ne cogitasse 
 quidem significaret,' Babiger, in Tho- 
 mas. Ghr. Pers. Vol. 11. p. 139 : so 
 in efiect Theodoret (ou p,^a tovto 
 vir^Xa^e), and, with some variations 
 in detail. Van Heng., De W., Wie- 
 sing., and the majority of modern 
 commentators, except Meyer and 
 Alford, who adopt a gwosi-aotive 
 meaning ('ein Verhaltniss des Beute- 
 machens,' ' self- enrichment '), but 
 somewhat confuse the exegesis. The 
 fuller justification of (b) will appear 
 in the following note. 
 
44 nP02 <I)IAinnH2IOY2. 
 
 7 iVo Qt^, aX\a eavTOV e^evuocrev fjLop(p>iv SovXov Xa^wv, ev 
 
 7. dXXd K.T.X.] hut emptied Him- 
 self; 'He retained not His equality 
 ■with God, but on the contrary 
 emptied Himself, — Himself, with 
 slight emphasis, divine as He was 
 in nature and prerogatives.' The 
 real difficulties of the passage are 
 brought into clear prominence by 
 this adversative clause. We have 
 here two lines of interpretation, per- 
 fectly and plainly distinct, (i) If, 
 on the one hand, we adopt (a), the 
 first interpr. mentioned under ver. 6, 
 then vTrdpxuv will be causal, oix apir. 
 ■fiy. will refer to the preceding ac- 
 count of Christ's greatness (Waterl. 
 I.e., p. no), and apTr. will more 
 nearly preserve its apparent lexical 
 meaning, but dXXct will have to be 
 regarded as equiv. to dXX' o/tws 
 (Waterl., p. 108), and the antithesis 
 as one between whole members, not, 
 as the context seems imperatively 
 to demand, between conterminous 
 clauses ; He thought the being equal 
 to God no usurpation; yet He emptied 
 Himself; so expressly Waterl., and, 
 as far as we can infer from ren- 
 derings almost perplexingly literal, 
 Auth., and the principal ancient Vv. 
 except ^th. (2) If, on the other 
 hand, we adopt (6) as above, — then 
 virdpx. will be concessive, oix "■P'"'- 
 ■iiy. will refer to the consequent ac- 
 count of Christ's humiliation, pre- 
 serving an exact parallelism to /nr; rk 
 iavTuiv (TKOTT., apT. will recede further 
 from its lexical meaning, but aXXct 
 will retain its usual, proper, and 
 logical force after the negative clause 
 ('aliud jam hoc esse de quo sumus 
 dicturi,' Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. 2), 
 and the sentence will be even, con- 
 tinuous, and in tl^e fullest harmony 
 with the context : He did not deem 
 His equality to God u, prize to he 
 
 seized, hut, &a.; in other words, — 
 ' He did not insist on His own eter- 
 nal prerogatives, but on the contrary 
 humbled Himself to the condition 
 and sufferings of mortal man.' Of 
 these two interpr. while (i) preserves 
 more nearly the primary lexical mean- 
 ing of apiray/i6s, it so unduly ex- 
 pands that of dXXa, and so completely 
 mars the regular antithesis (ouk... 
 dWd), that we seem bound to adopt 
 confidently and unhesitatingly the 
 latter interpr. : see esp. Waterl. (Z.c. , 
 p. 1 10), who while adopting (i) shows 
 clearly that (2) is a sound and catho- 
 lic interpretation : comp. Middleton, 
 Gi-. Art. p. 370, Bp Browne, On the 
 Articles, i. 2, p. 41, neither of whom 
 however seems to have felt sufficient- 
 ly the lexical difficulty connected 
 with dp7ra7/i6s. All attempts 
 
 to preserve both the exact meaning 
 of apir. and the regular grammatical 
 sequence (Meyer, and appy. Alf.), in 
 fact to combine (i) and (2), seem 
 hopeless : the two translations are 
 fundamentally distinct, and most of 
 the confused interpretations of this 
 passage are owing to this distinction 
 and this incompatibility not having 
 been seen and recognised. It is fair 
 to add that of these attempts the 
 most plausible is the assumed co- 
 herence of the negative with apTay- 
 p.bv (='non-rapinam'), but to this 
 the form and balance of the sen- 
 tence, — the appearance of 01) with an 
 aorist in the first member, followed 
 by dXXd with a responsive aor. in the 
 second member, — seem, as before, to 
 present a grammatical objection that 
 remains in all its fullest validity. 
 Lastly, it is not correct to say (De 
 W.) that ri iivax k.t.X. must refer to 
 something Christ did not possess: 
 surely it is logically accurate to say 
 
II. 7, 8. 
 
 45 
 
 6/xot(iofiaTi avdpanrwv yevoftevof, ku] cr^iJyuaTi evpeOeh wf 8 
 
 that Christ did not grasp to Himself, 
 and covet to retain, a state that was 
 then His own. Even though such 
 phrases as rhv Qavarov apirayfia 64- 
 ftevoi (Bnseb. Hist. viii. 12) may be 
 foand, would it be necessarily in- 
 correct to say of a patriot oix apiray- 
 fia {or cifyjra'yfiop) rfyf^ffaTo rbv ^iov 
 aSX etXero top Bavarov ? 
 cavT^v 6K«v<«)<r€v] emptied Himself, not 
 metaphorically, 'humiliavit,' ^th., 
 but according to the simple and 
 lexical meaning of the word (compare 
 Xen. (Econ.ywi. 7, al.), ' exinanivit, ' 
 Vulg., Clarom. ; 'inane reddidit,' 
 Syr.; 'efBuere fecit,' Copt.; oomp. 
 'us-lausida,' Goth. Of what did He 
 empty Himself? Not exactly of the 
 iu>p<t>^ 9eoC (Mey., Alf.), unless it is 
 understood in a sense different to 
 that which has inferentially been 
 given to it in the preceding clause, 
 for, as Waterl. truly says, 'He had 
 the same essential glory, the same 
 real dignity He ever had' {/ihav 
 ■iji' IXa^ev o ova rjv, Chrys.), but, as 
 the following clause more expressly 
 shows, of that which He had in that 
 form (oomp. Pearson, Creed, Vol. i. 
 p. 158), that Godlike majesty and 
 visible glories (comp. Delitzsoh, Psy- 
 chol, p. 34) which He had from all 
 eternity : tt/v d^Lav KaraKpixpas Trjv 
 aKphy TaTeivo^po(r6v7]v eliXero, Theod. 
 The military metaphor which Krebs 
 {Obs. p. 329) finds in Kevovv, and 
 even in &pw. Tjyria., seems doubtful 
 in the highest degree. 
 |j.ap(|>ijv SovXov \aPuv] taking, or hy 
 takmg, the form of a servant; the 
 action of the aor. part, being syn- 
 chronous with that of the finite verb 
 (see Bernhardy, Synt. x. 9, p. 383, 
 notes on Eph. i. 9), and serving more 
 fuUy to explain it; 'si quseris quo- 
 modo Christus seipsum exinanivit? 
 
 respondet Apostolus, servi formam 
 accipiens,' Bull, Prim. Trad. vi. ■20. 
 The choice of the term Soi\ov, as the 
 same great writer ably observes, has 
 no reference to any servilis conditio 
 ('miseram sortem,' Heinr.), but is 
 suggested only by the preceding an- 
 tithesis iMpifyfi Geou, and marks the 
 relation which our Lord assumed to- 
 wards God; 'ad Deum autem com- 
 parata creatura omnis servi formam 
 habet, Deigue ad obedientiam ob- 
 striota tenetur,' ib. § 20. In the very 
 fact that our Lord did become truly 
 the servant of God, there lies, as 
 Bp Marteusen rightly contends, the 
 clearest argument for His divinity; 
 see Chr. Eth. Part i. § 80, p. 263 
 (Transl.). Iv <S|i.oi.w|utTi 
 
 K.T.X.] being made in the likeness of 
 men; modal clause subordinated to 
 the preceding: — 'if any man doubt 
 how Christ emptied Himself, the 
 text will satisfy him, by taking the 
 form of a servant; if any still ques- 
 tion how He took the form of a 
 servant, he hath the Apostle's re- 
 solutioUj by being made in the like- 
 ness of men,' Pearson, Creed, Vol. i. 
 p. T57 (ed. Burton). The expression 
 ip ofioiiifi. is very noticeable; Christ, 
 though perfect man, was still not a 
 mere man, a \j/i.\6s dpdpiaTros, but was 
 6 A6yos (TcLp^ yepo/xepos ; comp. Theoph. 
 in loc, and Fritz. Rom. viii. 3, Vol. 
 II. p. 97. Lastly, ylpe<rOat does not 
 here imply merely 'to be born,' but, 
 as the context requires, with a great- 
 er latitude of meaning, 'apparere,' 
 'in conspectum venire,' Kiihner on 
 Xen. Mem. iii. 3. 6 (Meyer), while ip 
 is used with a quasi-local force to 
 mark the envelope or environment ; 
 see Bernhardy, Synt. v. 7, p. 209. 
 
 8. Kal o-xiJuaTi k.t.X.] and being 
 found in fashion as a man, &a. ; 
 
46 
 
 ripos <i)iAinnH2iOY2. 
 
 avdpcairoi eTaTrelvaxrei/ eavrov, yevofievoi vir^KOOi fi'e)(pi 
 
 dative of reference, Winer, 6r. § 31. 
 6, and notes on Gal. i. 22 ; ov tovto 
 'K4yai', on ^ <p6(ns p.eT^ire<T€V ov5k 
 inJ7xi'ff£s Tis iyivcTo, dXXA axijixaTi 
 iyiveTo, Chrys. This clause is con- 
 nected by De W., Meyer, Tisch. (ed. 
 2, 8), and others, closely with what 
 precedes, a stop being placed after 
 dvBpuTTos, and iTairelvuiaev being left, 
 without any connecting particle, to 
 commence the next clause: so also 
 Copt., Syr. , and probably iEth. To 
 such u, punctuation there are two 
 grave objections. On the one hand, 
 siich an abrupt separation in a group 
 of clauses which have a close logical 
 and historical coherence is improba- 
 ble, and appy. unprecedented (the 
 exx. cited by De W., Gal. iii. 13, v. 
 25, 2 Cor. V. 21, are not in point) : 
 on the other, as was hinted above 
 on ver. 6, the slight break, combined 
 with the somewhat peculiar evpe- 
 8ek, harmonizes admirably with the 
 change of subject, and indicates the 
 transition from the pre-inoarnate 
 glory to the incarnate humiliation 
 and post-incarnate exaltation of the 
 Eternal Son: so it would seem ex- 
 pressly Chrys. Horn. vii. 4, init. 
 'EupeBeU is thus not for uc, but, as 
 always, implies that He was found, 
 manifested, acknowledged, to be ; 
 see notes on Gal. ii. 1 7, and Winer, 
 Gr. % 65. 8. On axni'-o-i which, as 
 its derivation [^x"] clearly hints, is 
 not = 6fi,olwiJLa, Heinr., but denotes 
 the habitus, 'outward guise, demean- 
 our, and manner of life' (olKirov 
 crXW" vepiiBriKc, Luoian, Necyom. § 
 16, ffxvf^o. (ppvyavLaTTJpos \a^tx)v, Po- 
 lyffin. Strategem. i. p. 37 [Wetst.]), 
 and its distinction from the more 
 'intrinsic' and 'essential /io/)04' see 
 Trench, Synon. Part 11. § 20, and 
 esp. the detached note of Bp Light- 
 
 foot, Comment, pip. 127 — 133; comp. 
 notes on 2 Tim. iii. 5. 
 us avSpuiros] as a man; though a 
 perfect man, yet not a mere man; 
 Tjjuefs yi,p i'vxv nal aiS/ia' iKeiifos Qebs 
 Kal \l/vxv f«' triS/io, Chrys., who how- 
 ever would have expressed himself 
 with more psychological exactness 
 if for \j/vxv he had written in both 
 clauses irveOfia koX ^uxij ; comp. Luke 
 xxiii. 46, and Delitzsoh, Bibl. Psych. 
 
 V. I, p. 283 sq. irairil- 
 v<i)o-6v lauTov] He humbled himself; 
 not iaiiTov Irair., the emphasis rest- 
 ing rather on the act, than, as before 
 (iavT. iniv.), on the subject. 'ETajrefc. 
 is clearly not synonymous with hiv. 
 (Eheinw.), but refers to the acts of 
 condescension and humiliation in 
 that human nature which He emptied 
 Himself to assume : ' non solum, 
 cum Deus esset, naturam assumpsit 
 humanam, verum in ek se vehemen- 
 ter humiliavit et dejecit,' Bull, Prim. 
 Trad. vi. 21. On the meaning of 
 raireixos [allied with rdinjs, and not 
 improbably derived from a root 
 2TAn — ' press,' ' tread,' compare 
 Benfey, WurzeUex. Vol. i. p. 656] 
 in Christian writers in contradis- 
 tinction to Heathen (by whom it is 
 commonly used in a had sense, e.g. 
 Tatreivij Kcd dveXei^depos, Plato, Legg. 
 
 VI. p. 774 c), see Trench, Synon. 
 
 § 42. 7CV6)1.EV0S K.T.X.] 
 
 by becoming obedient even unto death; 
 modal clause appended to and ex- 
 plaining iTairelvuffev; the supplemen- 
 tary words /i^xp' it.T.X. not belonging 
 to the finite verb (Beng., Hofm. 
 Schriftb. Vol. 11. i, p. 80), but, as 
 the explanatory nature of the par- 
 ticipial clause and the even flow of the 
 sentence clearly require, — to yevS/i.. 
 virriK, The wa/co^ here mentioned 
 was not that shown to His earthly 
 
II. 9. 
 
 47 
 
 uavaTov, Qavarov Se ctTavpov. Sio Kal 6 Geo? avrbv 9 
 
 parents (Zancli.), or to Jews and 
 Eomans (Grot.), but, as the follow- 
 ing verse seems distinctly to indicate, 
 to God ; comp. Matth. xxvi. 39, Rom. 
 V. 19, Heb. V. 8. The meaning of 
 the term cannot fairly be pressed, 
 e.^f. VTr-qKov<7€v ws vlos ovx ws 5oflXos, 
 Theod., for see Eom. vi. 16, Col. iii. 
 22. As the derivation suggests, utt^- 
 (toos and vTraKopeiv involve the idea 
 of 'dioto obtemperare ; ' TreWe<r6at is 
 rather 'monita sequi,' -n-eiBapxetv '00- 
 actus obsequi;' see Tittm. Synon. i. 
 p. 193, and notes on Tit. iii. i. On 
 the apparent futility of the distinc- 
 tions drawn between /t^pi (here not 
 of time but degree) and axp'i see on 
 2 Tim. ii. 9. Savarov 8i ot.] 
 
 yea death on the cross ; not only 
 death, but a death of suffering, 
 shameful and accursed : oSto! yap 
 [d flcicaros] trdvTUV iiroveiSuTTiKurrcpos 
 eTcai idoKei, ovtos 6 alixx^^V^ yifiuv, 
 oBtos 6 iirdparos, Chrys. On the use 
 of di in repetition, in which how- 
 ever the original oppositive force may 
 just faintly be traced ('simUis notio 
 quodam modo opponitur'), see Klotz, 
 Devar.Yol.u. p. 361, Hartung,Paj'aA:. 
 Si, i. 7, Vol. I. p. 168 ; and on the 
 genitive ('of more remote relation'), 
 see exx. in Winer, Gr. § 30. -i. 
 
 9. 810 Ka£] on which account also; 
 ' in consequence of this condescension 
 and humiliation on the part of Christ, 
 God also, (00.;' the Kal not being 
 merely consecutive (De W., Mey.), 
 but standing in connexion with ivep- 
 i\j/,, and serving to place in gentle 
 contrast the consequent exaltation 
 with the previous rairdviixris ; see 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 655, and 
 notes on ch. iv. 12. The meaning of 
 Bid, 'quo facto' (comp. Wolf, al.), 
 adopted only, it is to be feared, from 
 dogmatical reasons, is distinctly un- 
 
 tenable in grammar, and by no 
 means necessary in point of theology; 
 ' God,' as Bishop Andrewes says, ' not 
 only raised Him, but, propter hoc, 
 even for that cause exalted Him also 
 to live with Him in joy and glory for 
 ever,' Serm. 1. Vol. 11. p. 197, ib. p. 
 325 : orav rijs crapKhi ^TriXd/SijTai 6 
 liaKapws IlaCXos rnvra Xonrde to to- 
 ireivi, fiera iSilas (pSiyyerai, Chrys. 
 in loc. On the humiliation of the 
 Eternal Sou see esp. Jackson, Creed, 
 VIII. I. 2, and on the nature and 
 degree of His exaltation, Andrewes, 
 Serm. ix. Vol. i. p. 322 sq. (A.-C. 
 Libr.). avTov 4ir«pii\|/<i)(rev] highly 
 exalted Him ; ' mnltum exaltavit 
 eum,' Syr. ; comp. Psalm xcvii. 9, 
 ff^6Spa VTrepv^u>0T]s itirkp irdvras Toiis 
 Beois, Dan. iv. 34 (Theod.). The virip 
 is not here temporal, nor even local, 
 though the reference is obviously to 
 the Ascension (Eph. iv. 10) and ele- 
 vation at the right hand of God, 
 but ethical, — ' dignifate atque imperio 
 supra omnes,' Zanch., 'insigniter ex- 
 tulit,' Just.: so Mth., Copt. On St 
 Paul's favourite use of iirip and its 
 compounds, see notes on Eph. iii. 
 20. The exact nature of this exalta- 
 tion is well discussed in Waterl. Sei-m. 
 II. Vol. II. p. 112: it is to be doubted 
 however whether, as Waterl. main- 
 tains, the ref. is specially to Christ 
 as Son of God, and to ' an exaltation 
 relative to us, by a new and real title, 
 viz. that of redemption and salvation ;' 
 so also Jackson, Creed, xi. 3. 4, Bull, 
 Prim. Trad. vi. 23. The accordant 
 opinion of these great writers claims 
 our most serious consideration ; still 
 as the aor. seems to point to a de- 
 finite historical fact, — as in ver. 8 
 there is appy. almost a marked tran- 
 sition from the pre-incaruate to the 
 incarnate Son, — as in ver. 19 this 
 
48 
 
 npo2 *iAinnH2iOYs. 
 
 inrepv'^axTev Ka) eyapio'aTO avTw to ovona to virep irav 
 lO ovofxa, Iva ev tw ovo/iart 'Jfjerov irav yovv /fOMyj; eTroi;- 
 
 9. TO Svofia] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on clearly 
 preponderating authority : Bee. omits the article. It was omitted in former 
 edd. of this Commentary, but a more accurate knowledge of the true reading 
 of B has led to a change of decision. 
 
 allusion seems still continued in the 
 name 'IijiroD, — so here the reference 
 is the same ; virepv^ovaBat. \iyerai, 
 Kal wi ovx ^X^^i 3*ct rb dvdpioirivop 
 liovovovxl, Hippol. Fragm. Vol. 11. p. 
 ■29 (ed. Fabr.). The exaltation is 
 thus not merely relative but proper ; 
 an investiture, as the Son of Man, 
 with all that fuU power, glory, and 
 dominion, which as God He never 
 lacked; see Pearson, Creed, Vol. i. p. 
 1 90 (ed. Burt.). So, distinctly, Chrys., 
 Theod., Cyr.-Alex., some of the ante- 
 Nieene and appy. the bulk of the 
 post-Nicene writers. For the psycho- 
 logical considerations dependent on 
 this exaltation of the God-man, see 
 Delitzsch, Bibl. Psych, v. i, p. 287. 
 tX<ip'<™To] freely gave ; ch. i. 29. 
 There is no reason whatever to de- 
 part from the simple and proper 
 lexical meaning of the word ; d hi 
 \iyerat. iv tA^cl x^^picrfiaros to virip 
 way oxo/ua S^effSai., els iKeivo S^jXiw- 
 OTi nera ffapKos (Tavayerai eh ovep 
 rjn Kal Sixa aapKos, Cyr.-Alex. Thesaur. 
 p. 130. TO ovajxa k.t.X.] the name 
 which is above every name ; the name, 
 which, as the context shows, cannot 
 well be any other than that which 
 follows; not 'the Name' in its Old 
 Test, sense (Lightf.), but the name 
 given through the angel (Matth. i. 
 21, Lukeii. 21), the name 'lija-ovs, the 
 name of His humiliation, and hence- 
 forth that of His exaltation and 
 glory ; the name with which now 
 every highest attribute, grace, power, 
 dominion, and Kvpi.6Trjs (ver. 11), is 
 eternally conjoined. There is thus 
 
 no reason whatever for modifying 
 the simple meaning of Sm/w, : both 
 here and elsewhere (Mark. vi. 14, 
 John xii. 28, Acts iii. 16, Bom. i. 5, 
 al.) the idea of 'dignity' (Heinr.; 
 comp. Lightf.) is derived solely from 
 the context ; see Van Hengel in loc. 
 
 10. iva K.T.X. ] that in the name 
 of Jesus; purpose and intent of the 
 exaltation. The words that follow 
 are a slightly modified citation of 
 Isaiah xlv. 23, — a passage cited more 
 precisely in Bom. xiv. 10, 11. There 
 the reference is (according to the 
 best reading) to God : here the 
 application is to the Son. Does not 
 such a use of a great and Well-known 
 ■ text show how truly, in his inmost 
 soul, the Apostle felt that the Son 
 was very and eternal God? 'Ev tQ 
 6vbiJ.. is not equivalent to eh rh Svo/ia 
 (Heinr.) as directly specifying ' that 
 to which (jEth.) the adoration is to 
 be paid, nor yet to ' ad nomen,' Beza 
 (comp. Auth.), ' nuncupato nomine,' 
 Grot., — a meaning of iv dvo/i. wholly 
 without example in the N.T,, but, 
 with the full force of the prep., de- 
 notes the spiritual sphere, the holy 
 element as it were, in which every 
 prayer is to he ofiered and every 
 knee to bow ; see Bph. v. 20, and 
 Harless in loc, who well remarks 
 that oeofna k.t.\. does not imply 
 simply and per se the personality 
 ('pro person^, positum,' Est.), but 
 that personality as revealed to and 
 acknowledged by man : comp. also 
 Winer, Gfr. § 48. a. irav 76VU 
 
 K.T.X.] evei'y knee should bend; eU 
 
IL lo, II. 
 
 49 
 
 pavimv Koi eiriyeiayv Koi KaTa-^Qovloov, Koi iracra yXiia-cTa ii 
 
 vpoiTKvv^aiv SriXoroTt, (Eoum. ; genu- 
 flexion being the external represen- 
 tation of worship and adoration ; see 
 Bom. xi. 4, xiv. ii, Eph. iii. 14 and 
 notes in loc, Suioer, Thesaur. Vol. 
 '• P- 777- Tbs subject to whom the 
 adoration is directed can only be, as 
 Meyer rightly observes, the principal 
 subject of the context, our Lord and 
 Master Jesus Christ. Such an ado- 
 ration is not however, as Meyer 
 goes on to say, merely relative (oomp. 
 ver. II, els So^av QeoS), but, as the 
 whole aspects of the passage, its 
 clear contrasts, and its concluding 
 theme, — the exaltation of the Son,^- 
 seem all plainly to indicate, positive 
 and absolute. By no one has the 
 distinction between the relative and 
 absolute worship of the Son been 
 more clearly enunciated than by Bp 
 Boll ; ' si absolute ut Deus spectatur 
 
 idem plane divinus cultus quem 
 
 Patri exhibemus omnino debetur. 
 Sin Filium intueamur relate c|.ua 
 rUius est et ex Deo Patre trahit 
 originem, turn rursus certum est cul- 
 tum et venerationem omnem quem 
 ipsi deferimus ad Patremredundare,' 
 Fid. Nic. IX. 15, — a section that for 
 soundness of divinity and clearness 
 of definition deserves attentive pe- 
 rusal: see also Waterl. Def. of Quer, 
 xvri. xvni. Vol. 11. p. 421 sq, 
 hrovpavlav k.t.X.] of things in heaven 
 and things on earth and things under 
 the earth; 'quse in coelis et in terrS 
 et in abyssis,' Mth. (Piatt); comp. 
 Eev. V. 13, and for exx. of a similar 
 separation of the nom. from its 
 dependent genitives, Winer, Gr. § 30, 
 1. The three classes here mentioned 
 are to be understood not with any 
 ethical reference (/tai ol SIkmol [not 
 adding nal ol fuircs, as cited by Mey. 
 and Alf.] rai ol dfiapraXol, Chrys, 2), 
 
 E. 
 
 but simply and plainly, angels and 
 archangels in heaven (comp. Eph. i. 
 20, Heb. i. 4, 6), men upon earth 
 (comp. Plato, Republ. viii. p. 546 a, 
 [ib.] Axioch. 368 b), and the departed 
 under the earth ; iirovfiarlovs icoXet rds 
 aoparovs dvva/Meis, ^Triyeiovs 5^ Toi/s ^i 
 fuPTOs dyBpiivovs, Kal KaTax^oviovs 
 Tovs TeSneuTas ; compare Delitzsoh, 
 Bibl. Psych, vi. 3, p. 354. The last 
 class is referred by Chrys. i , Theoph., 
 and Qilcum. to 5a(/toces, but, as 
 Meyer well observes, such is by no 
 means the locality elsewhere assigned 
 to them by the Apostle (oomp. Eph. 
 vi. 12), nor is the homage of impo- 
 tence or subjugated malice (2 Pet. ii. 
 4, Jude 6) an idea as suitable to the 
 present as to the following clause. 
 The other interpretations that have 
 been proposed are either purely ar- 
 bitrary (Christians, Jews, Heathens), 
 or adjusted to dogmatical precon- 
 ceptions (KaraxO. = ' qui in purgatorio 
 sunt,' Est.) to which the context 
 yields no support. It may 
 
 be here briefly remarked that the 
 reverential custom of making an 
 outward sign of adoration at the 
 name of Jesus (Canon 18), though 
 certainly not directly deducible from 
 this test, may still, as Mede admits, 
 be derived from it ' generali et inde- 
 finita consequential' Epist. 71; see 
 Bingham, Antiq. Vol. ix. p. 245 sq., 
 Andrewes, Serm. jx, Vol. i. p. 334 
 sq. (A.-C. Libr.). 
 
 II. iroiira yXmrtra,] every tongue; 
 not metaphorically, wavra to Iffv-q, 
 Theod., but simply and literally in 
 accordance with, and in expansion 
 of, the preceding concrete expression 
 irav yivv ; ' the knee is but a dumb 
 acknowledgment; but a vocal con- 
 fession, that doth utter our mind 
 plainly,' Andrewes, Serm. ix. Vol. 11, 
 
 E 
 
50 
 
 npos $iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 e^ono\oy^(TeTai on I^vptos ^Irjuovi l^piaroi ety io^av 
 Qeov xaT/Oo'y. 
 
 II. i^o/ioXoyriiTeTai] So Tisch., with appy. preponderating external au- 
 thority: Rec, Mev., and (with margins) Lachm., Treg. Westc. and Hort, 
 i^oiM}\oy!itri^ai. Decision is here very difficult. On the one hand, the future 
 maybe due to a change of vowels : on the other hand the subj. is very pro- 
 bably a correction of the anomalous future. On the whole, the preponderance, 
 internal and external, seems to be in favour of the text. For exx. of ipa with 
 a fut. see Winer, Gr. § 41. b. i. b. 
 
 p. 337, who however, with his charac- 
 teristic exhaustion of every possible 
 meaning, also notices the former, 
 p. 339. l|o[M)Xo7t](r«Toi] 
 
 openly confess, 'diserte confiteatur' 
 [confitebitur], Bang. ; the prep, not 
 merely pointing to ' exitum vocis ab 
 ore,' Van Hengel (comp. Andrewes, 
 l.e.), but, as the occurrence of the 
 simple verb in sim. but less em- 
 phatic passages (John ix. 22, al.) in- 
 directly suggests, the openness and 
 completeness of the 0^10X07(0; comp. 
 Acts xix. 18, 4^fjLd\oyo6fievot xal av- 
 ayyiWovTei tAs Trpd^ets avrwv, Philo, 
 Leg. Alleg. § 26, Vol. 1. p. 60 (ed. 
 Mang.), Lucian, Hermot. § 75 ; and 
 see Fritz, on Matth. iii. 6, p. 126, 
 who however, on the other hand, 
 somewhat over presses the force of 
 the compound, 'lubenter et aperte et 
 vehementer confiteri.' The student 
 must always bear in mind the ten- 
 dency of later writers to compound 
 forms: see Thiersch, de Pent. 11. 1, 
 p. 83. 
 
 Kvpios] Predicate put forward with 
 especial emphasis; the contrary, as 
 Mey. observes, is dvaBc/w, 'IijiroOs, 
 I Cor. xii. 3. This august title is not 
 to be limited ; it does not refer to a 
 Kvpidrris merely over rational beings 
 (Hoelem.), but assures us that not 
 only hath Jesus Christ ' an absolute, 
 supreme, and universal dominion over 
 all things, as God,' but that 'as the 
 Son of Man He is invested with all 
 
 power in heaven and earth; partly 
 economical, for the completing our 
 redemption, . . .partly consequent unto 
 the union, or due unto the obedience 
 of His passion,' Pearson, Creed, Art. 
 
 11. ad fin.. Vol. i. p. 196 (ed. Burton). 
 els S6|av k.t.X.] unto the glory of God 
 the Father, dependent on i^o/uA., 
 not on Sn k.t.X. ; i.e. the object con^ 
 templated by the act of confession 
 (Mey., DeW., Wiesing.), not the sub- 
 ject matter of it, Andrewes (I.e.), who 
 however notices both. The transla- 
 tion of Vulg., ' in gloria ' (iEth., comp. 
 Beng.), is an untenable alteration of 
 the more correct 'in gloriam' [better 
 ' ad gloriam,' see Hand, Tursell. Vol. 
 III. p. 317] of the Old Latin; so cor- 
 rectly Syr., Copt. (?). The confession 
 of Jesus as Lord of all redounds ' to 
 the glory of the Father, whose Son 
 He is ; their honour inseparable and 
 their glory one,' Waterl. Vol. 11. p. 
 118 : opqs vavraxov Srav Tibs Sof<£- 
 ^ijrat rbv Jlar^pa do^ai^6fieyov* oStu) 
 Srav in/iiiyirai 6 TI6s 6 IlaT-Jjp dTi/id- 
 ferai, Chrys., — true and wise words 
 that deserve to be well borne in mind. 
 We now pass on to a more easy para- 
 graph. 
 
 12 — 18 Exhortation as to salvation, 
 and to a blameless course of life, 
 
 12. "fio-T€] So then, Consequently,- 
 exhortation directly and definitely 
 flovring, not from all the previous ad- 
 monitions, ch. i. 27 sq. (De W.), but 
 more especially from the paragraph 
 
II. II, 12. 
 
 51 
 
 "Q 
 
 (TTe dyairriToi fiov, KaQw's iravTOTS la 
 
 Work out your salva- 
 tion; be peaceful and 
 blameless, and give me 
 J»™e to rejoice, even If UTT^JAfOlJcraTe, fxij w? ev Trj TTOpoVala fJLOV 
 
 fjLovov aWa vvv iroWw fiaXKov ev Ttj 
 airov(rta fiov /jiera (po^ov koi Tpo/xov t^v eauTMV 
 
 immediately preceding, els toSto i,<po- 
 pfixres t6 vap&Seiyfia, Theod. In the 
 union of ^o-tc with the imper. the 
 nsualforce of the particle (' oonsecutio 
 alioujus rei ex antecedentibus,' Klotz) 
 is somewhat obscured,— the idea of 
 real or logical consequence (see notes 
 ore Gal. ii. 13) merging into that of 
 inferential exhortation; 'rem faoien- 
 dam certo documentofirmat,'EUendt, 
 Lex. Soph. Vol. u. p. 1013: see also 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 776, and for 
 exx., Winer, Gr. § 41. 5. i. In such 
 a case the correct translation in 
 Latin is not 'igitur' (Ellendt, Lex. 
 Soph. s.v. p. 1013), nor even perhaps 
 'proinde,' Beza (which according to 
 Heindorf = ' jjitur cum exhortatione 
 quadam'), but 'itaque,' Vulg., this 
 particle being more correctly used of 
 conclusions naturally flowing from 
 what has preceded (nexus realis) , ' igi- 
 tur ' of conclusions that are the result 
 of pure reasoning (nexus logicus) ; see 
 esp. Hand, Tursell. Vol. in. p. 187. 
 Ka6us K.T.X.] as ye toere always 
 obedient : observe the latent paral- 
 lelism to yevo/j.. iwiiKoos, ver. 8. But 
 to whom was the obedience shown ? 
 Not, as the context might at first 
 sight seem to suggest, 'mi/w,' JEth., 
 Conyb., comp. ' mihi ad salutem vos 
 hortanti, ipsique Deo, ' Beng. , but, as 
 the more plausible connexion of ^tj tis 
 K.r.X. with the last clause seems to in- 
 dicate, — to the tacit subject of the 
 iiraKo^ in ver. 8, i.e. 'to God' (or 
 what is in effect equivalent to it, 
 'Dei praeceptis ab Apostolo traditis,' 
 Estius) : so Van Heng., Mey., Alf., 
 andamongtheolder expositors, Crell., 
 and perhaps Justiniani. On the 
 
 later form KaSiis, see notes on Gal. 
 iiL 6. liTJ ws K.T.X.] not as in 
 
 my presence only, but now nmch more 
 in my absence. These words must 
 be connected with the succeeding 
 imper. Karepy. (Grot., Lachm.), not 
 with the preceding aor. iunj/c, , — a con- 
 struction which would certainly seem 
 to require 06 (see Winer, Gr. § 55. i), 
 and would tend to obliterate the force 
 ofj'ffi'. The cis (though omitted by B ; 
 a few mss. ; Syr. , Copt. , ^th. , al. ) is 
 certainly genuine, andnotto be passed 
 over in translation. The Apostle 
 does not content' himselt,Jwith the 
 simple precept, Karepy. /i^ iv ry Trap. 
 K.T.X., but also specifies the feeling 
 and spirit with which they were to do 
 it ; i.e. not with the spirit of men 
 who did it when he was present but 
 left it undone when he was alasent, 
 but who even in the latter case did it 
 in a yet higher degree ; see Meyer in 
 loc, who has well explained the force 
 of this particle. The slight difficulty 
 arises from two oppositions, irivTore 
 ...vvv, irapovaiif . . aTovirtg., being blend- 
 ed in a single enunciation. 
 (lerd. <|)oPov k.t.X.] with fear and 
 trembling, i.e. with anxious solicitude, 
 with a distrust of your power ever to 
 do enough; see esp. Eph. vi. 5, and 
 notes ; comp. also i Cor. ii. 3, 2 Cor. 
 vii. IS, where the meaning is substan- 
 tially the same. The ' fear ' is thus 
 to be referred, not directly to God 
 (volume Trapeo-rdvai rbv Qebv, Chrys., 
 Waterland, Works, Vol. v. p. 683), 
 but only indirectly and inferentially ; 
 the 4i6^os arose directly from a sense 
 of the greatness of the work and the 
 possibility of failure ; the rpo/xos was 
 
 E2 
 
52 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioYs. 
 
 13 (rwTtiplav KarepyaXetrOe' Geo? yap ecrrtv 6 eiepyHov ev 
 
 13. ee6s] So Lachm., Tisch. , Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on very greatly 
 preponderating authority; Bec.,oOe6s. 
 
 the anxious solicitude which was na- 
 turally associated with it ; see Conyb. 
 in loc. An implied exhortation to 
 humility (Neander, p. 67), or warning 
 against false security (Calv.), is not 
 required by the context, and is not in 
 accordance with what seems to be the 
 ordinary meaning of the present form 
 of words as used by the Apostle ; see 
 esp. the good note of Hammond, who 
 has weU investigated the meaning 
 of the expression; comp. Beveridge, 
 Serm. xvi. Vol. i. p. 294, who however 
 is here less precise and discriminating. 
 TT)V iavrStv o-(i)Ti]p.] your own salva- 
 tion; the reflexive pronoun being not 
 without emphasis, hinting that now 
 they were alone, and must a;ct for 
 themselves ; comp. Beng. Their sal- 
 vation was something essentially in- 
 dividual, something between each 
 man and his God. A reference to the 
 example of Christ (' as He obeyed. . . so 
 do you obey,' Alf.) seems very doubt- 
 ful; the whole exhortation refers to 
 that example, but the individual pro- 
 noun more naturally points to the 
 words which immediately precede it. 
 The unsatisfactory interpr. eavTwp = 
 oKKiiKuv (comp. Michaelis) is fairly 
 refuted by Van Heng. in loc. 
 jcanp'yatco'Sc] complete, carry out, 
 'peragite.'Grot.j'perficite, perfectum 
 reddite,' Just. 2 ; comp. Eom. yii. 18, 
 Eph, vi. 13 and notes, where the 
 meanings of this verb are briefly no- 
 ticed. The compound form does not 
 imply the o-ttouSt) or ^TTijct^Xeitt (Chrys.), 
 but the 'perseverantia' that was to be 
 shown, the intensive xarA indicating 
 the carrying through of the (pyov; see 
 Eost u. Palm, Lex. s.v., and s.v. KarA, 
 IV. Vol. I. p. 1599. On the practical 
 
 aspects of the doctrine, see the good 
 sermon by Beveridge, Serm. xvi. Vol. 
 I. p. 284 (A.-C. Libr.), Taylor, Life of 
 Chr. ni. 13. 16, Sherlock, Serm. xviii. 
 Vol. I. p. 3H (ed. Hughes). 
 
 13. 0«os 7ap K.T.X.] for Ood is 
 He who effectually worketh, &a. : yea 
 work and be not disheartened, for 
 verily God is He who worketh within 
 you. The ylip is not argumentative, 
 in reference to a suppressed thought, 
 lii] (popoO Sn emov iierb, 06j3oi/ kclI 
 rpbiiov, Chrys., but explanatory (see 
 notes on Gal. ii. 6), in reference to 
 the preceding command, obviating 
 any objection, by demonstrating the 
 vital truth on which it was based, and 
 the great principle on which it was 
 justifiable: 'work anxiously, work 
 solicitously: verily ('sane pro rebus 
 comparatis,' Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 
 232) God inwardly giveth you the 
 ability; ' comp. Liicke on John iv. 44. 
 6 IvcpYuv] He who worketh effectu- 
 ally; 'efficiens,' ' sedulam operam 
 navans,' Syr. The full meaning of 
 this word so frequently used by St 
 Paul must not be obscured; it ap- 
 pears in all cases to point not only 
 to the inward nature of the working, 
 but also to hint at the persistent 
 and effective character of it, scil. 
 ivepyiv elvcu, 'vim suam exercere;' 
 comp. Polyb. Hist. m. 6. 5, xvn. 
 J4. 18, XXVII. I. II. When then 
 Augustine urges in opposition to the 
 Pelagian misinterpretation 'Deus 
 facit ut faciamus, prcsbendo vires effi- 
 cacissimas voluntati, ' he would seem 
 to be no less verbally exact than 
 doetrinally accurate : comp. de Grat. 
 et Lib. Art. ix, 21, contra Pelag. i. 
 19. 37. It may be remarked in 
 
ir. 13. 
 
 63 
 
 vfiiv Koi TO OeXetv Kai to evepyeiv vvep t?? evSoKW. 
 
 passing, that Ivefr/eTv is used several 
 times in Polybius, see Schweigh. Lex. 
 s.v. ; there is however this distinction 
 between his use and that of St Paul, 
 that by the latter it is never used in 
 the passive (see notes on Gal. v. 6), 
 andby the former never in themiddle ; 
 see Fritz. Rom. vii. 5, and for a notice 
 of its various constructions, notes on 
 Gal. ii. 8, V. 6: see also Suioer, The- 
 iaur. Vol. i. p. 1115. iv 
 
 jfitv] in you, i.e. in your minds, not 
 among you; this being alike precluded 
 by the prevailing use of the verb 
 (Matth. xiv. 2, 2 Cor. iv. 12, Gal. iii^ 
 5, Col. i. 29, al.) and the nature of the 
 context, Kal to fl^Xciv k.t.\.] 
 
 both to will and to work effectually, 
 as much the one as the other. Ob- 
 serve especially the use of the more 
 emphatic enumeration Kal...Kal; the 
 64\av no less than the ivepyetv is a 
 direct result of the divine ivipyaa; 
 see "Winer, Gr. § 53. 4, notes on i 
 lim. iv. 10. Of these the first (t6 
 diXeiv) is due to the inworking in- 
 fluence of sanctifying grace (Waterl. 
 Serm. xxvi. Vol. v. p. 688), or, to 
 gpeak more precisely, of gratia prce- 
 veniens, to which the first and feeblest 
 •stirring of the better wiU, the first 
 motion of the better judgment (2 Cor. 
 iii. 5), is alone to be ascribed; comp. 
 Andrewes, Sei-m. Vol. v. p. 303: the 
 second (t4 ivefiyuv) to the gratia co- 
 operans, by the assistance of which 
 we strive ('non per vires nativas sed 
 dativas ') to perform the will of God ; 
 see Ebrard, Christl. Dogm. § 524, 
 Vol. II. p. 566. The language of 
 Chrys. in loc. av 6e\'^aris, Tore ivep- 
 yi\iia t6 BiKeiv, might thus seem open 
 to exception if the BeKriaris is to be 
 referred to a ' dispositio prsevia ; ' this 
 however cannot be certainly inferred 
 from his context. For the diversities 
 
 of opinion on this text, even among 
 Eomanists, see the long and perspicu- 
 ous note of Justiniani in loc, and for 
 the differences among Protestants, 
 and the necessary distinction between 
 •passivity ( ' homo convertitur nolens ') 
 and reccptiwit!/ ('ex nolentefitvolens'), 
 see Ebyard, Christl. Dogm. § 519 — 
 522, Vol. II. p. 558 sq.y.and esp. 
 the careful discussion of Corner, 
 Chr. Doctr. § 130, Vol. iv. p. 164 — 
 187 (Transl.). It may be re- 
 
 marked that the repetition of the 
 word hepyein (preserved correctly by 
 Clarom., Copt., but not by Syr., 
 Vulg.), rather than Karepydj^eirdat, is 
 due to the fact that it expresses more 
 exactly the inward ability showing it- 
 self in action, and is thus more suit-, 
 able in connexion with S^Xeiv. While 
 then this important verse is a con- 
 clusive protest against Pelagianism on 
 the one hand, its guarded language, 
 as well as its intimate connexion with 
 ver. 1 2, shows that it is as conclusive 
 on the other against the Dordraoene 
 doctrines of irrevocable election (cap. 
 i.)andallbutcompelUnggraoe: cap, 
 m. IV. 12, 16, Eeject. err. 8. 
 ■iirlp rfjs tuSoK.] of His good plea- 
 sure, i.e. in fulfilment of it, to carry 
 it out and satisfy it ; 5td ttjv dydTtfi/, 
 Sii, TT\p apiffKuav airoO, Chrys. The 
 prep, iirip here seems to approach in 
 meaning Karh (Eph. i. 5) or Sih with 
 the accus. (Eph. ii. 4), but may still 
 be clearly distinguished from either. 
 It does not represent the eiSoda as 
 the mere ratio of the action, or the 
 mere norma according to which it was 
 done, but as the interested cause of it ; 
 the commodum of the eidoda was that 
 which the action was designed to sub- 
 serve ; comp. Eom. xv. 8, John xi, 4, 
 where however the primary meaning 
 of iw^p is less obscured : see Winer, 
 
54 
 
 npos $iAinnH2ioYS. 
 
 14 "Travra voieiTe ^(wpts yoyyvcr/Jt.wv kui SiaKoyiafxwv, 
 
 Gr. § 47. 1, and comp. Eost u. Palm, 
 Lex. s.v. iwip, 2, Vol. 11. p. 2067. 
 'EiiSoKla is referred by Syr., Just., 
 Green (Gramn. N. T. p. 302), to the 
 'bona voluntas' of the Philippians; 
 this is grammatically plausible, but 
 owing to the preceding Bi\fa> (Mey.) 
 not exegetioaUy satisfactory. StiU 
 less probable is the connexion of the 
 clause with ver. 14 (Conyb.), which, 
 independently of grammatical diffi- 
 culties (see Alf.), has the whole con- 
 sent of antiquity, Ff. and Vv., op- 
 posed to it. On the meaning of ei5- 
 SoKla, i&enotes on Eph.i. 5, and comp. 
 Andrewes, Serm. xiil Vol. i. p. 239 
 (A.-C. Libr.). 
 
 14. irovTa] all things, not ex- 
 actly 'everything you have to do,' 
 or with ref. to ver. 3 (Fell), but, as 
 the context and the last of the two 
 associated substantives seem to sug- 
 gest, 'everything which stands in 
 more immediate connexion with the 
 foregoing commands, and in which 
 the malice of the devil might more 
 especially be displayed:' see Chrys. 
 in loc. Yoyyvo-nuv] mur- 
 
 murings; comp. i Pet. iv. 9, avev 
 yoyyvafuixi : here appy. against God, 
 6 yoyyo^iov 6,xO'piffTet r(^ Bef?, Chrys. ; 
 not against one another, Wiesing." 
 ([humilis] 'placide etiam se geret 
 inter homines,' Calv.),— a command 
 which here finds no natural place. 
 Alford urges that in every place in 
 the N.T. (only 4, and only here in St 
 Paul) yoyyvffii.. refers to murmuring 
 against mem ; butotthese passages, one 
 (John vii. 1 2) is not applicable, and 
 another (i Pet. iv. 9, comp. De W. in 
 Uc.) not perfectly certain. That it 
 may be applied to God seems demon- 
 strable from I Cor. x. 10. The forms 
 yoyyi^o) and yoyyvajiii [perhaps de- 
 rived from Sanscr. gug, 'to murmur,' 
 
 Benfey, Wurzellex. Vol. 11. p. 62] 
 are said to be Ionic, the Attic forms 
 being TovBopi^u and rovSopvaiws ; see 
 Lobeck, Phryn. p. 358, comp. Thorn. 
 M. p. 856 (ed. Bern.). On the al- 
 leged but doubtful distinction be- 
 tween dvev and X'^P^^i ^^6 notes on 
 Eph. ii. 12, SutXayiaiJiuv] 
 
 doublings, ' hsesitationibus,' Vulg., 
 Mth. [dubitatione], Copt, [cogita- 
 tionibus], — not ' detractationibus, ' 
 Clarom., or 'divisione,' Syr., a mean- 
 ing not found in the N.T., and appy. 
 not supported by any good lexical 
 authority: see esp. notes <m i Tim. 
 ii. 8, where this word is briefly 
 noticed. Alford urges the use of 
 fiaXoyi^d) [read -l^o/iat] in Mark ix. 
 33, 34 ; but even there the idea is 
 ' discussion ' rather than ' dispute ' or 
 ' contention : ' comp. Xen. Mem. rn. 
 
 5- I- 
 
 15. iva K.T.\.] Object and aim, 
 not 'incitamentum' (Van H.), con- 
 templated in the foregoing exhorta- 
 tion. They were to fulfil everything 
 connected with the great command, 
 ver. 12 sq., without murmnrings and 
 doubtings, that they might both out- 
 wardly evince (ayue/UTTT-oi) and be in- 
 wardly characterized by (d/c^p.) rec- 
 titude and holiness, and so become 
 examples to an evil world around 
 them. "When Alf. urges against the 
 internal reference of SiaK. that the 
 general object is outward, — blame- 
 lessness and good example, he has 
 consistently to assign to dif^/joioi 
 (suitably answering to x"p's SiaX.) 
 an external meaning which it does 
 not seem to have (see below) : he also 
 makes the appositionally stated and 
 more indirect object, the good ex- 
 ample, primary and direct. The 
 reading yh-qirBe is not perfectly cer- 
 tain; Lachm. (Treg. marg.) reads ■^re 
 
IT. 14, 15. 
 
 56 
 
 tva yevria-Qe a/xefiTrroi lea) asepaioi, tSkvo Qeov a/mwua 15 
 fiecrov yeveas ctkoXiSs koi SiecrTpafifAevrji, iv of? (paiveirQe 
 
 15. ai«6)A4(i] So Lachm., Tiseh., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on clearly 
 preponderating external authority: Rec, and former edd. of this commentary, 
 djuti/HjTO. There is weight in the observation that &/t<linijToi is the rarer 
 form ; but this is not enough to turn the scale. ixiaov] So all the above- 
 
 mentioned edd., on very greatly preponderating authority; Rec, ip iiiaif. 
 
 with good authority; but the au- 
 thority in favour of the text, com- 
 bined with the greater probability of 
 correction, seems clearly to prepon- 
 derate. dK^paioi] pure, 
 'simpliees,' Vulg., J3th., 'sineeres[i],' 
 Clarom. ; not 'harmless,' Auth., AU., 
 —a meaning not recognised by the 
 best ancient Vv., and neither in 
 harmony with the derivation and 
 lexical meaning of the word (0 ini 
 KtKpaiiivos Kaxols, dXX' ottXoOs Kal 
 iirolxtKos, Etym. M.), nor substan- 
 tiated by its use in the N.T. : see 
 Matth. X. 16, axipaioi <is at ircpiffTepat, 
 Bom. xvi. ig, dxepalovs , . ,els t6 KaKbv; 
 in the former of which passages it 
 stands in a species of antithesis to 
 ^p6vtfios, in the latter to (ro0os ; comp. 
 Suicer, Thesaur. s. v. Vol. i. p. 154, 
 Krebs, 06s. p. 331, and for the dis- 
 tinction between cuc^p., dirXoOs, and 
 oKOKos, Tittm. Synon. i. p. 27, and 
 Treiush, Synon. Part 11. § 6. 
 T^Kva @cov K.T.X.] children of God 
 [by virtue of the wo9e<rio, Bom. viii. 
 15, 23] without blemish, in the midst, 
 &o.; not 'blameless in the midst of,' 
 Luth., a position which weakens the 
 climactic force of the epithet, and 
 obscures the apparent allusion to 
 Deut. xzxii. 5, riKva /lu/iijrd, yeveb, 
 aKoKik Kai SLeaTpafi/ji^pTj : on the mean- 
 ing of a)M)i05, see notes on Eph. i. 4. 
 The kindred form a/jui/iriros only 
 occurs once in the N.T., 2 Pet. iii. 14. 
 In meaning it differs but little from 
 a/iefirTos, except as perhaps ap- 
 proaching nearer to a/iu/ios (Hesych. 
 
 ifiii/aiTos ■ dfioi/ws], and expressing 
 not merely an unblamed (cf. fi/ie/tir- 
 Tos, Xen. Ages. vi. 8), but non- 
 blameworthy state; comp. ijliii/iiitos, 
 JEsch. Sept. 508, and see Tittm. 
 Synon. i. p. 29. On the adverbial 
 use of /liffoy, comp. Winer, Gr. § 54. 
 6. o-KoXids Kal 8ic<rTp.] 
 
 crooked and perverted,, in reference 
 to their moral obliquity and their 
 distorted spiritual growth; comp, 
 Deut. xxxii. 5. SkoXjos, allied pror 
 bably to (XKiXos, <rK4\\os, and <rKai- 
 peiv [Pott, Etym. Forsch. Vol. 1. p. 
 268, root-form 2K-, 'progression by 
 steps,' Donalds. Cratyl. § 387, less 
 probably KP-, Sanscr. kri with pre- 
 fixed <r, Benfey, Wurzell. Vol. 11. p. 
 363], occurs elsewhere in the N.T., 
 once in a proper sense, Luke iii. 5, 
 and twice, as here, in an ethical 
 sense. Acts ii. 40, i Pet. ii. 18. 
 Aie<rrp. is similarly found in Matth. 
 xvii. 17, Luke ix. 41, Acts xx. 30; 
 see also exx. from Arrian in Baphel, 
 Amwt. Vol. II. p. 309. 
 iv ots] among whom, — in reference 
 to the persons of whom the yevei, 
 was composed ; comp. Winer, Gr, 
 § 58. 4. b: a similar ease occurs 
 in Gal. ii, 2. i{»*Cvc<r6E] ye 
 
 appear, are seen, so Syr., not 'lu- 
 oetis,' Vulg., Clarom., Wordsw., al., 
 which would require the active <pal- 
 yere, John i. 5, v. 35, 2 Pet. i. 19, al. 
 Alford objects that the act. is not 
 used by St Paul : but will this justify 
 a departure not only from the simple 
 meaning of the word, but from the 
 
5G 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 i6 «)9 <pu)crrrjpei ev Koa-fxtp, \6yov ^wtji eirej^ovrei, eis 
 Kau)(^i]/Ma efiol ei'j rjnepav Xpia-Tov, on ovk ety Kevov 
 
 special use of the middle in connex- 
 ion with the appearance or rising of 
 the heavenly bodies ? see exx. in 
 Eost u. Palm, Lex. a. v. ii. i. b. 
 The verb is indie. (Vulg., Copt., 
 .S!th.), not imperat. (Syr., Theoph.): 
 Christians not were to be, but now 
 actually were as luminaries in a 
 dark heathen world; comp. Matth. 
 V. 14, Eph. V. 8. 
 
 i|>(D<rTi]p€s iv K6<r]uo] luminaries, 
 heavenly lights, in the world; iv 
 k6<t/j., being joined closely with ^uot. 
 as its secondary predicate (Vulg. and 
 all Vv.), not with ^Ivevee (De W.), 
 which would thus have two prepo- 
 sitional adjuncts; see Trench, Synon. 
 § 46. To illustrate the meaning of 
 t/iuffT. comp. Eev. xxi. 11, Gen. i. 14, 
 16, Ecclus. xliii. 7 (applied to the 
 moon), Wisdom xiii. 2 ; and for the 
 different uses of Koff/tos, here appy. 
 in its ethical sense, see notes on Gal. 
 iv. 3. The reference to the use of 
 'torches to guide passengers along 
 the dark and narrow streets of ancient 
 cities' (Wordsw.) is ingenious, but 
 scarcely in harmony with ^atveaffe, 
 and the tenor of the context. 
 
 16. X670V K.T.X.] seeing ye hold 
 forth (are the ministers of) the word 
 of life; further and explanatory de- 
 finition of the preceding, the part, 
 having a slightly causal force. The 
 meaning of irix- is somewhat doubt- 
 ful. It certainly cannot be for irpoa-- 
 ixovTii, Theod., as this would require 
 a dat. ; it may however be either 
 (a) occupantes (comp. Syr., 'ut sitis' 
 illis loco vitas'), and thence, with a 
 modification of meaning, 'contiuen- 
 tes,' Vulg., Clarom., 'tenentes,' Copt. 
 (^th.paraphrases),)car^X'"'"'>^l"'ys.i 
 (xovres, Theoph., (Ecum., — a trans- 
 lation that has certainly a lexical 
 
 basis (see exx. in Eost u. Palm, 
 Lex. s. V. 1. b, Vol. i. p. 1029) and is 
 far too hastily condemned by Van 
 Heng. and Wies.; (|3) pratendentes, 
 Beza, Auth., Eev., 'doctrinam spec- 
 tandam prsbentes,' Van Heng., with 
 reference to the preceding image. 
 Of these interpr., (o) has clearly the 
 weight of antiquity on its side ; still 
 as no exactly opposite example of 
 the modified sense ' continentes ' has 
 yet been adduced, and as the mean- 
 ing 'occupantes' involves an idea 
 foreign to the N.T. (comp. Mey.), 
 we seem bound to adhere to (/3), a 
 meaning that is lexically accurate 
 and exegetically satisfactory. The 
 objection of Meyer is fully answered 
 by Alford in loc. The Xo7o! 
 
 fw^s is the Gospel, fw^s being a 
 species of gen. of the content, ttjv 
 aliiviov vpo^evei paifv, Theod. : comp. 
 John vi. 68, and notes on Eph. i. 13. 
 els Ka-(JxTi|i.a «|io£] to form a ground 
 of boasting for me; result, on the 
 side of St Paul, of his converts be- 
 coming OLiMe/MirTOt Kal ixipaiot : TO<Ta.iTr) 
 ifiCjif Tj dper-^, ihs firi vfias <r<h^HV fwvov, 
 dXXi Kal ifik Xo/iTrpoi/ votetr, Chrys. ; 
 comp. 2 Cor. i. 14. els i])Upav 
 
 Xp.] against the day of Christ; the 
 preposition not so much marking 
 the epoch to which (?us), as that for 
 which, in reference to which, the 
 boasting was to be reserved; comp. 
 chap. i. 10, Eph. iv. 30, and notes 
 on Gal. iii. 23. On the expression 
 ijyu^pa Xp., see notes on ch. i. 6. 
 £Spa|jiov...4K07r(aira] I ran... I labour- 
 ed ; aorists, in harmony with the 
 retrospective view which the Apostle 
 here takes of his life and ministry. 
 The same idea of ministerial activity 
 presented in two different forms of 
 expression, the one figurative, from 
 
II. i6, 17. 
 
 57 
 
 eopa/iov ovSe ety Kevov eKOTria(Ta. aXXa el Koi tnrev- 17 
 
 the stadium (oomp. Gal.'ii. z, 2 Tim. 
 iv. 7), the other more general, in- 
 volving the notion of the toil and 
 suffering undergone in the cause; see 
 notes on i Tim. iv. 10. For exx. of 
 the adverhial e?s Kei'oj', Heb. p'"!'?, 
 Job xxxix. 16 (comp. els Ka\6v, els 
 Kotvov, Bernhardy, Synt. v. 11, p. 
 2 2i), see 2 Cor. vi. i, Gal. ii. .i, 
 I Thess. iii. j, and Kypke, Obs. Vol. 
 I. p. 275. 
 
 17. dXSji K.T.X.] Sowbeit, if I be 
 even poured out; contrary hypothesis 
 to that tacitly implied in the pre- 
 ceding verse. In no verse in this 
 epistle is it more necessary to adhere 
 to the exact force of the particles 
 and the strict lexical meaning of the 
 words. 'AWd, with its primary and 
 proper force ('aUud jam hoc esse de 
 quo sumus dicturi,' Klotz, Devar. 
 Vol. II. p. 2), has no reference to a 
 suppressed thought {ovk ixoir. els nev., 
 EilL), but presents the contrary al- 
 ternative to that already implicitly 
 expressed. The preceding words els 
 KaixW' ^("oi might seem to imply 
 the expectation on the part of the 
 Apostle of a living fruition in the 
 Christian progress (fca yiv. a/ie/iirT.) 
 of his converts; the present verse 
 shows the Apostle's joy even in the 
 supposition of his death ; comp. 
 Bisping. Any reference to a place 
 80 remote as ch. i. 26 (De W.) is 
 wholly inconceivable ; and even a 
 contrast to an implied hope that the 
 Apostle would survive to the ij/idpa 
 Xp. (Van Heng.) is improbable, as 
 els ■^fi. Xp. is only a subordinate 
 thought to the general idea implied 
 in els KaixqiJM i/xol. Eec. adopts the 
 form &\X: the evidence tor dXXi is 
 preponderant. So in ver. 18 Si is to 
 be adopted in preference to the S' of 
 Bee. ' tl Kal must not be 
 
 confounded with ko-I el (Scholef. 
 Hints, p. 106), but, in accordance 
 with the position of the ascensive 
 Kal, marks a more probable sup- 
 position ; the Kal in el koI being re- 
 ferred to the consequent words {etsi 
 or si etiam), but in koI el merely to 
 the preceding condition {etiam si). 
 Contrast Soph. (Ed. Bex, 302, el Kal 
 /iri ^\iveis il>poveis d' o/aus, with 
 ^sch. Cfweph. 298, Kel iiri iriiroi$a, 
 Tovpyov iar' ipyatrriov, and see esp. 
 Herm. Viger, No. 307, from which 
 these exx. are taken; see also Elotz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 519, Hartung, 
 Partilc. Kal, 3. 3, Vol. i. p. 141. 
 Thus then in the present case the 
 Apostle in no way seeks to limit the 
 probability of the supposition; his 
 circumstances, though by no means 
 without hope (ch. i. 25), were still 
 such as seemed to preclude any such 
 limitation. It may be remarked how- 
 ever that Kal el is very rarely used 
 by St Paul; appy. only in 2 Cor. 
 xiii. 4 (Bee, Tisch.), but the reading 
 can hardly be considered genuine ; 
 comp. Gal. i. 8. o"ir^vSo|uii] 
 
 1 be poured out; in reference to the 
 dangers with which he was environ- 
 ed ; comp. ch. i. 20. The simple 
 form, which must not be confounded 
 either with iin<rir4vd. (Herod, ii. 39, 
 IV. 62, Plut. Popl. § 4, al.), or Kara- 
 ffirivS. (Plut. Alex. § 50, ib. Mor. p. 
 435 B> P- 437 ^)' I'otl' here and in 
 
 2 Tim. iv. 6, under the image of the 
 ritual drink-offering which accom- 
 panied the sacrifice (Numb. xv. 5, 
 xxviii. 7), alludes to the pouring out 
 of his blood ('libor,' — not 'immolor,' 
 as Vulg., Syr., Copt.) and the martyr's 
 death by which it might be reserved 
 for the Apostle to glorify God; see 
 esp. notes on 2 Tim. I. c, Suioer 
 Thesaur. Vol. 11. p. 993, and the 
 
58 
 
 npos *iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 oo/jiai iiri t^ 6v(rl<f ko) Xeirovpyla Tijs irltrTetai vfiwv, 
 18 ya'ipw Koi avyyalpw -jracriv v/uliv to Se avTO Kai vfieh 
 yalpere koi avy^aiperi not. 
 
 good note of Wordsworth in loc. 
 eirV rfi 6. k.t.X.] in addition to the 
 sacrifice and (priestly) service of 
 your faith. The exact meaning of 
 evfflq, is somewhat doubtful. There 
 is certainly no Iv Sid, SvoTv (comp. 
 Conyb.), but it may be doubted 
 whether the use of the single article 
 does not so connect 6vff. and Xeir. 
 that both may specify acts of which 
 vluT. is the common object ; see Mey. 
 in loc. As however Bvcla in St Paul's 
 Epp., and indeed throughout the 
 N.T., appy. always means the thing 
 sacrificed, not the action of sacrifi- 
 cing, we seem bound, with Syr., 
 Vnlg., Copt. [? for comp. John xvi. 
 2], ^th., and thus far Chrys. and 
 Theod., to retain the simple mean- 
 ing of 8v<T. and to regard wlareoK 
 as a common gen. ohjecti to both, 
 standing in a species of appositional 
 relation to the former [the faith, not 
 the Apostle (Chrys., Theod.), was the 
 sacrif.], and of simple relation to the 
 latter. The Bvirla then is the sa- 
 crifice, the XeiT. the act of offering it 
 by the Apostle (Bisp.), and the object 
 both of one and the other (in slightly 
 different relations) the irla-Tis of the 
 Philippians. "Evl will thus be, not 
 simply temporal, 'wahrend,' Mey., 
 nor simply ethical, 'propter,' or 'in 
 saorifioium,' jEth., but will imply 
 'addition,' ' accession to' (Matth. xxv. 
 20, iJcc, Tisch.), and will point to 
 the airivS. as the concomitant act ; 
 see esp. Arrian, Alex. vi. 19. 5, aird- 
 (Tos M TJJ 9u(7£{i, cited by Eaphel in 
 loc. ; so Van Heng. and De Wette. 
 The local meaning is untenable, as 
 with the Jews the libation was 
 poured not on (Jahn, Archceol. § 378), 
 but around the altar; see Joseph. 
 
 Antiq. iii. 9. 4, and notes on 2 Tim, 
 iv. 5. xotpo) KoC K.T.X.] I 
 
 rejoice, and jointly rejoice with you 
 all; I rejoice, absolutely (not M ry 
 ever. x«'P- (Chrys.), i. e. on account 
 of my probable <ririi>dcff$a.i, and do 
 herein participate in rejoicing with 
 you all: my joy remains unaltered 
 even on a supposition on which it 
 might seem less natural, on the 
 supposition of my death. ^vyxaJ-fxa 
 is not 'congratulor,' Vulg., — a mean- 
 ing which the verb appy. may have 
 in classical (.Each, de Fals. Leg. p. 
 34) as well as post-classical writers 
 (Polyb. His*. XXIX. 7. 4),— but 'simul 
 gaudeo,' Copt., 'exnlto cum,' Syr., 
 MGa.. (?), the meaning which (ruyx- 
 appears to have always in the N.T., 
 to which the following verse offers 
 no exegetical obstacle (Mey., Alf.) 
 but is rather confirmatory of it. 
 
 18. TO 8^ avTo] yea on the same 
 account ; not ' in like manner,' 
 Scholef. Hints, p. 106, but the simple 
 pronominal accus. after x^'P'^i comp. 
 Kruger, Sprachl. § 46. 6- 9- Meyer 
 reads airo toOto, ' hoc ipsum,' appy. 
 by an oversight, as there is here no 
 difference of reading. x^'^P^^ 
 
 Kal oniYX'] rejoice and jointly rejoice; 
 not indie. (Erasm.), but imper., as 
 Syr. and all the best Vv. The 
 Apostle had previously said that he 
 rejoiced not only for himself, but 
 associated them with this joy: lest 
 they might think that the probable 
 martyrdom of their loved Apostle 
 was not a subject for <rvyx<dpav, he 
 emphatically repeats in a reciprocal 
 form {Kal ifi.) what he had implied 
 in the preceding verse, — that they 
 were indeed to rejoice in this seem- 
 ingly mournful alternative. 
 
II. 1 8, 19, 20. 
 
 59 
 
 I hope to send my 
 
 unselfish son in the 
 
 faith, Timothy, and to , , , 
 
 come myself. Taj(6ft) J VefJl.yjf 
 
 'EXiri^w Se iv Kvpiu) 'I^/croC T^t/x69eov 19 
 at iifilv, Iva Kaylo ei;\|/i;^a> 
 yvovi ra irepi vfx.wv, ovSeva yap eyjo ia-6^v')(ov, oittjj 20 
 
 Intended movements and plans 
 (oh. ii. 19—30). 
 
 19 — 24. Mission of Timothy. 
 19. 'EXirC^u K.T.X.. Yet I hope, &o.; 
 the oppositiye Si suggests that the 
 iTirivS. ahove mentioned was not ne- 
 cessarily considered either as certain 
 or immediate. This hope was iv 
 Kvpiif, it rested and was centred in 
 Him, it arose from no extraneous 
 feelings or expectations, and so would 
 doubtless be fulfilled, Bafifiio Stl i^ev- 
 imptffti /loi & 9cos toCto, Chrys.j see 
 notes on Eph. iv. 17, vi. i. The 
 reading iv XpurTifi 'Iijcr. is adopted 
 by Lachm. but lias no claim to be 
 substituted for the reading of the 
 text. ifXv] to you, not 'unto 
 
 you' in the sense of irpos ii/ias, — a 
 local usage of the dative too broadly 
 denied by Alf. (see Winer, Gr. §31.5; 
 comp. Hartung, Casus, p. 81 sq.), 
 nor again the dat. commodi, De W., 
 but the dative of the recipients 
 (Mey.), falling under the general 
 head of what is technically termed 
 the transmissive dat.; comp. Jelf, 
 Cr''- § 587. Kd7« eui|/«x<»] 
 
 I also (I the sender, as well as you 
 the receivers) may be of good heart. 
 Biif/vX' is an dV. \ey6/ji,. in the N.T., 
 but is occasionally fotind elsewhere, 
 comp. Poll. Onom. in. 28: the subst. 
 eiipvxia (Polyb. i. 57. 2, u. 55. 4, al.) 
 and the adv. ii\j/ix'^^ (Polyb. x. 39. 2, 
 aL, Joseph. Ant. vii. 6. 2) are suf- 
 ficiently common. The use of the 
 verb in the imperative as a kind of 
 epitaph is noticed by Eost u. Palm, 
 Lex. a. v.; Jacobs, Anth. Pal. p. 939. 
 
 20. ^dp] Beason for sending 
 Timothy in preference to any one 
 else : It/wSeov irinireis ; tI Si^Trore ; 
 Naf, tfnjtrlv, oidiva ycip k.t.X., Chrys., 
 
 l(r6i|nixov] Wee minded, i.e. with my- 
 self, OfloioJS €|JLOl KT]S6p.€V0V VflUV Kal 
 
 <t>povTl^ovTa, Chrys.; comp. Syr., 'qui 
 .est siout animam m^am,:' so also 
 expressly Copt. Timothy is not here 
 contrasted with others (Beza), which 
 would interfere with the natural and 
 logical reference of the Jo-o'ttjs to the 
 subject of the sentence. On the dis- 
 tinction between W^. 'qui eodem 
 modo est animatus,' and (riv\j/vxos, 
 'qui idem sentit, unanimis,' see 
 Tittmann, Synon. i. p. 67. The word 
 is an air. \ey6/ji. in the N.T., but is 
 found occasionally elsewhere, both 
 in classical (jEsch. Agam. 1470) and 
 post-classical Greek (Psalm Iv. 13); 
 comp. l<To\pixws, Eustath. on II. xi. 
 p. 764. Sim's] who; not 'quippe 
 
 qui,' but 'ita comparatus ut,' Mey., 
 'of that kind who,' Alf., with refer- 
 ence to the TTOioTTjs of the antecedent 
 {oiSeis TOLovTo's iariv, Chrys., comp. 
 Hartung, Casus, p. 286); the rela- 
 tive being here used (to adopt a ter- 
 minology previously explained) not 
 explicatively , but classifically, or qua- 
 litatively ; see notes on Gal. iv. 24, 
 and Kriiger, Sprachl. § 51. 8 sq., 
 where the distinction between os and 
 oVtis is briefly but satisfactorily laid 
 down. 7Vii](rC(iis...|i.Epi.|J,vi]<rei] 
 
 will genuinely care for, will have 
 true care for; with that genuineness 
 of feeling which befits the relation- 
 ship between the Apostle and his 
 converts; yvricrlas, tovt4<tti irarpiKus; 
 comp. I Tim. i. z, and see notes in 
 loc. 'M.epip.mv is always thus used 
 with an accus. of the object by St 
 Paul, — contrast Matth. vi. 25 (dat.), 
 oh. vi. 28 and Luke x. 41 (with irepl). 
 Matt. vi. 27 (absolutely), — and agree- 
 ably to its probable derivation and 
 
60 
 
 npo2 a>iAitinHsioY2. 
 
 31 yvtiff'mq ra vepi vfjiwv /xepi/uii'i^aer ol iravTH yap tu 
 
 23 eavroiiv ^t]TOV<rtv, ov ra ^Iijarov Xptcrrov. Tt]v oe 
 
 SoKifJLriv avTov yivwa-Kere, on w? irarpi tbkvov aw e/ioc 
 
 21. 'Itjffov Xpi(TToS] So Lachm., Treg., Rev. (with marg.), on clearly pre- 
 ponderating authority : Tisch., Westc. and Hort (with marg.), XpurToC 'Iriaov. 
 The reading of Rec. tou Xp. 'Iijir. is only supported by a few mss. 
 
 affinities, iiepfiriplt^oi, p.4pfjtspos [Sanscr. 
 sniri,— 'meminisse,' 'anxium esse,' 
 Benfey, Wurzellex. Vol. ii. p. 33, 
 Donalds. Cratyl. § 410], denotes 
 anxious thought, solicitude, ' ita cu- 
 rare ut solicitus sis' (comp. Luke x. 
 41), differing in this respect from the 
 simpler ^pon-ifciv ; see Tittm. Synon. 
 I. p. 187. The future is not ethical, 
 hut points to the time when Timothy 
 should come to them. 
 
 21. oi irdvT«s 7dp] for they all, 
 i.e. all the rest now with me; not 
 'plerique,' Wolf, but 'omnes quos 
 nunc habeo meoum,' Van Heng., the 
 article appy. specifying the whole 
 number of the others with St Paul 
 (cuncti), to whom the single one, 
 Timothy, is put in contrast. On this 
 use of the art. with iras, see Krviger, 
 Sprachl. § 50. 11. 12, comp. Bern- 
 hardy, Synt. VI. 24, p. 320, and Eose, 
 in Middl. Art. p. 104 note, to whose 
 list of exx. of the art. with ttSs (plur.), 
 when used without a subst., this pas- 
 sage may be added. The attempts 
 to explain away this declaration are 
 very numerous, but all either ar- 
 bitrary or ungrammatical : this only 
 it seems fair to urge, that the con- 
 text does necessarily imply some sort 
 of limitation, and does appy. warrant 
 our restricting it to all those com- 
 panions of St Paul who were available 
 for missionary purposes, who had 
 undertaken, and were now falling 
 back from, the hardships of an Apo- 
 stle's life. Who these were cannot 
 be ascertained ; comp. Wiesing. in 
 
 loc. Td iavTuv] their own 
 
 things, not specially ttiv omelav ava- 
 iravaiv Kal to iv d(70aXe/^ eJyat, Chrys., 
 followed by Theoph. and (Ecum., 
 with reference to the difficulties and 
 perils of the journey, but generally, 
 'sua,' Clarom., Am., ' temporalia 
 commoda oonseotantes,' Anselm, — 
 considering their own selfish in- 
 terests, and not the glory and honour 
 of Christ ; comp. ver. 4. 
 
 22. T^v 8i SoKifii^v avToii] But 
 his tried character; contrast of the 
 character of Timothy vrith that of 
 the ol irdvTes. Ao/ci^inj, ' probatio ejus,' 
 Syr., ' experimentum,' Vulg., here 
 and Eom. v. 4, 2 Cor. ii. 9, ix. 13, by 
 a, very easy gradation of meaning 
 points to the 'indoles spectata,' Fritz. 
 {Rom. V. 4, Vol. i. p. 259), 'indoles,' 
 .ffith. [simply, — almost as we use 
 'character'], by which Timothy was 
 distinguished, and of which the 
 Philippians themselves probably had 
 personal experience on a former 
 visit ; comp. Acts xvi. i — 4 with 
 ver. 12. The use of SoKiyni) in the 
 N.T. is confined to St Paul's Epp.; 
 comp. Eeuss, Theol. Ghrit. n. 20, 
 Vol. II. p. 229. 
 
 Yivuo-KCTc] ye Itnow; indie, as Syr., 
 Clarom., Copt., .Slth., not imper., as 
 Vulg., Corn, a Lap., — a construction 
 almost plainly inconsistent with the 
 following words, which seem specially 
 designed to explain and justify the 
 assertion; koX on oix otXws \iyi>>, 
 ip.e!s <f>r](Tlv airol MuTaaBi on k.t.X., 
 Chrys. i&$ uoTpl t^kvovJ 
 
II. 21, 22. 61 
 
 eoouXevcrev e/y to evayyeXtov, tovtov fxev ovv eXTri^co 23 
 
 as a child to a father, 'siout patri 
 filius,' Vulg., not 'with a father,' 
 Syr., Auth. ; such an omission of the 
 preposition in the first member being 
 appy. confined to poetry; see jelf, 
 Gr. § 650. I, 2, Kriiger, Sprachl. § 68. 
 9. 2. Mey. and Alf. deny unrestrict- 
 edly an omission of the prep, in the 
 first member, but see iEsch. Suppl. 
 311, Eurip. Hel. 863, and Jelf. Gr. 
 § 650. i. The construction affords 
 an example of what is termed ' oratio 
 variata:' the Apostle, feeling that 
 i5oi\tvo-£v was scarcely suitable in 
 connexion with b-ot/jI and t^kvov, 
 proceeds with the comparison in a 
 slightly changed form; iSoiXevaev, — 
 not ^yuof, as the construction might 
 seem to require (Eom. xvi. 18), but 
 aim iiiol, as the nature of the relation 
 suggested; see Winer, Gr. § 63. 11. 
 1 1 p. 509. ''^s "^^ riayy^iov] 
 
 for the Gospel; not 'in the Gospel,' 
 Auth., Vulg., Syr., 'in the doctrine 
 of the Gospel,' .Slth., but 'in evau- 
 gelium,' Vulg. (Fuld.), i.e. to further 
 the cause of the Gospel ; the prep. 
 els with its usual force denoting the 
 object and destination of the action ; 
 comp. Luke v. 4, 2 Cor. ii. 12, and 
 Winer, Gr. § 49. a. 
 
 23. toCtov \i,hi oSv] Him then; 
 the fi^v being antithetical to 5^, ver. 
 24, and the retrospective oSn continu- 
 ing and concluding the subject of 
 the mission of Timothy. On this 
 force of ovv see notes on Gal. iii. 5. 
 MS av d<^CSci>] whensoever I shall have 
 seen {the issue of); in effect, 'so soon 
 as I shall have, or have seen,' <&€. 
 [Srav tSia eV Hn Ha-TniKa, Chrys.), but 
 designedly couched in terms invol- 
 ving more of doubt, the particle dv 
 being joined with the temporal ws 
 to convey the complete uncertainty 
 when the objectively-possible event 
 
 specified by the subjunctive will 
 actually take place ; comp. Jelf, Gr. 
 §841, Herm. de Partic. av, 11. 11, p. 
 120, and on the temporal use of ws, 
 see Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 759. 
 The remark of Eustath. (p. 1214, 40) 
 is very pertinent, oVt Si iarl tis Koi 
 XpoviK'^ irore (TTj/jLaffia, t^aiverai iv iin- 
 (TToXS Tov pa(n\4ias ' Avnoxov, olov, lis 
 av o'iv 'Kd^rjs ttjv iinffrdKiiv, civra^ov 
 K^^pvyfia TToii^ffaudai, TJyovv TjviKO. Xd- 
 ^T)s. He would however have been 
 more correct if he had said r)vU av, 
 see Ellendt, Lex. Sophocl. Vol. i. 
 p. 773. In the compound form d0(5. 
 the prep, is not intensive, ' see 
 clearly' (Alf.), but local, referring 
 however not to the object but to the 
 observer, 'prospicere,' and perhaps 
 may further involve the idea of a 
 'terminus' looked to, other and in- 
 tervening objects not being contem- 
 plated ; see Jonah iv. 5 (a pertinent 
 ex.), Herod, viii. 37 (dTriipeov); comp. 
 i,Tro0ia,a0ai, AiroaKOTetv, al., and esp. 
 Winer, de Verb. Comp. iv. p. n. 
 The change from the tenuis to the 
 aspirate (with Lachm., Tisch., Treg., 
 Westc. and Hart: Eec., Bev., AirlSa) 
 is ascribed by Winer {Gr. § 5. i. 14) 
 to the pronunciation of ISe^v with a 
 digamma; comp. Acts iv. 29 (Lachm., 
 Tisch.), but the reading is doubtful. 
 Tol irepX 1(1^] the things pertaining to 
 me; not identical with rh kot ifU 
 (ch. i. 12), but with a faint idea of 
 motion (occupation about. Acts xix. 
 25), in ref. to their issue and develop- 
 ment, i.e. how they will turn, what 
 issues they will have; toiov ?|et 
 riXos, Chrys., idv Ti\iov "Kd^ri \ij<nv 
 TO, Sua-x^pv, Theod. The form ^f- 
 auT^s, sc. T^s dipas, 'illico,' 'e ves- 
 tigio' {irapavrlKa, Hesych., ei0im, 
 Suid.), occurs in Mark vi. 25, Acts 
 X. 33, al. 
 
62 
 
 EPOS $IAinnH2I0YS. 
 
 34 T€fi.-^ai, wy av acplSoo ra vepl e,«e, e^avriji' irevoiQa 
 
 oe ev Kvpiai oti koi qutos Ta\iwq eXevcrofxat, 
 2,'{ AvayKoiov Se nyncrdunv ETracbpo- Epaphroditus, your mes- 
 
 '-' ' • I • • 1 f-[- Benger, who has been 
 
 Sirov Tov aSe-\<pbv Kal crvvepyov Ka\ aw- ffi"hrs1lfe to X 
 
 / f-o^i^ X ^I send, that you may 
 
 arrpaTiwriv fiov, vfxuiv oe airoa-ToXov Kat rejoice. 
 
 24. ir^7roi6a...ev ICvpCip] / am 
 
 confident in the Lord; the sphere of 
 my confidence is in Him; see notes 
 on ver. 19, and onEph. iv. 17, vi. i. 
 Kol aJros] I myself also'; the Koi im- 
 plying that besides sending Timothy 
 to them the Apostle hoped to come 
 in person. The raxias, as Mey. re- 
 marks, must, as in yer. 19, date 
 from the present time, the time of 
 writing the Epistle. In recurring 
 however in ver. 23 to the mission of 
 Timothy, he expresses the hope that 
 it would be i^avTrjs, 'forthwith;' 
 his own visit he had good confidence 
 would be Tox^ws, i.e. no long interval 
 after. At the end of the verse irpis 
 v/icis is added by good, but clearly 
 insufficient authority. 
 
 25—30. Mission and siclmess of 
 Epaphroditus. 25. 'Ava7Katov 
 
 Sk ■<Yft\<r.'] Yet I deemed it necessary; 
 the mission of Timothy and the 
 Apostle's own visit though probable 
 were both contingent; he deemed it 
 necessary therefore to send (back) 
 one on whom he could rely, and in 
 whom the Philippians had interest 
 and confidence. Wiesinger denies 
 any connexion between the sending 
 back Epaphr. and the mission of 
 Tim.; this however is surely to over- 
 look the antithesis suggested by 6^. 
 On the use of the epistolary aor. 
 (still more expressly ver. 28), see 
 Winer, Gr. § 40. 5. b. 2. 
 'Eira(|>p6Si.Tov] Of Epaphroditus be- 
 yond this passage nothing is known. 
 He has been supposed to be the 
 same with Epaphras, Col. i. 7, iv. 12, 
 Philem. 23 ; but this, though ety- 
 
 mologically possible, is certainly not 
 historically demonstrable. As the 
 name appears to have been not un- 
 common (Sueton. Nero, § 49, Joseph. 
 contr. Ap. i. i, al., see Wetst. in loc), 
 — as Epaphras was a Colossian (Col. 
 iv. 12), — and as the alms of the 
 European city of PhiUppi would 
 hardly have been committed to the 
 member of a church so remote from 
 it as the Asiatic Colossae, it seems 
 natural to regard them as different 
 persons. For the necessarily scanty 
 literature on the subject, see Winer, 
 BWB. Art. 'Epaphras,' Vol. i. p. 
 
 330. TOV (£86X<|)6v K.T.X.] 
 
 Three general but climactic designa- 
 tions of the (spiritual) relation in 
 which Epaphroditus stood to the 
 Apostle, under the vinculum of the 
 common article; my brother in the 
 faith, fellow-worker in preaching it, 
 and fellow-soldier in maintaining and 
 defending it ; on avvcrrpar. comp. 
 2 Tim. ii. 3. 
 
 if/av 81 K.T.X.] hut your messenger 
 and minister to my need ; secular and 
 administrative relation in which 
 Epaph. stood to the Philippians. 
 'AirbaTokov is here used in its simple 
 etymological sense, not 'apostolum,' 
 Vulg., Clarom., tiji/ ivifUKeiav viiwv 
 iliTeiri(TT€ViJi,hor, Theod., Chrys. 2 
 (comp. Taylor, Episc. § 4.' 3), but, 
 as the context seems to require, 
 'legatum,' Beza, Beng.; comp. 2 Cor. 
 viii. 23, and see notes on Gal. i. 1. 
 AeiToupyiv (Eom. xiii. 6, xv. 16) is 
 used in its general and wider sense 
 of 'minister' in- ref. to the office 
 undertaken by Epaphr., (is to -ira^ 
 
II. 24, 25, 26, 27- 
 
 63 
 
 XeiTOvpyov rrji xpetaf /jlov vi/j-y^ai irpos vf^af, eireiSri 26 
 eirivodwv ^v irdfTai iJyuaj, xai aStj/novcov, SioTC ^Kovtrare 
 OTi tjaQevrjcrev. Kai yap ^adevria-ev irapairXj^criov 6a- 37 
 
 avTuiv awoffToXhiTa Kofdaavra XP^' 
 fmra, Theod. On the various mean- 
 ings of XeiT. see Sviieer, Thesaur. s.v. 
 Vol. II. p. 222. The con- 
 
 nexion is not perfectly certain, but 
 on the whole it seems most natural 
 to connect i/niSv with this as well as 
 with the preceding subst., comp. ver. 
 30 : so Scholef. Hints, p. 106 ; contr. 
 De W. (cpmp. ^th.), who however 
 urges no satisfactory reason for the 
 separation. ir^fitliai] It was 
 
 really dvaird/iipai, comp. ch. iv. 18 ; 
 if however, as does not seem im- 
 probable, Epaphr. was sent to stay 
 some little time with the Apostle 
 (Beng.), the simple form becomes 
 more appropriate: comp. ver. 28, 30. 
 26. eireiSiJ k.t.X.] Eeason for the 
 dvayKoiov Tiyijaaiiijv . The conj unction 
 iiraSi, 'guoniam' [quom jam], 'sin- 
 temal,' 'since' (sith-then-ce, comp. 
 Tooke, Div. ofPurley, i. 8, Vol. i. p. 
 253), differs thus and thus only from 
 iirel, that it also involves the quasi- 
 temporal reference (' aflSrmatio rerum 
 eventu petita,' Klotz) which is sup- 
 plied to it by 5^, and thus expresses a 
 thing that at once ensues (temporally 
 or causally) on the occurrence or reali- 
 zation of another ; see Klotz, Devar. 
 Vol. II. p. 548, Hartung, Partik. Si], 
 3. 3, Vol. I. p. 259. It ia not of fre- 
 quent occurrence in the N.T. ; it is 
 used by St Paul only in i Cor. i. 21, 
 22, xiv. 1 6, XV. 21. liriiroOwv 
 
 K.T.X.] he was longing after you all. 
 On this use of the pres. part, with the 
 auxiliary verb to denote the duration 
 of a state (less commonly in ref. to an 
 action), see Winer, Gr. § 45. j, and 
 notes on Gal. i. 23. The construc- 
 tion is occasionally found in classical 
 
 Greek (see exx. in Winer, I.e., and 
 Jelf, Gr. § 375. 4), but commonly 
 with the limitation that the part, ex- 
 presses some property inherent in the 
 subject. On the [directive) force of M 
 in in-iTToB., see notes on 2 Tim. i. 4. 
 After v/jias, Lachm., Westc. and Hort, 
 add ISav in brackets, on good, but 
 not preponderant, authority. 
 dST)|i.ov(ov] in heaviness; see Matth. 
 xxvi. 37, \vTreiaBai. koI dSrjiJi,., Mark 
 xiv. 33, iK6an§ei(T0a.i. Kal aSriii. This 
 somewhat peculiar verb is explained 
 by Buttmann (Lexil. § 6. 13) as pro- 
 perly denoting 'great perplexity 
 {Etytn. M. dXiJeiy Kal Anropeiv, dfitj- 
 xaveli', Hesych. d7Ui'ia!') leading to 
 trouble and distress of mind,' and is 
 to be referred not to a root &S4(a 
 (Wiesing.), but, as Buttmann plaus- 
 ibly shows, to d, S^iuos ; comp. dSruieTv, 
 and see Eocles. vii. 16, Symm., where 
 the LXX. has iKirXay^s. The deriva- 
 tion from the older form is main- 
 tained by Lobeck, Pathol, pp. 160, 
 238, and favoured by Bp Lightfoot 
 in loc. How the Philippiaus heard of 
 this, and why Epaphr. was especially 
 so grieved, is not explained. 
 
 27. Kal y&p lifB.] For he really 
 was sick; the report you heard was 
 true. In this formula the Kai is not 
 otiose, but either with its conjunctive 
 force (comp. notes on ch. iv. 12) an- 
 nexes sharply and Closely the causal 
 member, ' etenim ' (comp. Soph. Antig. 
 3 30) , or with its asoensive force throws 
 stress on the predication, ' nam etiam,' 
 as here; see Klotz, Devar. Vol. n. 
 p. 642, Hartung, Partik. Kal, 3. i, 
 Vol. I. p. 138. The remark of Har- 
 tung seems perfectly just, that there 
 is no inner and mutually modifying 
 
G4 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 vara)' aWa 6 Geo? rfKeritrev avTov^ ouk avTov ae iiovov 
 
 28 aXXa Koi e/xe, Iva ixrj \vTrriv e-TU \virriv o")(S>. o'lrovSaio- 
 
 Tepwi ovv eTrefjiy^a avrov, 'iva iSovre^ avTov iraXtv y^apiJTe 
 
 27. ijKiriaev aMv] Bo Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Wesfc. and Hort, on very 
 greatly preponderating authority: Rec, Bev.,aiTbv TiMri<rev. iirl \vwriv] 
 
 so all the above-mentioned edd. : Eec, iwl Xiwri. The only difference between 
 -the two readings is that the aecua. conveys the idea of motion in the accumu- 
 lation ; comp. Psalm Ixix. 27, Isaiah xxviii. 10, Ezek. vii. 26. 
 
 connexion between the two particles 
 (contrast Kai 8^, notes on I Tim, iii. 10), 
 but that their constant association is 
 really due to the early position which 
 yiip regularly assumes in the sentence. 
 irapairXijcriov Oavdrtp] like to death. 
 There is here neither solecism (Van 
 Heng. ) nor brachylogy (De W. ) . Ila- 
 paw\. is the adverbial neuter (Polyb. 
 III. 33. 17, with dat. ; iv. 40. 10, ab- 
 solutely; comp. Herod, iv. 99), and 
 like the more usual form TrapawXri- 
 ffioK (Plato, Phadr. p. 255 e) is asso- 
 ciated with the regular dative of 
 'likeness or similarity;' see Kriiger, 
 Sprachl. § 48. 13. 8, Jelf, Gr. § 594. 2, 
 and the numerous exx. in Bost u. 
 Palm, Lex. s.v. The gen. (which is 
 the reading here of Westc. and Hort, 
 on the authority of BK=P; 6 mss.; 
 Chrys.) is rare; comp. Plato, Soph. p. 
 217 B, Polyb. Hist. i. 23. 6. 
 Themeaningis thus in effect the same 
 as fi^Xf"- ^ctvctTou ■fjyyt<TeVf ver. 30, ttX^- 
 ffioK A^lKeTO BavArov, Galen in Hip- 
 pocr. Epid. i. (cited by Wetst.), but 
 the mode of expression is different. 
 X^iniv lirV XilirT)v] sorrow coming 
 upon sorrow; Xiirrj arising from the 
 death of Epaphr. in addition to the 
 \iirri of my own captivity, Bisp. ; not 
 as Chrys. ttjv d,ir6 t^s TeKeuTTjs iirl t-^ 
 Sik T^c afijiuaTlav yevoixivriv airi}, for, 
 as Mey. justly observes, this would be 
 clearly inconsistent with dXuTrdre/oos, 
 ver. 28. If the second Xivnj had 
 arisen from the sickness of Epaphr. it 
 would have ceased when he was well 
 
 enough to be sent away, and the 
 Apostle in that respect would have 
 been not comparatively, but positively 
 oXuiros. "tO^] '^^^ subjunctive 
 
 is here appropriately used after the 
 praeterite to mark the abiding charac- 
 ter the sorrow would have assumed ; 
 see Winer, Gr. § 41. b. i, and esp. 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 618. This 
 remark however must be applied with 
 great caution in the N.T., where, as 
 in other later writers, the use of the 
 opt. is noticeably on the decline ; see 
 notes on Gal. iii. 19. 
 
 28. o-irouSoiOT^pws] More diUgently 
 than I should have done if ye had not 
 heard of his sickness, and been dis- 
 quieted by the tidings. In exx. of 
 this nature, which are common both 
 to the N.T. and classical Greek, the 
 comp. is not used for the positive, 
 hut is to be explained from the 
 context ; compare notes on i Tim. iii. 
 1 4, 2 Tim. i. 17, and see Winer, Gr. 
 % 35-4. irdXiv may be 
 
 connected with ISbvres (Beza, Auth.), 
 but is more naturally referred to x<t- 
 pTjre (Luth.), and has much greater 
 force in that connexion. It is the 
 habit of St Paul to place waKi.v before 
 the verb, wherever the structure of 
 the sentence will permit; contrast 2 
 Cor. X. 7, Gal. iv. 9, v. 3. The same 
 order is regularly adopted by St Mat- 
 thew; but St Mark and St John, who 
 use the word very frequently, place it 
 nearly as often after, as before the 
 verb with which it is associated; 
 
IT. 28, 29, 30. 
 
 65 
 
 Kayo) aXi/TTOTeoo? co. irpoaSe'^etrQe ovv avrbv iv J^vpltp 29 
 fiera vaarig j^OjOay, koi touj roiovTovi evTifiovs ei^ere, 
 oTi Sia TO epyov Xpia-rov iueXi"* OavuTOV tjyyia-ev 30 
 
 30. XpuTTov] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., on slightly preponderating 
 authority; Westc. and fforS, Kvpim: Rec, and former edd. of this Commen- 
 tary, ToO XplOTOU. 
 
 plural form of the associated abstract 
 substantive. koI tous 
 
 toio^It. K.T.X.] and such hold in 
 honour; 'such,' soil, as Epaphrodi- 
 tus, who is a, sort of specimen of 
 the class. On the use of the art. 
 with toioCtos to denote a known indi- 
 vidual or a whole class of such, see 
 Kiihner on Xen. Mem. i. 5. 2, and 
 Kriiger, Sprachl, § 50. 4. 6. The 
 formula (vnimv ^x^iv, though not 
 without parallel in classical Greek, 
 e.g. kvTlii. riyeiaBai (Plato, Phced. p. 
 64 d) woieiv, al., is more usually ex- 
 pressed with the adverb, e.g. ivTl/j,as 
 ^eiv, dyeiv, comp. Plato, Republ. vii. 
 p. 528 B, VIII. p. S48 A. 
 
 30. Sid. T& Jp^ov Xp.] on account 
 of the work of Christ. All the Greek 
 commentators refer these and the 
 following words to the danger arising 
 from persecution confronted by Bpa- 
 phroditus at Eome in his endeavour 
 to minister to St Paul ; eUbt ovv irav- 
 rhs KaTa^povrjffai Ktvdtivov, wffre irpoff- 
 e\$civ Kal {iTTiipeT'^aaadai, Chrys. The 
 foregoing mention however of his 
 sickness, and the subsequent state- 
 ment of the object contemplated by 
 the t6 irapa^oKov of his conduct, seem 
 to restrict the reference simply to the 
 service undertaken and rendered by 
 Epaphxoditus to the Apostle, the per- 
 formance of which exposed him to 
 the danger of all but mortal sickness. 
 T6 (pyov Xp. is thus not rb eiayy., 
 Baumg.-Crus. (comp. Bill.), but the 
 service which by being rendered im- 
 mediately to the Apostle became 
 mediately rendered to Christ. 
 
 comp. the extremely useful work, 
 Gersdorf, Beitrdge, p. 491 sq. 
 aXviroTcpos] less sorrowful: the joy 
 felt by the Philippians will mitigate 
 the sorrow (in his confinement) of the 
 sympathizing Apostle ; idi> ifieis x*'- 
 prire Kciyu x"'/"*! Chrys. The word 
 aXviros is an air. XeyS/M, in the N. T. ; 
 in classical writers it is occasionally 
 found also in a transitive sense ; comp. 
 SKviros oTj/os, Athen. i. 29. 
 
 29. irpoo-StxccrBe k.t.X.] Receive 
 him then; in accordance with myin- 
 tentionin sending him {ha k.t.X., ver. 
 28). The ovv here perhaps slightly 
 differs in meaning from the one im- 
 mediately preceding. In ver. 28 it 
 is rather more inferential, here it 
 relapses to its perhaps more usual 
 meaning of 'continuation and re- 
 trospect,' Donalds. Gr. § 604. On 
 the two uses of oSc (the collective 
 and reflexive), see Klotz, Devar. Vol. 
 II. p. 717, compared with Hartung, 
 PartiTc. Vol. 11. p. 9 sq. , and on its 
 varieties of translation, Rev. Transl. 
 of St John, p. X. 
 
 iv KvpCo)] in the Lord, almost, 'in 
 a truly Christian mode of reception,' 
 Christ was to be, as it were, the ele- 
 ment in which the action was to be 
 performed; comp. notes on ver. 19 
 and 24, and the caution given in 
 notes on Eph. iv. i. mirtfs 
 
 Xapas] all joy, 'every form of it,' 
 not 'summa Isetitia,' De W. (071 
 James i. 2) ; see notes on ch. i. 9, 20, 
 on Eph. i. 8, and comp. i Pet. ii. i, 
 where this extensive force of ttSs 
 seems made clearly apparent by the 
 
 E. 
 
66 
 
 npos $iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 irapa^oXevtrafjievoi Ttj '^vx^' '*'*'' oivairXtjpcocTti to vfiwv 
 vcTTeptifia Ttjs TTjodf fie Xenovpyias. 
 
 vapa^okevcrcifi.ems] The reading is perhaps slightly doubtful. Bee. reads 
 Tapa^ovXevffaiiei'os with CELP ; most mss. ; Chrys., Theod., al. ; the mean- 
 ing of which would be 'quum male ponsuluisset ; ' oomp. Copt., 'para- 
 houleusthe,' Syr., 'et sprevit,' Goth., ' nfarmunnonds ' [obliviecens], — all of 
 which seem in favour of irapapovK. The form irapa^oX. is adopted by Lachm. 
 Tisch.,Treg.,Rev., Westc. and Sort, on very clearly preponderating authority, 
 the appy. unique use of the word being also manifestly in favour of the text. 
 
 ]U\pi OovoTou] up to death; extent 
 of the danger ; compare Job xxxiii. 2 2 , 
 7Jyy(.ire...els ddvarov tj ^vxh auToO, 
 Isaiah xxxviii. i, ifi.a\aKl<r67]...la5 
 Bavdrov; and still more expressly, 4 
 Mace. 7, pi'^xpt davdrov rets ^atrdvovs 
 iiroiMeivcaiTas, and Polysen. Strategem. 
 p. 666 (Wetst.),/i^xP' Savdrov fiaxoS"- 
 rai. On the force of /i^xpi and axp'i 
 see notes on 2 Tim. ii. 9. 
 irapaPoX. t^ ^'^xfi] having riskedy 
 hazarded, his life {soul); 'tradens,' 
 Vulg. ; 'parabolatus de,' Clarom. ; 
 'tradidit,' ^th. The form and mean- 
 ing of this word have been well inves- 
 tigated by Meyer. It would appear to 
 have been formed from the adj. Trapd- 
 |8oXos, 'venturesome' {<pi\oKivdwos /col 
 irapa^., Diod. Sic. xix. 3), like irepire- 
 peiecrSai ( i Cor. xiii. 4) from iripirepos, 
 and to belong to a class of words in 
 -ciJu rightly branded by Lobeok as 
 'longe maxima pars inveoticia,' and 
 designed to express the meaning of 
 the adj. and auxiliary; see Lobeck, 
 Phryn. p. 67, 591, and Winer, Gr. § 
 16. I. The meaning will then be 
 TapdpoXos etvai, and thus really but 
 little different from that of irapa- 
 ^oi/X., — at any rate as the latter is 
 explainedby Theoph., iirijipLij/ev iavrhv 
 Tip Bavdrcj). Meyer compares irapa- 
 /SctXXojLcat Ty ifiavTov /ce0aX7/, Lobeck, 
 Phryn. p. 238. The figurative refer- 
 ence to the stake {irapapSKLov or irapd- 
 /SoXoi') which the appellant deposited, 
 and if he lost forfeited (Wordsw.), 
 
 is scarcely so probable as the simpler 
 explanation adopted above. The 
 
 dative ^vxy is the dative 'of refer- 
 ence,' and with the true limiting 
 character of the case expresses the 
 sphere to which the action is confined ; 
 see notes ore Gal. i. 22, and Winer, 
 Gr. § 31. 6. On the relation of the 
 ^vxh to animal life, and its inti- 
 mate connexion with the blood, see 
 esp. Delitzsch, Bihl. Psychol, rv. 11, 
 p. 195 sq.. Beck, Bibl. Seelenl. i. 2, p. 
 4. dvair\r|p(acrT|] he might 
 
 Jill wp, supply; comp. Col. i. 24 (wt- 
 avavK.), and i Cor. xvi. 17. The 
 primary and proper meaning of this 
 compound verb is 'ea^lere', 'totum 
 implere' (i Thess. ii. 16), and thence 
 by an easy gradation of meaning 
 ' supplere,' the dvd denoting the addi- 
 tion, or rather making up, of what is 
 lacking; comp. Plato, Gonviv. p. 
 188 E, et n i^4\nroi> abv ipyov...diia- 
 irKripSaai. It is thus never merely 
 synonymous with wKripow, but has 
 regularly a, reference more or less 
 distinct to a partial rather than an 
 entire vacuum. Such exx. as Thuoyd. 
 II. 28, 6 ^'Xios i^i\nre...Kal iraKui 
 dveirXripwdri, belong to another use 
 of the prep. : see esp. Winer, de 
 Verb. Gomp. in. p. n sq., and notes 
 on Gal. vi. 2. tA v)i.uv 4<rr. 
 
 K.T.X.] your lack, i.e. that which 
 you lacked, in your service unto me; 
 i/iSv being the gen. of the subject (0 
 ijueis iffrepriiraTe, Theoph.), and so a 
 
TIL I. 
 
 67 
 
 To XoiTToV, aSe\(j}oi fiov, ■x^aipere III. 
 
 Eejolce, brethren; be- 
 ware of Judaizers who ,^7-1 ^ ^ 
 h™Teev^ry'caus*eto''trust ^^ Kl/jOtft). TO aVTU ypa(p€tV VfXlV, eflol 
 therein, but value naught save Christ. 
 Yet 1 co\mt not to have obtained. 
 
 kind of gen. possessivus, and t'^s 
 \eiTovpy. the gen. of the object in ref. 
 to which the iaTipniiia was evinced, 
 and so a gen. of what has been 
 termed ' the point of view : ' see 
 Seheuerl. Synt. § 17. 2, where these 
 double genitives are briefly but clearly 
 discussed; comp. also Winer, Gr. § 
 30. 3. note 3. There is therefore in 
 the words no call to modesty or 
 humility (Chrys.) on the ground that 
 irdfTes 6(pet\ere /livos TreirolriKev 
 (Theod.), — as this would imply a 
 virtual connexion of iij,Qv with Xei- 
 Tovpyias, but only a gentle and af- 
 fectionate notice of the complete 
 nature of the services of the emissary. 
 All that the Philippians lacked was 
 the joy and privilege of a personal 
 ministration ; this Bpaphr. , by execut- 
 ing the commission with which he was 
 charged (ti]s tt^os fie X«t. comp. ver. 
 25), supplied, — and to the full. 
 It would thus seem probable that the 
 illness of Epaphr. was connected, not 
 with his journey, but with his anxious 
 attendance on the Apostle at Rome. 
 See Meyer in loc, who has well ex- 
 plained the true meaning of this deli- 
 cate and graceful commendation. 
 
 Wabnino aoainst Judaism, baethli- 
 
 NESS, AND SENSUALITY (ch. ill. I — 
 
 iv. i). 
 
 Chap. hi. i — 16. Warning against 
 Judaism, and all trust in the flesh. 
 His own case and action. 
 I. T6 Xoiirov]JF'inaI2^/ preparation 
 for, and transition to, the concluding 
 portion of the Epistle, again repeated 
 yet more specifically ch. iv. 8 : comp. 
 2 Cor. xiii. 11, i Thess. iv. i, 2 Thess. 
 iii. I, and for the grammatical difler- 
 ence between this and the gen. toO \ot- 
 
 TToO, see notes on Gal. vi. 1 7. There is 
 perhaps a slight difficulty in the fact 
 that subjects previously alluded to are 
 agaia touched on, and that the per- 
 sonal relation of the Apostle to the 
 Judaists is so fully stated in a con- 
 cluding portion of the Epistle. With- 
 out having recourse to any arbitrary 
 hypotheses (oomp. Van Heng.), it 
 seems enough to say, first, that the 
 exhortations aU assume a more gene- 
 ric form, — x'^'l-P^re, as Wiesing. re- 
 marks, is the key-note; and secondly, 
 as Alf. suggests, that the mention of 
 Kararofiii leads to one of those digres- 
 sions, expressively but too famiUarly 
 termed by Paley 'going off at a word,' 
 which so noticeably characterize the 
 writings of the inspired Apostle: see 
 Hor. Paul, ch. vi. § 3. 
 XaCpcTC kv K-upto)] rejoice in the 
 Lord ; their joy is to be no joy Kara 
 rbv Kbcr/iov, hoUow, earthly, and un- 
 real, but a irvevimTLKri BviMqSla (Theod.) , 
 a joy in Him in whom al d\l\peis omtm 
 ^ovo-t x^pi^") Chrys. : comp. ch. i. 
 18, 25, and notes. Tdo{pTo] 
 
 It is very doubtful to what these 
 words refer. Out of the many opi- 
 nions that have been advanced, three 
 deserve consideration ; (a) that they 
 refer to exhortations in a lost Epistle 
 (Flatt, Mey.) ; (b) that they refer to 
 oral communications, whether made 
 to the Phil, personally (Oalv.), or re- 
 cently communicated to Timothy and 
 Epaphroditus (Wieseler); (c) that 
 they refer to the words just preced- 
 ing, viz. xalpere iv Kvplcfi (Wiesing., 
 Alf.). Of these (a), whatever may be 
 said of the general question (see notes 
 on Col. iv. 16), must here be pro- 
 nounced in a high degree doubtful 
 and precarious, and is expressly re- 
 
 F 2 
 
68 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 2 fiev ovK oKvtipov, vfitv Se a<rcf)a.\eg. ISXeirere Toi/y Kvvat, 
 
 jeoted by Theodoret: the remark in 
 Polyc. Phil. § 3, OS Kal &Tnav i/uv ^ypa- 
 fev ina-ToKis, seems fairly neutral- 
 ized by 'in prinoipio epistolse ejus,' 
 § II, see Wies. Chron. p. 460, and 
 comp. Wordsw. in loc. The second 
 (6) is well defended by Wieseler, I. c, 
 but implies an emphasis on ypd<peiv, 
 ■which neither the language nor the 
 order of the words in any way sub- 
 stantiates. The last (c) appears on 
 the whole least open to objection, as 
 Xalpeiv does seem to be the pervading 
 thought of the Epistle, ch. i. 4, 1 8, ii. 
 17, iv. 1,4, 10, and to have been the 
 more dwelt upon as the actual cir- 
 cumstances of the case might have 
 very naturally suggested the contrary 
 feeling : compare Chrys. Horn. x. 
 init., who however refers ri aiiTa to 
 what follows, though admitting the 
 appropriate nature of the precept. 
 The grammatical objection to the 
 plural rb, aiird, (Van Heng.) is of no 
 weight; the plural idiomatically re- 
 fers to and generalizes the foregoing 
 precept, hinting at the particulars 
 which it almost necessarily involves ; 
 see Jelf, Gr. § 383, Kiihner on Xen. 
 Mem. III. 6. 6, and the exx. collected 
 by Stallbaum on Plato, Apol. p. 19 n, 
 and Gorg. p. 447 a. It has been 
 thought (Bp Lightfoot in he.) that 
 the words refer to dissensions existing 
 among the PhOippians. That they 
 existed, even in this Church, may be 
 admitted (comp. ch. ii. 2 sqq., iv. 2), 
 but that it was to such extent as to 
 explain the present words may be, 
 very reasonably, doubted. okvij- 
 
 pov] grievous, irksome; comp. Soph. 
 (Ed. Rex, 834, riiitv . . .Tavr' iicvqpi,. 
 The primary idea of 6kvos and iKvtjpbi 
 seems to be that of 'delay' or 'loi- 
 tering,' whether from fear or sloth 
 (Matth. XXV. 26, Eom. xii. 11), and 
 
 thence that which is productive of 
 such feelings in others. The deri- 
 vation is uncertain ; perhaps from 
 Sanscr. vak, with the notion of ' bend- 
 ing,' ' stooping,' or ' cowering' (?), see 
 Benfey, Wurisellex. Vol. 11. p. 22. 
 ao-4>aXes] sure, safe; i.e. in effect, 
 as Syr. paraphrases, ' propterea quod 
 vos commonefaciunt.' The word is 
 pressed both by Wieseler (l.c.) and 
 De W., though on different sides, 
 and is confessedly somewhat singu- 
 larly used. It seems however suit- 
 able on the grounds alleged above, 
 viz. that the Phil, might have thought 
 they had every reason — not x'''p">' 
 but &8viJt.ecv. The quasi-causative 
 sense is parallel to that in dKvrjpiv; 
 comp. Joseph. Antiq. in. 2. i. 
 
 2. pX^ir€T6] Look to, observe; 
 'videte,' Vulg., Goth., Copt., not 
 'beware of,' Auth., with Syr., this 
 being a derived meaning (Winer, Gr. 
 § 32. I, p. 200) : JSth. (Piatt) unites 
 both. This exhortation not unna- 
 turally follows. The remembrance 
 of the many things that wrought 
 against rb x'''h- ^'' ^"P- "^^^ before the 
 Apostle ; one of the chief among 
 which, — perhaps immediately sug- 
 gested by the word dir0aX^s, — he 
 now enumerates. It was here that a 
 <r<pa,\ixa was in some degree to be 
 feared. tovs Kiivas] the 
 
 dogs, not so much, in the classical 
 use of the term, in ref. to the impu- 
 dence (Poll. Onom. V. 65) or the snarl- 
 ing and reviling spirit (Athen. xiii. 
 § 93) of those so designated, — as in 
 the Jewish use, in ref. to the impure 
 (Bev. xxii. 1 5) and essentially ethnic 
 (Matth. XV. 27, comp. Schoettg. Hor. 
 Hebr. Vol. i. p. 1145) and autichris- 
 tian character of these spiritual ene- 
 mies of the Philippians ; wo-Trep ol id- 
 ciKoi Kal Top Geov Kal toO XpicTov a\- 
 
III. 
 
 69 
 
 /SXeVeTe rovi kukous epydrai, /SXeVere riiv KaTaTOfi^v. 
 tJHeii yap etr/Mev fj irepiTOfJi,^, ol HvevfiaTi Qeov Xarpev- 3 
 
 3. Oeov] So Laehm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on greatly 
 preponderating authority : Bee, Qef. 
 
 XcSrpioi rjffav, ChryB. Tois 
 
 KaKovs ep7.] the evil workers; comp. 
 2 Cor. xi. 13, \j/evSa.Trbi!T(iKoi, ipy&Tai 
 8(S\ioi; they were ipyirai certainly, 
 but the ipyi^ecrSai was iirl KaKi}, 
 Chrys. The use of the article seems 
 to show that there were some whom 
 the Apostle especially had in his 
 thoughts. niv KaTOT0|xiiv] 
 
 tlie concision, Auth. ; i.e. ' the con- 
 oised' ('curti Judsei,' Hor. Sat. i. 9. 
 70), 'truncatos in circumcisione,' 
 Mth. (Piatt) appy. [but doubtful, as 
 the word in the original has also ref . 
 to excommunication; comp. Theod.] : 
 a studiedly contemptuous paronoma- 
 sia, see exx. in Winer, Gr. § 68. i. 
 The Apostle will not say Trepiro/ii}, as 
 this, though now abrogated in Christ 
 (i Cor. vii. 19, Gal. vi. 15), had still 
 its spiritual aspects (ver. 3, Eom. ii. 
 29, Col. ii. 11), — but Kararoiii], a mere 
 hand-wrought, outward, mutilation 
 (comp. Eph. ii. 11), which these false 
 teachers gloried in, and sought to 
 enforce on others ; oiUv dWo iroioCo-u' 
 ^ riiv (rdpxa KaTaTiia/ovaiv, Chrys. 
 The reference to excommunication 
 (Theod., Hamm.) seems wholly out 
 of place : indeed it is singular that 
 such a very intelligible allusion 
 should have received so many, and 
 some such monstrous interpreta- 
 tions, e.g. Baur, Paulus, p. 435. 
 
 3. ij|j.{is ydp K.T.X.] For we are 
 the circumcision; reason for the de- 
 signation immediately preceding : ' I 
 say KaraTOii-l), for you and I, whether 
 circumcised in the body or no, are 
 the circumcision, ri irepi.ro/j.'fi, in its 
 highest, truest, and spiritual sense, — 
 the circumcised in heart;' contrast 
 
 the y? "Ql^ Ezek. xliv. 7, and see 
 Deut. X. 16, Eom. ii. 29, and the good 
 note of Fritz, in lac. On the spiritual 
 aspects of npi.Toii.ii, see particularly 
 Ebrard, Abendm. § 2, Vol. 1. p. 23 sq., 
 Kurtz, Gesch. des Alt. Bund. § 58. 3, 
 p. 184 sq., where the subject is well 
 discussed. ot IIv£v|i.aTi. 
 
 K.T.V] who by the Spirit of God 
 are serving ; apposition by means of 
 the substantival participle (comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 45. 7), and indirect ep- 
 exegesis of the preceding collective 
 designation. The sentence might 
 have been expressed by means of 
 81T01. or oiTipes with the indie, but the 
 former would have too much limited 
 the class, while the latter would have 
 seemed too purely explanatory of the 
 allusion, and so would have weaken- 
 ed the force of the antithesis. The 
 dative nveip,. is not the dat. norma 
 (Van Heng., comp. notes on Gal. v. 
 16), but, as the context seems to re- 
 quire, the dat. instrumenti, or what 
 Krtiger perhaps more correctly terms 
 the 'dynamic' dat. {Sprachl. § 48. 
 15), comp. Eom. viii. 14, Gal. v. 5, 
 18, al.; the Holy Spirit was the in- 
 fluence under which the Xarpela was 
 performed ; comp. John iv. 23. The 
 absence of the article cannot be press- 
 ed : it seems perfectly reasonable to 
 consider nvevfia SeoO as a proper 
 name, and as having a similar free- 
 dom in respect to the article ; see 
 Fritz. Bom. viii. 4, Vol. 11. p. 105, 
 comp. notes on Gal. v. 5. 
 XarpeiiovTes] Absolutely, as Luke ii. 
 37, Acts xxvi. 7, Heb. ix. 9, i. i. 
 For a sermon on this and the follow- 
 ing verses, more however resembling 
 
70 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioYs. 
 
 oi^Tej KOI Kav)(di[xevoi ev XptcTTcS Itjaov koi ovk iv crapKi 
 
 4 Teiroidorei, Kalirep eyw e^wv •jrevolO^o'iv xal ev a-apKi. 
 
 e'lris SoKei aXXos ire-jrotQevai ev trapKi, eyo) maXXov 
 
 a commentary, see Augustine, Serm. 
 OLxix. Vol. V. p. 915 BC[. (ed. Migne). 
 Kal OVK K.T.X.] and not trusting in 
 the flesh; opposition to the preceding, 
 though still under the vinculum of a 
 common article: 'we boast in Christ 
 Jesus, — and in the flesh, the bodily 
 and external, far from boasting as 
 they did (Gal. vi. 13), we go not so 
 far even as to put trust.' On the 
 definite negation implied by oi with 
 the part., see Winer, Gr. § 55. 5, 
 Green, Gr. p. 120. S&p^ does not 
 specially and exclusively refer to cir- 
 cumcision, but, as the widening na- 
 ture of the context seems to suggest, 
 to the outward, the earthly, and the 
 phenomenal ; see Hofmann, Schriftb. 
 Tol. I. p. 541, Mtlller, Doctr. of Sin, 
 II. z. Vol. I. p. 353 (Transl.). 
 
 4. KaCirep iy<o k.t.\.] although 
 myself having, &o.; concessive sen- 
 tence introduced by Kalirep, qualify- 
 ing the assertion which immediately 
 precedes; see Donalds. Gi: § 621. 
 The construction involves but little 
 difficulty. In the preceding ij/ieis and 
 oi irevoid. the Apostle is himself in- 
 cluded: lest this disavowal of ireiroW. 
 iv ffapd might on his part be attri- 
 buted to the absence or forfeiture of 
 claims, rather than to the renuncia- 
 tion of them, he passes at once by 
 means of iyd to his own case, and 
 proceeds as if the foregoing clause 
 had been in the singular ; ' I put no 
 trust in the flesh, though, as far as 
 externals are concerned, I for my 
 part have an inalienable and de jure 
 right {^x'^") *o do so.' Thus then 
 Kalirep has its proper construction 
 with the part., and the concessive 
 sentence a simple and perspicuous 
 relation to the foregoing clause. 
 
 Kalirep, only used in this place by 
 St Paul (Heb. v. 8, vii. 5, xii. 17, 2 
 Pet. i. 12), has its regular meaning, 
 'even very much' (see Klotz, Devar, 
 Vol. n. p. 723), the irkp {irepl) giving 
 to the simple Kal the idea of ' ambi- 
 tum rei majorem ' (Klotz), or perhaps, 
 more probably, the intensive mean- 
 ing of 'through-ness' or 'comple- 
 tion;' see Donalds. Cratyl. § 178. 
 The meaning ' though,' it need scarce- 
 ly be said, arises from its combina- 
 tion with the participle. ireiroCO. 
 Kol Iv o-apKC] confidence even in the 
 flesh, 'in it as well as iv Xp.,' the 
 force of Kal being appy. descensive; 
 see notes on Gal. iii. 4. . There is no 
 reason for modifying the meaning of 
 this word ('gloriandi argumeutum,' 
 Calv.), or that of the simple pres. 
 part, ^x'^" ('i^em prseteritam faeit 
 prassentem,' Van Heng.): ireiroW. is 
 simply Kaixv^s, irafipria-la, Chrys., 
 and is actually now possessed by the 
 Apostle; he stiU has it, though he 
 will not use it ; 'habens, non utens,' 
 Beng. SoKci is certainly 
 not pleonastic (see exx. in Winer, Gr. 
 § 65. 7), but may be either (a) in the 
 opinion of others, — 'videtur esse, 
 quam vere est dioere mavult,' Fritz. 
 Matth. iii. 9, p. 129, oomp. i Cor. xi. 
 16, where such a meiosis seems 
 plausible ; or (6) in his own opinion, 
 — 'opiuionem qua quis sibi placeat,' 
 Van Heng., as i Cor. iii. 18, viii. 3, 
 al., and appy. in the great majority 
 of cases in the N. T . The latter seems 
 best to suit the presumptuous sub- 
 jective TeiroldTins of these Judaists, 
 and does not seem at variance (Mey.) 
 with iyu fioKKoii, soil. Sokw ireirotd. iii 
 ffapKl, which follows : so Syr., and 
 apparently Copt., ^th. (Piatt). 
 
III. 4, 5, 6. 
 
 71 
 
 irepiTOfn^ OKTa^fiepoi;, sk yivovi 'lo-joaiJX, (pvX^s Beviafj,eiv, 5 
 'Ej8jt)a?oj e^ 'EjSjOa/ft)!', Kara vo/xov ^apicraloi, Kara 6 
 
 5. irEpiTO|i.'(j oKTai]|iepos] ei^Tit 
 days old when circumcised, lit. in re- 
 spect of circumcision, dat. ' of refer- 
 ence,' Winer, Gr. § 31. 6, notes on 
 Gal. i. 22. Eitualistio distinction, 
 followed by his prerogatives of tirth, 
 and (ver. 6) his personal and religious 
 characteristics. Circumcision on the 
 eighth day (Lev. xii. 3) distinguished 
 the native Jew, both from proselyte 
 and Ishmaelite, the latter of whom 
 was circumcised after the thirteenth 
 year, Joseph. Antiq. 1. 12. 2. The 
 nom. TreptTo/n}, which is found in 
 Steph. 1550, Elz. 1624, 1633, with 
 some few mss. and appy. with Chrys., 
 Theod., is not correct: the abstract 
 TTcpiTo/iT) is suitably used for the con- 
 crete in its collective sense (ver. 3), 
 but appy. never, as assumed here, for 
 a single person, Winer, Gr. § 31. 3 : 
 so Van Heng., Meyer. 
 Ik yivov? 'Io"p.] of the race of Israel ; 
 gen. of apposition or identity, Scheu- 
 erl. § 12. 1, p. 82, 83: first of the 
 three climactic distinctions in regard 
 to race, tribe, and lineage: 'in oen- 
 sum nunc venit splendor nataUum,' 
 Van Heng. 'Bk 7^^. 'lo-p. is exactly 
 equivalent to 'lo-poijX/rijs in the very 
 similar passages. Bom. xi. 1, vs Cor. 
 xi. 22, and, as the designation 'la-- 
 paiiX suggests (see Harl. on Eph. ii. 
 12, Mey. on 2 Cor. I. c), stands in 
 distinction to Idumean, Ishmaelite, 
 or ethnic origin in a theocratic point 
 of view ; comp. also Trench, Synon. 
 § 39. The irepiT. showed 
 
 that the Apostle was no proselyte ; 
 the ix yh. 'lap. that he was oiSk 
 wpoarfKiTdiv yovioiv, Chrys. in loe. 
 Meyer and Alf. , following Theodoret, 
 refer 'lap. to the Trplryovov Jacob, but 
 this seems to mar the symmetry of 
 
 the climax and the parallelism with 
 Eom. xi. I and 2 Cor. xi. 22. 
 (|>v\t|S BevittjieCv] of the tribe of Ben- 
 jamin; of one of the two most illus- 
 trious of the tribes, a true i/iJs rijs 
 &Toi.Kla% (Ezra iv. i). Some of the 
 descendants of the other tribes were 
 still existing, and though amalga- 
 mated under the common name 
 'louSaioi, could still prove their de- 
 scent; comp. Jost, Gesch. des Isr. 
 Volkes, Vol. I. p. 407 sq., and Winer, 
 BWB. Art. 'Stamme,' Vol. 11. p. 515. 
 The assertion of Chrys., aare roO 
 doKi/iaripov p^povs, to, yap Upiwv iv 
 T<^ K\rip(} TaiirTjs ^v Trjs (pvXrjs, is appy. 
 not historically demonstrable. 
 "EPpatosel'EPp.] a Hebrew of He- 
 brews, a Hebrew of Hebrew parent- 
 age and ancestry, a Hebrew of pure 
 blood ; eis airiiv riiv pli^av i.viSpap,ev, 
 Theod. : comp. Dion. -Hal. ni. p. 163, 
 iXeiSepoi i^ i\ev0ipav, Polyb. Hist. 
 II. 59. 1, iK Tvpdvvoiv iretpuxlyra, and 
 other exx. in Kypke, 06s. Vol. 11. p. 
 115. It does not seem proper to 
 limit it merely to Hebrew parents on 
 both sides (Mey., Alf.). Owing to 
 the loss of private records in earlier 
 times (comp. Ezra ii. 59, 62), and 
 the confusions and troubles in later 
 times, there might have been (even 
 in spite of the care with which 
 private genealogies were kept, Othon. 
 Lex. Rabb. p. 76, 262) many a Ben- 
 jamite, esp. among those whose 
 families had left Palestine, who could 
 not prove a pure Hebrew descent. 
 Thus the Jew of Tarsus, the Eoman 
 citizen, familiarly speaking and writ- 
 ing Greek, might naturally be desirous 
 to vindicate his pure descent, and to 
 claim the honourable title of 'BiSpaios 
 (dvuBev Tuv eiSoKt/uav 'lovdalav. 
 
EPOS *IAinnH2I0YS. 
 
 ^5Xos SiwKWv Triv eKK\t]<rlav, Kara SiKaioarvvt]v t^v ev 
 7 vofio) yevofAevoii afiejinrTOi. 'AWct ariva ^v fJLOi 
 
 6. f^Xos] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on greatly 
 preponderating authority : Eec, {^\ov. On the presence in the N. T. of this 
 and other neuter forms, see Winer, Gr. § 9. 2. rem. 2. 
 
 7. 'AWdJ So Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort; Bee, &XK. The particle is 
 omitted by Tisch., and placed in brackets by Lachm., but appears to hold its 
 place on slightly preponderating authority. 
 
 Chrys.) for himself and his fore- 
 fathers; comp. Winer, RWB. Vol. i. 
 p. 472, 475. That 'EjS/jaios may also 
 have reference to language (Chrys.) 
 is far too summarily denied by Meyer 
 and Alford ; see Trench, Synon. § 39, 
 and comp. Bp Lightfoot in loc. That 
 it has reference to locality (Palestin- 
 ian not Hellenist) is every way doubt- 
 ful: the assertion of Jerome, by 
 ■which it is supported, that St Paul 
 was born at Gisehala in Palestine, 
 appears only to be, as that writer 
 himself terms it, a ' fabula ; ' see 
 Neander, Planting, Vol. 1. p. 79 
 (Bohn). Kara v6\u>v 4*09.] 
 
 in respect of the law (of Moses) a 
 Pharisee : i.e. in regard of keeping 
 or maintaining it, the prep. Kard 
 being used throughout in its more 
 general signification of 'quod atti- 
 net ad ; ' comp. Winer, Gr. § 49. d. 
 N6ynos is here the 'Mosaic law:' 
 though it may occasionally have what 
 Beuss calls 'signification Sconomique, 
 tout oe qui tient k I'ancienne dispen- 
 sation' (Theol. ChrSt. iv. 7, Vol. 11. 
 p. 66), this would be here out of 
 harmony with the following SiKaioff. 
 T) h vSfjufi. The present and two 
 following clauses state the theological 
 characteristics of the Apostle, ar- 
 ranged perhaps cUmacticaUy, a Phari- 
 see, a zealous Pharisee, and a blame- 
 less Pharisee; comp. Acts xxii. 3, 
 xxvi. 5, Gal. i. 14. 
 
 6. Kard JtjXos k.t.X.] in respect 
 of zeal — persecuting the Church; 
 
 comp. Gal. i. 13 ; said here perhaps 
 not without a tinge of sad irony : 
 even in this respect, this mournful 
 exhibition of Judaist zeal, he can, if 
 they will, set himself on a level with 
 them. If they be Judaists, he was 
 more so. The present part, is not 
 for the aor. (Grot.), nor used as the 
 historical present (Van Heng.), nor 
 as a substantive (the ezz. referred to 
 by Mey. and Alf. being all associated 
 with the article), but is used adjec- 
 tivally, standing in parallelism to 
 the following epithet dfie/nrTos, and 
 predieatively in relation to a sup- 
 pressed verb subst. that pervades the 
 clauses; comp. Winer, Gr. § 45. 5. 
 The sense is the same, but gram- 
 matical propriety seems to require 
 the distinction. 
 
 SiKaiocr. Ti^v «v v6]Uf\ righteousness 
 that is in the law; righteousness 
 specially so characterized, comp. 
 notes on i Tim. iii. 13, 2 Tim. i. 13. 
 In ver. 9 the same idea is somewhat 
 differently expressed : Sik. ^ ek v6fi,ov 
 is righteousness that emanates from 
 the law, that results from its com- 
 mands when truly followed; Sik. tj 
 iv vifiiff righteousness that resides in 
 it, and exists in coincidence with its 
 commands. In the one case the law 
 is the imaginary origin, in the other 
 the imaginary sphere, of the Siraio- 
 crivri. All limitations of vo/ios, e.g. 
 ' specialia instituta,' Grot., 'traditio- 
 nem patrum,' Vatabl., are completely 
 untenable. On this verse, and on 
 
III. 7, 8. 
 
 73 
 
 ravTa ^yijfiai Sia tov XpivTov IClfJiiav' aWa fiev ovv koI 8 
 
 8. fiiv oSv] So Lachm., Treg., on slightly preponderating authority: 
 Bee, Tisch., Rev., Westc. and Hort, add7e. 
 
 Justification generally, see August. 
 Serm. olxx. Vol. v. p. 926 sq. (ed. 
 Migne). a|i.E)i.irro$] blame- 
 
 less ; ' proprie est is in quo nihil 
 desiderari potest, aiiia/Mos in quo nihil 
 est quod reprehendas,' Tittm. Synon. 
 p. 29. The Afientpla here spoken of, 
 in accordance with the clearly exter- 
 nal relations previously enumerated, 
 must be referred to the outward and 
 common judgment of men ; ' vitse 
 mese rationes ita plane composui ut 
 nihil in me quisquam reprehendere 
 aut damnare posset,' Justiniani in 
 loc. 
 
 7. arivo] the which things; soil. 
 the qualities, characteristics, and 
 prerogatives, alluded to in the pre- 
 ceding clauses, Sans being used in 
 reference to indefinitely expressed 
 antecedents ; see note on Gal. iv. 24. 
 The general distinction between 6s 
 and Sans has rarely been stated 
 better than by Kriiger ; ' 6s is purely 
 objective, Sans generic and qualita- 
 tive,' Sprachl. §51.8. 
 ijv (ioi KepSr]] were gains to me; not 
 'in my judgment,' 'non vera sed 
 opinata lucra,' Van Heng., /ioi being 
 thus an ethical dative (Kriiger, 
 Sprachl. § 48. 6. 5),— but 'to me,' a 
 simple dat. commodi; they were really 
 gains to St Paul in the state previous 
 to his conversion; comp. Schoettg. 
 in loc. The plural k^pStj is appro- 
 priately used in reference to the 
 different forms and characters of 
 KipSos involved in the foregoing pre- 
 rogatives; K^pSos, in fact, considered 
 in the plurality of its parts, Jelf, Gr. 
 § 355. 1, Kriiger, Sprachl. § 44. 3. 5. 
 Meyer compares Herod, iii. 71, irepi- 
 paWoiJ.ei'os iavrif xipSea ; add Plato, 
 Legg. ix. p. 862 c, ^'Ki^as Kal KipSij, 
 
 Bid riv Xp.] for Christ's sake, more 
 fully explained in ver. 8, 9, and put, 
 for the sake probably of emphasis, 
 between the verb and its aoous. 
 Chrys. here not inappropriately re- 
 marks, eJ Sia rbv XpiffTOC, oi 4>iaei 
 i-nida. TiYii|ioi...Si]n£av] 
 
 I have counted (and they are now to 
 me) as loss ; contrast ■qyov/iai, ver. 8, 
 and on the force of the perfect, which 
 here marks ' actionem qua per efiec- 
 tus suos durat,' see notes on Eph. ii. 
 8. Meyer, followed by Alf., com- 
 ments on the use of the sing, ^rj/ilav 
 as marking ' one loss in all things ' 
 of which the Apostle is here speaking. 
 This is possible, but it may be doubt- 
 ed whether the singular is not regu- 
 larly used in this formula (comp. 
 exx. in Kypke, Vol. 11. p. 315, Eisner, 
 Vol. n. p. 252, and esp. Wetst. in 
 loc), and whether the use of the 
 plural would not suggest the inap- 
 propriate idea of ' punishments,' a 
 prevalent meaning of l^/ilat : see 
 Eostu. Palm,I,ex. s.v. The form {"Tj/i. 
 is supposed to. be connected with 
 ' damnum,' and perhaps to be re- 
 ferred to the Sanscr. dam, ' domitum 
 esse,' Pott, Etym. Forsch, Vol. i. p. 
 261. 
 
 8. dXXd n^v oiv K.T.X.] nay more; 
 'at sane quidem,' Winer, Gr. § 53. 
 7. In this formula, scarcely accu- 
 rately rendered by ' imo vero,' Wies- 
 ing. (after Winer, ed. 5), or, 'but 
 moreover,' Alf., each particle has 
 its proper force; dWh contrasts the 
 pres. r)yoOiJ,ai, with the perf. ^'7»;/iai, 
 /ijp confirms, while oSp, with its 
 usual retrospective force, collects and 
 slightly concludes from what has 
 been previously said ; see Klotz, Devar. 
 Vol. II. p. 663, and for the use of 
 
74 
 
 npo2 #iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 lyovftai Travra ^^filav etvai Sia to virepe-)(ov t?? yvwareaii 
 Xpi(rrov 'It}(rov tov Kvpiov fiov, Si' ov to. vavra e{ri- 
 fiKiodtjp Kai ^yovfjiai <rKv^a\a, tea Xpia-Tov KepS^trm, 
 
 a-Ki^aXa] So Lachm., Tisch, , Treg., Eev., Westc. and Hort, on very clearly 
 preponderating authority : Bee. adds e&oi. 
 
 Iiiv oBy in giving some emphatic 
 addition or correction, comp.Donalds. 
 <?'■• § 567. The coutinuative force of 
 fiiv oiv, 'cum quMam oonclusionis 
 significatione,' is noticed by Herm. 
 Viger, No. ^^2. KaV r\iiov- 
 
 (jioi] / am also counting; not only 
 rjyqii.ai but 977oO/i4ai, the koX, with its 
 usual aseensive and indirectly con- 
 trasting force, bringing into promi- 
 nence the latter verb : it is not with 
 St Paul merely a past but also a 
 present action. irovTa] all, 
 
 — ^in reference to the preceding anm 
 Tin K.T.X., 'iUa omnia,' Syr., Copt.; 
 Trivra, as its position shows, having 
 no emphasis, but being used only to 
 include ' qucBcunque antea Apostolo 
 in lucris posita sunt,' Van Heng. 
 The fuller and regular construction 
 tjlfulav eXvai. (comp. WeUer, Bemerlt. 
 zum Gr. Synt. p. 8,— an ingenious 
 tract) is here adopted on account of 
 the difference in the order of the 
 words. Sidro imp. k.t.\.] 
 
 for the excellency of the knowledge of 
 Christ Jesus my Lord, — ' qui nuhi 
 super omnia est,' Grot., 'dominus 
 mihi carissimus,' Van Heng.; comp. 
 Est. in lac. The article with the 
 neuter adjectival participle seems de- 
 signedly used to bring into promi- 
 nence the specific characteristic or 
 attribute of the yi>S(n.s ; it was not 
 merely did, t^v iirepixovtrav yvSxnv, 
 but Sict t4 ivep. TT)S yv., see Bern- 
 hardy, Synt. III. 42. d, p. 156, and 
 comp. Jelf, Gr. § 436. 7, who notices 
 this use of the neuter part, as being 
 very characteristic of Thucydides, 1. 
 36, III. 10, al. This nicety of lan- 
 
 guage was not unobserved by Chrys. 
 who adverts to it to show that the 
 real difference between the yvOxris 
 and the irdvTa (involving the vd/ws) 
 with which it was contrasted lay 
 solely in the iirepoxil of the former ; 
 Sict tI> itirepdxov, oil Sia rh iWorpLOV' 
 ri yd,p inrep^xov tov oixoyaiovs ixep- 
 ix^i. The deduction however is un- 
 necessary, if not untenable. The 
 knowledge of Christ admits no homo- 
 geneities, and transcends all com- 
 parisons. Ta TrdvTa ltT||i,.] 
 I suffered the loss of them all; not 
 with any middle force, but purely 
 passive, the retrospective and inclu- 
 sive Tct Tdvra ((coi Tck viXai, xal ri 
 wipovra, Chrys.) being the regular 
 acous. of the (so termed) quantitative 
 object; comp. Matth. xvi. 16, and 
 see Hartung, Casus, p. 46, comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 39. 1. The verb is de- 
 signedly stronger than the preceding 
 ij7oO/4at ^r)fdai>, and its object-accus. 
 more comprehensive; both suitably 
 enhancing the climactic sequence of 
 this noble verse. koI 'f[>/oi- 
 ixai o-KvPaXa] and count them to be 
 dung; clearly not a parenthetical 
 clause (Van Heng.), but, as the na- 
 ture of the verse indicates, joined to, 
 and in sentiment advancing further 
 than what has last been said. The 
 colon, inserted in some edd. (Oxf. 
 1836, 1 851), is very undesirable; even 
 the comma (Mill, Griesb., Lachm., 
 Tisch. ) can be dispensed with. The 
 somewhat curious word <TKu^a\ov ap- 
 pears properly to mean 'dung' (Syr., 
 Clarom., Vulg.), e.g. Alex.-Aphrod. 
 Frobl. I. 18, iimri <ricip. koI oUpov, 
 
HI. 
 
 75 
 
 Kai eipeOw iv avT<p, jULrj e-^wi/ e/mriv SiKUiocrvvijv t^v e/c 9 
 vofiov, aWa riiv Sia x/<7Teo)y H.pi(TTOv, Trjv e/c Qeov 
 
 and thus is probably to be connected 
 with (TK&p (not (TKiip), gen. o-Karos; 
 see Lobeck, Pathol, p. 92, Benfey, 
 Wwrzellex. Vol. 11. p. 172. The old 
 derivation, kv<tI ^aXeix, i. e. Kval^aXov 
 (Suid., Etym. M.) or Is Kivai p., is 
 still defended by Pott, Etym. Forsch. 
 Vol. II. p. 295. On the various deri- 
 vative meanings, 'refuse,' 'quisqui- 
 lias' (Goth., ^th.), c&c, see Suicer, 
 Thesaur. b. v. Vol. 11. p. 978, the 
 numerous exx. collected by Wetst. in 
 loc, and the smaller collections of 
 Kypke, Eisner, and Loesner. 
 Xva Xp. KcpSTJo-to] that I may gain 
 Christ; purpose of the ryy. a-Kip. etvai 
 antithetically expressed with refer- 
 ence to the previous ^rjfuoScrffai.. Mey. 
 and Alf. properly object to the bleak 
 interpr. of Grot., 'Christum, i.e. 
 Christi favorem:' it is curious that 
 it should have been adopted by so 
 good an expositor as Hammond. 
 ' To gain Christ ' is, to use the ex- 
 quisite language of Bp Hall, ' to lay 
 fast hold upon Him, to receive Him 
 inwardly into our bosoms, and so to 
 make Him ours and ourselves His, 
 that we maybe joined to Him as our 
 Head, espoused to Him as our Hus- 
 band, incorporated into Him as our 
 Nourishment, engrafted in Him as 
 our Stock, and laid upon Him as a 
 sure Foundation,' Christ Mystical, 
 ch. VI. — a treatise of the loftiest 
 spiritual strain. 
 
 9. evpcSiS iv avT^'] be found in 
 Him; in Him, as the sphere and 
 element of my spiritual being ; comp. 
 notes on Gal. ii. 17, Ejph. ii. 6. BiS- 
 pe6Q must not be regarded as a mere 
 periphrasis for the verb subst., ' ex- 
 istam sive sim,' Grot, (see contra 
 Winer, Gr. § 65, 8), nor as referring 
 solely to the judgment of God (Beza), 
 
 nor yet as antithetical to being lost 
 (Bp Hall), but simply and plainly to 
 the 'judicium universale' (Zanoh.), 
 ' the being and being actually found 
 to be if aiiTi},' both in the sight of 
 God and his fellow -men; see notes 
 on Gal. ii. 17. pur ^X""] 
 
 Dependent on the preceding Xva, and 
 associated with the preceding eipeSCi 
 as a predication of manner. Lachm. 
 and Lightfoot remove the comma 
 after iv airif, thus leaving it doubt- 
 ful whether /x'Jj ^av may not form 
 portion of an oljective sentence (Do- 
 nalds. Gi: § 584 sq.), ' be found in 
 Him not to have, c&c' — a construc- 
 tion that is grammatically defensible 
 (comp. Kriiger, Sprachl. § 56. 7. 2), 
 but certainly not exegetioaUy satis- 
 factory: the force of ip airifi would 
 thus be wholly obscured; comp. 
 Meyer in loc. Ijiiiv Sik. k.t.X.] 
 
 my righteousness that is of the law ; 
 i.e. such righteousness as I strove to 
 work out by attempting to obey the 
 behests of the law, rrjp ISlav SiKauxxi- 
 vqv, Eom. X. 3. The meaning of 
 8iKoioc7. is here slightly different in 
 its two connexions. With ip/tiv it 
 implies an assumed attribute of the 
 Apostle, with iK vdfiov it implies a 
 righteousness reckoned as such owing 
 to a fulfilment of the claims of the 
 law. On the force of 4k in these 
 combinations (' immediate origin,' 
 c&c), see notes ore Gal. ii. 16. 
 ■njv 810. irCo-T. Xp.] tliat which is 
 through faith in Christ; of which 
 faith in Christ is the 'causa medians,' 
 and which, as the following words 
 specify, comes immediately from God 
 as its active source and origin ; comp. 
 Waterl. on Justif. Vol. vi. p. 4 note, 
 Usteri, LcftrS. 11. i. i,p. 87. On the 
 meaning of Trior. Xp. and the dog- 
 
76 
 
 npo2 $iAiririH2ioY2. 
 
 lo diKaio<Tvvt]v eiri t^ iriarTei, tov yvwvai avrov /cot Tijv 
 
 matioal import of Sid vIitt., see notes 
 on Gal. ii. i6 (oomp. notes on Col. ii. 
 12), where both expressions are brief- 
 ly discussed ; and also the short but 
 extremely perspicuous remarks of 
 Hammond, Pract. Cateeh. 1. 4, who 
 well observes that our 'faith itself 
 cannot be regarded, in the strict sense 
 of the term, as a, logical instrument 
 of our justification, but as a condition 
 and moral instrument without which 
 we shall not be justified,' p. 78 (A.-C. 
 Libr.) ; so also with equal perspicuity 
 Forbes, Instruct, viii. 23. 22. On 
 the true doctrine of justification see 
 esp. Hooker, ore Justif. § 6 sq., and 
 for the opposed tenets of the Eo- 
 manists the clear statements of Moh- 
 ler, Symbolik, § 15, p. 148 sq., § 22, 
 p. 215, 216. iir\ T^ irCo-T«i] 
 
 based on faith ; not ' sub hac condi- 
 tione ut habeas fidem,' Fritz. (Rom. 
 Vol. I. p. 46), but ' super fide,' Copt., 
 Beng., irlaris being the foundation on 
 which it firmly and solidly rests. On 
 the force of ^Tri with the dative, which, 
 roughly speaking, denotes a Tnore 
 close, while with the gen. it express- 
 es a less close connexion (Kriiger, 
 Sprachl. % 68. 41. i), see notes on ch. 
 i. 3, and esp. on Bph. ii. 20. Nume- 
 rous exx. of ^Tri with both cases (appy. 
 interchangeably) will be found in 
 [Eratosth.] Catasterismi, ap. Gale, 
 Mythol. p. 99^^135, but the work is 
 of very doubtful date. The 
 
 connexion is not perfectly clear ; ^ri 
 TJ irlffTei has been joined, (a) with 
 the succeeding toB yvQvai, iEth. (Pol., 
 but not Piatt), Chrys., and, with a 
 different application, Calv., Beng.; 
 (6) with the remotely preceding ^x^y, 
 Meyer ; (c) with the immediately pre- 
 ceding SiKmoaivriv, Vulg., Copt., Goth. 
 Of these (o) is not tenable ; see below 
 on verse 10; (b) is improbable and 
 
 harsh, owing to the distance of iirl 
 ry IT. from ^x'^" > (") on tlie other 
 hand is grammatically defensible, and 
 eminently simple and perspicuous. 
 As we may say diKaioS(r0ai iwi tj 
 irlixTet, BO diKMoaivri ItI ry ir. without 
 the art. is permissible, see Winer, 
 Gr. § 20. I, p. 123, and comp. notes 
 on Eph. i. 15. 
 
 lo. TOV Tvuvai o«t6v] that I may 
 know Sim, Auth. ; infinitive of de- 
 sign dependent on the preceding 
 eipe$a, not on /ii) ^av (Mey.), which 
 seems to give an undue prominence 
 to the participial clause. The refer- 
 ence of ToO yv&vai {=tva yvH) to ver. 
 8, as Winer, De W., al., seems to 
 disturb the easy and natural sequence 
 of thought ; see Wiesing. m loc. On 
 the infin. 'of design,' which falls un- 
 der the general head of the gen. of 
 subjective relation (compare Kruger, 
 Sprachl. § 47. 22. 2), and is by no 
 means without example in classical 
 Greek (Bernhardy, Synt. ix. 2, p. 357, 
 Madvig, Synt. § 170 c), see Winer, 
 Gr. § 44. 4, p. 291, where other exx. 
 are noticed and discussed. The 
 construction of tov yvSivai, with iirl 
 rri Tri<rT., if taken (a) as equivalent 
 to uVre yn&vai Sii ttjs irliTTews 
 (Theod., Chrys.), is opposed to the 
 order of words, and to all rules of 
 grammatical analysis, — if (6) as a 
 definitive gen., ' so as to know Him' 
 (Calv., Beng.), it is a construction of 
 irlaTi! not found in the N.T.; see 
 Meyer and Alf. The know- 
 
 ledge here mentioned, as Meyer right- 
 ly observes, is not merely speculative 
 but practical and experimental; see 
 esp. Beck, See.lenl. i. 9, p. 22, oomp. 
 Andrewes, Serm. Vol. ii. p. 204 (A.-C. 
 Libr.). KaV ti\v 8vv. k.t.X.] 
 
 and the power of His resurrection; 
 fuller explanation of the preceding 
 
III. lO, II. 
 
 77 
 
 ovvafAtv rtji avaa-Tacrewi avToO koi Koivwviav t«i' iraOtj' 
 fxaTtov avrov, (Tvju./j.op(pi^6/Ji.evoi r^ QavaTw avTov, e'l ii 
 
 10. Koivuvlay] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Eev., Westc. and Sort, on 
 clearly preponderating authority: Bee, and former edd. of this Commentary, 
 T^v Koivwviav. ffU/ii/iop^ifA/ievos] So the above-mentioned critical 
 
 edd., on very clearly preponderating authority: Rec, (rvfi,tiop^o6ii.evos. 
 
 aiiTov, under two different aspects, 
 the Lord's resurrection, and the 
 Lord's sufferings. The Siv. t^s av- 
 acrr. airov is clearly not ' potentia 
 qua excitatus fuit,' Vatabl. (avaar. 
 being a gen. ohjecti), but ' qua justos 
 ad immortalitatem revocabit,' Just., 
 — dcao-T. being the gen. originis 
 (Hartung, Casiis, p. ■23); 'a virtue 
 or power flowing from Christ's resur- 
 rection, called by the Apostle vis re- 
 surrectionis,' Andrewes, Serm. Vol. 
 II. p. 204 (A.-C. Libr.) ; comp. Theoph. 
 As the resurrection of Christ has at 
 least four spiritual efiicacies, viz. (a) 
 as quickening our souls, Eph. ii. 5 ; 
 (6) as confirming the hope of our 
 resurrection, Bom. viii. 11, i Cor. xv. 
 22; (c) as assuring us of our present 
 justification, Bom. iv. 24, 25 ; {d) as 
 securing our final justification, our 
 triumph over death, and participa- 
 tion in His glory, 2 Cor. iv. 10 sq.. 
 Col. iii. 4, — the context can alone 
 determine the immediate reference. 
 Here the general sentiment seems to 
 point to (c) or {d), the present verse 
 and ver. 1 1 perhaps more especially 
 to the latter. On the fruits of Christ's 
 resurrection, see Pearson, Greed, Art. 
 V. Vol. I. p. 313, Usher, Body of Div. 
 ch. XV. ad fin., and on our justification 
 by Christ's resurrection compared 
 with that by His death, the admir- 
 able remarks of Jackson, Creed, xi. 
 16. 8. KOiviovCav K.T.X.] 
 
 fellowship of His sufferings; further 
 exemplification of the experimental 
 knowledge of Christ, regarded as ob- 
 jective and present, suggested by the 
 preceding clause, of which the ref. 
 
 was rather subjective and future. It 
 is only in a participation in His suf- 
 ferings that there can be one in His 
 resurrection and glory : el toLvvv /i^i 
 iiniTTeio/isii in ffvii^aaiXeiiTO/iei' oiK 
 av ToaavTO, Kal ret ToiaOro iv&ffxoiieii, 
 Theoph. ; comp. Bom. viii. 17, 2 Tim. 
 ii. II. This partnership in Christ's 
 sufferings is outward and actual 
 (Chrys., al.), not inward and ethical 
 (Zauch.) ; it is a sharing in the suf- 
 ferings He Buffered, a drinking from 
 the cup He drank^ comp. 2 Cor. iv. 
 
 10, I Pet. iv. 13, notes on ■!. Tim. ii. 
 
 11, and Eeuss, Theol. Ghret. iv. 20, 
 Vol. II. p. 224. crv)i.|iop<t>iJo|i.. 
 K.T.X.] being conformed to His death, 
 i.e. 'by being, or while I am being, 
 conformed to His death even as I 
 now am:' pres. participle logically 
 dependent on the preceding yvdvai ; 
 see notes on Epft. iii. 18, iv. 2. This 
 conformation then is not ethical, 'ut 
 huic mundo emortuus sim quemad- 
 modum Christus mortuus est in 
 cruoe,' Van Heng., but, as the con- 
 nexion and tenor of the passage re- 
 quire, actual, and, as the pres. sug- 
 gests, even now more especially going 
 on: ' ut coguoscamcommunicationem 
 passionum ejus, in quam venio, et 
 quse mihi contigit dum per passiones 
 et mortis perioula quse pro nomine 
 ejus sustineo conformis efiicior morti 
 ejus,' Estius. 
 
 II. el! irws] if by any means, ' si 
 quomodo,' Vulg., Clarom. ; an ex- 
 pression not so much of doubt as of 
 humility, indicating the object con- 
 templated in aviifwpipi.^. k.t.\. ; od 
 Qa^pw yap, tp^fflv, oCiru ovtus, ^TaweivQ- 
 
78 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 TTO)? KaTavTrjcrm eh rr/v e^avda-Tacriv Trjv sk veKpwv. 
 
 II. Trp/ Ik veKpSv] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 very greatly preponderating authority : Mec, twi> vexpuv. 
 
 (ppivei, Theoph. : see also Neander, 
 Phil. p. 43. In this formula, when 
 thus associated with verbs denoting 
 an action directed to a particular end, 
 the idea of an attempt ia conveyed 
 ('nixum fidei Paulinse,' Beng.), which 
 may or may not be successful ; comp. 
 Acts xxvii. 12, Eom. i. 10, xi. 14, and 
 see Fritz. Bom. xi. 14, Vol. 11. p. 47, 
 Hartung, Partik. e/, z. 6, Vol. 11. p. 
 206, and for a few exx. of the similar 
 use of si in Latin, Madvig, Lat. Gr. 
 
 § 451. d. KOTOVTIJO-O) «ls] 
 
 I may attain unto; not indio. future, 
 as in Eom. i. 10, and perhaps xi. 14 
 (Mey.), but aor. subj. (Alf.), as the 
 following words, el Kal /taraXiijSu, 
 seem to suggest. On the force of el 
 with the subj. ('ubi nihil nisi condi- 
 tio ipsa indicetur'), now admitted and 
 acknowledged in the best Attic Greek, 
 see Herm. de Part. 8,v, 11. 7, p. 97, 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 499 sq., 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 41. vs. e, p. 263. 
 The expression Karavrav els, ' perve- 
 nire ad,' is used in the N.T. in con- 
 nexion with places (Acts xvi. i, xviii. 
 ig, 24, al.), persons (i Cor. x. 11, xiv. 
 36), and ethical relations (Acts xxvi. 
 7, Bph. iv. 13), in which last con- 
 nexion it is also found with ivl 
 several times in Polyb. ; e.g. with 
 gen., Hist. xiv. 1. g (but the reading 
 is doubtful), with aocus., in. ir. 4, 
 III. 91. I, XIV. I. 9. The ref. of Van 
 Heng. to time, 'si perveniam ad tem- 
 pus hujuB eventi,' is thus wholly un- 
 necessary, if indeed it be lexically 
 tenable. ti]v IJovdoTao-iv 
 
 K.T.X.] the resurrection from the 
 dead; i.e., as the context suggests, 
 the first resurrection (Bev. xx. 5), 
 when at the Lord's coming the dead 
 in Him shall rise first (i Thess. iv. 
 
 16), and the quick be caught up to 
 meet Him in the clouds (i Thess. iv. 
 17); comp. Luke xx. 35. The first 
 resurrection will include only true 
 believers, and will appy. precede the 
 second, that of non-believers and 
 disbelievers, in point of time ; see 
 Bbrard, Dogmatih, § 571, and the 
 singular but learned work of Bur- 
 net, on the Departed, oh. ix. p. 255 
 (Transl.). Any reference here to a 
 merely ethical resurrection (Goc- 
 ceius) is wholly out of the question. 
 The double compound 4^avdo-Taa-cs, 
 an air. \ey6/jt.. in N.T. (comp. Polyb. 
 Hist. Ill, 55. 4), does not appear to 
 have any special force (rV IvSo^ov, 
 TT)!/ iv ve<j)4\ais ^^apcnv, Theoph.), but 
 seems only an instance of the ten- 
 dency of later Greek to adopt such 
 forms without any increase of mean- 
 ing, see Thiersch, de Vers. Alex. 11. 
 I, p. 83, and notes on Eph. i. 21 : 
 comp. Pearson, Creed, Vol. 11. p. 
 316 (ed. Burt.). rriv (k 
 
 vcKpfiv] Distinct and slightly empha- 
 tic specification of the i^avdffr.; see 
 notes on i Tim. iii. 13, 2 Tim. i. 13, 
 where however the first article, as 
 being associated with a word of known 
 meaning and common occurrence, is 
 omitted after the prep. Meyer de- 
 fends Bee. i^av. twv veKpwv, on the 
 ground that elsewhere St Paul regu- 
 larly omits in ; these internal consi- 
 derations, however, must yield to 
 the very great preponderance of ex- 
 ternal authority in favour of the text. 
 12 — 16. 12. Ovx oTi] (Z say) 
 not that: not so much in confirma- 
 tion of what precedes (Theoph.), as 
 to avoid misapprehension, and by his 
 own example to confirm his own ex- 
 hortations ; comp. ver. 15; 'nolite, 
 
III. 12. 
 
 79 
 
 OJj( oTi ^Stj eXa^ov tj '^Stj TeTeXelufnai, Sicoku) Se 12 
 
 inquit, in me falli; plus me ipse novi 
 quam vos. Si nescio quid mihi desit, 
 nesoio quid adsit,' August. On the 
 use of oix Sti, soil, ovk ipS in., in 
 limiting a preceding assertion or ob- 
 viating a misapprehension, see Har- 
 tung, Partih. Vol. ii. p. 154, comp. 
 Herm. Viger, No. 253. 
 TJSr) SXaPov] I have already attain- 
 ed; on the force of the aor. see next 
 note. The object of aojSoc is some- 
 what doubtful. The two most natural 
 supplements are (a) XpurrSv, Theod., 
 implied from what precedes ; (6) ^pa- 
 Peiov, Chrys., reflected from what fol- 
 lows. Of these (6) is to be preferred, 
 as the SuliKu immediately following 
 seems to show that the favourite meta- 
 phor from the stadium was already oc- 
 cupying the Apostle's thoughts. The 
 simple IXo;8oi' thus precedes, almost 
 ' geueraUter dictum,' to be succeeded 
 by the more specific KaraXi^oi. On 
 the force of ijSii and its distinction 
 from vSv, see notes on 1 Tim. iv. 6. 
 TErEXcCtti|i.ai] have been made perfect: 
 more exact explanation of the semi- 
 metaphorical #Xa|3oc, and result of it. 
 The preceding aor. is thus not to be 
 regarded as a perfect, but as repre- 
 senting a single action in the past 
 ('itautnondefiniatur quamlate pateat 
 id quod actum est,' Fritz, de Aoristi 
 Vi, p. 17), which the succeeding perf. 
 explains and expands ; comp. Winer, 
 Gr. §40. 5, p. 247. That the reference 
 of Te\eiova-0aL is here ethical, 'to be 
 spiritually perfected,' not to the games 
 (Hamm., Loesner, p. 355), 'to be 
 crowned or receive the reward,' is 
 almost self-evident: comp. Eeuss, 
 Theol. Chrgt. iv. 16, Vol. 11. p. 182. 
 The verb is only used here by St 
 Paul (2 Cor. xii. 9 is more than 
 doubtful), though common in Heb. 
 and elsewhere in the N.T, The an- 
 
 cient gloss 17 ■^Sri deSiKalwuai (PG 
 Stxaiw/iai, on the reading of G see 
 Tisch. in loc.) inserted after IXa^ov 
 in DTG; Clarom., Sangerm., Aug., 
 Boern. ; Iren,, al., indirectly shows 
 the meaning here ascribed to rere- 
 Xeidtfiai. SicoKO) 81] but 
 
 I am pressing onward; not ' sed 
 persequor,' Beza, but ' [per]sequor 
 autem,' Vulg., with a more just 
 regard to the force of the particle : 
 see Hand, Tursell. Vol. i. p. 559. In 
 sentences of this nature, where a 
 negative has preceded and the regu- 
 lar oKKa (sondern) might have been 
 expected (comp. Donalds. Cratyl. § 
 201), it will nearly always be found 
 that the connexion of the two clauses 
 is oppositive rather than adversative; 
 i.e. that in the one case (aWd) the 
 preceding negation is brought into 
 sharp prominence and contrasted 
 with what follows, while in the other 
 (S^) the negation is almost left un- 
 noticed, and the sentence continued 
 with the (so to say) ' connective op- 
 position ' that so regularly character- 
 izes the latter particle ; see Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 360, and comp. 
 Hand, I. c. The metaphor 
 
 is obviously taken from the stadium 
 (Loesn. Obs. p. 355, iirayiii>i6s elfu, 
 Theoph.), and the verb Siiifcw, as in 
 the exx. cited by Loesn., and also in 
 ver. 14, seems to be here used abso- 
 lutely, Kard, (xrovd^v iXaiveiv, Phavor. ; 
 see exx. in Kypke, Obs. Vol. n. p. 
 317, Buttm. Lexil. § 40, p. 232 
 (Transl.): so, distinctly, Syr., Copt., 
 'curro,' and appy. Chrys., who re- 
 gards it as only differing qualitatively 
 (lj,e8' S<rov t6iiov) from Tpix<^ ; see also 
 Theoph. in loc. If Sii6/cu be regarded 
 as transitive, the object of ScdKu will 
 be the same as that of KaraXd^ia, soil, 
 the ^pa^eTov implied in the ^(f w : 
 
80 
 
 npo2 $iAinriH2ioY2. 
 
 €1 Kai KOTaXa^o) e<p w koi KareX^fjKpd^v vtto 'K.pKrrov. 
 
 12. XpwTToff] Rec.yTov XpioToC 'Iijo-oC. The authorities are here some- 
 what divided. The tov is rejected by Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. 
 and Hort, on very greatly preponderating authority. The 'Iriffov is, however, 
 retained on good though insufficient authority by Tisch., Rev.: Westc. and 
 Hort bracket. 
 
 comp. ^th. (Piatt). The former 
 construction however seems more 
 simple and natural. A Kal 
 
 KaraXdpa)] If I may also lay hold 
 on; the Kal contrasting KaraXcijSu 
 not with the more remote fKa^ov 
 (Mey.), but with the immediately 
 preceding Siii/cu (Alf.): see Ecolus. 
 xi. 10, xxvii. 8, comp. Eom. ix. 30, 
 Lucian, Hermot. § 77, Cicero, Off. i. 
 31. no, in all which passages there 
 seems a contrast more or less defined 
 between the SiiiKuv and KaraXa/ipi- 
 veiv, the ' sequi ' and ' assequi ;' comp. 
 Fritz. Rom. Vol. 11. p. 355. On the 
 force of el xai see notes on ch. ii. 17. 
 The reading however in this verse is 
 not quite certain, the first koI being 
 omitted by Tisch. with good autho- 
 rity (the 2nd Kai is also omitted in 
 some MSS., but with less probability); 
 the critical preponderance is, however, 
 clearly in favour of the text. 
 Whether KaraM^u ('assequar,' Eom. 
 ix. 30, r Cor. ix. 24) is to be taken 
 absolutely or transitively will de- 
 pend on the meaning assigned to 
 i4> V- «<!>' 4 ""^ KOTsX.] that 
 
 for which also I was laid hold on; 
 so Syr., 'id oujus causS,' and sim. 
 iEth. (Piatt), — the only two versions 
 that make their view of this passage 
 perfectly clear. 'B0' ij has here re- 
 ceived several different interpreta- 
 tions. Taken per se it may mean, 
 (o) quare, like dvB wi (Luke xii. 3) at 
 the beginning of a sentence; comp. 
 Diod. Sic. XIX. 9, ^0' <J rhv (iJkv /teffoco 
 (caXoOiri raSpov k.t.X. ; (/3) eo quod, 
 propterea quod, soil. ^Tri toi5tij) Sn= 
 
 Siiri (appy. Eom. v. 12, i Cor. v. 4), 
 expressed more commonly in the 
 plural, i^ ots, in classical Greek ; see 
 Thom. M. p. 400, ed. Bern., and 
 Fritz. Rom. Vol. i. p. 299; (7) sub 
 qua conditione, cujus causd, almost 
 'to which very end,' Hamm. (see i 
 Thess. iv. 7, Gal. v. 13, and notes, 
 also exx. in Lobeck, Phryn. p. 475), 
 ^ being here regarded as the relative 
 to a suppressed antecedent touto, the 
 obj. aocus. of KaTaX(i/3u : comp. Luke 
 V. 25 (^1^' «). Of these (p) and (7) are 
 the only two which here come into 
 consideration. The former is adopted 
 by the Greek commentators, Beng., 
 Meyer, al., and deserves considera- 
 tion, but introduces a reason where 
 a reason seems hardly appropriate. 
 The latter is adopted by Syr., Copt., 
 De W., Neand., and appy. the bulk 
 of modern expositors, and seems most 
 in harmony with the context : the 
 Apostle was laid hold on by Christ 
 (at his conversion, Horsley, Serm. 
 XVII., not necessarily as a fugitive in 
 a race, Chrys., Hamm.) with refer- 
 ence to that, — to enable him to ob- 
 tain that, which he was now striving 
 to lay hold of. It may be 
 
 observed lastly that koX does not refer 
 to a suppressed iyji, nor to Karek. 
 (Alf.), but to the preceding relative, 
 which it specifies, and tacitly con- 
 trasts with other ends which might 
 be conceivable; 'for which too, for 
 which very salvation, I was appre- 
 hended,' d;c.; comp. i Cor. xiii. 12, 
 KaBiii Kol iireyviiffSriv, and see Elotz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 636. 
 
III. 13- 
 
 81 
 
 13 aSe\(poi, iyoi) eftavTov ov Xoyl^o/nai KareiXijtpevaf 
 ev Si, ra fiev oiriaw iTriXavOavofievot, roci Se e/x- 
 
 13. oil] So Lachm,, Treg., but each with a margin: Bee, Tisch., Rev. 
 (with marg.), Westc. and Hort (with margin), otfTru. The external authority 
 is very equally balanced, but the probability that the oiTroi arose from a 
 desire to soften the unqualified negative appears to turn the scale. 
 
 13. dSE\(|>oC] Earnest and empha- 
 tic repetition of the preceding state- 
 ments, under somewhat hortatory 
 aspects, negative and positive : in the 
 first portion of the verse the Apostle 
 disavows all self-esteem and self- 
 confidence, — not perhaps without 
 reference to some of his converts 
 {ravTa irphs roits fieyaXotppopoOvras ^tI 
 Tois ■^dr] KaTop8u$eT<n \4yei, Theod.) ; 
 in the second portion and ver. 14 he 
 declares the persistence and energy 
 of his onward endeavour; ev6s el/ii 
 /iSvov, ToO Toit ^inrpoadev iveKrdve- 
 aOai, Chrys. lycJ IjiauTov 
 
 K.T.X.] I do not esteem MTSELr to have 
 apprehended: the juxtaposition of 
 ^71!) and the specially added i/iavrbv 
 (see Winer, Gr. § 44. 3) not only 
 mark the selfish element which the 
 Apostle disavows (Mey.), but declare 
 his own deliberate judgment on 
 his own case ; comp. Beng. The 
 verb Xoyij^ofiai, is rather » favourite 
 word with St Paul, being used (ex- 
 cluding quotations) twenty -nine times 
 in his Epp., and thrice only (Mark 
 xi. 31 being more than doubtful) in 
 the rest of the N. T. 
 iv Si] but one thing I do, sc. iroiG, 
 the general verb in the first clause 
 being inferred from the special verb 
 that follows; see Winer, Gr. § 66. 
 I. b. The ellipsis is variously sup- 
 plied ('novi,' Syr.; (j>povTiiia or ^e- 
 pi/joia, (Ecum. 2; iarl, Beza; SidiKia, 
 Flatt), evaded (Goth.), passed over 
 (Mth..), or left nakedly as it stands 
 (Vulg., Copt.). The most simple 
 
 E. 
 
 and natural supplement is that 
 adopted above, with Theoph., CEcum., 
 and most modern expositors; see 
 Jelf, Gr. § 895. 0. Meyer strongly 
 urges the participial form iroidv, but 
 this surely mars the emphasis, and 
 obscures the prominent Sicifcu, to 
 which the ellipsis seems intended to 
 direct attention. ra ]>,h> 
 
 oirCcro) liriX.] forgetting the things 
 behind; not the renounced Judaioal 
 prerogatives, ver. 5 sq. (Vorst.), nor 
 the deeds done under their influence, 
 but, as the metaphor almost uumis- 
 takeably suggests, the portions of his 
 Christian course already traversed, 
 'the things attained and left behind,' 
 Fell; ^p TTOiiS, iv&s ylyvonai fi6vov, 
 Httcos dei irpoKdirTOLfiL ' iTiXavdapofiat 
 rwv KaTopOwfidrcov Kal d(piTjfic aird 
 6irl<roi, Kal oidi iiitw-qixai Skat airrSv, 
 Theoph. ; comp. Chrys. The special 
 reference of Theod. to oi trepl toO 
 KTjpiyfiaros irbvoi is unsatisfactory, 
 as obscuring the general and practi- 
 cal teaching which this vital passage 
 conveys ; koI i]fie?s fi^ 6ctov 'fjvT^irafiei' 
 TTJs &per7js &va\oyi.^iJ,e8a, dXX' S<tov 
 ij/Mv XelTra, Chrys. In the verb 
 
 iTTiKavff. ('dynamic' middle, — of the 
 inward act [the act. not occurring], 
 Soheuerl. Synt. p. 295) the prep. 
 seems to mark the application of the 
 action to, and perhaps also its ex- 
 tension over (acous.) the object, a 
 little more forcibly than the simple 
 verb (Xi)55 irapaSoSnai., Chrys.) ; comp. 
 Rost u. Pahn, Lex. s.v. M, C. ec, 
 dd. It is occasionally, as here, 
 
 G 
 
82 
 
 TIP02 ^lAinriHSIOYS. 
 
 TO 
 
 14 irpocrBev eireKTeiv6fJi,evo<s, Kara, (tkottov Siooko) €j? 
 ^pa^eiov Tiji avw KXi^cretoi tov Qeov iv Xpicrrw Ii/o-oi/. 
 
 14. els} So Lachm., Tisch, Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on authority 
 so critically preponderant, that the internal arguments founded on the 
 comparison of the prepp. (see former edd. of this Commentary) cannot be 
 considered sensibly to afEeot the decision : Rec, iirl. 
 
 found with the aoous. ; the simple 
 form always with gen.; comp. Jelf, 
 Gr. § 512, Thom. M. p. 348 (ed. 
 Bern.). tois 8^ S|iirpo(r6EV 
 
 eittKT.] but stretching out after the 
 things that are in front : still more 
 distinct reference to the image of the 
 racer. The Tk ijiirpoaBev are the 
 SlavXoi (to use the language of Chrys.) 
 which are yet to be passed over in 
 the Christian course, and are the 
 successive objects (dat. of direction, 
 see Hartung, Casus, p. 83) toward 
 which the action of the iircKTeiv. is 
 directed: good works done in faith 
 are the successive strides ; Andrewes, 
 Serm. Vol. iii. p. 95 (A.-C. Libr.). 
 In the double compound iireKr. the 
 ^Tri marks the direction, ix the pos- 
 ture, in which the racer stretches out 
 his body towards the objects before 
 him; 6 ykp ^TeKTeivdfievoi oSt6s icmv 
 6 Toi/s ir6das KahoL rp^xoj'ras rtp Xoi7r$> 
 <r(iii.aTi, irpoXa^eiv (TTrouSdfwK, Chrys. 
 A very similar use of iTeKrelyea-eiu is 
 cited in Steph. Thesaur. s. v., Strabo, 
 XVII. p. 800. 
 
 14. Kara o-kottAv 8i<5ko>] / press 
 forward toward the mark. The pre- 
 position Kara here marks the direc- 
 tion of the StiiiKeiv (see Acts viii. 26, 
 svi. 7, and with closer geographical 
 ref., ii. 10, xxvii. 12), — a direction 
 which, according to the primary 
 meaning of the prep. (KOTd=Kc-i/-Ta), 
 is represented as ' beginning near us 
 and proceeding to a point not neces- 
 sarily distant,' Donalds. Gratyl. § 183. 
 On the absolute use of Jiciicw, see on 
 
 ver. 12. els to Ppa^eiov 
 
 K.T.X.] unto the prize of the heavenly 
 calling; the gen. not being of appo- 
 sition (De W.), which would involve 
 the untenable assumption that KXrja-n 
 = 'superna beatitudo,' Est., comp. 
 De W., — but a species of the gen. 
 possessivus, serving to mark the ;8paj3. 
 as that which the av(ji K\rj(Tis has in 
 expectation as its final crown. The 
 ^pa^eiov is here, as in i Cor. ix. 24, 
 not 'the goal' but 'the prize' (tJ 
 S.d\ov iKiXeaev, Theod.), and is the 
 object which the SliIikhv is designed 
 to reach and secure), — 'the future 
 eternal glory to which God calls us 
 by the Gospel of Christ,' Bull, Serm. 
 XIV. p. 268 (Oxf. 1844). The deriva- 
 tion is uncertain; perhaps Ppa = irpo, 
 with ref. to the judge sitting forward 
 to award the prize, Benfey, Wurzel- 
 lex. Vol. II. p. 106. The kXtjo-is, 
 
 here defined as proceeding from God 
 (gen. originis), is stUl further speci- 
 fied as 5) 0,11(1} k\tj<ti.s, the heavenly 
 caUing (comp. Col. iii. 2, Gal. iv. 26); 
 not with any special reference to the 
 peculiar appointment of St Paul 
 (Mey., Alf.), but, as the latitude of 
 the passage seems to require, with 
 general reference to its ends and ob- 
 jects; it was a kXtJo-is iirovpdvios (Heb. 
 iii. i), God was its author (i Thess. 
 ii. 12), heaven the object to which it 
 conducted, and in reference to which 
 it was vouchsafed; comp. ver. 20. 
 ev Xp. 'In<r. may be connected (a) 
 with StibKw, as Chrys., appy. Theoph., 
 CEoum., and very emphatically, Mey.; 
 
III. 14, 15. 83 
 
 Oo-oi ovv TeXeiot tovto (ppovw/xev' Koi el ti erepwi 15 
 
 or (ft) with kX^o-is (Copt., M&.), — 
 KaXetf in Xp., and therefore kXtjo-is iv 
 Xp. without the art., being an al- 
 lowed formula ; see Winer, Gr. § 20. 
 ■i, and notes on Epft. i. 1 5. The latter 
 seems most simple, and most coinci- 
 dent with St Paul's use of the for- 
 mula. On the dogmatical signifi- 
 cance of this verse, as indicating an 
 effort on our parts through the assist- 
 ance of grace, oomp. Reuss, ThSol. 
 Chrgt. IV. 21, Vol. II. p. 255. 
 
 15. "Ocroi oSv] As many then as; 
 the oSv with its usual collective and 
 retrospective force gathering into a 
 definite exhortation the statements 
 made in the three preceding verses : 
 comp. Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 717. 
 "Otroi is clearly not synonymous with 
 rifiets ol, Heinr., hut is designedly 
 used as leaving to each one's con- 
 science whether he were rfKetos or 
 no. T^Xeioi] perfect ; not 
 
 absolutely, C.J. TereXeiw/i^i/oi (ver. 12), 
 but relatively; — yet not necessarily 
 as opposed to v^irioi, ' in societate 
 Christiana cum adultis comparandi,' 
 Van Heng. (oomp. i Cor. ii. 6, xiv. 
 20, where however the reference is 
 rather to knowledge), but simply as 
 those who had made some advance 
 toward the tAos of Christian Hfe; 
 comp. Wiesing. in loc, where this 
 view is elaborately and successfully 
 maintained. touto <|>po- 
 
 v<a|j,cv] let us be of this mind, ' let us 
 entertain these views with regard to 
 religious practice (Horsley), which I 
 follow, and which I am here incul- 
 cating.' Yet what views? Surely 
 not merely tA Sti Se? tSv Siriffdev etn- 
 Xavd&nea-Bai, Chrys. ; so that reXeii- 
 TTjs in its fullest sense is to consist 
 in T& lii) ro/il^eip iavrbv riXeiov e&oi 
 (comp. Theoph.), but with a more 
 
 inclusive reference to the whole great 
 subject which commenced ver. 7, was 
 continued to ver. 1 1 , and was speci- 
 ally illustrated in ver. 12 — 14. That 
 the toCto should refer to what im- 
 mediately precedes, to the iv Si of 
 ver. 13, seems required by the rules 
 of perspicuity, — but that it refers to 
 it only in so far as it forms a sort of 
 example and special statement of the 
 modus agendi, in ref. to ver. 8 sq., 
 seems plain from the evident inter- 
 connexion of the whole passage. 
 Kal ii Ti K.T.X.] and if in any respect 
 ye are differently minded; 'if you 
 entertain, as is certainly supposable 
 {el with indie., see Winer, Gr. § 41. 
 2, notes on Gal. i. 9J, upon any 
 point, — not of doctrine or external 
 worship (Horsley), but of moral 
 practice {oii irepl doy/xdruv Tavra etpij- 
 rai dXX& Trepl §lov reXeidrriTos, Chrys.), 
 any different, and so, almost neces- 
 sarily, less correct sentiments, even 
 this too, — this about which ye are 
 thus differently minded, will God 
 reveal to you in its true relations.' 
 There is thus no need with Horsley, 
 in his able sermon on this passage, 
 to give tjipoveire two different refer- 
 ences, (a) to religious disposition, 
 (6) to opinion; nor is it enough to 
 regard er^/jws as standing merely in 
 opp. to ' sameness and uniformity, ' 
 when the context seems so clearly to 
 imply an improper and injurious di- 
 versity; see exx. of this sense of 
 frepos in notes on Gal. i. 6. We may 
 observe (with Wiesinger) that the 
 Apostle does not say 'irepov but eri- 
 pas; they did not differ in funda- 
 mentals, but in the aspects and re- 
 lations in which they regarded them 
 and carried them out into practice. 
 KaV toSto] even this, ' this also, as 
 
 G 2 
 
84 
 
 npo2 $iAinnHsioYS. 
 
 i6 cjjpoveiTe, Kai tovto 6 0eoy vfjiiv aTroKoXvy^ei. vXt/v 
 eh o ecpOaarafjLev tm avrw a'TOf)(€iv. 
 
 j6. ffToixfi"] The addition in Rec, Kav6vi, t6 airb (ppoveTv, whicli appears, 
 ■with variations both of words and order, in several of the uncial MSS., is 
 rejected by Lachm., Tiseh., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on clearly 
 preponderating authority. It has been defended by BincTc, Matth., and 
 Woi'dsw., but, owing to the suspicious variations in words and order, has 
 every appearance of being an explanatory gloss ; comp. oh. ii. 2, Gal. 
 vi. 16. 
 
 well as the other things which God 
 has been pleased to reveal ; ' the as- 
 censive Kal contrasting the present 
 TOVTO, — the point on which they need 
 revelation, not with the preceding 
 TOVTO (Flatt), but with the other 
 points (to which cf ti is the excep- 
 tion) concerning which they have 
 already received it, and are in accord 
 with the Apostle: comp. Hartung, 
 Partik. s.v. kcU, 2. 8, Vol. i. p. 135. 
 The toCto is somewhat differently 
 explained, ' justitiam esse ex fide, ' 
 Vatabl., ' vos esse deceptos,' Grot., 
 ' quod nos perfect! sentimus,' Beng. ; 
 alii alia. The only natural explana- 
 tion seems that adopted above, viz. 
 the thing concerning which iT^pas 
 (jipovehe (Horsley), i. e. the true re- 
 lations of the preceding W, 'tI in 
 seiner Wahrheit,' De W. ; GeJs iiiiiv 
 0)^ ^yvoovaiv (nroSei^et Tb S^ov, Theoph. 
 diroKa\vi)>«] will reveal, by means 
 of the Xlvev/M ffo(pias Kal airoKoKiij/cas, 
 Eph. i. 1 7 ; oix eXirtv ii/d^a, dXX' diro- 
 KaKiyj/ei, tva Sb^Tj jxaXKov Ayvolas etvai 
 rd Trpay/ia, Chrys. The future is not 
 merely expressive of wish, but of an 
 assured and predictive expectation ; 
 'loquitur pro spe quam ex priore 
 ipsorum fide oonceperat; sic et Gal. 
 V. 10,' Grot.: comp. Winer, Gr. § 
 40. 6. 
 
 16. irXijv] Notwithstanding, ' be 
 that as it may,' Horsley; 'in spite 
 of there probably being several points 
 
 in which you wiU need diroKdXvxI/is.' 
 The practically adversative force of 
 irXiiv limits the preceding expression 
 of predictive expectation, while its 
 intrinsically comparative force serves 
 also to contrast the aor. e<p6. with 
 the fut. Attok. ; see notes on ch. i. 18, 
 and Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 724. 
 els 8 l(|>9d(ra|iiev] whereto we have 
 attained, Matth. xii. 28, Eom. ix. 31, 
 al. The primary and classical mean- 
 ing of this verb (p)-<E-venire) appears 
 to have been almost entirely lost 
 sight of in Alexandrian Greek, and 
 to have merged in the general mean- 
 ing ' venire, ' and with ris 'pervenire ; ' 
 comp. Dan. iv. 19 (Theod.), ■ij fisya- 
 "Ktijffivri cov ifieyaX^vdtj Kal ^ipBaaev 
 els Tbv oipavov: see Fritz. Rom. Vol. 
 ^^- P- 357- -I-* is doubtful whether 
 k(p9a<r. denotes advance in moral 
 conduct (Chrys., Theoph., Mey.), ad- 
 vance in knowledge (De W., Wies- 
 ing.), or in both (Alf.); the first 
 seems most in accordance with the 
 context and with o-toixe'", the last 
 however is not improbable. Further, 
 that S does not indicate a point com- 
 mon to all, is almost self-evident : it 
 is a point in a common line, varying 
 in its position according to individual 
 progress. This common Une (pro- 
 duced) the Apostle in the following 
 words commands all to pursue, and 
 not to diverge from : comp. the illus- 
 trative diagram of Meyer in loc. 
 
III. 1 6, 17, 18. 
 
 85 
 
 Imitate me and my fol- v ' 'a'V'vj.' 
 
 lowers, for many, alaa! Z^VV/lt/A^Tai flOV yiveorOe, aOeXcpOt, 17 
 
 mind earthly things. , . » w r. 
 
 Om countrv is heaven, Kai (TKOTTeiTe TOU? Ol/TWf VCOlVaTOVVTat 
 
 whence we look for Our r 
 
 Lorf^^and our final ^„0^y ^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^5y_ -^oXXo) jap 1 8 
 
 Tcy avT^ o-roixeiv] waZi; onward coin- 
 cidently with the same, or ' according 
 to the same; ' dat. normce, oomp. Gal. 
 vi. 16, T^Kavhvi Toirifi ffToixeic, where 
 see note and references. The infini- 
 tive is here imperatival, and, in ac- 
 cordance with that usage, conveys a 
 precise and emphatic command, or 
 rather address (Eriiger, Sprachl. § 55. 
 1. 5), in the second person singular 
 or plural ; see Jelf, Gr. § 671. a, Fritz. 
 Bom. Vol. ni. p. 86. Hence the 
 hortative transl. in the first person, 
 as in Theoph., <XTOixCoii.ev (comp. 
 Chrys.), and in all the Vv. except 
 ^th. (Piatt), seems grammatically 
 doubtful; so rightly Mey., Alf., but 
 not De W. This is perhaps the only 
 certain instance of a pure impera- 
 tival inf. in the N.T. ; other in- 
 stances, e.g. Eom. xii. 15, pass more 
 into declarations of duty and of what 
 ought to be done, and may conse- 
 quently be joined with all three 
 persons ; see Jelf, Gr. § 67 1 . b, Winer, 
 
 Ch-- § 43- 5- 
 
 17 — iv. 1. Exhortation to follow 
 his example, and to stand fast. 
 17. Svv|xi|iT]raC k.t.X.] Be imitators 
 together of me, scil. ' together with 
 all who imitate me ; ' ' coimitatores,' 
 Clarom., Copt. : continuation of the 
 foregoing exhortation with reference 
 to the Apostle's own example. The 
 <rin> in awii. is appy. neither otiose 
 on the one hand, as in (rvvTroKtrai, 
 Eph. ii. 19, nor yet on the other 
 does it imply so much as 'omnes 
 uno consensu et unsl mente,' Calv., 
 Alf. , — a tinge of ethical meaning not 
 suggested or required by the context. 
 It appears simply to mark the com- 
 mon nature of the action in which 
 
 they all were to share; not merely 
 'be imitators' (i Cor. iv. 16), but 
 ' be a company of such ; ' Ka.86.irep ev 
 Xopv 'f"' (TTpaToiriSif rbv xopT/^' ""' 
 (TTpaTtfyhv Set iufi,eT<r8ai Tois Xoiwois, 
 Chrys. koV o-KoirsiTe k.t.X.] 
 
 and mark themwhich are so walking; 
 they were all to imitate the absent 
 Apostle and to observe studiously 
 those among them who walked after 
 his example. Who these were can- 
 not be determined : the allusion may 
 be to Timothy, Epaphras, and other 
 missionaries of the Apostle, but is 
 perhaps more naturally referred to 
 all those, whether holy men among 
 the Philippians, or teachers sent to 
 them, who followed the example of 
 St Paul; diddffKei cos 7roX\oi)s ^x^' 
 ToOSe Tou (TKOirov Koivavois, Theod. 
 Kaflws 'ixert k.t.X.] as ye have an ex- 
 ample in us, KaSijs standing in cor- 
 relation to the preceding oOtois, and 
 i)iMs referring to the Apostle: so 
 Vulg., Clarom., and all Vv., Chrys. 
 and the Greek expositors, and, it 
 may be added, nearly all modern 
 commentators. Meyer and Wiesing. 
 give KaSiis an argumentative force, 
 ' inasmuch as ' (see notes on Eph. i. 
 4), but in so doing seem to impair 
 the force, and obscure the perspicuity 
 of the passage ; see Alf. in loc, who 
 has satisfactorily refuted this inter- 
 pretation. The use of the plural ti/ms 
 does not imply a reference to roils 
 oCtws irepiT. together with St Paul, 
 but seems naturally to point either 
 to the Apostle and his fellow- workers 
 (Van Heng., Alf.), or perhaps, more 
 probably, is the Apostle's designation 
 of himself viewed less in his personal 
 than his official relations: ' be all, in 
 
86 
 
 npos $iAinnHsioY2. 
 
 Treptirarovo'iv, ov? TroXXaVt? eXeyov ufiiv, vvv Se Kai K\aioov 
 19 Aeyto, Tov? ey0/oou? rov CTTavpov tou "X-piuTOV, tSv ro 
 
 matters of practical religion, imita- 
 tors of me Paul, and observe those 
 who have me their Apostle as their 
 ensample ; ' comp. 2 Thess. iii. 7, 9. 
 The singular riirov yields no support 
 to either interpretation; see Bern- 
 hardy, Synt. II. 5, p. 61. 
 
 18. iroXXol ■ydp] Eeason for the 
 foregoing exhortation arising from 
 the sad nature of the case. Who 
 the woWol were cannot be exactly 
 determined. It seems however clear 
 that they are not the same as those 
 mentioned in ver. -i sq. The latter 
 were false teachers, and of Judaical 
 tenets; these, on the contrary, were 
 not teachers at all, and were of an 
 Epicurean bias ; they were not how- 
 ever Pagans (EiU.), but nominal 
 Christians, baptized sinners (Man- 
 ning), who disgraced their profession 
 by their sensuality; XpurruivuT/idv 
 Hkv iiTOKpaibixaioL iv Tpv(f>rj di Kal 
 iviau ffflvTcs, Theoph. after Chrys. 
 irepiiroToio-iv] are walking, ' are pur- 
 suing their course.' There is no 
 need to supply any qualifying adverb 
 (' alitor,' Syr.), or to assume any 
 pause and change of structure (Bill., 
 De W.). The verb itself— though 
 commonly associated by St Paul 
 with qualifying adverbs or adverbial 
 clauses, whether in bonam (Eom. xiii. 
 13, Eph. iv. i) or in malam partem 
 (2 Cor. iv. 2, 2 Thess. iii. 6) — is of 
 neutral meaning (comp. i Thess. iv. 
 i), and in its metaphorical use seems 
 only to designate a man's course of 
 life in its practical aspects and mani- 
 festations; it being left to the con- 
 text to decide whether they are bad 
 or good. iroXXaKis k.t.X.] 
 
 I ofttimes used to mention to you; 
 most probably by word of mouth; 
 perhaps also in the messages trans- 
 
 mitted to them by his emissaries; 
 not by any means necessarily in 
 another Epistle (Flatt). The voWdus 
 (' many times ') follows the ttoXXo! 
 with a slight rhetorical force, not 
 without example in St Paul's Epp. ; 
 see Winer, Or. § 68. 1, and comp. 
 the large quantity of exx. collected 
 by Lobeok, Faralipom. p. 56, 57. 
 Kol KXaCuv] even weeping, because 
 the evil has so much increased ; 6vtus 
 SaKpiav a|tot ol rpvijiwvTei, to jxh irepi- 
 p6\aioi', TovridTi to awixa, 'KiiralmvTes, 
 TTJs S^ fieXKo^rcTTjs eiSiivas SidSj/at [^u- 
 XV^ ?] oiidiva irotovsTaL \byov, Chrys. 
 Tois Ix'P""* "rov (TTavpoC] the (spe- 
 cial) enemies of the cross : apposition 
 to the preceding relative ; comp. Wi- 
 ner, Gr. § 59. 7. The article defines 
 the class sharply and distinctly, and 
 specifies them as enemies Kar i^ox^n. 
 They are so specified, not on account 
 of their doctrinal errors [SiSdrKovras 
 
 OTL SIXO. TTJS VOfiiKTJS TToXtTcias dSdvaTov 
 Trjs (Ton-qplas rvx^lv, Theod.), but on 
 account of their sensuality and their 
 practical denial of the great Christian 
 principle that o£ ... tou XpicTou ttjv adp- 
 Ka icFTa^puaav ffdv rots Tadrjp.a.ffiv Kal 
 rats imSvfdais, Gal. v. 24. So Chrys., 
 Theoph., (Ecum., and, with a more 
 general reference, [Athan.] de Virgin. 
 § 14. On the practical application 
 of the verse, ' the Cross the measure 
 of sin,' see Manning, Serm. xi. Vol. 
 III. p. 201 sq., and comp. Bp Hall, 
 Serm. xii. Vol. v. p. 172 sq. (Oxf. 
 
 1837). 
 
 19. <3v TO T^Xos diruXda] whose 
 end is perdition; more specific de- 
 scription of their characteristics, and 
 the certain and fearful issues that 
 await them. TAos has the article as 
 marking the definite and almost ne- 
 cessary end of such a course (comp. 
 
III. 19, 20. 
 
 87 
 
 riXoi airwXeia, (Sv o Qeoj ^ KoiXla xat fi So^a ev t^ 
 aicT'xyi'ri avTwv, ot ra eiriyeia (ppovovvTe^, fjfjLbov yap 20 
 
 2 Cor. xi. 15), while diriiXeia marks 
 that end as no merely temporal one, 
 but, as its usage in St Paul's Epp. 
 (ch. i. 28, Eom. ix. 22, 2 Thess. ii. 3, 
 I Tim. vi. 9) seems always to indi- 
 cate, — as eternal; oomp. Fritz. Bom. 
 Vol. II. p. 338, and contrast Eom. vi. 
 22. <Sv 6 0«6s 11 Koi\.] 
 
 whose God is their belly: comp. 
 Eom. xvi. 18, Tifi Kvpliji rj/iQv XpiffTifi 
 oil dovKeOovtriV d\X& rrj ^avTwv KoiKlif, 
 That this peculiarly characterizes 
 these sensuahsts as Jews (see Theod.), 
 and esp. Pharisees (Sohoettg. Hor. 
 Hebr. Vol. i. p. 801), does not seem 
 tenable ; see on ver. 18. Several 
 commentators, B.-Crus., Alf. (comp. 
 Vulg., Theoph.), regard t6 tAos and 
 6 9e6s as predicates ; the following 
 clause seems to suggest the contrary. 
 Kol ■^ 86Ja K.T.X.] and (whose) gloiy 
 is in their shame, scil. ' exists in the 
 sphere of it,' 'versatur in,' not 'be- 
 comes their shame,' Luther ; clause 
 dependent on the preceding uv. The 
 56fa is here, as Meyer rightly sug- 
 gests, subjective, what they deemed 
 so ; altrxfivq, on the contrary, is objec- 
 tive, what every moral consideration 
 marked to be so. The reference of 
 cUa-xi''V to circumcision ('(Quorum 
 gloria in pudendis,' Aug., Pseud.- 
 Ambr., Ansehn), probably suggested 
 by the confusion of those here men- 
 tioned with those noticed in ver. 2, 
 is aUuded to, but rightly rejected by 
 Ohrys. and Theoph. 01 rd 
 
 eirCy. <|>povoOvT6s]. wlio mind earthly 
 things: relapse into the nominative 
 to give the clause force and emphasis ; 
 see Bernhardy, Synt. in. 3, p. 68. 
 This can scarcely be caUed so much a 
 participial anacoluthon (see exx. in 
 Winer, Gr. § 63. 2), as an emphatic 
 return to the primary construction. 
 
 TToXXot 7Ap Tepnr....ol ret iiriyeia (ppo- 
 voSvTes. The word (ppoveiv, as Horsley 
 has remarked (on ver. 15), has con- 
 siderable amplitude of meaning : here, 
 as combined with ri iTljeia (contrast 
 ver. 20), it seems to denote the con- 
 centration of all thought, feeling, and 
 interest, in earth and earthUness, — 
 TO iyraOffa irAvra KeKTrj(T$ai, Chrys. , 
 who gives special examples ; comp. 
 Alf. in loc. 
 
 20. i^fiuv yip tA iroX. k.t.X.] For 
 OUK country, or commonwealth, is in 
 heaven; confirmation of the fore- 
 going by means of the contrasted 
 conduct of St Paul and his followers 
 (ver. 17), -qfjiuv being emphatic, and 
 TO TToX. iv oip. in antithesis to ret 
 iirly. (ppovelv. The word iro\lTev/ji.a, 
 an dV. Xeyi/i. in the N.T., has re- 
 ceived several different explanations. 
 Three deserve consideration ; (a) con- 
 versation ; ' conversatio, ' Vulg. , ' opus 
 nostrum', Syr., 'vita civiHs,' Copt., 
 and as far as we can infer, Theod., 
 (Ecum., — the meaning being 'nostra 
 quam hie sequimur vivendi ratio in 
 ooelis est,' Van Heng., De W. ; (;8) 
 citizenship, 'municipatus,' Jerome 
 (comp. TertuU. (fe Cor. Mil. % 13), 
 'jus civitatis nostra, 'Zanch., Luther 
 (earlier ed.), — the meaning being 'we 
 are freedmen of a heavenly city,' 
 Whiohoote, Serm. xviii. Vol. 11. p. 
 375, and more recently Manning, 
 Serm. x. Vol. iii. p. 183; (7) country, 
 state, to which we belong as iroXtrai ; 
 Sanderson, Serm. xv. Vol. i. p. 378 
 (ed. Jacobs.); see 2 Mace. xii. 7, rav 
 'loTTinTQv . . .iroklTeviia, Polyb. Hist. i. 
 13. 12, rd iroXiT€i5/AaTa [tw^ 'Pw/i. k. 
 Kapx.\ and comp. Eph. ii. rg, (tvv- 
 iroKirai, tuv aylav ; so Theoph. (t^v 
 TrarplSa), Beng., Mey. , Alf., and the 
 majority of modern commentators. 
 
88 
 
 npo2 *iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 TO iroXtTevfia ev ovpavoii inrdp-)(et, e^ ov kui crwTijpa 
 21 a7r6K^ej(oVe0a J^vpiov 'Itja-ovv Xpia-Tov, os p.eTaa")(^n- 
 
 Of these (o) has this advantage, that 
 being subjective it presents a more 
 exact contrast to to ivly. (ppovetv ; 
 the meaning however (iroXiT. = dvo- 
 (TTpo<j>-ii), rests only on the use of the 
 verb (oomp. Philo, de Gonfus. § 17, 
 Xwpo^ ^v (^ TToXiTeiJoprat), and is not 
 lexically demonstrable. Again in (^) 
 the equivalence of TroKlreviia to ttoXi- 
 Tela (Acts xxii. ^8) is equally doubt- 
 ful, for the passage adduced from 
 Aristot. Fol. iii. 4, does not prove 
 that the words are 'sometimes used 
 indifferently' (Alf.), but indifferently 
 only in regard to a particular sense 
 {■7r6\ews rdfis), — a statement fuUy eon- 
 firmed by other passages, Polyb. Hist. 
 IV. 23. 9, al., Joseph, contr. Ap. 11. 
 17, — a pertinent example; comp. Be- 
 za in loc. We retain then {7), which 
 appears to yield a pertinent meaning, 
 and was perhaps chosen rather than 
 jriXis (Heb. xi. 10), or irarpls (Heb. 
 xi. 14), as representing our heavenly 
 home, our'Ie/)ovffaX'?//x iirovp6,vioi (Heb. 
 xii. 22), on the side of its constitution 
 and polity ; ' our state, the spiritual 
 constitution to which we belong, is 
 in heaven ;' oomp. Gal. iv. 26, Bev. 
 xxi. -1, 10, Usteri, Lehrb. 11. i. 2, p. 
 182. iv oupavois iiirdpx.] 
 
 existeth in the heavens, ' constituta 
 est,' Clarom. ; see Beng. in loc. , who 
 rightly calls attention to the strong 
 word {iT&px^h and comp. Wordsw. 
 The various practical aspects of this 
 consolatory declaration are ably stated 
 by Whichoote, Serm. xviii., though 
 somewhat modified by the interpr. 
 assigned to TroXirei/^ua : our home is 
 in heaven while we are here below, 
 exemplariter, as we make it our copy ; 
 finaliter, as we carry it in our thoughts ; 
 analogice, in regard to the quality of 
 our actions ; inchoative, according to 
 
 the degree of our present station ; in- 
 tellectualiter, according to the consti- 
 tution of our minds ; Vol. 11. p. 375 
 sq. 4| o5] from whence, 
 
 'unde,' Vulg., 'exinde,' Syr.; not i^ 
 ov, scil. TToXiT. (Beng.), a construction 
 permissible, but not necessary, as ^| 
 ou is purely adverbial ; see Winer, 
 Or. § 21. 3. The meaning 'ex quo 
 tempore' is grammatically correct 
 (Kruger, Sprachl. § 43. 4. 7), but 
 obviously pointless and unsatisfac- 
 tory. Kol <r<i)T. oLitekS.] we 
 also tarry for as Saviour; the xal 
 marks the correspondence of the act 
 with the previous declaration, ffarTjpa, 
 the capacity in which the Lord was 
 tarried for. The pure ethical meaning 
 of dTre/cS. sc. 'oonstanter, patienter, 
 expectare' (Tittm. Synon. i. p. 106), 
 seems here, owing to the preceding 
 i^ ou, less distinct than in other pass- 
 ages where such local allusions are 
 not present, e.g. Eom. viii. 19, 23, 
 25, I Cor. i. 7, Gal. v. 5, i Pet. iii. 
 20, but is perhaps not wholly lost: 
 see notes on Gal. v. 5, Winer, de 
 Verb. Comp. iv. p. 14, Fritz. FrifzscA. 
 Opusc. p. 156; oomp. also notes on 
 airoKapaSoda, eh. i. 20. The simple 
 form iKSix^aSai. occurs 6 times ; oomp. 
 Soph. Phil. 123, Dion. -Hal. Antici. 
 VI. 67. 
 
 21. |ji,eTa<rxT||iaTC<r6i] shall trans- 
 form, simply; — not ' verklaren wird,' 
 Luth,, Neand., a meaning derived 
 only from the context. This peculiar 
 exhibition of our Lord's power at 
 His second coming is brought here 
 into prominence, to enhance the con- 
 demnation of sensuaUty (ver. 19) and 
 to confirm the indirect exhortation to 
 a pure though suffering life. It seems 
 wholly unnecessary to restrict this 
 merely to the living (Mey.) ; still less 
 
III. 2 1. 
 
 89 
 
 fxancrei to crw/xa rrjt Taireivwcreooi ^fiwv a-v/xnopcpov rm 
 crafxaTi Trjg So^ris avTov, kutoi t^v evipyeiav tov Svva- 
 
 21. (Ti/i/iopipov] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 greatly preponderating authority : Bee. prefixes els rb yeviaBai. airb. 
 
 can we say with Alf. that 'the words 
 assume, as St Paul always does when 
 speaking incidentally, the Tuxai sur- 
 viving to witness the coming of the 
 Lord,' when really every moment of 
 a true Christian's life involves such 
 an aTrexSoxiJ. On the nature of this 
 IJ,eTa.axriiMTuriJ.bs, which the following 
 words define to be strictly in accord- 
 ance with that of the Lord's body, — 
 a change from a natural to a spiritual 
 body (i Cor. xv. 44), comp. Burnet, 
 State of Bead, ch. vni.p. 231 (Trausl.), 
 Cudworth, Intell. Syst. v. 3, Vol. iii. 
 p. 310 sq. (Tegg), Delitzsch, Psychol. 
 III. I, p. 401 sq., and the comments 
 of Wordsw. in loc. to o-<5|ia 
 
 K.T.X.] the body of our humiliation; 
 not 'our vile body,' Auth., a solution 
 of the genitive case which, though in 
 some cases admissible (Winer, Gr. 
 § 34- 3- !>). liei^e obscures the full 
 meaning of the words and mars the 
 antithesis. The gen. seems here to be 
 not so much a gen. of quality as of 
 content, and to belong to the general 
 category of the gen. materice (Scheu- 
 erl. Synt. § 12. 2, p. 83); the raivel- 
 viaais was that which the adiia con- 
 tained and involved, that of which it 
 was the receptacle ; comp. Bernh. 
 Synt. ni. 45, p. 63. It seems unde- 
 sirable with Chrys. (comp. Mey., 
 Alf.) to refer Tavelnoiins wholly to the 
 sufferings of the body, 'humil. quse 
 fit per crucem.' Though the more 
 remote context (comp. ver. 18) shows 
 that these must clearly be included, 
 the more immediate antithesis rb 
 <ru>iM TTJs Bb^Tj'! seems also to show 
 that the ideas of weakness and fleshly 
 
 nature (Col. i. 22) must not be ex- 
 cluded ; comp. Fritz. Rom. vi. 6, Vol. 
 I. p. 382. The distinction between 
 Tairelvwais and TaTruvbrnis (Alf.) can- 
 not safely be pressed; see Luke i. 48, 
 Prov. xvi. 19, al. For exx. 
 
 of a similar connexion of the pronoun 
 with the dependent subst., see Green, 
 Gr. p. 265. <rvp|i,op<f>ov 
 
 K.T.X.] {so as to be) conformed to the 
 body of His glory ; scil. els rb yeviaBaL 
 airb o-i/j,/!,,, — a gloss which (see above) 
 Bee. retains as a portion of the text. 
 On this proleptic use of the adjective, 
 see Winer, Gr. § 66. 3, Jelf, Gr. § 
 439. i. The genitival rela- 
 
 tion TTjs db^s avToS is exactly similar 
 to that of TTJs Tair. rj/i. , ' the body 
 which is the receptacle of His glory, 
 in which His glory is manifested.' 
 In respect of this Sb^a we are mi/iiiop- 
 <j>oi., — oi Karb, Tr]v voabrniTa. dXX4 Kark 
 T^v iroi6T7)ra, Theod. Kara 
 
 Tijv 4vep7. K.T.X.] according to the 
 working of His ability, &c. ; comp. 
 Eph. i. 19. The object of this clause, 
 as Calvin rightly remarks, is to re- 
 move every possible doubt; 'infini- 
 tam Dei potentiam nobis ponit ob 
 oculos, quEB omnem dubitationem ab- 
 sorbeat. TSec potentice tantum memi- 
 nit, sed effieacia, qu£e est effectus vel 
 potentia in actum se exserens.' The 
 infin. with to5 is dependent on the 
 preceding subst. as a simple possessive 
 gen. (a construction very common in 
 the N.T.), and serves here to express, 
 perhaps a httle more forcibly than 
 Sim/jLts, the enduring nature and lati- 
 tude of that power ; see exx. in Wi- 
 ner, Gr. § 44. 4. Kal ^TTOT. 
 
90 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 I V . (rOai avTOv koi VTroTci^at avrw to -Travra. ilcrTe, 
 
 aSeXcboi fxov ajairriToi koi eTrnrodijroi, X^P" ''^"' 
 (TTecjjavoi fiov, outw? crT^Kere ev K.vplw, ayawtiTOi. 
 
 a6T(f] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., on very greatly preponderating 
 authority, as against Bee, iavrv. Weste. and Hort adopt the aspirated form 
 
 avrai] even to subdue to Himself; the 
 asoensive Kal serves to mark the limit- 
 less nature of that power: He shall 
 not only transform rb trw/ia k.t.\., 
 but shall also subdue rh ir&vTa, all 
 existing things, Death not excluded 
 (i Cor. XV. 26), to Himself. The 
 KupioTTjs of the Eternal Son will then 
 be complete, supreme, and universal ; 
 to be resigned unto the Father (i 
 Cor. XV. 28) in so far as it is econo- 
 mical, to last for ever and ever in so 
 far as it is 'consequent unto the 
 union, or due unto the obedience of 
 the passion,' Pearson, Greed, Art. 11. 
 Vol. I. p. 197 (ed. Burt.). On the 
 use of airlf, comp. notes ore Eph. 
 i. 4. 
 
 Chapter iv. 1. "floTs] So then, 
 ' Consequently,' ' itaque,' Vulg. ; ' as 
 we have such a heavenly home, and 
 tarry for such a salvation:' conclud- 
 ing exhortation naturally flowing 
 from the preceding paragraph, ch. 
 iii. 17 — 21, and continued in the 
 same tones of personal entreaty 
 (dSeX0oi); comp. i Cor. xv. 58, where 
 the particle similarly refers to what 
 has immediately preceded. De Wette 
 and Wiesinger refer the particle to 
 ch. iii. 2 sq., but thereby deprive the 
 exhortation' of much of its natural 
 and consecutive force. On the force 
 of ware with indie, and inf., see notes 
 and reff. on Gal. ii. 13, and with the 
 imper. , notes on oh. ii. 12. 
 d7ttirT]To1. Kol liriirrfB.] beloved and 
 longed after, — terms by no means 
 
 synonymous (Heinr.), but marking 
 both the love the Apostle entertained 
 for them (emphatically repeated at 
 the end of the paragraph) and the 
 desire he felt to see them ; ' oarissimi 
 et desideratissimi,' Vulg. The word 
 iiniroB, is an iitt. Xeyofji.. in the N.T., 
 but is oooasioually found elsewhere ; 
 Appian, Hisp. § 43, iiri.ivoB'ffovs ipKovs 
 (Rost u. Pabn, Lex.), Clem.-Eom. i 
 Cor. § 59, T^z' eiKTaiav koX ^irnrodip-Ttv 
 Tjiuv dpi]vqv. On the force of M, see 
 notes on 2 Tim. i. 4. Xop<^ 
 
 Kol (rTl(j)av6s |i.ou] my joy and crown, 
 soil, icjl ols x'*P""' ""■^ ivawov ?xw, Ca- 
 merar. See esp. i Thess. ii. 19, in 
 which the words iv tj airou [Kupiou] 
 irapomlq, limit the reference to the 
 Lord's coming ; here however such a 
 reference (Alf. , comp. Calv.) is by no 
 means necessary : the Philippians 
 were a subject of joy and a crown to 
 St Paul now, as well as hereafter; 
 comp. I Cor. ix. i. For exx. of this 
 metaphorical use of ariip., see Isaiah 
 xxviii. 5, Eoclus. i. 11, xxv. 6, Soph. 
 Ajax, 460. oCtcos] thus, — 'as 
 
 I have exhorted you, and as those are 
 acting whose 7roX/T6u/ia is in heaven.' 
 A reference to their present state (' sic 
 ut ccepistis, state,' Schmid., Beng.), 
 though suggested by Chrys., seems 
 out of place in this earnest exhorta- 
 tion: I Cor. ix. 24, cited by Beugel, 
 is not in point. <mJKeT« 
 
 Iv Kvp.] stand (fast) in the Lord; 
 not 'per Dominum,' Zanch., but 'in 
 Domino,' — ^in Him as in the true 
 element of their spiritual life ; see 
 
IV. I, 2, 3. 
 
 91 
 
 Euod/ai/ irapaKaXw Ka\ ^vvTV)(riv 2 
 TrapaKoXSi to avTO (ppoveiv ev K-vplw. 
 vol epoorS) koI ere, yv^(rie crvv^vye, crvvXafi^avov avraig, 3 
 
 Let Euodia and Syn- 
 tyclie be of one mind: 
 assist them, for they are 
 faithful women. 
 
 3. yv/icrie (riv^vye} So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 very greatly preponderating authority: Bee, ai^vye -yvijine. 
 
 I Thess. iii. 8, and notes on h Kvp. 
 on Eph. iv. 17, vi. i, al. 
 
 Concluding counsels ; expeessions 
 of gkatitude ; salutations, and 
 eeneeiotion. 
 
 2, 3. Exhortations to Eiiodia and 
 Syntyche. i. EvoSfav ira- 
 
 paK.] Special exhortation addressed 
 to two women, Euodia and Syntyche ; 
 comp. airais, ver. 3. The opinion 
 of Grot., that they are the names of 
 two men (Euodias and Syntyehes), is 
 untenable ; that of Sohwegler (Nach- 
 apost. Zeit. Vol. 11. p. 135), that 
 they represent two parties in the 
 Church, monstrous. Of the two per- 
 sons nothing whatever is known 
 they may have been deaconesses 
 (Eom. xvi. i), but were more pro 
 bably persons of station and influ 
 ence (Chrys., comp. Acts xyii. 12). 
 whose dissensions, perhaps in mat- 
 ters of religion {to airo tppov. iv Kup.) 
 might have shaken the faith (comp, 
 oStuis (TT^Kere immediately preceding) 
 of some of the Philippian converts. 
 Syntyche has a place in the Acta 
 Sanct. (July) Vol. v. p. 225. The 
 
 form Eviadlav {Bee.) appears to rest 
 on scarcely any authority. 
 irapaKaXw] The repetition of this 
 verb is somewhat noticeable : it 
 scarcely seems ' ad vehementiam af- 
 feotus significandam,' Erasm., Mey., 
 but rather to mark that they both 
 equally needed the exhortation, that 
 they were in fact both equally to 
 blame. The ^j- Kvp. is of course not 
 to be joined with irapax., 'obtestor 
 
 per Dom.,' Beza 2, but marks the 
 sphere in which the to aiiTo <j>pov. 
 (see notes on ch. ii. 2) was to be 
 displayed. 
 
 3. val IpuTu KoV cr«] Yea, I be- 
 seech even thee. The particle pai (not 
 Kal, Bee,, which has scarcely any cri- 
 tical support) has here its usual and 
 proper confirmatory force. It is used 
 either (a) in assent to a direct ques- 
 tion, Matth. ix. 28, John xi. 27, Eom. 
 iii. 29 ; (6) in assent to an assertion, 
 Matth. xy. 27 ; (c) in graver asser- 
 tions as confirmatory of what has 
 preceded, Matth. xi. 26, Luke xi. 51, 
 xii. 5 ; (d) in animated addresses as 
 corroborating the substance of the 
 petition, Philem. 20 (see Mey. in loc.) . 
 The simple 'vis obsecrandi,'=Heb. 
 NJ (Grot., Viger, al.), cannot be sub- 
 stantiated. For exx. of its use in 
 classical Greek, see Viger, Idiom, vii. 
 9, p. 424, Eost u. Palm, Lex. s. v. 
 Vol. II. p. 309. On the 
 
 distinction between iparav (' rogare,' 
 — equals) and ahelv (' petere,' — supe- 
 riors), see Trench, Synon. § 40. 
 7Vij<ri6 o^v^wve] true yoke-fellow, 
 ' dUectissime conjunx, ' Clarom. — a 
 transl. that may have early been mis- 
 understood. The explanations of 
 these words are somewhat numerous. 
 Setting aside doubtful or untenable 
 conjectures, — that the person referred 
 to is the wife of the Apostle, Clem. 
 Alex. Strom, in. 53 [grammatically 
 incorrect (opp. to Alf.), as the doubt- 
 ful gender of o-iicf. (Eur. Ale. 314, 
 342) would certainly cause yrrio'ios to 
 revert to three terminations], the 
 
92 
 
 npo2 $iAmnH2iOY2. 
 
 airtvei ev tm evayyeKias avv^OXtjerdv fjtoi, ftera ku) 
 KX^fievTog Ka\ twv Xoivwv crvvepywv /xov wv to. ovo- 
 
 husband or brother of one of the 
 women (Chrys., hesitatingly), Timo- 
 thy (Est.), Silas (Beng.), Epaphrodi- 
 tus, though now with the Apostle 
 (Grot., Hamm., Lightf.), Christ (Wie- 
 seler, Chronol. p. 458), — two opinions 
 deserve consideration ; (a) that a-ii/^- 
 yos is a proper name (Westc. and 
 Sort, marg.), and that 7j'^(tios is used 
 in allusion to the correspondence be- 
 tween the name of the man and his 
 relation to the Apostle, ' qui vere, et re 
 et nomine, crivlyyos es,' Gom., Meyer; 
 (6) that the chief of the Mckovoi. (ch. i. 
 i) at Philippi is here referred to. Of 
 these (a)harmonizeswiththemeaning 
 oiyvfiaiot (comp. notes on i Tim. i. i), 
 and is slightly favoured by the order 
 of the words (Luke i. 3), but is im- 
 probable on account of the appy. 
 unique occurrence of the name. As 
 the only valid objection to (6),— that 
 St Paul never elsewhere so designates 
 any of his cvvepyol (Mey.), may be di- 
 luted by the fact that the chief Bishop 
 of the place stood in a somewhat 
 different relation to such associates, 
 and as the order is probably due to 
 emphasis on yvqine (Winer, Gr. § 59. 
 2), the balance seems in favour of 
 this latter view; so Luth., De W., 
 and appy. the majority of modern 
 expositors. (rvvXa)i.p. avrais] 
 
 assist them, scil. Euodia and Syn- 
 tyohe, in endeavouring to bring them 
 to a state of bfibvoia ; not ' those wo- 
 men which,' Auth. and other Engl. 
 Vv. (comp. Vulg. 'illas quse'), — an 
 inexact translation of alVu/es (see 
 below) which obscures the reference 
 of aiToXs to the preceding substan- 
 tives. The middle avWa/i^. occurs 
 in a similar construction, Luke v. 7 
 {§oTt0etv D), Julian, Var. Hist. 11. 4, 
 
 and with a gen. rei. Soph. Philoct. 
 282. The active is more usual in 
 this sense in classical Greek; see 
 exx. in Eost u. Pahn, Lex. a. v. 
 oUrives] inasmuch as they, 'ut quse,' 
 Beza, ' for they, ' Eev.; comp. Soholef . 
 Hints, p. 106 : a very distinct use of 
 the expHcative force of Sa-ns: see 
 notes on Gal. iv. 24. ev 
 
 TO rfoyy.] The Gospel was the 
 sphere in which the labour was ex- 
 pended; comp. Keuss, Thiol. Ghret. 
 IV. 8, Vol. II. p. 81. Meyer very 
 appropriately calls attention to the 
 fact that women were appy. the first 
 in whom the Gospel took root at 
 Philippi; Acts xvi. 13, i\a\oO/iei' rais 
 (TweXBoi^a-aLs yvvat^iv. 'Women were 
 the first fruits of St Paul's labours 
 on the continent of Europe,' Baum. 
 on Acts, I. c. : see Bp Lightfoot, In- 
 trod. p. 55 sq. (isrd Kal 
 
 K\ij)i. K.T.X.] with both Clement and 
 the rest of my fellow-labourers, scil. 
 crvvfi6\ri(Tav : they were associated 
 with Clement and the Apostle's other 
 fellow-labourers at Philippi in some 
 efforts to advance the Gospel, perhaps, 
 as Beng. suggests, not unattended 
 with danger; Acts xvi. 19 sq. , comp. 
 Phil. i. 28. It is doubtful whether 
 the Clement here mentioned is iden- 
 tical with the third bishop of Bome, 
 or not. On the one hand we have 
 the very distinct testimony of Origeu, 
 in Joann. i. 29, Vol. iv. p. 153 (ed. 
 Ben.), Euseb. Hist. Eccl. m. 4, 15, 
 Jerome, de Vir. HI. xv. Vol. 11. p. 
 839 (ed. Vallars.), Epiphanius, Hcer. 
 XXVII. 6, Const. Apost. vii. 46 ; see 
 Ha mm ond, contr. Blond, p. 254, 
 Larduer, Credibility, 11. 38. 23. On 
 the other hand (a) the notice of 
 Clement in Iren. Har. iii. 3. 3, 6 ml 
 
IV. 4, 5- 
 
 93 
 
 Xat'jO 
 
 ere 
 
 Rejoice, show forbear- 
 ance; be not anxious, 
 but tell your wants to 
 God. Practise whatso- eow, yaipSTe, 
 ever is good. ' A. r 
 
 ioipaKdis Tois fiaKaplovs ' AvoffriXovs Kal 
 <ru/ij3e|8Xr;K(J)s airois, — where however 
 crv/i^e^X. (most unnecessarily queried 
 by Conyb.) should not be overloolsed, 
 — contains no allusion to this special 
 commendation ; and (6) the present 
 context seems certainly in favour of 
 the supposition that Clement, like 
 Euodia and Syntyche and (appy.) 
 the (rvvepyoi, was a member of the 
 Church of Philippi. Still, as it is 
 perfectly conceivable that a member 
 of the Church of the Eoman city of 
 Philippi might have become 7 or 8 
 years afterwards (Pearson, Minor 
 Works, Vol. II. p. 465) Bp of Eome, 
 — as (6) is merely negative, and as 
 the early testimony of Origen is posi- 
 tive and distinct, there seems, so far, 
 no ground for rejecting this ancient 
 ecolesiasticaltradition except, — unfor- 
 tunately for this identification, — the 
 difficulty of date. This has been so 
 clearly stated by Bp Lightfoot, in 
 his detached note in loc. {Comment. 
 p. 168 sq.), that we seem forced to re- 
 gard the matter as still doubtful. 
 The position of xal between the prep, 
 and the noun is somewhat unusual, 
 such a collocation being in the N.T. 
 appy. confined to ydp (John iv. 37), 
 ye (Luke xi. 8), S4 (Matth. xi. 12), 
 fjiiv (Bom. xi. 22), /iiv ydp (Acts 
 xxviii. 22), and re (Acts x. 39) ; oomp. 
 Matth. Gr. § S95. 3. lu the present 
 case however the vinculum of the 
 prep, extends over the whole clause, 
 Kal...Ka.l (see notes on i Tim. iv. 10) 
 being correlative. The exx. cited by 
 Alf. (comp. Mey.), in which only a 
 single Kal occurs, are thus not fully 
 in point. cSv tA ovo|i.] 
 
 This appears only to refer to tuv 
 XohtiSj', — 'Clement whom I have 
 mentioned by name, and the rest, 
 
 ev K.vptw "TravTOTe- iraXiv 4 
 TO eirieiKei vfiwv yvia- 5 
 
 who, though not named by me, never- 
 theless have their names in the book 
 of life;' comp. Luke x. 20, Bev. xiii. 
 8, xvii. 8, XX. 12, xxi. 27. To supply 
 an optative (drj, 'exstent'), and as- 
 sume that the Xoiirol were now dead 
 (Beng.), seems unnecessary and un- 
 satisfactory. The expression is not 
 improbably derived from the Old 
 Test. ; comp. Exod. xxxii. 32, Psalm 
 Ixix. 29, Isaiah iv. 3, Ezek. xiii. 9, 
 Dan. xii. i. 
 
 4 — 9. Exhortations to the Church 
 at large. 4. Xalpere iv 
 
 Kvp£ci> irdvTOT€] Rejoice in the Lord 
 alway. The recapitulatory exhorta- 
 tions which follow, and which are 
 continued up to ver. 10, commence 
 with the exhortation, which, as has 
 been already remarked (see notes on 
 ch. iii. i), pervades the whole Epistle. 
 On the repetition Chrys. well observes 
 TOVTO ffapffivovrds iffTi Kcd SeiKvivros 
 Sn 6 iv Qa} [Ki/piifi] wv del xaipef k&v 
 re SXipTirai, k&v onoOv irdirxv del x^t- 
 pei, 6 ToiovTos : see the good sermon of 
 Beveridge on this text, Serm. cv. Vol. 
 v. p. 62 sq. (A.-C. Libr.), and comp. 
 August. Serm. clxxi. Vol. v. p. 933 
 (ed. Migne). irdXiv tpa] 
 
 again I will say, not ' I say,' Auth., 
 as ipti seems regularly and correctly 
 used throughout the N.T. as a future. 
 The traces of a present ipia (Hippocr. 
 Prcecept. p. 64, Epidem. 11. p. 691) 
 are few and doubtful ; see Buttm. 
 Irreg. Verbs, p. 89 (Transl.). It is 
 scarcely necessary to do more than 
 notice the very improbable construc- 
 tion of Beng., by which ir&vTore is 
 joined with this clause. 
 
 5. t6 cTTiEiK^s vjiMv] ycmr for- 
 bearance, Conyb., ' your moderation 
 (Auth.), and readiness to waive all 
 rigour and severity:' oomp. Joseph, 
 
94 
 
 npo2 *iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 6 orQriTbi vaaiv avQpwiron. 6 Ki/oio? e^yyi)?. M^Sev 
 fxepi/xvare, ctXX' ev TracTi t^ Trpocrev^^ Ka\ t^ oe^arei 
 
 Arch. VI. 12. 7, imeiKets xal /i^rpioi, 
 and Loesn. 06s. p. 358, where several 
 examples are cited of iinelKeia in 
 connexion with Trpavrris, (juXavBpaTrla, 
 and rineplyrrti. See notes on i Tim. 
 iii. 3, and comp. Trench, Synon. § 43. 
 On the use of the abstract neuter (rb 
 iTneiKis = iinelK€i.a), comp. Jelf, Gr. § 
 436. 7, and notes on ch. iii. 8 ; add 
 Eom. ii. 4, I Cor. i. 25, and Glasse, 
 Fhilol. III. I, p. 537. 
 fvatrirfta irdo-iv dv6p.] 6c knovm to 
 all men; 'let the goodness of your 
 principles in this respect be known 
 experimentally by all who have deal- 
 ings with you, be they epicurean ene- 
 mies of the cross (Chrys., Theoph.), 
 or pagan persecutors' (Theod.). The 
 command is wholly unrestricted. 
 6 Kvpios ev'vis] The Lord {Jesus) is 
 near. The exact meaning and con- 
 nexion of the words is slightly doubt- 
 ful. The regular meaning of Kii/jios 
 in St Paul's Epp. (comp. Winer, 
 Gr. § 19. i) and the demonstrable 
 temporal meaning of ^771)5 (Matth. 
 xxiv. 32, Eom. xiii. 11, Eev. i. 3) 
 seem clearly to refer this not to a 
 general readiness to help (Manning, 
 Serm. xiii. Vol. in. p. 241), but 
 specially to the Lord's second ad- 
 vent, which the inspired Apostle 
 regards as nigh, yet not necessarily 
 as immediate, or to happen in his 
 own lifetime. That the early Church 
 expected a speedy return of Christ, — ■ 
 that they thought that He ' that was 
 to come would come and would not 
 tarry,' is not to be denied. The 
 general expectation however, found- 
 ed on our Master's own declarations, 
 and on the knowledge that the ?crxa- 
 Ttti TjiUpai (James v. 3, 7) and Kaipol 
 vffTepoL were already come, both is 
 and ought to be separated from any 
 
 specific and personal anticipations, 
 of which the N.T. presents no cer- 
 tain trace. With regard to the con- 
 nexion, it may be either minatory 
 (Schoettg. Hor. Hehr. Yol. i. p. 803) 
 or encouraging (De W.) with regard 
 to what has preceded, or, more pro- 
 bably, consolatory with reference to 
 what follows (Chrys.), or perhaps 
 unites both (Alf . ) : on the one hand, 
 the Lord's speedy coming as Judge 
 adds a stimulus to our exhibition of 
 forbearance toward others, comp. 
 James v. 9; on the other, it swal- 
 lows up all unprofitable anxieties. 
 
 6. Mt)8Jv |i.cpi)ii.v.] In nothing be 
 anxious, Eev.; 'entertain no dis- 
 quieting anxieties about anything 
 earthly,' Matth. vi. 25. The aocns. 
 is that of the object whereon the 
 /lepinrav is exercised (Jelf, Gr. § 551), 
 and stands in emphatic antithesis to 
 the following iv iravrl. Chrys. and 
 Theoph. refer /MiiSiv mainly to the 
 pressure of calamity or persecution 
 (/n^re TTJs iKeivuv i^pews, /xittc t^s 
 v/iQp dXlfeijis, Theoph.) : it seems 
 better to leave it wholly unrestricted. 
 The practical applications of the text 
 will be found in Beveridge, Serm. 
 Vol. V. p. 181 sq. (A.-C. Libr.). 
 iv iravrt] in everything, equally un- 
 restricted ; not ' always,' Syr., iEth., 
 but, ' in omnibus,' Copt., cv irairri 
 <p7](rl, tovt4(7tl Tp6.yfj.aTL, Chrys. The 
 translation of Vulg. ' in omni ora- 
 tione' (so Clarom.), which Mey. and 
 after him Alf. defend as meaning ' in 
 omni (re), oratione,' is certainly rather 
 open to suspicion. Tg irpoo-- 
 
 svxxi K.T.X.] by your prayer and 
 your supplication, by the specific 
 prayer offered up when the occasion 
 may require it ; comp. Middleton, 
 Art. V. I. 3, 4, p. 93 (ed. Eose). The 
 
IV. 6, 7- 
 
 95 
 
 IxeTa evyapiaTiais ra aiTrifxara vfuwv yvwpi^iadw irpoi 
 Tov Qeov. Koi fj elprjvti tou Qeov fj virepe'^^ouera iravTU y 
 
 repetition of tlie article gives an em- 
 phasis to the words ; each noiin is 
 enunciated independently : see Wi- 
 ner, Gr. § 19. 5. The difference be- 
 tween the more general ■irpo(r. {pre- 
 catio) and the more special S4r]a: {ro- 
 gatio) is stated in notes on Eph. vi. 
 18, and on i Tim. ii. i; see also 
 Trench, Synon. § 51. i. 
 |j.€Td cijxap.] vjith thanksgiving, an 
 adjunct to prayer that should never 
 be wanting, i Thess. v. 17, 18, i 
 Tim. ii. 3 ; see Beveridge, Serm. cvii. 
 Vol. V. p. 76 sq. (A.-C. Libr.), oomp. 
 notes on Col. iii. 15. Alford remarks 
 that the article is omitted ' because 
 the matters themselves may not be 
 recognized as grounds of eixapiffria. ' 
 It seems more simple to say that 
 eix<t-p. 1 ' thanksgiving for past bless- 
 ings ' (comp. Hofm. Schriftb. Vol. n. 
 2, p. 337), is in its nature more ge- 
 neral and comprehensive, irpoa. and 
 S^rjtr. almost necessarily more limited 
 and specific. Hence, though eixap. 
 occurs 12 times in St Paul's Epp., it 
 is only twice used with the article, i 
 Cor. xiv. 16, 2 Cor. iv. 15. 
 TO ainjiiaTa v|iuv] your requests; 
 properly, 'the things requested' (ver- 
 bal in -/ia ; comp. Buttm. Gr. § 119. 
 7), and thence (as the context re- 
 quires), with a slight modification of 
 meaning, ' the purport or subjects of 
 prayer:' 'petitum, materia Se'/icreois,' 
 Beng. ; comp. Luke xxiii. 24, i John 
 v. IS ; and see Trench, Synon. § 51. 
 There is often, esp. in later Greek, a 
 sort of libration of meaning between 
 nouns in -(tls and ~p.a ; comp. 2 Tim. 
 i. 13, al. Meyer quotes Plato, Rep. 
 VIII. p. 566 B, where the explanatory 
 clause ahetr rbv Stjiiov (see Stallb. ire 
 loc.) seems to show that there is even 
 there also some evidence of such an 
 
 interchange. irpos tov ©eov] 
 
 toward God, i.e. ' before and unto 
 God,' the prep, denoting the ethical 
 direction of the prayer; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 49. h. 
 
 7. KoX i\ etp. TOV ©eoJ] And {so) 
 the peace of God, the peace which 
 comes from Him and of which He is 
 the source and origin ; gen. auctoris, 
 or rather originis (Hartung, Cassis, p. 
 17, Scheuerl. Synt. § 17, p. 125), be- 
 longing to the general category of the 
 gen. of ablation (Donalds. Gr. § 448). 
 On the use of the consecutive Kal 
 (Heb. xii. 19, al.), see Winer, Gr. § 53. 
 3. The exact meaning of ■^ dpi]vq tov 
 GeoO (see below, ver. 9) is somewhat 
 doubtful. Three meanings have been 
 assigned to elpi)vi^; (a) 'concord;' 
 ' studium paeis, unitatis, ooncordias, 
 inter homines atque in eoolesia ' (Pol. 
 Syn.), appy. adopted by Theodoret 
 (d)s \i7ra\\'^\o}v 6vTtt)v twv diuiyfiuiv 
 dvayKalas airrois tt)i» dp. ^iriji^Jaro), 
 and strenuously advocated by Meyer 
 in loc; (|8) ' reconciliation' with God ; 
 i] KaraWayfi, 1) d,yiiirri rov 9eoO, Chrys. 
 i; comp. Eom. v. 1, and Green, Gr. 
 p. 262; (7) 'peace,' i.e. the deep 
 tranquillity of a soul resting whoUy 
 upon God, — the antithesis to the 
 solicitude and anxiety engendered by 
 the world and worldliness; comp. 
 John xiv. 27 ; Chrys. i, Beza, Beng., 
 al. Of these (a) seems clearly insuf- 
 ficient and not in harmony with the 
 context ; (/3) points in the right direc- 
 tion, but is unnecessarily restrictive ; 
 (y) is fully in accordance with the 
 context (comp. firidiv /j.epL/j,v. , ver. 6), 
 includes (|8), and gives a full and 
 spiritual meaning: so De W., Wie- 
 sing., Alf., and most modern com- 
 mentators ; comp. notes on Col. iii. 
 15. i| vircp. irdvTa voiiv] 
 
96 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioYS. 
 
 vovv (ppovp^aet ras Kapt 
 8 ev j^picTTw I]j(rov. 
 
 which over-passeth every understand- 
 ing ; 'which transoendeth every ef- 
 fort and attempt on the part of the 
 understanding to grasp and realize 
 it.' IfoOs here, as the context sug- 
 gests, points to the human irvev/j-a 
 'quatenus cogitat et intelligit' (Olsh. 
 Opusc. p. 156), — a meaning however 
 in many, perhaps the majority of 
 cases in the N.T., not sufficiently 
 comprehensive; see esp. notes on 1 
 Tim. vi. 5. It may be observed that 
 the term vous is appy. used by the 
 sacred writers, not to denote any 
 separate essence or quality different 
 from the TrveS/ia, but as a manifesta- 
 tion or outooming of the same in 
 ■moral and intellectual action, the 
 human wvevfxa, ' quatenus cogitat, 
 intelligit, et vult,' — the exact limits 
 of this definition being in all cases 
 best fixed by the immediate context : 
 see esp. Beck, Seelenl. 11. 18, p. 48 
 sq., Delitzsch, Bibl. Psych, rv. 5, p. 
 145, and comp. Schubert, Gesch. der 
 Seele, Vol. 11. p. 494 sq. On the 
 use of the transitive vTepix^ir with 
 an accus. of the object surpassed 
 (contrast oh. ii. 3), see Jelf, Gr. % 
 504. obs. 2. ■Cpo^P^"'^''] 
 
 shall gua/rd, keep; not optative, 
 ' custodiat,' Vulg., Clarom., and in 
 effect Chrys. SM<pv\d^ei.e Kal a<r<pa\l- 
 ffaiTo, but simply future, as in Goth. 
 ' fastaip ' [servabit, — not ' servat, ' De 
 Gab. ; Goth. pres. commonly supplies 
 place of Greek fut.], Copt., al. ; the 
 event will follow if the exhortation 
 liridh K.T.X. is attended to. We can 
 scarcely say with Conyb. that (ppovp. 
 is literally 'shall garrison' (2 Cor. xi. 
 32, Thucyd. in. 17, Plato, Bep. iv. p. 
 420 a), as the idea of ' watching over,' 
 'guarding,' accords with the deriva- 
 tion [<ppo = Tpo, and Homeric op-; 
 
 ?/a? vfjiSiv Kai TO. vovfJ-ara v^wv 
 To XoiTTOv, aSe\(pol, oaa 
 
 Pott, Et. Forsch. Vol. i. p. 122], and 
 appears in connexion both with per- 
 sons and things ; Soph. (Ed. Rex, 
 1479, Eurip. Cycl. 690, Here. Fur. 
 399 ; Hesych. ippovper <f>v\dTTa. 
 The nature of the (ppoipriins is more 
 nearly defined by iv Xp. 'Ii/o-. which 
 appears to denote, not so much, with 
 a semi-local reference {aa-re 11^ iKire- 
 diiv airov ttjs it/o-tcms, Chrys.), the 
 sphere in which they were to be kept, 
 as that in which the action was to 
 take place ; see Meyer in loc. 
 rds KapSCas k.t.X.] your hearts and 
 your thoughts; 'corda vestra et cogi- 
 tationes vestras,' Copt., Mth. The 
 distinction between these two words 
 should not be obscured. Kapdla, 
 properly the imaginary seat of the 
 i/vxfi, the 'Lebens-Mitte' (see Beck, 
 Seelenl. iii. 20, p. 63), is used with 
 considerable latitude of meaning to 
 denote the centre of feeling, willing, 
 thinMng, and even of moral life (see 
 esp. Delitzsch, Bibl. Psych, iv. 11, p. 
 203 sq.), and, to speak roughly, bears 
 much the same relation to the \l/vxr] 
 that mOs bears to TveO/xa (see above), 
 being in fact the fuxv in its practical 
 aspects and relations ; see Olshaus. 
 Opusc. p. 155 sq., and notes on i 
 Tim. i. 5. The poT^fiara, on the other 
 hand, are properly (as here) the pro- 
 ducts of spiritual activity, of thinking, 
 willing, (f-c. (2 Cor. ii. 11), and occa- 
 sionally and derivatively the imple- 
 ments or instruments of the same, 2 
 Cor. iii. 14, iv. 4 : see Beck, Seelenl. 
 II. 19, p. 59, Eoos, Psychol, iv. 26. 
 The meaning is thus in effect as 
 stated by Alf., 'your hearts them- 
 selves and their fruits;' as the con- 
 nexion is briefiy given by Beng., ' cor 
 sedes oogitationum. ' On biblical psy- 
 chology generally, see the remarks in 
 
IV. 8. 
 
 97 
 
 ecTTiv aXijdri, ocra (Te/xva, oara oiKata, otra ayva, oera 
 Trpocrtpikfj, ocra eufptifia, e'l tjj apsTt] koi e'l th eiraivoi, 
 
 pref. to Past. Epist. p. yii. viii., and 
 notes on i Tim. iii. i6. 
 
 8. To \oiirov] Finally; conclud- 
 ing recapitulation, in an emphatic 
 and comprehensive summary, of the 
 chief suhjects for preparatory medi- 
 tation and (ver. 9) consequent prac- 
 tice. The formula is here more de- 
 finitely conclusive (TrciyTa rj/uv eiprfTai, 
 Chrys.) than in oh. iii. i .(see notes), 
 where the nature of the exhortations 
 led to a not unnatural digression. It 
 thus echoes, yet, owing to the differ- 
 ence of the exhortations, does not 
 resume (Matth.) the preceding t6 
 \onr6v. The sixfold repetition of Sa-a 
 adds much to the vigour and empha- 
 sis of the exhortation. 
 On the whole verse see thirteen able 
 sermons by Whichcote, Works, Vol. 
 III. p. 368 sq. oXi]fltj] 
 
 true: i.e., as the context requires, 
 in their nature and practical applica- 
 tions, 'genere morum,' Whichcote: 
 so Theoph. (comp. Chrys.) oKrjdT)- 
 TOvriuTLv hApera' 1; 701^ KaKla \l/evdos; 
 comp. Eph. iv. 21. To restrict the 
 reference to words (Beng., Bisp.), or 
 to doctrine (Hamm.), seems undesir- 
 able; the epithets throughout are 
 general and inclusive. 
 o-e)jiva] seemly, venerable, 'deserv- 
 ing of, and receiving respect,' Syr., 
 'verecuuda:' comp. Hor. Epist. 1. i. 
 II, 'quid verum atque deoens euro 
 et rogo.' The Vulg. 'pudica' is too 
 special, the Auth. 'honest' scarcely 
 exact. As the derivation (aiponai.) 
 suggests, the adj. primarily marks 
 whatever calls for ' respect ' or ' vene- 
 ration,' and thence, with a somewhat 
 special application, whatever is so 
 seemly and grave (iaa h (rxviJ'anv 
 KoX \byoLS, Kal ^aSlfffuiai koI irp&^eaai, 
 OEoum.) as always to secure it; see 
 
 Whiohoote, p. 399. T5 aeiaibv, ac- 
 cording to this able writer, consists 
 in ' grave behaviour ' and ' composure 
 of spirit,' and is briefly characterized 
 by Calv. as ' virtus in hoc sita est ut 
 digne vooatione nostrS ambulemus 
 prooul omni profanfi, immunditie;' 
 the concluding clause however is un- 
 necessarily restrictive: hence such 
 associations as <refivbv Kal ayiov, Pla- 
 to, Soph. p. 249 A, jiirpia Kal (refivd, 
 Clem.-Eom. i Cor. § i ; comp. notes 
 ore I Tim. ii. 2. BCKOia] 
 
 just; in its widest application, ' qu£B 
 talia sunt qualia esse oportet,' Tittm. 
 Synon. p. 19 : not exactly ' just and 
 equal,' Whichcote, but rather 'just 
 and right,' whether from the propor- 
 tions of things or constitutions of 
 the law (Whichcote, Vol. rv. p. 10), 
 without any reference to others (Col. 
 iv. i): comp. Acts i. 22, Eom. v. 7, 
 I Tim. i. 9. On the distinction be- 
 tween Skaios and the more limited 
 aya06s, see Tittm. Synon. p. 19 sq., 
 and on that between SIk. and Saios 
 notes ore Tit. i. 8. avvo] 
 
 pure; 2 Cor. vii. 11, i Tim. v. 
 I'z: not 'chaste,' Grot., Est., al., in 
 the more special and limited mean- 
 ing of the word. On the use of 
 ayv6s, and its distinction from 1x710$ 
 (with which the Vulg. appears here 
 to have interchanged it), see notes 
 ore I Tim. v. 22, Trench, Synon. § 88, 
 and Tittmann, Synon. i. p. 21 sq. 
 Chrys. draws a correct line between 
 this and the preceding aenvhi; rh 
 aejxvhv TTJs IJw i<TTl dwd/ieus, ri Si 
 &,ypt)v TTJs \pvxrii. irpoo-cJiiXrj] 
 
 lovely (air. \pyl>ii,.), not merely in 
 reference to our fellow-men, 'per 
 qu8S sitis amabiles hominibus,' Est. 
 (comp. Ecolus. iv. 7), nor even with 
 exclusive reference to God (oTrep iarl 
 
 H 
 
98 
 
 npo2 $iAmnH2roY2. 
 
 9 Tavra Xoyl^ea-de' a Kat i/xdOeTe /cat TrapeXd^ere kui 
 
 T$ Gey vpo<T<j>., Theod.), but gener- 
 ally, whatever both in respect of it- 
 self and the disposition of the doer 
 (Whiohoote) conciliates love, is gene- 
 rous and noble. See the good exem- 
 plifications of Tb ■irpo<T<j>i\is in Whioh- 
 cote, Serm. lxxv. Vol. iv. p. 88 sq. 
 eti(|)T)|io] of good report; not merely 
 ' qua bonam famam pariunt' (Grot., 
 Calv.), but, in accordance with the 
 more literal meaning of the word, 
 'well-sounding' (Luth.), 'of auspi- 
 cious nature when spoken of,' Syr., 
 'laudabilia,' — those 'great and bright 
 truths ' in relation to God, ourselves, 
 and our fellow-men, which sound 
 well of themselves, and command 
 belief and entertainment. Which- 
 oote, p. io8 sq. cH tis opsrij] 
 
 lohatever virtue there be, Scholef. 
 Hints, p. 107, or more accurately 
 ' there is,' Ml. , it being assumed that 
 there is such ; see Latham, Engl. 
 Lang. § 614 (ed. 3), and comp. 
 Wordsw. in loc: recapitulation of 
 the foregoing, with ref. perhaps to 
 all the epithets except the last, which 
 seems to be generalized by the fol- 
 lowing liratvos. 'Aperij [from a root 
 AP- connected with Sansor. vri, ' pro- 
 tegere,' Pott, Etym. Forsch. Vol. i. p. 
 221, Donalds. Crat. § 285] is only 
 found elsewhere in the N.T. iu 2 
 Pet. i. 5, in ref. to man (comp. Wis- 
 dom iv. i), and i Pet. ii. 9, 2 Pet. i. 
 3, in ref. to God (comp. Hab. iii. 3, 
 Isaiah xlii. 8, al.) : it designates, as 
 Mey. observes, ' moral excellence in 
 feeling and action' (^ ruv Ka\&p vo/ju- 
 j^o/iivmi i/iireipla, Hesych.), and is 
 opp. to KaKla, Plato, Mep. iv. p. 444 
 D, 445 : see Whichcote, Vol. iv. 
 p. 120. iiraivoij praise ; not 'pro 
 eo quod est laudabile,' Calv., or 'ea 
 quae laudem apud homines merean- 
 tur,' Est., — but 'praise' in its simple 
 
 sense, which, as Whichcote observes, 
 ' regularly follows upon virtue, and 
 is a note of it and a piece of the re- 
 ward thereof,' p. 132. The addition 
 of eiri.<rTTiiii]s after ^iraiv. in DTG ; 
 Clarom., Vulg. (not Am.'), al., is 
 a somewhat curious, but wholly 
 untenable addition. XoyC- 
 
 Jc<r6c] think on, take account of, not 
 however merely 'bear them in your 
 thoughts,' 'meditate' (Alf.), but 'use 
 your faculties upon them,' ' horum 
 rationem habete,' Beng.; comp. i Cor. 
 xiii. 5, and see Whiohoote, p. 138. 
 
 9. a KaC] which also: exemplifi- 
 cation of the foregoing in the Apostle 
 himself; toSto SiSocr/caMas dpltTTiis, ri 
 iv Trdtrats rats irapaivifreaiv eavrov 
 irapixei.v rimov, Chrys. The first Kal 
 is ascensive (' facit transitionem a 
 generalibus [iio-a] ad Paulina,' Beng.) 
 — not ' et,' Vulg. (Syr., Copt, omit) 
 but ' etiam,' Luth., the other three 
 simply copulative, the sentence fall- 
 ing into two portions (ip,6S. fcai irapeX 
 riKoiff. Kal dS.) connected by Ka(, each 
 of which again is similarly inter- 
 connected : ' duo priora verba ad doc 
 trinam pertinent, duo reUqua ad ex- 
 emplum,' Estius ; comp. Theod., xal 
 Sia T&v Xbyav iifms idlda^a, Kal Sii 
 TWP irpayfidTUP inrideL^a. So also 
 Van Heng., Mey. , Wiesinger, al. 
 7rapE\dpeTE] received; not however in 
 a purely passive (Gal. i. 12, i Thess. 
 ii. 13), but, as the climactic order 
 of the words (comp. ■fiKoia. Kal tB.) 
 seems to suggest, with a somewhat 
 active reference (John i. 11, i Cor. 
 XV. i) ; comp. Dion.-Hal. i. p. 44, \iyw 
 a iraph tuv iyxoipluiv jrapiXa^ov (quae 
 ab incolis percepi), and the somewhat 
 similar ayaXapeiv iv Kapdlq,, Job xxii. 
 22. The distinction of Grot., ' ip,i- 
 6eTe significat primam institutionem : 
 napeXd^ere exactiorem doctrinam' 
 
IV. 9, lo. 
 
 99 
 
 ijKovcraTe kui eioere ev e/xoi, ravra irpatrvere' Kat o 
 0609 T^? eiprivtii ecrrai fueff v/xwv. 
 
 I rejoiced in your re- 'EvaOJ;!' 06 61' ^volu) fXeyoKwi OTt lO 
 
 newed aid: yet I am , , t \ »' > 
 
 Ye°hlvefSd7*"pp^°*<i ^ "^ '^"'^^ nvedaXere to virep e/tiov (fypoveiv 
 
 my need, and God sliaU supply yours. 
 
 my 
 
 {iyypd^us, Theoph., — but qu. read- 
 ing), seems lexically doubtful: for 
 exx. of irapaK. see Eypke, Obs. Vol. 
 
 II. p. 222. TJKOVO-aTC doBS 
 
 not refer to any form of teaching or 
 preaching (' refertur ad familiares 
 sermones,' Grot., Hamm.), but, as 
 the division of members noticed above 
 seems to require, to the example 
 which the Apostle had set them when 
 he was with them ; — this they heard 
 from others, and further saw for 
 themselves. 'Bj/ i/jiol thus belongs 
 more especially to the two latter 
 verbs, the prep. 4v denoting the 
 sphere, and as it were suhstratum of 
 the action ; see notes on Gal. i. 24, 
 and Winer, Gr. § 48. a. 
 ravra •apa<Tirert\ Parallel to the pre- 
 ceding Tmra Xoyl^'eaBe, without how- 
 ever suggesting any contrast between 
 ' acting ' and ' thinking ;' Xoylj^. (see 
 notes) having » distinctly practical 
 reference ; see Meyer in loc. 
 KoX 6 Qeos K.T.X.] and (so) the God 
 of peace; comp. ver. 7, where Kal 
 has a similarly consecutive force, and 
 see notes on ver. 12. The expression 
 6 Oeis TTJs elp. admits of different ex- 
 planations according to the meaning 
 assigned to elfy^vi], see Eeuss, Theol. 
 Ghret. iv. 18, Vol. 11. p. 201. Here 
 there seems no reason to depart from 
 the meaning assigned in ver. 7 ; the 
 gen. being a form of the gen. of con- 
 tent, or (which is nearly allied to it) 
 of the characterizing attribute; see 
 Bcheuerl. Synt. § 16. 3, p. 115, and 
 comp. Andrewes, Serm. xviii. Vol. n. 
 p. 84 (A.-C. Libr.). 
 
 10 — 20. Rejoicing, and gratitude 
 for the gift sent by the Church, 
 
 JO. 'ExopT|V 8^] Now I rejoiced: 
 transition to more special matters, 
 the S^ being fiera^aTiKdv (Hartung, 
 Partih. Vol. i. p. 165), and marking 
 the change to a new subject ; eVra 
 Kal irepl tQv Tre/iipBhTiiiv Trap' airav 
 yp<i<pec xpvf^roiv, Theod. The addi- 
 tion 4v Kvpltp serves to define the na- 
 ture of the joy ; it was neither self- 
 ish nor earthly, it was in his Lord 
 and without Him was not ; see notes 
 on ch. iii. i. tjBt) itot^] 
 
 now at length, 'tandem aliquando,' 
 Vulg., Eom. i. 10; more fuUy in 
 Aristoph. Ran. 931, tjStj tot' iv pAiKpi^ 
 Xpbvip vvKTos, — rjdr] acquiring that 
 meaning from its reference to some- 
 thing long looked for ; see Hartung, 
 Partilc. ■qS-q, 2. 4, Vol. i. p. 238, Kiih- 
 ner, Gr. § 499. i, and, on the essen- 
 tial meaning of this particle, notes 
 ore I Cor. vi. 7. De Wette adopts the 
 translation 'jetzt einmal,' 'jam ali- 
 quando' (eomp. Plato, Symp. p. 216 
 e), on the ground that the more usual 
 transl. involves a tacit reproach. 
 This is not the case. The Apostle, 
 as the Philippians well knew, in all 
 cases preferred maintaining himself : 
 now however his captivity seemed to 
 call for their aid; comp. Neand. Phi- 
 lipp. p. 25. aveSdXcTE k.t.X.] 
 
 ye put forth new shoots, flourished 
 again, in respect of your solicitude 
 for me; 'refloruistis pro me sentire,' 
 Vulg., and less literally, Syr., 'coe- 
 pistis ouram habere mei.' There is 
 some little difficulty both in the con- 
 struction and the exegesis. The 
 verb dvaffdWctv may be either transi- 
 tive (Ezek. xvii. 24, Eeclus. i. 18), or 
 intransitive (Psalm xxviii. 7, Wia- 
 
 H3 
 
100 
 
 npo2 $iAinnHSiOYS. 
 
 II €(p (p Kai ecppoveire, tjKaipetcrde oe. ov-^ ort Kau va-re- 
 ptjcriv Xeyw eyw yap efiaOov ev otj etfA,t avrapKtji eivai. 
 
 dom iv. 4). In the former ease the 
 construction is plain (to iirkp k.t.\. 
 being a simple accus. after the verb), 
 but the exegesis unsatisfactory, as the 
 ava$6.\\eiv would appear dependent 
 on the will of the Philipp., which the 
 context certainly seems to contradict. 
 In the latter, adopted by Vulg., Copt., 
 Syr., and the" Greek commentators, 
 the exegesis is less difficult, but the 
 construction somewhat ambiguous. 
 Either (a) to vrip i/ioS is the accus. 
 object, after (jypopety, the verb itself 
 being somewhat laxly appended to 
 dveddX., Beng., Mey., Alf.; or (6) to 
 {iT^P ip,ov (ppoveiv is the accus. of the 
 quantitative object (notes on rb. ir&v- 
 ra, on Eph. iv. 15) dependent on 
 aveddXere, Winer, Gr. § 44. i, Wie- 
 sing., Bisp., and appy. Chrys. and 
 Theoph. (who interpolates els). Of 
 these (a) is artificial and contrary to 
 the current and sec[uence of the 
 Greek: (6) is simple and intelligible, 
 but certainly involves the difficulty 
 that the following clause (if we 
 retain the proper and obvious 
 reference of i<fi' f) will in fact be 
 ^^poveiTe iirl Tt^ uir^p ifiou (ppovetv. As 
 however this logical difficulty may be 
 dUuted by observing that <j>paveZv is 
 not used exactly in the same sense in 
 the two clauses, — t6 iirip ^/ioO 0p. 
 in fact coalescing to form a new idea, 
 — and as (a) is not only artificial, 
 but involves an undue emphasis on 
 t6 iirkp iiiov, we somewhat confi- 
 dently adopt (&): so Wiesing. and 
 Bisping. Lastly, dveBd'KeTe does not 
 involve any censure (Sri wporepov 
 Spt€S dvBiipol ii),apdv6ri(7av, Ohrys.): 
 the time during which rixaipovvTo was 
 the period of unavoidable torpor ; 
 when the suitable time and oppor- 
 tunity came iv(8a\ov, comp. An- 
 
 drewes, Serm. xviii. Vol. ui. p. 99 
 (A.-O. Libr.). The rare 
 
 aor. dv^0. is noticed by Winer, Gr. 
 § ij, Buttm. Irreg. Verbs, a. v. 6d\- 
 Xw. 4<j>' w] for which, 
 
 ' with a view to which,' ' in contem- 
 plation of which;' the iwl marking 
 the object contemplated: not 'sicut,' 
 Vulg., Syr., ' in quo,' Copt., inter- 
 pretations which obscure the proper 
 force of the prepositions. On the 
 meanings of ^0' if, see notes on ch. 
 iii. 12. Kttl 6(|)poveiTe] 
 
 ye were also anxious, careful; imperf ., 
 marking the continuance of the ac- 
 tion, to which the /cai adds a further 
 emphasis : ' your care for mewas of no 
 sudden growth, it did not show itself 
 just when the need came, — far from 
 it, you were also anxious long before 
 you dviBaXere. The omission of ij,it> 
 after l^pov. gives, as Meyer observes, 
 a greater vigour to the antithesis; see 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 356, comp. 
 notes on Gal. ii. 15. iJKaipeto-SE] 
 
 ye were lacking opportunity ; i.e. 'it 
 was not from any barrenness on your 
 part,' Wordsw. 'Axaip. {a,ndT.\ey6p..) 
 is a word of later Greek, the opposite 
 of which is evKaipew [ev o'xoX^s ?X"'')' 
 a form equally condemned by the At- 
 ticists ; Lobeck, Phryn. p. 125, Thom. 
 M. p. 830. Chrysostom refers the 
 term specially to the temporal means 
 of the Phil., ovK etxere iv x^P"''"! "^^^ 
 iv atpSovlq, ■^re, and urges the popular 
 use of aKaip. in that sense. It may 
 have been so ; it seems however safer 
 to preserve the ordinary temporal 
 reference; see above. 
 
 II. o^x oTi] Not that, I do not 
 mean that: see notes on ch. iii. 12, 
 Winer, Gr. § 64. 6. The Apostle 
 does not wish his joy at this 
 proof of their sympathy to be mis. 
 
IV. II, 12. 
 
 101 
 
 oioa Koi TaTreivovcrdat, oiSa Kai irepicrcreveiv ev iravri la 
 
 12. otSa /cai] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Eev., Westc. and Hort, on vastly 
 preponderating authority : Eec, oTSa S4. 
 
 understood as mere satisfaction at 
 being relieved from present want or 
 pressure. kuB' 
 
 virr«pi]o-iv] in consequence of want, 
 ' propter penuriam,' Vulg., sim. Syr., 
 ' propterea quod defuerit mihi;' see 
 notes on oh. ii. 3, and on Tit. iii. 5, 
 where this meaning of Kara, is briefly 
 investigated. Van Heng., to preserve 
 the more usual meaning of the prep., 
 gives virTipfri<nv a concrete reference, 
 ' ut more reeeptum est penurise ; ' 
 this is artificial and unnecessary. 
 The meaning is simply oi Sib, ttiv 
 i/ifiv T(jKlav, Theod.; ' notio secundum 
 facile transit in notionem propter,' 
 Eiihnei, Xen. Mem. 1. 3. 12. 
 hja fop ?(i,a9ov] for I for my part 
 have Uamed, not 'learned,' Alf., 
 which represents the action as too 
 remote to suit the English idiom ; 
 see notes on i Cor. xv. 18. In the 
 Greek nothing more is said than that 
 the irnvBiviiv took place after a given 
 time (see Donalds. Gr. § 432) ; whe- 
 ther it does or does not last to the 
 present time is left unnoticed; see 
 esp. Fritz, de Aor. Vi, p. 16 sq. The 
 iyii is emphatic, ' quidquid alii sen- 
 tiuut aut cupiunt,' and (iiaBov, as the 
 tenor of the verse seems to indicate, 
 refers to a teaching derived, not ' di- 
 vinitus,' Beng., but from the practi- 
 cal experiences of life ; Si&t&v evavrlwv 
 iSeiav, velpav ^Xa^oc iKavifv, Theod. 
 «v ols elftC] in what state I am; not, 
 on the one hand, with reference 
 merely to his present state, which is 
 too limited, — nor on the other hand, 
 with ref. to any possible state, ' in 
 quoounque statu sim,' Raphel (comp. 
 Auth.), which would require av, — but 
 with ref. to the state in which he is 
 at the moment under consideration; 
 
 almost ' in every state that I come 
 into.' The expression iv ofs (no el- 
 lipse of xpiijiacrai. Wolf, al.) is copi- 
 ously illustrated by Wetst. in loc.; 
 see also Kypke, 06s. Vol. 11. p. 319. 
 oiiTapKr]s] content, ' ut suffioiat mihi 
 id quod est mihi,' Syr. (comp. Heb. 
 xiii. 5, apKo^fievoi toTs irapovcnv), liter- 
 ally 'self-supporting,' 'independent,' 
 the opposite being, as Meyer ob- 
 serves, TrpoaSeijs aWav, Plato, Tim. 
 p. 33 n; comp. Aiist. Eth. Nic. i. 5, 
 t6 T^Xetop dya&QV aura/j/ces elpai doKei: 
 see notes on i Tim. vi. 6, and Barrow, 
 Serm. xxxvi. Vol. 11. p. 404. The 
 practical inferences deducible from 
 this verse are well stated by Sander- 
 son, Serm. v. (ad Aul.) ; comp. Mar- 
 tensen, Ghr. Eth. Part 11. § 150, p. 
 351 sq. (Transl.). 
 
 12. oJSa Kttl Toireiv.] I know also 
 (how) to be abased: second member 
 of the climax (iii.a.9ov k.t.X., oTSa 
 K.T.X., p.efj.v7jficLi K.T.X.) explaining 
 more in detail the preceding ^c ols 
 elfil avrdpK. eXvai : the Apostle, as 
 Andrewes well says, ' had stayed af- 
 fections.' The first Kal thus serves 
 to annex the specio! instance (ravuv.) 
 to the more general statement (as 
 Kai IJ.71 imB., Eph. V. 18, Winer, Gr. 
 § 53. 3), the second appends to ra-wsiv. 
 its opposite, and is thus copulative 
 and indirectly contrasting. The use 
 of Kai in the N.T., as the Aramaic O 
 would have led us a priori to sup- 
 pose, is somewhat varied. Though 
 all are really included in the two 
 broad distinctions et and etiam (see 
 esp. Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 635), 
 we may perhaps conveniently enu- 
 merate the following subdivisions. 
 Under the first (et) Koi appears 
 as, (a) simply copulative; (/3) ad- 
 
102 
 
 nP02 *iAinnH2ioY2. 
 
 KOI ev vaa-iv ixefivriixai, Koi yopraXea-Qai Kai ireivav, Kai 
 13 irepKrarevetv koi varepeiirOai. 
 
 junctive, i. e. either when the special 
 is annexed to the general as here, 
 Mark i. 5, Eph. vi. 19, al., or con- 
 versely the general to the special, 
 Matth. xxvi. 59; (7) consecutive, 
 nearly ' and so,' ver. 9, Matth. xxiii. 
 ^2, I Thess. iv. i, oomp. James ii. 
 23, al. Under the second {etiam) 
 Kai appears as, (S) ascensive, 'even,' 
 a very common and varied usage 
 (comp. notes on Eph. i. 11), or 
 conversely, descemive. Gal. iii. 4, 
 Eph. V. 12, where see notes; (e) 
 explanatory, approaching nearly to 
 'namely,' 'that is to say,' Johni. 16, 
 Gal. ii. 20, vi. 16, where see notes; 
 (f) comparative, especially in double- 
 membered clauses, see notes on Eph. 
 V. 23 ; to all which we may perhaps 
 add a not uncommon use of xal, 
 which may be termed (ri) its contrast- 
 ing force, as here (2'' Kai), and more 
 strongly, Mark xii. 12, i Thess. ii. 
 18. In such a ease the particle is 
 not adversative, as has often been 
 asserted, but copulative and con- 
 trasting ; the opposition arising 
 merely from the juxtaposition of 
 clauses involving contrasted or dis- 
 similar sentiments. These seven 
 heads appy. include all the more 
 common uses of Kai in the N.T. ; for 
 further exx. see the well arranged list 
 in Bruder, Concord, s.v. Kai, and the 
 much improved notice in the sixth 
 ed. of Winer, Gr. § 53. 3. 
 ■ir£pi<r(r€veiv] to abownd. The oppo- 
 sition between Taireiv. and irepura'. is 
 not exactly perfect (contrast Matth. 
 xxiii. 12, 2 Cor. xi. 7, and oh. ii. 8, 
 9), but still need not involve a depar- 
 ture from the lexical meaning of 
 either word. The former (rairetv.) is 
 more general ('to be cast down,' — 
 not expressly \i,/jt,<!>TTeiv, (Eoum., and 
 
 iravTa i<Tj(yw ev Tie evSu- 
 
 sim. even De W.), but obviously in- 
 cludes the idea of the pressure and 
 dejection arising from want (comp. 
 ^th.); the latter is more specific. 
 The paraphrase of Pelagius (cited by 
 Mey.) is thus perfectly satisfactory, 
 'ut neo abundantia extoUar, nee 
 frangar inopiS,.' kv iravrl 
 
 Kai h irdo-iv] in everything and in 
 all things, ' in omni et in omnibus,' 
 Clarom., Goth. , not ' nbique et in 
 omnibus,' Vulg., Auth., — an as- 
 sumed eUipsis of T-iiry (Chrys. sup- 
 plies xpii'V) which cannot be sub- 
 stantiated any more than that of 
 dvOpiiirois (Beng.) after jraa-iv ; comp. 
 2 Cor. ix. 8. The expression seems 
 designed to be perfectly general and 
 inclusive, iv iravH irpAyii. Koi iv 
 iraai tois irape/iTlTToviri, Phot. ap. 
 CEcum. |ji£)i.<iT)|i,ai.] I have 
 
 been initiated, fully taught, 'insti- 
 tutus sum,' Vulg., Clarom., Copt.; 
 ' exercitatus sum,' Syr., ' assuetus 
 sum,' iEth. ; — climactic, see above. 
 The word is an dV. \^bfi,. in the 
 N.T., and appears used, not in its 
 primary sense ' disciplina arcana im- 
 butus sum,' Beng. {fi,voip,evos' nvffra- 
 yiayoi/ievoi, Hesych.), but in its deri- 
 vative sense ' I have been fully in- 
 structed ' (/ii)i;<rts' ix&Briais, koti}x''?''''s> 
 Hesych.), with perhaps some refer- 
 ence to the practical mode in which 
 the knowledge was acquired; TreXpav 
 aiz&VTav ^w. Phot. ap. CEcum. ; see 
 Suicer, Thesaur. s.v. Vol. 11. p. 379 
 sq. As laieiaBai. is used with an 
 accus. of the thing (Plato, Symp. p. 
 209 E, and see exx. in Eost u. Palm, 
 Lex. S.V.), more rarely with a gen. 
 (Heliod. JSthiop. 1. 17, see Lobeck, 
 Aglaoph. p. 651 note) ordat. (Lucian, 
 Demon. 11), some modern commen- 
 tators (Mey., Alf.) join iviravrl k.t.'K. 
 
IV. 
 
 i3> H- 
 
 103 
 
 vafiovvTi fie. irXriv KaXlioi exotiycrare crvvKOivwv^cravTes 14 
 
 13. hivvajMuvrL ^e] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg.,Bev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 very clearly preponderating authority: Bee. adds XpiffTif. 
 
 with the infinitives xop^"- fai ireicSc. 
 This is harsh and somewhat hy- 
 percritical; fi.vet<T9ai. appears with a 
 prep. (kot(£) in 3 Maoo. ii. 30, and is 
 probably to be joined with Iv here; 
 so Syr., Vulg., Clarom., Goth., and 
 appy. Copt., .^th. irtivdv] 
 
 Later form for Treivrjv, see Winer, 
 Gr. § 13. 3, Thorn. M. p. 699: 'vul- 
 garis horum verborum soriptura cum 
 ingressu Macedonici 8Bvi, tenuis sca- 
 turiginis iustar, hie ibi emicat,' 
 Lobeok, Phryn. p. 61. The verb 
 Xoprdfo), properly used in ref. to 
 animals (Hesiod, Op. 450, Aristoph. 
 Pax, 176, Plato, Bep. 11. p. 372 d, 
 comp. IX. p. 586 a), is found always 
 in the N. T. (except Eev. xix. 21), 
 and very commonly in later writers, 
 in simple reference to men. 
 
 13. irdvTa l(r)(v<i)] I can do all 
 things, — not ' all this,' Hamm. on i 
 Cor. xiii. 7, ' omnia memorata,' Van 
 Heng., but ' all things,' with the 
 most inclusive reference, marking 
 the transition from the special to 
 the general. Bernard (Serm. Lxxxv.) 
 well says 'nihil omnipoteutiamVerbi 
 olariorem reddit, quam quod omui- 
 potentes facit omnes qui in se [eo] 
 sperant ; ' see a good sermon on this 
 text by Hamm. Serm. xiv. p. 297 
 (A.-C. Libr.). IlAvTa is the accus. of 
 the ' quantitative ' object after l<Txi(a 
 (Gal. V. 6, James v. 16, Wisdom xvi. 
 20), defining the measure and extent 
 of the action; see Madvig, Synt. 
 § 27. Iv TM IvSvv. [ic] in 
 
 Him that giveth me inward strength; 
 not ' per eum,' Beza, but ' in Him,' 
 in vital and living union with Him 
 who is the only source of all spiritual 
 Siva/ui; comp. i Tim. i'. 12, 2 Tim. 
 iv. 17, aud Ignat. ad Smym. § 4. The 
 
 late form (vSvi/a/jAw (see notes on 
 1 Tim. i. 12) occurs six times in St 
 Paul's Epp., in Acts ix. 22, and Heb. 
 xi. 34 {Bee), Psahn lii. 9, and eocl. 
 writers. The simple form occurs 
 Col. i. II, Heb. xi. 34 (Lachm., 
 Tisch.), Psalm Ixviii. 29, and is 
 noticed by Lobeck, Phryn. p. 605 
 note. 
 
 14. irXijv K.T.X.] Notwithstanding 
 ye did well; clearly not ' ye have 
 done weU, ' Peile, — the event referred 
 to belonged definitely to the past. In 
 this verse and the following, which 
 in fact present the positive side to 
 the negative oix Sn, ver. 11, the 
 Apostle guards against any appear- 
 ance of slighting the liberality of his 
 converts (Chrys., Calv.), by specify- 
 ing what peculiarly evoked his joy, — 
 the sympathy of the Philippians, rd 
 a'WKOivoii'TJa-at /iov r§ SXlipet. For the 
 explanation of TrXifi/, see notes on ch. 
 i. 1 8, lii. 16, and for exx. of the idiom- 
 atic KoXus iir. with a part. (Acts x. 
 33), see Eisner, 06s. Vol. 11. p. 257. 
 cnivKoivwv. K.T.X.] in that ye commu- 
 nicated, had fellowship, with my 
 affliction, see notes on Eph. v. 11 : 
 specification of their action viewed in 
 its moral aspects; v/iiSv toCto KipSor 
 KOiviavol yap twv kfiSv iyiveaffe iradtf- 
 lidrav, Theod. The action of the 
 participle is contemporaneous with 
 that of the finite verb (see Bernhardy, 
 Synt. X. 9, p. 383, notes on Eph. i. 
 9, comp. Winer, Gr. § 45. 6. b), and 
 specifies the act in which the KoKui 
 iiroL-fiaare was evinced. It is scarcely 
 necessary to add that 0\l\j/^i. is not, 
 either here or i Cor. viii. 13, ' peuu- 
 riae' ('necessity,' Peile), but simply 
 ' trihulationi,' Vulg. : the gift of the 
 Philippians is regarded from a higher 
 
104 
 
 nPOS $IAiniIH2I0Y2. 
 
 ev apytj rov evayyeXlov, ore e^ijXOov airo MaKcooi'/a?, 
 ovSefxia fjioi sKKXijaia SKOivwvricrev eiy Xoyov ootreooi Kat 
 
 point of view, not as mere almsgiving 
 but as an act of ministering sym- 
 pathy. 
 
 15. oCSarc Si Kol i5|j,.] Moreover 
 yov/rselves also Icnow ; notice of their 
 former liberality in the way of gentle 
 contrast. Ai here does not merely 
 annex an ' enlargement upon ' the 
 preceding verse (Peile, ' and, ' Soholef . 
 Hints, p. 107), but passes to earlier 
 acts, which it puts in juxtaposition 
 with the present; see notes on Gal. 
 iii. 8, and Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 
 356, 362, who has well discussed this 
 particle, with the single exception that 
 he denies the connexion between it 
 and the numeral which seems philo- 
 logically certain; Donalds. Cratyl. 
 § 155. The Kal suggests a compari- 
 son with the Apostle, 'ye too, as 
 well as I;' comp. notes on ver. 12. 
 *i\wrinj<riot] men of Philippi. The 
 mention by name is emphatic (oomp. 
 2 Cor. vi. 11); it does not mark 
 merely affection (' my Philippians,' 
 Bisp.), but specifies them gratefully 
 and earnestly, as the well remem- 
 bered and acknowledged doers of the 
 good deed. Beng. goes rather too 
 far when he says, ' innuit antitheton 
 ad eoolesias aliorumoppidorum'; the 
 comparison is instituted in what 
 
 follows. €V apxf ''''''' '^O'YY'] 
 
 in the beginning of the Gospel, 
 i.e. of its being preached among 
 those to whom the Apostle is now 
 writing ; more fuUy defined and 
 explained by the temporal clause 
 which follows. 0T« l5rjK.9ov] 
 
 when I went out, ' quando profeotus 
 sum,' Vulg., scil. at the time that 
 event took place. It is doubtful whe- 
 ther the Apostle alludes (a) to the 
 assistance supplied to him when at 
 
 Corinth, and especially mentioned in 
 2 Cor. xi. 9 ; or (6) to that supplied 
 previously to, and possibly at, his de- 
 parture. Acts xvii. 14. If (a) is 
 adopted, then i^rikBov must be regard- 
 ed as having a pluperfect reference 
 (Van Heng., De W., see Paley, Hor. 
 Paul. § vii. 3), — an interpretation to 
 which no serious grammatical objec- 
 tion can be urged (Jelf, Gr. § 404, 
 Winer, Gr. § 40. 5, see however 
 Fritzsche, de Aor. Vi, p. 16), but 
 which seems at variance with iv dpxf 
 rov eiayy., which, as Mey. observes, 
 refers the event to the earliest period 
 of their connexion with the Apostle. 
 It seems safer then to adopt (6); so 
 Mey., Alf., and Bisp. 
 (loi. ..lKoivcivT|o-6v K.T.X.] commuui- 
 cated with (' dealt with,' Andrewes) me 
 in regard of the account (ver. 17) 0/ 
 giving and receiving; eis Xbyop not 
 being taken in the more lax, yet de- 
 fensible sense, ' ratione habita,' Van 
 Heng. (comp. ■.: Mace. i. 14, Thuoyd. 
 HI. 46), but, as eis 'Kbyov below seems 
 to suggest, in the stricter meaning, 
 'in ratione dati et aocepti,' Vulg., 
 Goth., Copt.; comp. Cicero, Leel. xvi. 
 58, 'ratio aoceptorum et datorum.' 
 The exact meaning of the words is 
 slightly doubtful. Chrys., Theoph., 
 nearly all the earlier, and the great 
 maj ority of recent expositors, refer the 
 giving and receiving to each party ; 
 6/3^s TTws iKoivuvTjaav els Xbyov Sitrews 
 Tuv (TapKiKwv Kal Xj^^ews rivv irvevfia- 
 TiKuv, Chrys.; oomp. i Cor. ix. 11. 
 Grotius and others limit the giving to 
 the Philippians and the receiving to 
 the Apostle ; ' ego sum in vestris ex- 
 pensi tabulis, vos in meis aocepti.' 
 Meyer (followed by Alf.) extends this 
 so far that each party is supposed to 
 
IV. 
 
 15—17- 
 
 105 
 
 X^/UYetof, e(' fiTi yyueZs fxovoi, on Koi in QecrcraXoviKri koi i6 
 ttTra^ KOI Sh ety rtjv ■)(pelav juot eTrif/.y^are. ouj^ on 17 
 
 open an account with the other, but 
 that the debtor side was vacant in 
 their account, the creditor in his. 
 This last interpr. seems so artificial, 
 and the first so fairly analogous with 
 the spiritual application in ver. 17, 
 that we see no reason for departing 
 from the.ordinaryinterpr.; soreoently 
 Wiesing., and Bisping. Exx. of the 
 expression Xiji^is koX S6<ris are cited by 
 Wetst. in loc. ; comp. also Sohoettg. 
 Hor. JSebr. Vol. i. p. 804. For the 
 construction of Koivuveiv, see notes 
 on Gal. vi. 6. 
 
 16. oTi] iecause, — argumentative, 
 not demonstrative (' that,' Paley, Van 
 Heng., EiUiet, al.), the object of this 
 verse being to justify the statement 
 iy 6,pX§Toii eiayy, (ver. 15), bynoticing 
 a very early period when assistance 
 was sent to the Apostle from Phihppi : 
 and not (as Paley) to add a second in- 
 stance of the generosity of the Philip- 
 pians. Even before he had left Mace- 
 donia they had twice ministered to his 
 necessity: so Goth, ('unte'), and per- 
 haps Vulg., Clarom., 'quia:' the other 
 Vv. are ambiguous ; jEth. omits. The 
 other interpr. of Sn reverses the order 
 of time, and disturbs the logical se- 
 quence. Kal Iv ©eo-o-.] even 
 in Thessahnica, not ' to Thessalonica, ' 
 Vulg., Clarom., but, ' when I was in 
 that city.' There is here no ellipse of 
 8;/^ (Beza), nor a direct instance of 
 the prep, of rest in combination with 
 a verb of motion (Mey., Alf.), but 
 only a case of simple and intelligi- 
 ble braohylogy, Winer, Gi: § 50. 4. 
 The ascensive Kal is referred by the 
 early commentators to theimportance 
 of Thessalonica ; ^i' rrj uriTpoirb'ku 
 KaSri/iei'OS irapk TTji jxiKpas irpitjiero 
 ir6Xeas, Chrys. This is doubtful ; it 
 seems more naturally ascensive in ref. 
 
 to time, 'even at so early a period as 
 when I was at Thess.' (so Alf.) ; comp. 
 Hartung, Partik. Kal, 2. 8, Vol. i. p. 
 135. Kal 6Cira£ Kal 8Cs] 
 
 both once and twice, i.e., ' not once 
 only, but twice,' emphatic : see i 
 Thess. ii. 18, Nehem. xiii. 20, i Mace, 
 iii. 30, and comp. Kal Sis Kal rpls, 
 Herod. 11. 121, iii. 148. Meyer cites 
 as the antithesis oix "toJ oiSi Sts, 
 Plato, Clitoph. p. 410 B. On Kal... 
 Kal, see notes onj Tim. iv. 10. 
 els Tiiv xp«£av] to supply my need; 
 els marking the ethical destination of 
 the contribution; so ds rb eiayy., 
 2 Cor. ii. 12, 'to preach the Gos- 
 pel;' see exx. in Winer, Gr. § 49. a. 
 The article marks the need the 
 Apostle then felt, i.e. 'my need,' Syr., 
 al. Chrysostom calls attention to the 
 absence of the pronoun, oiK etire ras 
 i/i&s \xpelas\ d\X aTrXus, roO <renvov 
 iiri./j,e\6/i.evos : this is inexact, as the 
 art. fully performs the function of 
 the proh. ; Middl. Art. v. i. 3. 
 
 17. ovx oTi] Not that; added 
 as in ver. 11, to avoid a misunder- 
 standing; see notes on oh. iii. 12: 'sic 
 laudat Philippensium liberalitatem ut 
 tamen sinistram cupiditatis immo- 
 dic£e opinionem semper a se rejioiat,' 
 Calvin. eiriJiiTw] I seek 
 
 after, not 'studiose quEero,' Bretsch., 
 nor even 'insuper qusero,' Van Heng., 
 who has an elaborate, but not con- 
 vincing note on this word : the ivl, 
 as in iiriiroBeXv k.t.X., only marks the 
 direction of the action, see notes on 
 ch. i. 8, and on 2 Tim. i. 4. In this 
 and similar compounds the directive 
 force is often so feebly marked that 
 the difference between the simple 
 and compound word is hardly appre- 
 ciable ; comp. Winer, de Verb. Comp. 
 I. 22. Meyer rightly calls attention 
 
106 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioYx 
 
 eTTi^rjTw TO ao/ua, ciWa eTr/^ajTw tov Kapirbv rov TrXeo- 
 
 l8 vaXpvra els \6yov v(j.wv. axe^w §e iravra koi irepitr- 
 
 treva), ireirKripodiJLai Se^aixevos Trapa 'ETra^jOOOtVoy ra 
 
 to the present, — the ' allzeitiges Pra- 
 sens ' of Eriiger {Sprachl. § 53. i), as 
 marking the regular and character- 
 istic mode of action ; see Bernhardy, 
 Synt. X. I, p. 370, and oomp. the 
 English present, in which however 
 habitude is more strongly marked 
 than in the Greek ; Latham, Eng. 
 Lang. § 507 (ed. 4). 
 t6 86|j.a] the gift, — not exactly ' the 
 gift which they had [now] sent to 
 him,' Soholef. Hints, p. 108, but 'the 
 gift in the particular case in question ' 
 (Mey., Alf.), almost in English idiom 
 ' any gift.' The Copt, [taio] seems to 
 convey the idea of a recompense, 
 ' honorarium.' dXXd eirij.] 
 
 but I do seek, Alf. : the repetition 
 of the same verb with aWd, as in 
 Eom. viii. 15, Heb. xii. 18, 22, adds 
 force and emphasis to the sentence, 
 and makes the primary meaning of 
 &W& (' aliud jam hoc esse de quo 
 Bumus dicturi,' Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. 
 p. i) still more apparent; compare 
 Fritz. Bom. viii. 15. 
 TOV Kapirdv k.t.X.] the fruit which 
 aboundeth unto your account, i/iwv, 
 oiiK i/jioO, Chrys. ; i.e. the future divine 
 recompense, which, on every fresh 
 proof of their love, is represented as 
 beiuglaid up to their account, 6 Kapnbs 
 iKeivQLS r/KTerat, Chrys. As TXeovdi^eiv 
 appears in all other cases in the N.T. 
 to stand alone {2 Thess. i. 3 is doubt- 
 ful ; Alf. cites it here as certain, but 
 in his notes in loc. takes it differently), 
 Van Heng. and De W. here connect els 
 with iin^riru. This seems to be an un- 
 necessary refinement; there is nothing 
 in irXeopd^di to render its connexion 
 with els, as marking the destination of 
 the irKeovaaiws, either ungrammatical 
 or unnatural : it is joined with h 
 
 [Plato] Locr. p. 103 a. The use 
 
 of X070S is here the same as in ver. 
 15, not 'habits vestrum ratione,' Van 
 Heng., and certainly not = els i/ias 
 (Syr., EiU.), but 'in rationem ves- 
 tram,' Vulg. (Am.), i.e. dropping all 
 metaphor, els t^v ifier^pay auTTjptav, 
 Chrys.; compare Calv. in loc. 
 
 18. dir^ci) Si irdvTtt] But I have 
 all I need ; ' though I seek not after 
 the gift, I still have all things in 
 abundance; your liberality hasleft me 
 to want nothing.' The Sk thus retains 
 its proper oppositive force (not ' and 
 now,' Peile), and preserves the anti- 
 thesis between the emphatic airixin 
 and the foregoing ^irifT/rw ; airix'^ 
 TT&vra, oiSiv iinlyiTip-^ov. 'Air^fti is 
 neither barely 'habeo,' Vulg., nor yet 
 with any special forensic sense (ac- 
 oeptUatio) ' satis habeo,' ' I give you 
 my acquittance ' (Hamm. on Mark 
 xiv. 41 ; oomp. Chrys. tSet^ev oVi 
 6^ei\ii iarl rb wpay/ia), but simply ' ac- 
 ceptum teneo' ('accepi,' Syr., Copt.), 
 the prep. dir6, apparently having a 
 slightly intensive force (' signifioat 
 actionis quendam, ut ita dieam, de- 
 cursum, atque adeo in agendo perse- 
 verantiam,' Winer, Verb. Camp. vi. p. 
 7), and marking the completeness and 
 definitive nature of the (x^iv ; comp. 
 Matth. vi. -i, 5, 16, Luke vi. 24, 
 PhUem. 15, Arrian, Epict. iii. 24 [p. 
 228, ed. Borh.], t6 y&p eidcu/jiovovv 
 dirdxeiv det ir&vTa a 0i\et, and comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 40. 4. Kal 
 
 Tr€pio-<rcv<i)] and abound; expansion 
 and amplification of the preceding 
 oTT^u, ' I have all I want and more 
 than all,' the following 7rc7rXii/)W;uai 
 completing the climax; 'die Hiille 
 und Fiille habe ioh,' Meyer. To 
 supply xopas after weTMip. (Grot.) 
 
IV. 1 8, 19. 
 
 107 
 
 Trap vfiHov, 6(T[jLrjv evmSlas, Qv(rlav SexT^v evapecTTOv tm 
 0e«. o oe 0eof fi,ov irXripwa-ei wacrav ■^pelav iifxHv 19 
 Kara to irXovroi avrov ev So^tj ev XjOttrTw ^Iriaov. 
 
 19. t6 ttXoOtos] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Bev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 greatly preponderating authority : Rec, rbv ttXovtov. 
 
 is to mar wholly the simplicity and 
 olimaotio force of the sentence. 
 SE|d|ii£vos K.T.X.] Temporal clause, 
 'now that I have received,' PeUe, 
 'posteaquam accepi,'Erasm.; comp. 
 Donalds. Gr. § 573 sq. In the follow- 
 ing words there is a slight variation 
 of MSS., caused probably by the re- 
 currence of irapa: there is however 
 no difficulty ; i/iets 'Eira^poSiT^ji iSii- 
 KOTe, 'E!ra0po5iTos i/iol, Theod. 
 o(r|ii]v cvuSias] a sweet-smelling sa- 
 vour ; aocus. in apposition to the 
 preceding ret Trap' v/iSv ; see notes ore 
 Eph. V. vs. The reference of Alf. to 
 Kiihner, Gr. Vol. n. p. 146, and the 
 exx. cited (Hom. II. xxiv. 735, Eurip. 
 Orest. 962) are not quite in point, as 
 there is no apposition to the verbal 
 action contained in the sentence 
 (Jelf, Gr. § 580. 2); but simply to the 
 accus. T& Trap' vfniSv, which is thus 
 further defined and characterized. 
 It is doubtful whether evadlas is to 
 be considered as a gen. materia 
 (Winer, Gr. § 34. 3. b, note, comp. 
 Arist. Ehet. 1. 11) or a gen. of the 
 characterizing quality (see Scheuerl. 
 Synt. § 16. 3, p. 115); the latter is 
 perhaps most simple and most in 
 harmony vrith the Hebraistic tinge 
 which seems to mark these kinds of 
 gen. in the N. T. ; comp. Winer, 
 Gr. I. u. (text). Svo-Cav 
 
 K.T.X.] a sacrifice acceptable (and) 
 well pleasing to God; not 'an ac- 
 cepted sacr. such as is,' dc, Peile 
 (comp. Syr.) ; both adjectives as well 
 as the preceding dr/iiiv eiaS. (comp. 
 Lev. i. 9, 13) standing in connexion 
 with rfi Qe(fi, which thus falls under 
 
 the general head of the dative of 'in- 
 terest ;' see Kriiger, Sprachl. § 48. 4. 
 The good deeds which the PhUippians 
 did towards the Apostle became, from 
 the spirit in which they were done 
 (comp. Ohrys.), an acceptable sacrifice 
 to God Himself. It does not seem 
 necessary, with Johnson (Unbl. Sac. 
 II. 4, Vol. I. p. 436 [A.-C. Libr.], 
 comp. Iren. Hcer. iv. 18, ed. Mass.) 
 to conclude that the alms brought by 
 Epaphr. had been offered by the 
 people at the altar : the sacrifice of 
 alms is one of the spiritual and evan- 
 gehcaJ sacrifices specially noticed in 
 the N. T. e.g. Heb. xiii. 16 ; see the 
 comprehensive list in Waterl. Doct. 
 of Euch. oh. XII. Vol. iv. p. 730. 
 
 19. o Si 0«6s |J.ov] Not without 
 emphasis and an expression of hope- 
 ful trust, 'qui meam agit causam,' 
 Van Heng. ; see notes on eh, i. 3. 
 TrX^piitra k.t.X.] shall fulfil (with 
 reciprocating ref. to ttcttX. ver. 18) 
 every need of yours ; not in the form 
 of a prayer (iweix^Tai airots, Chrys.) , 
 but of hopeful promise, the future 
 irXripiia-a being distinctly predictive ; 
 comp. Eom. xvi. 20, 2 Cor. xiii. 11, 
 2 Tim. iv. 18. It is doubtful whether 
 Xpelav is to be referred solely to tem- 
 poral (Chrys.), or solely to spiritual 
 (Theod.) wants. The use of xp^'" and 
 the preceding allusions are in favour 
 of the former ; the use of ttXoutoj and 
 the immediate context of the latter : 
 the inclusive form of the expression 
 seems to justify our uniting both. 
 Karcl t6 irX. oijtoi!] according to, i.e. 
 'in accordance with the riches He 
 has ; ' comp. notes on Eph. i. 5. The 
 
108 
 
 npo2 $iAinnH2ioYS. 
 
 ao TM 06 Qew Koi iraToi fifjiwv ri So^a eU tovs aiSivas twv 
 
 aiwvoov afjiriv. 
 ai A.a-n aaacrQe TravTa ayiov ev Xpi- 
 
 (TTW Iijtrou. (Kj-iraCovTai vfias oi arvv 
 
 All here send you 
 greeting. 
 
 clause involves a shade of modal re- 
 ference, and marks 6Vi cUkoXov avri} 
 Kod Swarliv Kal tox^ws Toieiv, Chrys. 
 Iv Soli]] in glory; not so much an 
 instrumental (Mey., Alf.) as a modal 
 clause, closely in union with iv Xp., 
 the former pointing to the manner in 
 which God will supply their wants, — 
 not however merely 'magnifice aut 
 splendide,' Calv. (oomp. Beng.), but 
 with ref. to the element or the attri- 
 bute in which the action will be 
 evinced, — while in Xp. 'Iijo-. specifies 
 the ever-blessed sphere in which alone 
 all is realized ; see notes on Bph. ii. 
 7. So appy. Chrys. oih-w irepuj-a-eiei 
 vfj.LV airavTa tSffre iv do^ri avTov ^x^*^* 
 Grotius and others (oomp. ^th.) con- 
 nect iv So^Ti with ttXoutos; this is 
 grammatically admissible, — the ex- 
 pression TrXoureix &< nvi (i Tim, vi. 
 18) justifying the omission of the 
 article (see notes on Eph. i. 15),' — and 
 certainly deserves consideration, but 
 the remark of Meyer, that ttXoCtos is 
 always used in the N. T. in such 
 metaphorical expressions with a gen. 
 of the thing (Eom. ii. 4, ix. 23, 
 2 Cor. viii. 2, Eph. i. 7, 18, ii. 7, 
 iii. 16, Col. i. 27) and that we should 
 have expected kotcI rb irXoCros t^s d. 
 avTov, seems to strike the balance in 
 favour of Tr\rip. iv So|i; : so appy. 
 Syr., but these are cases in which 
 the Vv. cannot safely be adduced on 
 either side. 
 
 20. Tia 8J 0€ij K.T.X.] Now to God 
 and our Father; anticipatory dox- 
 ology called forth by the preceding 
 words. On the august title Qebs xal 
 TTo.T'fip, see notes on Gal. i. 4. 
 11 86^0] Scil. dri, not iara ; see notes 
 
 on Eph. i. 2. The article seems here 
 to have its 'rhetorical' force (Bern- 
 hardy, Synt. VI. 22, p. 315), and to 
 mark the So^a as that 'which espe- 
 cially and peculiarly belongs to God ; ' 
 see notes on Gal. i. 5, where this and 
 the following expression, els rois 
 alcSvas Tuv alwvwVf are briefly investi- 
 gated. On the two formulae aliiiv tiSv 
 altaviav, and alcHves twv altaviav, see 
 Harless on Eph. iii. 21, with however 
 the quahfying remarks in notes in 
 loc. 
 
 21,22. Salutations. 21. irrivraoYi- 
 ov] every saint; not 'omnes sanctos,' 
 Syr., Copt., ^th., but 'omnem 
 sanctum,' Vulg., Clarom.: it does 
 not apply to the whole Church, but, 
 as Beng. suggests, individualizes; 
 each one is specially saluted; so 
 Wies., Alf. On the term ayios and 
 its application in the N.T., see notes 
 ore Bph. i. I. It is doubtful whether 
 iv Xp. is to be joined with aa-iraxrairOe 
 (comp. Eom. xvi. 22, 1 Cor. xvi. 19) 
 or with dytov (ch. i. i) ; the latter is 
 adopted by Syr. (plural) and Theod. 
 (6 ry 'Kvpi(p 'iTjtroO TnareOiav) ; the 
 former by Mey. and several modern 
 interpreters. As ayios is oouueoted 
 in this Bp. with iv Xp. (comp. Eom. 
 xvi. 3, 8, 9, 10, 13), and as oirTrof. 
 does not appear to be elsewhere 
 used with iv Xp. or iv Xp. 'Iijo-., 
 but only with iv Kvpliji, the latter is 
 perhaps slightly the more probable. 
 01 <riv e[j.ol dSeXfjioC] Those who were 
 more immediately in communication 
 with the Apostle, suitably and natu- 
 rally specified before the inclusive 
 irdvTEs 0! 07101 in the following verse. 
 The apparent contradiction between 
 
IV. 20 2- 
 
 109 
 
 e/jLoi aaeXcjyoi. a<nra^ovTai v/Jiai iravTei oi ayiot, fid- 2,% 
 "KicTTa 06 01 eK T^y Ji.ai(Tapos oiV/ay. 
 
 Benediction. 'JJ X"/"^ '''*''' ^Vplov Ii}(rOV XjOtlTToi; 23 
 
 //.era tov Tri/eu/xaTOi v/ioov. 
 
 23. Kvplov] So Laehm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Weste. and Hort, on very 
 clearly preponderating authority : Rec. adds ■^/iffli'. toO vveiiiaTOi] So the 
 above-mentioned edd. on greatly preponderating authority: Rec. irdvTiai'. 
 At the end of the verse Rec, [Lachm,.], add 'A/nJ;', with good critical authority. 
 It is omitted by Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. ani Hort, with similarly good 
 authority. The probability of insertion may perhaps be considered to turn 
 the scale : comp. critical note on 1 Cor. xv. 24. 
 
 this and oh. ii. 20 is simply disposed 
 of by Chrys., oi 7ra/)oiTe?Toi xal roi- 
 Tovs aSeXfpoiis KoXetv, 
 
 ■22. poXio-ra] especially; they 
 were naturally more in contact with 
 the Apostle than the other Christians 
 in Eome, who were not among his im- 
 mediate associates. The primary force 
 of yttdXiffra is 'in the greatest degree,' 
 H&\a being closely connected with 
 IJ.eyd\a,seeVoit,Etym,.Forsch. Vol. 1. 
 p. 283. 01 Ik TTJs 
 
 K. o'lKtas] those of Ccesar^s house- 
 hold. These words have received 
 various interpretations. It seems 
 most natural to regard them as de- 
 noting, not on the one hand merely 
 'the Praetorian guards' (Matth.), nor 
 on the other the ' members of Nero's 
 family,' oomp. 1 Cor. i. 16 [Camer., 
 Van Heng., and more recently, and 
 it is to be feared with obvious reasons, 
 Baur, Apost. Paulus, p. 470, who 
 founds on this interpr. an argument 
 
 against the genuineness of the Ep.], 
 but simply the oUetot (Theod. ), the ser- 
 vants and retainers belonging to the 
 emperor's household ; see Erebs, 06s. 
 p. 332, Loesn. Obs. p. 358. It may 
 thus seem not improbable that St Paul 
 was in confinement in or near to that 
 barrack of the Praetorians which was 
 attached to the palace of Nero (Conyb. 
 and Hows. St Paul, Vol. 11. p. 510, ed. 
 2), but it does not necessarily follow 
 that TpaiTcipiov in ch. i. 13 (see notes) 
 is to he restricted to that smaller por- 
 tion. The barracks within the walls 
 were probably in constant communi- 
 cation with the camp without. 
 
 23. Benediction, jietoi toS irvcv|J.. 
 4|ji,.] with your spirit; the 'potior 
 pars' of our composite nature, the 
 third and highest constituent of 
 man: see 2 Tim. iv. 22, Destiny 0/ 
 the Creature, p. 115, and notes on 
 Gal. vi. 18. 
 
nPOS KOAASSAEIS. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THE profound and difficult Epistle to the Colossians was written 
 by the Apostle during his Jvrst captivity at Rome (Acts xxviii. 
 1 6, 30; comp. Introd. to i Tim.), and, as far as we can judge 
 from some of the expressions in the concluding chapter (ver. 3, 4), 
 at a period of that captivity when the Apostle's anticipations were 
 not of so grave a character as they appear to be in the Epistle to 
 the Philippians (i. 20, 21, 30, ii. 27; see Introd. to Philipp.), and 
 when his restraint was probably less close (comp. Acts xxviii. 16 
 sq.) and his treatment more merciful. 
 
 We may thus not improbably place it first in the third of the 
 four groups into which St Paul's Epistles may be conveniently 
 divided, viz. the Epistles of the first captivity and conceive it to 
 have been written a very short time before the Epistle to the 
 Ephesians, and perhaps about the early part of the year a.d. 62. 
 It was conveyed to the church of Colossae by Tychicus (ch. iv. 7, 8), 
 who had received a similar commission with reference to the con- 
 verts at Ephesus (Eph. vi. 21), and it not improbably reached its 
 destination before the Epistle to the last-mentioned Church ; 
 comp. Meyer, on Eph. p. 17. 
 
 The Epistle seems to have been called forth by the information 
 St Paul had received from Epaphras (ch. iv. 12; Philem. 23), who, if 
 not the actual founder of the Church of Colossse (Davidson, IrUrod., 
 Vol. II. p. 405, Bp Lightfoot, Comment, p. 29 sqq.), was most 
 certainly one of the very earKest preachers of Christ in that city; 
 comp. ch. i. 7 and notes in he. Its object transpires very clearly, 
 ■ — an earnest desire on the part of the Apostle to warn the Colos- 
 sians against a system of false teaching, partly Oriental and 
 theosophistic in its character (ch. ii. 18), and partly Judaical and 
 ceremonial (ch. ii. 16), which was tending on the one hand directly 
 to obscure the majesty and glory of Christ (comp. ch. i. 15, 
 
 E. I 
 
114 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 ii. 8 sq.), and on the other to introduce ritualistic observances, 
 especially on the side of bodily austerities (ch. ii. i6 — 23), opposed 
 alike to the simplicity and freedom of the Gospel, and to all true 
 and vital union with the risen Lord (ch. ii. 20, iii. i). For further 
 particulars see Davidson, InVrod. Vol. 11. p. 407 sqq. (where the 
 sects to which these corrupters of the faith have been supposed 
 to belong, and the peculiar nature of their tenets, are very care- 
 fully discussed), and especially the clear and thorough treatise on 
 the Colossian Heresy by Bp Lightfoot, Comment, pp. 73 — 113: 
 comp. also Smith, Diet, of Bible, Art. 'Ep. to the Colossians,' 
 Vol. I. p. 342. 
 
 In reference to the genuineness and authenticity of this Epistle 
 it may be said briefly that no doubts have been urged that deserve 
 any serious consideration. Even if the external testimonies had 
 been less clear and explicit than we find them to be (Irenseus, 
 Hear. in. 14. I, Clem. Alex. Strom, i. p. 325, ed. Pott., Tertull. 
 de Prcescr. cap. 7, Origen, contr. Gels. v. 8), the internal arguments, 
 derived from the peculiarities of style and expression, must have 
 been pronounced by every sagacious critic to be equally conclusive 
 and unanswerable. To class an Epistle so marked not only by 
 distinctive peculiarities of style, but by the nerve, force, and origi- 
 nality of its argument, with the vague productions of later Gnos- 
 ticism (Mayerhoff, Baur, al.), is to betray so complete a want 1>f 
 critical perception, that we can scarcely wonder that such views 
 have been very generally and very summarily rejected; see Meyer, 
 Einleitumg, p. 7, Davidson, Introd. Vol. 11. p. 427 sq. As the 
 latter writer very justly observes, the fabrication of such an Epistle 
 would be ' a phenomenon perfectly inexplicable' (p. 428). 
 
 The contents of the Epistle can be much more easily specified 
 than in the case of the preceding Epistle. The style is somewhat 
 rugged, but the distribution of subjects is simple. After a brief 
 introduction (ch. i. i — 8), the Apostle passes at once to the doc- 
 trinal portion, and to the subject of the person of Christ (ch. i. 
 9 — 23). After some comments on his own work (ch. i. 24 — ii. 5), 
 he passes to warnings against various errors in the Colossian 
 Church (ch. ii. 6 — 23) and, by a natural sequence, to exhortations 
 and precepts (ch. iii. i — iv. 6). After a few words on personal 
 matters (ch. iv. 7 — 9), he closes with salutations, and an autograph 
 valediction (ch. iv. 10 — 18). 
 
 The similarity between many portions of this Epistle and that 
 to the Ephesians has often been noticed, and the claim to priority 
 
INTRODUCTION. 115 
 
 of composition much debated. With regard to the first point it 
 may be again observed (as in Introd. to Eph.) that the two Epistles 
 were written closely about the same time, and addressed to two 
 Churches sufficiently near to one another to have had many points 
 of resemblance, and to have needed very similar forms of exhorta- 
 tion, especially in reference to the duties of social and domestic 
 life. "With regard to the second point it may be enough to say 
 that the nature of the contents of the two Epistles seems to har- 
 monize best with the opinion that the Epistle to the Colossians 
 was first in order, and that the more directly individualizing and 
 polemical preceded the more directly systematic and doctrinal ; 
 see Davidson, Introd. Vol. ii. p. 346 sq., and compare notes on 
 Eph. vi. 21. 
 
 I 2 
 
nPOS KOAASSAEIS. 
 
 Apostolic address and 
 salutation. 
 
 I I AYAOS a'TTOCTToKoi XpiCTToO ^Ivj- 
 
 I. XpuTTov 'Ij/ffoD] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 very greatly preponderating authority : Bee, 'IijcroB Xpurrov. 
 
 Intboduoiion (oh. i. i — 8). 
 I — 8. Opening address. i. airo- 
 CToXos Xp. 'Iii<r.] an Apostle of Christ 
 Jesus; the possessive genitive de- 
 noting whose minister he was : see 
 notes on Eph. i. i, and for the 
 meanings of dTritrroXos, here ob- 
 viously used in its higher and more 
 especial sense, see notes on Gal. i. 
 I, and on Eph. iv. ii. The form of 
 greeting in this Ep. closely resembles 
 that to the Ephesians ; there are how- 
 ever, as has been previously observed 
 (oomp. notes on Eph. i. i, and see 
 Riick. on Gal. i. i), some differences 
 in the addresses of St Paul's Bpp., 
 especially in the Apostle's designation 
 of himself, which, though not in all 
 cases easy to account for, can hardly 
 be deemed accidental. We may clas- 
 sify these designations as follows : in 
 
 1 and 2 Thess., simply IlaCXos (see 
 below, note on koI Vi/i.); in Philemon 
 (very appropriately), S4cr/uos Xp. 'I. ; 
 in Phil., SoSXos Xp. 'Iijo-. (associated 
 with Timothy); in Tit., SoCXos BeoS 
 Airbar. Si 'I. X. ; in Eom., SovX. 'I. X. 
 /cXijtJs dTTOffT. ; in i Cor. (kXijtos i.ir.), 
 
 2 Cor., Eph., Col., 2 Tim., iiroaT. X. 
 'I. (or 'I. X., see crit. note on Tit. i. 
 
 i) Sik 6e\rip,aTos GcoO; in i Tim., 
 diroffT. X. 'I. Kar ^iTLTay^v 0. (tojttJ- 
 pos Tiiiwp KoX X. 'I. (f.T.X. ; and lastly, 
 with fullest titular distinction, in Gal., 
 dTToVroXos, oiK d.ir dvOpthircov oid^ Si 
 avBpiitrov k.t.X. An interesting paper 
 might be written on these peculiarities 
 of designation. Sid 6eXij|jiaTos 
 
 ©eoti] Added probably in thankful 
 remembrance of God's grace, and 
 with feelings of implicit obedience 
 to His will; see notes ore Eph. i. i. 
 Kol Ti|A. o dScXcfi.] Timothy is simi- 
 larly associated with the Apostle in 
 his greeting in 2 Cor. i. i, Philem. i, 
 and even included with him under a 
 common appellation in Phil. i. i : 
 so also Sosthenes, i Cor. i. 1, comp. 
 Gal. i. z, and see notes in loc. In 
 r and 2 Thess. i. i, the names of 
 SUvanus and Timothy are simply 
 joined to that of Paul. It may 
 be observed however that in i Cor., 
 Phil., and Philem., the Apostle pro- 
 ceeds in the singular, while here, 
 2 Cor. (i. 4, see Meyer), i and 2 
 Thess., he continues the address in 
 the plural; see notes on ver. 3. It 
 has been supposed that Timothy was 
 also the transcriber of the Epistle 
 
118 
 
 nP02 K0AA22AEI2. 
 
 a jnodeos 6 ade\<pbi TOt? ev KoXoa-rraig dyioti koi Tria-TOii 
 
 i. KoXofffl-ais] So Tiseh., Eev., Westc. and Hort, on authority so very 
 greatly preponderating that, in spite of the form KoAaffo-aeis in the title (which 
 seems there the best attested reading), we seem hound to adopt this older 
 and more correct form in the text : Rec. (Steph. 3), Lachm., Treg., and former 
 edd. of this Commentary, KoXafftrais. Careful investigation seems now clearly 
 to shew that Colossse was the old form, and indeed the only form till a period 
 later than that of St Paul: see Bp Lightfoot, Commentary (Introd.), p. 17, 
 note. To decide on the proper spelling of the title is perhaps less difficult, as 
 the title was probably attached at a later date, and might, not uimaturally, 
 present the then current form of spelling. It maybe said too, that correction 
 of the title so as to confonn with the text would seem so probable, that the 
 external authority for the earlier mode of spelling, even if of equal weight 
 with that for the later mode, would, on critical grounds, become overbalanced. 
 As it is, however, the external authority for Ko\a<r(Taeis in the title distinctly 
 preponderates. We seem bound therefore, though it is confessedly awkward, 
 to retain what thus appears to be the true reading of the title. 
 
 (Steiger, Bisp.; comp. ch. iv. 18): 
 this is possible, but nothing more. 
 The title 6 adeXipos, as in i and 2 
 Cor. i. I , has no special reference to 
 official {oiKovv Kal airoffroXos, Chrys.), 
 but simply to Christian brother- 
 hood; Timothy was one of ol &Se\- 
 <l>ol, ' der ohristliche Mitbruder,' De 
 Wette. 
 
 1. KoXoo-<rais] Colossi or Colassas 
 (see crit. note) was a city of Phrygia, 
 on the Lycus (an affluent of the 
 Mffiander), near to, and nearly equi- 
 distant from the more modern cities 
 of Hierapolis and Laodicea. It was 
 anciently a place of considerable im- 
 portanoe(iro'\is/ie7(£\i;*/)U7/i;s, Herod. 
 VII. 30; TTtSXis oUovfi^vTj, e{idai^o)V Kal 
 /ieyaXi], Xen. Anab. i. 2. 6), but 
 subsequently so declined in compa- 
 rison with the commercial city of 
 Apamea on one side, and the strong, 
 though somewhat shattered city of 
 Laodicea on the other (oJ niyLarai tSv 
 Kara t^v ^pvyiav iroXewp), as to be 
 classed by Strabo {Geogr. xii. 8. 13, 
 ed. Kramer) only among the woXlfr/jia- 
 ra of Phrygia, though still, from past 
 fame, ranked by Pliny (Nat. Hist, v. 
 
 41) among the 'celeberrima oppida' 
 of that country after Hierapolis, 
 Laodicea, and some others; see 
 Steiger, Binl. § 2. p. 17. It after- 
 wards rose in importance, and under 
 the name of Xiivai (Theoph.) again 
 received the titles of eidalfiuv and 
 /ieydXri (Nicetas Chon. p. 203, ed. 
 Bonn). It has been supposed to 
 have occupied exactly the site of 
 the modern Chonas or Khonos, but of 
 this there now seems to be some 
 doubt ; see Smith, Diet. Geogr. s. v., 
 Conyb. and Hows. St Paul, Vol. 11. 
 p. 471 note, Pauly, Real-Eneycl. Vol. 
 II. p. 518, and the very interesting 
 topographical notes of Steiger, Einl. 
 pp. I — 33. dvtois] saints ; 
 
 used substantivally, as appy . in aU the 
 addresses of St Paul's Epp., Eom. i. 
 7, I Cor. i. I, 2 Cor. i. i, Eph. i. 1, 
 Phil. i. I ; so Copt.,iEth. (Piatt), and 
 appy. Chrys. De Wette and others 
 connect aylois with a5eX0. (Syr., and 
 appy. Vulg.), but with considerably 
 less plausibility, as in such a case irt- 
 CToit would far more naturally pre- 
 cede than follow the more compre- 
 hensive Q,yloK. On the meaning of 
 
I- 2, 3. 
 
 119 
 
 aoeX(poii if XjOtorw. X"/"'* v/xiv /cat elp^vti oltco Qeov 
 ■jraTjOO? fifjLuiv. 
 
 Ev^apKTTOVfjiev tm 06^ waToi tov 3 
 vpiov rift,5)v lijaov XjOttrTov, TravTore 
 
 We thank God for your 
 faith and love, and pro- 
 gress in the Gospel asTj.- , , ^ ^ r --v 
 preached to you by Epa- lS.vpiOV ^fJLWV ItJCTOV A, 
 
 2. ri/itSv] So Tisch., Treg., Bev., Weste. and Hort, on preponderating 
 authority : Bee. [Lachm.], add xal Kvplov 'l»)(7oO XpLcrroS. These last words 
 were retained in brackets in the last ed. of this Commentary. They cer- 
 tainly have good external authority : still the probability of conformation to 
 the great majority of the rest of the Apostle's opening salutations, com- 
 bined with the express statement of Origen (see Treg. in loc), seem 
 to justify the omission. 
 
 3. iraTpC] So Lachm., Bev., Westc. and Hort, on preponderating authority: 
 Bee., Tisch., Treg., prefix Kal. The probability of an insertion of the familiar 
 Kal (Eph. i. 3, al.) is certainly not inconsiderable. 
 
 0710s in such addresses, see Daveuant 
 in loc., Beveridge, Serm. 11. Vol. vi. 
 p. 401, and comp. notes on Eph. i. i. 
 iriiTToIs K.T.X.] faithful brethren in 
 Christ; more specific and slightly ex- 
 planatory designation of the preceding 
 d'yioi. 'Ev Xpiarip is in close union 
 with a5eX0o/, and marks the sphere 
 and element in which the brother- 
 hood existed. The omission of the 
 article is perfectly admissible, iv Xp. 
 being associated with ddeXipols so as 
 to form, as it were, one composite 
 idea; see Winer, Gr. § 20. 1, and 
 notes on Eph. i. 15. The insertion 
 of the article would throw a greater 
 emphasis on iv Xp., 'iisque in 
 Christo,' than is necessary or in- 
 tended; see notes on i Tim. iii. 13, 
 and on Gal. iii. 26. It may be ob- 
 served that in this verse, Eom. i. 
 7, Eph. i. I, and Phil. i. i, the 
 Apostle does not write especially to 
 the Church (as in i and 2 Cor. i, i, 
 Gal. i. i [plural], i and 2 Thess. i. 
 i), but to the Christians collectively. 
 This is perhaps not intentionally 
 significant ; at any rate it can hardly 
 be conceived that he only uses the 
 title iKxXritria to those churches which 
 he had himself founded: see Meyer 
 
 in loc. The unusual addition Kal 
 irurrois dSeX^ois does, however, appear 
 significant: some members of the 
 Colossian Church, as Bp Lightfoot 
 observes, had certainly become shaken 
 in their allegiance. Xapi'S 
 
 K.T.X.] On this form, in which the 
 Occidental and Oriental modes of 
 salutation are blended, see notes on 
 I Cor. i. 3, Gal. i. 3, Eph. i. 2. The 
 term x^P" is elaborately explained 
 by Davenant; it seems enough to 
 say with Waterl. Euchar. x., that 
 XO'Pi-s 'in the general signifies /a«OMj', 
 mercy, indulgence, bounty; in par- 
 ticular it signifies a gift, and more 
 especially a spiritual gift, and in a 
 sense yet more restrained, the gift of 
 sanotification, or of such spiritual 
 aids as may enable a man both to 
 wiU and do according to what God 
 has commanded,' Works, Vol. iv. p. 
 666. 
 
 3. Ev\opioTOV|ji«v] We give thanks ; 
 i. e. I and Timothy. In this Ep. , as 
 in 2 Cor., the singular and plural are 
 both used (see ver. 23, 24, 25, 28, 29 ; 
 ii. I ; iv. 3, 4, 13), and sometimes, as 
 in ver. 25, 28, 29, iv. 3, 4, even in 
 juxtaposition : in all cases the context 
 seems fully to account for and justify 
 
120 
 
 nPOS KOAASSAEIS. 
 
 4 Trep) v/Jiwv irpotrev^oiJ.evoi, aKovtravrei Ttjv iria-riv vfimv 
 ev XjOttTTea 'Ii;(tou kol Trjv ayairtiv tjv ej^ere ej? waprai 
 
 4. rj" ^ere] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Bev., [Westc. and Hort], on 
 greatly preponderating authority, as against t^k, JRec. Both forms of 
 defining the 07117071' are omitted by B, — a reading by no means improbable. 
 
 the appropriateness of the selection; 
 see Meyer on 2 Cor. i. 4. It is doubt- 
 ful whether irinTore is to be joined 
 (a) with the finite verb (i Cor. i. 4, 
 ■J Thess. i. 3, comp. Eph. i. 16), or (6) 
 with the participle (comp. Eom. i. 9, 
 Phil. i. 4) : Syr., Mih., and the ma- 
 jority of modern commentators adopt 
 the former; the Greek expositors and 
 appy. Copt, and Yulg. the latter. As 
 irepl vfiwv would be a very feeble pom- 
 mencement to the participial clause, 
 and as TrpotTevxl>iJ.eiioi, used absolutely, 
 does not appear elsewhere in St 
 Paul's Epp., in combinations like the 
 present, (6) is to be preferred: see 
 Alf. in loc, who has well defended 
 this latter construction. On eixapur- 
 retv, see notes on ver. 12, and on 
 Phil. i. 3. The anarthrous use of 
 Trariip is fully admissible; see the 
 list in Winer, Gr. § ig. i. 
 irepl v|u5v irpoo-.] praying for you. 
 The uncial authorities (as in ch. ii. i) 
 are nearly equally divided between 
 vepl {Rec, Tisch., Bev., Westc. and 
 Hort with marg.) and iirip {Lachm., 
 Treg. ) : the former on critical grounds 
 is to be preferred, though grammati- 
 cally considered the difference is 
 extremely slight, if indeed appreci- 
 able, comp. Fritz. Bom. Vol. i. p. 
 25 sq. The utmost perhaps that can 
 be said is that virip seems to direct 
 the attention more to the .action 
 itself, irepl more to the object or 
 circumstances towards which it is 
 directed, or from which it may be 
 supposed to emanate: see notes on 
 Gal. i. 4. On the primary meaning 
 and etymological affinities of irepl, see 
 
 Donalds. Cratyl. § 177, 178. 
 
 4. aKov(ravT(s] having heard, i.e. 
 'after having heard;' Syr., 'a quo 
 audivimus,' .iEth. 'postquam;' tem- 
 poral use of the participle (Donalds. 
 (^- § 575)) 110* causal, 'quoniam 
 audivimus.' It was not the hearing 
 but the substance of what he heard 
 that caused the Apostle to give thanks. 
 For exx. of the union of two or more 
 participles with a single finite verb, 
 see Winer, Gr. § 45. 3. It will be 
 observed that the three Christian 
 graces, iricrTts, dydTrt) and i\irls, are 
 here aU specified in association ; see 
 I Cor. xiii. 13, i Thess. i. 3, v. 8, 
 and comp. r Pet. i. 21, 22. 
 «v Xp. 'Irjo-.] in Christ Jesus, — in 
 Him, either as the sphere or as the 
 substratum of the trlo-m, that in 
 which the faith centres itself. The 
 omission of the article gives a more 
 complete unity to the conception, 
 ' Christ-centred faith,' see notes on 
 Eph. i. 15, and comp. Fritz. Bom. 
 iii. 25, Vol. I. p. 195, note. UIittis, 
 as usual, has its subjective meaning ; 
 not ' externam fidei professionem,' 
 nor both this and 'internam et 
 sinceram in corde habitantem fidem' 
 (Davenant), but simply the latter; 
 comp. notes on Gal. i. 23. 
 i)V i\iTel Further statement of the 
 direction and application of the iyairrj. 
 The difference between this and tt/k 
 (Bee.) is slight, but appreciable. The 
 latter simply appends a second mo- 
 ment of thought ('amorem, eumque 
 erga omnes sanctos'), the former 
 draws attention to it, and points to 
 its persistence, ijv inSeiKvi/Mevot Sieri- 
 
I. 4, 5- 
 
 121 
 
 Tovy dylovs Sia t^u eXirlSa t^v ctTroKeifiiviiv v/uv ev roh 5 
 ovpavotf, rjv TTpoiiKovcraTe ev rep Xoyw t?? oK^deiai tow 
 
 Xow, Theod. The reading of Bee. is 
 however not critically tenable. 
 
 5. Stdn^v IXirCSa is most naturally 
 connected with the preceding relative 
 sentence, not with eixap; Davenant, 
 Eadie ; for, as Meyer justly remarks, 
 this preliminary eixaptaria in St 
 Paul's Epp. (Bom. i. 8, i Cor. i. 4, 
 Eph. i. 15, Phil. i. 5, 1 Thess. i. 3, 2 
 Thess. i. 3, 2 Tim. i. 5, Philem. 4) is 
 always grounded on the subjective 
 state of his converts, aKoiffavres k.t.X. 
 The love they entertained toward the 
 07101 was evoked and conditioned by 
 no thought of any earthly return, 
 but by their hope for their /uffffbs in 
 heaven; d7a7raT^ (pri<ri roiis aylovs, oi 
 did n cwBpiiiri.poi', d\X4 Si& rb iXirll'eiv 
 Tcl juAXoj'TO ayaffd, Theoph.; so 
 Chrys. and Theodoret. ti)v 
 
 diroKEi|i.^VT|v K.T.X.] whieh is laid wp 
 for you in heaven, 'propter coeles- 
 tem beatitudinem, ' Daven. This de- 
 fining clause, as well as the following 
 words, seems to show that the iXirls 
 must here be regarded, if not as 
 purely objective, 'id quod speratur,' 
 Grot., yet certainly as under ob- 
 jective aspects (oomp. Eom. viii. 24, 
 iXirls pXeiro/ji.ii'ri, and perhaps Heb. vi. 
 18), soil, rijp eiTpeirKrfidyTiv iffuv Ttav 
 oipavuv pa<riKelav, Theod.; oomp. 
 notfes on Eph. i. 18. It is charac- 
 terized as tV diroK. k.t.\. partly to 
 mark its security (tA dff(pa\is Idei^ev, 
 Chrys.), partly its futurity (see notes 
 on 2 Tim. iv. 8), — the dirb denoting 
 the setting apart by itself for future 
 purposes or wants; comp. Joseph. 
 Ant. XV. 9. i, Kapiruv Saoi diriKeivro 
 SeSaTavrifiivuv, Xen. Anab. ri. 3. 15, 
 cd ^d\ayoL r&v <^0LvlK(tjv...T0LS olKh'ais 
 diriKeivTo, and exx. in Zypke, 06s. 
 Vol. II. p. 320. irpoi]Koii(raT6] 
 
 ye heard before : before when ? Not 
 
 before its fulfilment, 'respectu spei 
 c[ua3 illis de re futura erat facta,' 
 Wolf, — which would leave tTie com- 
 pound form very unmeaning ; nor 
 yet specifically, before this Epistle 
 was written, ' ante quam ego scri- 
 berem,' Beng., but simply and gene- 
 rally, 'formerly,' Steiger, Alf., — i.e. 
 not before any definite epoch [e.g. 
 ' when you received this hope,' 
 Meyer, al.), but merely at some un- 
 defined period in the past, 'prius 
 [sftojy]audistis,' Copt. ; comp. Herod. 
 V. 86, 06 ■wpoaKfiKo6<Ti. To'un ' kOrivaloiai, 
 iTnireuieai, viii. 79, vpoaK'^Koe di Sn ; 
 comp. Plato, Legg. vii. p. 797 A. 
 The verb is also found in a purely 
 local sense, e.g. Xen. Mem. 11. 4, 7, 
 where see Eiihner. iv ti3 
 
 Xo-yij) TTJs d\i]fl.] in the word of Truth; 
 not the gen. otqvuHty ('verissimum,' 
 Grot.), but the gen. of the substance 
 or content (Soheuerlein, Synt. § 12. 
 I, p. 82), TTJs dXriSelas specifying 
 what was the substance and purport 
 of its teaching ; see notes on Eph. i, 
 13. The genitive roO dayyeXlov is 
 usually taken as the genitive of appo- 
 sition to T(J \6y(iJ Tijs dKrjd. (De W., 
 Olsh.) ; but it seems more simple to 
 regard it as a defining genitive allied 
 to the genitive possessivus (or con- 
 tinentis), which specifies, and, so to 
 say, localizes the general notion of the 
 governing substantive, — 'the truth 
 which was preached in and was an- 
 nounced in the Gospel;' comp. notes 
 on Eph. i. 13, and see exx. in Winer, 
 Gr. § 30. 2. j3. In Gal. ii. 5, 14, the 
 gen. eiayy. is somewhat different, as 
 oKiiBem stands prominent and logi- 
 cally independent, whereas here it is 
 under the regimen of, and serves to 
 characterize, a preceding substan- 
 tive. 
 
122 
 
 nP02 K0AA22AEI2. 
 
 6 evayyeXiov, tov vapovTog ejj w/uaj KaOwi Kai ev -jravTi 
 Tw Korr/xw ecniv Kaptrocpopovfievov kui av^afofievov, 
 KuOwi KOI ev ufAiv, a(p ?y ^fiipas ^Kovaare kui eveyvtare 
 
 6. (anv Kapiro0.] So Lachm,, Tisch., Treg., Bev., Westc. and Hort, 
 on very clearly preponderating authority: Rec. prefixes Ka(. The 
 
 addition koX ai^avoiievov is supported by all the above-mentioned edd. on very 
 greatly preponderating authority : Bee. omits. 
 
 6. ToB irapdvTOs els wc-] which is 
 present withy ou; more exactly 'which 
 came to and is present with you,' the 
 eh (not h as in the next clause) con- 
 Teying the idea of the Gospel having 
 reached them (Jelf, Gr. § 625), while 
 irapovTos implies that it abode with 
 them; oiirapeyiveTO,<jyriaL, koI aTrinT-if, 
 aXK' l/ieivc Kal lo-Tiv ixe!, Chrys. For 
 exx. of this not very uncommon union 
 of verbs of rest with els or irp6s (Acts 
 xii. 20), see Winer, Gr. § 50. 4. A 
 somewhat extreme case occurs in 
 Jer. xli. (xlviii.) 7, l<ripa^ev airois els 
 rb (ppiap. KaSus KaC k.t.X.] 
 
 even as also in all the world; iravTaxov 
 Kparei, Chrys., — a very natural and 
 intelligible hyperbole; comp. Eom. 
 i. 8, X. 18. It is obviously not neces- 
 sary either to limit xotr/ios to the 
 Roman empire (Michael.), or to under- 
 stand it with a literal exactness, 
 which at this period could not be 
 substantiated; comp.Orig. inMatth. 
 Tract. XXVIII., and see Justiniani in 
 loc. ia-riv Kapiroiji. k.t.X.] 
 
 it is bearing fruit and increasing; 
 metaphor from trees or arborescent 
 plants (Chrys., Just.; comp. Mey.), 
 depicting the inward and intensive, 
 as well as outward and extensive 
 progress of the Gospel. It may be 
 observed that the Apostle does not 
 merely append a parallel participle 
 Kapiroipopoviiit'oii, but by a studied 
 change to the finite verb (Eph. i. ^o, 
 Winer, Gr. § 63. 2. b) throws an 
 emphasis on the fact of the Kapwo(popia, 
 while by his use of the periphrastic 
 
 present (not KapTrotpopet, ' fruotificat,' 
 Vulg., but 'est fructifioans,' Clarom.) 
 he gives further prominence to the 
 idea of its present continuance and 
 duration ; see Winer, Gr. % 45. 5. 
 The distinction between the two 
 verbs has been somewhat differently 
 explained: on the whole the Greek 
 commentators seem right in refer- 
 ring Kapiro(j). to the inner and per- 
 sonal, ai^. to the outward and col- 
 lective increase; Kapirotpopiav tov 
 eiayy. KiKktfKe rijv irlanv rwv cucriKOo- 
 TUiv Kol riiv iiraimv/iipriv ToKirelaV 
 aO^Tjaty dk tuv iTKrTevoyTWV rb ir\^0os, 
 Theod. -. comp. Acts vi. 7, xii. 24, 
 xix. 20. The middle Kapirocj). is an 
 oir. Xeyo/j,. in the N.T.; it may per- 
 haps be an instance of the 'dynamic' 
 middle (Donalds. Gr. § 432. 2. 66, 
 Kriiger, Spraehl. § 52. 8), and may 
 mark some intensification of the 
 active, ' fruotus sva)s exserit ; ' comp. 
 ivepyeia-ffai, Gal. V. 6, and notes in 
 loc. ti^v X'ipi'V TOV 0eov] the 
 
 grace of God, i.e. as evinced and 
 manifested in the Gospel: 'ampKfi- 
 cat hisoe verbis ef&caciam evangelii. . . 
 ...evangelium voluntatem Dei sal- 
 vantem ostendit, et nobis gratiam in 
 Christo offert,' Daven. ; comp. Tit. 
 ii. II. It is doubtful whether this 
 acous. is to be connected (a) with 
 both verbs (De W., Lightf.), or (5) 
 only with IHyvure (Mey.). The 
 grammatical sequence appears to 
 suggest the former, and is appy. 
 followed by Chrys., d>o ^S^foo-ffe, 
 Sfia ^yi/are ttjv x<ip- r. Q., but the 
 
I. 6, 7. 
 
 123 
 
 TJ71' X^P'^ "^^^ Qeov ev aXfideia' KaOws e/j,a6eT€ onro 7 
 'E7rad)joa tov ayairtjTov crvvoovXov fifj^wv, oy ecniv ttkt- 
 
 7. Kadiis] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Weste. and Hort, on very 
 greatly preponderating authority : Rec. adds xal. 
 
 logical connexion certainly the latter; 
 for if iu a\i}8. were joined with 
 ^KoitraTc, KaSws (soil, iv a\7]8., see 
 below) K.T.X. in ver. 7 would seem 
 tautologous. On the whole it seems 
 best to adopt (6) ; so Steiger, Mey., 
 al. 4v dXT]6ECi2.] in truth; 
 
 i.e. in no Judaistic or Gnostic form 
 of teaching; ^ d\i;S. being (as /cafliis, 
 ver. 7, seems naturally to suggest) 
 an adverbial definition of the manner 
 appended to the preceding iiriyvure ; 
 comp. Matth. xxii. 16, and see Winer, 
 Gr. § 51. I (comp. § 20. 2), Bern- 
 hardy, Synt. V. 8, p. 211. Alford 
 objects to the adverbial solution, but 
 adopts an interpr., 'in its truth and 
 with true knowledge,' that does not 
 appreciably differ from it. Both 
 Chrys. and Theoph. (ofe iv Xii^p, oiSi 
 hi airaT-Q k.t.X. ) appear to have given 
 to iv more of an instrumental force : 
 this is not grammatically necessary, 
 and has led to the doubtful para- 
 phrase, TovriaTL crrjuelois Kal Ipyois 
 ffopoSofois, Theoph. 
 
 7. KaStos] even as; not causal 
 ' inasmuch as ' (Bph. i. 4), but as 
 usual simply modal, referring to the 
 preceding h dXijSefji, and thus serv- 
 ing formally to ratify the preaching 
 of Epaphras : as it was in truth that 
 they had known the grace of God, 
 so was it in truth that they had 
 learnt it. On the later form Koffiis, 
 see notes on Gal. iii. 6. 
 '£iira<|>pa] A Oolossian (ch. iv. 12), 
 who appears from this verse to have 
 been one of the first, if not the first, 
 of the preachers of the Gospel in 
 CoIosssb: he is again mentioned as 
 being in prison with St Paul at Eome, 
 PhUem. 23. Grotius and others con- 
 
 ceive him to have been the Bpaphro- 
 ditus mentioned in Phil. ii. 25 ; see 
 Thornd. Right of Ch. ch. in. a, 
 Vol. i. p. 462 (A.-C. Libr.) : this sup- 
 position however has nothing in its 
 favour except the possible identity 
 of name; see Winer, RWB. Vol. i. 
 p. 330, notes on Phil. I.e., and Bp 
 Lightfoot on Coloss. p. 31 sq. 
 The reading Ka9iis Kal i/niO. will not 
 modify the apparent inference that 
 Epaphras was the first preacher at 
 Colossse; this would have been the 
 case if the order had been xaBii! xal 
 &iri 'Btt. i/idB. -. see Meyer in loe. 
 contrasted with Wiggers, Stud. u. 
 Krit. for 1838, p. 185. For the argu- 
 ments that the Apostle himself was 
 the founder of this Church, see 
 Lardner, Credibility, xiv. Vol. 11. p. 
 472 sq. ; for replies and counter- 
 arguments, Davidson, Introd. Vol. 11. 
 p. 402 sq. crvvSovXov] 
 
 fellow-servant, i. e. of our common 
 master, Christ : comp. ch. iv. 7. This 
 and the further specification in the 
 pronominal clause seem designed to 
 confirm and enhance the authority 
 of Epaphras, rb d^ibviarov ivrevdev 
 SeUvvai TOV 6,vSpbs, Theoph., comp. 
 Theod. iirJp ij|j.«i>v] in 
 
 our behalf, i.e. as representing us, 
 and acting for us (the V"" in this 
 case perhaps referring mainly to the 
 Apostle: comp. ver. i), in the minis- 
 tration of the Gospel. If v|j,uv be 
 adopted (but see critical note), the 
 meaning would seem to be, ' pro 
 vestra salute,' Daven., — not 'in your 
 place,' a transl. grammatically (Phi- 
 lem. 13, see notes on Gal. iii. 13) but 
 not historically permissible, as this 
 would imply that Epaphras had been 
 
124 
 
 nP02 K0AASSAEI2. 
 
 8 Toy virep ^jnwv SiaKovoi tov 'Kpiarov, 6 koL StiXwaraf 
 fifuv Trjv v/Jiwv ayairriv ev TlvevixaTi. 
 
 A^ „ ,,.»,iv»» We pray that ye may be 
 
 la TOVTO Kai ilft.eii, a(p 1i ym^epa^ fruitful in good works, 
 
 7. riii.Qv] The authority in support of this reading certainly cannot be 
 pronounced 'overwhelming' (Lightf. p. 30 note: perhaps slightly modified, 
 p. 317). The fact that the versions are, nearly all, in favour of iiiSp must 
 have its due weight. After careful reconsideration of the arguments, external 
 and internal, it would seem right to decide in favour of the very clearly 
 preponderant testimony of the MSS., and to adopt the reading of the text. 
 So Lachm,., Treg., Rev., Waste, and Hor(,— but all with margins: Rec, 
 Tiseh. , and former edd. of this Commentary, v/iuv. 
 
 sent to Rome to minister to the Apo- 
 stle (Henoch. ), — a supposition which 
 certainly needs confirmation. 
 
 8. 6 Kal Sr|Xu(ras] wlio also made 
 known ; further and accessory state- 
 ment of the acts of Epaphras. The 
 ri/uv here seems to resume its wider 
 reference, and to include both the 
 Apostle and Timothy; see notes on 
 ver. 3. Ti]v v(ji. ay. kv 
 
 IIv«v|j,OTi.] your love in the Spirit; 
 not merely love towards the Apostle 
 (Theoph., ailoum.,andappy. Chrys.), 
 but ' brotherly love ' in its most ge- 
 neral meaning, in which that towards 
 St Paul was necessarily included; 
 ' erga me et omnes Christianos, ' Corn, 
 a Lap. This love is characterized as 
 being ' in the (Holy) Spirit ' (comp. 
 Eom. xiv. 17, x"?"' ^'' n». ^yi'V); it 
 was from Him that it arose (comp. 
 Bom. XV. 30, ayAirri rod Hv.), and it 
 was only in the sphere of His blessed 
 influence (surely not iv instrumental, 
 ' a Sp. div. exoitatum,' Fritz. Rom. 
 Vol. III. p. 203) that it was genuine 
 and operative; at ye aWai 6voij.a 
 Aydirrji Ipco""^' /ti""", Chrys. CEcu- 
 menius suggests the right antithesis 
 {oi aapKiKiiv, dXM irvevfiaTiK-riv), but 
 dilutes the force by the adjectival 
 solution : the omission of the article 
 before iv Uv. is perfectly in accord- 
 ance with N.T. usage, and preserves 
 more complete unity of conception; 
 
 see Winer, Gr. § 20. i. On the term 
 aydirri, see Eeuss, Theol. Chr€t. iv. 
 19, Vol. II. p. 203 sq., the excellent 
 article of Cremer, BiU.-Theol. Wor- 
 terb. p. 12 sqq., and Harless, Chr. 
 Eth. § 19 5, p. 163 sqq. (Transl.). 
 
 The Pbbson of Chkist (oh. i. 9 — 23). 
 9^23. Christ the creator and re- 
 conciler. 9. Aid TovTo] On this ac- 
 count ; ' because, as we hear, ye have 
 such faith, and have displayed such 
 love ; ' KaBdwep iv tois dyuaiv iKelvovs 
 (ndXio-Ta dieyelpo/iev rois iyyis ovras 
 T^s vIkitjs' ovrio S^ koX 6 IlauXos to^tovs 
 liiXiaTaivapaKaKa Tois tAttA^ok Korwp- 
 eoiKdrns Chrys.: see esp. Eph. i. 15. 
 Thus the ' causa impulsiva ' (Daven.) 
 of the Apostle's prayer is this Chris- 
 tian progress on the part of his con- 
 verts; the mode of it is warmly ex- 
 pressed by the intensive oi iravo/Jisda 
 K.T.X.; the subject (blended with the 
 purpose of it) by tva TXripoidTJTe k.t.X. 
 Kol ij|J.eis] we also, ' Timothy and I 
 on our parts;' gentle contrast be- 
 tween the Colossians and their prac- 
 tical display of vital religion, and the 
 reciprocal prayer of the Apostle and 
 his helper. Kal has here its slightly 
 contrasting force, and is clearly to be 
 joined with iipiets, not toCto, as De 
 W. ; see notes on Phil. iv. 12. 
 d<|)' i\s K.T.X.] from the day that we 
 heard it; incidental definition of the 
 time, with reference to aKoiaavTcs, 
 
I. 8, 9. 
 
 125 
 
 ana thankiul for re- » /_ ' //»«««-. 
 
 demption in Christ,— l/KOl/ffa/iCI', OV ITaVOfJieua Vireo VfltOV 
 who is the creator and , < 1 / rf 
 
 reconciler of all things; iroOiTeVyoiJLeVOl KUl aiTOVUeVOl CPU 
 and who has also recon- ' '»• 
 
 *^®*^°"' irXijpiodyJTe rr/v eirlyvuxTiv tov Qekfi- 
 
 fiaroi avTOv ev iracrti crocpta Koi a-vveerei irvev/naTiK^, 
 
 ver. 4, not d<fi ^s ij/t. ■^Koiaare, ver. 6 
 (Huth.), which may be echoed in the 
 present clause, but, from the differ- 
 ence of the subjects of the verb, is 
 not directly referred to. 
 OV irav6|u6a k.t.X.] See the exactly 
 similar affectionate hyperbole in Eph. 
 i. 16: oi ju/oc rj/iipav vtrepevxi/ieBa, 
 oiSi Sio, oi Tpels, Ohrys. On this 
 idiomatic use of the part., which as 
 usual points to a state supposed to 
 be already in existence, see notes and 
 reff. on Eph. i. 16, and for a general 
 investigation of the union of the 
 part, with the finite verb, see the 
 good treatise of Weller, Bemerh. z. 
 Gr. Synt. p. 11 sq. Kal 
 
 alTovfuvoi.] and making our petition; 
 the more special form of the more 
 general wpoirevx; see Mark xi. 24, 
 and Trench, Synon. Part. 11. § 1. 
 The present passage seems to confirm 
 the view expressed in notes on Eph. 
 vi. 18, that irpoffevxv (and irpocreuxo- 
 luu) is not merely prayer for good 
 things (comp. Andrewes, Serm. Vol. 
 V. p. 358, A.-C. Libr.), but denotes 
 prayer in its most general aspects. 
 On the exact force of 'iva, which has 
 here its secondary teUc force, and in 
 which the subject of the prayer is 
 blended with the purpose of making 
 it, see notes on Eph. i. 17. Meyer, 
 as usual, too strongly presses the 
 latter idea. tijv lirCyvoKriv k.t.X.] 
 the full knowledge of His will, — of 
 God's will, the subject of airoS aufS- 
 ciently transpiring in irpoa-evx. k.t.\. 
 The aecus. iirlyv. is that of the re- 
 moter, or, as it is sometimes termed, 
 the 'quantitative' object in which 
 the action of the verb has its realiza- 
 
 tion, see Winer, Gr. § 32. 5, and 
 notes on Phil. i. 11, where this con- 
 struction is discussed. On the mean- 
 ing of iirlypoKrip, not barely ' Kennt- 
 nisB ' (comp. Biick. on Bom. i. 28, 
 Olsh. 071 Eph. i. 17), but 'Brkennt- 
 niss,' ' perfecta cognitio,' Daven., see 
 notes on Eph. i. 17, and on i Cor. 
 xlii. 1 2. The remark of Alf . (on ver. 
 6) is appy. just, that the force of the 
 compound can hardly be expressed in 
 English, but the distinction between 
 ^xwcris and iirlyvoiffLS (opp. to Biick. 
 on Rom. i. 28, Olsh. on Eph. i. 8) 
 seems none the less certain ; see notes 
 on 2 Tim.ii. 25 (Transl.). The former, 
 as De W. rightly suggests, points to 
 a mere unpractical and theoretical, 
 the latter to a full and living know- 
 ledge; see Wordsw. on ver. 10. 
 Tot) 6e\. aiiToii] Obviously not with 
 any special reference, 5ra H rbv Tloy 
 iTen^j/ev, but simply and generally. 
 His will, — not only in reference to 
 ' credenda,' but also and perhaps 
 more particularly (Theod.) to ' a- 
 genda;' comp. ver. 10, and see Da- 
 venant in loe. Iv irdo-g k.t.X.] 
 
 in all spiritual wisdom and under- 
 standing, or perhaps more exactly, 
 though less literally, 'in aU wisd. 
 and underst. of the Spirit,' irvevji. 
 referring to the Holy Spirit (^th.- 
 Pol.), the true source of the tro0fa 
 and aiveffis, see notes on Eph. i. 3 ; 
 comp. Bom. i. 11, i Cor. ii. 13, al. 
 Thus then jrao-r; (as expressly Syr., 
 Mth. [Piatt], Copt.) and wevii.aTi.Ky 
 (comp. Chrys.) refer to both substan- 
 tives, the extensive irAaji referring to 
 every exhibition or manifestation of 
 the (roc/>. KoX am. (see notes ore Eph, 
 
126 
 
 nP02 KOAA22AEI2. 
 
 lo irepiTraTija-ai a^lwf rov Kvplov els iraaav apearKeiav, ev 
 Travr). epytp ayadw Kapiro(popovvTes koI av^avo/ievoi r^ 
 
 lo. jrepiTTttT'^o-oi] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, 
 on greatly preponderating authority : Bee. adds vftas. 
 
 I. 8) while irreviiartK^ points to the 
 eharaeteristios and origin of both. 
 The clause is not purely instrumental, 
 but represents the mode in which, 
 or the concomitant influences under 
 which the irXTjpaBTJvM rfiv iirlyv. was 
 to take place: this aoipla k. aiv. was 
 not to be avdpiairlvri (i Cor. ii. 13) or 
 ffapKLKri (2 Cor. i, 12), but iri/eufrnTiKT], 
 — inspired by and sent from the 
 Holy Spirit; comp. Eph. i. 3, and 
 notes, where however the instrum. 
 force of ip is more distinct. 
 
 With regard to o-o^la and o-rfcecris, 
 both appear to have a practical refer- 
 ence (see esp. Daven.) ; the former 
 however is a general term, the latter 
 (the opp. of which is dyvoia, Plato, 
 Eep. n. p. 376 e) its more special 
 result and application ; see Harless 
 on Eph. i. 8, and comp. Beck, Seelenl. 
 
 II. 19, p. 60. Between aiv. and 0po- 
 vriaLs (Luke i. 17, Eph. i. 8) the dif- 
 ference is very slight; trwcins is 
 perhaps more displayed in practi- 
 cally embracing a truth (Mark xii. 
 33, Eph. iii. 4), <j>pov. more in bring- 
 ing the mind to bear upon it ; comp. 
 notes ore Eph. i. 8, Beck, I. c, p. 61, 
 and Bp Lightfoot on this verse. 
 
 10. irepLiraTilirat k.t.X.] that ye 
 loalh worthily of the Lord; purpose 
 and object (fca, Theod., comp. The- 
 oph.), not result (Steiger, al.) of the 
 irXijpoiBTJvai, specified by the ' infin. 
 epexegeticus ; ' see Winer, Gr. § 44. 
 I, Bemhardy, Synt. ix. p. 365. For 
 exx. of dflws with the gen., see Eph. 
 iv. I, Phil. i. 27, I Thess. ii. 12, 
 and the exx. collected by Eaphel, 
 Annot. Vol. 11. p. 527. Lastly, Kvplov 
 is not = eeoO (Theod.), but, as appy. 
 
 always in St Paul's Epp., refers to 
 our Lord ; see Winer, Gr. § 19. i. 
 In the Gospels, 2 Pet. and James, 
 where it stands alone it commonly 
 refers to God, but in i Pet. ii. 13 
 (the other exx. are quotations) to 
 Christ. «ls irao-av apia-K.] 
 
 unto all (every form of) pleasing, 
 ' in omne quod placet,' Clarom., i.e. 
 ' to please Him in all things,' 'iva 
 ovTia fiTTe liVre dia ir&vrwv apiaKeai 
 T<f Bey [Kvpliji], Theoph. On this 
 use of dpia-Keia, ' studdum plaeendi,' 
 Beng. (an fa. Xeyo/j.. in the N. T.), 
 see Loesner, Obs. p. 361, where there 
 will be found several illustrative exx. 
 from Philo, the most pertinent of 
 which are, de Mund. Opif. § 30, Vol. 
 !• P- 35 (S'i- Mang.), irivra koX \iyuv 
 Koi irp&TTeLV iairoiSa^ev els dpicKeiav 
 ToO urwrpbs KoX ^atrihibjs, and de 
 Sacrif. § 8, Vol. 11. p. 257, 5ii iraadv 
 Uvai T&v eis opidKeiav bSav. On the 
 extensive Tras, see above, and notes 
 ore Eph. i. 8. ev itovtI Spvcij 
 
 (17.1 in every good worh } sphere in 
 which the Kapwo^opla is manifested. 
 This clause is not to be connected 
 with the preceding e& apiffKemv, as 
 Syr., Chrys., Theoph., but with 
 the following xapiratpop., as Vulg., 
 Goth., Syr.-Phil., Theod., and the 
 majority of modern commentators. 
 The construction is thus perfectly 
 symmetrical, each participle being 
 associated with a modal or instru- 
 mental predication. The participles, 
 it need scarcely be said, do not be- 
 long to T\-qp. (Beng.), — a construc- 
 tion which Schwartz quaintly terms 
 a ' oarnificinam,' but with the infin., 
 the participle having relapsed into 
 
I. lO, II. 
 
 127 
 
 iiriyvcoarei tov Qeov, ev Trao-jj Svvd/iei Swa/ULOvfievoi kuto. ii 
 TO (foctTOS t5? So^iji auTOV eii iraa-av vtrofiovriv Kat fia- 
 
 lo. T-y iiriyviiaa} So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Sort, 
 on very greatly preponderating authority: Rec, els rijv iirlivaciv. In N", 
 many Versions, Chrys., al., iv is inserted before ry iiriyvuKrei,, clearly on 
 no real evidence, but as in explanation of the ill-understood instrumental 
 dative. 
 
 the nom.; see Winer, Gr. § 63. 2, 
 and notes on Eph. iii. 18, iv. 2. 
 Kal av|avo)iEvoi k.t.X.] and increas- 
 ing hy the full knowledge of God. 
 The iirlyva<ns Qeov was the instru- 
 ment by which the growth was in- 
 creased. The reading of Rec, els 
 ri/v iirlyv., is not exegetically unten- 
 able, as iirlyv. may be viewed with a 
 kind of reciprocal reference as the 
 measure of the moral ad^ais (see 
 Mey. in loc. and comp. Eph. iv. 15), 
 but the weight of external evidence, 
 if not also of internal, is decidedly 
 against it; see critical note. 
 
 II. Iv ird<r(| K.T.X.] heing strength- 
 ened with all (every form of) strength ; 
 third participial clause parallel to 
 and in co-ordination with ev iravrl 
 K.T.X. 'Ek here seems purely instru- 
 mental (contrast ver. 9), the action 
 being considered as involved in the 
 means; see Jelf, Gr. § 62^. 3: with 
 this may be compared the simple 
 dat. in Eph. iii. 16, see notes in loc, 
 Alford regards iv as denoting the 
 element, Siva/us being subjective: 
 this is possible; the instrumental 
 force however seems clearly recog- 
 nized by Theod. , ry Belg, /Sottj Kparv- 
 vo/ievoL, and appears to be more sim- 
 ple and natural. The simple form 
 dvvafwu occurs only here and Heb. 
 xi. 34 in the N. T. (see Psalm Ixviii. 
 29, Eccles. X. 10, Dan. ix. 27), 4vdv- 
 KO/iow being the more usual form. 
 Kara ri Kpdros k.t.X.] according to 
 the powej- of His glory; not ' His 
 glorious power,' Auth., Beza, al., but 
 
 ' the power which is the peculiar 
 characteristic of His glory,' the gen. 
 belonging to the category of the gen. 
 possessivus; comp. notes on Eph.i. 6. 
 The prep. Kari represents, not the 
 source (Daven.), nor the motive 
 (Steig.), but, as usual, the norma, in 
 accordance with which, and in cor- 
 respondence with which, the rb dvva- 
 fiovv would be effected. The power 
 which is the attribute of the glory of 
 God indicates the measure and de- 
 gree in which the Colossiaus will be 
 strengthened ; oix aTrKws, 0i)crJ, Svpa- 
 fwuffde, d\X' (is elKbs Tods oiirws 
 Iffxvpi^ SeffTTOTTj dov\e6ovTas, Chrys. 
 On the deriv. of Kparos, see notes on 
 Eph. i. 19, and on the meaning of 
 Sofa as applied to God (the divine 
 power and fulness as manifested to 
 men) see Oremer, Bibl.-Theol. Wor- 
 terb. s.v. p. 207 sq. els irao-ov 
 
 K.T.X.] unto all patience and long- 
 suffering; i.e. 'to ensure, to lead 
 you into, every form of patience and 
 longsufEering,' ' ut procreet in nobis 
 [vobis] patientiam,' dc, Daven., — 
 the prep,, as usual, marking the final 
 destination of the SvvaiiomBat. The 
 distinction between these words is 
 not very clear: neither that of Chrys. 
 (fiaKpoOv/ila irphs aXKifKovs, iiro/Mvii 
 irpis Tois ^fu), nor that quoted but 
 not adopted by Daven., — utto/z. ad 
 ilia mala quae a Deo infiiguntur, 
 /MKpoB. ad ilia quse ab hominibus in- 
 feruntur, — is quite satisfactory, as 
 both, on different sides, seem too 
 restrictive. Perhaps vTroiiov^ is more 
 
128 
 
 nPOS K0AA2SAEI2. 
 
 12 KpoOv/jilav, ftera j^aoaj ev-^apia-rovvTeg rm Tlarpt tw 
 
 general, designating that ' hrave pa- 
 tience,' — not 'endurance,' with which 
 the Christian ought to bear all trials, 
 whether from God or men, from with- 
 in or without (see notes on 2 Tim. ii. 
 10, and on Tit. ii. 2), while imxpoO. 
 points more to forbearance, whether 
 towards the sinner (see on Eph. iv. 2), 
 the gaiusayer, or even the persecutor : 
 see on 2 Tim. iii. 10, and Trench, 
 Synon. § 53. [ictA xO'P'^s is 
 
 joined by Theodoret, Olsh., De W., 
 and others (so also Treg., Rev., 
 Westc. and Hart), with the preceding 
 clause; so appy. Vulg., Copt., Goth., 
 Syr.-Phil., and ffith. Viewed alone, 
 this connexion seems very plausible, 
 — the viro/i. and /laKp. are. to be asso- 
 ciated with joy, the resignation is to 
 be genuinely Christian, comp. Daven. 
 As however each preceding clause 
 commences with a defining preposi- 
 tional adjunct, and as both vwo/iov^ 
 and naKpoB. are perfectly distinct 
 and are commonly used, whether in 
 juxtaposition (2 Cor. vi. 4, 6, 2 Tim, 
 iii. 10) or separately (Eom. v. 3, 
 2 Cor. xii. 12, al. ; Gal. v.'22. Col. iii. 
 12, al.), without any further defini- 
 tion, it seems more natural with Syr., 
 Chrys., Theoph., (Ecum., and re- 
 cently Mey. (so also Lachm., Tisch.), 
 to connect the defining words with 
 ei)xa/)'<rroC;'Tes. 
 
 12. ei\. T^ ILwrpl] giving thanks 
 to the Father, scil. ' of our Lord 
 Jesus Christ ; ' participial clause, ob- 
 viously not dependent on oi5 iraioiJ,. 
 ver. 9 (Chrys., Theoph.), but co-ordi- 
 nate with the preceding clauses. The 
 meaning of eixap. is well discussed 
 by Boeoth, Corp. Inscr.Yoh i. p. 521: 
 it is there stated to have four mean- 
 ings ; {a) Attic, ' gratifican, ' x^P'" 
 SiSoVoi; (6) non-Attic, 'gratias habere 
 vel referre,' but see Demosth. ck Cor. 
 
 p. 257. 2; {c) f gratias agere verbis,' 
 used by Polyb. (xvi. 25.1, xviii. 26. 4, 
 XXX. II. i) and later writers; (d) 
 ' gratias referre simul et agere grati- 
 ficando,' found in certain inscriptions : 
 see also notes on Phil. i. 3. t^ 
 
 iKavioiravTi, k.t.X.] who made us meet 
 for the portion of the inheritance of 
 the saintsinlight. These words deserve 
 some consideration. In the first place 
 UavilnravTi is not ' qui dignos fecit,' 
 Vulg., but ' qui idoneos nos fecit,' Syr., 
 comp. iEth. ; see 2 Cor. iii. 6, 8s Kal Ud- 
 i/oiffev ri/ias, where the meaning is per- 
 fectly clear. Again the part, has not 
 here a causal force ' quippe qui,' Mey. 
 (comp. Theod.,6Vi Koivavois dviipripe), 
 — a meaning which-is precluded by the 
 presence of the article (see notes on 
 Eph. i. 12), but is distinctly predica- 
 tive, and somewhat solemnly descrip- 
 tive ; iroXi rb pdpos iSet^er, Chrys. 
 The principal difficulty however lies 
 in the construction, as ip rf iparl may 
 admit of at least four connexions, 
 (a) with iKavibaavTi, in an instru- 
 mental (Mey.) or semi-modal sense, 
 as appy. Chrys., CEoum., Theoph., 
 who explain tjiwrl !ts=yvi!iaei.; (6) 
 with rriv /ieplSa (Beng. ), hi having a 
 local force, and defining the position 
 of the ftepk; (c) with dyiui/, iv ^uirl 
 designating their abode; comp. Grot.; 
 lastly and most probably, (d) with 
 KX^pov, or more exactly )tXi}/)ou TtSv 
 aylav, the gen. specifying the pos- 
 sessors, and so indirectly the cha- 
 racter of the KKrjpos, the prepositional 
 clause its ' situm et conditionem,' 
 Corn, a Lap. Of these (a), though 
 ably defended by Meyer, is harsh and 
 improbable; (6) causes a dislocation 
 in the order, unless /iep. k.t.X. be all 
 taken as one idea (Alf.), in which 
 case the omission of the art. is not 
 perfectly satisfactory; (c) gives to 
 
12, 13- 
 
 129 
 
 iKavweravTi ^/Ota? ety riji/ fiepiSa tov KKtjpou TftJi/ dylwv ev 
 T9) (f)U)Ti, oy eppvtraTO rina.^ eK T^y i^ovo'ias tov (Tkotovs, 13 
 
 12. ■^/iSs] So iJec, Lachm., Treg. (with marg.), iJcu. (with marg.), on 
 preponderating authority : Tisch., Westc. and Hort (with marg.), i5/ias. 
 
 Twv &yim> an undue prominence, 
 comp. Alf. ; (d) on the contrary seems 
 to give to K\iipov Tuv h,y. exactly the 
 qualifying, or possibly localizing de- 
 finition it requires, and preserves a 
 good antithesis with k^. tov (tkStovs, 
 ver. 13, which (o) especially obscures ; 
 comp. Acts xxvi. 18. The art. before 
 iv Tip ipdirl is not needed, as (cXijp. 
 tSv ay. if Tifi 0. forms a single idea ; 
 see Winer, Gr. § 20. 2. We retain 
 then (d) withDe W., perhaps Theod., 
 and appy. the majority of interpp. 
 There remain only a few details for 
 consideration. tov KXijpov] 
 
 the inheritance, Acts xxvi. 18; K\!jpos 
 being properly ' a lot ' (Matth. xxvii. 
 35), thence anything obtained by lot 
 (comp. Acts i. 17), and so, with a 
 greater latitude, anything assigned 
 or apportioned (toVos, KTTJixa, ov<rla ij 
 Xaxynos, Suid.), whether officially (t 
 Pet. V. 3 ; 'cleros appellat particulares 
 ecclesias,' Calv.), or, as here, a pos- 
 session and inheritance; compare 
 
 Heb. n^ClJ. The K\ijpos iv t^ </>. is 
 represented as the joint inheritance 
 of the saints, of which each individual 
 has his iiepl6a. The derivation is un- 
 certain ; perhaps from KXdeiv, i.e. a, 
 ' broken-oif ' portion (Pott, Etym. 
 Forsch. Vol. 11. p. 597), or, less pro- 
 bably, from Sansor. Jen, with sense 
 of 'casting, or parting off' (Benfey, 
 Wurzellex. Vol. ii. p. 172). Its more 
 specific use iu ecol. writers is well 
 illustrated by Suicer, Thesaur. a. v. 
 Vol. II. p. no sq. Iv T^ ^arl] 
 
 It is not necessary to refer this spe- 
 cifically to the heavenly realm : 0c3s 
 marks its characteristics on the side, 
 not merely of its glory (Huth., comp. 
 
 E. 
 
 Bp Hall, Invis. World, 11. 5), but, 
 as the antithesis suggests, of its es- 
 sential purity and perfections ; comp. 
 I John i. 5. This blessed inheritance 
 may be entered upon in part even 
 here on earth. For a good sermon on 
 this text, see Beveridge, Serm. 11. 
 Vol. VI. p. 399. 
 
 13. 8s 4ppiio-ttTo K.T.X.] Apposi- 
 tional relative-sentence (Winer, Gr. 
 § 60, 7), introducing a contrasted 
 amplification of the preceding clause, 
 and preparing for a transition to the 
 doctrine of the Person, the glory, and 
 the redeeming love of Christ, ver. 
 14 — 20. The special meanings that 
 have been assigned to ifi^ia-aro (' eri- 
 puit; plus hoc est quam liberavit; 
 ...eripiuntur ssepe inviti,' Zaneh.), 
 though in part philologically defen- 
 sible (see Buttm. Lexil. s. v. § 53. i, 
 2), cannot be certainly maintained 
 in the N. T., where for the most part 
 the idea of ' dragging from a crowd of 
 enemies ' (comp. Luke i. 74, 2 Tim. 
 iii. II, iv. 17; — surely not in refer- 
 ence to unwilling persons) passes into 
 the more generic idea of ' saving ; ' 
 see Buttm. I. c. 3. The remark of 
 Theoph. is much more in point ; oiK 
 eTire di i^ipaXev, dXX' ifipvaaro, deiK- 
 viis on (lis alxf^XuyrOL iraXaiirojpov- 
 lieBa. The form ipiuaro is adopted 
 here by Tisch., Treg., Westc. and 
 Hort, with good, but appy. not 
 preponderant, authority. We retain 
 therefore ifipia-aro with Bee, Lachm., 
 Rev.: see 2 Tim. iii. 11, iv. 17. 
 Ttjs e|oiio-£as toO o-kot.] the power of 
 darkness; the power which is pos- 
 sessed and exerted by Darkness, — 
 not however used merely subjectively, 
 
 K 
 
130 
 
 nP02 K0AA22AEI2. 
 
 KOI fierea-Triaev ety t))i/ ^aarCKelav rov vlov t^s a^aTriy? 
 14 avTOv, ev (p ej^ofiev t^v airoKxirpwaiv, Trjv acpeaiv twc 
 
 14. Ti)v &vo\vTpio(ni'] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Sort, 
 on vastly preponderating authority : Rec. adds Sid, rov aifiaros airoO. 
 
 rrjs TrXaxi;?, Chrys. i, but representing 
 evil and sin viewed objectively as the 
 antithesis of (pas, i.e. rov Siap6\ov 
 TTJs TvpavvtSos, Chrys. 2, Theod. 
 |j.er^o-T>i<r«v] translated, removed us; 
 redemption in its further and posi- 
 tive aspects. The verb clearly in- 
 volves a local reference, the removing 
 from one place and fixing in another ; 
 we were taken out of the realms of 
 darkness and transferred to the king- 
 dom of light; see Joseph. Antiq. ix. 
 II. I, Tois olKTiTopas fieri aTifdev els 
 r-qv airov ^acrCKdav. The further 
 idea ' migrare cogit ex natali solo,' 
 Daven., though theologically true, is 
 not necessarily involved in the word, 
 els Tijv Pao-iXeCav] The term ^an- 
 \eta has here a reference neither 
 purely metaphorical {e.g. the Church ; 
 comp. Huth.), nor ethical and inward 
 Olsh. ; Luke xvii. 21), nor yet ideal 
 and proleptic (Mey.), — but, as the 
 image involved in iieriar. suggests, 
 semUocal and descriptive. Nor is 
 this wholly future ; the viol rov ipdrros, 
 the pure and the holy (comp. Matth. 
 V. 8, Heb. xii. 14), even while tarrying 
 in these lower courts, are the subjects 
 of that kingdom, the ' denizens ' of 
 that ToXlrcvim (Phil. iii. 20), the 
 sharers of that vloBeala (Eph. i. 5), 
 just as the viol rijs airaffelas are even 
 here on earth the occupants of the 
 realm of darkness and the vassals of 
 its Koff/jioKpiropes (Eph. vi. 12). A 
 long and elaborate treatise on the 
 ^aiTiXela 0eoO will be found in Com- 
 ment. Theol. Vol. II. p. 107—173: 
 comp. notes and reff. on Gal, v. 21 
 and on i Cor. iv. 20. rrjs 
 
 d-ydiTTis oiroC] of His love, i.e. who 
 
 is the object of it, whom it embraces. 
 This genitive has received different 
 explanations; it has been regarded 
 as [a) a gen. of the characterizing 
 quality (comp. Winer, Gr. § 34. 3. b), 
 in which it differs little from Ayawri- 
 Tos, Matth. iii. 17, Mark xii. 6, al., 
 orfjyaTrrinivos, Eph.i. 6, comp. Chrya.; 
 (6) a species of gen. originis, dyarri 
 being considered more as an essence 
 than an attribute; see August, de 
 Trin. xv. 19. 37 (cited by Est. and 
 Just.), and Olsh. in loc; (c) the gen. 
 of the remoter object (comp. Winer, 
 Gr. § 30. 2), 'the son who has His 
 love,' Steiger, comp. Wordsw.; or 
 simply and more probably, {d) the 
 gen. mbjecti, dyaTrris being classed 
 under the general head of the posses- 
 sive gen. ; comp. Kriiger, Sprachl, 
 § 47. 7. 7 : De W. and Mey. compare 
 Gen. XXXV. 18, uios dSvpris piov. It has 
 been thought that the title is specially 
 selected to imply some reference to the 
 vloBeala (Huth.); this is possible, but 
 the context and a comparison with 
 Eph. i. 6, 7, do not favour the sup- 
 position. 
 
 14. Iv ^] in iohom; certainly not 
 ' by whom,' but ' in ' Him as the 
 living source of redemption : see notes 
 on Eph. i. 7. ^xof'^'' '■''1'' 
 
 ttiroX.] tec are having the redemption, 
 not ' our redemption,' Alf., but ' the 
 red.,' or with idiomatic omission of 
 the art., 'redemption,' Auth., — the 
 reference being to redemption from 
 the wrath and punitive justice of God 
 in its most comprehensive significa- 
 tion, whether specially ours or com- 
 mon to us and to all mankind. The 
 prep, dirb is not intensive {om elre 
 
I. 14, 15. 
 
 131 
 
 afjLapTiwv' 
 
 OS ecTTiv etKuiv tov Qeov tov aopdrov, 15 
 
 'Kvrpuffi.v, dXV diroK., iSffre /iijSJ ■ire<re!i' 
 Xonrov, Chrys.), but, with its usual 
 force {' separationis remotionisque po- 
 testas,' Winer, Verb. Comp. iv. 5), 
 points to tlie punislunent and divine 
 ■wrath from which we were redeemed 
 in Christ and by His blood. On the 
 four degrees of redemption, — viz. (a) 
 payment of ransom for all, (6) admis- 
 sion into the Church, (e) exemption 
 from the tyranny of sin here, and [d) 
 exemption from hell and death here- 
 after, — see Jackson, Greed, ix. 5, Vol. 
 virr. p. 218 sq. (Oxf. 1844). For other 
 details see notes on Eph. i. 7. rijjv 
 a<|iE<riv TOV djiapT.] the forgiveness of 
 our sins ; apposition to the preceding 
 T^K airoX. , defining more exactly its na- 
 ture and signifioande. On the distinc- 
 tion between a<pejis and Trdpe<ns, see 
 Trench, Synon. § 33, and on that 
 between a/iaprlai and irapairTd/uiTa, 
 notes on Eph. i. 7, and Hienoh, Symm. 
 §66. 
 
 15. 6's eoTiv K.T.X.] There now 
 follows, after a moment's pause, a 
 detailed description of the person of 
 Christ, His dignity, and His exalta- 
 tion, for which the preceding verse 
 and the aUusion to /Sao-iXeia in ver. 
 13 form a suitable preparation. As 
 this forms one ofthe three important 
 passages in St Paul's Epp. (Eph. i. 
 20—23, Phil. ii. 6 — 11) in which the 
 doctrine of the person of Christ is 
 especially unfolded, both the general 
 divisions and the separate details 
 wiUrequire very careful consideration. 
 With regard to the former, it seems 
 scarcely doubtful that there is a two- 
 fold division, and that as in Phil. ii. 
 7 Kol <rx'^/*fT4 K.T.X. seemed to intro- 
 duce a new portion of the subject, so 
 here the second Kal airbs (ver. 18) 
 indicates a similar transition; and 
 further, that just as in Phil. I. c, the 
 
 first portion related to the Aoyos 
 aaapKos, the latter to the Ao'yos ivaap- 
 Kos, so here in ver. 15 — 17 the refer- 
 ence is rather to the pre-incamate 
 Son in His relation to God and to 
 His own creatures, in ver. 18 — 20 to 
 the incarnate and now glorified Son 
 in His relations to His Church : so 
 Olsh., hastily condemned by Meyer, 
 but, in effect and inferentially, sup- 
 ported by the principal Greek and 
 majority of Latin Fathers : comp. 
 Pearson, Greed, Vol. i. p. 14. See 
 contra Hofmann, Schriftb. Vol. i. 
 p. 13s, whose opposition however is 
 based on the more than doubtful sup- 
 position that Kal airos (ver. 17) is 
 dependent on the foregoing on. °0s 
 thus refers to the subject 6 vlos r^i 
 ay. avTov in its widest and most com- 
 plex relations, whether as Creator or 
 Bedeemer, the immediate context 
 defining the precise nature of the 
 reference; see notes ore Phil. ii. 6. 
 The present i<TTi.v cannot be pressed 
 to imply that what is here said refers 
 to our Lord in glory after His incar- 
 nation, in contradistinction to His 
 eternal glory as the Word (Alf.). 
 elKt^v TOV ©toil K.T.X.] the image of 
 the invisible God; not 'an image,' 
 Wakef., or ' image,' Alf., — the article 
 is idiomatically omitted after i(TTLv; 
 see Middl. Gr. Art, in. 3. 2. With 
 this expression comp. 2 Cor. iv. 4, os 
 effTO/ eiKUV TOV 0eoC, Heb. i. 3, os 
 dv diravyaff/jM t^s So^^is Kal xi/""tT^p 
 rf,! vTroardaeai airoD : Christ is the 
 original image of God, ' bearing His 
 figure and resemblance as truly, fully, 
 and perfectlj', as a son of man has 
 aU the features, lineaments, and per- 
 fections, belonging to the nature of 
 man,' Waterl. Serm. Ghr. Div. v. 
 Vol. II. p. 104, see esp. Athan. Nicen. 
 Def. § 20. Without overpassing 
 
 K 2 
 
132 
 
 nPOS K0AA22AEI2. 
 
 1 6 irpmroTOKOi Trao-ij? KTtVetoy, on ev avrS SKTia-di] ra 
 
 the limits of this commentary, we 
 may observe that Christian antiquity 
 has ever regarded the expression 
 'image of God' as denoting the 
 eternal Son's perfect equality with 
 the Father in respect of His sub- 
 stance, nature, and eternity ; ' per- 
 fects sequalitatis signifioantiamhabet 
 similitudo,' Hil. de Syn. % 73, dirap- 
 dXKaKTos eUiiv toO Ilarphs TvyxA"""' 
 [on the subsequent Semi-arian use of 
 this term, see Oxf. lAlr. of Ff. Vol. 
 VIII. p. 35, Io6] Kal Tou TrpWTOTi-n-ov 
 Iktvtos x'>-P''-i'''~^Pi Alex, ap. Theod. 
 Hist. Eccl. I. 4 ; see Athan. contr. 
 Arian. i. 20, and comp. Dorner, 
 Chr. Doctr. § 91, Vol. in. p. 177 sq. 
 (Transl.). The Son is the Father's 
 image in all things save only in being 
 the Father, elKdv ^vaiKii Kal airapiX- 
 \aKT0S Kari, irdvTa optola rip irarpl, 
 TXrjv riji dyevvrjjlas Kal rrjs vaTp6- 
 TijTos, Damasc. de Imag. in. 18 ; 
 comp. Athan. contr. Arian. i. ^i. 
 The exact force of the emphatically 
 placed Tou dopdrov (' who is invisible,' 
 Wordsw.; Winer, Gr. § 20. i. a) is 
 somewhat doubtful. Does it point 
 to the primal invisibility of the 
 elKiiv (Ohrys., Orig. ap. Athan. Nic. 
 Def. § 27), or, by a tacit antithe- 
 sis, to its visibility (Daven., Mey., 
 al. ; comp. John xiv. 9, 2 Cor. iii. 18)? 
 Apparently to the latter: Christ, as 
 God and as the original image of 
 God, was of course primarily and 
 essentially dSparos (iirel oiS' av cUav 
 etri, Chrys.); but as the Son that 
 declared the Father (John i. 18), as 
 He that was pleased to reveal Him- 
 self visibly to. the Saints in the 0. T. 
 (see esp. Bull, Def. Fid. Nic. i. i. x 
 sq.). He was bparbs, the manifester 
 of Him who dwells in 0<3s dirpixnTov 
 and whom no man hath seen or can 
 see (i Tim, vi. 16); comp. Beng. 
 
 Whether there is here any approxi- 
 mation to views entertained by Philo 
 concerning the Adyos (Olsh., Alf., 
 see TJsteri, Lehrb. 11. 2. 4, p. 293) 
 is very doubtful. We must at any 
 rate remember that Philo was the 
 uninspired exponent of the better 
 theosophy of his day, St Paul the in- 
 spired Apostle revealing the highest 
 and most transcendent mysteries of 
 the Divine economy. On the 
 
 meaning of ei/ccjc, and its distinction 
 from djuo/oicris, -oi/Ma, see Trench, Sy- 
 non. § 15. TrpuTOTOKos irdoiis 
 
 ktCo-.] the firstborn before every crea- 
 ture, i. e. ' begotten, and that antece- 
 dently to everything that was cre- 
 ated;' not 'all creation,' Lightf., — 
 a rendering not fully in harmony 
 with the meaning of ttputotokos, 
 — and certainly not 'the whole 
 creation,' Waterl. (Vol. n. p. 57), 
 comp. Alf., — an inexact translation 
 which here certainly (contrast notes 
 on Eph. ii. 21) there seems no neces- 
 sity for maintaining ; comp. Middle- 
 ton, Gr. Art. p. 373. As ver. 17 
 (tt/jA irdvToiv) expressly reiterates, our 
 Lord is here solemnly defined as irpio- 
 ToTOKOs in relation to every created 
 thing, animate or inanimate, human 
 or superhuman; irpuTOT. toC Geou, 
 Kal irpb rdvTwi rue KTuriidrav, Just. 
 Martyr, Dial. §100: see also Cremer, 
 Bibl.-Theol. Worterb. s. v. tt/jwtoVo- 
 f") P- 5.591 8'iid comp. p. 382, where 
 the above rendering of /criiris is rightly 
 maintained. This notable expression 
 has received every variety of expla- 
 nation. Grammatically considered, 
 TTJs kWo-ems may perhaps be the parti- 
 tive gen., the possessive gen. (Hof- 
 mann, Schriftb. Vol. i. p. 137), or, 
 much more probably, the gen. of the 
 point of view, ' in reference to,' ' in 
 comparison to ' (Soheuerl. Synt. § 18, 
 
r. 1 6. 
 
 133 
 
 r, p. 129), the latent comparative 
 force involved in the irpuTos render- 
 ing this last genitival relation still 
 more intelligible and perspicuous ; 
 oomp. Fritz. Rom. x. 18, Vol. 11. 
 p. 421. In the first two cases, iraffa 
 KTiirts must be considered as equiv. 
 to a plural ( ' omnium creaturarum,' 
 Syr.), i. e. every form of creation 
 (oomp. Hofinann, I. c), the expres- 
 sion compared vfith irpwroToicos rav 
 veKpwv, Rev. i. 5, and (especially in 
 the last of these cases) the Arian 
 deduction, that Christ is a Krlins, 
 held to be grammatically possible ; 
 see TJsteri, Lehrb. 11. i. 4, and even 
 Eeuss, TMol. ChrSt. iv. 10, Vol. 11. 
 p. 100, both which writers use 
 language, which, without the limit- 
 ation named by Thorndike (Gov. of 
 Grace, 11. 17. 5), must be pronounced 
 simply and plainly Arian. In the 
 last case, irSo-a Krlm retains its 
 proper force, irpwroTOKos its compara- 
 tive reference, and the conclusion of 
 Athanasius, especially when viewed 
 in connexion with the context (ort 
 iv aiJry iKT., ver. 16), perfectly in- 
 evitable; aWos- ^(TTt rcjv KTtirfitiTiOVf 
 Kal Krlaixa ii,h oix iari., ktkj-ttjs 5^ 
 T&ii KTiff/idToiv, coiitr. Arian. 11. 62, — 
 a passage of marvellous force and 
 perspicuity: see also, both on this 
 and ver. 16, Pearson, Greed, Vol. 1. 
 p. 148. The term irpoiToroKos (obs. 
 not TrpuTOKTiiTTos or TrpwToirXaa'Tos) 
 is studiously used to define our Lord's 
 relation to His creatures and His 
 brotherhood with them (comp. Eom. 
 viii. 29), and is in this respect dis- 
 tinguished from /Mvoyenris which more 
 exactly defines His relation to the 
 Father ; /lovoyei/Tis /liv Sia rriv iKliarpis 
 yivvTjtTiV irpoyroTOKoi S^ 5iA ttjv els t^v 
 Krlaui avyKara^anv [condescension] 
 KoX r7,v Twv troKKi^v ade\<liOTol7j(nv, 
 Athan. contr. Arian. 11. 62 : in a word. 
 He was begotten, they were created, — 
 the gulf infinite ; yet as He stooped to 
 
 wear their outward form, so He dis- 
 dains not to institute, by the mouth 
 of His Apostle, a temporal compari- 
 son between His own generation 
 from eternity and their creation in 
 time; see Bull, Def. Fid. Nic. iii. 9. 
 9, who however appears to have mis- 
 understood the meaning of (TvyKaTa- 
 jSoffis, comp. Newman, in Oxf. Libr. 
 of Ff. Vol. VIII. p. 288. Lastly, 
 
 as there seem to be two senses in 
 Scripture in which our Lord is first- 
 born in respect of every creature, 
 viz. in its restoration after the fall 
 as well as in its first origin (see 
 Athau. ii. 63), we may possibly ad- 
 mit, as ver. 18 also partially suggests, 
 a secondary and inferential, — cer- 
 tainly not a primary (Theod.-Mops. ; 
 ^th., 'supra omnia opera'), nor 
 even co-ordinate, reference to pri- 
 ority in dignity {wpoTi/jiri(ns) : see Alf. 
 in loc, who however unduly presses 
 this reference, and by referring the 
 whole to Christ in His now glorified 
 state (so Mey.,aud Hofmann, Schriftb. 
 Vol. I. p. 135) certainly seems to 
 impair the theological force and 
 significance of this august passage. 
 For further doctrinal comments on 
 this passage see the good notes of Bp 
 Wordsworth and Bp Lightfoot, in loc. 
 16. oTi] becaiise, not ' for,' Alf., 
 a transl. better reserved for yip, — 
 logical elucidation of the preceding 
 member : He, in the sphere of whose 
 creative power all things were made 
 and on whom aU things depend, was 
 truly the irpiiirSr, iraa-qi Kriaeois, and 
 had an eternal priority in time and 
 dignity. The objections of Schleier- 
 macher [Stud. u. Krit. 1832, p. 502) 
 to the logic of this causal explanation 
 are unreasonable and pointless. 
 iv avT^] in Him, as the creative 
 centre of all things, the causal ele- 
 ment of their existence ; oomp. Winer, 
 Gr. § 50. 6. The preposition has re- 
 ceived several different explanations, 
 
134 
 
 nPOS KOAAS2AEI2. 
 
 •Travra, ev rots ovpavoU icai eiri t^J 75?> ^a opara Kai 
 
 i6. iv Tois oipamU] So Lachm., Tiseh., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, 
 on preponderating authority: Eec, and former edd. of this Commentary, 
 TO hi Tois ovpavois. The external evidence very clearly preponderates, but 
 the probability of omission owing to the ra in the TrdcTa that precedes must 
 certainly be taken into account. The rot before iwl rijs 7^5 is omitted by 
 
 Tisch., Treg. (with marg.), Bev., Westc. and Hort, on preponderating 
 authority: Bee, [Lachm.], retain ra. 
 
 three of which deserve consideration : 
 ^K has. been referred to Christ as (a) 
 the causa instrumentalis {iy=di.a), 
 creation being conceived as existing 
 in the means, Jelf, Gi: § 622. 3; (6) 
 the causa exemiplaris, the kou-hos votj- 
 rhs being supposed to be included, 
 and to have its essentiality (Olsh.) 
 in Him as the great exemplar ; (c) 
 the causa conditionalis, the act of 
 creation being supposed to rest in 
 Him, and to depend on Him for 
 its completion and realization. Of 
 these (a) is adopted by the Greek 
 commentators, but is open to the 
 serious objection that no distinction 
 is preserved between iv aurij here 
 and 5i' avroC below, which St Paul's 
 known use of prepp. (see notes on 
 Gal. i. i) would lead us certainly to 
 expect. The second (6) is adopted by 
 the schoolmen and recently by Olsh., 
 Neand. , Bisp., but is highly artificial, 
 and supported by no analogy of 
 Scripture. We therefore adopt (c) 
 which is theologically exact and sig- 
 nificant, and in which St Paul's 
 peculiar, yet somewhat varied use of 
 iv Xpi.<rTi^ with verbs (comp. 2 Cor. 
 V. 19, Gal. ii. 17, Bph. i. 4, al.) is 
 suitably maintained : compare the si- 
 milar usage of ^j', esp. with pronouns, 
 to denote the subject in which and on 
 which ('den Haltpunkt ') the action 
 depends, e.g. &< croi ttSct' lyuye crii- 
 fo/iai. Soph. Ajax, 519; see Eost u. 
 Palm, Lex. s. v. ^c, 2. b. Vol. i. p. 
 509, Bernhardy, Synt. v. 8. b, p. 210. 
 IktCo-Bti] were created, with simple 
 
 physical reference : observe the aorist 
 of the past action, as contrasted with 
 iKTiffTcu below, in which the duration 
 and persistence of the act ('per 
 effectus sues durat,' see notes on 
 Eph. ii. 8) is brought into especial 
 prominence ; oomp. i Cor. xv. 27, 
 and Winer, Gr. § 40. 4. The forced 
 ethical meaning ' were arranged, re- 
 constituted ' (Schleierm.), though lexi- 
 cally admissible, is fully disproved 
 by Meyer, who observes that (tr/fo) 
 always in the N. T. (even in Bph. ii. 
 10, 15, iv. 34) implies the bringing 
 into existence, spiritually or other- 
 wise, of what before was not. For 
 an exposition of this important text 
 see Cone. Antioch. ap. Eouth, Beliq^. 
 Sacr. Vol. 11. p. 468, referred to 
 by Wordsw. in loc. rd 
 
 ■irdvTo] all things that exist — more 
 specifically defined, first in regard 
 of place, secondly in regard of tm- 
 ture and essential characteristics. 
 On the use of the art. (' das AU '), 
 see Winer, Gr. § 18. 8. 
 ev Tois ovp. K.T.X.] in the heavens 
 and on the earth ; appended specifi- 
 cation of locality, the heavens and 
 the earth including the whole concep- 
 tion of space. The following clauses 
 specify the two classes of the all 
 things thus roughly localised, viz. 
 the visible and material, and the in- 
 visible and spiritual, — which latter 
 class is still further specified by dis- 
 junctive enumerations. The reading 
 is not perfectly certain : see critical 
 note. If the rb, be retained, the 
 
I. 1 6. 
 
 135 
 
 ra aopara, e'lre Bpovoi etre Kupior^rei eire ap-xai 
 
 reference will not be merely to intel- 
 ligent beings (Hutb.), nor to the ex- 
 clusion of things under the earth 
 (Phil. ii. lo), but as in Eph. i. lo 
 (see notes), with the fullest ampli- 
 tude, — 'all things and beings what- 
 soever and wheresoever ; ' ' hao dis- 
 tributione universam oreaturam com- 
 plectitur,' Daven. rd opam 
 
 Kttl xd. dop.] the things visible and 
 the things invisible; amplification — 
 not exclusively of the former {diSda- 
 /cet ffatp^arepov riva KctXet oipdvia etre 
 bpara [as sun, moon, and stars] dre 
 abpara, Theod.), or exclusively of the 
 latter member (dipara ttiv ■^xW ^^' 
 -yav, opard, Trayras &i/8pi!)wovs, Chrys.) 
 of the previous clause, but of both, 
 ' the visible and invisible world : ' ' in 
 ooelo visibilia sunt sol, luna, stellae; 
 invisibiUa angeli: in terra visibilia 
 plantsB, elementa, animalia; invisi- 
 bilia animjB humanje,' Daven., — un- 
 less indeed, as the following enume- 
 ration seems to imply, this last class, 
 'animse humanse,' be grouped with 
 opara (Mey.). rfre Opovoi 
 
 K.T.X.] whether Thrones, whether Do- 
 minions, whether Principalities, whe- 
 therPowers; disjunctive specification 
 of the preceding &6paTa ; ' lest in that 
 invisible world, among the many de- 
 grees of the celestial hierarchy, any 
 order might seem exempted from an 
 essential dependence upon Him, he 
 nameth those which are of greatest 
 eminence, and in them comprehend- 
 eth the rest,' Pearson, Creed, Vol. i. 
 p. 148. There seems to be no reason 
 for modifying the opinion advanced 
 in notes on Eph. i. 21, that four 
 orders of heavenly Intelligences are 
 here enumerated ; see Eeuss, Th^ol. 
 Chret. IV. 20, Vol. 11. p. 226 sq., and 
 the extremely good article in Suicer, 
 Thesaur. s. v. ayye\os, Vol. i. p. 30 
 
 — 48. By comparing this passage 
 with Eph. I. c, where the order 
 seems desoensive, we may possibly 
 infer that the $p6i>ot (not named else- 
 where inN.T., but noticed in Dionys. 
 Areop. de Hier., andin Test. xii. Patr. 
 p. 532, Fabric.) are the highest order 
 of blessed spirits, those sitting round 
 the eternal throne of God, KvpiSrriTei 
 the fourth, &pxal and ^fovo-Zai the 
 intermediate (Mey.), if indeed, as is 
 observed on Eph. I. c., all such dis- 
 tinctions are not to be deemed pre- 
 carious and presumptuous ; comp. 
 BuU, Serm. xii. p. 221, and Hof- 
 mann, Schriftb. Vol. i. p. 302. This 
 enumeration may have been sug- 
 gested by some known theosophistic 
 speculations of the Colossians (ch. ii. 
 18 ; see Bp Lightfoot, Commentary 
 p. 103, and notes in loo.), but not 
 improbably, as appy. in Eph. i. 21, 
 was an incidental revelation, which 
 the term dSpara evoked. That there is 
 here any spirit of impatience evinced 
 in the enumeration, and that the Apo- 
 stle is here simply repeating subjec- 
 tive opinions rather than objective 
 realities (Bp Lightf. ), is by no means 
 so certain as it is assumed to be. 
 Even if we admit that the Apostle 
 used terms which he found current, 
 there is nothing in the passage to 
 lead us to think that he regarded 
 these grades and orders as mere theo- 
 sophistic speculations. Why may 
 we not believe that he too did 
 really regard these blessed beings as 
 ' an army, one in order and degree 
 above another ' (Hooker, Eccl. Pol. i. 
 4. 2), and that this truth was in his 
 mind as he was using these words ? 
 Of the other numerous interpreta- 
 tions which these words have received 
 (see De Wette in loc.) none seem 
 worthy of serious attention. 
 
136 
 
 riPOS K0AA22AEI2. 
 
 e'/re i^ovcrlar ra 7rai/TO St' avTOV Koi eh avTOv e/cTjcr- 
 17 Tat, /cat avTOS ecmv irpo irdvTcov, /cat to iravTa ev 
 
 TO, irdvTa k.t.X.] (2/ea) aM things, 
 &a. ; Bolemu recapitulation of the 
 foregoing. The most natural punc- 
 tuation after i^ouHai, seems to be 
 neither a period nor a comma, least 
 of all a parenthesis (ending with iK- 
 KkTjslas, ver. 18, Lachm.), but, as in 
 Mill, Treg., Bev., al., a colon. 
 81' avTov Kal els avTov] through 
 Him and for Him ; resumption of iv 
 airif ixT. with a change both in 
 tense and prepositions : there the 
 Son was represented as the ' causa 
 eonditionalis ' of all things, here as 
 the ' causa medians ' of creation, and 
 the ' causa finalis ' (Daven.) or 'finis 
 ultimus' (Calov.) to which it is re- 
 ferred. It was to enhance His glory, 
 and to be subjected to His dominion 
 (comp. Matth. xxviii. 18), that all 
 things were created; els aMv Kpi- 
 fiarat 7j irdvTUv vTr6a'Ta(7is...iaffTe cb' 
 aTTOtriraad^ rijs airrov Trpovoias dTro- 
 Xw\e Kal dU^iBaprai, Chrys. We may 
 observe that the mediate creation 
 and finEil destination of the world, 
 here referred to the Son, are in Bom. 
 xi. 36 referred to the Father. Such 
 permutations deserve our serious 
 consideration ; if the Son had not 
 been G-od, such an interchange of 
 important relations could never have 
 been possible : comp. Waterl. Def. 
 Qu. XI. Vol. I. p. 383 sq., Vol. 11. 
 p. 54, 56. On the force of the perf. 
 itcnaTM, see above ; and in answer 
 to the attempts to refer this passage 
 to any figurative creation, see Pear- 
 son, Greed, Vol. 1. p. 149, 150 (ed. 
 Burt). 
 
 17. Kal airos k.t.X.] and He 
 Himself f &o. ; contrast between the 
 creator and the things created ; airbs 
 being emphatic, and Kal having a 
 gentle contrasting force (see notes ore 
 
 Phil. iv. 12) by which the tacit anti- 
 thesis involved in ainhs {'ipse oppo- 
 situm habet alium,' Herm. Dissert, 
 airos, i) between the things created 
 (ra TTocTa) and Him who created them 
 is still more enhanced : they were 
 created in time, He their creator is 
 and was before all time. It may be 
 observed that though avros appears 
 both in this and the great majority 
 of passages in the N. T. to have its 
 proper classical force (' ut rem ab 
 aliis rebus discernendam esse indi- 
 cet,' Herm. Dissert. I.e.), the use of 
 the corresponding Aramaic pronoun 
 should make us cautious in pressing 
 it in every ease. The vernacular 
 tongue of the writers of t^e N. T. 
 must have produced som^ effect on 
 their diction. ^otiv irpo 
 
 irdvTwv] is {exists) before all things, 
 not ' all beings ' (' omnes,' Vulg., 
 Clarom.) ; the priority is not in rank, 
 but, in accordance with the primary 
 meaning of TrpoiroTOKos and the im- 
 mediate context, — in tivie ; toBto 9e^ 
 ap/iotov, Ohrys. Theodoret with rea- 
 son calls attention to the expression 
 — not ^y4v€T0 irpo iravrwv, but ^ari irpb 
 irlunuiv : the Eternal Son is alike 
 pre-existent and absolutely existent ; 
 contrast John i. 14. ^v 
 
 avT^ o-vv^oT.] eonsist in Him, as the 
 causal sphere of their continued ex- 
 istence : not exactly identical with ip 
 airl^ above (Mey., Alf.), but, with 
 the very slight change which the 
 change of verb involves, in more of a 
 directly causal reference : Christ was 
 the conditional element of their crea- 
 tion, the causal element of their per- 
 sistence; comp. Heb. i. 3, (fi^pav Tfri 
 Tivra tQ p^/iari rijs dwafiews avTov, 
 The declaration, as Waterland ob- 
 serves (Serm. on Div. vii. Vol. 11. p. 
 
I. 17, 18. 
 
 137 
 
 awTo) crvvicTTijKev' /cal avTOS ia-Tiv t) Ke(j)a\h tov t! 
 (Toofxaros, riji eKKXtjcrias' oj icmv ap-j(ti, ttjOwtotoko? 
 
 164), is in fact tantamount to 'in 
 Him they live, and move, and have 
 their being ' (Acts xvii. 28), which is 
 and forms one of the great arguments 
 for the omnipresence and the preserv- 
 ing and sustaining power of Christ ; 
 see ib. Bef. Qu. xviii. Vol. 1. p. 430. 
 The verb avvtaTtaiai is well defined 
 by Eeiske, IncL Dem. (quoted by 
 Mey.), as 'corpus uuum, integrum, 
 perfectum, seoum oonsentiens, esse 
 et permanere,' comp. 2 Pet. ui. 5, 
 and [Aristot.] de Mundo, § 6, iK OeoO 
 TCL iravTa, Kixl dik deov ri^v irvy^ffTT]- 
 (ccc ; see esp. Krebs, Obs. p. 334, 
 and Loesner, Obs. p. 362, by both of 
 whom this word is copiously illus- 
 trated from Josephus and Philo ; 
 comp. also Eisner, 06s. Vol. 11. p. 
 
 259- 
 
 18. Kal avTos K.T.X.] Transition 
 to the second part, in which the rela- 
 tion of the incarnate and glorified 
 Son to His Church is declared and 
 confirmed, not perhaps without some 
 reference to the erroneous teaching 
 and angel-worship that appy. pre- 
 vailed in the Church of Colossse. 
 Airbs is thus, as before, emphatic, 
 possibly involving an antithesis to 
 some falsely imagined xe^aX-ij or xe- 
 (paXal of the Church ; ' He in whom 
 all things consist. He and no other 
 than He is the head of the Church.' 
 The emphasis, as Meyer observes, 
 rests on Ke0a\^ rather than iKK\ri<rla ; 
 it was the headship of the Church, 
 not its supposed constitution, that 
 formed the undercurrent of the er- 
 roneous teaching. tov <n»(j,. 
 T^s IkkX.] of His body, the Church, 
 TTJs IkkK. being the genitive of iden- 
 tity or apposition ; see Winer, Gr. 
 § 59. 8, Scheuerl. Synt. § 12. i, p. 82. 
 The Apostle does not say merely ' of 
 
 the Church, ' but ' of Hia body, the 
 Church,' to show, — not the (pCKavOpui- 
 irta of Christ {6{\uv rifuv olKuorepov 
 Seifai a^TOK, Chrys.), but the real, 
 vital, and essential union which ex- 
 ists between the Church and its 
 Head: comp. Eph. iv. 15, 16, and 
 notes in loc. ; see also Eom. xii. 5, 
 I Cor. X. 17, Eph. i. 23, al. 
 OS eo-Tiv] seeing He is; the relative 
 having a semi-argumentative force, 
 and serving to confirm the previous 
 declaration; see Jelf, Gr. § 836. 3. 
 "We can scarcely say that in such 
 sentences ' os is for on ' (Jelf, 1. 1., 
 Matth. Gr. § 480. c), but rather that, 
 like the more usual Sims, the simple 
 relatival force passes into the ex- 
 planatory, which almost necessarily 
 involves some tinge of causal or ar- 
 gumentative meaning ; see notes on 
 Gal. ii. 4. opxi] tJie begin- 
 
 ning, not merely in ref. to the fol- 
 lowing Tuv peKpiSv (Mey., Hofmann, 
 Schriftb. Vol. 11. i, p. 241 ; comp. 
 Theod.), nor even to the spiritual 
 resurrection (Daven.), both which 
 interpretations seem too limited ; 
 nor yet, with a general and abstract 
 reference, the ' first creative prin- 
 ciple' (Steig., Huth. ; comp. Glem.- 
 Alex. Strom. IV. p. 638,6 0e6s 3^ dvap- 
 Xos dpxv Tav Skwv iravrekfis), — but, 
 as the more immediate context and 
 the reference to our Lord's Headship 
 of His Church seem certainly to sug- 
 gest, in ref. to the new creation 
 (comp. Calv., Corn, a Lap. : 2 Cor. 
 V. 17, Gal. vi. 15), the following Trpw- 
 TOToKos iK tQv vexpuv serving to define 
 that relation more closely, and to 
 preserve the retrospective allusion to 
 irpoiTOT. in ver. 15: our Lord in His 
 glorified humanity is the dpxtyos t^s 
 |"w^s (Aotsiii. 15) to His Church, the 
 
138 
 
 nP02 KOAA2SAEIE. 
 
 e/c Twv veKowv, "va yiv^rai ev iratriv auToy ■TrpcoTevoav 
 
 beginning, source, and origin, of the 
 new and spiritual, even as He was of 
 the former and material creation; 
 see Olsh. and Biap. in loc, and 
 comp. TJsteri, Lehrb. ii. 3. 4, p. 304. 
 The plausible reading iirapxri, adopt- 
 ed by Chrys. and a few mss., is 
 a limiting gloss suggested by the 
 next clause compared with i Cor. xv. 
 20, 23. The omission of the art. 
 [inserted in B, 47] before apxv is due, 
 not to the abstract form of the word 
 (Olsh.), but simply to the preceding 
 verb subst., Middl. Gr. Art. in. 3. 2. 
 xpwToT. iK T(5v v(Kpc5v] first boi-n 
 from among the dead; not exactly 
 identical with tt/jutot. tQv veKpQv 
 Bev. i. 5 (partitive gen.), but with 
 the proper force of the preposition, 
 ' the first-born, not only 0/, but out 
 of the dead;' He left their realm 
 and came again as with a new beget- 
 ting and new birth into life (see esp. 
 Andrewes, Serm. Vol. iii. p. 5;); he 
 was the true i/irapxfi tUv KCKOifiri- 
 liivuv, I Cor. XV. 20: comp. Hof- 
 mann, Schriftb. Vol. n. i, p. 241. 
 Others had been translated, or had 
 risen to die again. He had risen with 
 glorified humanity to die no more 
 (Bom. vi. 9) : hence He is ' not called 
 simply the first that rose, but with a 
 note of generation, rpwr. ix ruy vex- 
 pQv,' Pearson, Creed, Vol. i. p. 136 
 (ed. Burt.). S!va 7evt]Toi 
 
 K.T.X. ] in order that in all things He 
 might become (not 'sit,' Vulg.) pre- 
 eminent, might take the first place, 
 ' primas teneat,' Beza, Daven.; Trac- 
 raxov irpwTor avu Trpuros, iv ry ixxXri- 
 aiq, TrpuJTOs, ^v ttj &yaaTd(rei. irpcijTos, 
 Chrys.; divine purpose (tva having 
 here its fuU telic force, comp. notes 
 on Eph. i. 17) of His being the &pxi} 
 of the new creation, and having the 
 priority in the resurrection, — a divine 
 purpose already fulfilled in its tem- 
 
 poral, and to be hereafter fulfilled in 
 all conceivable relations, when all 
 things are put under His feet, and 
 'the kingdom of the world is be- 
 come the kingdom of our Lord and 
 His Christ' (Bev. xi. 15). The tense 
 yivriTai cannot be safely pressed, as 
 in the subj. the force of the aor. is 
 considerably weakened and modified ; 
 see Bernhardy, Synt. x. 9, p. 382. 
 The verb Tpwreieiv is an air. Xeyip.. 
 in the N.T., but is not uncommon 
 elsewhere ; comp. Zech. iv. 7 (Aquil.), 
 Bsth. v. II, 2 Maco. vi. 18, xiii. 15, 
 in all which passages an idea of wpo- 
 Tlij.rj<ns seems clearly conveyed. This 
 however does not require a similar 
 meaning to be assigned to wpwroT. 
 (oomp. De W., Alf.): irpureiav was 
 to be the result, Christ's being wpa- 
 TOToKos K.T.X. was ouc of the steps 
 which led to it : oomp. Meyer in loc. 
 Iv irao-iv] in all things, surely not= 
 'inter omnes,' Beza, — a restricted 
 reference that completely mars the 
 majesty of this passage, and contra- 
 venes the force of the neuter ret 
 ■wavra in the causal sentence which 
 follows. Lastly, aiiris, as above, 
 must not be left unnoticed : ' si quis 
 aliusmortem debellasset...tum Chris- 
 tus non tenuisset primatum in omni- 
 bus,' Daven. We may observe that 
 with this clause the predications re- 
 specting Christ seem to reach their 
 climax (comp. i Cor. xv. 28), and 
 thus lead us to admit, if not to ex- 
 pect, a modification of subject in the 
 causal sentence which follows. 
 
 19. oTi] because; confirmation of 
 the divine purpose in reference to 
 Christ's precedence iv iracriv : He in 
 whom the whole TrXiJ^w/io (of the 
 8e6r7is) was pleased to reside, must 
 needs have had His precedence in all 
 things eternally designed and con- 
 templated. Iv avT^] in 
 
1. 19. 
 
 139 
 
 OTt ev avTw evSoKtja-ev irav to irX^pboixa KaToiKtjtrai 19 
 
 Him, and in Him specially ; con- 
 neoted with KaroLKHv, and put for- 
 ward in the sentence that it may 
 receive its full emphasis. The refer- 
 ence, as the context seems to show, 
 is now more especially io the incar- 
 nate Son. cvSaKT](rcv k.t.X.] 
 all the fulness (of the Godhead) was 
 pleased to dwell; 'in ipso complaouit 
 omnis plenitudo inhabitare,' Clarom. 
 The first difficulty in this profound 
 verse is to decide on the. grammatical 
 subject of eiSoKijacv. This verb, a 
 late and probably Macedonian-Greek 
 word (Sturz, deDial. Maced. p. 167), 
 has four constructions in the N. T., 
 all personal; with & and a dat. 
 (Matth. iii. 17, xvii. 5, al.: 2 Thess. 
 ii. 12 is very doubtful), with els and 
 an acous. (2 Pet. i. 17), with a simple 
 accus. (Heb. x. 6, 8), with an infin. 
 referring to the subject (Eom. xv. 26, 
 I Cor. i. 21, al., — the principal and 
 prevailing use in St Paul's Epp.) ; 
 see Fritz. Bom. x. i , Vol. 11. p. 369 
 sq., where the uses of evdox. are fully 
 investigated. In the present case 
 three subjects have been proposed ; 
 
 (a) XpuTTos, the preceding subject, 
 Tertull. Marc. v. 19, and recently 
 Conyb., and Hofm. Schriftb. Vol. 11. 
 I, p. 242, where it is fairly defended; 
 
 (b) Beos, suppUed from the context; 
 so, it can scarcely be doubted, Syr., 
 Vulg., Goth., Theod., and, by infer- 
 ence, Chrys. , Theoph., and after them 
 the bulk of modem expositors ; (c) 
 the expressed subject ttSc t6 ttXiJ- 
 pa/ia; Clarom., Copt., appy. iEth., 
 and recently Peile, and, very de- 
 cidedly, Soholef. Hints, p. 108. Of 
 these (a) involves indirect opposition 
 to strong analogies of Scripture 
 (e.g. 2 Cor. v. 19), and, equally with 
 (6), a harsh change of subject in the 
 transition to the two infinitives; 
 
 the second (6) is dogmatically correct, 
 but involves a very unusual construc- 
 tion of eiSoK. (comp. Polyb. Hist. i. 
 
 8. 4, VII. 4. 5, 2 Mace. xiv. 35), a 
 different subject to kotoik. andairo/c., 
 and further an ellipsis of a word, 
 which though not without classical 
 parallel (see Jelf, Gr. § 373. 3) would 
 here, in a passage of such dogmatical 
 importance, be in a very high degree 
 unnatural and improbable : the third 
 (c) is syntactically simple : it is also 
 in harmony with St Paul's regular 
 usage of eidoKetv when associated 
 with an infin., and, — what is still 
 more important, — both in its causal 
 connexion, the nature of the ex- 
 pressions, and the order of the words 
 (Meyer's assertion that it would 
 have been 5Vi vav rb ttX. evS. k.t.X. 
 cannot be maintained; observe also 
 the order in i Cor. i. 21, x. 5, Gal. i. 
 15), stands in closest parallel with 
 the authoritative interpr. in ch. ii. 
 
 9, on ii> avT<} KaroiKei irav to irX. t^s 
 BeoTniTos <T(iiiJ,a,TiKu)s. We seem bound 
 then to abide by (c), — possibly the 
 interp. of the ancient Latin Church : 
 it involves however, as wOl be seen, 
 some grave, though appy. not insu- 
 perable difficulties. irav 
 TO irXijpcBijio] all the fulness (of the 
 Godhead), 'omnes divinse naturae 
 divitise,' Fritz. These words have 
 been very differently explained. Lexi- 
 cally considered, irX-Z/pui/.a has three 
 possible meanings, one active, (o) im- 
 plendi actio, and two passive, (/3) id 
 quod impletum est, Bph. i. 23 (see 
 notes), and the more common (y) id 
 quo res impletur, Gal. iv. 4, Eph. iii. 
 19 (see notes on both passages), 
 which again often passes into the 
 neutral and derivative (7^) affluentia, 
 ahundantia, TrXoCros, — especially in 
 connexion with abstract genitives, 
 
140 
 
 nPOS KOAAS2AEIS. 
 
 ao Kal Si" avrov airoKaraWd^ai ra iravTa et? aurov, 
 
 Eom. XV. 29; see Fritz. Bom. xi. 12, 
 Vol. II. p. 469 sq., Hofmann, Schri/tb. 
 Vol. n. 1, p. 26. Of these (71), or 
 perhaps simply (7), alone is exegeti- 
 cally admissible. The real difficulty 
 lies in the supplemental gen. Set- 
 ting aside all doubtful and arbitrary 
 explanations, e.g. ^KfcXijcria (Theod., 
 Sever.), 'fulness of the Gentiles' 
 (Schleierm.), ' fulness of the uni- 
 verse' (Gonyb., Hofm. I. c, p. 26), we 
 have only one authoritative supple- 
 ment, TT/s SeoTr/Tos, either exactly in 
 the same sense as in ch. ii. 9, ' ple- 
 nitudo Deitatis,' or in the more 
 derivative sense, 'plenitude gratise 
 habituahs' (comp. Davenant, Mey., 
 al.). The latter of these is adopted 
 by those who advocate construction 
 (6) of eidoK., but has this great dis- 
 advantage, that it involves two in- 
 terpretations of ■n'Mipiana Beor. (here 
 in ref. to 'divina gratia,' there to 
 'divina essentia,' so Mey., Alf., al.), 
 whereas on the oonstr. of cu5o/c. al- 
 ready adopted, TrX^p. will naturally 
 be the same in both, oases, and will 
 imply ' the complete fulness and ex- 
 haustless perfection of the Divine 
 Essence,' the ' plenitude Deitatis,' — 
 an abstract term of transcendent sig- 
 nificance, involving in itself the more 
 concrete Beds, which, as will be seen, 
 seems probably to be the subject of 
 the following participial clause. 
 When we consider the context in ch. 
 ii. 9, there seem grave reasons for 
 thinking that St Paul chose this 
 august expression with special refer- 
 ence to some perverted meaning as- 
 signed to it by the false teachers and 
 theosophistic speculators at Colossaa ; 
 see Bp Lightfoot, Commentary, p. 
 103, and the detached note on ttX^- 
 pa/ia, p. 323 sqq. : comp. also Thorn- 
 dike, Cov. of Grace, 11. 15. 12. 
 
 KaroiKijarai.] to dwell; a term espe- 
 cially applied to the indwelling in- 
 fluence of the Father (comp. Eph. ii. 
 22), the Son (Eph. iii. 17), and the 
 Spirit, and both here and in ch. ii. 9 
 enhancing the personal relations iu- 
 volved in the mysterious word ttX'^- 
 pufia; ixei ^KT)<rev ovk ivipyui t« 
 dW oiala, Theoph. 
 
 20. diroKar. rd irovra] to reconcile 
 all things; iiroKar. is not 'prorsus 
 reconciliare, ' Mey. (comp. Chrys., 
 KarriKKaynivoi,, dWdreXe/ws ?Sei), but, 
 with the natural force of dTrA in similar 
 compounds (oTro/cofliffTdxeiv, iinvdei- 
 i'eiv),'inpristinamconditionemreoon- 
 ciliaudo reducere; ' see Winer, de Verb. 
 Comp. IV. p. 7, 8. The subject of the 
 inf. is of course the same as that of 
 KOToiK., i.e., grammatically consid- 
 ered, the TrX^p. above, but exegetical- 
 ly, — as the following airhv and other 
 scriptural analogies (comp. 2 Cor. v. 
 19, Eph. i. 10) seem to suggest, the 
 more definite Qebt, involved and in- 
 cluded in the mystical and abstract 
 designation. The revelation con- 
 tained in these words is of the most 
 profound nature, and must be inter- 
 preted with the utmost caution and 
 reverence. Without presuming to 
 dilute, or to assign any improper 
 'elasticity' (Mey.) to the significant 
 iiroKar. (e.g. 'reunionem creatura- 
 rum inter se invioem,' Dallseus), or 
 to limit the comprehensive and un- 
 restricted rd iravTa (e.g. 'universam 
 Ecclesiam,' Beza, 'omnes homines,' 
 Corn, a Lap.), we must guard a- 
 gainst the irreverence of far reaching 
 speculations on the reconciliation of 
 the finite and the infinite (Usteri, 
 Lehrb. 11. i. i, p. 129, Marheineke, 
 Dogm. § 331 sq.), to which this 
 mighty declaration has been sup- 
 posed to allude. This, and no less 
 
I. 20. 
 
 141 
 
 eiptjvoiroi^crai oia tov aiftaroi tov erravpov avrov, 
 avTOV, eiTe ra eiri rtji yrj^ eire ra ev TOtg ovpavoU. 
 
 than this, it does say, — that the 
 eternal and incarnate Son is the 
 ' causa medians ' by which the abso- 
 lute totality of created things shall 
 be restored into its primal harmony 
 with its Creator, — a declaration more 
 specifically unfolded in the following 
 clause: more than this it does not 
 say, and where God is silent it is not 
 for man to speak. See the sober 
 remarks of Hofmann, Schriftb. Vol. 
 i. p. 188 sq. The mysterious dra- 
 Ke(pa\ai.<ia-a(T$ai, Eph. i. 10 (obs. both 
 the prep, and the voice), is a more 
 general and perhaps more developed, 
 while in 2 Cor. v. 19 k6<tij.ov KoraX- 
 \dcr<rat> is a more limited and more 
 specific representation of the same 
 eternal truth : see Destiny of the 
 Creature, p. 86 sq. els airov] 
 
 unto Himself, i.e. to God, couched in 
 the foregoing irXi^pa/j.a : a ' prasguans 
 constructio,' — the preposition mark- 
 ing the reconciled access to (comp. 
 Eph. ii. 18), and union with the 
 Creator; comp. Winer, Gr. § 66. 2. 
 The simple dative (Eph. ii. 16; 
 comp. Eom. v. 10, 2 Cor. v. 19', 
 al.) expresses the object to whom 
 and for whom the action is directed, 
 but leaves the further idea conveyed 
 by the prep, unnoticed. There is no 
 need to read avrov {Griesb., Seholz), 
 as the reference to the subject is un- 
 emphatic; see notes ore Eph, i. 4. 
 clpTivoiroiTJo-as] having made peace; 
 i.e. God, — a simple and intelligible 
 change of gender suggested by the 
 preceding abriv and the personal 
 subject involved in the subst. with 
 which the part, is grammatically con- 
 nected ; in fact, ' a construction irphs 
 ri vTro(rrijMuv6iievov,' The parallel 
 passage Eph. ii. 15, ttoluv elpipiriv, 
 would almost seem to justify a re- 
 
 ference to the Son (Theod., CEoum.) 
 by the common participial anacolu- 
 thon (Steiger; comp. Winer, Gr. § 
 63. 2), but as this would seriously 
 dislocate the sentence by separating 
 the modal participial clause from 
 the finite verb, and would introduce 
 confusion among the pronouns, we 
 retain the more simple and direct 
 construction. Thus then the two 
 constructions (b) and (c) noticed in 
 ver. 19 ultimately coincide in re- 
 ferring ver. 20 to God, not Christ; 
 and it is worthy of thought whether 
 the ancient Syr. and Clarom. Vv. 
 may not, by different grammatical 
 processes, exhibit a traditional ref. 
 of ver. 20 to God, of a very remote, 
 and perhaps even authoritative an- 
 tiquity. Sta TOU oV|J,. K.T.X.] 
 
 by the blood of (i.e. shed upon) His 
 cross; more specific and circum- 
 stantial statement of the 'causa 
 medians ' of the reconciliation. The 
 gen. is what is termed of 'remoter 
 reference,' forming in fact a species 
 of breviloquentia: see esp. Winer, 
 Gr. § 30. i, where numerous exx, are 
 collected. 81' avrov] 
 
 by Him; it is scarcely necessary to 
 say that Si avrov does not refer to 
 the immediately preceding Sid, tov 
 ai/jL., but to the more remote Si' ai/roO 
 of which it is a vivid and* emphatic 
 repetition. These words are omitted 
 byBDiFGL; lomss.; Vulg. (Lachm., 
 Treg.), but the probability that this 
 was caused by the desire to facilitate 
 the construction is so great, that we 
 seem justified in regarding the evi- 
 dence for retention as even clearly 
 preponderating. eJre rd 
 
 €irl TTJs yrjs K.T.X.] whether the things 
 upon the earth or the things in tlie 
 heavens ; disjunctive enumeration of 
 
142 
 
 nP02 K0AA22AEIS. 
 
 a I Kai vfias TTore ovrai airtiXXoTpiwfJLevovi koi e'^Qpov^ 
 
 the 'universitaa rerum,' as in ver. 
 i6, with this only difference, that the 
 order is transposed, — possibly from 
 the more close connexion of the 
 death of Christ with toi ivl ttjs 717!. 
 It is hardly necessary to say that 
 the language precludes any idea of 
 reconciliation between the occupants 
 of earth and heaven (as appy. Cyr.- 
 Hieros. Gatech. xiv. 3, Chrys. [in 
 part], Theod., al.) or, in reference to 
 the latter, of any reconciliation of 
 only a retrospectively preservative 
 nature (Bramhall, Disc. iv. Vol. v. 
 p. 148). Ho%i} the reconciliation of 
 Christ affects the spiritual worlds 
 whether by the annihilation of ' posse 
 peccare,' or by the infusion of a more 
 perfect knowledge (Eph. iii. 10), 
 or (less probably) some restorative 
 application to the fallen spiritual 
 world (Orig., Neand. Planting, Vol. i. 
 p. 531), — we know not, and we dare 
 not speculate : this however we may 
 fearlessly assert, that the efficacy of 
 the sacrifice of the Eternal Son is 
 infinite and limitless, that it extends 
 to all things in earth and heaven, 
 and that it is the blessed medium by 
 which peace is wrought between God 
 and His creatures, whether angelical, 
 human, animate, or inanimate (Eom. 
 viii. 19 sq.) ; see the valuable note of 
 Harless on Eph. i. 10, esp. p. 52, Hof- 
 mann, Sehriftb. Vol. i. p. 189, and 
 comp. Wordsw. in loc. 
 
 1 1 . Kol i5|ids] And, yon also : new 
 clause, to be separated by a period 
 (not merely by a comma, Lachm., 
 Bisp., Lightf., al.) from ver. 20, 
 descriptive of the application of the 
 universal reconciliation to the special 
 case of the Colossians ; comp. oh. ii. 
 13, and see notes on Eph. ii. i. The 
 structure involves a slight anacolu- 
 thon: the Apostle probably com- 
 
 menced with the intention of placing 
 v/ias under the immediate regimen of 
 il7ro/caTi}XX., but was led by rrorf 
 SvTas into the contrasted clause vvi/l 
 d^ before he inserted the verb ; 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 63. i. The 
 reading AiroKaTriWdyriTe adopted by 
 Lachm., Mey., Lightf., with B(DiFG; 
 Clarom.; Iren., al., have dTOKaraWa- 
 yivres) involves an equally intelligible, 
 though much stronger anacoluthon, 
 but has not sufficient external sup- 
 port: it is, however, placed in the 
 margin by Treg., Bev., Westc. and 
 Hort, the probability of a correction to 
 amend the grammar being not incon- 
 siderable. ovTas dirt]X\oTp.] being 
 alienated, being in a state of aliena- 
 tion, soil, 'from God;' comp. Eph. 
 iv. 18. The.part. of the verb subst. 
 is used with the perf. part, to express 
 yet more forcibly the continuing state 
 of the alienation ; comp. Winer, Gr. 
 § 45. 5. For illustrations of the 
 emphatic word diraW. ('abaHenati,' 
 Beza), see notes on Eph. ii. 12, where 
 the application is more expressly re- 
 stricted. Both there and Eph. iv. 1 8, 
 the Ephesians were represented as a 
 portion of heathenism, here the Co- 
 lossians are represented as a portion 
 of the 'universitas rerum,' to whom 
 the redeeming power of Christ ex- 
 tends. lx6pojl$ K.T.X.] 
 enemies in your understanding, &c., 
 not passive, ' regarded as enemies by 
 God' (Mey., who compares Eom. v. 
 10), but, as the subjective tinge given 
 by the limiting dative and the addi- 
 tion iv ToTs Ipy. seem to imply, 
 active; ix^P'"' W^t ^V^j ""•^ ''^ '■"" 
 iX^P'^" i'Tpdrrere, Chrys. The dative 
 SMvolq. is what is termed the dat. of 
 reference to (see notes on Gal. i. 22), 
 and represents, as it were, the pe- 
 culiar spiritual seat of the hostility 
 
I. 21, 22. 
 
 143 
 
 Tjj oiavoia ev rom epyon roty Trovtjpois, vvvi de airo- 
 Kar'^Xka^ev ev tw (Twixari t?? a-apKOi avrov Sia rov aa 
 
 (comp. notes on Eph. iv. i8), while 
 iv Tois ?p70K marks the practical 
 sphere and substratum in which the 
 (X^pa was evinced ; comp. Huther in 
 loc. On the meaning of 5ia;'oia, the 
 'higher intellectual nature' {St4^oSos 
 XoyiK-/), Orig.) , especially as shown in 
 its practical relations (contrast ln- 
 voM, Heb. iv. 12), see the good re- 
 marks of Beck, Seelenl. 11. 19, b. p. 
 58. The position of rois 
 
 ■nrovTipoiS, not simply iv rois irov. Ipy. , 
 serves to give emphasis, and direct 
 attention to the real character of 
 the fyya; Winer, Gr. § 20. i. 
 vuv\ 8^ diroKar.] yet now hath He 
 (God, see next note) reconciled: anti- 
 thesis to the preceding irork Syras 
 the oppositive 5^ in the apodosis be- 
 ing evoked by the latent 'although' 
 (Donalds. Gi: § 621) involved in the 
 participial protasis; comp. Xen. Mem. 
 in. 7. 8, iKelvovs...pq.5ltiis x^'poi^AfO', 
 ToiiTOLs Sk /iijS^a Tp6wov o(ei Sw^tre- 
 crSai Trpoireiiex6nva.i., and see the note 
 and reff. of Kuhner, also Buttmann, 
 Mid. Excurs. xii. p. 148: add Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 374, Hartung, 
 Partik. 64, 5. 6, "Vol. i. p. 186. Such 
 a construction is not common in 
 Attic writers. In this union of the 
 emphatic particle of absolutely pre- 
 sent time with the aor. (comp. 
 Hartung, Partik. Vol. n. p. 24), the 
 aor. is not equiv. to a pres. or perf . , 
 but marks, with the proper force of 
 the tense, that the action followed a 
 given event (here, as the context 
 suggests, the atoning death of 
 Christ), and is now done with; see 
 Donalds. Gr. § 433, compared with 
 Fritz, de Am: Vi, p. 6, 17. Meyer 
 pertinently compares Plato, Symp. 
 p. 193 A, irpb Tov..Jv riiien, vwl H 
 5iA rijv dSiKlav SufKlaBy]iia> iirh tov 
 
 ffeov. This use of the aorist can- 
 not be satisfactorily conveyed in 
 English. 
 
 22. iv T$ (ru|ji,. K.T.X.] in the body 
 of His flesh, i.e., as the language 
 and allusion undoubtedly require, — 
 the flesh of Christ ; the prep, iv point- 
 ing to the substratum of the action ; 
 see notes ore Gal. i. 24, and comp. esp. 
 Audoo. de Myst. p. 14, 6 ij.iv dywv iv 
 rip o-di/ian ti? ifi,f KadearrjKcv. It may 
 justly be considered somewhat doubt- 
 ful whether the subject of the present 
 clause and of the verb diroKaTyXKa^ev 
 should be regarded as Christ (Chrys., 
 CEcum., al.), or God. In favour of 
 the first supposition we have the use 
 of (xd/MTi, (which seems to suggest 
 an identity between the subject to 
 which the ffffl/ta refers and the subject 
 of the verb), perhaps the use of ira- 
 paffTrjaai (comp. Eph. v. 27, but con- 
 trast 2 Cor. iv. 14), and the ready 
 connexion of such a purpose with 
 the fact specified by dwoKar. (comp. 
 De Wette), and lastly, the semi- 
 parallel passage Eph. ii. 13. Still 
 the difficulty of a change of subject, 
 — the natural transition from the 
 more general act on the part of God 
 alluded to in ver. 20 to the more 
 particular application of the same to 
 the Colossians, — the fuller amplifi- 
 cation which this verse seems to be 
 of the substance of ver. 14, — and the 
 similarity between the circumstan- 
 tial 5iA ToO a'lfi. TOV err. aiiroO above 
 and the circumstantial iv tQ adi/j.. 
 K.T.X. in the present verse, seem to 
 supply distinctly preponderant argu- 
 ments, and lead us with Bengel, 
 Huth., and others, to refer diroKaT. 
 to the subject of ver. 20, i.e. to God. 
 Many reasons have been assigned 
 why St Paul adds the specifying gen. 
 
144 
 
 nP02 KOAA22AEIS. 
 
 OavuTov, Trapaa-T^erai y/iSy dylov; Kai anw/xovs kui 
 33 aveyK'K^rovi Karevunriov avrov' e'lye iirifievere tjj via-rei 
 
 (substantite, Winer, Gr. § 30. 2. /3) rrjs 
 aapKSs. Two opinions deserve con- 
 sideration; (a) that it was to oppose 
 some forms of Docetic error which 
 were prevailing at CoIosscb, Steiger, 
 Huth., al. ; (6) that it was directed 
 against a faUe spiritualism, which, 
 from a mistaken asceticism (oh. ii. 
 23), led to grave error with respect 
 to the efSoacy of Christ's atonement 
 in the flesh; so Mey., followed by 
 Alf. As there are no direct, and 
 appy. no indirect (contrast Ignat. 
 Magnes. § 9, 11, al.) allusions to 
 Docetic error traceable in this Ep., 
 the opinion (6) is on the whole to be 
 preferred. To suppose that these 
 words are added to distinguish the 
 use of the a-a/ia here from the totally 
 and obviously different use in ver. 
 18 (so Olsh., Lightf.), does not 
 seem natural or probable. 
 Sui Tov Oav.] by means of His death; 
 added to the preceding iv rif ad//,, to 
 express the means by which the re- 
 conciliation was so wrought : it was 
 by means of death, borne in, and ac- 
 complished in that blessed body, that 
 reconciliation was brought about; 
 compare some valuable remarks in 
 Jackson, Greed, viii. 8. 4. Airov is 
 added after Oavdrov by ANP ; 20 mss. ; 
 Copt., Syr. (both) ; and is inserted in 
 brackets by Lachm. irapa- 
 
 o-Tijo-oi] to present; infin. expressing 
 the actual purpose and intent of the 
 action expressed in diroK. ; see Mad- 
 vig, Synt. § 148, where this mood is 
 extremely well discussed. Had uxrre 
 been inserted, the idea of manner or 
 degree would rather have come into 
 prominence (Madvig, § 166), and the 
 meaning would literally have been 
 'as with the intention of, c^c.,' the 
 finite verb being in fact again men- 
 
 tally supplied; see on this point 
 Weller, Bemerk. z. Griech. Synt. p. 
 14 (Mein. 1843). Meyer calls atten- 
 tion to the tense, but it must be ob- 
 served that in the inf. the force of 
 the aor., except after verbs declarandi 
 vel sentiendi, is commonly obscured 
 (Madv. § T72), especially as here in 
 an aoristic sequence. On irapOATTri- 
 (xai, which certainly conveys no 
 sacrificial idea, oomp. notes on Eph. 
 V. 27. There the reference is more 
 restricted, here more general. 
 cLyiovs Kal d|j.. Kal dvcYK.] holy and 
 blameless and without charge; desig- 
 nation of their contemplated state on 
 its positive and negative side (Mey.), 
 aylovs marking the former, ajxiiij.. koX 
 aveyK\. the latter. Strictly consi- 
 dered then, the first and second Kal 
 are not perfectly co-ordinate and 
 similar: they do not connect three 
 different ideas (' erga Deum, respeotu 
 vestri, respectu proximi,' Beng.), nor 
 simply enumerate three similar ideas 
 (Daven.); but, while the first con- 
 nects the two members of the latent 
 antithesis, the second is, as it were, 
 under a vinculum joining the com- 
 ponent parts of the second member. 
 On the meaning of a/iw/ios (inculpa- 
 tus, not immaculatus), see notes on 
 Eph. i. 4: it is appy. less strong 
 than the following aveyKK. ; wiyK^. 
 yap rSre \^7eTai, Srax juijSJ M^XP' 
 Karayvibaeoit fiijSi p.^xP'' ^yii^'^lMTOS J 
 n ireirpayiUvov Tifuv, Chrys. Lastly, 
 on the distinction between wiyKkri- 
 Tos and dveTrlXijirTos ('in quo nulla 
 justa causa sit reprehensionis'), see 
 Tittm. Synon. i. p. 31. 
 KaTcv(6iriov avTol] before Him; God, 
 —not Christ (Mey.), a reference 
 neither natural nor easily reconcile- 
 able with the very similar passage, 
 
23- 
 
 145 
 
 Te6ef/.e\iaifievot KOt eSpatoi ko) fiij fteraKivovfievoi avo 
 T^f eXvlSoi Tov evayyeXiov, ov ^Koverare, rov Kt]pv)(- 
 
 Eph. i. 4. There may lie here a 
 faint reference to the 'day of Christ's 
 appearing,' Alf., but it does not seem 
 perfectly certain from the context. 
 With respect to the question whether 
 'sauetitas imputata' (Huth.), or per- 
 haps more probably 'sanctitas inhce- 
 rens' (Chrys.; comp. notes on Eph. i. 
 4), is here alluded to, the remark of 
 Davenant seems just, — 'cum dioit ut 
 sistat nos sanctos, non ut sisteremus 
 nos, manifestum est ipsos reconcilia- 
 tos et renatos sanctitatem suam a 
 Christo mutnari, sive de aetuali, sive 
 de inhserente, sive de imputatS, lo- 
 quimur,' p. 113 (ed. 3); 'whensoever 
 we have any of these we have all, 
 they go together,' Hooker, Serm. ore 
 Justif. II. 2 1. 
 
 23. eHye eFri|i,. Tg itla-ni] if at least 
 ye continue in the faith; a tropical 
 use of iiTLij,. peculiar to St Paul, 
 Eom. vi. I, xi. 22, 23, i Tim. iv. 16: 
 in Acts xiii. 43 iiriii. (Bee.) has 
 scarcely any critical support. Like 
 several compounds of ivl it has two 
 constructions (see Winer, Gr. § 52. 
 7), with prepp. Tapi, irpbt, h (Acts 
 xxviii. 14, I Cor. xvi. 7, Phil. i. 24), 
 and with the simple dative (Eom. II. 
 cc, I Tim. I. c.) which appy. is 
 semUocal (comp. notes on Gal. v. i), 
 or, perhaps more probably, under the 
 influence of the prep. The prep, iirl 
 is not per se intensive (Alf.), but 
 appears to denote rest at a place, see 
 notes on Gal. i. 18. On the mean- 
 ing of dye, see notes on Eph. iii. 2, 
 and on the distinction between dye 
 (si quidem; not 'si tamen,' Vulg.) 
 and ehep (si omnino), see notes on 
 Gal. iii. 4. tc8e[u\. Kal 
 
 4Spaioi] grounded and firm; specifica- 
 tion on the positive side of the mode 
 of the iwi/Mov-fi; comp. Eph. iii. 17, 
 
 E. 
 
 mn^uiihoi KoX Teffe/ieXtoi/j.ii'oi,, and 
 I Cor. XV. 58, idpaloi....aiJ,eTaKlvriToi. 
 The qualitative termination -a?os 
 seems to justify the distinction of 
 Beng., 'reBefji.. aflBxi fundamento, iSp. 
 stabiles, firmi iutus.' That there is 
 any reference to the metaphor of a 
 temple (Olsh.), seems here very 
 doubtful. KttV [ii] |i6TaKi.v.] 
 
 and not being moved away; nearly 
 identical with atieraKlv-qTOL, t Cor. 
 XV. 58, and representing their fixity 
 on its negative side: the change to 
 the present pass. — as marking by the 
 tense the process that might be going 
 on, and by the voice (pass., not act., 
 as De W.) that of which they were 
 now liable to be the victims, — is 
 especially suitable and exact; see 
 the suggestive ex. cited by Alf., viz. 
 Xen. Rep. Lae. xv. i, 7roXiTc(as.../te- 
 raKexivrifihas Kal In xal vvv ixeraKivov- 
 liivas. On the |U?; with /nera/f., which 
 in a hypothetical sentence like the 
 present is usual and proper, see, if 
 necessary, Winer, Gr. § 55. i. 
 TTJs l^.'I^. Toi! evayy.] the hope of the 
 Gospel, i.e. arising from, evoked by, 
 the Gospel, rod eiayy. being the gen. 
 of the origin or rather the originating 
 agent; see Hartung, Casus, p. 17, 
 and comp. notes on i Thess. i. 6. 
 To regard it as a possess, gen. (Alf.) 
 gives an unnecessary vagueness to 
 the expression. Such genitives as 
 those of the origin (Hartung, p. 17), 
 originating agent, and perhaps a 
 shade stronger, the causa efficiens 
 (Soheuerl. Synt. % 17), all belong to 
 the general category of the gen. of 
 'ablation' (Donalds. Gr. § 448, 449): 
 the context alone must guide us in 
 our choice,' comp. notes on i Cor. 
 xii. 8. 'EXTris can hardly be here, 
 except in a very derivative sense. 
 
146 
 
 nPOS K0AA22AE1S. 
 
 Bevrog ev ttoo-i/ KTicrei r^ inro tov ovpavov, ov eyevoutjv 
 
 23. TojT-ri KTlffei] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Sort, on 
 greatly preponderating authority: Bee, v&ff-Q tJ Krlau. 
 
 equiv. to 6 Xpio-Tis, Ohrys. ; it seems 
 only to have its usual subjective 
 meaning; oomp. notes on Eph. i. 18. 
 ov TJKo4<raT€] which ye heard, soil, 
 when it was first preached to you: 
 not 'have heard,' Auth., — ^here cer- 
 tainly an unnecessary introduction 
 of the auxiliary. This and the two 
 following clauses serve to give weight 
 to the foregoing fii) iieraKoioiixevoi.: 
 they had heard the Gospel, the world 
 had heard it (ir&Xiv avrois (pipei fidp- 
 Tvpas, elTa Ttjv olKovfit^v7)v, Chrys.), 
 and he the writer of this Epistle — • 
 who though probably not their 
 founder (see on ver. 7), yet stood in 
 close relation to them through Epa- 
 phras — was the preacher of it; koI 
 TOVTo els rb 6,^tbTnffTov avvreKS, Chrys. 
 The Apostle gives weight to his as- 
 sertions by the special mention of his 
 name, as in 2 Cor. x. i, Gal. v. 2, 
 Eph. iii. 1, I Thess. ii. 18, Philem. 
 19. iv irdo-[| KrCcrei] in 
 
 the hearing of every creature ; surely 
 not 'in the whole creation,' Alf., 
 Vulg., — a translation which, even if 
 we concede that vaca Kria-ts may be 
 equiv. to 'every form of creation,' 
 i.e. 'all creatures ' (Hofm. Schriftb. 
 Vol. I. p. 137), would be needlessly 
 inexact. This noble hyperbole only 
 states in a slightly different form 
 what the Lord had commanded, 
 Mark xvi. 15: the inspired Apostle, 
 as Olsh. well says, sees the universal 
 tendency of Christianity already re- 
 alized. The limitation rj -uirb rhv 
 oip. characterizes the Krlais as iirl- 
 7C10S, including however thereby all 
 mankind. For the meaning of h, 
 apud, coram, — perhaps here with 
 sing, reverting somewhat to the pri- 
 
 mary idea of sphere of operation, 
 see Winer, Gr. § 48. a. d. 
 SiaKovos] a minister; see notes on 
 Eph. iii. 7. The three practical de- 
 ductions which Davenant draws from 
 this clause are worthy of perusal. 
 Personal Cibcumstances 
 (ver. 24 — ch. ii. 5). 
 24—29. The Apostle's sufferings 
 and spiritual work. 24. NCv 
 
 XaCpu] Transition, suggested by 
 the preceding clauses, esp. by the 
 last, to the Apostle's own services 
 in the cause of the Gospel. The 
 vSv is not merely transitional (comp. 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 667), but, 
 as its position shows, purely tem- 
 poral and emphatic (2 Cor. vii. 
 g), 'now, with the chain round my 
 wrist ' (Badie), forming a contrast 
 with the past time involved in the 
 foregoing KTipvxBivroi and ^emfoiv. 
 The reading Ss vS;i k.t.\. (D'FG; 
 Vulg., Clarom., al.) seems either due 
 to a repetition of the preceding let- 
 ters, or was intended to keep up the 
 supposed connexion between ver. 25 
 and ver. 23. iv tois 
 
 ira6i]|jia<riv] Not exclusively ' de iis 
 quse patior,' Beza, but simply ' in 
 passionibus,' Vulg.; the iraflii/iOTa 
 were not only the subject whereupon 
 he rejoiced, but the sphere, the cir- 
 cumstances, in which he did so ; 
 Xalpa TrdcTxav, Chrys. The brief 
 and semi-adverbial iv TO&r<ji (Phil. i. 
 18) is perhaps slightly different. The 
 omission of the article before iirip 
 i/uiv arises from ■ini<yx^"' ^'"'^P being 
 a legitimate construction ; see notes 
 on Eph. i. 15. iiirip v|m5v] 
 
 for you, not ' in your place,' Steig., 
 nor, with a, causal reference, ' on 
 
I. 24. 
 
 147 
 
 I rejoice in my suffer- NuV VaiOO) iv TOtJ "JraOnUaCTtV Vireo %A. 
 
 ings for you and the ^ \ , \ r ^ 
 
 £7tte'mU?p?Jf^S- ^f^^"' '^°' avTUvairXripw ra vcTTeptifiara 
 
 vaiion and striving to present every man perfect before God. 
 
 24. iraB-fiiiacnv'] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 very greatly preponderating authority: Rec. adds iiov. 
 
 your account,' Badie, ' vestr4 causa,' 
 Just. (comp. Est. and Corn, a Lap.), 
 but ' vestro commodo atque fructu, ' 
 Beza, ' zum Vortheil,' Winer, Gr. 
 § 47. I, as the more usual meaning 
 of the prep, in the N. T. and its 
 use below both suggest. On the uses 
 of the prep. comp. notes ore Gal. i. 4, 
 iii. 13, Phil. i. 7. 
 
 avTovoirX. k.t.X.] am filling fully up 
 the lacking measures of the afflictions 
 of Christ. The meaning of these 
 words has formed the subject both of 
 exegetical discussion and polemical 
 application; oomp. Cajet. de Indulg. 
 Qu. 3, Bellarm. de Indulg. Cap. 3. 
 Without entering into the latter, we 
 will endeavour briefly to state the 
 grammatical and contextual meaning 
 of the words. (i) ai 
 
 SXCijfdS Tov Xpio-Tov are clearly not 
 ' afflictiones propter Christum sub- 
 eundse,' Eisner (Vol. 11. p. ■260), 
 Schoettg., al., nor ' calamitates quas 
 Christus perferendas imposuit,' Fritz. 
 Rom. Vol. III. p. 275, — a somewhat 
 artificial gen. auctoris, — but simply 
 and plainly ' the afflictions of Christ,' 
 i.e. which appertain to Christ, not 
 however, with corporeal reference, 
 oaa iw^tiecve, Theod., but which are 
 His (Xp. being a pure possessive 
 gen. ; comp. Winer, Gr. § 30. 2 
 note), of which He is the mystical 
 subject ; see below. But (2) 
 
 how are the vcreprifiaTa of these afflic- 
 tions filled up by the Apostle? Not 
 (a) by the endurance of afflictions 
 similar {ibffairws, Theod.) to those 
 endured (viroffTanKus) by his Master 
 (comp. Heb. xiii. 13, i Pet. iv. 13), 
 and by drinking out of the same cup 
 
 (Matth. XX. 23), as Huth., Mey., — 
 for, independently of all other 
 considerations, vicarious suffering 
 (Olsh.), the distinctive feature of 
 the Lord's $\l\f/ei.s, was lacking in 
 those of His Apostle (ov yhp taov 
 TovTo ovd^ 6fWioVf ToWov ye Kal Set, 
 QScum.), — but (6), in the deeper sense 
 given to it by Chrys., ■ Theoph., 
 CEoum., and recently adopted by De 
 W., Eadie, Alf., al.,— by the en- 
 durance of afflictions which Christ 
 endures in His suffering Church 
 (ffxcTiKus), and of which the ttXt}- 
 pti)/*a has not yet come ; see Olsh. 
 m loc., who has well defended this 
 vital and consolatory interpretation, 
 and comp. August, in Psalm. Ixi. 4, 
 Vol. IV. p. 731 (ed. Migne). 
 (3) The meaning of dvTavair\i]poSv 
 has yet to be considered ; this is 
 not ' vicissim explere ' (Beza, comp. 
 Tittm. Synon. 11. p. 230), nor 'cum 
 Christo calamitates imponente in 
 malis perferendis semulare ' (Fritz.), 
 — a somewhat artificial interpreta- 
 tion, nor even ' alterius mTip-riim 
 de suo explere ' (Winer, de Verb. 
 Comp. III. 22), but,' as Meyer sug- 
 gests, ' to meet and fill up the 
 vffT^prifia with a corresponding irXri- 
 poifia;' the avrl contrasting not the 
 actors or their acts (opp. to Xen. 
 Hell. II. 4. 12, anTaviirK-qaav compared 
 with a previous iia-XTjaai.), but the 
 defect with the supply by which it is 
 met : see the exx. cited by Winer, 
 esp. Dio Cass. xliv. 8, oVo;' iviSei. 
 
 TOVTO eK TTJS TTapk T(Sv &\\(i)V ffVVTe- 
 
 Xefas dvTai'air>iTipoi$7J. The simpler 
 oMairXiipu [found in FG ; mss. ; Orig. 
 in allusion] would have expressed the 
 L 2 
 
148 
 
 nP02 KOAA22AEIS. 
 
 Twv 6\l\\Aeaii' Tov Xpia-rov ev t^ a-apKi fiov inrep tov 
 2,5 erw/iiaroi avrov, o ea-riv fj eKKXtjcria' if? eyevontjv eyo) 
 
 filling up, but would have left the 
 idea of the defect being studiedly 
 supplied by the action unexpressed. 
 To assert that this interpretation 
 practically deprives avH of any mean- 
 ing (Bp Lightf.), is certainly more 
 than is warranted by the facts of the 
 case. There is here no such clear 
 correspondence of personal agents 
 (contrast, for example, such a pas- 
 sage as Xenoph. Oecon. v. 12, ■^ yij 
 Toi}S apiara depaireOovras avT^v TrXetura 
 ayadci, avrnroLei) as would be needed 
 to substantiate the assertion. The 
 statement is slightly complex. The 
 Apostle in speaking of his own suf- 
 ferings passes onward in thought to 
 their relation to those of his Master. 
 In regard of these last-mentioned 
 TaBri/iara he puts in evidence that 
 there are WTeprniaTa. This word at 
 once calls out the avH. He does not 
 say, avairkTiptJo ra irad. k.t.\., which 
 would have been a form of expression 
 that would not have been understood, 
 and indeed would have seemed pre- 
 sumptuous, — but ai'Tavair'Krjpu tA, va- 
 Tc/)7)>aTa K.T.X., which brings out the 
 two thoughts, that there are these 
 mysterious vcmp'^/iaTa, and that he, 
 by his own sufferings, is taking his 
 part (observe the present tense) in 
 fiUing them up. We thus, after 
 full re-consideration, maintain the 
 interpretation adopted in former 
 edd. of this Commentary. For a 
 practical sermon on this text, see 
 Donne, Serm. xcvii. Vol. rv. p. 261 
 sq. (ed. Alf.), and comp. Destiny of 
 the Creature, p. 41 sq. ev 
 
 rfl <rapKC (lov clearly belongs to avr- 
 avavX., defining more closely the 
 seat, and thence inferentially the 
 mode, of the avTavairXTipaffis (oomp. 
 2 Cor. iv. n, Gal. iv. 14) ; the word 
 
 ffap^, which thus involves the predi- 
 cation of manner, standing, as Mey. 
 acutely observes, in exquisite con- 
 trast with the iTup,a., which defines 
 the olject of the action. Steiger, 
 Huth., al., connect this clause with 
 BXlxj/euiv Tou Xp. : this may be gramma - 
 tically possible (Winer, Gfr. §20.2), but 
 is exegetically untenable, as it would 
 but reiterate what is necessarily in- 
 volved in the use of the first person 
 of the verb. o eo-riv 11 eKuX.] 
 
 As iKK\. might be thought the word 
 of importance, the construction ^tis 
 ea-Tlv 71 iKK\., I Tim. iii. 15, might 
 have seemed more natural ; comp. 
 Winer, Gr. § 24. 3. The present 
 construction is however perfectly 
 correct, as the article and defining 
 gen. associated with <rwfm, as well 
 as the antithetical contrast in which 
 it stands with <rdp^, point to a-dim as 
 the subst. on which the chief moment 
 of thought really dwells. It would 
 seem as if the appositional ^ {kkX. was 
 introduced to form an easy and na- 
 tural transition-word to the next verse. 
 25. ^s l7«v6[ir)V K.T.X.] of which 
 I became a minister: statement of the 
 relation in which he stands to the 
 iKKkqala just mentioned, the ^s hav- 
 ing a faintly causal, or rather expla- 
 natory force (see notes on ver. 18, 
 and EUendt, Lex. Soph. s. v. Vol. 11. 
 p. 371), and indirectly giving the 
 reason and moving principle of the 
 ovTavairKripditns ; ' I fill up the lacking 
 measures of tlie sufferings of Christ 
 in behalf of His body the Church, 
 being an appointed minister thereof, 
 and having a spiritual function in it 
 committed to me by God.' The iyd) 
 continues, in a slightly changed rela- 
 tion, the ^yiSiU.av\oi of ver. 23: there 
 the SLaxovta, referred to the eiayy., 
 
I. 25, 26. 
 
 149 
 
 oiaKOvo^ Kara rtjv oiKovofxiav rod Qeov rhv SoOetcrdv fioi 
 eii vfiai vKripuxrai tov \6yov rov Qeov, to fivvT^piov 26 
 
 here to the Church by which the 
 6ua77. is preached ; ' idem plane est 
 ministrumEcclesisB esse etEvangehi," 
 Just. Kard ti^v 
 
 oIkov. tov 0.] in accordance with the 
 dispensation, i.e. the spiritual stew- 
 ardship, of God ; riii eKKXrjfflas eve- 
 iriffTe^dTjv T^v (rojTTjpiav, Koi t^jv tov 
 KTjp&y^aros evex^tpLcrdTjv SiaKoviay, 
 Theod. The somewhat difficult word 
 olKovoii. seems here, in accordance 
 with T^v SoBeZcrav k.t.X. which fol- 
 lows, to refer, not to the ' disposition 
 of God' (Syr., 'gubernationem,'Goth. 
 ' ragina,' ^th. ' ordinationem '), but, 
 as Just., Mey., al., to the ' spiritual 
 function,' the ' office of an oUovi/ios ' 
 (see r Cor. ix. 17, compared with 
 I Cor. iv. i), originating from, or 
 assigned by God; the more remote 
 gen. TOV Qeov denoting either the 
 origin of the commission (Hartung, 
 Casus, p. 17), or, with more of a pos- 
 sessive force, Him to whom it be- 
 longed and in whose service it was 
 borne: see Eeuss, TMol. Chret. iv. 
 9, Vol. II. p. 93, and notes on Eph. 
 i. 10, where the meanings of oUovoij,. 
 in the N.T. are briefly noticed and 
 classified. ti]v 8o6et(rav 
 
 K.T.X.] which was given me for you; 
 further definition of the oIkov. tov 
 Qeov, the meaning of which, owing 
 to the different senses in which oIkov. 
 is used, might otherwise have been 
 misunderstood : ' this olKom/ila was 
 specially assigned to me, and you, — 
 you Gentiles, were to be its objects.' 
 The connexion of els u^Ss with TrXijp. 
 (Scholef. Hints, p. no) does not 
 seem plausible': the juxtaposition of 
 the pronouns (yuoi els v/icis) suggests 
 their logical connexion. 
 irXTjpiSo-ai. TOV Xd^y. toS 0.] to fulfil 
 the ward of God; i.e. ' to perform my 
 
 office in preaching unrestrictedly, to 
 give all its full scope to, the word of 
 God:' infin. of design (see notes on 
 ver. 22) dependent either on •^s ^751'. 
 SiAkovos (Huth.), or perhaps more na- 
 turally on TTjv ioQeicrav k.t.X., thus 
 giving an amplification to the pre- 
 ceding els ii/ms. The glosses on ttXij- 
 pSffat are exceedingly numerous ; the 
 most probable are, (a) ' ad plene ex- 
 ponendam totam salutis dootrinam,' 
 Daven. i, comp. 01sh.,and Tholuok, 
 Bergpr. p. 136; (6) ' to spread abroad,' 
 Huth., — who compares Acts v. 28; 
 (c) ' to give its fullest amplitude to, 
 to fill up the measures of its fore- 
 ordained universality,' not perhaps 
 without some allusion to the oIko- 
 vofiXa which would thus be fuUy dis- 
 charged; comp. Eom. xv. 19, yn^pi 
 TOV 'XWvpiKov irewKripuKhiai Tb eiay- 
 7Aioy TOV Xp. Of these (6) has an 
 advantage over (a) in implying a irXiJ- 
 pcjo-is viewed extensively, in having, 
 in fact, a quantitative rather than a 
 qualitative reference, but fails to ex- 
 haust the meaning and completely 
 satisfy the context : (c) by carrying 
 out the idea further, and pointing to 
 the Xo70s as something which was to 
 have a universal application, and 
 not be confined to a single nation 
 (hence the introduction of els ifj.as), 
 seems most in accordance with the 
 spirit of the passage and with the 
 words that follow ; comp. the some- 
 what analogous expression, 6 Xoyos 
 TOV Qeov rii^ave. Acts vi. 7, xii. 24. 
 It need hardly be added that the 
 \6yos TOV Qeoii does not imply the 
 ' promissiones Dei, partim de Christo 
 in genere, partim de vocatioue Gen- 
 tium,' Beza, but simply and plainly 
 TO evayyiXiov, as in i Cor. xiv. 36, 
 2 Cor. ii. 17, I Thess. ii. 13, al. 
 
160 
 
 nP02 K0AA22AE12. 
 
 TO airoKeKpv(ji,[i.evov airo tmv aicavuiti kui airo rwv yevetev, 
 37 vvv Se ecpavepdoOi] Toh dyion avrov, oU ^6eX*iarev 6 
 
 26. vDv] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on clearly 
 preponderating authority: Rec, vwl. 
 
 16. TO |j,'ua-Ti]piov tA diroK.] the 
 mystery which hath been hidden ; ap- 
 position to the preceding riv \6yov 
 ToS Qeov. The ii,v(rT-fipi.ov was the 
 divine purpose of salvation in Christ, 
 and more especially, as the context 
 seems to show, ' de salvandis Genti- 
 bus per gratiamevangelicam,' Daven. ; 
 see Eph. iii. 4 sq., and oomp. Eph. 
 i. 9. On the meanings of fivrTrjpiov 
 in the N.T., see notes ore Eph. v. 
 32, and Eeuss, ThSol. Chret. iv. 9, 
 Vol. II. p. 88. diro 
 
 Twv aluvuv K.T.X.] from the ages and 
 from the generations (that have pass- 
 ed); measuring from the long tem- 
 poral periods (atunes) and the suc- 
 cessive generations that made them 
 up (yeveal ; see notes ore Eph. iii. 21), 
 which have elapsed (observe the ar- 
 ticle) since the ' arcanum deoretum ' 
 was concealed. The expression is 
 not identical with irpb tiSv alilivwv, 
 I Cor. ii. 7 ; the counsel was formed 
 TTpb Twv aliivw, but concealed i,Td 
 TUP atwpwv; oomp. Bom. xvi. 25, and 
 see Eph. iii. 9, where the same ex- 
 pression occurs. viiv 8J 
 l<|>avEpu6T]] but now has been made 
 manifest ; transition from the parti- 
 cipial to the finite construction, sug- 
 gested by the importance of the pre- 
 dication ; see notes on Eph. i. 20, 
 and Winer, Gr. § 63. i. b, where 
 other examples are noticed and dis- 
 cussed. The (pavipians, the actual 
 and historical manifestation (DeW.), 
 took place, as Mey. observes, in dif- 
 ferent ways, partly by revelation 
 (Eph. iii. 5), partly by preaching (oh. 
 iv. 4, Tit. i. 3) and prophetic exposi- 
 tion (Rom. xvi. 26), and partly by all 
 combined. On the connexion of this 
 
 particle with the aor., oomp. notes 
 on ver. 21, and for a good distinction 
 between vuv {iirl tup rpiup xp6pw;') 
 and pvpl, the reading of Bee. [M 
 fwvov ipetrTWTos), see Ammonius, Voc. 
 Diff. p. 99, ed. Valck. toIs 
 
 dyCois ouTol] To limit these words 
 to the Apostles, from a comparison 
 with Eph, iii. 5 (Steiger, Olsh. : FG 
 actually read dTroo-roXois for aylou), 
 or to the elect, ' quos Deus in Ghristo 
 oonsecrandos decrevit ' (Daven. i), is 
 highly unsatisfactory, and quite con- 
 trary to St Paul's regular and un- 
 restricted use of the word; so Theod., 
 who however shows that he remem- 
 bered Eph. iii. 5, Tots dTrotrroXois /coi 
 Tofs Si4 To&rup TreTTicTTeuKOffi. On the 
 meaning of aytos, see notes on ver, -i, 
 and on Eph. i. 1. 
 
 27. ots r9«XT|<r«v 6 ©.] to whom 
 God did will; i.e. 'seeing that to 
 them it was God's wUl,' c&c, the 
 relative having probably here, as in 
 ver. 25, an indirectly causal or ex- 
 planatory force ('rationem adjungit,' 
 Daven.), and reiterating the subject 
 in order to introduce more readily 
 the specific purpose, ypoiplaai k.t.\., 
 which was contemplated by God in 
 the ipapipans. The most recent 
 commentators, Mey., Eadie, Alf., 
 rightly reject any reference of riSiXri- 
 (rep to the free grace of God (eomp. 
 Eph. i. 9, Kara ri/p eiSodap afiroB), 
 no such idea being here involved in 
 the context : what ijeikqcep here im- 
 plies is, not on the one hand that 
 God 'was pleased' ('propensionem 
 voluntatis indioat,' Est.), nor on the 
 other that He 'was willing,' Hamm., 
 but simply and plainly that ' it was 
 God's will' to do so. On the dis- 
 
I. 27. 
 
 151 
 
 Geoy yvcoplcrai tI to TrXouroy t?? S6^t]i} tow fxvcTTtjpiov 
 TovTov iv Toii eOvea-iv, o? ecmv Xpia-roi ev vfiiv, 
 
 27. tI t4] So Laohm., Tiseh. , Treg., Bev., Westc. and Sort, on preponde- 
 rating authority : Rec, tU 0. Ss IffTiv] So Rec, Tiseh., on apparently 
 preponderating authority: & ianv, Lachm. (with marg.), Treg., Bev., Westc. 
 and Hort (with marg.). The probability that 6 is a correction of the more 
 difficult reading ds is not inconsiderable. 
 
 tiuction between flAw and /SoiiXojuai, 
 see notes ore i Tim. v. 14. 
 ^updrai] to make known: practi- 
 cally but little different from t^avepd- 
 aai.. The latter perhaps is sligTitly 
 more restricted, as involving the 
 idea of a previous concealment (see 
 above and comp. 2 Tim. i. 10), the 
 former more general and unlimited : 
 see Meyer in loc. tC t6 
 
 irXovTos K.T.V.] what are the riches 
 of the glory of this mystery: not ex- 
 actly 'how great,' Mey., but with 
 the simple force of tIs, — 'what,' re- 
 ferring alike to nature and degree; 
 comp. Eph. i. 18, and see notes in 
 loc. The gen. rrjs S6^s is no mere 
 genitive of quality which may be re- 
 solved into an adjective, and ap- 
 pended either to ttXoOtos ('der herr- 
 liche Beichthum,' Luth.) or to ynu- 
 aT-qpiov ('gloriosi hujus mysterii,' 
 Beza), but, as always in these ac- 
 cumulated genitives in St Paul's 
 Bpp., specially denotes that peculiar 
 attribute of the /jojo-r'/ipiov (gen. sub- 
 jecti) which more particularly evinces 
 the TrXoOros; see notes and reff. on 
 Eph. i. 6, 18. The «6fa itself is not 
 to be limited to the transforming 
 nature of the mystery of the Gospel 
 in its effects on men (5toi ^iXwy ptj- 
 fi&Twv Kol irtffTeois iJ.6vqi, Ohrys. ), nor 
 yet, on the objective side, to the So^a 
 ToO eeoC, the grace, glory, and attri- 
 butes of God which are revealed by 
 it, — but, as the weight of the enun- 
 ciation requires, to both (see esp. De 
 W.), perhaps more particularly to 
 
 the latter. To make its reference 
 identical with that of the So|a below 
 (Mey., Alf.), where the preceding 
 words introduce a new shade of 
 thought, does not seem so exegeti- 
 caUy satisfactory. The former So^a 
 gains from its collocation a more 
 general and abstract force, the latter, 
 from its association with iXirls, has a 
 more specific reference. 
 iv Tots 'iivanv] among the Gentiles; 
 semilooal clause appended to rt {1<tti) 
 t6 ttXoCtos K.T.X., defining the sphere 
 in which the ttXoCtos ttjs 56f. toS 
 /imr. is more especially evinced; 
 tj>alverai. di h iripoii, iroXX^i S^ irXiov 
 
 iv TO^TOiS 7] TToXX'Jj TOU flV(TT7Jpiov So^tt, 
 
 Chrys.; see esp. Eph. i. 18, where 
 the construction is exactly similar, 
 (is lo-Tiv Xp.] which is Christ, the 8s 
 (see critical note) being adopted as 
 appy. the true reading. But to what 
 does it refer? Three interpretations 
 have been suggested ; [a) the complex 
 idea of the entire clause, — Christ in 
 his relation to the Gentile world, De 
 W., Badie; (6) the more remote t6 
 ttXoutos /C.T.X., (Ecum.,Daven., Mey.; 
 (c) the more immediately preceding 
 /ivffTriplov Toirov, Chrys., Alf., al. 
 Of these (a) is defensible (comp. 
 Phil. i. 28), but too vague; (b) is 
 plausible (comp. Eph. iii. 8), but 
 rests mainly on the assumption that 
 ttXoCtos is the leading word (Mey., 
 Winer), whereas it seems clear from 
 ver. 26 that laxrriip. is the really im- 
 portant word in the sentence. We 
 retain then the usual reference to 
 
152 
 
 nPOS KOAA2SAEI2. 
 
 a8 ri e\7r)? T^S So^rji 
 
 TOVvTSi iravTa avOpmirov Kat 
 
 ov ^jxeig KUTayyeWofJiev, vovOe- 
 "iSdaKOvrei iravra ai/Qpoo- 
 
 iwariipiov ; Christ who was preached, 
 and was worliing by grace among 
 them, was in Himself the true and 
 real mystery of redemption; oomp. 
 notes on Eph. iii. 4. In any case the 
 masc. 6s results from a simple at- 
 traction to the predicate ; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 24. 3. Iv ifXv] 
 
 among you; not exclusively ' in vobis 
 inhabitans per fidem,' Zanoh. (comp. 
 Eph. iii. 17), but in parallelism to 
 the preceding iv toTs (6v. As how- 
 ever this parallelism is not perfectly 
 exact (Alf.), — for iv i/uv is in clo$e 
 association with the preceding sub- 
 stantive, whereas iv to!s IBveatv is 
 not, — we may admit that 'in you' is 
 also virtually and by consequence 
 involved in the present use of the 
 preposition ; comp. Olsh. , Eadie. 
 The connexion adopted by Syr. (' qui 
 in vobis est spes') involves an un- 
 necessary and untenable trajection. 
 1] eXirls TTJs 8o|iis] the hope of glory; 
 apposition to the preceding Xpurrbs 
 iv i/ilv; not either the 'spei causa' 
 (Grot.), or the object of it (Vorst), 
 but its very element and substance; 
 see I Tim. i. i, and notes in loc. 
 The second gloss of Theoph. , ^ i\irU 
 ijliwv Ivdo^os, is unusually incorrect; 
 S6fa is a pure subst., and refers to 
 the future glory and blessedness in 
 heaven, see Bom. v. 2, i Cor. ii. 7 
 (appy.), 2 Cor. iv. 17, al. For a list 
 of the various words with which iX- 
 wls is thus joined, see Eeuss, Theol. 
 Ghret. iv. 20, Vol. 11. p. 221. 
 
 28. 8v iiiJiets Karayy.] whom we 
 preach; whom I and Timothy, with 
 other like-minded teachers (comp. 
 Steig.), do solemnly preach; the ■^- 
 yueis being emphatic, and instituting 
 a contrast between the accredited 
 and the non-accredited preachers of 
 
 the Gospel. On the intensive (surely 
 not local, &v<iidev airbv <j>ipovTei, 
 Chrys.) force of xarayy., see Rost u. 
 Palm, Lex. s.v. iv. 4. 
 vod96to5vt£s] admonishing, warning, 
 ' corripieutes,' Vulg. , jEth. : partici- 
 pial clause defining more nearly the 
 manner or accompaniments of the 
 KarayyeXia. The verb vovBereiv has 
 its proper force and meaning of ' ad- 
 monishing with blame' {vovSertKol 
 \6yoi., Xen. Mem, i. i. 21, comp. 
 notes ore Eph. vi. 4), and, as Mey. 
 (comp. De W.) rightly observes, 
 points to the neravoetre of the evan- 
 gelical message, while di.d6.o-K. lays 
 the foundation for the TrurreiieTe; so, 
 inferentially, Theoph., vovBecla iiiv 
 iirl TTis irpd^eas, SiSarrxaXfa Si iirl 
 SoyH&TUiv. On the meaning of vovBe- 
 reiv, which primarily implies correc- 
 tion by word, an appeal to the vovs 
 (comp. I Sam. iii. 13), and deriva- 
 tively correction by act, comp. Judith 
 viii. 27 ; see Plato, Legg. ix. p. 879 d, 
 and Trench, Synon. § 32. 
 iravra dvBp.] Thrice repeated and em- 
 phatic; appy. not without aJlusion 
 to the exclusiveness and Judaistic 
 bias of the false teachers at Colossse. 
 The message was universal, it was 
 addressed to every one, whether in 
 every case it might be received or 
 no: tL \iyeis; wdvra apBpairov; vol, 
 ^7]<rl, TOVTO aTrovbd.^op.ev' d di p.^ 
 yivTjTai. oidiv Tpbs ■qp.S.s, Theoph. 
 €v irdoTi a-0(|>Ci}] in all, soil, in every 
 form of, wisdom; see notes on Eph. 
 i. 8 : mode in which the diSaCKetv was 
 carried out, nerk Trcurris ffo^ias, Chrys. 
 (comp. oh. iii. 16), or perhaps, more 
 precisely, the characteristic element 
 in which the dtSaxh was always to 
 be, and to which it was to be oirbum- 
 soribed. The meaning is thus really 
 
1. 28, 29. 
 
 153 
 
 TTOV ev TTaari (rocplai, tva TrapacrTricroi>/j.eii iravTa avOpiairov 
 TeXeiov ev XpierT(p' ejy o Koi kottiS) ayaivtl^ofievoi 39 
 
 28. Xpi.crr(fi] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on greatly 
 preponderating authority: Ree. adds 'Iriirov. 
 
 the same, but the manner in which 
 it is expressed slightly different. The 
 lines of demarcation between sphere 
 of action (Bph. iv. 17), accordance 
 (Eph. iv. 16), and characterizing fea- 
 ture (Eph. vi. 2), all more or less in- 
 volving some notion of modality, are 
 not always distinctly recognizable. 
 The influence of the Aramaic ^ in 
 the various usages of iv in the N.T. 
 is by no means inconsiderable. 
 tva Trapao-TTJo-wiiev] in order that we 
 may present; exactly as in ver. 22, 
 with implied reference^ not to a 
 sacrifice, but to the final appearance 
 of every man before God: 'en me- 
 tam et soopum Pauli, atque adeo om- 
 nium verbi miuistrorum,' Davenant, 
 — whose remarks on the propriety of 
 the intention, — as coming from one 
 who sat at the Council of Dort, — are 
 not undeserving of perusal. The 
 concluding words, iv Xp., define as 
 usual the sphere in which the TeXeio- 
 7~i)s, ' I'ensemble de toutes les qualit^s 
 naturelles au Chretien' (Eeuss, Theol. 
 Chret. Vol. 11. p. 182), is to consist; 
 oomp. notes on ch. iv. 12, and on 
 Eph. iv. 13. The polemical anti- 
 thesis which Chrys. here finds, oiK 
 iv voiiif oiSi iv iyyi\ois, is perhaps 
 more than doubtful, owing to the 
 continual recurrence of iv Xpurrifi. 
 The term rAaos has been regarded 
 as a metaphor borrowed, from the 
 ancient mysteries. This is possible, 
 but improbable. It is much more 
 Ukely that the use of the term was 
 suggested by the known use of the 
 word by our blessed Lord ; see Matth. 
 V. 48, xix. 21. The idea of full-growth 
 is in some passages clearly the pre- 
 
 dominant meaning (comp. i Cor. xiv. 
 20, Eph. iv. 13, Heb. v. 14): with 
 this the idea of completeness and 
 perfectness is very naturally associ- 
 ated. 
 
 29. els S] to which end; the prep, 
 with its usual and proper force de- 
 noting the object contemplated in 
 the Koindv; comp. notes on Gal. ii. 8. 
 KttV Koiriw] I also toil; ' beside preach- 
 ing with vovSeffla and SiSa^i), I also 
 sustain every form of kotos (2 Cor. 
 vi. 5) in the cause of the Gospel,' the 
 Ktti contrasting (see notes on Phil. 
 iv. 12) the KOTTia with the previous 
 KttTayy. k.t.\. The relapse into the 
 first person has an individualizing 
 force, and carries on the reader from 
 the general and common labours of 
 preaching the Gospel (81' ^yuefs kot- 
 077.), to the struggles of the indi- 
 vidual preacher. On the meaning 
 and derivation of kottiiS, see notes on 
 I Tim. iv. 10. dy<avCC,6- 
 
 |ji.cvos] striving; oomp. ch. iv. 12, i 
 Tim. iv. 10 {Lachm., — a doubtful 
 reading), vi. 12, 2 Tim. iv. 7, and in 
 a more special sense, i Cor. ix. 25. 
 It is doubtful whether this is to be 
 referred to an outward or an inward 
 &yiiv. The former reference is a- 
 dopted by Chrys., Theoph., Daven., 
 al. ; the latter by Steig., Olsh., and 
 most modern commentators. The use 
 of /coTTiiD (see notes on i Tiin. iv. 10) 
 perhaps may seem to point to the 
 older interpretation; the immediate 
 context (ch. ii. i) however, and the 
 use of dyiavl^o/iai. in this Ep. (see ch. 
 iv. 12, dyuvL^ofievos virip vp,wv iv rats 
 irpoffevxaii), seem here rather more in 
 favour of modern exegesis, unless in- 
 
154 
 
 nPOS KOAASSAEI2. 
 
 Kara rtjv evepyeiav avrov rtiv evepyovnevijv ev ef^ot ev 
 ovvdfjLei. 
 II. eiXco y^p iiu^ai elSimi ^iXIkov aywva L'Vu?'tKu"SS| 
 
 come to the full knowledge of Christ. Let no one de- 
 ceive you : I am with you in spirit. 
 
 deed with (Ecum. and De Wette we 
 may witli good show of reason admit 
 both interpretations. 
 Kara Tiiv evepY- k.t.X.] according to 
 His working which worketh in me; 
 measure of the Apostle's spiritual 
 Koiros (oomp. notes on Eph. i. 19) ; it 
 was not his own ivipyiM but, as the 
 context seems to suggest, that of 
 Christ; top avrov kottov Kal d7ujpa t^ 
 Xpurr^ dvanSds, (Eoum., who alone 
 of the Greek commentators (Theod. 
 silet) expressly refers the avrov to 
 Christ, the others appy. referring it 
 back to 6 &e6s (ver. 27). On the 
 construction of the verb ivepy., see 
 notes on Gal. ii. 8, v. 6, and on its 
 meaning, notes on Phil. ii. 13. The 
 passive interpretation 'quae agitur, 
 exeroetur, perficitur' (Bull, Exam. 
 Cens. u. 3), though lexically defen- 
 sible, is not in accordance with St 
 Paul's regular use of the verb; see 
 on Phil. I. c. iv 8uvd|Ji6i.] 
 
 ire power, i.e. powerfully ; modal 
 adjunct to ivepyov/iiviiv. Though it 
 seems arbitrary to restrict diva/us to 
 miraculous gifts (Michael.), it still 
 seems equally so (with Mey. and Alf .) 
 summarily to exclude them; comp. 
 Gal. iii. 5. The principal reference, 
 as the singular suggests (contrast 
 Eom. i. 4 and Acts ii. 22), is to in- 
 ward operations; a secondary ref. 
 to outward manifestations of power 
 seems however fairly admissible ; 
 'quum res postulat, etiam miraoulis,' 
 Calv. ; comp. Olsh. in loc. 
 
 II. I — 5. The Apostle's earnest 
 labours for the Colossians. 1. ydp] 
 Description of the nature and objects 
 
 of the struggle previously aUuded to, 
 introduced by the yiip argumentative 
 (not transitional, Syr. [probably not 
 a different reading, see Sehaaf, Lex. 
 p. 1 1 2], and partially even Alf.), which 
 confirms and illustrates, — not mere- 
 ly the foregoing word iyai'it;6fi£vos 
 (Beng.), but the whole current of the 
 verse : 'meminerat in calce superioris 
 capitis suorum laborum et certami- 
 num, eorum nunc causam et mate- 
 riam explicat,' Just. 
 i]\Ck6v aYuvo] liow great a struggle ; 
 not ' solicitudinem,' Vnlg., but 'cer- 
 tamen,' Clarom., 'quantum colluc- 
 tor,' Mth. The struggle, as the cir- 
 cumstances of the Apostle's captivity 
 suggest, was primarily inward, — 
 'intense and painful anxiety,' Badie 
 (oomp. ch. iv. 12), yet not perhaps 
 wholly without reference to the out- 
 ward sufferings which he was en- 
 during for them (ch. i. 24), and for 
 all his converts. The qualitative adj. 
 tjXLkos (Hesych. iroTaTrSs, fi^as, otto?- 
 os; comp. Donalds. Cratyl. § 254) 
 occurs only here and James iii. 5. 
 Kal Twv €V A008.] The Christians in 
 the neighbouring city of Laodicea are 
 mentioned with them, as possibly 
 being subjected to the same evil in- 
 fluences of heretical teaching. The 
 rich (Eev. iii. 17) commercial (comp. 
 Cicero, Epist. Fam. in. 5. 4) city of 
 Laodicea^ formerly called Diospohs, 
 afterwards Ehoas, and subsequently 
 Laodicea, in honour of Laodioe, wife 
 of Antioohus II., was situated on the 
 river Lycus, about eighteen Eughsh 
 miles to the west of Colossse, and 
 about six miles south of Hierapolis, 
 which latter city is not improbably 
 
II. 
 
 156 
 
 ei^ft) vtrep vfj-wv Koi twu ev A.aoSiKeia, Kai oaoi oi3j( easpa- 
 Kav TO Trpoa-Mirov fiou ev (rapKi, "iva irapaKkri9w<Tiv at Kap- % 
 
 I. uTT^p] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on very clearly 
 preponderating authority : Rec, itepl. In what follows the form idpaxav 
 
 is adopted by Lachm., Tisch. {i6p.), Treg., Westc. and Hort (Up.), on greatly 
 preponderating authority: Rec, Rev., lupdKaai. The form is decidedly 
 Alexandrian (see Winer, Gr. § 13. i. c), and certainly the true reading. 
 The ' sonstige Gebrauch Pauli ' urged against it by Mey. is imaginary, as the 
 third pers. plur. perf. of this verb does not elsewhere occur in St Paul's Epp. 
 
 hinted at in Kai So-oi k.t.X. ; see 
 Wieseler, Ghronol. p. 441 note. 
 Close upon the probable date of this 
 Bp. (a.d. 61 or 62), the city suffered 
 severely from an earthquake, but 
 was restored without any assistance 
 from Bome; Tacit. Ann. xiv. 27, 
 comp. Strabo, Geogr. xii. 8. 16 (ed. 
 Kramer): a place bearing the name 
 of EsM-hissar is supposed to mark 
 the site of this once important city. 
 For further notices of Laodioea see 
 Winer, RWB. B.v. Vol. 11. p. 5, 
 Pauly, Real-Encycl. Vol. rv. 1, p. 
 764, and Arundell, Seven Churches, 
 p. 84 sq., ib. Asia Minor, Vol. 11. p. 
 180 sq. Kai So-oi k.t.X.] 
 
 and (in a word) as many as, &o. , the 
 Kai probably annexing the general 
 to the special (oomp. Matth. xxvi. 
 59, notes on Eph. i. 21, Phil. iv. 12, 
 and Winer, Gr. § 53. 3. c), and in- 
 cluding, with perhaps a thought of 
 Hierapolis (see above), all in those 
 parts who had not seen the Apostle. 
 The ordinary principles of grammati- 
 cal perspicuity seem distinctly to im- 
 ply that the ip.as and the oi iv AaoS. 
 belong to the general class Kai S<roi 
 K.T.X., and consequently that the 
 Colossians were not personally ac- 
 quainted with the Apostle. Eecent 
 attempts have been made to refer the 
 oVoi either to a third set of persons 
 distinct from the Coloss. and Laod. 
 (Sohulz, Stiid. u. Krit. 1829, p. 538; 
 so Theod. and a schol. in Matthsei, 
 
 p. 168), or to a portion only of those 
 two Churches (Wiggers, Stud.u. Krit. 
 1838, p. 176), but as all the words 
 are in fact under the vinculum of a 
 common preposition, and as oVoi if 
 dissociated from u/xfiK Kai ruiv iv 
 Aao5. (comp. Sohulz) would leave 
 the mention of these two former 
 classes most aimless and unnatural, 
 we seem justified in concluding with 
 nearly all modern editors (exo. 
 Wordsw.) that the Colossians and 
 Laodioeans had not seen the Apostle 
 in the flesh; see the good note of 
 Wieseler, Chronol. p. 440 sq., and 
 Neander, Planting, Vol. 1. p. 171 
 (Bohn). iv o-opKl seems 
 
 naturally connected with the pre- 
 ceding irpbaoiirov jiov (Vulg., Copt., 
 ^th.), not with edpaKav (Syr., but 
 not Syr.-Phil., where the order is 
 changed), forming with it one single 
 idea. It is almost obvious that there 
 is here no implied antithesis to iv 
 TTvei/iart {SelKvva^v ivravda on idpwv 
 avvexiSs iv TV., Chrys., Theoph., 
 comp. ver. 5) : the bodily counte- 
 nance is not in opposition with 'the 
 spiritual physiognomy,' Olsh., but 
 seems a concrete touch added to en- 
 hance the nature of his struggle; it 
 was not for those whom he personally 
 knew and who personally knew him, 
 but for those for whom his interest 
 was purely spiritual and ministerial. 
 2. iva irapttKX. k.t.X.] in order 
 that their hearts may be comforted; 
 
156 
 
 nPOS KOAAS2AEI2. 
 
 Siai avrwv, avfi^t/Saa-devTei iv aydirt] kuI ety Trav 
 irXovTOs T^s TrXtipocbopiag T>}i ervveaetoi, eti eiriyvioatv 
 
 ■2. avfi^i^aa-Shre!;] So Laehm., Tisch., Treg., Bev., Westc. and Hort 
 (ffw/S.), on greatly preponderating authority : Rec, (rv/iPi^aaBipriav. irav 
 
 irXouTos] So Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on clearly prepondera- 
 ting authority, as against Bee, irivra ttKoStov. Lachm., [Treg.] insert 
 t6 before TrXoCros, but on insufficient authority. On this neuter form, see 
 notes on Eph. i. 7. 
 
 not ' may be strengthened, ' ' inve- 
 niant robur,' Copt, [literally, but it 
 is doubtful whether the derivative 
 meaning ' consol. accipere ' is not the 
 most common, e.g. Psalm exix. 52], 
 De W., Alf., al., — but ' consolentur ' 
 (eonsolationemaccipiant),Vulg., 'con- 
 sol, aooipiant,' Syr., 'gaudeant.'^th., 
 —the fuller meaning which in pas- 
 sages of this nature -irapaK. appears 
 to bear always in St Paul's Epp., 
 and from which there does not here 
 seem sufficient reason to depart (eontr. 
 Bisp., Alf.) : surely those exposed to 
 the sad trial of erroneous teaching 
 needed consolation ; comp. Davenant 
 in loc. For exx. of irapaKoK. comp, ch. 
 iv. 8, Eph. vi. 22, and even 2 Thess. 
 ii. 1 7, where the associated (jT-qpl^ai 
 is not a repetition, but an amplifi- 
 cation of the preceding irapuKokiaai.. 
 The final &o is obviously dependent 
 on aywva ^x" (comp. Chrys. 07. ?x" " 
 Xva tI yivriTai;), and introduces the 
 aim of the struggle, — the consolation 
 and spiritual union of those beUevers 
 previously mentioned who had not 
 seen the Apostle in the flesh. 
 (rv|j[.piPa(r6^VTCs iv 07.] they being 
 knit together in love ; relapse to the 
 logical subject by the common par- 
 ticipial anacoluthon (Bph. iv. 2 ; see 
 notes on Eph. i. 18, and Phil. i. 30), 
 the participle having its modal force, 
 and defining the manner whereby, 
 and circumstances under which, the 
 irapdKXijtTis was to take place ; see 
 Madvig, Synt. § 176. b. The verb 
 
 o-wiSijS. has not here its derivative 
 sense, 'instructi,' Vulg., Copt., but 
 its primary meaning of aggregation, 
 ' knit together,' Auth. (comp. Syr., 
 ' accedant;' ^th., 'confirmetur'), as 
 in ver. ig, and Eph. iv. 16, where see 
 notes. 'Ev dyiTry, with 
 
 the usual meaning of the prep., de- 
 notes not the instrument (' per cari- 
 tatem,' Est.), but the sphere and 
 element in which they were to be 
 knit together, and is associated by 
 means of the copulative Kal (not 
 ' etiam,' Beng.) with eh irav k.t.X. 
 which defines the object of the union ; 
 see next note. els irav 
 
 ■rrXoilTos] unto all the riches ; prepo- 
 sitional member defining the object 
 and purpose contemplated in the avp.- 
 pi^aa-ts, and closely connected with 
 the preceding definition of the ethi- 
 cal sphere of the action ; deep under- 
 standing and insight into the mystery 
 of God is the object of the union in 
 love. The connexion with vapaKkriB. 
 (Baumg.-Crus.) mars the union of 
 the prepositional members, and adds 
 nothing in point of exegesis. 
 Tijs 'irX'r)po(j)op£as Trjs <r«v^ir.] of the 
 full assurance of the understanding; 
 not ' certo persuass intelligentite,' 
 Daven., a resolution of the gen. 
 which is wholly unnecessary : comp. 
 notes on ch. i. 27. The word Tr\ripo<t>. 
 (i Thess. i. 5, Heb. vi. 11, is.. 22) de- 
 notes on the qualitative side (as ttXoOtos 
 does on the quantitative, DeW.) the 
 completeness of the persuasion which 
 
II. 
 
 157 
 
 TQv fwcTTtipiov rov Qeov, Xpiarrov, iv <S etalv TravTe? ol 3 
 
 1. Tov Oeov, XpiaTov] This passage deserves our attentive consideration. 
 The reading of the text is that of B, Hil. (Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. 
 and Hort), and has every appearance of being the original reading, from which 
 the many perplexing variations have arisen. The principal other readings are 
 (a) ToOeeoC, D^P; 35r. 67**- 71. 80*- 116 (Griesb., Schoh, Tisch. ed. 2, 7), fol- 
 lowed by Olsh., De W., Alf., and the majority of modern oommentt.: (6) tov 
 Qeov i(TTiv Xptards, with D'; Clarom. (iEth. qiiod de Ghristo): (c) tov Qeov 
 TTOTpds Tou Xpu7Tov with AC (N'' omits tov before Xp., X* reads /col vaTp.) ; al.; 
 Vv. ; and lastly, (d) tou eeoO Kal iraTpos Kai tov Xp. with D'KL ; many mas. ; 
 Syr.-Harol. ; Theod. , Dam., al. {Bee). The Greek text of FG is here deficient. 
 Now of these (a) is undoubtedly too weakly supported ; (6) seems very like a 
 gloss of the assumed true reading tou GeoO Xp. ; (c) and (d) still more ex- 
 panded or explanatory readings. As all four may be so simply derived from 
 the text, the first by omission, the rest by gloss and expansion, we adopt 
 with considerable confidence that which may justly claim to be considered as 
 the original reading. 
 
 was to be associated with the irrfcecris, 
 — which the aiveai% was to have and 
 to involve (gen. possess.), — and, as 
 Olsh. observes, may denote that the 
 (Tiiveins was not to be merely outward, 
 dependent on the intellect, but in- 
 ward, resting on the testimony of 
 the Spirit ; conip. Clem.-Eom. i Cor. 
 § 42. On the meaning of a-ivea-is, see 
 notes on ch. i. 9: that it is here 
 Christian aiveais is certain from the 
 context (Mey.). els 
 
 eitlfvuMnv K.T.X.] unto the full know- 
 ledge of the mystery of God, even 
 Christ; prepositional member ex- 
 actly parallel' to the preceding els 
 wav t6 tX. k.t.X. The construction 
 of the last three words is somewhat 
 doubtful. Three connexions present 
 themselves ; (a) ' the mystery of the 
 God of Christ,' Huth., Mey., Xpur- 
 Tov being the possessive gen. of rela- 
 tionship, (&a.; see Seheuerl. Synt. 
 § 16. 7, p. 123 sq., and comp. Eph. i. 
 17, and notes in loc.; (p) ' the mys- 
 tery of God, even of Christ,' Xp. 
 being a gen. in simple apposition to, 
 and more exactly defining 9eou; so 
 in effect Hil., ' Deus Christus aaora- 
 mentum est;' (7) 'th^ mystery of 
 
 God, even Christ:' Xp. being in ap- 
 position, not to OeoC, but to pMirTri- 
 plov, and so forming a very close pa- 
 rallel to ch. i. 27. Of these (a) seems 
 hopelessly hard and artificial ; (^), 
 though dogmatically true, seems here 
 to be an unnecessary specification, 
 and exegetioally considered is much 
 inferior to (7), which stands in har- 
 mony with the preceding expression 
 p,V(TT7iplov...os i(mv Xpio-T6s(ch. i. 27), 
 and has the indirect support of D^ 
 (see crit. note); Clarom.; Aug., and 
 ^th. za-haenta Chrestos [quod de 
 Christo]. It seems singular that 
 these words have not given rise to 
 more discussion (South has a doc- 
 trinal sermon on the text. Vol. 11. 
 p. 174 sq. , but does not notice the 
 readings), for (fi), though in point of 
 collocation somewhat doubtful, seems 
 still, considered apart from the con- 
 text, not indefensible, and at any 
 rate is not to be disposed of by 
 Meyer's summary ' entbehrt aller 
 Paulinischen Analogie.' We adopt 
 (7) however, on what seem to be 
 well defined exegetioal grounds. On 
 the meaning and applications of 
 fivarripiov, see notes on Eph. v. 32, 
 
158 
 
 nP02 KOAA22AEI2. 
 
 4 Otjaravpo) rtjv a-ocplai Ka\ yvwcreoot cnroKpucfyoi. tovto 
 
 3. yvdffeus] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on clearly 
 preponderating authority: Bee, and former edd. of this Commentary, ttjs 
 yviicreiK. 
 
 Beuas, Theol. Chret. n. 9, Vol. 11. 
 p. 89 ; and for the exact force of iirl- 
 ypiaa-tt (' aoourata oognitio'), here 
 appy. confirmed by the juxtaposi- 
 tion of the simple yiiuiii.s, ver. 3, see 
 notes on Eph. i. 17, 2 Tim. ii. 25 
 (Transl.), and Trench, Synon. § 75. 
 
 3. Iv <f] in whom, relative sentence 
 explaining the predication involved 
 in the preceding apposition {/iva-rrjp. = 
 Xpia-Tov), the relative having its ex- 
 flanatwy force ; see notes on oh. i. 
 ■25. To follow the reading of the 
 text, and yet to refer iv $ to /j-vff- 
 Tijplov (Mey.), seems unusually per- 
 plexed, unless (with Mey.) we adopt 
 the unsatisfactory construction (a), 
 previously discussed. De Wette and 
 Mey. urge the implied antithesis 
 between /ivffr. and a-wiKp., but to this 
 it may be said, — first, that what is 
 applicable to iwitt. is equally so to 
 that to which it is equivalent (comp. 
 Bisp.); secondly, that the secondary 
 predicate diroicpu^oi (see below) logi- 
 cally elucidates the equivalence of 
 XptffTos with the iivar'qpiov , but 
 would seem otiose if only added to 
 enhance the nature of the iwarifpiov 
 or the iirlyvaaii thereof: comp. 
 Waterl. Christ's Div. Serm. vii. Vol. 
 II. p. 156. «l<rlv irdvTes 
 
 K.T.X.] are all the treasures of wis- 
 dom and knowledge, hidden; not ' the 
 secret treasures, <&c.,' Mey., Alf., 
 which obscures the secondary predi- 
 cation of manner, and in fact con- 
 founds it with the usual ' attributive ' 
 construction (Kriiger, Sprachl. § 50. 
 8). The position of the substantive 
 verb and the order of the words 
 seem to show that air6Kpv(poi is not 
 to be joined with ela-lv as a direct 
 
 predication (Syr., Copt., De W., al.), 
 but that it is subjoined to it (Vulg., 
 Mih.) as the predication of manner, 
 and is in fact equivalent to an ad- 
 verb, the most distinct type of the 
 secondary predicate ; see esp. Donald- 
 son, Cratyl. § 304, and comp. Muller, 
 Kleine Schrift. Vol. i. p. 310 (Don- 
 aids.), who has the credit of first 
 introducing this necessary distinction 
 between 'adjectiva attributa, priEdi- 
 cata, axidiapposita ; ' see also Donalds. 
 Gr. § 436 — 447. It will be seen that 
 the translation of Mey. and Alf., and 
 esp. the explanation based upon it, 
 is unsatisfactory from these impor- 
 tant distinctions not having been 
 observed. ExegeticaUy con- 
 
 sidered, the expression seems to 
 convey that all treasures of wisdom 
 and knowledge are in Christ, and 
 are hiddenly so, ' quo verbo innuitur, 
 quod pretiosum et magnificum est in 
 Ohristo non prominere, aut protinus 
 in oculos incurrere hominum car- 
 nalium, sed ita latere ut conspiciator 
 tantummodo ab illis quibus Deus 
 oculos dedit aquilinos, id est spiritu- 
 ales ad videndum,' Daven. ; uo-re 
 Trap' a{iTov Set Tavra alTeiv, Chrys. 
 There is thus no need with Bahr and 
 others to modify the simple meaning 
 of the adjective. Ttjs 
 
 o-oifiCas Kal yviimtoi] wisdom and 
 knowledge, the two words being 
 closely united, as under the vincu- 
 lum of a single article. They are 
 found similarly in association Eom. 
 xi. 33, I Cor. xii. 8. The exact dis- 
 tinction between these words is not 
 perhaps very easy to substantiate. 
 We can hardly say that ' <70<fila res 
 credendas, 7i'u!o-(s res agendas com- 
 
n. 4, 5- 
 
 159 
 
 Xeyw iva /x^Seh v/uLat irapaXoyi^riTai iv iridavoXoyla. 
 et yap Kat rp arapKl aveiixi, aWa. tw wev/xaTt crvv vfiiv 5 
 
 4. TovTo \4yoi] So Tisch., Mev., Weste. and Hort, on preponderating 
 authority: Bee, Lachm., [Treg.'] and former edd. of this Commentary, tovto 
 di X^u. In what follows /tTjSeis is adopted by Lachm., Tisch., Treg., 
 
 Rev., Westc. and Hort, on greatly preponderating authority: Rec., ni tis. 
 
 pleotitur' (Daven.), but rather the 
 contrary. It would seem, as in the 
 case of (To^la and ippdviins (see notes 
 on Eph. i. 9), that aoijila is the more 
 general, ' wisdom ' in its completest 
 sense, koivus airavrav iJkA8-q<ns, Suid., 
 yviSffis the more restricted and spe- 
 cial ' knowledge,' as contrasted with 
 the results and applications of it ; in 
 a word, aoipta is the higher, guiding, 
 and ruling principle, while ynuais 
 implies rather apprehension of things 
 falling under cognisance, and of the 
 ways and means which ao^ta makes 
 ultimate use of: see Cremer, Bibl.- 
 Theol. Worterh.^. 156, Trench, Synon. 
 § 75, Neander, Planting, Yol. i. p. 139 
 (Bohu), Delitzsch, Bibl. Psychol, iv. 
 7, p. 166, and on the meaning of 
 'wisdom,' comp. H. Taylor, Notes 
 from Life, p. 95. 
 
 4. toJto \fy<o] This I say ; reca- 
 pitulatory comment on the foregoing, 
 clearing the way for the warnings 
 which, with some intermixture of 
 exhortation and doctrinal statements, 
 pervade the chapter. The tovto seems 
 clearly to refer not merely to ver. 3, 
 but to the whole introductory para- 
 graph, ver. I — 3. irapaXo- 
 7£ji]Tai] may deceive ; only here and 
 James i. 22, though not uncommon 
 in the LXX, e.g. Josh. ix. 22 {28), i 
 Sam. xxviii. 12, 2 Sam. xxi. 5, al. 
 The verb TrapoKoy. is of common 
 occurrence in later Greek, and pro- 
 perly denotes, either simply 'to 
 reckon wrong ' (Demosth. Aphob. i. 
 p. 822), or ' to reason falsely ' (Isocr. 
 Ep. IV. p. 420 c), and thence gener- 
 
 ally, AiraTav, feiaourdai, (Hesych.) ; 
 comp. Arrian, Epict. n. 20, i^aira- 
 Tunv ifias Kai irapaXoyt^ovTai, and 
 exx. in Eisner, 06s. Vol. 11. p. 261, 
 Loesn. Obs. p. 335. iv 
 
 iri6avoXo7ta] with enticing speech; 
 comp. I Cor. ii. 4, iv TreiSois iro0fas 
 \670(s, the prep, iv having that spe- 
 cies of instrumental force in which 
 the object is conceived to exist in the 
 means; comp. Jelf, Gr. § 622. 3. 
 The subst., an air. \eyip.. in the 
 N.T., occurs in Plato, Thecet. p. 162 e, 
 and the verb in Aristot. Eth. Nic. 1. 1 , 
 but with a more special and technical 
 reference to probability as opposed 
 to demonstration or mathematical 
 certainty. 
 
 5. eI Yelp KaC K.T.X.] For if I am 
 absent verily in the flesh; reason for 
 the foregoing warning, founded on 
 the fact of his spiritual presence 
 with them ; el ycip Kai rg <rapKl aira/u, 
 dW 8/iws olSa Toiis diraTewpas, Chrys. 
 The Kai does not belong, strictly 
 speaking, to $1 (comp. Eaphel in 
 loc), but to a-apd, on which it 
 throws a slight emphasis, contrast- 
 ing it with the following -wveiiJkan: 
 see notes on Phil. ii. 17. The dative 
 irapKl is the dat. 'of reference,' and, 
 with the regular limiting power of 
 that case, marks that to which the 
 &Trovala was restricted ; see notes on 
 Gal. i. 22. dWd] yet on 
 
 the contrary, nevertheless ; the hy- 
 pothetical protasis being followed 
 by dXXck at the commencement of the 
 apodosis : see exx. in Hartung, Partik. 
 AWd, 2. 8. Vol. II. p. 40. In these 
 
160 
 
 nPOS KOAA22AETS. 
 
 eifil, -^^alpwv KOI ^Xeirwv v/iwv rhv ra^iv Kai 
 pea>fjt,a Ttji els Xojo-toi' vlaTCWi vficov. 
 
 TO (ne- 
 
 cases, which are not uncommon, the 
 dXXA. preserves its primary and pro- 
 per force ; ' per istam partieulam 
 quasi transitus ad rem novam sig- 
 nifioatur quse ei quae membro ora- 
 tionis conditional! erat declarata jam 
 opponatur,' Klotz, Devar. Vol. ii. 
 p. 93. Tw irveunaTi] 
 
 in the spirit ; dative exactly similar 
 to Tj (7apKL It need scarcely be 
 said that this is St Paul's human 
 spirit (Beck, Seelenl. 11. i r, p. 28 sq.), 
 not any influence of the Holy Spirit, 
 Pseud-Ambr. (comp. Grot. ; Daven. 
 unites both), which would here vio- 
 late the obvious antithesis. The de- 
 duction of Wiggers {Stud. u. Krit. 
 1838, p. 181) from this passage and 
 esp. from the use of airei/ii, that there 
 had been a previous irapovala with 
 the Colossians on the part of St 
 Paul, is rightly rejected by De Wette 
 and Mey. : the verb itself simply 
 implies absence without any ref. to 
 a previous presence; the accessory 
 thought is supplied by the context. 
 Contrast the other instances in the 
 N.T., I Cor. V. 3, 2 Cor. x. i, 11, xiii. 
 1, 10, Phil. i. 27, in all of which 
 trdpei/j-t or an equivalent is distinctly 
 expressed. <rvv v\iXv] with 
 
 you; ' joined with you,' in a true and 
 close union ; comp. Gal. iii. 9, where 
 see remarks on the difference be- 
 tween criv and /terd : comp. notes on 
 Eph. vi. 23. x°''p<'<' K-T.X.] 
 
 rejoicing (with yoii), and seeing your 
 order; modal and circumstantial 
 clause defining the feelings with 
 which his presence in spirit was 
 accompanied, and the accessory cir- 
 cumstances. There is some diffi- 
 culty in the union of these two 
 participles. After rejecting all un- 
 tenable assumptions, of an iv SiA, 
 
 Svoiv (' gaudeo dum video,' Wolf), — a 
 zeugmatic construction of the aocus. 
 with both verbs (' mit Preuden 
 sehend,' De W.),— a trajection ('see- 
 ing. ..and rejoicing,' see Winer, Gr. 
 § 54. 5, and note), — a causal use of 
 Kal Cgaudens quia cerno,' Daven., 
 compare Syr.), we have three plau- 
 sible interpretations, (o), 'rejoicing, 
 to wit, seeing, &a.,' Kal being used 
 purely explicatively, Olsh., Winer 2, 
 I.e. ; (;8) ' rejoicing {thereat), i. e. at 
 being with you in spirit, and seeing, 
 &c.,' the subject of the xo-h^^' being 
 deduced from the words immediately 
 preceding, and the koX being simply 
 copulative; so Mey., and after him 
 Eadie and Alf. ; (7) ' rejoicing {about 
 you] and seeing,' i<l>' i/up being sug- 
 gested by the preceding <riii vpuv, 
 Winer 1, I.e., Fritz. Rom. Vol. 11. 
 p. 425 note. Of these (a) seems 
 hard and artificial ; (|8) imports a 
 somewhat alien thought, for surely 
 it was the state of the Colossians 
 rather than the being with them in 
 spirit that made the Apostle rejoice; 
 (7) preserves the practical connexion 
 of x^'p- '^^ tlie latter part of the 
 sentence, but assumes an ellipse 
 which the context does not very 
 readily supply. It seems best then 
 (5) so far to modify (7) as to as- 
 sume a continuation of <riv ifuv ; the 
 modal xalpoiv expressing the Apostle's 
 general feeling of joyful sympathy 
 (suggested by the state in which he 
 found them), while the circumstantial 
 pxiiriiiv K.T.\. adds a more special, 
 and, in fact, explanatory accessory : 
 for this use of Kal (special after ge- 
 neral), comp. notes on Eph. v. 18, 
 and PML iv. 12. Tr\v Tti|iv] 
 
 order, i.e. 'orderly state and con- 
 duct;' Ti)v Td^tv, riiv dra^tav <l>r\<rl, 
 
II. 6. 
 
 161 
 
 Walk steadfastly in Christ. Let no 
 vain philosophy lead you away from 
 Him who has quickened you, forgiven 
 
 ?ou, and triumphed over all the 
 'owers of evil. 
 
 'fi? ovv irapeXafieTe toi' 6 
 XjOJffTOi' 'Irjo-ovv Tov K-vpiov, 
 
 Chrys. ; specification of their state 
 outwardly considered in reference to 
 churoh-fellowship, and to the atten- 
 tion and obedience shown by the 
 good soldier of Christ: us y&p M 
 vapard^eois i) cira^la Ti)v <p6,\ayya 
 orepecti' /ca^itTTijirti', oOrw Kal ^irl rijs 
 iKKXiifflas &Tav eirra^la fj, t^s dydirris 
 T&vra KaBiariSxTtis xal /it] ivrav O'X"''- 
 li&Tbiv, rbrre Kal rb ffrepia/m ylverai., 
 Thepph. The allusion may be to a 
 well-organized body politic (Mey., 
 Alf. ; comp. Demosth. de Rhod. Lib. 
 p. 2oo), or perhaps more probably, 
 in accordance with the Apostle's 
 metaphors elsewhere (Eph. vi. ii 
 sq.), to military service ; see Wolf in 
 he, TO a'TEp^<i>|i.a] the 
 
 solid front,soU.. firm attitude, Ka6iirep 
 Trpbs ffrpaTLwras euraKTWs effrtijTas 
 Kcd |8ej3o(cos, Chrys. ; specification of 
 their state inwardly considered : not 
 ' firmitas,' Syr., iEth. [both which 
 languages have another word more 
 exactly answering to the concrete], 
 followed by Huth., De Wette, al., 
 but 'firmamentum,' Vulg., Copt. — 
 there being no lexical ground for 
 regarding the more concrete are- 
 piuiM ('effect o£ the verb as a con- 
 crctum, ' Buttm. Gr.% 119. 7; nearly 
 = part. in -lievov) as identical in 
 meaning with the purely abstract 
 (TTepednis. The word is an ott. Xeyofi, 
 in the N.T. (comp. 1 Pet. v, 9, Acts 
 xvi. s), but occurs frequently in 
 the LXX., and nearly always in 
 its proper sense, though occasionally 
 showing the tendency of later Greek 
 by a partial approximation to the 
 verbal in -o-is ; comp. Esth. ix. 29, 
 The gen. may be a gen. of apposition 
 (see Winer, Gr. § 59. 8, comp. 
 Scheuerl. Synt. § 12. i, p. 82), but 
 seems more naturally a gen. subjecti 
 
 E. 
 
 referable to the general category of the 
 possessive genitive. On the oonstr. 
 of TriffT. with els, see notes on i Tim. 
 i. 16, and Beuss, Theol. Ghr4t. iv. 
 14, Vol. n. p. 129. After 
 
 these words we have no reason for 
 doubting that the Church of Colossie, 
 though tried by heretical teaching, 
 was substantially sound in the faith. 
 
 ExHOBTATION AND WAKNINQS. (6 — 23.) 
 
 6 — 15. Exhortation, followed by 
 warning against being led away from 
 Christ. 6. 'iis oilv irop{\dpere]4s 
 then ye received: exhortation founded 
 on the words of blended warning and 
 encouragement in the two preceding 
 verses, otv having its common retro- 
 spective and collective force ('ad ea 
 quas antea reverS, posita sunt lectorem 
 revocat,' Klotz), and thus answering 
 better to 'then' (Peile) than 'there- 
 fore' (Alf.) : see Klotz, Devar. Vol. 
 II. p. 717, comp. Donalds. Gr. § 604. 
 The irapd, in irapeXd^ere can hardly 
 be 'from me,' Alf. (see on ver. i), but 
 from Epaphras (ch. i. 7) and your first 
 teachers in Christianity. Though 
 the reference seems mainly to be to 
 reception by teaching (comp. ididd- 
 X^vre, ver. 7), the object is so em- 
 phatically specified, riv Xp. 'It/o-. t6v 
 Kip.i as appy. to require a more in- 
 clusive meaning; they received not 
 merely the dnJ/jaToc SidavKaXlav 
 (Theod.), the 'dootrinam Christi' 
 (Daven.), but Christ Himself, in 
 Himself the sum and substance of 
 all teaching (Olsh., Bisp.); comp. 
 Eph. iv. 20, and notes in loc, 
 t6v Kilpiov] The Lobe; not with- 
 out emphasis; yet not so much as 
 'for your Lord,' Alf., after Huth. 
 and Mey., — an interpretation which, 
 independently of grammatical diffi- 
 culties (in 2 Cor. iv. 5 Kipiov has no 
 M 
 
162 
 
 nP02 K0AA22AEI2. 
 
 7 iv avT$ irepiiraTelre, eppi'Cuifi.evoi Koi eTroiKoSofi.ovfievoi 
 ev avT(p, Kai ^e^aiovfievoi rp Trlcrrei Ka6w9 eSi- 
 ddxOfire, vepicrcrevovrei ev avr'^ ev ev-^^apKnla.. 
 
 7. ry Trfo-rei] So Lachm., Tiseh., Treg., Bev., Westc. and Hort, on limited, 
 but preponderating authority, the probability of an insertion of the preposi- 
 tion being here very great : Bee. h tJ vUrra. iv air^'] So Bee, Lachm. 
 [Westc. and Hort], with ED^KLP; great mass of mss. ; Chrys., Theod., al. : 
 iv airifi is the reading of D^X*; mss. ; Clarom., Aug., Vulg. (ed.), and perhaps 
 some Vv., the inflexions of which often leave it uncertain whether iv airr^ or 
 iv ouT(? was in the original. The two words are omitted by Tisch., Treg., 
 Bev., with ACK^; 15 mss.; Am., Fuld., Tol. (certainly not Copt., as Tisch., 
 Treg.); Archel., al. The authority, however, for their omission does not 
 seem sufficient, especially when we remember that such an omission might 
 so easily have been suggested by the difficulty of the construction. 
 
 article, see Middleton, Gr. Art. iii. 
 3. 4), would make vapaXa^eCv imply 
 rather the recognition of a principle 
 of doctrine, than the spiritual recep- 
 tion of the personal Lord. The title, 
 as both the position and article show, 
 is plainly emphatic, — it marks Him 
 as Lord of all, above all Principality 
 and Power (Eph. i. 21), the Creator 
 of men and angels (eh. i. 16), but 
 cannot be safely regarded as form- 
 ing a tertiary predication; comp. 
 Donalds. Gratyl. § 305. iv 
 
 avT$ irtpiiraxeiTs] walk in Him, as 
 the sphere and element of your 
 Christian course. Christ is not here 
 represented as an 6S6s (■^ irpocrdyov<ra 
 els rbv Uaripa, Chrys.), but as an en- 
 sphering 'Lebens-Element' (Mey.), 
 to which the irepiiraTeiv, i.e. life and 
 all its principles and developments, 
 was to be circumscribed; comp. Gal. 
 ii. 20, Phil. i. 20. For a practical 
 sermon on this text, see Parindon, 
 Serm. xxxn. Vol. 11. p. 165 (Tegg). 
 
 7. lppi£<a|Uvoi Kal liroiK. ev avr^] 
 having been rooted and being built up 
 im, Him; modal definitions appended 
 to the preceding irepimaTetv ; the first 
 under the image of a root-fast tree 
 (hence the perf. part.), the second 
 under that of a continually uprising 
 building (hence thcjpres. part.), mark- 
 
 ing the stable growth and organic 
 solidity of those who truly walk in 
 Christ. The iv airlg is attached to 
 both: Christ, as Mey. observes, is 
 both the ground in which the root is 
 held (comp. Eph. iii. 18), and the 
 solid foundation on which (i Cor. iii. 
 1 1) the building is raised, — the prep. 
 iv (not iirl, Eph. ii. 20) being stu- 
 diously continued to enhance the idea 
 iv XpuxTifi that pervades the passage; 
 comp. Eph. ii. 21, 22. The acces- 
 sory idea of the foundation is admi- 
 rably conveyed by the iirl in the 
 compound verb iiroiK. ; comp. i Cor. 
 iii. 12, Eph. ii. 20. In a passage of 
 such force and perspicuity we need 
 not pause on the slight mixture of 
 metaphors: it would be difficult in- 
 deed to imagine such fruitful and 
 suggestive thoughts conveyed in so 
 few words. Kal pt^aiovii,. 
 
 rfj irCo-Tsi] and being stablished in 
 your faith; the idea (t4 (S^^oioc) in- 
 volved in the preceding participles 
 being still more clearly brought out, 
 — and, as the nature of the case re- 
 quires, expressed in the present tense. 
 The dat. t^ Trferei is not the instru- 
 mental dat. (Mey., Lightf.), but the 
 dat. 'of reference to' (De W.), faith 
 being more naturally regarded, not as 
 the cement of the building (Lightf.), 
 
II. 7, 8. 
 
 163 
 
 BXeTrere ^ui; rty v/xaf earai 6 crvXayayySiv Sia t?? 8 
 
 8. i/ms la-rat] So Rec, Tisch,, Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort (with marg.), 
 on clearly preponderating authority : Lachm. adopts the more obvious, and 
 so, critically considered, the less probable order, larai. i/ias. 
 
 but as the principle whjoh needed 
 /Se/3o/(i)(r(s, and to which it might 
 most appropriately be restricted : 
 see notes on Gal. i. 22. Ka6cis ^81- 
 SdxS.] even as ye were taught; scil. to 
 become firmly established in faith; 
 this they might have learnt fromBpa- 
 phras.or some of their early instructors 
 (ch. i. 7, where see also notes on KaBds). 
 ircpKrir. Iv avrfj k.t.X.] abounding 
 in it with thanksgiving : participial 
 clause subordinate to /Se/Saioi^ju. , 
 mainly reiterating with a quantita- 
 tive, what had been previously ex- 
 pressed with a qualitative reference. 
 Of the two prepositional adjuncts, 
 the first ^i* aiir^ is united closely 
 with Trepio-o-., specifying the element 
 and item in which the increase takes 
 place (equiv. to abundare with an 
 abl. ; see notes on Phil. i. 9), the 
 second as ' the field of operation, or 
 element, in which' (Alf.), or perhaps 
 rather the accompaniment with which 
 (<r{ii> eixO'P-i (Ecum.), the ireptac. iv 
 irlffTa was associated and as it were 
 environed: oomp. Luke xiv. 31, i 
 Cor. iv. 21, in which the gradual 
 transition from the more distinct 
 idea of environment to the less de- 
 fined idea of accompaniment may be 
 easily traced; see Green, Gr. p. 289, 
 and notes on ch, iv. 2. 
 
 8. BX^ircTt (111 Tis K.T.X.] Take 
 heed lest there shall be any one that 
 maketh you his booty, — you as weU as 
 the others that have been led away ; 
 iifms, as the order suggests, being 
 slightly emphatic: see critical note. 
 The cautionary imper. /SX^^rere is 
 found in at least six combinations 
 in the N.T. ; (a) with a dependent 
 aoous., Mark iv. 24, Phil. iii. 2; (6) 
 
 with &irl) and a gen., Mark viii. 15, 
 xii. 38 ; (c) with ?rfis and the indie, 
 Luke viii. 18, i Cor. iii. 10; (d) with 
 ha and the subj., i Cor. xvi. 10; (c) 
 with (1.71 and the subjunctive, — the 
 prevailing construction, Matth. xxiv. 
 4, Gal. V. 15, al.; (/) with /ir; and 
 the future, only here and Heb. iii. 12. 
 The last construction is adopted in 
 the present case as Implying the fear 
 that the case contemplated will really 
 occur, 'ne futurus sit qui;' see 
 Winer, Gr. § 56. 2, Hartung, Partik. 
 M'5. 5. 6, Vol. II. p. 140, and comp. 
 Herm. Soph. Elect. 993. Numerous 
 exx. of /i7) in different constructions 
 after Spa k.t.\. will be found in 
 Gayler, Partik. Neg. p. 316 sq. 
 <rDVo7<i>Ymv] bearing away as a booty ; 
 an (i?r. \ey6fi,. in the N.T., found only 
 in later Greek, both directly with an 
 aoeus. persona, e.g. irapBivov, Heliod. 
 Mth. X. 35, and. In a more derivative 
 sense, with an accus. rei, e.g. oXkov, 
 Aristsen. Ep. ii. 22. There seems no 
 reason for diluting u/xSs (avKaywy&v 
 rbv voSv, Theoph.) or adopting the 
 weaker force of the verb {AToavXSiv 
 TT]v irlanv, Theod., still worse 'vos 
 deoipiat,' Vulg. ): the false teachers 
 sought to lead them away captive, 
 body and mind; the former by ritu- 
 alistic restrictions (ver. 16), the latter 
 by heretical teaching (ver. 18). On 
 the use of the art. after the indef. 
 Tts, see notes on Gal. i. 7. 
 Sid Ttis c|)iXo<r. K.T.X.] by means of 
 philosophy and vain deceit, i.e. a 
 philosophy that is essentially and in- 
 trinsically vain and deceitful, the ab- 
 sence of both prep, and article before 
 Kev1)s &ir6,Tris showing that it belongs 
 to the same category as the fore- 
 M2 
 
164 
 
 nPOS K0AA22AEI2. 
 
 (f)i\o(ro(plai Koi xevtji a-irarrji Kara rr/v irapaSotriv raiv 
 afOpunrwv, kuto. ra a-TOf)(eia tow k6<thov, kui ov Kara 
 
 going (jtCKoaotjila, and forms with it a 
 joint idea; iireiSi) Soicet <refi.vbv eXvai 
 tA TTjs 0i\i)(ro0fas irpoaidi^Ke koI Kevrji 
 dr., Chrys. : see Winer, Gr. § 19. 4. 
 Such <j)CKo(To<pla was but a /ccci; dira- 
 Ti), an empty, puffed-out [comp. 
 Benfey, Wurzellex. Vol. 11. p. 165] 
 system of deceit and error; oomp. 
 Eph. V. 6. The term 0iXo- 
 
 aotpla in this passage has been abun- 
 dantly discussed. There seems no 
 sufficient reason for referring it, on 
 the one hand, to Grecian philo- 
 sophy, whether Epicurean (Clem.- 
 Alex. Strom, i. 11 [50], Vol. i. p. 
 346, ed. Pott.), Stoic and Platonic 
 (TertuU. Praiscr. § 7), or Pythagorean 
 (Grot.), or on the other, to the ' religio 
 Judaica' (Kypke, 06s. Vol. 11. p. 322; 
 so Loesn. and Krebs), — but, as the 
 associated terms and the general 
 contrast seem to suggest, to that 
 hybrid theosophy of Jewish birth 
 and Oriental affinities (ttjs 0i\o(r., — 
 the popular current philosophy of 
 the day), which would be nowhere 
 likely to have taken firmer root than 
 among the speculative and mystery- 
 loving Phrygians of the first century; 
 see Neander, Planting, Vol. i. p. 321 
 sq. (Bohn), and the good note of 
 Wordsw. on this verse. In 
 
 estimating the errors combated in St 
 Paul's Epp. which were allied with 
 Judaism, it becomes very necessary to 
 distinguish between, (a) Pharisaical 
 Judaism, such as that opposed in the 
 Ep. to the Galatians ; (b) Christianity 
 tinged with Jewish usages and specu- 
 lations as condemned in the Pastoral 
 Bpp., — not heresy proper, but an 
 adulterated Christianity (see notes 
 on I Tim. i. 4), which afterwards 
 merged into (c) the speculative and 
 heretical Judaism noticed in this 
 
 Ep., which was perhaps of a more 
 decided Cabbalistic origin, and was 
 associated more intimately with the 
 various forms of Oriental theosophy : 
 see Neander, i.e., Eothe, Anfange, p. 
 320 sq., Burton, Lectures, ni. Vol. i. 
 p. 76 (ed. 2), Eeuss, Thiol. Chret. vi. 
 13, Vol. II. p. 642 sq., and the 
 treatise of Bp Lightfoot on the Co- 
 lossian heresy. Commentary pp. 73 — 
 113. Kara ti^v irapaS. 
 
 Tc3v dv9.] according to the tradition 
 of men; modal predication attached, 
 not to TTJs tpiXoffo^tas k.t.\. (a con- 
 struction in a high degree doubtful 
 in respect of grammar), but to the 
 part. ffvXayuyQv, defining first posi- 
 tively and then negatively the charac- 
 teristics of the iriiXa7M7(a. Philosophy 
 was the ' causa medians,' wapad. tiSc 
 &ii$p. the ' norma ' and ' modus agendi.' 
 The gen. tuc ivOp. is appy. that of 
 the origin (Hartung, Casus, p. 23), 
 the irapaSocris took its rise from, and 
 was received from men; comp. Gal. 
 i. 12, 2 Thess. iii. 6. Meyer presses 
 the art. tuv Avdp. {'tup markirt die 
 Kategorie, die traditio humana als 
 solche der Offenbarung entgegenge- 
 setzt'), but appy. unduly: the article 
 is probably only introduced on the 
 regular principle of correlation; see 
 Middleton, Gr. Art. m. 3. 6, p. 48 
 (ed. Eose). Kard rd otoix. 
 
 K.T.X.] according to the rudiments of 
 the world ; second modal predication 
 parallel to the foregoing. The anti- 
 thesis oil /card Xp. seems clearly to 
 show that this expression here in- 
 cludes all rudimental religious teach- 
 ing of non-Christian character, 
 whether heathen or Jewish, or a 
 commixture of both, — the first ele- 
 ment possibly slightly predominating 
 in thought here, the second in ver. 
 
11. 9- 
 
 165 
 
 Xpia-Tov oTi ev avrw KUTOiKei irav to ifK^pwixa t5? 9 
 
 20. On the various meanings as- 
 signed to this difficult expression, 
 see notes on Gal. iv. 3. 
 Kara Xpio-rdv] according to Christ; 
 clearly not, as Grot., Corn, a Lap., 
 'secundum doctrinam Christi,' but 
 'secundum Christum,' (is rod XpurroS 
 XiopltovTas, Theod. (comp. Chrys.): 
 Christ Himself, the personal Christ, 
 was the substance, end, and norma, 
 of all evangehoal teaching. A good 
 lecture on the 'ten points of faith' is 
 based on this text by Cyr.-Hieros. 
 Gatech. iv. 
 
 9. oTi Iv aiTu] because in Sim; 
 reason for the implied exclusion of 
 all other teaching except that kotA. 
 XpurT6v, iv airifi being prominent and 
 emphatic, and standing in close con- 
 nexion with the preceding Xpiffrdv, 
 'in Him, and in none other than 
 Him.' Mill and Griesb. by placing 
 a period after Xp. would seem rather 
 to imply a reference to pxiwere 
 (comp. Huth.), to which however the 
 emphatic iv aiirQ seems decidedly 
 opposed. KaroiKEi] doth 
 
 dwell, — now and evermore: observe 
 both the tense and the compound 
 form. The former points to the 
 present, abiding, KaTokrjtris of the 
 Godhead in the glorified Son of God 
 (comp. Hofmann, Schriftb. Vol. 11. 1, 
 p. 24) ; the latter to the permanent 
 indwelling, the KaroiKla, not irapoi- 
 Kla, of the -7r\i7puyiia BedrrjTOS, comp. 
 Deyling, Obs. iv. i, Vol. iv. p. 591, 
 and see notes on ch. i. 19 and on 
 Eph. iii. 17. irov to 
 
 irXijp. Tijs OeoT.] all the fulness of the 
 Godhead, all the exhaustless perfec- 
 tions of the essential being of God ; 
 not without emphasis; iv rjfuv /iiv 
 yit,p airapxh '"'■^ a/5^a/S(ic Beln-^Tos 
 KaroiKei, iv Xp. Sk irav rb ttXt}/). rrjs 
 deoT-qTos, Athan.; see notes on oh. i. 
 19, where the meaning of irMipuixa 
 
 in this connexion is briefly investi- 
 gated. Any reference to the Church 
 (Theod., but with some hesitation) 
 is here wholly out of the question. 
 It is only necessary to add that Beo- 
 T7)s must not be confounded with 
 BeioTfis (Eom. i. 20), as Copt., Syr., 
 ^th., and, what is more to be won- 
 dered at, Vulg., which has certainly 
 two distinct words : the former is 
 Deitas, 'die Gottheit,' 'statum [es- 
 sentiam] ejus qui sit Deus ' (comp. 
 August. Civ. Dei, vn. i), and points 
 to the nature of God on the side of 
 its actual essentia {rh etvai. eed</) ; the 
 latter 'divinitas,' 'die Gottliehkeit, ' 
 'eonditionem ejus qui sit ffeios,' and 
 points to the divine nature on the 
 side of its gualitas [rb elvai Belov); 
 see Fritz. iJom. i. 20, Vol. i. p. 62, 
 Trench, Synon. § i. The real dif- 
 ficulty of the verse lies in the next 
 word. (r(D|jiaTiKios] in 
 
 bodily fashion, 'corporaliter,' Syr., 
 Vulg. The meanings assigned to 
 this word are very numerous. If we 
 foUow the plain lexical meaning of 
 the word, and the true qualitative 
 force of the termination -i/cos ('like 
 what?' Donalds. Cratyl. § 254), we 
 must certainly decide that it signi- 
 fies neither dXTjdus, sc. 06 totti/ccSs f) 
 (TKMTCKas, 'vere, non umbratioe' 
 (August., comp. Hammond 2),^^- 
 \as, ' totaliter ' (Capell.) , — oitriudSs sc. 
 oil (TXf iKws, ' essentialiter, non rela- 
 tive' (Qjicum., Usteri, Lehrb. p. 308), 
 — nor even viro<TTaTiKus, 'personali- 
 ter' (comp. Cyr.-Alex. adv. Nest. i. 
 8, p. 28), but — with reference not so 
 much to that which in-dwells as to 
 that which is dwelt in (Hofmann, 
 Schriftb. Vol. 11. i, p. 25) — bodily 
 wise, in bodily fashion, in the once 
 mortal and now glorified body of 
 Christ; comp. Phil. iii. 21. 
 The ir\T)pii)iJi,a BeoT-rjTos, which once 
 
166 
 
 nP02 KOAAS2AEI2. 
 
 10 OeoTtirot a-w/xariKm, koi etrre ev avrSi TreirKriptofAevoi, 
 
 11 oy ea-Ttv n Ke(pa\h ■iraa-ri'! apxni xal e^ova-lar ev w Kat 
 
 lo. os] The reading is somewhat doubtful: iacfem. reads with BDFG; 
 Clarom., al., and encloses Kal—TrevXrip. in a parenthesis, but as the neuter 
 relative would seem to have arisen from a mistaken ref. of Iv air^ to uXij- 
 pa/ia, we seem justified in retaining os with AKOKL; nearly all mss.: Chrys., 
 Theod., al.: so Bee, Tisch., Treg. (with marg.), Rev., Westc. and Hort. 
 
 dwelt oit ko.t6. ffta^TLKhv elSos in the 
 A070S &(rapKos, now dwells for ever- 
 more £rU|UaTtKt3s (Chrys, calls atten- 
 tion to the precision of the language ; 
 
 (rdi/ian) in the A670S haapKos : comp. 
 Mey. in too., and Hofm. Schriftb. 
 I. c. So De W., Badie, Alf., most 
 modern commentators, and ancient- 
 ly iEth. 'in came seu oorpore homi- 
 nis,' and appy. Athan. contr. Arian. 
 III. 8, de S'usc. Hum. Vol. i. p. 60, 
 Damasc. Orthod. Fid, in. 6, except 
 that the reference is perhaps not 
 sufficiently extended to the present 
 glorified body of our Bedeemer: see 
 the copious reff. in Suicer, Thesaw. 
 S.V. Vol. II. p. 1 2 16, and comp. 
 Wordsw. in loe. 
 
 10. KaC co-re k.t.X.] and [because) 
 ye are in Him filled full ; not exactly 
 ' ye are made full in Him ' (Eadie), 
 but, as the position of iare and the 
 order of the words seem to require, 
 'ye are in Him made full,' — there 
 being in fact a double predication, 
 ' ye are united with Christ (and there- 
 fore need not seek help of subordinate 
 power), yea and filled with all His 
 plenitude (and so can want nothing 
 supplementary).' There is no ne- 
 cessity to supply any definite geni- 
 tive, T^t 6e6TriTOs (Theoph.), toO irXrjp. 
 TTJs 6iin. (De W.), tti^ fw^s (Olsh.): 
 all wherewith Christ is fuU, all His 
 gifts, and graces, and oomnjunioable 
 perfections, are included in the ttXtJ- 
 pkiiaii ; compare the somewhat pa- 
 rallel text Bph. iii. 19, and see notes 
 in loo. Grotius and a few others 
 
 regard iare as an imper. parallel to 
 ^X^irere, but are rightly opposed by 
 all modern commentators. 
 6's lo-Tiv K.T.X.] who is, i.e. seeing He 
 is, the head of every Principality 
 and Power, the 5s having a slight 
 explanatory force (see i Tim. ii. 4, 
 notes on ch. i. 25, and comp. Bern- 
 hardy, Synt. VI. 12. a, p. 291 sq.), 
 and tacitly evincing the folly of seek- 
 ing a 7rX77pci)(ris from any subordinate 
 source, or by any ceremonial agency 
 (compare ver. n). On the use of 
 the abstract terms apxv and i^ov- 
 <rla to denote orders of heavenly In- 
 telligences, see notes and refi. on 
 Eph. i. 21, and Suicer, Thesaur. s. v. 
 a77e\os, Vol. I. p. 30 — 48. For ipx. 
 Kal i^ovj. D^W read teXijrias, and 
 N', by a still more curious confusion, 
 &PX. ^KfcXijfflos. 
 
 II. Iv ^] in whom, i.e. 'seeing 
 that in Him, not ' per quem,' 
 Schoettg., ill (fi being exactly parallel 
 to ip a6T<f (ver. 10), and the use of 
 the relative similar to that of 6s in 
 the foregoing clause: all that the 
 believer can receive in spiritual bless- 
 ings is already given to him in Christ 
 (Olsh.). Kal ircpi,ET|iT]6T|- 
 
 T«] ye were also circumcised, viz. 
 at your conversion and baptism, 
 ' quum primum facti estis Christiani,' 
 Schoettg.: not ' in whom too ye, c&c.,' 
 Eadie, which tends to separate xal 
 from the verb on which it throws 
 emphasis. The Colossians seem to 
 have been exposed to the influence 
 of two fundamental errors ; first, the 
 belief that they were under the influ- 
 
II. lO, II. 
 
 167 
 
 irepierixriBriTe TrepiTOfirj a-^eipoiroi^TW, ev r^ aireKSvo'ec 
 Tov o-wfiaTOi Trji crapKOf, ev rrj irepiTOfiij tov XpiarTOv, 
 
 II. <rd>iJ,aTos] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Bev., Westc. and Hort, on greatly 
 preponderating authority: Rec. adds twv dimpnwv. 
 
 ence, or at any rate needed the assist- 
 ance, of intermediate intelligences; 
 secondly, the persuasion that eircum- 
 oision, the symbol of purification 
 appointed by God, must stUl be ne- 
 cessary. Both are in fact met by 
 the single clause xal iare iv avrif 
 Teir\7ip. (see above) ; this however is 
 further expanded in two explanatory 
 relatival clauses, Ss i(rTu> k.t.\. being 
 directed against the first error, iv y 
 KoX K.T.X. against the second ; see 
 Hofmann, Schriftb. Vol. ii. 2, p. 153. 
 aX«ip<«roM]T(j>] not hand-wrought ; 
 they were indeed circumcised — in a 
 spiritual and anti-typical manner, as 
 the two characterizing definitions 
 which foUow still more clearly show. 
 The epithet dxeip. puts the spiritual 
 TcepiToiiri [Baptism, see below], in 
 obvious contrast with the legal, typi- 
 cal, irepiTOiiri xeipOTro/Tjros, performed 
 outwardly iv aapd, Eph. ii. 11. 
 Several reff. to a spiritual circum- 
 cision will be found in Schoettg. 
 Hot. Hebr. Vol. i. p. 815 ; oomp. 
 Deut. X. 16, XXX. 6 (not LXX.), al. 
 The word &x^ipoir. occurs again in 
 Mark xiv. 58 (in expressed contrast 
 to x"P<"''-). and 2 Cor. V. 1. 
 Iv T'g diTEKSvirci k.t.X.] in theputting 
 off of the body of the Jlesh ; not ' by 
 means of, c&c, Mey., the prep, iv 
 not having any quasi-instrumental 
 force, but simply specifying that in 
 which the TreptTo/ocij consisted (De W.), 
 the external act in which it took 
 place; comp. notes on ver. 7, and 
 Winer, Gr. § 48. a. 3. In all such 
 cases the real use of the preposition 
 is local; but the application ethical. 
 TA cruj/itt T^s aapxis has been some- 
 what differently explained. Gram- 
 
 matically considered, the expression 
 is exactly the same as in ch. i. 22 ; 
 aapxbs is the gen. of the material or 
 specifying element (see notes), but 
 its meaning and application are ne- 
 cessarily different. There it was the 
 material o-ctpf of the Redeemer with- 
 out any ethical significance ; here it 
 is the material aap^ qud the seat of 
 sinful motions, <rti5/i. ttjs crapKbs being 
 practically synonymous with the more 
 generic (Tuifi.a r^s &iJ.apTla<s (Bom. vi. 
 6), and designedly used in this place 
 to keep up the antithetical allusion 
 to legal circumcision: the irepiT. 
 xeipoT. consisted in the diriKSva-is and 
 irepiTo/i-^ of a part (Exod. iv. 25), the 
 ■n-epiT. X/DKTToB in the At^kSvcls of the 
 whole (Twyiia T^s (TapKbs ; see Hofmann, 
 Schriftb. Vol. 11. 2, p. 154, and 
 Wordsw. in loc., who pertinently 
 cites the good doctrinal comments 
 of Hilary, de Trim. ix. 7. It is 
 
 somewhat perverse in MiiUer, Doctr. 
 of Sin, Vol. I. p. 359 (Transl.), p. 455 
 (Germ.), to salve his general interpr. 
 of <7i/)| by here giving to <ru/io a 
 figurative meaning ('massa,' Calv., 
 al.), which, even if lexically admissi- 
 ble, is obviously out of harmony with 
 the concrete references (avvTa<t>4vT£i, 
 (TviiriyipSTrie) in the context. No 
 writer has more ably vindicated the 
 prevailing meaning of crdp^ (see notes 
 on Gal. V. 16), but that there are 
 some passages in the N.T. in which 
 (Tctp^ has a reference to sensationalism 
 generally, to weakness, fleshliness, 
 and sinful motions, cannot safely be 
 denied ; oomp. with this expression 
 AireKdvadfiemi rbv iraSaiov av6p. k.t.X., 
 oh. iii. g, and see esp. the excellent 
 article of Tholuck in Stud. u. Krit. 
 
168 
 
 nPOE KOAA22AEI2. 
 
 I a a-vvTa(j)evT€9 avrw ev too ^aTTTicrnaTi, ev ip kui avvri- 
 
 12. paTTlaiiaTL\ The reading is ncrj/ doubtful, for jSaTTTiffAJaTiLacftm., Trep. 
 in marg. read pairnaiu} with BDiPGX^, a rare form, only found elsewhere 
 in the plural (Mark vii. 4, 8 [but see Tisch. m Joe], Heb. vi. •/, ix. 10), in 
 the sense of 'washings,' and therefore deserving of attention here where 
 it would so naturally be altered to the more usual form /SaTrrdr/toTi. 
 Neither word is found in the LXX. 
 
 for 1855, pp. 488 — 492. «v 
 
 T^i irepiT. T01! Xp.] in the circumci- 
 sion of Christ, communicated by, 
 and appertaining unto Christ ; second 
 characterizing definition, parallel to 
 iv tJ dTTCK, K.T.X., specifying more 
 exactly the nature of the irepiro/«j 
 dx"po7ro(i)To!. XpiiTToO is not pre- 
 cisely a gen. auctoris {6 Xpurros irepi- 
 ri/ivei, ill Tif pairTln/ian, Theoph.), 
 but of the origin, or perhaps, still 
 more exactly, the originating cause 
 (see Hartung, 'Casus, p. 17, and 
 notes on ch. i. 23) ; Toirup afnos 6 
 detTTrSTris Xpurds, Theod. : Christ, 
 by union with Himself, brings about 
 the circumcision and imparts it to 
 believers. To give the gen. a strongly 
 possessive ref., e.g. 'the circumci- 
 sion undergone by Christ,' Sehoettg., 
 seems, exegetically considered, very 
 unsatisfactory ; comp. Olsh. in loc. 
 " The reference of oTre/c. k.t.X. and tte- 
 piT. ToO Xp. to the death of Christ 
 (Schneokenburger, Theol. Jahrb. for 
 1848, p. 286 sq.) is convincingly re- 
 futed by Meyer. Even Miiller (ore 
 Sin, Vol. I. p. 359) will take no refuge 
 in such an interpretation. 
 
 12. trwra^vra avTif] having been 
 buried togetlier with Him, when you 
 were, &c., the action described in 
 the participle being contemporaneous 
 with that of Trepier. (Mey.) ; comp. 
 elprivoir. ch. i. 20, and see Bernhardy, 
 Synt. X. 9, p. 383, Stallb. on Plato, 
 Pheedo, p. 62 d. The temporal force 
 seems however here clearly secondary 
 and subordinate, the primary force 
 of the part, being appy. modal, and 
 serving to define the manner in which 
 
 the TepiTo/irj Xp. was communicated 
 to the believer : comp. esp. Bom, vi. 
 4. There seems no reason to doubt, 
 as Eadie does, that both here and in 
 Bom. I.e. there is an allusion to the 
 KaTiSvffis and di/dSv(Ti.s in Baptism ; 
 see Suicer, Thesaur. s. v. aviS. Vol. i. 
 p. 259, Bingham, Antiq. xi. n. 4, and 
 comp. Jackson, Greed, vi. 17. 6. That 
 this burial with Christ is spiritually 
 real and actual [rh ^dirTiafia Koivwvois 
 TToief Tov 0av6,Tov Xp., Theod.-Mops. 
 ore Bom. I.e.), not symbolical or com- 
 memorative, seems certain from the 
 plain unrestricted language of the 
 Apostle ; comp. Waterl. Euchar. vii. 
 Vol. IV. p. 577. If /SairTur/iijj (see 
 orit. note) be the true reading, it 
 will mean ' the act of baptizing,' cor- 
 responding to djT^/cSuiris 'the act of 
 putting off.' ev <p Kal <r«vr)7.] 
 
 wherein ye were also raised with Him: 
 aW oi5 rdtpos fi6vov iarl \t6 ^dirrur- 
 l/.a\. Spa yip tI (prin, Chrys. (comp. 
 Theoph.), — noticed by Mey., Alf. 
 and others as referring ^ to Xpiarbi, 
 but appy. without sufficient reason. 
 The reference of <^ '0 Xp. (Mey., 
 Eadie) is at first sight structurally 
 plausible (Ss...& ^...h <}), but on 
 a closer consideration certainly not 
 exegetically satisfactory ; the two spi- 
 ritual characteristics, the to awra- 
 tjnivai as shown in the /cariiSuffis, the 
 TO avveyepffijvM as shown in the md- 
 Svais, must surely stand in close refer- 
 ence and connexion with Baptism. 
 The counter - arguments of Mey. 
 founded on the use of the prep, {iv 
 ^ not i^ oS), and the parallelism of 
 the prepositional clauses {(rviiTa<p. 
 
II. 12, 13. 
 
 169 
 
 yepvtjTe Sia rij^ TrieTTem^ T^y evepyela^ rov Qeov tov 
 eyeipavTOi avTov sk twj' veKpwv Koi v/uay veKpovg ovras 13 
 
 12. Ti3v veKpav] The reading is doubtful, lup is omitted by AXCKL; 
 many mss. (Tisch., Wes'te. and Hort), but is rightly retained by Bee, Lachm., 
 Treg., Rev., being well supported (BDFG; 17, al.) and also the less usual 
 reading: indeed ix run v. is only found in ch. i. 18, Eph. v. 14, i Thess. i. 10 
 (not Rec), the article being everywhere else omitted. 
 
 avTif iv K.T.X., <rvpriy4pd. 5ia k.t.\.) 
 are not convincing. In the first 
 place no other prep, would be so 
 appropriate as the semi-local iv : 
 and in the second place, Sii, k.t.\., 
 the statement of the causa medians, 
 can scarcely be conceived as forming 
 any logical parallelism with the fore- 
 going semi-local iv t$ /SaTrr. Lastly 
 the Kal seems to keep both (rvvr. and 
 (Tvvriy. in close correlative reference 
 to each other. By comparing 
 
 Eom. vi 4, it would seem that the 
 primary ref. of avv-qy. is clearly to a 
 present and spmJitaZ resurrection, but 
 again by comparing Eph. ii. 6 (in 
 which the converse seems true ; see 
 notes), it would also appear that a 
 secondary ref. to b, future and physi- 
 cal resurrection ought not to be ex- 
 cluded : as Jackson well says, ' of 
 our resurrection unto glory we re- 
 ceive the pledge or earnest when we 
 receive the grace of regeneration 
 which enables us to walk in newness 
 of life ; and this is called the first 
 resurrection,' Greed, xi. 17. 7 ; comp. 
 Waterl. Euchar. vii. Vol. iv. p. 577, 
 Eeuss, Theol. Ghret. iv. 21, Vol. 11. 
 p. 235. Sui TTJs ir£<rTeci>s] 
 
 through your faith; subjective me- 
 dium by which the objective grace is 
 received : ' faith is not the mean by 
 which the grace is wrought, efieoted, 
 or conferred ; but it may be and is 
 the mean by which it is accepted or 
 received,' Waterl. on Justif. Vol. vi. 
 p. 23: comp. Usteri, Lehrb. 11. i. 3, 
 p. 216. The image of Alf., 'the 
 
 hand which held on, not the plank 
 that saved,' is in more than one re- 
 spect dogmatically unsatisfactory. 
 ■nqs lv«p7eCos tov 0.] in the effectual 
 working of God : not gen. of the 
 agent or causa efficiens (De Wette, 
 al.), but more simply and intelligibly 
 the gen. ohjecti; Syr. ' qui credidistis 
 in,' sim. ^th. ' in fide in auxilio ' 
 (Piatt; Pol. inverts), 4in(rTei<raTe on 
 Sivarai 6 Qehs iyeTpai, Kal ovrois rryip- 
 8-irre, Chrys., — as in all cases where 
 viiTTii is thus associated with a gen. 
 rei, the gen. appears to denote the 
 object of faith ; comp. Acts iil. 16, 
 Phil. i. 27, 2 Thess. ii. 13. The 
 statement of Mey., that this is true 
 in every case except where the gen. 
 refers to the believer, does not seem 
 perfectly certain ; see notes ore Gal. 
 ii. 16, iii. 22, and Stier on Eph. Vol. 
 '■ P- 477- '''"^ kyelpavTOi] 
 
 Clause appended to give a sure and 
 certain pledge (iv^vpov ^ovrei tov 5e- 
 (TTToTov Xpi(rTov Trjv di'(i(Tra(rtJ',Theod.) 
 of the almighty Mpyeia of God, 
 both in the present vivifieation to 
 new life and the future vivifieation to 
 glory (comp. Eph. i. 20 and notes in 
 loc.) ; — ' that nothing may be done or 
 suffered by our Saviour in these great 
 transactions but may be acted in our 
 souls and represented in our spirits,' 
 Pearson, Greed,'Vo\. i. p. 265 (ed. Burt.) . 
 13. Kal vjios] and you also, 'et 
 vos etiam,' Copt.; application of the 
 foregoing to the Colossians, espe- 
 cially with reference to their for- 
 merly heathen state, Kal being asso- 
 
170 
 
 nP02 K0AAS2AEIS. 
 
 Toh TrapaTTTdfiacriv kui rp aKpo^varla r^y a-apKOS 
 vfiSiv, arvveCwoiroltja-ev vfxai ervv avrip, ■^apicraft.evo^ fifuv 
 
 13. rots TapavTilinaaivl So Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 limited, but preponderating authority, the probability of the insertion of the 
 prep, being obviously great: Bee, Laehm., and former edd. of this Com- 
 mentary, in fois irapaTT. (rwel;oio'irolri<ra> i/ias] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., 
 Bev., Westc. and Hort, on very clearly preponderating authority: Bee. 
 (o-wefuTT.) omits if^as. The omission was obviously suggested by the apparent 
 syntactic difficulty. This however is very slight, as a rhetorical pleonasm of 
 the pronoun for the sake of emphasis is not uncommon ; see Bernhardy, Synt. 
 VI. 4, p. 275. 
 
 ciated with u/tfis and ascensive, not 
 with ffu^/ef. in a merely copulative 
 sense ; see notes ore Eph. ii. 1 . 
 vcKpois ovTos] being dead, or when 
 you were dead, ' cum mortui essetis,' 
 Vulg. (not, 'who were dead,' Alf.), 
 the past sense attributed to Bnras 
 being justified by the aorists which 
 are associated with it in the sen- 
 tence (Winer, Gr. § 41. i); see also 
 notes on Eph. ii. i {Tranal.). It 
 seems extremely unsatisfactory in 
 Mey., both here and Eph. ii. 1, to 
 give vexpois a proleptio reference to 
 physical death, soil. ' certo morituri,' 
 iiirb Tr]V Sliaiv iKeuyBe airoBaveiv, Chrys. : 
 a remote inferential reference to phy- 
 sical death may possibly be included 
 (see Alf. on Eph. I. c), but any pri- 
 mary ref. seems wholly irreconcile- 
 able with the context. rots 
 
 irapoirr.] hy your transgressions ; the 
 dative being, as in Eph. ii. 1, $ (see 
 notes in loc), instrumental : the 
 TTapawTiifMra bring about the state 
 of death. If iy be retained then the 
 TrapaiTTWfiaTa would be the element 
 in which the dead state prevailed 
 and was experienced. There does 
 not seem to be any reason for re- 
 ceding from the general distinction 
 between iraparr. and afiapr. (esp. 
 when they are associated) advanced 
 in notes ore Eph. I. c: see Trench, 
 Synon. Part 11. § 16. T^j 
 
 ciKpop. K.T.X.] the uncircumcision of 
 
 your flesh, i.e. that appertained to, 
 was the distinctive feature of — the 
 gen. not being either of apposition 
 (Storr), or quasi-material (B.-Crus., 
 comp. Alf.), but simply possessive. 
 The associated words and the fore- 
 going use of crhp^ (ver. 11) may per- 
 haps justify us in assigning some 
 ethical reference to <r^pi here, — not 
 merely your material (Badie), but 
 your sinful, unpurified, flesh, of which 
 the aKpo^wTTia was the visible and 
 external mark ; they were heathens, 
 unconverted sinful heathens, as their 
 very bodies could attest: this a/cpo- 
 /Suffria however had now lost its 
 significance ; they were TrepLTer/j.Tjfi4voi 
 in Christ. ' KKpo^iKTrla is thus not 
 necessarily spiritual (comp. Deut. x. 
 16, Jer. iv. 4), but retains its usual 
 and proper sense ; on the derivation 
 (not dxpov, piiii, but a corruption of 
 aicpoTToaffla) see Fritz. Bom. ii. 25, 
 
 Vol. I. p. 136. (TDVtJCDO- 
 
 iro£T]<r«v] He together quickened, spi- 
 ritually, — with ref. to the life of 
 grace ; a secondary and inferential 
 reference to the physical resurrection 
 need not however be positively ex- 
 cluded : see above, and notes ore 
 Eph. ii. 5, where the force of the 
 aor. (what is wrought in Christ is 
 wrought ipso facto in all united with 
 Him) is briefly noticed ; see esp. Wa- 
 terland, Euchar. ix. Vol. iv. p. 643. 
 The great difficulty in this clause is 
 
11. 14. 171 
 
 ■Kavra ra irapaTTTWixaTa, e^aXet\|/-oj ro Kaff ^fjtmv 14 
 
 the subject. On the one hand, a 
 comparison with Eom. viii. 11, and 
 still more Eph. ii. 5, seems to point 
 to the last subst. Qe6s, ver. 12; so 
 Theod., Theoph., appy.' Copt. [' se- 
 oum,' WUkins, is a mistransl.], 
 Beng., and nearly all modern com- 
 mentators. On the other hand the 
 logical difficulty of supplying a nom. 
 from the subordinate gen. QeoO, — the 
 obvious prominence given to Christ 
 throughout the preceding portion — 
 the peculiar acts described in the 
 participles (esp. ^faX. k.t.X. com- 
 pared with Eph. ii. 15, and even 
 xapiir. compared with ch. iii. 13), — 
 the relation of Christ to dpxtd and 
 i^ov<Tlai (ver. 15, oomp. ver. 10, and 
 ch. i. 16), — and lastly, the extreme 
 difficulty of referring the acts de- 
 scribed in ver. 14, 15, to God the 
 Father, are arguments so prepon- 
 derant, that we can scarcely hesitate 
 to refer awe^. and its associated par- 
 ticiples to Christ, who, as being of 
 the same essence and power with the 
 Father and the Holy Ghost, did 
 infaUibly quicken Himself (Pearson, 
 Greed, Art. v. Vol. i. p. 302, ed. 
 Burt.): so Chrys. (here e sil., but else- 
 where expressly), appy. Syr. and Goth, 
 (certainly in ver. 15, see below), 
 perhaps ^th. (Piatt), and of modem 
 writers, Heinr., Baur,! Paulus, p. 
 452 note, and expressly, Donalds. 
 Chr. Orthod. p. 76. It is somewhat 
 singular that the Greek commen- 
 tators, Theod., Theoph., and (Eoum., 
 silently adopt Oeis as the subject of 
 ver. 13, and 6 Qebs \6yos (Theod.), 
 as that of ver. 14, 15 ; comp. also 
 Wordsw. in loe., who conceives the 
 propositions' in this and in the fol- 
 lowing verses ' to refer to God in 
 Christ, and to Christ as God.' Such 
 an interpr. is dogmatically defensible 
 
 on the ground of the ' communicatio 
 idiomatum' (comp. Ebrard, Chr. 
 Dogm. § 385), and certainly deserves 
 consideration, but viewed logically 
 and grammatically seems somewhat 
 artificial and unsatisfactory. We 
 may observe lastly, that if the refer- 
 ence to Christ here advocated is, as it 
 certainly seems to be, correct, it is 
 worthy of serious notice that actions 
 elsewhere ascribed by the Apostle to 
 God (Eph. ii. 5, comp. Rom. viii. 11) 
 are here unrestrictedly predicated of 
 Christ. Meyer's objection, that the 
 above interpr. is opp. to the 'Lehr- 
 typus ' that God raised Christ, is not 
 very strong ; God, it is here said, did 
 raise Christ, Christ us, — yet, as God, 
 also Himself. <rvv avru] 
 
 with Himself. As this seems a case 
 in which a reference to the subject 
 is somewhat immediate, the stronger 
 form of translation may, not im- 
 properly, be adopted : comp. notes 
 on airoS on Eph. i. 4. X'^P''" 
 
 (rd|ji(VOS K.T.X.] having forgiven us 
 all ov/r transgressions ; modal parti- 
 ciple describing the preliminary act 
 which was the condition of the reali- 
 zation of the (Tw^o'irolria-is, by remov- 
 ing the true cause of the cckp^tt/s: 
 irdpra irapairr. tom ; a tt]v veKpdrriTa 
 ^irolei, Chrys.; oomp. eh. iii. 13, Eph. 
 iv. 32, and 2 Cor. v. 19, and observe 
 that in these last two passages Oeis 
 is the subject, yet with the notice- 
 able addition ^i* XpicrTiJ. 
 
 14. ^oKil^as] hamng blotted out ; 
 modal participle contemporary with, 
 surely not prior to (Mey.) xo/jiirii- 
 l^evos, and detailing it more fuUy 
 and circumstantially. Christ forgave 
 us our sins when he took them upon 
 Himself and suffered for us; the 
 mode of forgiveness was by cancel- 
 ling the x«pi57P«0<"'. Surely if this 
 
172 
 
 nP02 KOAA22AEI2. 
 
 yeipoypaipov tojj Soyfiaviv 6 ^v vtrevavTiov if.iv, 
 
 part, be applied to God, arguments 
 might be founded on it not only in 
 support of Patripassian doctrines, but 
 in opposition to the vicarious satis- 
 faction of Christ. If God the Father 
 did all this, what was the precise 
 effect of the expiatory death of 
 Christ? To answer, with Eadie, 
 ' What Christ did, God did by Him,' 
 only evades, but does not meet the 
 difSculty. The word i^aX. (Acts iii. 
 19, Bev. iii. 5, vii. 17, xxi. 4; oomp. 
 Psalm H. II, cix. 13), as its deriva- 
 tion suggests [& = ava, and Sanscr. 
 lip, ' illinere,' Pott, Etym. Forsch. 
 Vol. I. p. 258, Vol. II. p. 153], pro- 
 perly denotes ' oera obducta delere ' 
 (comp. Kreba, Obs. p. 337), and 
 thence, ' to expunge,' ' wipe out,' 
 generally, in opposition to ypd^ieiv, 
 Euripid. ap. Stob. Floril. xciii. 10, 
 p. 507 (ed. Gesn.), or iyypdcpeiv, 
 Plato, Bep. VI. p. 501 b, comp. Xen. 
 Hell. II. 3. 51. TO Ko9' r\[>,av 
 
 \ap- K.T.X.] the handwriting in force 
 against us by its decrees ; the dative 
 d6yiJ,aatv belonging closely to rb KaB' 
 rj/j.. x^V- ^^^ falling under the ge- 
 neral head of the dat. ' of reference 
 to ' (see notes on Gal. i. 22) ; the 
 SbyimTa were that in which the rb 
 KaB' ■fi/i&i' (the hostUe aspect or di- 
 rection, Karii, opposed to iwip, see 
 Winer, Gr. § 47. k) of the x^'P^P- 
 was specially evinced : see Winer, 
 Gr. § 31. 10. I. The usual explana- 
 tion, ' consisting of SbyiMra,' ' ritu- 
 um chirographum,' Beza, Auth. — in 
 which the dat. would be equiv. to a 
 kind of gen. materice, or involve a 
 tacit ellipsis of h> (comp. Eph. ii. 15) 
 — seems distinctly ungrammatioal, 
 and that of Mey., and Eadie, — ac- 
 cording to which the dat. is governed 
 by the verbal element in x^'-P^yP-i — 
 more than doubtful, as x"p. is a syn- 
 
 thetic compound (Donalds. Gr.§372), 
 and appy. incapable of such a decom- 
 position; comp. Tobit v. 3, ix. 5, 
 Polyb. Hist. xxx. 8. 4. The refer- 
 ence of x^'P^vpa^op has been vari- 
 ously explained. The context would 
 seem to suggest that x^i-P°yp- is 
 clearly not the command given to 
 Adam (Theoph. 2), nor the law of 
 conscience (Luth.), nor even spe- 
 cially the moral law (oomp. Neand. 
 Planting, Vol. i. p. 462), nor yet 
 ■the ceremonial law (Schoettg., Calv., 
 Wordsw. ; see esp. Deyling, Obs. Part 
 IV. p. 596 sq.), but the whole law, 
 ' nam beneficium chirographi ad om- 
 nes spectat, tarn Gentiles quam Ju- 
 dasos : ergo hujusmodi chirogr. ponere 
 oportet, quo ex aliqua parte tenentur 
 omues,' Daven.; oomp. Andrewes, 
 Semi. IV. Vol. 1. p. 54 sq. (A.-C. 
 Libr.), and Vol. iii. p. 66, where he 
 curiously terms it the ' ragman roll : ' 
 so De W., Mey., and most modern 
 commentators. The x"po7p. was KaB' 
 ■llf.av, Jews and Gentiles ; immedi- 
 ately against the former, mediately 
 and infereutiaUy (as being founded 
 on immutable principles of justice 
 and rectitude) against the latter. 
 Bom. ii. 15, comp. Bom. iii. 19. It 
 was in the positive commands, 
 whether written on stone or in the 
 heart, that the rb KaB' t]ij,uv was 
 ■mainly evinced : comp. on the pro- 
 hibitive side, Bom. vii. 7 sq. 
 The law was thus appropriately de- 
 signated, being a 'bond,' an 'obliga- 
 tory document ' (oomp. Plut. Mor. p. 
 829 a, and see exx. in Wetst.), by 
 which all were bound, and which 
 brought penalty in case of non-fulfil- 
 ment ; comp. Pearson, Greed, Art. iv. 
 Vol. I. p. 248 (ed. Burt.), Usteri, 
 Lehrb. 11. i. -z, p. 175, Eeuss, Theol. 
 Ghrit. IV. 17, Vol. 11. p. 190. Itis 
 
11. 15. 
 
 173 
 
 Kat avTO ijpKev e/c rov fierrov, ir poertjXma-as avTO 
 Tw (Travpw, air eKOucrainevoi ras apj^ay Koi rag 15 
 
 certainly somewliat singular that all 
 the Greek expositors should have re- 
 ferred ToTs Soy/uuTiv to the precepts of 
 the Gospel by which the blotting out 
 was effected: so too in Eph. ii. 15, 
 where see notes. The prevailing use 
 of the word in reference to doctrines 
 relating to the faith probably led to 
 this ancient, but untenable, inter- 
 pretation. S i)V iirtvav- 
 tCov 11(1.] which was hostile to us ; 
 expansion of the preceding to kolB' 
 Tj/uiv : it was hostile not merely in 
 its direction and aspects, but practi- 
 cally and definitely. The idea of 
 secret hostility (iTro) is not implied 
 either here, Heb. x. 27 (it is a Sis 
 Xeyofi. in the N.T.), or indeed in the 
 majority of passages where the word 
 occurs : see exx. in Eost u. Palm, 
 Lex. s.v. Vol. II. p. 2064. Perhaps 
 the prep, may have primarily in- 
 volved an idea of locality, local oppo- 
 sition (compare Hesiod, Scut. 347, 
 tinroi...vTr€vavTloL aXKiiKoLffiV d^e'taxp^- 
 /ua-av, and i Mace. xvi. 7), which in 
 the metaphorical applications of the 
 word necessarily became obliterated. 
 This is further confirmed by the 
 fundamental meaning of utto, which, 
 it may observed, is not ' under, ' but 
 appears to be that of ' motion to the 
 speaker from that which is near to 
 him;' see Donalds. Cratyl. § 279. 
 Kal auTo K.T.\.] and He hath taken 
 it out of the way ; change from the 
 participial structure to that of the 
 finite verb, to add force and emphasis 
 (see notes on oh. i. 6, 20), and espe- 
 cially to the perfect tense [Orig., 
 Theod., al., read ^pev, but only on 
 the a,uthority of D^FG ; many mss.] 
 to express the enduring and perma- 
 nent nature of the act : see Winer, 
 Gr. § 40. 4, and notes on Eph. ii. 8. 
 
 The addition ix rod tiiaov expresses 
 still more fully the completeness of the 
 ripKev {iirolri(Te /iriSi tpalve(T$ai,T!heo^h., 
 fiil i.(j)eUM X'^po-^i CEcum.), and per- 
 haps also the obstructive character 
 (Mey.) of the thing taken away; exx. of 
 aipav iK ixiaov will be found in Eypke, 
 Ofts. Vol. 11. p. 323. irpoo-T)- 
 
 \u(ras K.T.X.] having nailed it to the 
 cross; modal participle, contempo- 
 raneous with the commencement of 
 the TJpKoi ( Alf .) , describing the manner 
 in which Christ removed the x^tpo- 
 ypa^ov : He nailed the Mosaic law 
 with all its decrees to His cross, and 
 it died with Him; aii-ros KoKturOeh 
 ^\vae KOl TTiv afiapriav Kal ttjv KoKa- 
 <nv, Chrys. The reference to the 
 cancelling of a bond by striking a 
 nail through it (Beng., Pearson, 
 Creed, Art. iv. Vol. 11. p. 248 ; comp. 
 5i^^/5i;|e!',Chrys.,KaT^o-Xi<rei', Theoph.) 
 is very doubtful. All that the Apo- 
 stle seems here to imply is, that in 
 Christ's crucifixion the curse of the 
 law was borne, and its obligatory 
 and condemnatory power, its power 
 as a xeipo'ypo^oc Ka6' ^juSk, for ever 
 extinguished and abrogated; comp. 
 Eom. vii. 6 {Rec), and see Andrewes, 
 Serm. Vol. i. pp. 55 sq. (A.-C. Libr.), 
 15. oireKSvcr. k.t.X.] having strip- 
 ped away from Himself the (hostile) 
 Principalities and Powers; neither 
 ' exspolians,' Vulg., and all Eng. 
 Vv., silently followed by appy. all 
 modern writers except Deyling (Obs. 
 Vol. 11. p. 6og), Donalds. (Ghr. Orth. 
 p. 68), Hofmann (Schriftb. Vol. i. p. 
 305), Alf., and Wordsw., nor even, 
 'having stripped for Himself,' 'de- 
 ponere jubens,' Winer, de Verb. 
 Comp. IV. 15, — both interpretations 
 being wholly unsupported by the 
 lexical usage of AiroSiw, iKdiu, and 
 
174 
 
 nPOS K0AAS2AEI2. 
 
 i^oviriai eSeiyfiaTityev ev Trappija-ia, Opia/i^eva-at avrovt 
 
 ev avTU). 
 
 dircKS. (see Bost n. Palm, Lex. s. 
 w.), and opposed to St Paul's own 
 use of the word, ch. iii. 9, — but 
 'exuena se principatibus,' Clarom., 
 Copt, [mistransl. by Wilkins], ^th. 
 (Piatt), Chrys. 2, more distinctly 
 Theoph. 2, and with a special re- 
 ference, Syr., 'per abjectionem cor- 
 poris aui,' Goth., 'andhamonds sik 
 leika,' so perhaps Theod., followed 
 by Hil. and August., who however 
 may have derived it from the read- 
 ing of FG; Boem.; Pac; iireKS. 
 T^v aApKa tAs i^ova., where r'tiv a&pKa 
 is evidently only substituted by mis- 
 take for Tcls opx^s Ko(. The rare 
 binary compound oTre/cS. was appy. 
 chosen rather than the simpler ^kS. 
 to express not only the act of 'di- 
 vestiture' but that of 'removal;' see 
 Winer, I. c. It is singular that an 
 interpr. of such antiquity, so well 
 attested, and so lexically certain, 
 should in modern times have been 
 completely, if not contemptuously 
 ignored. The meaning of the ex- 
 pression is however somewhat ob- 
 scure: it appears most probably to 
 imply that, as hinted at by Theod. 
 and appy. aU the Greek commenta- 
 tors, our Lord by His death stripped 
 away from Himself all the opposing 
 hostile Powers of Evil (observe the 
 article) that sought to win for them- 
 selves a victory over Him in the 
 nature which He had condescended 
 to assume, aireKbiaaTo TJjc XajS^c [t6 
 AvSpiiiiros elvai], dvd\riTTOS eipiBr) rois 
 dpX"'' f*^ '"'*'' i^ovclais, Theoph. -i, 
 comp. Theod. When He died on 
 the cross, when He dissolved that 
 temple into which they, both in 
 earlier (Matth. iv. i sq., Luke iv. 2 
 sq., obs. fixpi Kaipov, ver. 13), and 
 later, and perhaps redoubled efforts 
 
 of temptation (see John xiv. 30 and 
 esp. Luke xxii. 53), had vainly en- 
 deavoured to make sacrilegious en- 
 try. He reft them away for ever, and 
 vindicated His regal power (Pearson, 
 Greed, Vol. i. p. 260, ed. Burt.); yea, 
 the loud voice (Matth. xxvii. 50, Mark 
 XV. 37, Luke xxiii, 46) was the shout 
 of eternal triumph and victory. See 
 Words w. inloc, who has adopted the 
 same view, and well explained the 
 peculiar significance of the term. 
 Thus all seems clear, consistent, and 
 theologically profound and signifi- 
 cant; while our Saviour bore the 
 curse of the law, He destroyed its 
 condemnatory power for ever {irepU- 
 Treipei/ ixei, Chrys.), while He under- 
 went sufferings and death and the 
 last efforts of bafSed demoniacal 
 malignity. He destroyed rbv rb Kpi- 
 Tos ^ovra toO BandTOV, tout' ^jtiv rbv 
 SidjSoXoK, Heb. ii, 14; comp. i John 
 iii. 8. Tos d,p\is Kal rds 
 
 e|.] the Principalities and the Powers 
 (that strove against Him): these ab- 
 stract terms being used, as always 
 in the N.T., with ref. to spiritual 
 beings (ai5T0«s) and Intelligences (see 
 notes on Eph. i. 21, vi. 12), the con- 
 text showing whether the reference 
 is to good (ch. i. 16, see notes), or, 
 as here, to evil angels and spirits; 
 see Usteri, Lehrb. n. i. 2, p. 176, 
 Eeuss, TMol. GhrSt. n. 20, Vol. 11. 
 p. 226 sq. The opinion of Hofmann 
 (Schriftb. Vol. i. p. 305), Alf., al., 
 that good angels only are here referred 
 to, and that aircKd. refers to God 
 putting aside from Him the nimbus 
 of the Powers which shrouded Him 
 from the heathen world (Hofm.), is 
 ingenious, but not satisfactory, and 
 further rests on the assumption that 
 the subject of this verse is Qi6s not 
 
II. 1 6. 
 
 175 
 
 Let no one judge you 
 in ceremonial observ- 
 ances, holding not the Head. Submit not to out- 
 ward austerities that are inwardlyrain and carnal. 
 
 M^_ ovv Tis 11/j.ai Kpiverm ev j3poo(rei i6 
 
 irapp.] He made a show of them with 
 boldness; not ' diffamavit, ' Syr., and 
 aim. Goth.; ii(rx'll'^''ri(re, Chrys., 
 compare ^th. (Piatt) and Theod., 
 —but simply, 'fecit eos manifestos, ' 
 Copt., 'ostentui esse fecit,' Hil. : it 
 was an open manifestation, and that 
 too iv irappriiTlif, 'with boldness,' — 
 not 'openly,' as Syr., opp. to iv 
 KpinrTif (John vii. 4), sc. STjfuxrli}, 
 TrdvTuv opiivTwv, Chrys., but, as the 
 formula seems always used by St 
 Paul, 'confidenter,' Vulg.; see notes 
 on Phil. i. 20. The word Sety/ia- 
 rtt^eiv (Matth. i. 19, Lachm., Tisch.), 
 apparently confined to the N.T., 
 . does not much differ in meaning 
 from the compound irapadaypM.- 
 rl^av, except that it restricts the 
 idea to an open exhibition (as the 
 context shows) in triumph, without 
 any further idea of shame or igno- 
 miny (Polyb. Hist. xvii. i. 5, xxix. 
 7. 5). To connect iv irafip. with 
 Bpia/i^. (Hofm. Schriftb. Vol. i. p. 
 305) seems very unsatisfactory, but 
 has appy. arisen from the assump- 
 tion that 'openly' is the correct 
 translation. 6pia|i.p. 
 
 auToiJs] by triumphing over them; 
 contemporaneous with iSeiy/i. (see 
 notes on ver. 12), explaining more 
 fully the circumstances of the action. 
 The expression $pMiJ,peiei,v nvk oc- 
 curs again in 2 Cor. ii. 14, and appy. 
 there (see Mey. in he.), as necessarily 
 here, not in a causal sense, as Auth., 
 but with an accus. of the object 
 triumphed over or led in triumph; 
 comp. Pint. Comfp. Thes. c. Bom. § 4, 
 jSao-iXeis iSpid/i^evffe Kal ijyeiiovas, and 
 exx. cited by Wetst. on 1 Cor. I. t. 
 On the derivation of the word [dpi-, 
 cogn. with 6vp-, connected with rpeis. 
 
 and ?ayu;3os or fi/«jSos, 'procession,' or 
 'close dance'], see Donalds. Cratyl. 
 § 317' 3'8, and comp. Benfey, Wur- 
 zellex. Vol. 11. p. 260. The varied 
 nature of our blessed Eedeemer's 
 meek triumphs is well set forth by 
 Hilary, de Trin. x. 48, and by 
 Barrow, Serm. xxvi. Vol. iv. p. 595 
 (referred to by Wordsw.). ev 
 
 awT^] in it; not (a) 'in the nailed 
 up xeipo'7pa0oc,' Mey., which would 
 give a force to airi^ with which its 
 position and the context seem to be 
 at variance; nor (6) 'in aemetipso,' 
 Vulg., Syr., Andrewes, Serm. Vol. iii. 
 p. 66, which would form an ahnoat 
 unnecessary addition; but (c) 'in it,' 
 scil. iv Tifi <TTavp(fi {iv rtf Ji5\<jj, Orig.) 
 with the Greek commentators and 
 majority of modern expositors: t6 
 yb.p ToC KoiT/iov bp&VToi &VU iv tQ ^6\ij) 
 rbv 6^LV ff(payia<rdijvai, tovto ian rd 
 Bav/maTov, Chrys.; see Pearson, 
 Creed, Vol. 1. p. 291, and esp. notes. 
 Vol. 11. p. 217, 218 (ed. Burt.). 
 
 16 — 23. Warnings against cere- 
 monial observances and austeri- 
 ties. 16. Mi^ o5v] Let not then, 
 &c. ; with reference to ver. 14, 15, oiv 
 having its usual collective force (see 
 notes on ver. 6), and recalling the 
 readers to the fact that the Mosaic 
 Law is now abrogated. lipios 
 Kpiv. ev Ppuo-ei] judge you in eating, 
 pass a judgment upon what may or 
 may not be eaten; iv referring to 
 the item in which the judgment was 
 passed, see Eom. ii. i, xiv. 22. BpiS- 
 (r« is not here ' cibus,' Vulg. (comp. 
 Fritz. Bom. xiv. 17, Vol. iii. p. 200), 
 but, as appy. always in St Paul's 
 Epp. (Eom. xiv. 17, i Cor. viii. 4, 2 
 Cor. ix. 10), 'eaus,' 'actus edendi,' 
 Copt., Tittm. Synon. i. p. 159, the 
 passive verbal being regularly used 
 
176 
 
 nP02 K0AA2SAEI2. 
 
 t] ev "TToa-ei, ij ev ft-epei eoprtji i] vov/xrivlai ri a-a/3fiaTwi', 
 17 a ecTTiv (TKia TWi/ fxeWovToiv, to oe awfia rod X.pt(TTOV. 
 
 16. ^ iv v6g-ei\ So Bee, Lachm., Tisch., Treg. (with marg.), Eev., on very 
 clearly preponderating authority : Westc. and Hort (with marg.), koI Ic 7r6i76t. 
 17. ToC Xpio-ToC] In former edd. of this Commentary the article was 
 omitted, as in earlier edd. of Tisch., but on insufficient authority. 
 
 by the Apostle in ref. to the thing 
 eaten; eomp. i Cor. iii. 1, vi. 13, 
 viii. 8, 13, X. 3, I Tim. iv. 3. The 
 distinction is however not observed 
 by St John (comp. iv. 32, vi. 27) nor 
 indeed always by classical writers, 
 comp. Hom. Od. i. 191 ; Plato, Legg. 
 VI. p. 783 c, cited by Mey., does not 
 seem equally certain. The rule of 
 Thom. M. , ppiifjtara' vXyiBwriKm, oi 
 /3/)ffl|tia, oiSi Ppaffis, cannot be sub- 
 stantiated; see notes collected by 
 Bern, in loc, p. 174. rj 
 
 Iv iroirei] or in drinking, the prep, 
 being repeated to give a slight force 
 to the enumeration. The remarks 
 made in respect to jSpwo-is apply 
 exactly to ttoo-is, contrast i Cor. x. 4 
 with Eom. xiv. 17, and comp. John 
 vi. 65. As there is no command in 
 the Mosaic law relative to ttoo-is ex- 
 cept in the case of Nazarites (Numb. 
 vi. 3) and priests before going into 
 the tabernacle (Lev. x. 9), and as iv 
 iroaei seems certainly to form a dis- 
 tinct member (opp. to Alf.), we are 
 driven to the conclusion that the 
 Colossian heretics adopted ascetic 
 practices in respect of wine and 
 strong drinks, perhaps of a Bab- 
 binical origin. The Essenes, we 
 know, only drank water : irorbv SStop 
 vafxaTiaiov airroTs iffrtv, Philo, de Vit. 
 Gont. § 4, Vol. II. p. 477 (ed. Mang.). 
 Iv nlpei lopTrjs] in the matter of 
 a festival; not 'in the partial observ- 
 ance of festivals' (oi) yhp di) vivra 
 KareixofraTpoTepa, Chrys.), 'ob par- 
 tem aliquam festi violatam,' Dav., 
 nor 'in segregatione ' {i.e. setting 
 apart one day rather than another), 
 
 Calv., comp. Syr. 'in divisionibus s. 
 distinctionibus,' nor specifically 'in 
 the [Talmudioal] tract upon, ' Hamm. 
 after Casaub. and Seal., — but simply 
 and plainly 'in the matter of,' /i.ipos 
 pointing to the 'class' or 'category' 
 (Mey.); see Plato, Eep. i. p. 348 e, 
 4v aperij! Kal cro<plas tWtjs lUpu tt]V 
 admlav, Tliecet. p. 155 B, al., exx. in 
 Loesn. Ois. p. 367, and comp. 2 Cor. 
 iii. 10. The three objects in the 
 matter of which judgment is for- 
 bidden are enumerated in reference to 
 the frequency of their occurrence; 
 eopr^ referring to one of the greater 
 feasts, vovnTjvla to the monthly festi- 
 val of the new moons (Numb. x. 10; 
 see Jahn, Archceol. § 351, Winer, 
 RWB. s.v. 'Neumonde,' Vol. n. p. 
 149), and fl-d/S/Sara to the weekly 
 festival; comp. Gal. iv. 10. 
 
 17. d loTiv] which things are; 
 relative clause showing the justice of 
 the preceding command, the relative 
 having a slight explanatory force; 
 see notes on ch. i. 25, 27. That a 
 refers not merely to the last three 
 items but to the whole verse, i.e. to 
 all legal or traditionary ceremonies, 
 seems clear from the context. The 
 reading i, with BFG; Clarom., 
 Goth., al. (Lachm. with marg.), is 
 not improbable, but is insufficiently 
 attested. o-kici] a shadow; 
 
 not 'an outline,' in ref. to a sKmypa- 
 <pla, 'beneficia Christi ac doctrinam 
 evangelicani obscure delineabant,' 
 Daven., — a meaning doubtful even 
 in Heb. x. i, but, as the antithesis 
 aSiiia obviously requires, 'umbrse,' 
 Syr., shadows opposed to substance 
 
II. 17, i8. 177 
 
 firjOeh v/ias Karajipa^eveTa) diXcov iv TaireivoippocTvvri i8 
 
 (Joseph. Bell. Jud. ii. 2. 5, aKikv 
 aiTTicrofievos ^anXelas, ^s TJpiraaev 
 eauTif) TO (Tuiia), and with perhaps 
 some further reference to the typical 
 character of such institutions, sha- 
 dows flung forward (' prfenunciativse 
 observationes,' Aug.) from the ra 
 /x^XXoxra (soil. tA ttJs koix^s diaSr/Kris, 
 Theoph.), from the future blessings 
 and realities of the Christian cove- 
 nant ; irpokaii^Avu di i] ffKii, to au/ia 
 di>l(TXOVTos rou (paros, Theod. The 
 use of the present iariv must not be 
 unduly pressed; 'loquitur de illis ut 
 oonsiderantur in sua naturd, abs- 
 tractse a circumstahtiis temporis,' 
 Dayenant. to S^ (ru|jia tov 
 
 Xp.] but the body (their substance) is 
 Christ's; the (rijjfia, scil. twv fieWov- 
 Tuv, belongs to Christ in respect of 
 its origin, existence, and realization; 
 'in Christo habemus ilia vera et 
 solida bona qusE erant adumbrata et 
 figurata in prsedictis cserimoniis,' 
 Daven. The nominative might at 
 first sight have been expected; the 
 possessive geu. tov XpurroO however 
 is of more real force, as marking 
 that the true ffca^a tujv fieWovrcov not 
 merely was Christ, but belonged to, 
 was derived from Him, and so could 
 only be realized by union with Him. 
 A reference of this clause to ver. 18 
 (oomp. August. Epist. 59. [149.] 27) 
 destroys the obvious antithesis, and 
 is wholly untenable. The reading is 
 doubtful. The assertion 
 
 of Alf. (comp. Olsh.)— 'that if the 
 ordinance of the sabbath had been, 
 in any form, of lasting observation 
 in the Christian Church,' St Paul 
 could not have used such language, 
 — cannot be substantiated. The <rdp- 
 ^arov of the Jews, as involving other 
 than mere national reminiscences 
 (with Deut. v. 15 contrast Bxod. xx. 
 
 11), was a (TKib, of the Lord's day: 
 that a weekly seventh part of our 
 time should be specially devoted to 
 God rests on considerations as old 
 as the Creation; that that seventh 
 portion of the week should be the 
 first day rests on Apostolical, and 
 perhaps inferentially (as the Lord's 
 appearances on that day seem to 
 show) Divine usage and appoint- 
 ment; see Bramhall, Lord's Day, 
 Vol. V. p. 32 sq. (A.-C. Libr.), and 
 the editor's Huh. Essay for 1843, 
 p. 69. 
 
 18. v)ias KaraPpap.] rob you of 
 your reward : so distinctly Zonar. 
 ore Gone. Laod. Can. 35 (Suicer, The- 
 saur. s. v.), KaTa^pa^eieiv io'rl to ix-q 
 TOV DiK'^aavra d^ioOv toS ^pa^elov, aX\' 
 ET^pt^ ScSopat avTO, dbLKOxifUvov rod 
 viK-^a-avTos, the Kard, marking the 
 hostile feeling towards the proper 
 recipient, which dictated the conse- 
 quent injustice and to irapa^pa^eieiv ; 
 see Demosth. Mid. p. 545, iTurrd- 
 fieda "Z^parCova viro Metdfou Kara^pa- 
 ^evBivra xal irapd vdvTa to, dixaia 
 dn/JuaSivTa, and Buttm. in loc. (Index, 
 p. 176), who pertinently remarks, 
 'verbmn in translato sensu aUter 
 usurpari non potuisse quam de eo 
 qui debitam alteri viotoriam eripit.' 
 The many renderings, either insufli- 
 cient (KaraKpivhiii, Hesych.), incor- 
 rect ((caTaTraXoi^TU, Castal. ap. Pol. 
 Syn. ) , or perverted (e.g. KaraKvpieviroi, 
 Corn, a Lap.), that have been as- 
 signed to this word, will be found 
 in Pol. Synops., and in Meyer in 
 loc. The Ppa^eiov of which 
 
 the false teachers sought to defraud 
 the Colossians was not their Chris- 
 tian freedom (Grot.), — at first sight a 
 plausible interpr. — but, as the context 
 and the grave nature of the error it 
 reveals seem certainly to suggest, 
 
 N 
 
178 
 
 nPOS KOAA2SAEIS. 
 
 ' vita seterna,' Gom., to ppa^eiov ttjs 
 dvia K\iJ(7eus (Phil. iii. 14), and with 
 a more exact allusion, the a^dapToi/ 
 aTi<pavov (i Cor. ix. 25), the tov t^s 
 dt.K(itoir6v7]S iXT^^avov (2 Tim. iv. 8), 
 ■rijs S^arjs (James i. 12), r^s 5o|7;s 
 (1 Pet. V. 4), which the Lord, dkaios 
 (fpiT^s {2 Tim. I. c), will give to the 
 Christian victor at the last day. 
 This prize the false teachers sought 
 to obtain, but it was under circum- 
 stances of such fatal error, viz. the 
 worship of angels, the introduction 
 in fact of fresh mediators, that they 
 would eventually beguile and defraud 
 of the Ppa^eTov those who were misled 
 enough to join them: 'admonet.., 
 nihil aUud moliri nisi ut pahnam 
 ipsis intercipiant, quia abducuut eos 
 a rectitudiue cursus sui,' Calv., — 
 who however does not appear to have 
 fully felt the correct application of 
 Kara^pa^eOeiv. 9^\«v] de- 
 
 siring (to do it), soil, KaraPpapeieai : 
 diKuv TovTo TroteLv, CEcum. ; modal 
 participle defining the feelings they 
 evinced, and hinting at the studied 
 nature of the course of action which 
 they followed, and which resulted in 
 the KaT-a/Spd^Seuffis ; rovro toIvvv avve- 
 ^o6\€vov iKeivoL yiyVGffdai, raTeivo- 
 (ppoaivxi STJdev Kexpij/i^TOi, Theod., who 
 however somewhat overpresses BiXav, 
 oomp. notes on 1 Tim. v. 14. These 
 feelings were not directly, but indi- 
 rectly hostile to the victims of their 
 KaraPpa^eieiv ; the purpose was to 
 secure the ot^^opos for themselves 
 and their followers, the result that 
 they lo.st it themselves, and de- 
 frauded others of it. Two other in- 
 terpretations have been proposed; 
 (a) the Hebraistic construction, 64- 
 \eiv if Tairetv., = 2 f^^ (' Sam.xviii. 
 22, 2 Sam. XV. 26, I Kings x. 9, 
 2 Chron. ix. 8, esp. Psal. oxii. i, iv 
 Tals ivToKdUs avTov ^eXiJcet fftpiiSpa, 
 cxlvii. 10, ovK iv TJi Swaardq. tov 
 'iwirov ScXiJcrei), adopted by Aug., 
 
 al., Beng., and recently by Olsh., 
 but contrary to all analogy of usage 
 in the N.T.; and, perhaps more 
 plausibly, (6) the connexion Kara^. 
 0i\wv, appy. favoured by Syr., and, 
 with varying shades of meaning as- 
 signed to the part., by Beza, Zauch., 
 Tittm. (Synon. i. p. 131), al., and 
 most recently Alf. The former must 
 be set aside on the appy. fuUy suffi- 
 cient grounds, — that though found 
 in the LXX. there is no trace of such 
 a usage of diXeiv in the N.T. The 
 latter is structurally and grammati- 
 cally defensible, oomp. 2 Pet. iii. 5, 
 but, even in the transl. of Alf., ' of 
 purpose defraud you,' exegetically 
 unsatisfactory, as it would seem to 
 impute to the false teachers a fright- 
 ful and indeed suicidal malice, which 
 is neither justified by the context, 
 nor in any way credible. They 
 sought to gratify their vanity by 
 gaining adherents, not their malice 
 by compassing, even at their own 
 hazard, their ruin. The Kara^pi- 
 /Sewris was perhaps recklessly risked, 
 but not maliciously designed before- 
 hand. The transl. of Wordsw. is 
 much more plausible, 'by the exer- 
 cise of his mere will,' but is perhaps 
 scarcely so simple as that of the 
 Greek commentators proposed above. 
 ^v Tair€ivo(j>p.] in lowliness; element 
 in which he desires to do it, the 
 prep, iv not being so much instru- 
 mental (Mey.) as modal, ireSs iv 
 ravav.; TJ ttms (fivtrioi/j^vos ; Sdnvvat 
 Kevodo^las bv to vav, Chrys. It seems 
 clear that TaT£ivo(pp. is not here true 
 Christian humility (see notes on 
 Phil. ii. 3), but a false and perverted 
 lowliness, which deemed that God 
 was so inaccessible that He could 
 only be approached through the me- 
 diation of inferior beings ; Xiyovris 
 (lis &6paTos 6 Tav SXuiv Qeos, ivi^iKTos 
 re Kai aKaTdXtjiTTOS, Kai irpoff'^Kei did. 
 Tiiv ayyiXuv rffv delav ei/Miveiav irpay- 
 
II. 1 8. 
 
 179 
 
 Kai Oprja-Kela. twv ayyeXuiv, d eopaxev efi/Sarevwv, etKtj 
 
 i8. d ^paxev] So Tisch., Treg., Bev. (with marg.), Westc. and Hort, on 
 authority that must be regarded as clearly preponderating : Rec. {eiip.), 
 [Lachm. {iiip.)], and former edd. of this Commentary, o /ir) UpaKep. It is clear 
 that the latter was an early reading (see the quotations from Aug. and 
 Jerome in Treg.), and it seems almost equally clear that the meaning with 
 the negative is much more suitable to the actual circumstances of the case, 
 still the external authority is so strong that we seem bound (though not by 
 any means with confidence) to adopt it. The conjectural reading S, iopaKcv 
 Kevefi^areibiv (Bp Lightf. and others) is ingenious, but cannot be seriously 
 entertained. 
 
 Iiareieadai, Theod.; see also Zonaras 
 on Can. 35, Cone. Laod. (a.d. 363? 
 see Giesel. Kirchengesch. Vol.-i. p. 
 396), where this heresy was expressly 
 condemned; see ap. Bruns, Concil. 
 Vol. I. p. 37. epi](rKeCa 
 
 TMv d7-y^«v] worship of the angels ; 
 not gen. subjecti (James i. 26), ' qu£e 
 angelos deceat,' Wolf, with ref. to 
 the ultra-human character of devo- 
 tion which the false teachers affected 
 (see Noesselt, Disput., Halse, 1789), 
 but gen. objeeti (Wisdom xiv. 27, el- 
 diiXav 6pri<rKela, and exx. in Erebs, 
 Obs. p. 339), worship paid to angels; 
 see Winer, Gr. § 30. i, and Suioer, 
 Thesaur. Vol. i. p. 44. It may be 
 observed that dpri<rKela refers more 
 especially to outward religion, and 
 thus stands in opposition to euffe^ela ; 
 see Trench, Synon. § 48. Theodoret 
 notices the prevalence of these prac- 
 tices in Phrygia and Pisidia, and the 
 existence of euKTiJpio to Michael in his 
 own time : even in modern times the 
 worship of the Archangel in that dis- 
 trict has not become extinct : see 
 Conyb. notes in loc, and on angel- 
 worship generally, the good note of 
 Wordsw. on ver. 8. Whether this 
 had originally any connexion with 
 Essen e practices, cannot satisfac- 
 torily be determined, as the words of 
 Joseph. Bell. Jud. 11. 8. 7 are ambi- 
 guous ; see Whiston in loc. That it 
 
 was practised by Gnostic sects _is 
 attested by TertuU. Prcescr. § 33, 
 Iven.Hcer. i. 31.2 (ed. Mass.),Epiph. 
 Hair. XX. 2: see further reff. in 
 Wolf, in loc. The evasive interpr. 
 of $pri(TK., ' talem angelorum cultum 
 qui Christum excludat, ' Corn, a Lap., 
 ' impium angelorum cultum,' Just., 
 is wholly opposed to the simple 
 and inclusive meaning of the word ; 
 eomp. Bp Browne, Articles, Art. 
 XXII. p. 539. & iopaKtv 
 
 l|j.paTEi!(i)v] tahing his stand on 
 the things which he hath seen: scil. 
 ' dwelling upon things seen, and, so 
 only, believed in' (contrast 2 Cor. v. 
 7, 5ict iriffTetas irepLiraToOfiev ov 5ia 
 cfSous), — a sentiment, however, which 
 must be regarded as belonging to 
 the clause which follows and having 
 but little relation to what precedes : 
 a kopamv could certainly not include 
 angels ; comp. Chrys. If the reading 
 be correct, the reference can only be 
 to the sort of materialistic and sen- 
 suous view of things which was taken 
 by these heretics, their reliance upon 
 tA (TTOixela tov Koaiwv ; oomp. ver. 20 
 sq. If we adopt the /tij its use may 
 be justified, rather than that of ou, 
 by the fact that the dependence of 
 the sentence on /j/rjdeis v/^ds Kara^p. 
 leaves the objects naturally indeter- 
 minate and under subjective aspects ; 
 see Winer, Gr. § 55, 3 ; comp. Exod. 
 
 N 2 
 
180 
 
 nP02 KOAASSAEIS. 
 
 19 (hvcnovimevoi vtto tov voos T>ji aapKos avTOv, kui ov 
 KpaTwv rhv K6(^a\nv, e^ ov irav to erwima Sia rwv acf}S)v 
 
 ix. 21, 5s...fi'rj Tpoaiffx^ T"d ^tavolq. els 
 rb jtijiio. Kvplov, where tlie use of the 
 firi somewhat similarly results from 
 the indeterminate nature of the sub- 
 ject of the verb. 'E/i^aTeieiv, with 
 an aocus. objeoti, has properly a local 
 sense, e.g. irSXiv, Eurip. Electr. 595, 
 va6v, ib. Bhes. 225 (see further exx. 
 in Krebs, Obs. p. 341), and thence 
 by a very intelligible application an 
 ethical reference, the accus. denoting 
 the imaginary realm to which the 
 action extended; oomp. (but notice 
 the dat.) eiipareiovTes airrais, scil. 
 iwuTT-fiiiMs, Philo, Plant. Noe, § 19, 
 Vol. I. p. 341 (ed. Mangey). 
 eiKTi (|>viriov|j,.] vainly puffed up; 
 modal clause, more fully defining 
 ifi^dTeiuv. The false teachers were 
 inflated , with a sense of their su- 
 perior knowledge, but it was eix^ 
 (Eom, xiii. 4, i Cor. xv. 2, Gal. iii. 
 4, iv. 11), without ground or reason. 
 On the derivation [from rfxeo', per- 
 haps Sanscr.jjJcan, 'recedere'Jcomp., 
 but with caution, Benfey, Wurzellex. 
 Vol. I. p. 349. De Wette, following 
 Steig., joins ekf with the preceding 
 clause ; this is a possible, but not 
 probable connexion, as it would 
 throw an emphasis on the adverb 
 (comp. Gal. iii. 4) which really seems 
 solely confined to o kbpaKev. 
 4iro TOV voos K.T,\.] by the mind of 
 his flesh, i.e. the higher spiritual 
 principle in its materialized and cor- 
 rupted form, the gen. probably being 
 simply possessive (comp. notes ore 
 Epli. iv. 23), and the contradictory 
 form of the combination being chosen 
 to depict the abnormal condition: 
 the fiesh was, as it were, endued with 
 a vovs (instead of vice versa), and 
 this was the ruling principle ; see 
 Olsh. Opusc. p. 157, Delitzsch, Psy- 
 
 chol. IV. 5, p. 144, and for the normal 
 meaning of vovs in the N.T., notes 
 on I Tim. vi. 5. The (rhp^ appy. 
 stands in latent antithesis to the 
 iryeO/ia (oomp. Chrys., virb (rapniK^s 
 Siavolas ov Tvev/jumKris), and seems 
 here clearly to retain its ethical 
 sense, ' his world-mind ' (Mtiller, 
 Doctr. of Sin, Vol. i. p. 356, Clark), 
 his devotion to things phenomenal 
 and material ; oomp. Tholuok, Stud, 
 u. Krit. 1855, p. 492, Beck, Seelenl. 
 II. 18, p. 53. 
 
 19. Kal ov KpaTuv k.t.X.] and not 
 holding fast the Head; oi not pefi, 
 the negation here becoming direct 
 and objective, and designed to be 
 specially distinct ; oomp. Acts xvii. 
 27, I Cor. ix. 26, and see Winer, Gr. 
 § 55- 5> and esp. Gayler, Part. Neg. 
 p. 287 sq., where there is a good 
 coUeotion of examples. Kparetv is 
 here used with an accus. in the same 
 sense as in Acts iii. 1 1 , comp. Cant, 
 iii. 4, iKpdTTjcra airhv koI oiK 6.(priKa 
 airbv, and Polyb. Hist. viii. 20. 8, 
 and denotes that individual adher- 
 ence to Christ the Head which alone 
 can constitute life and salvation ; rl 
 Tolvvv rijv KetpoK'^v &<ft€ls ^XV "^^^ 
 IxeK&v ; Chrys. : comp. the possible 
 physiological reference alluded to in 
 notes on Eph. iv. 16. «S 
 
 ov] from whom; not neut., either 
 in ref. to rb Kpareiv, Beng. i, or under 
 an abstract and generalized aspect 
 (Jelf, Gr. % 820. I, Kriiger, Sprachl. 
 § 61. 7. 9) to Ke<l>a\i\v, Mey., Eadie, 
 but, as the exactly parallel passage 
 Eph. iv. 16 so distinctly suggests, — 
 masc. in ref. to XptoroC, Beng. 2, 
 the subject obviously referred to in 
 KecjxMjv. The assertion of Mey. that 
 the ref. is not to Christ in His per- 
 sonal relations cannot be substaq- 
 
II. 19, 20. 
 
 181 
 
 Ku] (TVi/SecrfjLU)v eiri-^optiyovixevov Koi crviJ.^i^a'Cpf/.evov 
 av^ei T^v av^tiariv tov Qeov. El aireOdvere arvv ao 
 
 20. ef] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on very greatly 
 preponderating authority: Rec. adds ouv. The article rf is inserted by 
 
 Rec. before Xpuxr^, but even on less authority than the foregoing oiv. 
 
 tiated. The following verse seems to 
 imply distinctly the contrary. Nor 
 again does it seem necessary, with 
 the same commentator, to refer i^ 
 ov both to the participles and the 
 finite verb, as in Eph. iv. i6, as it 
 seems to be naturally connected with 
 oif|ei, — the prep, i^ marking the 
 source and ' fons augmentationis ; ' 
 see.uotes on Gal. ii. i6. 
 irav TO <r(i>|j,a] the whole body : surely 
 not necessarily the body ' in its every 
 part,' Alf.: between r6 irax aw/jia (a 
 position of the art. very rarely found 
 in the N.T.; see notes on Gal. v. 14) 
 and TOV ri a-iZ/ia no distinction can 
 safely be drawn. If iras had occu- 
 pied the position of a secondary 
 predicate (oomp. Matth. x. 30, Eom. 
 xii. 4) there would have been some 
 grounds for the distinction ; see notes 
 on I C07: XV. 7. Sid, Twv 
 
 a<f>uv Kal oTJvS.] by means of its joints 
 and bands ; media of the ktnxop^yi'n-^ 
 and (rv/u/3i/3a(r(s. The a(pa.l and aiv- 
 decr/ioi, as the common article seems 
 to hint, are of the same genus ; 
 the former referring, not to the 
 'nerves,' Mey. (in opp. to Syr., 
 ^th.-Platt, Copt., and all the best 
 Vv.j, but to the joints, the ' commis- 
 suriE ' of the frame (oomp. Andrewes, 
 Serm. Vol. iii. p. 96, and see Bp 
 Lightfoot in loc.) ; the latter to the 
 varied ligatures of nerves and mus- 
 cles and sinews by which the body 
 is bound together. The distinctions 
 adopted by Beng., Mey., al., — accord- 
 ing to which the &tpal are specially 
 associated with iinxop. , and referred 
 to Faith, the o-foS. with o-uyu/S., and 
 
 referred to Love, — are plausible, but 
 perhaps scarcely to be relied upon. 
 The passage, like Eph. I.e., seems not 
 so much to involve special metaphors, 
 as to state forcibly and cumulatively 
 a, general truth; irS.(ra ri iKKKijala 
 las hi Sxv '''V" Ke<paKTiv aii^et, Chrys. 
 Iirixop. Kal (ru)j.p.] being supplied 
 and knit together; passive and pres. ; 
 the action was due to communicated 
 influences, and the action was stiU 
 going on. To give iircxop. a middle 
 sense (Eadie), 'furnished with reci- 
 procal aid,' seems highly unsatisfac- 
 tory : the pass, of the simple form is 
 by no means uncommon ; see Polyb. 
 Hist. III. 75. 3, VI. 15. 4, 3 Mace. vi. 
 40. The force of ivl is not intensive 
 but directive, pointing to the acces- 
 sion of the supply, 'cni[oorpori quae 
 sunt ad incrementum necessaria suflS- 
 oiuntur,' Noesselt (see notes on Gal. 
 iii. 5); but it does not seem impro- 
 bable that both in x^PVy- and inxop- 
 some trace of the primary meaning, 
 some ref. to the free and ample nature 
 of the supply, is still preserved, comp. 
 2 Pet. i. 5, with ver. 8, and Winer ore 
 Gal. iii. 5, p. 76. On the meaning of 
 (TUjU/S. see notes on Eph. iv. 16. 
 Ti]v av^. ToB 0£ou] with the increase 
 of God, i. e. the increase which God 
 supplies, ToO GeoO being the gen. 
 auetoris or originis, Hartung, Casus, 
 17, 23; comp. I Cor. iii. 6, 7, al. 
 To regard toO GeoO as equivalent to 
 an adjective is wholly untenable ; 
 see Winer, Gr. § 36. 3. The accus. 
 aS^rjnv is that of the cognate subst. 
 (not merely ' of reference,' Alf.), and 
 serves to give force to, and develop 
 
182 
 
 nP02 KOAAS2AEI2. 
 
 XpifTTW CLTTO TWV O'TOlVetWV TOU KOO-fiOV, Tt W ^WVTBi 
 
 a I ev Koa-fiw SojfiaTil^ecrOe ; M^ ay^tj fitiSe yeua-rj /j,rjSe 
 
 the meaning of the verb ; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 32. i, Lobeok, Paralip. p. 501 
 sq., where this etymological figure 
 is elaborately discussed. 
 
 20. El airc6. k.t.X.] If ye died 
 with Christ; warning against false 
 asceticism; see notes on i Tim. iv. 
 3, and comp. generally Eothe, Theol. 
 Ethik, § 878 sq., Tol. ni. p. 120 sq. 
 The Apostle grounds his gentle ex- 
 postulation on the acknowledged fact 
 that they were sharers (by baptism, 
 ver. 12) in the death of Christ ; in 
 oh. iii. I he bases his exhortation on 
 their participation in His resurrec- 
 
 tion. 
 
 airo T<i>v (TTOix. 
 
 ToB K6<r|jiou] from the rudiments of 
 the world, ' from ritualistic observ- 
 ances, and all non-Christian rudi- 
 ments which in any way resembled 
 them ; ' see notes on ver. 8. The 
 Law and all its ordinances having 
 been wiped out by the death of Christ 
 (ver. 14), they who were united with 
 Him in His death shared with Him 
 all the blessings of the same im- 
 munity. There is no braohylogy 
 (Huth.); Christ Himself airiBavev A-iri 
 vd/iov, when He fulfilled all its claims 
 and bore its curse. The ' coustructio 
 prfflgnans' aire8. dro only occurs 
 here in the N.T.; it is probably 
 chosen in preference to the dat, 
 (Bom. vi. 2, 10, Gal. ii. 19), as ex 
 pressing a more complete severance, 
 — not only death to it, but separa 
 tion and removal from it ; comp, 
 Winer, Gr. § 47. us lavTi% 
 
 iv Koo-|j,a>] as if ye were living in the 
 world, i.e. as if your relations to 
 Christ and to the world were exactly 
 reversed; 'ye died with Christ; why 
 do ye live as in a non-Christian 
 realm, from all the rudiments of 
 which ye are really dead ? ' 
 
 8o7|j.oTCJeor9e] do ye submit to ordi- 
 nances ; so Beng.; {nrdKeurOe toU ctol- 
 X^io^h Chrys. , tuv raOra SiSaaKbvruv 
 miix^aBe, Theod.: middle, — certainly 
 not active, 'deeernitis,' Vulg., ' ur- 
 redij;,' Goth, (a meaning here not 
 only inappropriate but lexically in- 
 correct), and appy . not passive, ' riti- 
 bus oueramini,' Beza (comp. Syr., 
 'judieamini;'Copt. and ^th. para- 
 phrase) ; as this, though lexically 
 quite admissible (observe 1 Mace. x. 
 8, iSoyfidricrav . . .iravrl rip twv 'lovd. 
 lOvei), seems somewhat less in har- 
 mony with the tone of this paragraph 
 than the ' dooeri voa sinitis ' (Grot.) 
 of the middle ; Spa Sk Kai ttiSs r/pifia 
 avToiis diaKUfiudei, Soyixarl^effde elirthv, 
 Theoph.: so Winer, Gr. § 39. 4, p. 
 295 (ed. 5), though appy. not in ed. 6. 
 In either case the meaning is prac- 
 tically the same ; in the tone of ex- 
 postulation only is there a slight 
 shade of difference. 
 
 21. Mil o>|(T| K.T.X.] Handle not, 
 nor taste, nor touch ; examples of the 
 Soyp-annnbi to which they allowed 
 themselves to submit : ' recitative 
 hffio proferuntur ab Apostolo,'Daven. 
 With regard to the grammatical as- 
 sociation, the coarser d'^j; at the 
 beginning, the interposed yeiffxi, and 
 the more delicate Blyrii at the end 
 might seem to justify the distinction 
 of Meyer that the first uribh is more 
 adjunctive (see notes on Gal. i. 12 
 and Eph. iv. 27), the second more 
 ascensive, if such a distinction in so 
 regular a sequence as ^57. . .jm;5^. .-./iijS^ 
 be not somewhat precarious ; consider 
 Eom. xiv. 21, and esp. Luke xiv. 12, 
 where there is a similar slight dis- 
 turbance of the oUmax. The essential 
 character of such quasi-adjunctive 
 enumerations is that the items are 
 
II. 2 1, 22. 183 
 
 Qty'l'S ya eariv TrdvTa et'y (p6opav TJj a'7ro)(_p^(T€i\ Kara i% 
 
 not ' apte conneia, sed potius for- 
 tuito oonoiixsu aceedentia,' Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. ii. p. 707. With regard 
 to the objects alluded to, the inter- 
 posed yei/o-r; and the terms of ver. 23 
 seem certainly to 'suggest a reference 
 of all three verbs to ceremonial dis- 
 tinctions in jSpiGirts and wbais (ver. 16) ; 
 see esp. Xen. Gyr. 1. 3. 5 (cited by 
 Raph.), where all three verbs are 
 used in reference to food, and for 
 exx. of avreffdai, see Kypke, Ohs. 
 p. 324, Loesn. 06s. p. 372. More 
 minute distinctions, e.g. mj/ri, women 
 (Olsh.), corpses (Zanch.) ; Blyris, oil 
 (Boehm., eomp. Joseph. Bell. 11. 8. 
 3), sacred vessels (Zanch.), al., seem 
 very doubtful and uncertain. On the 
 distinction between the stronger av- 
 readai and the weaker Bif/aveiv [BIT, 
 TAP, tango. Pott, Etym. Forseh. Vol. 
 I. p. 235], comp. Trench, Synon. 
 
 §17. 
 
 22. o to-Tiv K.T.X.] which things, 
 almost, seeing they are things which, 
 are all to be destroyed in their 
 consumption ; parenthetical observa- 
 tion of the Apostle on the essential 
 character of the meats and drinks 
 which the false teachers invested 
 with such ceremonial characteristics; 
 ' ratio duoitur ab ipsS, natura et con- 
 ditione harum rerum,' Daven. : they 
 were ordained to be consumed and 
 enter into fresh physical combina- 
 tions ; comp. Matth. xv. 17. To 
 refer this either to the preceding 
 commands, ' quod totum genus prse- 
 ceptorum,' Aug., Sanderson (Serm. 
 VII. ad Pop.), al., or to the preceding 
 clause as the continued statement of 
 the false teachers, Neand. (Planting, 
 Vol. I. p. 328), De W., al., seems to 
 infringe on the meaning of dTroxpwi'S 
 (see Mey.) and certainly gives a less 
 forcible turn to the parenthesis. The 
 
 objection urged by De W., and appy. 
 felt in some measure by Chrys. and 
 Theoph., — that St Paul would thus 
 be furnishing an argument against 
 restrictions generally,even those sanc- 
 tioned by divine authority, may be di- 
 luted by observing (a) that a very simi- 
 lar form of argument occurs in i Tim. 
 iv. 3 sq., and (6) that these restrictions 
 and observances are not condemned 
 per se, but in relation to the new dis- 
 pensation, in which all ceremonial 
 distinctions were done away, and. 
 things remanded (so to say) to their 
 primary conditions. ds <|>flo- 
 
 pov] for destruction, decomposition, 
 the prep, marking the destination, 
 and ip$op& having apparently a sim- 
 ply physical sense ; comp. Syr. ' usus 
 corruptibUis,' and very distinctly 
 Theod., els Koirpov yhp awavTa fiera- 
 ^dXXerat, and (EcUm., (pBopf yip 
 tpTjffLV viroKeLrat. iv tc^ i^eSpuvL. 
 T^ diroxpijo-si] in their consumption, 
 in their being used completely up; 
 ov (TKOTretre ws fj.ovtf/.oi' roirojv ovS^v, 
 Theod. The compound diroxp- has 
 here a somewhat similar meaning to 
 dtaxp. (comp. Eostu. Palm, Lex. s.v.), 
 the prep, airi denoting ' non solum 
 separari aliquid ab aliquo, sed ita 
 removeri ut esse prorsus desinat,' 
 Winer, de Verb. Comp. iv. p. 5 ; 
 comp. Plutarch, Gcesar, § 58, KaiPTJi 
 [ivh'LKTOv] ^pura So^tjs 6.iroKe%p7iijAvi^ 
 rg vapoia-ri, and see Suicer, Thesaur. 
 Vol. I. p. 489, where several pertinent 
 exx. of the verb are collected from 
 the ecol. writers. 
 
 Kara to. cvTaX|ji.. k.t.X.] according to 
 the commandments and teachings of 
 men; further definition and specifi- 
 cation of the preceding doy/j.a.Tl!^e<r0e ; 
 they had died with Christ, they were 
 united with a divine Deliverer, and 
 yet were ready to submit to the ordi- 
 
184 
 
 riPOS K0AA22AEI2. 
 
 23 TO. evTdXfMaTa Kal SiSaarKoXiai twv avOpooirtov ; ariva 
 evTiv \6yov ixev e-^ovra (TO(piai ev edeXoOptjcrKeia Kai 
 
 nances and doctrines of congcienee- 
 enslaving men. The Si,Sa<rK., as the 
 exceptional omission of the article 
 (Winer, Qr. § 19. 3) shows, belongs 
 to the same general category as the 
 ipTAX/i., and are added probably by 
 way of amplification ; they were sub- 
 mitting to a SoyfMTia/ws not only in 
 its preceptive, but even in its doc- 
 trinal aspects ; comp. Mey. in loc. 
 Alford presses tuv &v6p, as describing 
 the authors 'generically as human 
 not divine : ' this is doubtful ; as 
 ivrAXn. has the article, the principle 
 of correlation requires that avSp. 
 should have it also ; see Middleton, 
 Gr. Art. iii. 3. 6. 
 
 23. anva] Allwhich things, 'a, set 
 of things which ;' in ref. to the pre- 
 ceding ivTiiXtJt,. Kal did., and specifying 
 the class to which they belonged. 
 On this force of Scrns, see notes on 
 Gal. iv. 24. The difference between 
 8j and Sittis is here very clearly 
 marked ; a (ver. 22) points to its 
 antecedents under purely objective, 
 anva, under qualitative and generic 
 aspects; see Kruger, Sprachl. § 51. 8. 
 so-Tiv Xoy. K.T.X.] do have the repute 
 of wisdom, ' are enjoying the repute 
 of wisdom,' the verb subst. being 
 joined, — not with oi!k iv ri/ag (Conyb., 
 Badie), but, as every rule of perspi- 
 cuity suggests, with fx<»''''«) and serv- 
 ing to mark the regular normal, pre- 
 vailing, character of the X07. ^x'"* j 
 see Winer, Gr. § 45. 5. The exact 
 meaning of Xo70i' 'ix^iv is somewhat 
 doubtful, as X670S in this combina- 
 tion admits of at least three differ- 
 ent meanings; (a) 'speciem,' irx^Ma, 
 Theod., Auth., Bang., De W. ; comp. 
 Demosth. Leptin. p. 462, Xd7oi' nvi, 
 ^Xov opp. to ^e05os av dv <j>avel7i, see 
 Eisner, Ohs. Vol. n. p. 265; (|8) 
 
 'rationem,' scil. 'grounds for being 
 considered so,' Vulg., Clarom., and 
 probably Syr. ; comp. Polyb. Hist. 
 XVII. 14. 5, doKovp Tapoufyyorarov elvai 
 TToXiiv ^et Xo70^ TOV^^avSoTaTOv viriip- 
 Xeic, and other exx. in Schweigh. 
 Lex. Polyb. s.v.; (7) ' famam,' scil. 
 'reputation,' Mey., Alf., and perhaps 
 Chrys., X070;/ (jirfHv, oi Sivafuv' &pa 
 oiiK aK^deiav, comp. Herod, v. 66, 
 isTep di) \6yov ?x" '''V" Ilv0lriv 
 dvaTreiirai (cited by Eaph. ) . Of these, 
 though in fact all ultimately coin- 
 cide, (7) is perhaps to be preferred; 
 'rh X07. Ix- sunt res ejusmodi quae 
 quidem vulgo sapientise nomen ha- 
 bent, sed a vera sapientia absunt 
 longissime,' Eaphel, Annot. Vol. 11. 
 P- S36' 1*^" ^^^ heie no correspond- 
 ing 3^, but serves to prepare the 
 reader for u, comparison (Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 656) which is in- 
 volved in the phrase Xo7o>' ^x^w 
 {\6yov oi Sivaiuv, Chrys.), and is 
 substantiated by the context; see 
 Winer, Gr. § 63. 2. a, where other 
 omissions of 5^ are enumerated and 
 carefully classified. ev 
 
 l6EXo6pT|(rK«C9i] in self-imposed wor- 
 ship, — h pointing, not to the instru- 
 ment hy which (Mey.), but as usual, 
 to the ethical domain in which the 
 Xo7os (ro(^£as was acquired, or the 
 substratum on which the to (x^iv 
 K.T.X. takes place ; see Winer, Gr. 
 § 48. a. 3. a. The word iee\o$p. 
 is appy. an air. \cy6/i.; but from a 
 comparison with similar compounds, 
 iSeXodovXela, i6e\oKaKri<ns, k.t.\. (see 
 Rost u. Palm, Lex. Vol. i. p. 778), 
 and with the verb iSeKodpriaKuv as ex- 
 plained by Suid. (ISkp fleXiJ/nari ai^av 
 TO So/cow), may be clearly assumed to 
 mean ' an arbitrary self-imposed ser- 
 vice,' — which, as the similar asso- 
 
11. 
 
 185 
 
 Tair6tvo(ppoervvy koi a(beiola ordfjiaTOi, ovk ev Tt/iij tiv\ 
 irpoi irX^a-fjLouriv t^j (rapKOt. 
 
 elation of BpriirK. with raveiv. in ver. 
 i8 seems to suggest, was evinced in 
 the dfytjffKeia twv CLYy^Xoiv. 
 Tttireiv. Kal d<|>Ei8. o-tip,.] lowliness, 
 and disregard, or unsparing treatment, 
 of the body : the two other perverted 
 elements in which the X(57os ffoiplas 
 was acquired. On Taireiv. , which here 
 also obviously implies a false, per- 
 verted, humihty, see notes on ver. i8. 
 The cupeiS. a-d/i. marks the false spirit 
 of asceticism, the unsparing way 
 (comp. Diod. Sic. xiii. 60, oupeiSeiv 
 (rdifiaros) in which they practised 
 bodily austerities, the ffw/iart/ci) yvfi- 
 vaaia in which Jewish Theosophy 
 was ever ready to indulge ; comp. 
 notes on 1 Tim. iv. 8. oJk 
 
 Iv Ti(i^ Tiv£ K.T.X.] not in any (real) 
 value as against repletion of the 
 flesh, the preposition being used in 
 its widely diversified sense of ' regard 
 to ' or ' relation to ' (comp. Matth. 
 xix. 8, irpos TTjv ffKXfjpoicapdiav vfi(2v), 
 the context supplying the shade of 
 meaning, favourable or unfavour- 
 able, which the relation appears to 
 involve; see esp. Kiihner, Gr. §441. 
 in. 3. d, where numerous examples 
 are given of this very varied usage. 
 The explanations of this very ob- 
 scure clause are exceedingly numer- 
 ous. With regard to the first portion, 
 two only seem to deserve considera- 
 tion ; (a) that of the Greek com- 
 mentators, according to which nfny 
 is understood to point antithetically 
 to the preceding a(peiS., and to refer 
 to the same gen. [ovk iv nfi^ t^ aib- 
 IMTi x/"2'''''<"> Theoph.), the clause 
 OVK iv Tifiy being regarded as a con- 
 tinuance on the negative side of 
 what had previously been expressed 
 in the positive : ideX. k.t.X. were the 
 elements in which the Xoyos o'oiplas 
 
 was, and npLrj Ttvl the element in 
 which it was not acquired ; (6) that 
 adopted by S.yr. and appy. ^th. 
 (Piatt), according to which niirj ap- 
 proaches to the meaning of ' pretium,' 
 and suggests that there was some- 
 thing which might be a true sub- 
 stratum for the TO ix^tv \6y. (To<j>. if 
 properly chosen, — ' a reputation of 
 wisdom evinced in i0ek. k.t.\., not 
 in any practices of true value and 
 honour;' so Beza, Beng., al., and, 
 with slight variations in detail, 
 Huther, Meyer, and Neand. Plant- 
 ing, Vol. I. p. 328 (Bohn). Of these, 
 (a) has much to recommend it ; as 
 however it suggests, if not involves, 
 either a very unsatisfactory meaning 
 of vpos irKrjan., ' so that the natural 
 wants of the body are satisfied ' 
 (Chrys., al.), or a retrospective con- 
 nexion of the clause with ia-riv, or, 
 still less likely, with doyfiarll^ea-Oe 
 ■ (Alf.), it seems better to adopt (6), 
 to which also the use of nci, almost 
 ' no value of any kind,' seems de- 
 cidedly to lean. xpos 
 irXiiir|iovi\v was regarded in former 
 edd. of this Commentary as added to 
 define the real purposive issue and 
 upshot of all these perverted austeri- 
 ties, — 'the satisfying of the unspi- 
 ritual element, the fieshly mind ; ' 
 aapmi having a retrospective refer- 
 ence to voos T^s aapnos in ver. 18, and 
 contrasting the means pursued and 
 the end really in view ; they were 
 unsparing {a<j>ei,S.] with the (xufia, that 
 they might satisfy {irpos ir\ri<r/ji,.) — the 
 ffdp^. Syr. and Mth. even insert 
 in translation an aXAi before irpos 
 irXrjafi. ; as more clearly bringing out 
 this view. According to this view 
 the irpbs would have its common 
 meaning of favouring design or pur- 
 
186 
 
 nPOS KOAA22AEI2. 
 
 ill. Ei OVU (TVUnyioOl^TG TW XpitrTOJ, Mind the things above, 
 
 %, ' ' ' 'for your life is hidden 
 
 ra iivw ttiTelre, ov 6 Xpicrr6i ecrriu ev J^'^,ohn.t: when^He 
 
 ^ y ^ -rf^i'* /!/ , ^ if be also, 
 
 a oei^ia 70V tfeov Kaa^/xevoi ra avw 
 
 pose, and the vXria-jMopri (in its usual 
 bad sense — 'repletion' or 'indul- 
 gence ') would te tliat which it 
 tended to bring about. But though 
 there may be much that may be said 
 for this -view, it must be admitted 
 that it involves a dislocation, and a 
 sort of hiatus in thought which the 
 simple tenor and sequence of the 
 words seem in no degree to suggest. 
 We therefore now take the other 
 view of the Trp6s, and regard the 
 relation it implies as unfavourable 
 to the irXiiffnovii, and so the clause as 
 indicating that the usages were really, 
 after all, of no kind of value in deal- 
 ing with that ttXi/o-^uoki; which they 
 were introduced to correct. 
 
 Exhortations and peecbpts 
 (oh. iii. I — iv. 6). 
 III. I — 4. Exhortation to seek 
 things above. i. 'EXovv]Ifthen, 
 
 with retrospective reference to el 
 6,ire0., ch. ii. 20, odt> being slightly 
 inferential (resurrection with Christ 
 is implied in death with Him), but 
 still preserving its general meaning 
 of ' continuation and retrospect,' 
 Donalds. Gr. § 604. The el is not 
 problematical, but logical (Mey.), in- 
 troducing in fact the first member 
 of a conditional syllogism ; comp. 
 Eom. V. 15, and see Fritz, ire loc. 
 In such cases instead of diminishing, 
 it really enhances the probability of 
 the truth or justice of the supposi- 
 tion; comp. Phil. i. 22. 
 crT)vri'Y«p6i)T{ t^ Xp.] ye were raised 
 with Christ, sell, in baptism ; not 
 merely in a moral sense (De W.), 
 which would render the injunction 
 that follows somewhat superfluous ; 
 
 e^Trdji* 6'rt aireBdvere ffiv Xp., Bik rod 
 ^airrla-fiaTos Sr/XaS'/i, xal Kara rb auo- 
 Tr(hfj.evov dot's voeiv firt koX ffuvTjy^pdriTe 
 (t6 yip ^dirrcfffJiaf wairep did, ttjs Kora- 
 diffem Bdvarov, offru Sid rrjs dcaSiJo-ews 
 T^y avda'TOKriv TVTroi]f vvv eladyei k.t.\., 
 Theoph.; comp. Usteri, ieftrS. 11. i. 
 3, p. 220. On the force and deep 
 reality of these expressions of mysti- 
 cal union with Christ, comp. Beuss, 
 Theol. Chret. iv. 16, Vol. 11. p. 164. 
 TO, dVo)] the things above ; all things 
 pertaining to the iroXlTev/na kv oipa- 
 vois, Phil. iii. 20, and to the Chris- 
 tian's true home, ^ dvw ' lepovtraX'/i/ji, 
 Gal. iv. 26; the contrast being rd 
 iiri TTJs y^s, ver. 2; comp. Pearson, 
 Creed, Art. vi. Vol. i. p. 322 (ed. 
 Burt.). ov 6 Xp. K.T.X.] 
 
 where Christ is, sitting at the right 
 hand of God ; not exactly ' where 
 Christ sitteth,' Auth., as there are 
 really two enunciations, ' Christ is 
 there, and that in all the glory of 
 His regal and judiciary power ; ' oi)k 
 ■^pK^adrj 5^ r^ dvca eliriiv, oitdk 06 6 Xp. 
 ^(TtIv dXXi ■!rpo<r487]Kev iv Sef. KaS'/jii, 
 rod GeoO, 'iva irXiov tI diroffTiftT-rj rhv 
 voOv Tjiiwv dirh rrjs yrjs, Thfioph.; 
 comp, Chrys. On the session of 
 Christ at the right hand of God as 
 implying indisturbanoe, dominion, 
 and judicature, see Pearson, Creed, 
 Art. VI. Vol. I. p. 328, and on its 
 real and literal significance, Jackson, 
 Creed, Book xi. i. The student will 
 find a good sermon on this text byAn- 
 drewes, Serm. viii. Vol. n. p. 309 — 
 322 (A.-C. Libr.), and another by 
 Farindou, Serm. XLir. Vol. 11. p. 359 
 (Tegg). 
 
 2. Ttl dvu <f>pov€iT€] mind the 
 above ; expansion of the pre- 
 
m. 1, 2, 3. 
 
 187 
 
 (ppovetTe, ixri to. eiri t^s yvj^, aireOavsTe yap, icai 3 
 
 ceding command, ippoveTv having a 
 fuller meaning than' jyirav ; they 
 were not only quarere but sapere. 
 On the force of (ppovelv, oomp. notes 
 ore Phil. iii. 15, Beveridge, Serai, 
 oxxxvii. Vol. VI. p. 172 (A.-C. Libr.), 
 and esp. the able analysis of An- 
 drewes, Serm. viii. Vol. 11. p. 315. 
 rd M, Tijs yf\i] the things on the 
 earth ; all things, conditions, and in- 
 terests, that belong to the terres- 
 trial ; comp. Phil. iii. 19, ol toi 
 iirlyeia ^povovvres. There is here 
 certainly not (a) any polemical allu- 
 sion to the earthly rudiments of the 
 false teachers (Theoph., CEoum.),for, 
 as Meyer observes, the remaining 
 portion of the Epistle is not anti- 
 heretical but wholly moral and prac- 
 tical, — nor (6) any specially ethical 
 allusion with reference to verse 5 
 (Bstius), for the antithesis rot dva 
 obviously precludes all such limita- 
 tion. The command is unrestrict- 
 ed and comprehensive, ' superna 
 curate non terrestria;' see Calvin 
 in loc, and the sound sermon of 
 Beveridge, above referred to, page 
 169 sq. 
 
 3. dTTcOavETE 7dp] For ye died, 
 Alf., Wordsw., not 'ye are dead,' 
 Auth., as the reference seems still 
 to the past act, oh. ii. 20. Conyb. 
 urges that the associated KiicpmraL 
 shows that the aor. is here used for a 
 perfect. Surely this is inexact ; the 
 aor. may, and apparently does, point 
 to the act, the perfect to the state 
 which ensued thereon and still con- 
 tinues. The nature of Bv-fjirKw how- 
 ever is such as to preclude any 
 rigorous translation on either side. 
 ■q X/tn\ 4|i.i3v] your life, — which suc- 
 ceeded after the direBivere ; your real 
 and true life, — not merely your ' re- 
 
 surrection life,' Alf. (t^s Tjneripas 
 avatrrtiffews ro fivffT^piov, Theod.), 
 but, with the tinge of ethical mean- 
 ing which the word ^urj from its 
 significant antithesis to ffaxaTos al- 
 ways seems to involve (comp. Reuss, 
 Thiol. GhrSt. iv. 22, Vol. 11. p. 252), 
 ' your inward and heavenly life,' of 
 which Christ is the essence, and, so 
 to speak, impersonation (ver. 4), and 
 with whom it will at last receive all 
 its highest developments, expansions, 
 and realizations; comp. notes on 
 r Tim. iv. 8. On the meaning of 
 iwTi, see the good treatise of Olshau- 
 sen, Opusc. Art. viii. p. 187 sq., and 
 on its distinction from plot. Trench, 
 Synon. § 27. K^KpDirToi 
 
 <riiv T(p Xp.] hath been {andis) hidden 
 with Christ; its glory and highest 
 characteristics are concealed from 
 view, — not merely ' laid up,' Alf., 
 but shrouded in the depths of inward 
 experiences and the mystery of its 
 union with the life of Christ. When 
 He is revealed, then the life of which 
 He is the source and element wiU be 
 revealed in all its proportions and aU 
 its blessed characteristics : the mani- 
 festation which is now at best only 
 partial and subjective will then be 
 objective and complete ; comp. the 
 thoughtful remarks of Delitzsoh,B j6^ 
 Psych. V. 3, p. 298. iv tu 0£u] 
 
 in God; He is the element and 
 sphere in which the foi^ is con- 
 cealed : in Him, as <j>us oIk&v airpbairov 
 (i Tim. vi. 16), as the Father in 
 whom is the Eternal Son (John i. 
 18, xvii. 21), and with whom He for 
 for ever reigns (ver. i), the Ufe of 
 which the Son is the essence lies 
 shrouded and concealed. Considered 
 in its inherent relations our fw^ is 
 concealed Iv 0e$; considered in its 
 
188 
 
 nPOS K0AAS2AEIS. 
 
 4 brav 6 XpicrTOs (pauepooO^, fj Yioij ^jucoc, Tore Koi vfieif 
 cruv avTUj (pavepu)d^(7ea-9e iv So^ri. 
 
 4. ■q/iuv] The reading is somewhat doubtful. Rec. reads ri/i,<Sv, and so 
 Lachm., Rev., Westc. and Hort (but all with margin), on slightly pre- 
 ponderating authority: Tisch., Treg. (with marg.), i/niSv. The ■qij.Qi' is far 
 less easy to account for than v/iwv, which might have come from ver. 3 or 
 from the vfiels in the present verse. 
 
 coherent relations it is concealed crto 
 XpuTTif ; oomp. Meyer in loc, whose 
 interpr. of fwi) (' das ewige Lebeu ') 
 however is narrow and unsatisfac- 
 tory. 
 
 4. ^avfpaO'gi} shall be manifested ; 
 scil. at His second coming, when He 
 shall be seen as He is, and when His 
 present concealment shall cease ; oSre 
 yap u^' ifiQv opdrai, Kal viro tQv 
 airlurojv iravreXcos dyvoetraL, Theod.; 
 eomp. 2 Pet. iii. 4. i^ Jwij 
 
 il|ji<3v] our Life, almost ' being our 
 Life,' the ' prsedioatio,' as Daven. 
 acutely observes, being ' causalis non 
 essentialis.' Christ is here termed ij 
 fu^ TlfiSv, not however as being 
 merely the author of it (Daven.), or 
 the cause of it (Corn, a Lap.), much 
 less ' in the character of it ' (Badie), 
 but as being — our Life itself, the 
 essence and the impersonation of it ; 
 pomp. Gal. ii. 20, Phil. i. 21. Thus 
 Christ is termed ^ iXwh ii/jiwi/, i Tim. 
 i. I (comp. ch. i. 27), i] elp-qi/yi tj/jiuv, 
 Eph. ii. 14, where see notes. 
 Kal v|<,eis] ye aim ; ye Colossian con- 
 verts as well as all other true Chris- 
 tians. The more verbally exact 
 opposition would have been 'your 
 hidden life ' (oomp. Pell) ; but this 
 the AjSostle perhaps designedly neg- 
 lects, to prevent fu^ being applied, 
 as it has been applied, merely to the 
 resurrection life. It has been urged 
 that this clause fixes that meaning 
 to fu^; but surely the avoidance of 
 the regular antithesis seems to hint 
 the very reverse; i/*eis (pavep. is the 
 
 natural sequel of your inward and 
 heavenly life ; and is its true develop- 
 ment, kv Sd^T)] in glory ; 
 comp. Bom. viii. 17, eiirep awird- 
 ffxo/J.ci' 'iva Kal (rvvdo^a<r6iS/iei'. The 
 S6^a will be the issue, development, 
 and crown, of the hidden life, and 
 will be displayed both in the ma- 
 terial (i Cor. XV. 43) and imma- 
 terial portions of our composite 
 nature : ' hujus ^ternse vitse promissa 
 gloria sita est in duplici stola ; in 
 stola animse et stola corporis, ' Daven. 
 The conjunction of body and soul, 
 soul and spirit, will then be com- 
 plete, harmonious, and indissoluble ; 
 fwT) will become t) Svtics ^urj, and will 
 reflect the glories of Him who is its 
 element and essence : comp. Olsh. 
 Opusc. p. 195 sq. 
 
 S — II. Exhortation to put off all 
 the evil principles of their former life. 
 5. NEKp(a(raTC oSv] Make dead 
 then: ' as you died, and your true 
 life is hidden with Christ, and here- 
 after to be developed in glory, act 
 conformably to it, — let nothing live 
 inimical to such a state, kill at once 
 (aor.) the organs and media of a 
 mere earthly life.' OBk is thus, as 
 commonly, retrospective and collec- 
 tive (' ad ea quae antea revera posita 
 sunt lectorem revocat,' Klotz, Devar. 
 Vol. II. p. 719), serving to enhance 
 the pertinent reference of veKptiaan 
 to the direOdpere and i] fu^ \j/jliSp 
 which have preceded. rd 
 
 |ji^Xt|] your members, the portions of 
 your bodily organization (comp. Eom. 
 
III. 4, 5- 
 
 189 
 
 Mortify your members 
 and the evil princi 
 
 ^ Ne/fjOoxraTe ovv ra fj-eXri ra eiri 5 
 
 pies in which ye once » » , ^ n i 'n 
 
 walked: put oflf the old ti;? "yi;?, TTopveiav, aKaoaperiav, tooo^, 
 
 Sn^'S^ *" "'' i-Jrievfxiav KUK^v, Ka\ t^v irXeove^lav ?Ti9 
 
 5. f^'Kr}] So Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort on preponderating 
 authority: Bee, Lachm., and former edd. of this Commentary, add vfidv. 
 The probability of an insertion of the pronoun combined with the important 
 external testimony fully justifies this change. 
 
 vii. 5) qua the instruments and 
 media of sinfulness and lusts ; comp. 
 with respect to the precept, Eom. 
 viii. 13, G-al. v. 24, and with respect 
 to the image and form of expression, 
 Matth. V. 29, 30. These are more 
 specifically defined as rci ^Tri rrjs -yTJs 
 (comp. ver. 2), as limiting the sphere 
 of their activities (' ubi suum habeut 
 pabulum,' Beng.), and as justifying 
 the preceding command. 
 iropvcCav, ciKaOapirCav] fornication, 
 uncleanness ; specific and generic pro- 
 duets of the Tct fiiXt) rb, iirl ttJs 7^5 on 
 the side of lust and carnality ; comp. 
 Eph. V. 3, and see notes on Gal. y. 
 ig. There is no need to supply 
 mentally veKpuicyare (Fritz. Rom. Vol. 
 I. p. 379), or to introduce paraphrasti- 
 caUy a prep., ' a scortatioue,' ^th. ; 
 the four accusatives stand in an ap- 
 positional relation to rk fj-fKyj k.t.\., 
 as denoting their evil products and 
 operations ; see Winer, Gr. § 59. 8, 
 and comp. Matth. Gr. § 432. 3. 
 irdOos, e7ri6v|ji,. KaKi]v] lustfulness, 
 evil desire ; further and more generic 
 manifestations; comp. iv irdSei in- 
 Bv/das, I Thess. iv. 5. It does not 
 seem proper, on the one hand, to ex- 
 tend irdSos to ' motus vitiosos, quales 
 sunt ^x^P"*'; ^pE's, tv^oh K.r.X.,' 
 Grot., or, on the other, to limit it 
 to more frightful exhibitions of vice 
 (Eom. i. 26, 27): it points rather, 
 as the evolution of thought seems to 
 require, to ' the disposition toward 
 lust,' Olsh., 'libidinem,' Vulg., the 
 
 'morbum libidinis,' Beng., — in a 
 word, not merely to lust, but to lust- 
 fulness ; TTii^os 7] \6aaa, rou ffthfiaros, 
 Kol ufftrep irvperbs i; rpav/ia 17 dXXij v6- 
 ffos, Theoph. The last, iTi.8vii.la KaKii, 
 is still more inclusive and generic; 
 ISov yeifiKdi rb irav elTre, Chrys. On 
 both words comp. Trench, Synon. 
 
 § 87. T11V 
 
 irXcovelCov] covetousness — with the ar- 
 ticle, as being the notorious form of 
 sin (' eine bekannte, hauptsachUch 
 zu meidende TJnsittlichkeit,' Winer, 
 Gr. § 18. 8) that ever preserves so 
 frightful an alliance with the sins 
 of the flesh. There seems no reason 
 whatever to depart from the proper 
 sense of the word ; it is neither spe- 
 cially 'base gains derived from un- 
 cleanness ' (comp. Storr, Flatt, al.), 
 nor generically ' insatiabilem oupi- 
 ditatem voluptatum turpium,' Est., 
 'the fierce longing of the creature,' 
 Trench {Synon. § 24, — a very doubt- 
 ful expansion), but simply ' covetous- 
 ness,' 'inexplebilem appetitum animi 
 quEereutis divitias,' Daven. (comp. 
 Theod. ,Theoph. ),a sin that especially 
 depends on the to, iirl rijs yrji (' max- 
 ime afiSgit ad terram,' Beng.), and 
 makes, not sensational cravings per 
 se, but the means of gratifying them, 
 the objects of its interest ; see esp. 
 Miiller, Doctr. of Sin, 1.1.3. 2,Vol.i.p. 
 169 (Clark), and notes on Eph. iv. 19. 
 ^'tis Io-tVv elSoiX.] tJie which is, seeing 
 it is, idolatry ; explanatory force of 
 So-Tis, see notes on Gal, iv. 24. The 
 
190 
 
 nP02 KOAA22AEIS. 
 
 6 ecrriv elSwXoXarpela, St" d 'ep-)(eraL fi opyh tov Qeov 
 
 7 eiri Toyy w'oi/y T^y cnreiQela^- ev oif Koi vfteii irepieira- 
 
 6. iirl Tois vlois rijs aTrciff.] Tiseh., Treg., Westc. and Hort omit these 
 words, and Lachm. encloses them in brackets, as they are not found in B; 
 Sahid., iEth. (Pol., but not Piatt); Clem, (i), Iren. (e'sil.). They also seem 
 to have been absent from the MS. from which D was copied ; see Treg. in loe. 
 They are retained by Eec, Rev. (with marg.). Decision here seems very 
 difficult. On the one hand, it is certainly possible that they may have been 
 inserted from the parallel passage, Eph. v. 6 ; still, on the other, the great 
 weight of external evidence, and the probabiUty that in two Epp. where so 
 much is alike even individual expressions might be repeated, seem to render 
 the omission doubtful. We retain then the words, but not with full con- 
 fidence. 
 
 remark of Theod. is very pertinent, 
 iireLSr) rbv /la/i/iuim Kipiov 6 (TotTrip 
 irpoffTjydpevo'e SidofTKCiJi' ws 6 r<J) iradei 
 TTjs wXeove^las dovK^T^iov ths ffebv tov 
 vKovTov Ti/iS,. The very improbable 
 reference of rJTis to fiiXri (Harl. on 
 Eph. V. s), or to all that precedes 
 (Heinr.), is rightly rejected by Winer, 
 Gr. § 24. 3. 
 
 6. SC a] on account of which sins ; 
 clearly not SC a, sc. iiiXr) (Bahr), but 
 inref. to 'peccataprEecedentiaaliaque 
 flagitia,' Grot. ; comp. notes on Eph. 
 V. 6. Spx«Toi] doth come ; 
 
 emphatic, both in position and tense. 
 The present hints at the enduring 
 principles of the moral government of 
 God ; see notes on Eph. v. 5 . 
 Tj 6pyr\ ToB 0«ov] Not only here, but 
 hereafter; Kal ^ fiiXKovra opy^ Kal ij 
 ii/ T<f pvv aluvi. iroXXd/cis KaraKafi^d- 
 vov(n Tois ToioiTovs, Theoph. Meyer 
 rejects this more inclusive reference, 
 but without sufficient reason; see 
 notes on Eph. v. 6. 
 Tois Diois TTJs 017616.] the sons of 
 disobedience; those who reject and 
 disobey the principles and practice of 
 the Gospel ; see notes on Eph. v. 6, 
 where the same expression occurs in 
 the same combination, and on the 
 force of the Hebraistic circumlocu- 
 tion, notes on ib. ii. 2, 
 
 7. fV ots] among whom, soil, vlots 
 TTJs dveidelas, — not neuter 'in which,' 
 in ref. to the foregoing vices: see 
 Eph. ii. 3, if oh Kal •^fiecs irdvTes av- 
 ea-Tpd<pri/iev, which, with the present 
 longer reading, seems to leave no room 
 for doubt. The objection of Olsh., 
 that the Colossians were still walking 
 among the viol t^s dreiS. as converts, 
 seems easily answered by observing 
 that irepmaTuv, St Paul's favourite 
 verb of moral motion (only used by 
 him here and 2 Thess. iii. ii with h> 
 and dat. of persons), seems always em- 
 ployed by him to denote an actual 
 participation in a course or manner of 
 life ; contrast John xi. 54. 
 l^iJTe iv TovTois] ye were living in 
 these sins, 'these sins were the sphere 
 of your existence and activities ; ' the 
 verb ^f^T6 referring to the preceding 
 dxeff. (ver. 3), and its tense portraying 
 the then continuing state; comp. Jelf, 
 Qr. % 401. 3. Huther and others re- 
 gard ToiiTois as masc. : this does not 
 seem satisfactory, as &re i^. would be 
 but a weak and tautologous explana- 
 tion of the preceding iv oh ireptew. 
 TTore, and as ^■^v iv (except in its 
 deeper meanings, e.g. ^ h Xp. k.t.X., 
 Eom. vi. II, GaJ. ii. 20) is always 
 used by St Paul with things; comp. 
 ch. ii. 2(5, Eom. vj. i, Gal. ii. 20, 
 
III. 6, 7, 8. 
 
 191 
 
 Ttia-are irore, OTe eXrJTe ev tovtoiv vwi Se a-TroOeerOe 8 
 Kai vfieh ra iraura, opy^v, 6vfi6v, KaKiav, ^Xacrcprifxiav, 
 
 7. toiJtois] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Bev., Westc. and Hort, on very 
 clearly preponderating authority : Rec, airqts. 
 
 Phil. i. 22. See the exx. collected by 
 Kypke (06s. Vol. 11. p. 327), f^y it, 
 'OSv(r<relq,, ev (fipovrlcnv, ip \6yoi!, i» 
 dpery, iv ^iXoa-oipiq. k.t.\., ill all of 
 which the non-personal substantives 
 similarly define the sphere to which 
 the activities of life were confined; 
 see also exx. in Wetst. in loc. 
 
 8. vvvl Si a,ir66ia-6i] but now lay 
 aside ; emphatic exhortation suggest- 
 ed by their present state, the forcible 
 uvvi (Hartung, Partih Vol. 11. p. 24) 
 standing in sharp opposition to the 
 preceding irore, Sre. On the figura- 
 tive i.Tr66e(rde, opp. to ivSiaacrBe, comp. 
 notes on Eph. iv. 22. The trans- 
 lation of Eadie, 'ye too have put off,' 
 perhaps suggested by a misunder- 
 standing of Auth., can only be re- 
 garded as an oversight. koI 
 0(Mts] ye also, ye as well as other 
 Christians; the xal putting them 
 here in contrast with their fellow- 
 converts, as in ver. 7 with their 
 feUow-heathens ; comp. notes on 
 Phil. iv. 12. Ttt iravra] them 
 all; all previously (roi^ois, ver. 7) 
 and hereafter mentioned. Winer 
 (Gr. § 18. i) appears to refer t& 
 Trdvra, with an intensive force, only 
 to what had been already adduced: 
 the enumeration which follows seems 
 to require from it a more compre- 
 hensive and prospective reference; 
 see Meyer in loc. So similarly Syr., 
 Goth, (.ailth. omits), 'hsec omnia' 
 (comp. Theod.), except that this 
 is perhaps too exclusively prospec- 
 tive, opyijv, 6u(i.6v] On 
 these two words, the former denoting 
 the more settled state, the latter the 
 
 more eruptive and temporary, see 
 notes ore Eph. iv. 31, and Trench, 
 Synon. § 37 ; add also (Ecum., who 
 correctly remarks, ^otl y&p 8vfi.bi... 
 l^aiph Tis Kal 6,va6vfita(Ti.s (Sfeia toC 
 
 KaKCov] malice, 'badness of heart,' 
 the evil habit of the mind, as con- 
 trasted with irov-qpla, which is the 
 more definite manifestation of it; 
 comp. Eph. iv, 31, and Trench, Si/nom. 
 § II. p\a(r4ir)|j.Cav may be 
 
 either against God or against men, 
 according to the context (see notes ore 
 I Tim. i. 13) ; here the associated 
 vices seem to limit the reference to 
 the latter ; ras XoiSopias oCtu "Kiyu, 
 Theoph. ; see notes on the very similar 
 passage, Eph. iv. 31. 
 ol<rxpoXo7Cav] coarse, reproachful, 
 speaking. It is somewhat doubtful 
 whether we are to adopt (a) the 
 more limited meaning ' turpiloquium,' 
 Clarom., sim. Vulg., Syr., 'aglaiti- 
 vaurdein,' Goth., 'turpitude,' ^th.; 
 or (6) the more general 'foul-mouthed 
 abusiveness,' Trench, Synon. § 34 
 (comp. Oopt. , where however it seems 
 ■to be confounded with nwpoKoyla), 
 ' schandbares Eeden,' Meyer. As al- 
 (TXpoK. is an aw. \e-y6fi. in N.T., and 
 does not occur in LXX., and as both 
 interpretations have good lexical au- 
 thority, — the former, Xen. de Rep. 
 Laced, v. 6, PoU. Onomast. iv. 106, 
 Clem.-Alex. Pcsd. 11. 6, comp. Suicer, 
 Thesaur. s.v. Vol. t p. 136, Eaphel, 
 Annot. Vol. 11. p. 535; the latter, 
 Polyb. Hist. viii. 13. 8, and xxxi. 
 10. 4, where it is associated with 
 Xoidopla, — the context alone must de- 
 
192 
 
 nPOS K0AA2SAEI2. 
 
 9 alayjioKoylav, sk tov o-TOfiaTog u/iSiv ixtj y^evoetrde etf 
 aW^Xovs, air€K^vadiJi.evoi tov iraXaiov avQpwirov crvv 
 
 cide. As this appy. refers mainly to 
 sins against a neighbour (oomp. ver. 
 9), the balance seems in favour of (6) 
 according to which alaxpoX. will be 
 an extension otjSXaff^., and will imply 
 all coarse and foul-mouthedlanguage, 
 whether abusive or otherwise. 
 eK Tou OT. v\uav is not to be referred 
 solely to alaxpoK. (jEth.), but to the 
 two preceding substantives, d,T60e<T0e 
 being mentally supplied. It seems 
 doubtful whether the addition marks 
 specially the pollution (pviroi yap ri 
 eh So^o\oytai> OeoO irevoiifiiivov (rrdfia, 
 CEcum., comp. Chrys.), or the unsuit- 
 dbleness (Mey.) of the actions which 
 are here described : the latter is 
 perhaps slightly the most probable; 
 comp. James iii. 10. 
 
 9. |iii >|ȣv8eo-6c] do not He; pres., 
 do not indulge in the practice. The 
 addition eis dXX^Xous specifies the ob- 
 jects toward which the practice was 
 forbidden (compare Winer, Gr. § 49. 
 a. c. 5), and stamps it as a social 
 wrong; see Bph. iv. 25, and notes 
 in loc. On the frightful character 
 of untruthfulness, and its evolution 
 from selfishness and lust, see esp. 
 Mliller, Doctr, of Sin, 1. 1.3. 2, Vol. 
 I. p. 171 sq. (Clark). 
 dircKSv(ra|jievoi] seeing that ye have 
 put off, Auth., Eev.; causal parti- 
 ciple, giving the reason for the 
 precept, and in point of time prior 
 to (Mey.), not contemporaneous with 
 ('exspoliantes,' Vulg., Clarom.) the 
 preoedingpr escnt imperative \(/eiSea8e, 
 and so not forming a part of the 
 command (Lightf.). Such a refer- 
 ence is not superfluous or inap- 
 propriate (De W.) ; the part, serves 
 suitably to remind them that the 
 conditions into which they had now 
 entered (by baptism, — to which the 
 
 participles seem to point) rendered 
 a selfish and untruthful life a self- 
 contradiction. To consider AireKd. as 
 beginning a new period, interrupted, 
 and resumed in ver. 12, as Hofm. 
 Schriftb. Vol. 11. i, p. 268, seems very 
 harsh and improbable. On the double 
 compound AtekS. see notes on chap, 
 ii. 15. TOV iraXaiov dv9p.] 
 
 the old man; not merely rijv vpori- 
 pav TToXiTelav, Theod., but, with a 
 more individualizing reference, our 
 former unconverted self, our state 
 before regeneration ; see notes onEph. 
 iv. 22. Daveuant (comp. Calv.) refers 
 the term to the 'insita natures nostrsG 
 eorrnptio,' — a special and polemical 
 reference, to which the context, which 
 seems to point simply to their ante- 
 Christian, as contrasted with their 
 present state {irSre, mvl, ver. 7, 8), 
 appears to yield no support. 
 a-vv Tais irp. auTov] with his deeds; 
 slightly explanatory, marking the 
 practical character of the develop- 
 ments of the TraXaihs dvdponros ; comp. 
 Gal. V. 24. Calvin well says, 'notan- 
 dumest veterem hominemab operibiis 
 suis, tanquam arborem a fruotibus, 
 discerni.' 
 
 10. Kal Iv8. TOV v&v] and have 
 put on the reew man; closely connect- 
 ed with the preceding clause, and 
 presenting on the positive side the 
 act succeeding to the dirc/cS. on the 
 negative. The term c^os stands here 
 in contrast with TraXoiJs as marking 
 the newly-entered and fresh state of 
 spiritual conditions after conversion 
 and regeneration. In Eph. iv. 24 
 the term is Kaivis, as marking rather 
 the new state in respect of quality ; 
 comp. Tittmann, Synon. i. p. 59, 
 notes on Eph. iii. 16, iv. 24, and 
 Trench, Synon. § 60. It is 
 
III. 9, lo. 
 
 193 
 
 Tah TTpa^ea-iv avToO, icai evSvcrdnevoi tov veov tov io 
 avaKaivovfievov eis eiriyvrntriv kut eiKOva tov KTKTavTO^ 
 
 not improbable that the reference in 
 the two passages is slightly different, 
 in Eph., as the hortatory tone sug- 
 gests, the ref. is primarily to reiiova- 
 tion; here, as the argumentative 
 allusion seems to imply, primarily to 
 regeneration, yet in neither, as the 
 noticeable combinations (dvaveovaBai 
 ...Kaivhv dv$p,, rhv v4ov t6v ditaKatv.) 
 further suggest, is the reference ex- 
 elusive. On the distinction, see 
 Waterl. Regen. Vol. iv. p. 433 sq., 
 comp. Trench, Synon. § 18. 
 TOV dvaKaiv.] who is being renewed; 
 characteristic, not merely of dvBponrov 
 (De W.), but of the viov dvdpunrov, as 
 the prominence of the epithet clearly 
 requires. This process of avaKoivoi- 
 ns, of which the causa instrumentalis 
 and agent (Tit. iii. 5, comp. Eph. 
 iv. 23) is the Holy Spirit, is re- 
 presented as continually going on ; 
 comp. 2 Cor. iv. 16, 6 ^cra Tjiiwv 
 {dv$p,) dfaKacvovTai TlP'^pi} Kol -fifiipg.. 
 The prep, dvd appears to marlc re- 
 storation to a former, not necessarily 
 a primal state ; see Winer, de Verb. 
 Comp. III. p. 10, comp. notes ore Eph. 
 iv. 23. «ls etrlyvaiT\.v\ unto 
 
 full knowledge, appy. of God, and 
 the mystery of redemption (tov 6eoC 
 Kol Tuv delwv, Theoph.) ; comp. ch. i. 
 9, ii. 2, Eph. i. 17; 'in eo ergo quod 
 ait qui renov. in agnitionem, demon- 
 atravit quoniam ipse ille qui igno- 
 rantife erat ante homo, id est igno- 
 rans Deum, per (?) earn quae in eo 
 est agnitionem renovatur, agnitio 
 enim Dei renovat hominem,' Iren. 
 Hcer. V. 12. 4. On the full meaning 
 of iwlyp. {'accurata cognitio'), see 
 notes ore Eph. I. o. , and comp. ore 
 Col. ii. 2. This was the object 
 towards which the dvaKaiv. tended 
 (not the sphere in which, Auth., 
 
 E. 
 
 Copt.),— the result which it was de- 
 signed to attain; comp. Eph. iv. 
 
 13. KaT c'lKOVa K.T.X.] 
 
 after the image, of Him who created 
 him. After a comparison with the 
 similar and suggestive passage Eph. 
 iv. 24, there can scarcely be a doubt 
 that this clause is to be connected with 
 dvaKaiv., not with eirlyvuiffiv (Meyer, 
 comp. Hofmann, Schriftb. Vol. r. p. 
 252), — a construction grammatically 
 admissible (comp. Winer, d: § 20. 4) , 
 but not exegetically satisfactory. 
 Kara will thus point to the ' norma ' 
 or model (notes ore Gal. iv. 28), and 
 the eUiiv tov ktUt. to the image of 
 God (Theod.), not of Christ (Chrys.; 
 comp. MuUer, Doctr. of Sin, Vol. 11. 
 p. 392, Clark), in which the first man 
 was created, which was lost by sin, 
 but 'is to be restored again by a real 
 though not substantial change,' Pear- 
 son, Creed, Art. 11. Vol. i. p. 149 
 (ed. Burt.) ; 'in eo quod dioit secun- 
 dum imag. conditoris, reoapitulatio- 
 nem manifestavit ejusdem hominis 
 qui in initio secundum imaginem 
 factus est Dei,' Iren. H(er. v. 12. 4, 
 comp. Delitzsch, Bibl. Psychol. 11. 1, 
 p. 51, who conceives that with the 
 spiritual a physical depravation of 
 the image was also included. This 
 reference to a restoration of the 
 image of God in the first creation 
 has been sometimes deemed an idea 
 foreign to Scripture (comp. Miiller, 
 Doctr. of Sin, iv. 3, Vol. 11. p. 393, 
 Clark): this however does not seem 
 to be the case ; see notes ore Eph. iv. 
 24, and the passages collected from 
 the early eccl. writers in Bull, Engl. 
 Worlis, Disc. V. p. 478 sq., and esp. 
 p. 492. On the meaning of elKiiv, 
 see Trench, Synon. § 15. 
 avTov] Scil. TOV v4ov dvBp. ; not merely 
 
194 
 
 nP02 K0AA22AEI2. 
 
 1 1 avTOv' oTTov ovK Bvi "E\X»;i' Koi 'lovSaiof, vepiTO/xrj koI 
 aKpo^va-Tia, ^dp/Sapov, Seyflij?, SovXot, eXevOepof, aXXa 
 ra iravTa Kai ev iraa-iv XjOJittoj. 
 
 I a E>'Ol/(7aO'0e oi/V, W? e/cAe/CTOt TOV Put on mercy, be for- 
 
 ^ giving and loving, and 
 
 Qeov ayiot Kai ^ya-7rr,^ivoi, cnrXayx^a f^' '^ Pl^gXt^d 
 
 In your hearts to God, and give thanks. 
 
 1 1 . There are several variations of reading in this verse derived from the 
 similar passage Gal, iii. 28. After ^vi DTG ; Clarom., Aug., Boem., add 
 dp(rev Kal 6rj\v. The addition of Kai by D^FG after ^dp^. seems a clear inter- 
 polation, thus rendering the testimony of the same MSS. of doubtful value 
 in the next clause. Also between Sov\. and iXeiB. Lachm. inserts xal, with 
 AD^FG : 3 mss.; Yulg., Clarom., al.: the external authority is fair, but the 
 probability of a conformation to the preceding clauses is very great. Lastly, 
 T& is omitted by Westc. and Hort, on good but not preponderating authority. 
 
 avSp. (De W.), which seems opposed 
 to the logical and grammatical con- 
 nexion, and is not required by the 
 preceding interpretation. Whether 
 God be defined as 6 Krltras in ref . to 
 the first or to the second creation 
 {avdKTiffis, Pearson, Greed, Vol. 11. 
 p. 80, Burt.) does not alter the doc- 
 trinal truth involved in the words — 
 ' quod perdidimus in Adam, id est 
 secundum imaginem et similitudinem 
 esse Dei, hoc in Christo Jesu reci- 
 pimus,' Iren. Bar. in. 18. i. 
 
 II. Siro«] where; 'qua in re' 
 ('apudquem,' ^th.), soil, in which 
 condition of aviKSvais of the old and 
 lySv(Ti.s of the new man ; eomp. Xen. 
 MIem. III. 5. I, and Kiihner in loc, 
 cited (but incorrectly) by Meyer. 
 ouK 'ivi\ there is not; see notes on 
 Gal. iii. 28, where the grammatical 
 character of this contraction is briefly 
 discussed. "EXXrjv koI 
 
 'IodS.] Greek and Jew; antithesis 
 involving national distinctions, fol- 
 lowed by a second (irepn. Kal axp.) 
 involving ritual characteristics, and 
 by a climax ifidp^., 'ZkW.) in ref. to 
 habits and civilization ('Scythee bar- 
 baris barbariores,' Beng., ^paxt> t&v 
 Brjpluii' 5ia0^/3oi'Tes, Joseph, contr. Ap. 
 
 II. 37 ; see exx. in Wetst. in loc), and 
 lastly by a third unconnected anti- 
 thesis (SoCXos, i\eu6. ) involving social 
 relations. On the term pdp^apos see 
 notes on i Cor. xiv. 1 1 . The Greek 
 regarded all the rest of mankind as 
 pdppapoi, and the Boman, in effect, 
 did the same ; oomp. Cicero, de Fin. 
 II. 15 (cited by Lightf.), 'non solum 
 GrsBcia et Italia, sed etiam omnis 
 barbaria.' On the term XkvBijs, 
 and the relations into which the 
 Scythians appear once to have come 
 with the Jews in the reign of Josiah, 
 see the note of Bp Lightfoot in loc. 
 dXXd TO, TTovTa k.t.X.] but Chkist 
 is all, and in all; similar in meaning 
 to irAvTes...v/ieis els i<rTi ii> Xp. 'Ii/ir., 
 Gal. iii. 28, but with a somewhat more 
 comprehensive enunciation : ' Christ ' 
 (placed with emphasis at the end, 
 Jelf, Gr. § 902. 2) is the aggregation 
 of all things, distinctions, preroga- 
 tives, and blessings, and moreover is 
 in all, dwelling in all, and so uniting 
 all in the common element of Him- 
 self ; irdvTa i/uv 6 Xpio-rds ^crrai, Kal 
 d^iup.a Kal Y^vos, Kai iv iraaiv i/uv 
 airbs, Chrys. For examples of ehai 
 rd TrdvTa or irdvTa in ref. to an in- 
 dividual, see the very large collection 
 
III. II, 12. 
 
 195 
 
 oiKTipfiov, ^pt](rr6rriTa, rairetvocfipoa-vvtiv, TrpavTijra, 
 
 12. oiKTipiuoC] So Lachm., Tiseh., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Sort, on vastly 
 preponderating authority: Bee, olKTipnav. The form Trpavr. (ttpjot. Rec.) is 
 here supported by ABON, and is adopted in the above-mentioned edd. 
 
 in Wetst. on i Cor. xv. 28. 
 
 12 — 17. Exhortations to mercy, 
 love, peace, and joy fulness. 
 12. 'EvSvo-ao-Oc o{v] Put on then; 
 exhortation naturally following from 
 the fact that the vios avSpdiiros which 
 involved all the above blessings had 
 been put on ; 'as you have put on the 
 new man, put on all its characteristic 
 qualities.' The oCi' has thus apparently 
 more of its reflexive force, ' igitur, 'not 
 'ergo' (Vulg.), 'it takes up what has 
 been said and continues it,' Donalds. 
 Cratyl. § 192; eomp. notes on Phil. 
 ii. I. us ^kX. tov @cov] as 
 
 chosen ones of God; as being men who 
 enjoy and value so great and so sin- 
 gular a blessing as to have been called 
 out of heathen darkness to the know- 
 ledge of Christ; comp. Tit. i. 1. 
 Meyer acutely calls attention to the 
 fact that us iKKtKTol echoes the pre- 
 ceding argumentative direKSva:, and 
 thus stands in logical and exegetical 
 connexion with what precedes. 
 6(71.01 Kal 1^Y°'''"1I''-] ^^ ^^ doubtful 
 whether these two words are to be 
 regarded as used substantively ('ut 
 sancti et dilecti,' ^th.-Pol. but not 
 Piatt), and as co-ordinate to, or as 
 simple predicates to the preceding 
 iKXeKTol ToD ecoC. The pure sub- 
 stantival use of the latter expres- 
 sion in St Paul's Bpp. (Eom. viii. 33, 
 Tit. i. I, comp. 2 Tim. ii. 10), coupled 
 with the fact that the force of the ex- 
 hortation rests on their character as 
 ^KkenTol, not as being 07101 Kal iyyair., 
 renders the latter connexion most 
 plausible; so Beng., and after him 
 Mey., and the majority of modem 
 editors and expositors. Chrys. and 
 Theoph. appear to have regarded 
 
 them as three attributes; so Daven., 
 Huther, al. The Kal is omitted by 
 B, 17, Theb. (so Westc. and Hort, in 
 marg.), but the authority for its 
 retention is too preponderant even 
 for brackets (as in Lightf.). 
 oTrXoT^va olKTip|Jiov] tender mercies 
 of compassion; 'bowels which are 
 characterized by, and are the seat 
 of, mercy,' the gen. being that of the 
 'predominating quality,' and pro- 
 bably falling under the general head 
 of the gen. possessivus ; see Soheuerl. 
 Synt. § 16. 3, p. 115, and comp, 
 Luke i. 78, a-irXdyx""' i^^ovs. The 
 expression is probably a little more 
 emphatic than the simple olKTip/iol 
 (Heb. X. 28), or the more common 
 fteos : oiK etirev ?Xeoc, dXX' ifi^ami,- 
 Kiirepov did, tuv Svo, Chrys. ; comp. 
 Fritz. Rom. Vol. 11. p. 315. For 
 examples of the tropical use of 
 avXAyxva, which however is here not 
 necessarily required (comp. Mey.), see 
 Phil. i. 8, ii. 1, and notes in locc. 
 Xpijo-rdi-qTa] kindness ; 'benevolence 
 and sweetness of disposition as shown 
 in intercourse with one another;' 
 joined in Tit. iii. 4 with tpiXavffponrla, 
 and in Eom. xi. 22 opp. to airoroula; 
 see notes on Gal. v. 22. 
 TOTTSivoiJjpoo-.] lowliness of mind, the 
 thinking ourselves lowly because we 
 are so ; dV Tairnvbi ^s, Kal hvo^ffTjs ris 
 UK TTcSs iffdiBris, a0o/)/i7)c TrpJs aper^v 
 XafiL^dyeit r7]v fnp-^/j-Tjv, Chrys. ore Eph. 
 iv. 2, here more exact than in his de- 
 finitions collected in Huicer, Thesaur. 
 s.v. On the true meaning of this word 
 see the valuable remarks of Neander, 
 Planting, Vol. i. p. 4831 Trench, 
 Syrum. § 42, and notes on Eph. iv. i. 
 irpailiTT]Ta] meekness, in respect of 
 
 O 2 
 
196 
 
 nP02 KOAA2SAEIS. 
 
 13 fxaKpoOvniav, ave'^^^ofievoi aWiJAa))/ Koi ■^api(^onevoi 
 eavToh, eav tj? Trpo's riva ej^ij fAOfjicptjv, KaOm Kai 
 
 14 6 Ki/jOtof i)(^aplcraTO iifiiv outw? koj y/Mejf eTrt 
 
 13. Kiipios] So Lachm., Treg., Rev. (with marg.), Westc. and HorJ (with 
 marg.), on preponderating authority: Rec, Tisch., and former edd. of this 
 Commentary, XpitrTos. 
 
 God, as well as toward one another; 
 see notes on Gal. v. 23, and on Eph. 
 iv. /, in which latter passage it occurs 
 in exactly the same position with 
 respect to Taireiv. and /laKpoBv/ita. 
 Eadie objects to theprimaryreferenoe 
 to God, but appy. without suflBeient 
 reason: that TrpavTijs is frequently 
 used in purely human relations is 
 quite true (comp. Tit. iii. 2, irpavT. 
 "irpos irdvTas dvdpibTous), but that its 
 basis is a meek acceptance of God's 
 dealings with us seems clearly shown 
 in Matth. xi. 29, where it is an attri- 
 bute of the SaTiour, and in Gal. vi. i, 
 and perhaps i Cor. iv. 31 and 2 
 Tim. ii. 25, where a sense of depen- 
 dence on God forms the very ground- 
 work of the exhortation. In such 
 passages mere gentleness seems quite 
 insufficient. On /MaKpoBv/xla opp. to 
 6^v6viJ.la, (oomp. James i. 19), see 
 notes on Eph. iv. i. 
 
 13. dv€)^d(i€voi dXX.] forbearing 
 one another ; exhibition of the last 
 two, and perhaps more particularly 
 of the last of the above-mentioned 
 virtues; comp. Eph. iv. -i, /lerit. 
 IxfXKpod.f dvex^P-evoL dXX. iv dydirTj. 
 There does not seem any necessity 
 for enclosing the whole verse (Griesb., 
 Lachm., Buttm.), nor even (caffdis 
 Kol — vixeh (Winer, Gr. § 64, ed. 5), 
 in a parenthesis. The structure and 
 sequence of thought are uninterrupt- 
 ed ; while the first participle expands 
 thepreceding substantives, the second 
 is enhanced by an adverbial clause 
 which in its second member carries 
 with it the preceding participle x"?'- 
 
 fi/icKoi; see Winer, Gr. § 62. 4, p. 
 499, ed. 6. xaptJ6(ji6voi «av- 
 
 Tois] forgiving each other; comp. 
 Eph. iv. 32. The change to the 
 reflexive pronoun in two members so 
 perfectly similar (Eph. I.e. is a little 
 different) is perhaps not accidental; 
 while oXXr/Xwv marks an act to be 
 done by one Christian to his fellow- 
 Christian, eavToTs may suggest the 
 performance of an act faintly re- 
 sembling that of Christ's, namely, of 
 each one toward all, — yea even to 
 themselves included ('vobis ipsis,' 
 Vulg.), Chi-ifet&ns being members of 
 one an&ther ; Saa av iv tQ eiepyerctv 
 TTOL^fiev eripovs, /caXws ravra, Kal Stcfc 
 t6 Ti\os Kal dih t6 uvaailip-ovs ruuis 
 etvfUf fmXKov els ijf/.as dvatpiperai, 
 Origen on Eph. I. c. (Cramer, Cat. 
 Vol. I. p. 311), but perhaps more 
 appropriate here than there. 
 |jia)i,4>i]v] (ground of) blame. This 
 form is an ottoJ. Xeyi/i. in the N.T., 
 but, especially in combination with 
 ?XW) sufficiently common in classical 
 Greek ; see exx. in Wetst. in loc. , and 
 in Eost u. Palm, Lex. s.v. The glosses 
 liifxij/iv [D^] and ipyT)v [EG] are ob- 
 viously suggested by the non-ap- 
 pearance of the word elsewhere in the 
 N.T. or in the LXX. 
 Ka6us Kal 6 Kvpios k.t.X.] even as 
 the Lord also forgave you; comp. ch. 
 ii. 13, where the same divine act is, as 
 it would seem, similarly attributed to 
 Christ : contrast Eph. iv. 32, where it 
 is referred to 6 9e6s iv Xp. KaBiis 
 (oomp. notes on Gal. iii. 6), associated 
 with the Kai of comparison (Klotz, 
 
III. 13, 14. 
 
 197 
 
 Traatv Se tovtoh rrjv ayaTrtjv, o evTiv o'vvSea-fJi.Oi 
 
 14. 8] So Lachtn., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on very clearly 
 preponderating authority, as against either 6s (N'Di) or -rjns (Rec), both of 
 which are, almost certainly, grammatical corrections. 
 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 635) and balanced 
 by the foUowing oiirus Kal, here simply 
 introduces an example (yni/xeifl-ee Tbv 
 Aeffirdrriv, Theod.) : in Bph. I. c, as 
 the imperatival structure suggests, it 
 has more of an argumentative tinge ; 
 see notes in loc. koI vpicts] 
 
 Soil. ;^apifd/ie;'o(, the structure re- 
 maining participial : see Winer, Gr. 
 § 62. 4. The principal Vv., Syr. 
 ('eondonate'), Clarom. ('ita et vos 
 facite'), Goth, ('taujaip'), Mih. 
 ('facite'), and Theod., supply the 
 imperative, which in some MSS. 
 [D'FG; Clarom., Theb., Goth., al., 
 TOLCiTe] is actually expressed : this 
 however certainly seems to be at 
 variance with the structure, and in- 
 terrupts the otherwise easy sequence 
 of clauses ; so rightly De Wette and 
 Meyer. On the double Kai in sen- 
 tences composed of correlative mem- 
 bers, see Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 
 63s, and notes on Eph. v. 23, where 
 the usage is briefly investigated. 
 
 14. iirX iraa-iv Zk TovTois] btU over 
 all these things; not, as in Eph. vi. 
 16 (see notes in loc), with a simple 
 force of accession or superaddition, 
 Syr. ('cum his omnibus'), Mth., but, 
 as the more distinct expression and 
 esp. the foregoing image seem to re- 
 quire, with a semi-local force ('super,' 
 Vulg., 'ufar,' Goth.), the dative with 
 iwl as usual conveying the idea of 
 closer and less separable connexion ; 
 see notes ore Eph. ii. 20. Love to- 
 ward all (comp. notes on Phil. i. 9) 
 was thus to be the garb put on over 
 all the other elements in the spiritual 
 IrSvffis. o] which {element); 
 
 neuter, the antecedent being viewed 
 
 under an abstract and generalized 
 aspect; see Jelf, Gr. % 820. i, Kriiger, 
 Sprachl. § 61. 7. g. o-iv- 
 
 Sc(r|<,os TTJs TcXeiorriTos] the bond of 
 perfectness, Auth. ; not 'complete- 
 ness,' Alf., which would be a more 
 suitable transl. of oKoKkripla; comp. 
 Trench, Synon. § 22. The genitival 
 relationhasbeen somewhat differently 
 explained ; the abstract gen. may be 
 (a) the gen. of quality, in which case 
 TcKeioT. would be little more than an 
 epithet, 'the most perfect bond,' 
 Hamm., Grot., and even Green, Gr. 
 p. 247 ; (6) the gen. of content, ' amor 
 complectiturvirtutumuniversitatem,' 
 Beng., comp. Bull, Exam. Cens. 11, 
 5, — Trjs reXeiir. marking that which 
 the <r<jyS. enclosed within it, De W., 
 Olsh. , comp. Usteri, Lehrb. n. i. 4, 
 p. 242 ; or (c) the gen. objecti, rijs 
 reXeidr. being that which is held 
 together by it, and on which it exer- 
 cises its conjunctive power; irdfTa. 
 ^Keiva a^TT) (Tua(pcyyEL, Theoph. : so 
 Chrys. , Theod., appy. Syr. ('cinc- 
 torium '), and more recently Steig. 
 and Meyer. Of these (c) has clearly 
 the advantage, as not involving 
 either a doubtful gen., or an unsatis- 
 factory if not indemonstrable mean- 
 ing of ffivdeir/ji.os (oomp. Mey.) ; as 
 however it assigns a questionable col- 
 lective force to TeXeiSrrjs, soil. 7-d rriv 
 reXcLoTTiTa ToioOvTa, Chrys., Theoph., 
 it seems more exact to regard the gen. 
 as (d) a gen. subjecti belonging to the 
 general category of the gen. possess. ; 
 love is the bond which belongs to, is 
 the distinctive feature of perfection: 
 contrast Eph. iv. -i, and comp. notes 
 in loc. The omission of the 
 
198 
 
 nPOS K0AA2SAEIS. 
 
 15 '''?* reXeJOTi/Toy. Kac fi 
 /Sei/eTft) ev rati KapSiaii 
 
 16 iv evt (TwixaTL' koL 
 
 elpriv*! Tov XpKTTOv jSpa- 
 
 vfiaiv, eii ijv Koi eKX^dijre 
 
 €v-^api<TTOi ylvea'Oe, 'O \6yoi 
 
 15. XpuTToS] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Bev. 
 preponderating authority : Bee, GeoC. 
 
 Weste. and Hort, on greatly 
 
 article may be due to the verb sub- 
 stantive; see Middleton, Gr. Art. in. 
 3. 2, p. 43 (ed. Rose). 
 
 15. ij clpi]vii ToS Xp.] the peace of 
 Christ; gen. auctoris, or perhaps ra- 
 ther originis (Hartung, Casus, p. 1 7, 
 see notes on eh. i. 23), 'the peace 
 which comes from Him who is our 
 peace (Eph. ii. 14), and who solemnly 
 left His peace to His church' (John 
 xiv. 27); imlvr/v (dprfiviiv) ■^v hXpurrbs 
 &<lyqKev aiSros, Chrys. The peace of 
 Christ must not be restricted merely 
 to b/jjovoM, though this is appy. the 
 more immediate reference in the pre- 
 sent passage, but includes that deep 
 peace and tranquillity which is His 
 blessed gift, and emanates from His 
 atoning death on the Cross; comp. 
 elpT)vri Qeov, Phil. iv. 7, in which the 
 idea is substantially the same, except 
 that perhaps peace is there contem- 
 plated in its antithesis to anxious 
 worldhness (see notes in loc.), while 
 here it is rather opposed to the hard, 
 unloving, and xmquiet spirit that mars 
 the union of the h auiui.. 
 Ppapeu^Tw] raJe , Auth. , Eev. ; sim. Syr . , 
 'ducat,' 'regat;' 'sit gubernatrix,' 
 Beza. The verb /3pa/3eiieu' [|8/3a=7rpo, 
 see notes on Phil. iii. 14] has here re- 
 ceived different explanations ('exnlt- 
 et,'Vulg., Goth.; ' stabUiatur,' Copt. , 
 jEth. ; 'abundet,' Clarom.), all per- 
 haps endeavouring to retain some 
 shade of the original meaning {ayavo- 
 8eTo\)<T&v TE Kai Ppa^eiovaav, Theod., 
 'be umpire,' Lightf.), but obscuring 
 rather than elucidating it. The later 
 and secondary meaning 'adminis- 
 trare,' 'gubernare,' Hesych. Wwiadu 
 
 (Raphel, Annot. Vol. 11. p. 533 sq., 
 and Schweigh. Lex. Polyb. s.v.), 
 seems here the most simple and na- 
 tural; 'letthepeacewhichcomesfrom 
 Christ order all things in your hearts.' 
 For confirmation of this later mean- 
 ing, see also the exx. collected by 
 Krebs (06s. p. 343) and Loesn. {Obs. 
 P- 373)> o'^fi of t'lfi most pertinent 
 of which is Joseph. Antiq. iv. 3. z, 
 wdi/Ta (T§ irpovolq, SioiKelrat Kal .... 
 kotA ^oiXtjffu' ^papevofievop rijv (tt^v ds 
 TiXoi Ipxerat, where the association 
 with SioLKetaBat renders the meaning 
 very distinct. On the use of Kapdla 
 to denote man in his inner relations, 
 see Beck, Seelenl. in. 23, p. 80, 
 comp. p. 107. els ■i\v 
 
 KoV Ik\tj6.] unto which [almost, for 
 unto it (see notes on ch. i. 25, 27)] 
 ye were also called; unto the enjoy- 
 ment and participation of which, the 
 els marking the immediate (not ulti- 
 mate) object of the KoKelv (i Cor. i. 
 9, I Tim. vi. 12), and thus differing 
 but little from ini with dat., by 
 which Chrys. here explains it. The 
 latter perhaps involves more the idea 
 of approximation (Donalds. Gratyl. § 
 172), the former of direction. The 
 ascensive Kal marks the K\^<ris as 
 also having the same object as the 
 Apostle's admonition. 
 iv evl o-dinaTi] in one body, i.e. so 
 as to abide in one body ; not marking 
 the object contemplated, ' ut unum 
 essetis corpus' (comp. Grot.), nor the 
 manner of the calling (Steig., comp. 
 I Cor. vii. 15), but, as the more con- 
 crete term seems to require, simply 
 the result to which it tended; ifKovS- 
 
III. 15, 16. 
 
 199 
 
 Tov Xpicrrov evotKeiTU) ev vfilv nrXowlw^, ev 
 Tracrf) crocpla SioacTKOVTes Koi vovOeTOvvTSi eavrovf 
 
 fi7j(retf 6 Xp. TOi)s TrdvTas ^u ffwfjia 
 jToi^ffai, CBoum. ; oomp. Eph. ii. 16, 
 and Winer, Gr. § 50. 5. 
 Kal €vx^p. v'v.] and be (become) 
 thankful, 'grati,' Vulg., soil, to God 
 (Chrys., Theoph.) as 6 koKwv (see 
 notes on Gal. i. 6), less probably to 
 Christ, as Theod. and expressly Syr. 
 (wbioh however omits tov Xp. in the 
 next clause) and ^th. The meaning 
 'amabiles,' eixdpiTot (Olsh.), though 
 lexically defensible (oomp. Xen. (Econ. 
 V. 10), seems here wholly inappro- 
 priate. 'Eixapurrla was a duty ever 
 foremost in the thoughts of the 
 great Apostle, i Thess. v. 18; ob- 
 serve his frequent use of ei)xa/'"''T«>' 
 (25 times) and eiixap'cWa (12 times), 
 the latter of which only occurs thrice 
 elsewhere (Acts xxiv. 3, Eev. iv. g, 
 vii. 12) in the whole N.T. For a 
 good sermon on the whole of the 
 verse, see Frank, Serm. li. Vol. 11. 
 p. 394 (A.-C. Lib.): and on the duty 
 in general, Barrow, Serm. viii. ix. 
 Vol. I. p. 179 sq. (ed. Oxf.). 
 
 16. 'O XoYos ToS Xp.] The word 
 of Christ, as delivered in the Gospel, 
 XpuxToS being the gen. subjecti, the' 
 word spoken and proclaimed by Him, 
 I Thess. i. 8, iv. 15, 2 Thess. iii. i; 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 30. i. It is per- 
 fectly unnecessary, with Lachm,., to 
 enclose this clause in brackets. The 
 previous more general exhortations 
 to love and peace, which conclude 
 with evx"-P- yiveffde, are suitably ac- 
 companied by a more special one 
 which shows the efficacy of the Gospel 
 in such respects, and more fully ex- 
 pands the last precept; irapaiv^ffas 
 e&X^P^rovs eXvai Kal ttjv 6S6v 8eUvv(TC, 
 Chrys. The readings QeoO (ACS 
 17, jEth. ; Bev. marg.), and Kv- 
 plov (Ni, Memph. ; Bev. marg., Westc. 
 
 and Sort marg.), are obviously cor- 
 rections : \670! ToS XpKTToC occurs 
 only in this place. IvoikeC- 
 
 T<i) (V ufilv irX.] dwell within you 
 richly ; surely not ' among you,' 
 Luth., De W., which would tend to 
 obliterate the force of the compound, 
 nor 'in you as a Church,' Mey., 
 Alf., which reaUy comes to the same 
 thing, — but as usual, ' within you ' 
 (rrjv TOV Xp. didaffKoXiav iv rri \pvxy 
 Tepi.(j>ipei,v &el, Theod.), ' in your 
 hearts,' the outcoming and manifes- 
 tation of which was to be seen in the 
 acts described by the participles. 
 Compare Eom. viii. 11, 2 Cor. vi. 16 
 (the phrase is not used in the cor- 
 responding passage of the LXX.), 
 2 Tim. i. 5, 14, the only other pas- 
 sages in which ivoiKelv iv occurs, 
 and which, though the rb ivoiKoOv is 
 specified as iria-Tis in one case and 
 Uvev/ia in the other, go far to fix 
 the meaning in the present case. 
 This indwelUng was to be irXovirlus, 
 ' richly,' ' not with a scanty foothold, 
 but with a large and liberal occu- 
 pancy, ' Eadie. Iv irdo-ri 
 <ro<|>Coi, is not to be connected with 
 what precedes (Syr., — but appy. not 
 Chrys., as asserted by Mey., Alf.), 
 but with diSdaK. Kal vov0. as in ch. i. 
 28, Beng., al. The construction is 
 then perfectly harmonious ; ivoiKeha 
 has its single adverb TrXoutriws, and is 
 supported and expanded by two co- 
 ordinate participial clauses, each of 
 which has its spiritual manner or 
 element of action (iv irdari cotplq,, iv 
 X'^pi-ri) more exactly defined ; see 
 notes on ch. i. 28. SiSdcrK. 
 Kal vo«6eT. eavT.] teaching and ad- 
 monishing one another: on the mean- 
 ing and force of vovBerelv, see notes 
 ou ch. i. 28. On the possible force 
 
200 
 
 nPOS K0AAS2ABI2. 
 
 ■^aX/uLoU, vfivois, cpSaii irvevfiaTticaii, ev r^ ^(dpiTi 
 17 oioovTei ev Tali KapSiats ufjLwv tm QeS, Ka\ irav o Ti 
 
 16. tf/aXfiois, ii/ti/ois] So Lachm., Tiscli., Treg., Bev., Westc. ani Hort, on 
 greatly preponderating authority: Rec, \pa\fji,ois xal i/j-von Kal. ry x"^?'"] 
 
 So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., on slightly preponderating authority: Bee, Rev., 
 Westc. and Hoj-t, omit rj. The omission of the article may have been due 
 to its having seemed to be superfluous. toTs KapSiais] So Lachm., Tisch., 
 
 Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on very greatly preponderating authority : Rec, 
 rg Kapdlf. Lastly, the above-mentioned critical edd. read tQ Beip instead 
 
 of 7-^ KvpLij) (Rec.) on similar, and very greatly preponderating, authority. 
 
 of iavTois, see notes on ver. 1 3 : here it 
 more probably stands simply for dX- 
 X^Xous ; comp. Winer, Gr. § 22. 5. 
 On the very intelligible participial 
 anaooluthon, see Green, Gr. p. 313, 
 notes on Eph. iii. 18, and Phil. i. 
 30. It seems impossible to accept 
 the view of Bp Lightfoot that the 
 participles, either here, or in simi- 
 lar hortatory passages (Eom. xii. 9 
 sq., i6 sq., Eph. iv. z, 3, al.), are 
 used for imperatives, or that the ab- 
 solute participle can be sometimes 
 indicative, sometimes imperative, 
 sometimes optative. Surely in all 
 cases the participle is, by its very 
 nature, dependent. As Kiihner (Gr. 
 § 493. 4) rightly says, it is, in all 
 such cases, dependent on a foregoing 
 or succeeding verb. The utmost, 
 then, that can be said is, that the 
 so-called absolute participle may so 
 far take its hue from the context and 
 from the syntactic character of the 
 finite verb with which it stands in 
 connexion, as to appear to be used 
 independently, but that this is in 
 appearance only ('nur scheint,' 
 Kiihner), and that it intrinsically 
 remains in dependence on the finite 
 verb : consider the whole section in 
 Kiihner above referred to (§ 493), 
 and the remarks of this grammarian 
 on the participle generally, in his 
 very thorough treatise on this por- 
 tion of the verb ; see also Winer, Gr. 
 
 § 45. 6, and §§ 62 sq., and comp. Her- 
 mann, Viger, No. 227. 
 t|>aX|j.ots K.T.X.] with psalms, hymns, 
 spiritual songs ; instrument by which 
 the Stdaxv B,nd vovdirrins were to be 
 communicated. Mill connects these 
 datives with the following words, but 
 not with propriety, as ^Sovres has 
 already two defining members asso- 
 ciated with it. On the distinction 
 between the terms, and the force of 
 TTvev/xar. (' such as the Holy Spirit 
 inspires '), see notes on the parallel 
 passage, Eph. v. 19, and Trench, 
 St/non. Part II. § 28. Meyer remarks 
 that the singing, c&c., here alluded 
 to, was not necessarily at divine ser- 
 vice, but at the ordinary social meet- 
 ings ; see Clem.-Alex. Peed. 11. 4. 43, 
 Vol. I. p. 194 (ed. Pott.), where this 
 passage is referred to ; comp. Suicer, 
 Thesaur. Vol. 11. p. 1568. On the 
 hymns used by the ancient church in 
 her services, see Bingham, Antiq. 
 XIV. i. I. iv T^ x'^P''''''' "jS'] 
 
 in grace singing; participial clause 
 co-ordinate to the foregoing, specify- 
 ing another form of singing, viz. that 
 of the inward heart ; see Eph. v. 19, 
 and notes in loc. 'Ev tJ X'^P- is obvi- 
 ously parallel to 4v Trd<rri (To^lq,, and 
 serves to define the characteristic 
 element to which the 4S^iv was to be 
 circumscribed (see notes on ch. i. 28) ; 
 it was to be in the element, and with 
 the accompaniment of Divine grace : 
 
III. 17. 
 
 201 
 
 euv TToifjre ev X6y<p r; ev epy(f, Travra ev ovofiaTi K.vpiov 
 lijirov evyapKrrovvTei tw 0ea5 Trarpt 
 
 01 avTov. 
 
 17. i6,v'\ So Lachm. (with marg.), Treg., Westc, and Hort, on slightly 
 preponderating authority: Kec, Tisch., Rev., &v. Kvplov 'Irjirov] So 
 
 Rec, Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hm-t, on apparently preponderating 
 authority: Lachm., and former edd. of this Commentary, 'It/o-oO Xpurrov. 
 This latter reading is well supported, but has probably been derived from 
 Eph. V. 20. The insertion of rai (Rec.) before Tarpl is derived from the 
 
 same passage, and has no sufficient critical support. 
 
 so Chrys. .s, Airb rijs x^P^'^os toO 
 llveifnaTos, (Ecum. , 5ia rrjs irapk tov 
 ayLOuHveOfAaTos dodeifnjs ^tiptros, both 
 of which however are rather clumsy 
 paraphrases of the preposition. The 
 interpretations ' quod se utilitate 
 commendet, ' Beza, ' with becoming 
 thankfulness,' De W., (&c., are un- 
 satisfactory; and xopi^J'Tws, Grot., 
 ' in dexteritate quadam gratiosA,' 
 Daven. -i, untenable; as the singing 
 was not aloud, but in the silence of 
 the heart (Mey.). Iv rats 
 
 KapSCais v)i,<3v] in your hearts; lo- 
 cality of the 4Sei.v. This q.Sei.i/ iv rois 
 KapS. is not an expansion of the pre- 
 ceding clause, defining its proper cha- 
 racteristics or accompaniments (/xij 
 fxbvov T<^ (Trd/xaTi, Theod.), — in which 
 case the clause would be subordinate, 
 — but specifies another kind of sing- 
 ing, viz. that of the inward heart to 
 God, the former being iavrocs : see 
 notes on Eph. v. 19. 
 
 17. irdv <i Ti— ?p70)] An absolute 
 nom. standing out of regimen and 
 placed at the beginning of the sen- 
 tence with a slight emphatic force; 
 see Jelf, Gr. § 477. i. This seems 
 rather more correct than to regard it 
 as an accus. reflected from the fol- 
 lowing -iravTa, as appy. Steiger and 
 De Wette. iravra is 
 
 certainly not adverbial (Storr, comp. 
 Kypke, Obs. Vol. 11. p. 329), nor even 
 
 a resumption of the preceding ttSj', 
 but an aocus. governed by iroiefre, 
 supplied from the preceding ttoi^e; 
 comp. notes on Eph. v. 22. What 
 had been stated individually in Traf 
 6 n K.T.X. is now expressed more fully 
 and collectively by irdvra. It is diffi- 
 cult to understand how the reverse 
 can be the case (Eadie), and the plural 
 'individualizing.' h 6v6- 
 
 |iaTi Kv. 'I.] in the name of the Lord 
 Jesus ; not ' invocato iUius adjuto- 
 rio,' Daven. (/cnXei rdi' Tioc, Chrys.), 
 but, as in Eph. v. 20, ' in the name, 
 in that holy and spiritual element 
 which His name betokens ; ' see notes 
 on Eph. I. c, on Phil. ii. 10, and 
 comp. Barrow, Serm. xxxiii. 6, Vol. 
 II. p. 323, where every possible mean- 
 ing is stated and exhausted ; see also 
 Whiohcote, Disc, xiiii. Vol. 11. p. 
 288 sq. (Aberd. 1751), — one of a 
 course of 3 valuable sermons on this 
 text, and comp. Beveridge, Serm. cix. 
 Vol. V. p. 116 sq. (A.-C. Libr.). 
 €vxap. T^ 0£(y K.T.X.] giving thariks 
 to God the Father through Him ; at- 
 tendant service with which the (ttoi- 
 eiv) irdvTa k.t.\. is to be ever asso- 
 ciated; comp. Eph. V. 20, and see 
 notes on ver. 15, and on Phil. iv. 6 
 add Hofmann, Schriftb. Vol. 11. 2, p. 
 336, who with less probability limits 
 the eiix^p- to thankfulness for ability 
 thus to do all iv ivoji. k.t.\. 
 
202 
 
 nPOS KOAA22AEIS. 
 
 10 AiyvvaiKegiVTOTacrcrecrOeTOCi wives and husbands, chUdren 
 
 10/ fi« i zr f /-vf *°d parents, observe your 
 
 IQ avopa(TlV, ft)? avriKiV ev I\.Vpia), Ut duties. Servants, obey your 
 
 .'J ' * masters and be faithful; mas- 
 
 acOjOey, ayairaTe rag yvvaiKaf Koi t^i^^. be just 
 fit] iriKpaivearde irpoi avrag. 
 
 i8. 6.vSpi<ni>] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Bev., Westc. and Hort, on vastly 
 preponderating authority : Bee. prefixes Idiots, 
 
 1 8 — eh. IV. I. Precepts to the 
 different members of the Christian 
 hoiisehold. i8. At -yuvaiKes] 
 
 This .verse and the eight following 
 (iii. 1 8 — iv. i) contain special pre- 
 cepts, nearly the same as those in 
 Eph. V. 22 — vi. 9. Such a similarity, 
 often extending to words and phrases, 
 is noticeable and not very easy to 
 account for, except on the somewhat 
 obvious supposition that social pre- 
 cepts of this nature, addressed in the 
 first instance to the Christians of 
 C0I0SS8B and Laodioea, were known 
 and felt by the Apostle to be equally 
 necessary and applicable to the church 
 of Ephesus and the Christians of 
 Lydia. A comparison of the two 
 Epistles wiU here be found very in- 
 structive; it seems to lead to the 
 opinion that the shorter Epistle was 
 written first; oomp. notes on Eph. 
 vi. 21. Alford in loe. appears to be 
 of a contrary opinion, but is thus in 
 some degree at issue with his Prole- 
 gomena, p. 41. The exhortations in 
 the Pastoral Epp. are urged under 
 somewhat different aspects. iSiror. 
 TOis dv8p.] submit yourselves to your 
 husbands ; see notes on Eph. v. 22, 
 where the same precept occurs nearly 
 in the same language. <os 
 
 avTJK£v] as it became fitting, as it 
 should be, as was stiU more your 
 duty when you entered upon your 
 Christian profession. The imperf. 
 (not perf., Huther) is not for the 
 present (comp. Thorn. M. s. v., p. 
 751, ed. Bern.), but, as the asso- 
 ciated if Kvpliii stiU more clearly 
 
 shows, has its proper force, and points 
 to conditions that were simultaneous 
 with their entrance into Christianity, 
 but which were still not completely 
 fulfilled; see Winer, Gr. § 40. 3, 
 and Bernhardy, Synt. x. 3, p. 373, 
 add also Herodian, s. v., p. 468 
 (ed. Piers.), where in the similar 
 forms irpoa-TiKe, ^xPVt ^5". ^^^ tense 
 is properly recognised. The present 
 use and meaning of ox^kk is quite 
 classical : the verb only occurs Eph. 
 V. 4, Philem. 8 ; oomp. i Mace. 
 X. 40. On -the frequently recurring 
 iv Kvplif, here to be coimected with 
 avrJKev (comp. ver, 20), not with ^tto- 
 Taaa. (Chrys., Theoph.), see notes ore 
 Eph. iv. 17, vi. 1, Phil. ii. 19, al. 
 
 19. Oi civSpEs K.T.X.] Bepeated in 
 Eph. V. 25, but there enhanced by a 
 comparison of the holy bond between 
 Christ and His Church. The ency- 
 clical letter enters into greater and 
 deeper relations. Lachm. adopts yvv. 
 ijidv with fair, but wholly insufficient, 
 authority : a similar variation is found 
 in Eph. V. 25. [Ill iriKpa£v6<r6€] 
 
 be not embittered; oomp, Eph. iv. 31. 
 The verb occurs in its simple sense 
 in Bev. viii. ir, x. 9, 10; here in its 
 metaphorical sense, as occasionally 
 both in classical (e.g. Plato, Legg. v. 
 p. 731 D, associated with dKpaxo\eiv, 
 [Demosth.] Epist. i. p. 1464, joined 
 with /ivrjaiKaKelv) and post-classical 
 writers (e.g. Exod. xvi. 20, iiriKpavBrt 
 irr' airois, al., comp. Joseph. Antiq. 
 V. 7. I, iTTLKpaLvofieifos trpos auT0i5s). 
 The form is appy. pass, with a 
 middle force ('medial-pass.' Kriiger); 
 
III. I 8— 21. 
 
 203 
 
 Ta TEKva, viraKOvere Toli yovevtriv Kara irdvTa- %q 
 TOVTO yap evapea-TOV earriv ev J^vpiw. Oi xarejOey, /Ui? ai 
 epedi^eTe ra TSKva v/j.S>v, jva f/.ti advixSixriv. 
 
 2o. ei&peaTbv ^ctlv] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., TVestc. and Hort, on 
 very clearly preponderating authority: Eec, ianv eidpeffrov. The above- 
 mentioned edd. all adopt ^v before Kupdjj, on vastly preponderating authority: 
 Bee., tQ Kvplif. 
 
 oomp. Theoor. Idyll, v. 120, and 
 Schol. in loc, iriKpalperaf XvweiTai, 
 and see Kriiger, Sprachl. § 52. 6. i, 
 where a large list of such verbs is 
 given, with examples. On the deri- 
 vation of iriKpds [from a root niK. 
 ' pierced '], see Buttmaun, icarii.§ 56, 
 comp. Donalds. Gratyl. § 266. 
 
 20. ijiraK. TOis 70V. K.T.X.] 6e 06c- 
 dient to your parents in all things ; 
 comp. Eph. vi. i. There the exhorta- 
 tion is accompanied with a special 
 reference to the fifth commandment; 
 here that ref. is implied only, and in- 
 volved in the argumentative clause. 
 The comprehensive t4 Trdcra is ob- 
 viously to be regarded as the general 
 rule; exceptional oases (rofs ye aai- 
 ^EfTL irarpdffLv oi Kara iravra del inra- 
 Koieiv, Theoph.) would be easily 
 recognised; the great Apostle was 
 ever more occupied with the rule 
 than with the exceptions to. it. On 
 the exceptions in the present case, 
 see Bp Taylor, Duct. Dub. iii. 5, Bule 
 1 , and 4 sq. The form viraKoieLv, if 
 not stronger than uttotoo-it. (De W.), 
 has a more inclusive aspect as imply- 
 ing ' dioto obtemperare,' — not merely 
 submission to authority, but obedi- 
 ence to a command; see Tittmann, 
 Synon. i. p. 193. toIto 709 
 
 K.T.X.] for this is well-pleasing in the 
 Lord; obviously not 'to the Lord' 
 (Copt., perhaps following a different 
 reading), if not being a 'nota dativi,' 
 nor even 'coram,' Syr., nor 'apud,' 
 iEth.-PoL, but, as in ver. 18 and else- 
 
 where, 'in Domino,' Vulg., Clarom., 
 Groth., the prep, defining the sphere 
 in which the to eiapearov was espe- 
 cially felt and evinced to be so. 
 
 21. [ill lp69£j€T€] do [not irritate; 
 duty of fathers, expressed on the ne- 
 gative side ; oomp. Eph. vi. 4. The 
 command there is /kt) irapopylt^ere, 
 between which and the present the 
 difference is scarcely appreciable. 
 The former verb perhaps marks pro- 
 vocation to a deeper feeling, the 
 latter (' irritare ') to one more partial 
 and transitory. The derivation of 
 ipeSl^a and ip4da is not perfectly 
 certain, it is commonly referred to 
 IpLS [Lobeck, Pathol, p. 438, Benfey, 
 Wurzellex. Vol. i. p. 102], /iij <t>CKov€i- 
 Koripovs avTois Troieire, Chrys., — but 
 comp. Pott, Etym. Forsch. Vol. 11. 
 p. 162, and Benfey, Wurz. Vol. 11. 
 p. 340. The reading Trapopyl^ere 
 {Lachm.) is very strongly supported, 
 but must almost certainly be consi- 
 dered a conformation to Eph. vi. 4. 
 tva (iTJ aBiin.] 171 order that they may 
 not be disheartened; that they may 
 not have their spirit broken, and sink 
 into apathy and despair, by seeing 
 their parents so harsh and difficult 
 to please; fractus animus, pestis ju- 
 veututis. Bang. ; oomp. Corn, a Lap. 
 in loc. The verb dSv/ielv is an ajr. 
 \e7d/u. in the N. T., but sufficiently 
 common both in the LXX. (i Sam. 
 i. 7, XV. 11), and elsewhere ; see exx. 
 in Wetst., who cites a pertinent pas- 
 sage from iEneas Tact. [ap. Fabric. 
 
204 
 
 nP02 K0AAS2AEI2. 
 
 22 Oi SovXot, inraKOvere Kara -jravra toIs Kara crnpKa 
 Kvpiot^, fxri ev oipOaXfJLoSovXeiaii wj avQpwirapea-Koi, aA\' 
 
 23 ev dirKoTtiTi KopSiai (po^ovfievoi tov l^vpiov. o iav 
 TTOitjre, €K \|/-u^^y epyaXea-Qe wy tw Ki/o/w Koi ovfc av- 
 
 11. Kiipioc] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on very 
 greatly preponderating authority: Bee, Qe6v. 
 
 23. idv] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and ifoj-t, on very greatly 
 preponderating authority : Rec. , Kal irav 8 tl i&v. 
 
 in. 30. 10], Poliorcet. 38, dpy^ di 
 firjB^a fierUvai tCov TUx6vTti)i' avdpth- 
 TTWJ'* ddufidrepoi yap eUv dv. 
 
 21. Oi SoiXoi] Duties of slaves, 
 here less fully detailed, yet closely 
 similar, both in arguments and lan- 
 guage, to the parallel passage in 
 Eph. vi. 5 sq. where see notes. On 
 the general drift and object of these 
 frequently recurring exhortations to 
 slaves, see notes on r Tim. vi. i sq. 
 Tois Kara o-a'pKa Kvp.] your rtiasters 
 according to the flesh ; your bodily 
 earthly masters ; you have another 
 Master in heaven : ' oi Kara aapxa 
 Kip... i&cite distinguuutur a Christo,' 
 Fritz. Rom. Vol. 11. p. 270. There is 
 appy. no consolatory force in the ad- 
 dition (irpdffKmpos i) SovXela, Chrys., 
 Theoph. ; sim. Theod. , CEcum.) ; see 
 notes on Eph. I. c. On the much 
 neglected distinction between Kipios 
 and de<nr6T7is (the latter term point- 
 ing to more unrestricted power, the 
 former to a power owning hmita- 
 tions), see Trench, Synon. § 28, 
 comp. Ammon. Diff. Voc. p. 39 (ed. 
 Valck.). Iv 
 
 o(j>6aXp,oSov\cCais] in acts of eye- 
 service; Kar' 6<l>ffaKp,odov\elav, Eph. 
 vi. 6 ; the primary ref . to the master's 
 eye (Sanders. Sem. vii. 67, ad Pop.) 
 passes into the secondary ref. to 
 false-hearted and hypocritical service 
 generally. For exx. of this use of 
 the plural, comp. James ii. 1, iv 
 ■Tpo<roiTo\ri/i^lai,s, and the long list 
 
 in Gal. v. 20, where see notes and 
 grammatical references. Lachm.reais 
 6tpda\/iodov\dg, with externally pre- 
 ponderating authority, but here, as 
 in verse 2 1 , we probably have in the 
 singular a conformation to Eph. vi. 
 6. It may also be said that even in- 
 dependently of the parallel passage, 
 the singular might, not improbably, 
 have been adopted, as being appy. 
 more in harmony with the iv air\6n]Ti 
 Kapdias in the correlative member 
 which follows. ev dirXor. 
 
 KapSCas] in singleness of heart, in free- 
 dom from all dishonesty, duplicity, 
 and false show of industry ; see Eph. 
 vi. 5, where the meaning is slightly 
 more limited by the preceding clause 
 /i6T4 04/3ou Kal rpo/Mov. On the scrip- 
 tural meaning and application of 
 ' doubleness of heart,' see Beck, 
 Seelenl. iii. 26, p.io6. Here, as Meyer 
 observes, iv awXoT. in the positive 
 clause answers to iv d^daXfioS. in the 
 negative, and the following (po^oiii. 
 TOV 'Kip. to lis av0p<airApi<TKOL. 
 
 23. 8 edv TToi.TJTe] More specific ex- 
 planation and expansion of the pre- 
 ceding positive exhortations; the 
 address being still to slaves. The 
 fulness of this address, as compared 
 with the foregoing, has been thought 
 to be due to the case of Onesimus 
 which would now be fresh in the 
 Apostle's mind. «k »|/«X''is 
 
 IpYaJ.] work from the heart (soul) ; 
 iK fvxns stronger than iv hrSar. 
 
III. 22 24. 
 
 205 
 
 Bpanrotis, elSores on airo K.vplou a.7rd\^iJ,-^e<Td£ rrju 34 
 avTaTr6oo(rtv Ttji K\>}povoiJ.iai. tm Ki/o/cp lLpi(rTu> Sou- 
 
 24. TV Kvpiifi] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 greatly preponderating authority : Rec, tQ yap Kvpiiji. 
 
 Kapd. above, soil. ^{ cfoo/as Kal Sa-r) 
 drjvaiiis, CEoum., and as opposed to 
 any outward constraint, Delitzsch, 
 Psychol, rv. 7, p. 162 : comp. notes on 
 Eph. vi. 7. (OS ra Kvp. 
 
 K.T.X.] as to the Lord and not to men ; 
 dat. of 'interest,' Kriiger, Sprachl. 
 § 48. 4. The ws serves to mark the 
 mode in which, or the aspects under 
 which, the service was to be viewed ; 
 see Beruhardy, Synt. vii. i, p. 333, 
 Fritz. Bom. Vol. 11. p. 360, and notes 
 ore Eph. V. 22, where this interpreta 
 tion of us is more fully investigated, 
 It is objected to by Eadie (on Col. 
 p. 258), but appy. without full reason 
 being grammatically exact and appy, 
 exegeticaUy satisfactory. The nega- 
 tive oiK, as usually in such oppositive 
 members, is absohite and objective; 
 they were to work as workers to the 
 Lord and non-workers to men ; they 
 were not to serve two masters {Mey.) : 
 comp. Winer, Gr. § 55. 1, Green, Gr. 
 p. 121 sq. 
 
 24. slSdres] seeing ye know : causal 
 participle, giving the reason for the 
 preceding command ; comp. eh. iv. i, 
 and the parallel passage, Eph. vi. 8. 
 ttiro JCvpCov] from the Lord, not 
 perfectly identical with wapii, Kvplov, 
 Eph. vi. 8, but with the proper force 
 of the prep., expressive of procedure 
 from, as from the more remote object : 
 see Winer, Gr. § 47. b, and notes on 
 Gal. i. 12. The remark of Eadie 
 that diri marks that the gift ' comes 
 immediately from Christ' is thus 
 wholly mistaken. In irapa (which 
 is more usual in personal relations) 
 the primary idea of simple motion 
 
 from the subject passes into the more 
 usual one of motion from the im- 
 mediate neighbourhood of the ob- 
 ject; see Winer, I.e., Donalds. Crat. 
 § 177. TT|V dvraw. rrjs 
 
 kXt|p.] the recompense of the inherit- 
 ance, i.e. the recompense which is 
 the inheritance, rys Kkripov. being 
 the gen. of identity or apposition, 
 Scheuerl. Synt. § 12. i, p. 82, 83, 
 Winer, Gr. § 59. 8. a. This kX-qpo- 
 voixla is obviously the Kkripov. iv ry 
 |8a(riXei{i toO Xp. Kal OeoO (Eph. V. 5) 
 which was reserved for them here- 
 after; comp. I Pet. i, 4, and on the 
 meaning of the term, Eeuss, Th£ol. 
 Chret. IV. 22, Vol. 11. p. 249. The 
 double compound dcraxdSoiris is an 
 dV. Xeyo/j,. in the N.T., but not un- 
 common elsewhere (Isaiah Ixi. 2, 
 Hosea ix. 7, Polyb. Hist. vi. 5. 3, and 
 with a local ref., iv. 43. 5, al. ): the 
 verb is found several times in the 
 N.T. , and the passive compound dcra- 
 TToSo/ia twice, Luke xiv. 12, Eom. xi. 
 9. Lachm. puts a full stop at avrair., 
 and joins t^s KK-np. with rep Kvp. — a, 
 connection which has found no other 
 advocate. tw Kvp. Xp. 
 
 SovX..] Serve ye the Lord Christ: 
 brief yet comprehensive statement of 
 the duty of SoOXoi regarded in its true 
 light ws T<f Kvptip Kal ovk avffpibirois, 
 ver. 23. So distinctly, imper., Vulg., 
 Copt, (ari-bok), Mth. (Pol. ; mistrans- 
 lated) ; Clarom., Syr., with less pro- 
 bability adopt the indicative. It is 
 urged that the preceding d?r6 Kvplov 
 needs the indicative to explain it, 
 and that the statement justifies the 
 preceding declaration. This is plans- 
 
206 
 
 nP02 KOAA22ABIS. 
 
 25 Xevere- 6 yap aSiKwv KOfAieirai o ^SiKtjo-ev, Kai ovk ecrriv 
 I V . Trpoa'wiroKrifjLy^ia. 01 Kvpioi, to SiKatov Koi rijv 1<t6- 
 
 25. o ydp] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Weste. and Hort, on greatly 
 preponderating authority: Rec, 6 Si. Ko/ueiTai] This form is adopted by 
 
 Rec, Tisch., Treg., Rev., on preponderating authority. The form Ko/xlaeTai 
 is adopted by Lachm. (with marg.), Westc. and Hort, on good authority, but 
 labours under the suspicion of being conformed to Eph. vi. 8, where see notes. 
 
 ible, but not really valid ; for such a 
 statement as elS^cs oVi k.t.X. needs 
 nothing to confirm it. 
 
 25, 6 ■ydp d8iK<3v] for the wrong- 
 doer. It is slightly doubtful whether 
 6 aSiKuv refers to the master (Theod.), 
 to the slaves (Theoph.), or, more com- 
 prehensively, to both (Huther). The 
 prevailing meaning of dSifceij' in the 
 N. T. ('injuriam facere,' Vulg.; ex- 
 cept Eev. xxii. 11, but surely not 
 Philem. 18, as Eadie), and still more 
 the succeeding clause oiK iariv irpoir- 
 oiTT., seem decidedly in favour of the 
 former; so that the verse must be 
 regarded as supplying encourage- 
 ment and consolation to slaves when 
 suffering oppression or injustice at 
 the hands of their masters; ao-re, 
 ipr]<ri, Kciv fj,T] T6xvre dyadwv avTidoaecajf 
 irapk rG)v deffiroTiov, iarl SiKaioKpirTjs 
 OS oiK oT5e Soi'Kov KaX deawoTov 5ta- 
 <pop6,v, dXXd SiKaiav elfftpipei t^p :p7J^ov, 
 Theod. KO|iMtTai] shall re- 
 
 ceive back, as it were a deposit: not 
 so much a brachylogy as a pregnant 
 statement, 'he shall receive back 6 
 ■ijdlKTiii-ev in the form of just retribu- 
 tion,' Winer, Gr. § 66. i. b. The 
 future refers to the day of final retri- 
 bution ; see on Eph. vi. 8. 
 'irpoa-<o'iro\i\\i,^la] respect of persons ; 
 see notes on Gal. ii. 6, and on the 
 Alexandrian insertion of /j, Tisch. 
 ed. 7, Prolegom. p. xlvii. In Eph. 
 vi. 9 a similar clause is appended to 
 the exhortation to Masters, and there 
 Tap' airif (Rom. ii. 11, comp. ix. 14) 
 is added [as EG; Vulg. (not Amiat.), 
 
 here add iraph rip Qe^], in which case 
 the prep, has its prevailing idea of 
 closeness to (comp. notes on dirb ver. 
 24), and marks the ethical presence 
 with the object (Lat. in) of the quality 
 alluded to; eomp.Matth. Gr. §588. b. 
 
 Chapteb IV. I. Oi Kvpioi] The 
 duties of masters are here enunciated 
 only on the positive side; in the 
 parallel passage Eph. vi. 9, the ad- 
 dition dvUvres rijv direiK^v defines also 
 the negative side. Ttjv 
 
 lo-oTi^Ttt] equity. The association of 
 this word with t4 dkaiov and the un- 
 doubted occurrence of it in a similar 
 sense elsewhere (see Philo, de Just. 
 § 4, Vol. II. p. 363, ed. Mang., and 
 esp. § 14, ib. p. 374, where it is termed 
 the fi^'fiTpri dtKaioffivris) seem fully to 
 justify the more derivative meaning 
 adopted above: so Syr., Vulg., .ffith.- 
 Pol., appy. Copt., and distinctly 
 Chrys., and the Greek commentators ; 
 IffOTrira iKd\e(re t^v •jrpofr'QKOvcrav iTri- 
 /iiXeiav, Theod.: so De W., Neand. 
 {Planting, Vol. i. p. 488), Alf., and 
 the majority of modern expositors. 
 Meyer, and after him Eadie (with 
 modifications), contend for the more 
 literal meaning ' equality ' (2 Cor. viii. 
 13, 14, comp. Job xxxvi. 29), i.e. the 
 equality of condition in spiritual mat- 
 ters which Christianity brought with 
 it; comp. Philem. 16: so perhaps 
 Goth, ibnassu [similitudinem ; cogn. 
 with ' even ']. This is ingenious and 
 plausible, but, on account of the asso- 
 ciation with T^Skoio!/, not satisfactory. 
 
III. 25— IV. 2. 
 
 207 
 
 TijTa TO?? SovXoii irape-)(ea-6e, eiSoreg on koi vfieit 
 
 ej^ere }i.vptov iv ovpavw. 
 
 fnSJriS'thf GospSl T^ irpoa-evx^ vpoa-KaprepeiTe, % 
 
 "Walk wisely, speak to , ^ , , ^ , s / 
 
 the point, and be ready yptiyopOVVTet ev aVTrj ev evVapiCTTia, 
 
 to answer each one 1 r 1 r < /x. 1 ' 
 
 that asks a reason. 
 
 I. oipi.vtf\ So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Weste. and Hort, on clearly 
 preponderating authority: Rec, oipavoh, probably a conformation to Eph. 
 vi. 9. 
 
 In such a case we may with some 
 profit refer to the ancient Vv. and 
 Greek commentators. 
 irapl^co-Se] supply on your side; 
 middle, as Acts xix 24, Tit. ii. 7; 
 active elsewhere in the N.T. In this 
 form of the middle voice, called the 
 'dynamic' (Krviger, Sprachl. § 52. 8) 
 or 'intensive' middle, the reference 
 to the powers put forth by the subject 
 is more distinct than in the active, 
 which simply states the action ; comp. 
 Donalds. Or. § 432. i. 664. Such 
 delicate shades of meaning can scarce- 
 ly be expressed in translation, but 
 none the less exist; see esp. Kriiger, 
 I.e., where this verb is particularly 
 noticed, and Kuster, de Verb: Med. § 
 49. The difference appears to have 
 been partially appreciated by Am- 
 monius, in his too narrow distinction, 
 
 didofieifa, irap^xeff&o-t. dk etrl Tuiv Tiji 
 ^vxv^ BidB^ffebiv, oXov irpoSvpilav, di~ 
 voiav [but see Acts xxviii. 2, al.], de 
 Diff. Voc. p. 108 (ed. Valck.). 
 clSoTcs K.T.X.] seeing ye know that 
 ye also; causal participle, as in ch. 
 iii. 24. The ascensive koI hints that 
 masters and slaves stand really in hke 
 conditions of dependence ; uinrep ixet- 
 voi. i/xas, oStu Kal ifieis ix^re Kipiop, 
 Theoph. 
 
 2 — 6. Precepts as to prayer, and 
 as to life and conduct. 2. T'fj 
 
 irpocrsvxfi irpoo-K.] Continue instant 
 in prayer; Bom. xii. 12, Acts i. 14. 
 The verb irpo(TKa.pTepav occurs several 
 
 times in the N.T., and in the ma- 
 jority of cases, as here, with a dat., 
 in which combination it appears to 
 denote an earnest adherence and at- 
 tention whether to a person (Acts 
 viii. 13) or to a thing ; Tpo<rKap. ry 
 •jrpoaevx'O, t^s Trepl nvos iinirovov, 
 Chrys. It is used in the LXX. 
 (Num. xiii. 21) absolutely, and in 
 Polyb. (Hist. i. S5- 4> i- 69- i^- ^^■) 
 both absolutely and with a dat. rei or 
 personcB. In the cognate passage Eph. 
 vi. 18 the subst. irpoaKapTip'q(m is 
 found. YpT]70poiivT6s Iv 
 
 aiT^g] heing watchful in it; modal 
 clause appended to irponKaprepuv : 
 they were not to be duU and heavy 
 in this great duty, but wakeful and 
 active; comp. Eph. vi. 18, i Pet. iv. 
 7. "Eiv is here not instrumental (De 
 W.), but, as usual, denotes tlae sphere 
 in which the wakefulness and alacrity 
 was to be evinced. iv 
 
 tixopio-TCa] with thanksgiving. This 
 clause is not to be connected with 
 the finite verb but with the participle, 
 and, as in Eph. vi. 18 (see notes), 
 specifies the particular accompaniment 
 or concomitant act with which ^ irpod. 
 was to be associated; rour^o'Tt /^erA 
 evxapi-CTtas rairriv ToioDpTes, Theoph. 
 This not uncommon use of h in the 
 N.T. {4v adjunctive) to denote an 
 attendant act, element, or circum- 
 stance, has not received from Winer 
 [Gr. § 48. a) the notice it deserves; 
 see notes on ch. ii. 7, on Eph. v. 26, 
 and Green, Gr. p. 289. On the duty 
 
208 
 
 nPOS K0AA22AEIS. 
 
 3 Trpo(7ev)(6/ievoi afia Ka\ irepi ^/awv, Iva 6 Seo? avoi^ri 
 rjulv dvpav rod \6yov, XaXtjcrai to fxvcrTijpiov tov 
 
 4 XpiffTov, 01 o Koi SeSefiat, Iva (pavepdo 
 
 of eixo-pi-i'Tla. see notes on oh. iii. 15, 
 and on Phil. iv. 6. 
 
 3. Kal irepl ijpiuv] for lis also; 
 soil, for tlie Apostle and Timothy, 
 not for the Apostle alone (Chrys., 
 Theoph.) : the change to the singular 
 in the last clause of the verse (S^Se/tai) 
 would otherwise seem pointless ; see 
 notes on ch. i. 3. On the almost in- 
 terchangeable meanings of irepl and 
 iirip in this and similar formulae, see 
 notes on Phil. i. 7, and Eph, vi. 19. 
 Iva K.T.X.] Subject of the prayer 
 blended with the purpose of making 
 it : use of foainreferenoe to secondary 
 purpose ; see notes on Phil. i. 9, and 
 Eph. i. [7. avoi^xi kt.X.] 
 
 may open to us u, door of the icord; 
 i.e. may remove every obstacle to the 
 preaching of the Gospel. TheSiypais 
 thus not exactly etcrodos Kal Ta^prja-la 
 (Chrys., CEcum.), but involves a figu- 
 rative representation of obstructions 
 and impediments that barred the way 
 to preaching the Gospel, which were 
 removed when the Biipa was opened ; 
 oomp. Acts xiv. 27, i Cor. xvi. 9, 
 2 Cor. ii. 12, Eev. iii. 8, Suicer, 
 Thesaur. Vol. 1. p. 1415, and exx. in 
 Wetst. on I Cor. I. c. 
 XoXrjo-ai] Infin. of purpose and in- 
 tention; see notes on ch. i. 22, where 
 this construction is noticed. On the 
 meaning and derivation of XaXeiv, 
 ' vocem ore emittere,' see notes on 
 Tit. ii. 1, and on the distinction be- 
 tween XaXetc {rb rerayf^^vus irpoip^pe- 
 ffSai rbv \6yov) and \^yei.v (t6 araKTuis 
 eK^^peiv ret inroTrlirTOVTO. ^t'^fj.aTa), — a 
 distinction however which cannot be 
 maintained in the N. T., see Am- 
 monius, Diff. Voc. p. 87 (ed. Valok. ); 
 comp. Trench, Synon. § 76. 
 TO (jni(rTijpi.ov Toii Xp.] the mystery 
 
 oooaoo avTO 
 
 of Christ; not ' the mystery relating 
 to Christ,' gen. objecti (De W., comp. 
 Bph. i. 9), but gen. subjecti, ' the mys- 
 tery of which He is the sum and sub- 
 stance;' see notes on ch. ii. 2, and 
 on Eph. iii. 4. On the meaning of 
 IJAjaTTipiov, see notes on Eph. v. 32, 
 and ReuBS, Theol. Ghret. iv. 9, Vol. 
 II. p. 89. Si' 6 Kal S^ScfJiai.] 
 
 for which I have also been bound; 
 vTkp oB irpeff^eiixj iv aXuirei, Eph. vi. 
 20, 'which I have preached even 
 /i^XP' SeiT/j,£f,' 2 Tim. ii. 9; the as- 
 oensive Kal marking the extreme to 
 which he had proceeded in his evan- 
 gelical labours: he had endured 
 privations and sufferings, and now, 
 beside that, bonds. The perf. S^Se/iai 
 ('I have been and am bound') seems 
 clearly to evince that the Apostle was 
 now in captivity: that this was at 
 Eome, not at Csesarea (Mey. Einl. 
 p. 5), is satisfactorily shown by 
 Alford, Prolegom. p. 2r sq. compared 
 with p. 39. 
 
 4. Xva <{>avep(o<r(i> airo] in order 
 that I may make it manifest. Itis some- 
 what doubtful whether this clause de- 
 pends (a) on SiSeimi., Chrys., Beng., 
 al. ; oomp. Phil. i. 12, 2 Tim. ii. 9; 
 (6) on irpoaivxl'iJ.evoi., DeW., Baumg. - 
 Crus., al. ; (c) on the preceding infi- 
 nitival clause of purpose, \ak7jam to 
 li.v(TTripi.ov, ver. 3, Meyer, al., or more 
 generally on the whole purpose in- 
 volved in the verse, viz. unobstructed, 
 unhindered, speaking. Of these (a) in- 
 volves a paradoxical assertion, which 
 here, without any further explanation 
 or expansion, seems somewhat dirpoa- 
 Smrirov and out of place : (6) impairs 
 the continuity of the sentence, and 
 puts a prayer which thus taken per se 
 would naturally be referred to subjec- 
 
IV. 3-6. 
 
 209 
 
 ft)? Set fie "KaXtjcrai. 'Ei/ <TO(pia vepiiraTeiTe irpbs tovs 5 
 e^ft), Tov Katpov e^ajopa^ofxevoi. 6 Xoyoi vfxwv wdv- 6 
 
 tive capabilities in somewhat awkward 
 parallelism with one which refers to 
 the removal of objective hindrances ; 
 (c) on the contrary keeps up the con- 
 tinuity, and carries out with proper 
 modal additions (us del jue XoMjcrai.) 
 the XaX^o-ai which was the object in- 
 volved in the prayer ; 06% Hiras AiraX- 
 \ayio tQv Sefffiuv, dX\' Situs XaXTJirw 
 t6 iWGTTipiov TOV X/MiTToO, Theoph. 
 <0S Set |Ji{ XaXrjo-ai] as I ought to 
 speak ; so, but with a slightly different 
 reference, Eph. vi. 20. This was not 
 to be /terot iroXX^s t^s ira/i/5»)(r(aj Kal 
 HijSkv {nrocTeCKaiJ.evov (Chrys.) while in 
 prison (which is appy. the sentiment 
 mainly conveyed in Eph. I.e.), nor 
 with any subjective reference to his 
 inward duty (Daven . , Hammond) , but, 
 as the previous avol^ri Sipav seems to 
 suggest, simply and objectively ' as I 
 ought to do it (soil, freely and unre- 
 strainedly) so as best to advance and 
 further the Gospel;' oomp. Meyer ira 
 loe. Eadie unites both the subjective 
 and objective reference : the phrase is 
 confessedly general, still the context 
 seems to point, mainly and princi- 
 pally, if not exclusively, to the latter. 
 In Eph. I.e. on the contrary, though 
 , the language is so very similar, the 
 reference in both members seems to 
 have more of a subjective character, 
 and the construction in consequence 
 to be slightly different. 
 
 5. 'Ev o-o<f>C<;f,] In wisdom; ele- 
 ment and sphere in which they 
 were to walk, Winer, Gr. § 48. a. 
 3. a: firiSenlav avrots irpotpcuriv dtSore 
 /SXojStjs, iravra inrip Trjs airrdv /ai- 
 Xavaa-Oe a-urtiplas, Theod. On the 
 meaning of <ro^la, — not merely 'pru- 
 dence,' but practical Christian wis- 
 dom, — oomp. notes on ch. i. 9, and 
 on Eph. i. 8. irpos tows ?|«] 
 
 E. 
 
 toward them that are without, Toi>s 
 li/qSiTra ireTricrreuKoVos, Theod. ; the 
 regular designation of all who were 
 not Christians, i Cor. v. 12, 13, r 
 ThesB. iv. 12 ; see Eypke, 06s. Vol. 
 II. p. 198, and notes on 1 Tim. iii. 7. 
 The prep, irphs both here and in 
 I Thess. I.e. marks the social rela- 
 tion (Mey.) in which they were to 
 stand with ol ^f w, the proper meaning 
 of ' ethical direction toward ' (Winer, 
 Gr. § 49. h) being still distinctly 
 apparent. For exx. of this use of 
 irpos, see Bernhardy, Syiit. v. 31, p. 
 265, Eost u. Pahn, Lex. a. v. i. 2, 
 Vol. II. p. 1 157, where this prep, is 
 extremely well discussed. 
 tAv Kaipov 6|a7.] buying up for yowr- 
 selves the fitting season: see notes on 
 Eph. V. i5, where this formula is in- 
 vestigated at length. The exhorta- 
 tion in this verse is extremely similar 
 to that in Eph. li-JSi—k^. The 
 reason for the present clause is there 
 specifically noticed, Sn a! ijfiipai 
 TTovripal elnv : here nothing more is 
 stated than a general precept (iv 
 (Tofpig' TrepLiraTeiTe irpbs Toifs ^^w) with 
 an adjoined notice of the mammer in 
 which it was to be carried out : they 
 were to make their own every season 
 for walking in wisdom, and to avail 
 themselves of every opportunity of 
 obeying the command. 
 
 6. 6 Xo^os v|ji<3v] your speech, not 
 only generally, but, as the close of 
 the verse shows, more especially vpbs 
 Tois l^a. iv xdpiTi] with 
 
 grace; soil, la-roi: xapis was to be 
 the element in which, or perhaps 
 the garb with which the X070S was to 
 be invested; xapis was to be the 
 'habitus orationis;' oomp. notes on 
 I Tim. i. 18. £XaTi, 
 
 ijpTU|j..] seasoned with salt; further 
 
210 
 
 nP02 KOAA22AEIS. 
 
 TOTe ev ■^apiTi, aXari ^pTV/nevot, eiSevai ttwj Sei vfxas 
 evi eKaerrtf) airoxplvea-dai. 
 
 T^ » » % f I c M You will leam my state 
 
 a KUT efJLe iraVTa yvapivet V/XIV and all matters here 
 
 T, ,1 ^^S^J.' » from Tychicus and One- 
 
 v^^iKOi o ayairtiTOS aoe\(pot Kai iri- simus. 
 
 specification. Their discourse was 
 not to be profitless and insipid, but, 
 as food is seasoned with salt to make 
 it agreeable to the palate, so was it 
 to have a wholesome point and per- 
 tinency which might commend itself 
 to, and tend to the edification of the 
 hearers ; see Suioer, Thesaur. s. v. 
 Vol. I. p. i8i. An indirect caution 
 and antithetical ref. to \6yos aairpbi 
 ('ne quid putridi subsit,' Beng., 
 oomp. Chrys.) is plausible (oomp. 
 Eph. iv. 29), but not in accordance 
 with TTws Set airoKpiveffdai, which 
 points to \6yos under forms in which 
 a-airpoTris could scarcely have been 
 intruded. The later classical use of 
 a\s, 'sal, sales, salinse,' seems here 
 out of place. On the later form S.\as, 
 see Buttm. Gramm. Vol. i. p. 227. 
 elS^vai] to know, i.e. 'so that you 
 may know;' loosely appended infin. 
 expressive of consequence; oomp. 
 Madvig, Gr. § 143, rem. For exx. of 
 this 'infin. epexegetious,' which is 
 more usually found in clauses ex- 
 pressive of purpose or intention (see 
 notes on ch. i. 22), but is also found 
 in laxer combinations (Acts xv. 10, 
 Heb. V. 5), see Winer, Gr. § 44. i. 
 irios Set K.T.X.] how you ought to re- 
 turn answer to every man; the jrfis 
 embracing all the various forms of 
 answer which the occasion might re- 
 quire. The Apostle further adds, not 
 without significance, evl iKa.<rT<p; each 
 individual, whether putting his ques- 
 tions from malice or ignorance, sin- 
 cerity or insincerity, was separately 
 to receive the appropriate answer to 
 his inquiry ; comp. i Pet. iii. 15. The 
 context, as Mey. observes, seems to 
 
 limit the present reference to the in- 
 tercourse of Christians with non- 
 Christians, though the command has 
 obviously a universal application: 
 Chrys. notices the case of the Apostle 
 at Athens: Meyer adds to this his 
 answers before Felix, Festus, and the 
 Jews at Bome. 
 
 Pebsonal matters 
 (ver. 7—9). 
 7 — 9. Tychicus and Onesimus will 
 bring tidings. 7. Td kot' 
 
 «(U] My condition, my circumstances, 
 'res meas,' Beza: on this formula 
 and the force of xarh in this colloca- 
 tion, see notes on Fhil. i. 12. 
 T«xiKos] not Tux'fos, as JJcc, Lachm., 
 Tisch., Treg., — an'Ao-ioj'o's, mentioned 
 Acts XX. 4, Eph. vi. 21, 2 Tim. iv. 
 12, Tit. iii. 12; see on Eph. I. c. 
 His name has here three titles of 
 esteem and affection, by the two 
 former of which he is styled in Eph. 
 I. e. ; he is an d707n)T6s ade\^&s in ref. 
 to the Christian community, a irta-rbs 
 StaKoros in ref. to his missionary 
 services to St Paul (not in the ministry 
 generally, Alt), and further, with a 
 graceful allusion to the similarity of 
 their duties, a, ffOvSovXos iv Ku/jfy, a 
 co-operator with, and coadjutor of the 
 Apostle in the service of the same 
 Master; compare notes on Eph. vi. 
 21. Iv Kvpiif may be associated 
 
 with all three designations (De W., 
 oomp. Eph. I. c.), or with the last 
 two (Mey.), or with o-ivSovXos {Mth.- 
 Pol.). As the two former have 
 defining epithets, perhaps the last 
 connexion is the most probable. 
 8. 6v ^7r(|i,i|(a] whom I have sent. 
 
IV. 7-9. 
 
 211 
 
 ffToy SiUKOvos Kal avvSovXoi ev K.vpi(p, ov eirefv^a ttoos 8 
 vfia^ ej? avTo tovto, iva yvwre ra "jrepl ^fiaiv koI irapa- 
 KaXecTfi Ta? KapSlui vixHv, trvv OvrjarifAO) tS ina-r^ Koi 9 
 ayairrjT^ aSeXcpS, og evriv e^ vfiHov TravTa vfAiv yvw- 
 piovcrtv Ta wSe. 
 
 8. 7C1ST6 — fi/iwv] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 clearly preponderating external authority, but ■with some probability of 
 a conformation to Eph. yi. 12, with which, in other respects, this verse 
 is identical: Bee, and former edd. of this Commentary, yvif — v/moi'. The 
 decision is somewhat difficult. As, however, it is possible that the singular 
 may have been a correction by a writer who, not having Eph. I. c. in his 
 thoughts, intended to simplify the construction, we fall back on the clearly 
 pronounced external testimony. 
 
 It is of course possible that iTreiitpa 
 may be the epistolary aorist, ' I 
 send;' but, on the whole, the ordi- 
 nary historic sense, in which the 
 action belongs to the past (though 
 whether it does or does not extend 
 down to the present is not specified ; 
 see notes on Phil. i. 29, and on i Cor. 
 XV. 18), is appy. the most probable : 
 see notes on Eph. vi. 22. 
 eIs avTo tovto] for this- very pur- 
 pose, viz. , as it is further defined and 
 expanded in the following clause, 
 ' that ye may know our estate, and 
 that he may comfort you.' On the 
 ref. of avTo tovto to what follows, 
 comp. Eph. yi. 22, Phil. i. 6, and 
 notes in loc. irapaKoX^oT]] 
 
 comfort; in all particulars in which 
 they may need it, — this suggestive 
 English word probably here retaining 
 some trace of its original meaning ; 
 see notes on Eph. vi. 22. It is possi- 
 ble that the reference may be to some 
 particular trials which the Colossian 
 church was then undergoing (comp. 
 Theoph., — who however adopts the 
 other reading); but, in the absence 
 of any definite knowledge of the 
 subject, it seems best to leave the 
 reference perfectly general: see on 
 Eph. I. c. 
 9. <riv 'Ovr]o-£|i,<j>] with Onesimus, 
 
 scil. ?7re/i^o. There seems no reason 
 to doubt (Oalv.) that the Onesimus 
 here mentioned was the runaway 
 slave of Philemon, whose flight from 
 his master (Philem. 15), and subse- 
 quent conversion by the Apostle at 
 Bome, gave rise to the exquisite 
 Epistle to Philemon. Whether he 
 was identical with Onesimus, Bishop 
 of Ephesus, mentioned by Ignatius, 
 Ephes. § i, as affirmed by Ado (ap. 
 Usuard. Martyrol. p. 272, ed. Soil.), 
 is very doubtful ; see Pearson, Vind. 
 Ign. II. 8, p. 463 (A.-C. Lib.). The 
 name was not uncommon, added to 
 which the tradition of the Greek 
 Church (Const. Apost. vn. 46) repre- 
 sents the ' Onesimus Philemonis ' 
 to have been Bishop of Bercea in Ma- 
 cedonia; comp. Winer, RWB. Vol. 
 II. p. 175. There appear to have 
 been two at least of this name in the 
 early martyrologies, the legendary 
 notices of whose lives have been 
 mixed up together; see Acta Sanct. 
 Feb. 16, Vol. n. p. 855 sq. The 
 order of iruxTcp and iyaTr. is reversed 
 by DEFG; Vulg., probably from the 
 order of the words in ver. 7. 
 8s loTiv ii v(jw3v] who is of you, ' who 
 belongs to your city.' This addition 
 seems to have been made, not to 
 give indirect honour and praise to 
 
 P2 
 
212 
 
 nP02 K0AA22AEI2. 
 
 phras salute you. Interchange epistles with the 
 church of Laodicea. Tell Archippus to be diligent. 
 
 the Colossians {tva xal iyKaWoi- 
 TrifuvTai (is toiovtov irpoeviyKovres, 
 Theoph.), but to commend the ti- 
 dings and the joint-bearer of them 
 still more to their attention. The 
 form yvwpioOa-tv {Bee.) is retained by 
 Tisch. and Treg. on what seems pre- 
 ponderant authority: Lachm., Westc. 
 and Hort, yvbipl(rovai.v. On this Attic 
 future, see Winer, Gr. § 13. 
 Td (uSe] the things here, the matters 
 here at Eome, of which to, Kwr' ii^i, 
 ver. 7, would form the principal por- 
 tion. 
 
 Salutations and valediction 
 
 (ver. lo— 18). 
 10 — 17. Salutations and mes- 
 sages. 10. 'ApCo-Tapxos] A 
 native of Thessaloniea (Acts xx. 4), 
 who accompanied St Paul on his 
 third missionary journey: he was 
 seized with the Apostle in the tumult 
 at Ephesus (Acts xix. 29), accom- 
 panied him on his return to Asia 
 (Acts XX. 4), and is again noticed as 
 being with him in the voyage to 
 Eome (Acts xxvii. 2). There he 
 shared the Apostle's captivity, either 
 as an attendant on him (see below) 
 or a fellow-sufferer. According to 
 some traditions of the Greek Church 
 he is said to have been Bishop of 
 Apamea in Phrygia, according to 
 the Roman martyrologies Bishop of 
 Thessaloniea; see Martyrol. Bom. p. 
 343 (Antwerp, 1589), Acta Sanct. 
 Aug. 4, Vol. X. p. 313. In the Menol. 
 Grcec. (April 15, Vol. iii. p. 57) he is 
 said to have been one of the 70 dis- 
 ciples. 6 <rtivai)(|j.dXci>T6s 
 |iOv] my fellow-prisoner. It is cer- 
 tainly singular that in the Ep. to 
 Philemon, written so nearly at the 
 same time as the present Ep., Arist- 
 
 archus should be mentioned not as 
 a (TwaixM^- hut as a avvepybs, while 
 Epaphras, who here indirectly, and 
 still more clearly ch. i. 7, appears in 
 the latter capacity, is there a o-wai- 
 X/ttDidiTos. There seem to be only 
 two probable solutions; either that 
 their positions had become inter- 
 changed by the results of some actual 
 trial, or that their captivity was uoton- 
 tary, and that they took their turns 
 in sharing the Apostle's captivity, 
 and in ministering to him in his 
 bonds. The latter solution, which 
 is that of Fritz. {Bom. Vol. i. p. xxi., 
 followed by Mey.), seems the most 
 natural ; eomp. alsoWieseler,CftrareoJ. 
 p. 417 note. To regard the term as 
 semi-titular, and as referring to a 
 bygone captivity (Steiger, comp. 
 Rom. xvi. 7) , does not seem satisfac- 
 tory. The term is slightly notice- 
 able ('designat hasta superatum et 
 captum,' Daven.), as carrying out 
 the metaphor of the soldier of Christ ; 
 comp. Mey. in loc. 
 MapKos] Almost certainly the same 
 as John Mark the son of Mary (Acts 
 xii. 12), whom St Paul and St Bar- 
 nabas took with them on their first 
 missionary journey, who left them 
 when in Pamphylia, and who was 
 afterwards the cause of the conten- 
 tion between the Apostle and St Bar- 
 nabas (Acts XV. 39); comp. Blunt, 
 Undes, Coinc. Part iv. § 36, where 
 some interesting comments wiU be 
 found on the connexion between 
 John Mark and St Barnabas, and 
 esp. on the history of the latter. 
 There seems no reason for doubting 
 (Grot., Kienlen, Stud. u. Krit. 1843, 
 p. 423 sq.) that he was identical with 
 St Mark the Evangelist ; see Meyer, 
 Einleit. z. Evang. d. Markus, p. 2, 
 
IV. lo, II. 
 
 213 
 
 irepi ov eXojSeTe evToXdti (eav eXdrt irpoi iifxaq Si^aaOe 
 avTovf, Kai ^Irjcrovf 6 Xeyofievoi 'Iovctto?, oi ovres bk ii 
 
 Fritz. Proleg. in Marc. p. 24. Accord- 
 ing to ecclesiastical tradition, St Mark 
 was the first Bishop of Alexandria, 
 and suffered martyrdom there; see 
 Acta Sanct. April 25, Vol. iii. p. 
 344. dve\|fi.6s] cousin, n'lTIB, 
 
 Numb, xxxvi. 1 1 ; aveij/tol' tuv aSeK<j>iSv 
 iraXSes, Ammon. Voe. Diff. p. 54 (ed. 
 Valck.); the proper term for what 
 was sometimes designated as h^iSeK- 
 0OS by later and nou-olassioal writers ; 
 see Lobeck, Phryn. p. 306, where 
 the proper meaning of ave^fnbs is well 
 discussed: see also Pollux, Onomast. 
 III. 2, who adds to the general defi- 
 nition (dSeX^uK iraides), the further 
 specification, dre ix TTaTpaSi\<l>wv 
 eUv, elre ix iiriTpaSi\tj>tiiv, eire ef 
 d5eX0oC, ij dBeXtprjs : St Mark was thus 
 not the ' nephew,' but the ' conso- 
 brinus' (Vulg., Syr., Clarom.), the 
 ' Geschwisterkind ' (whence probably 
 the ' sister's son ' of Auth.) of St 
 Barnabas; see exx. in Wetst. in loc. 
 eXcCpere IvToXds] ye received com- 
 mands; what these were cannot be 
 determined. The conjectural expla- 
 nations, — messages from Barnabas 
 (Chrys.), letters of commendation 
 ('Hterss formatse '), either from the 
 Church of Eome (Est.), or from 
 St Paul (Daven.), dc, — are very nu- 
 merous, but do not any of them, 
 except it be the last, seem to rest on 
 any probable basis. To find in ili.v 
 K.T.X. the ' summa illorum manda- 
 torum,' Beng., and appy. Auth., is 
 grammatically untenable ; the person 
 of the aor. precludes the assumption 
 of its use as an epistolary present. 
 The parenthetical clause however so 
 immediately following the Adhere 
 hiToX&s does certainly seem to suggest 
 that these ivToXal were of a com- 
 
 mendatory nature; and, if so, then it 
 does not seem otherwise than natural 
 to suppose that they emanated from 
 St Paul: comp. Wieseler, Chronol. p. 
 452, note. S^|a<r6c aiirdv] 
 
 receive him, i.e. with hospitality 
 (comp. Matth. x. 14) and friendly 
 feelings (Luke ix. 48, John iv. 45). 
 The historical deduction, founded on 
 the use of the simple Si^aa-Be (con- 
 trast Aotsxxi. 17), that St Mark had 
 not been in the neighbourhood of 
 ColosssB, and would not have been 
 recognised as an assistant of St Paul 
 (Wieseler, Chronol. p. 567), seems 
 not only precarious but improbable. 
 II. 'Ir)o-ois 6 \ey. 'Ioii<rTos] Je- 
 sus, who is called Justus ; comp. Acts 
 i. 2 3, where Joseph Barsabbas is men- 
 tioned as having this iirlKKtiaii. The 
 Christian here named is mentioned 
 only in this place, being, almost cer- 
 tainly, not identical with Justus of 
 Corinth (Acts xviii. 7). Tradition 
 represents him as having been after- 
 wards bishop of Eleutheropolis. His 
 name is not mentioned in the greet- 
 ings sent to Philemon. ot 
 OVT4S eK TrepiT.] who are of the cir- 
 cumcision; participial predication in 
 reference to the three preceding 
 nouns. Tisch., Lachm., and Meyer 
 remove the stop after irepiro/ji^s, and 
 regard this clause as in the uom. 
 ('per anacoluthon'), instead of be- 
 ing in the more intelligible parti- 
 tive gen. Such an anacoluthon is 
 not uncommon (see Jelf, Gr. § 708. 
 i), but need not be supposed here, 
 as the /Mmi. naturally refers the 
 thought to the category last men- 
 tioned; ' these only of that class 
 ("ex circumcisione," Beng.) are my 
 helpers : ' oomp. Philem. 24, where 
 
214 
 
 nP02 K0AA22AEIS. 
 
 TrepiTOfjLtji' ovroi fxovoi crvvepyoi eii rr/v paaikeiav tov 
 
 12 Qeov, o'lTives eyevi^dtiaav fj.oi iraprijopla. a.<riraXeTai 
 
 vfiSi 'Eira^pas 6 e^ vfxwv, SovXoi XpierTOV 'Iijao^, Ttav- 
 
 12. X/jio-ToO 'Iijo-oO] SoLachm., Tiseh., Treg., Rev., Westc. and ifort, on 
 very clearly preponderating authority: Bee. omits 'Irjo-ov. 
 
 though Demas and Luke are grouped 
 together with them as cxivefyyol, the 
 same general order is still preserved. 
 On the formula eXvai 4k with abstract 
 substantives, in which ix retains its 
 primary meaning of origin, comp, 
 notes on Gal. iii. 7, and Fritz. Bom. 
 ii. 8, Vol. I. p. 105. The expression 
 ol 4k irepiT. only occurs elsewhere in 
 Gal. ii. 12, Tit. i. 10. els 
 
 rr\v Pao-iX. to« 0£oB] unto, towards, 
 the kingdom of God ; ' adjuverunt 
 Paulum ad regnum Messianum qui 
 ei, quum homines idoneos redderet 
 qui in illud reguum aliquando recipe- 
 rentur, opitulati sunt,' Fritz. Bom. 
 xiv. 17, Vol. in. p. 201. On the term 
 pa<n\da Qeou, see notes on i Cor. v. 
 20, and ore Gal. v. 21; see also an 
 elaborate paper by Bauer (C. G.) in 
 Comment. Theol. Part 11. p. 107 — 
 172, and Eeuss, Theol. ChrSt. iv. 22, 
 
 Vol. II. p. 244. 0tTlV€S 
 
 i^fv.} men wlwproved; the indefinite 
 SffTis being here used in what has 
 been termed its classific sense, and 
 pointing to the category to which the 
 antecedents belong ; see notes ore Gal. 
 ii. 4, iv. 24. The passive form iye- 
 r/iBriv, condemned by Thom. M. p. i8g 
 (ed. Bern.), and rejected by Phryni- 
 chus, p. 108 (ed. Lobeck), as a Doric 
 inflexion, occurs not uncommonly in 
 the N.T. (noticeably in i Thess.), 
 but, as a careful comparison of pa- 
 rallel passages seems to show, with- 
 out any clearly pronounced passive 
 meaning, or any justly apprecia- 
 ble difference from iycm/JiriP, comp. 
 Buttm. Irreg. Verbs, p. 50. 
 irap'qYopCa] a comfort i an ctTra^ Xeyof/.. 
 
 in the N.T. not found in the LXX., 
 but not uncommon elsewhere, see 
 the exx. in Eypke, Obs. Vol. 11. p. 
 330 ; add also ^sch. Agam. 95, where 
 the term seems to involve a slightly 
 medical allusion. The distinction of 
 Beng. ' quod irapa/ivBla est in moerore 
 domestioo, id Tapijyopla est in forensi 
 periculo' does not seem to be sub- 
 stantiated by lexical usage. Perhaps 
 the only real distinction is that ira- 
 piiyopetv and its derivatives admit of 
 physical and quasi-physical refer- 
 ences which are not found with the 
 more purely ethical Tapa/j.vBeTaOai ; 
 see the good lists of exx. in Bost u. 
 Palm, Lex. a. vv. 
 
 12. 'E7ro<|)pds] See notes on ch. i. 
 7 ; he is specified in the same way as 
 Onesimns, as a native of Colossse. 
 For the probable reason of the addi- 
 tion, see notes on ver. 9. 
 Sov\os Xp. 'Iijo-.] Meyer, and after 
 him Alf., following Griesb. (who how- 
 ever reads only Xpio-ToO), join these 
 words with 6 ^f li/nfiv : this certainly 
 seems unnecessary, the title SouXos 
 Xp. 'Itjit, is of quite sufficient weight 
 and importance to stand alone as a 
 title of honour and distinction ; so 
 appy. Copt., as it inserts the def. art. 
 before SoSXos. In ^th.-Pol. the po- 
 sition of the pronoun of the 3rd pers. 
 [appy. here for the verb subst., Lu- 
 dolph, Or. p. 135] might seem in 
 favour of the other mode of punctua- 
 tion. dYovi^o^evos] 
 striving ; comp, Eom. xv. 30, where 
 the compound avvayav. occurs in a 
 similar context; comp. ch. ii. i, and 
 notes in loc. tva 
 
IV. 12, 13- 
 
 215 
 
 Tore aymi/i^o/nevoi virep vixoiv ev rats ■7rpocreu)(aii, "va 
 (TTad^Te TeXetot kui ireir\ripo(^oprinevoi ev iravTi Qekri- 
 fian Tov Qeov. /mapTvpa) yap avTw on e^ei iroXvv 13 
 
 o-TaOiJTe] So Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and ifort, on authority (internal 
 and external) apparently preponderating : Bee, Lachm.,a,nA former edd. of this 
 Commentary, or^re. ireirXripo^opri/jLhioi] 80 Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., 
 
 Westc. and Sort, on greatly preponderating authority: Rec, ■weirKijpiai/.ivoi.. 
 
 13. TTokiv Tcbvov] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 very greatly preponderating authority : Rec, iifKov vo\iv. 
 
 <rTo9t)T€] that ye may stand fast; 
 purpose of the iyavL^biievos, the more 
 emphatic ayuvi^ofi. iv rats wpoffevx. 
 (not merely TrpoireiixA/ie^'os) not re- 
 quiring any dilution of the usual telio 
 force of ha ; comp. notes on Eph. i. 
 17. The strong word seems chosen 
 to mark distinctly the standing ^/irro 
 and unshaJcen amidst trials and 
 dangers, and is more nearly defined 
 by the following adjectives and their 
 associated semilooal predication ii> 
 wavrl BeX-^fiaTi. T^Xeiot 
 
 Kal 'iten\.r\po^.'\ perfect and fully 
 assured ; secondary predicates of 
 manner (Donalds. Gratyl. § 303), the 
 first referring to their maturity and 
 perfectness (oh. i. 28, Eph. iv. 13), 
 the second to their firm persuasion, 
 and freedom from all doubtfulness 
 or scrupulosity. On the distinction 
 between r^Xeios (perfeotus) and o\6- 
 K\ripos (' integer,' ' omnibus numeris 
 absolutus '), see Trench, Synon. § 22, 
 and between tA. and apnos, notes ore 
 2 Tim. iii. 17. The pass. part. TreirKi)- 
 po(j>. here marks the full conviction 
 and assurance (Hesych. iirurTibOri' 
 iireldBri- iwXripoipop'/ier]) which should 
 ever be the accompaniment of the 
 firm attitude of the Christian : comp. 
 Kom. xiv. 5. The word is almost 
 entirely confined to biblical and eocl. 
 writers : it appears to be an intensive 
 form of irXripda, and in the passive 
 has the ordinary meaning of 'ful- 
 filled ' or ' accomplished ' (Luke i. i : 
 
 see Eev.), and the derivative meaning 
 in which it is used in this passage : 
 see Cremer, Bibl.-Theol. Worterb. 
 s. V. p. 505. iv wovtV 6e\. 
 
 T0« 0eo5] in every [manifestation of 
 the) will of God, i.e. 'in everything 
 that God wills' (Winer, Gr. § 18. 4), 
 which though not grammatically, yet 
 in common usage becomes equivalent 
 to 'in all the will of God,' Auth. 
 It is doubtful whether these words 
 are to be joined with the finite verb 
 (Mey., Alf . ; comp. Eom. \. i, i Cor. 
 XV. i), or with the secondary predi- 
 cates T-Aeiot Kal veir\-ripo<j>. (De W.). 
 The latter is most simple, as defining 
 the sphere in which the reXeioTijs and 
 TT\-qpo(j>opia were to be evinced and 
 find their realization; so Chrys., 
 Theoph. (and perhaps Copt., Goth.), 
 who, even with ireirXripufi^voL (comp. 
 notes on Eph. v. 18), connect ^c iravrl 
 9e\. with the secondary predicates. 
 The Vv. however in such cases can- 
 not be appealed to with confidence, 
 as they commonly preserve the ambi- 
 guous order of the original. 
 
 13. ixaprupu -ydp] Confirmatory 
 {yap) testimony to the earnestness 
 and activity of Epaphras. 
 iroXiiv TTovov] much labour; not such 
 as that which attends a combat 
 (Eadie), but, as the etymological 
 affinities of irbvos [connected with 
 irivoimi, and probably derived from 
 snA-, see Benfey, Wurzellex. Vol. 
 II. p. 360] seem to suggest, such as 
 
216 
 
 nP02 KOAASSAEIZ. 
 
 irovov 
 
 virep vfxwv Koi rwv ev AaoSiKela Kai toiv ev 
 
 14 'lepa-jToXei. acnrd^eTai vfJLa.9 Aoway o larpos o 070- 
 
 15 TrijTOS Kul A>ifji.ai. ' Acnrda-aa-Oe tow ev AaoStKcia aSeX- 
 ^oi? Kai Nu/ji.(bav Kal rhv icar oikov avTWV eKKXtjcriav. 
 
 15. aiTuf] So Tisch., Treg., Rev., on preponderating authority: Lachm., 
 Westc. and Hort, airrfji, — but only on the authority of B, Syr.-Harol., 67^: 
 JBec, and fomler edd. of this Commentary, airoO. It can hardly be doubted 
 that the genitives sing, are corrections of the more difficult reading airrun. 
 
 implies a putting forth all one's 
 strength {intentio) ; comp. Suid. wovos- 
 atrovSii, ^TriToirts. The word only 
 occurs elsewhere in Eev. xvi. 10, 11, 
 xxi. 4. AaoSiKcCa] For a 
 
 brief notice of this city, see notes on 
 ch. ii. I. 'lepairoXei.] An 
 
 important city of Phrygia, about 
 twenty English miles NNW. (surely 
 not 'ostlich,' Winer) of Colossse, 
 celebrated for its mineral springs, 
 and a mephitio cavern called Pluto- 
 nium, which was appy. connected 
 with the worship of the 'Magna Ma- 
 ter;' see Strabo, Geogr. xiii. 4. 14 
 {ed. Kramer), Pliny, Hist. Nat. 11. 93 
 (ed. SUlig). The site of HierapoUs 
 appears to have been close to the 
 modern Pambuk-Kulasi, round which 
 extensive ruins are still to be traced ; 
 see Forbiger, Alt. Qeograph. Vol. 11. 
 p. 348, 349, Arundell, Seven Churches, 
 p. 79 sq., ib. Asia Minor, Vol. 11. 
 p. 200 sq., and a good article in Eitto's 
 Bibl. Cyclop. Vol. i. p. 848. It is 
 curious that this city should appy. 
 have been left unnoticed in Pauly, 
 Beal-Encycl. 
 
 14. AouKcis] The Evangelist, who 
 according to ancient tradition (Ire- 
 nseus, Ht^r. iii. 14. i, 'creditus est 
 referre nobis evangelium') has been 
 identified with the larpbs AyairTp-bs of 
 the same name here mentioned. The 
 tradition that he was a painter (Nice- 
 phor. Hist. Eccl. 11. 13) is late and 
 untrustworthy. There seems no ety- 
 
 mological ground whatever for iden- 
 tifying him further with the Lucius 
 mentioned in Bom. xvi. 21 (Orig.) : 
 Lucas may have been a contraction 
 of Lucanus, or possibly even of Lu- 
 cihus, but not of Lucius. For fur- 
 ther notices see notes on 2 Tim. iv. 
 II. The addition 6 larpbs 6 
 
 dyairriTis may possibly have been 
 intended to distinguish the Evangelist 
 from others of the same name (Chrys.) , 
 but more probably is only a further 
 designation similar to those given to 
 Tychious (ver. 7), Onesimus (ver. 9), 
 Aristarchus, Mark (ver. 10), Jesus 
 (ver. 11), and Epaphras (ver. 12). 
 AT]|jids] Mentioned as one of the 
 Apostle's (Tvvepyol (Philem. 24), but 
 too well remembered as having after- 
 wards deserted him in the hour of 
 need; see notes ore 2 Tim. iv. 10. 
 Whether the omission of a title of 
 honour or affection is accidental, or 
 owing to his having already shown 
 symptoms of the defection of which 
 he was afterwards guilty (Mey.), can- 
 not be determined. The latter does 
 not seem improbable, especially as he 
 here occupies the last place in the 
 enumeration; contrast Philem. 24. 
 
 15. Kai Nii(i.<|>av] and (among 
 them) Nymphas, Kai being here used 
 to add the special to the general (see 
 notes ore Eph. v. 18, vi. 19, Phil. iv. 
 12), and to particularize Nymphas, 
 who appy. belonged to Laodicea and, 
 as the following words seem to show, 
 
IV. 14— 1 6. 
 
 217 
 
 Kai orav avayvaxrO^ irap vfuv fi ein<TTo\'n, voi^craTe i6 
 Iva Koi ev rp A.aoSiKicov e/c/cXijo-ty auayvaxrO^, koi rrjv sk 
 
 was a person of some importance; 
 6pa Youji irfis SeUvvci, /i^^aj' t&v du- 
 dpa, Chrys., — who however adds too 
 restriotively, et ye ij olda airroO iK- 
 K\i;<r/a; comp. notes ore Philem. 2. 
 The repetition of the more generic 
 ry AaodiKiwp 4kk\. in verse i6 would 
 seem to show that the church in the 
 house of Nymphas did not compre- 
 hend all the Christians of Laodieea. 
 The form JSifi^av (Lachm., Buttm.) 
 is not correct; the last syllable is 
 circumflexed, and marks probably 
 that it is a contraction from Nympho- 
 dorus (Pliny, Hist. Nat. vii. 2), as 
 'OXu/iirSs (Eom. xvi. 15) from Olym- 
 piodorus, Zijvas (Tit. iii. 13) from 
 Zenodorus; comp. Fritz. Bom. Vol. 
 
 III. p. 309. Tl\v KttT' otKOV 
 
 avTuv 6kkX.] and the church in their 
 house, soil, that of 'Nymphas and 
 his family,' involved Kara, criveaiv in 
 the preceding substantive; seeEuhner 
 Gr. § 371. 5, and oomp. Winer, Gr. § 
 22. 3. The same expression occurs 
 in Eom. xvi. 5, in reference to Prisea 
 and Aquila, who had also at Bphesus 
 (i Cor. xvi. 19) devoted their house 
 to a similar righteous use; comp. 
 notes on FMlem. -i, and see esp. 
 Neander, Planting, Vol. x. p. 151, 
 note (Bokn). 
 
 16. i) €iri<rTo\r)] the present letter; 
 oomp. Bom. xvi. 22, i Thess. v. 27. 
 Several cursive mss. add mirri, but 
 quite uimecessarily; see Winer, Gr. § 
 J 8. I. iroHieraTe tvo] cause 
 
 that; a formula of later Greek (John 
 xi. 37, comp. Bev. iii. 9), though not 
 without parallel in the iroteu' liTrui 
 (Jelf, Gr. § 666, obs. i) of the classical 
 writers. The proper force of 'iva, 
 though weakened and somewhat ap- 
 proximating to the lax use of rod with 
 the inf. after ttoieic (Acts iii. 12, Josh. 
 
 xxii. 26, al.), is not wholly lost; 
 comp. Winer, Gr. % 44. 8. 
 Tijv «K AaoS.] that from Laodieea, 
 not 'quae soripta est ex Laodieefi,,' 
 Syr., — ^but corrected in Phil., or 
 'quamsoripsi exLaod.,'^th. (comp. 
 Theod.), but, with the usual and 
 proper force of the preposition, ' that 
 out of Laodieea,' 'poei ist us Laud.,' 
 Goth., 'ebolchen Laod.,' Copt., — two 
 prepp. being really involved in the 
 clause ' the Epistle sent to and to he 
 received from or out of Laod.,' but 
 the latter, by a very intelligible and 
 not uncommon attraction, alone ex- 
 pressed; comp. Luke xi. 13, and see 
 Winer, Gr. § 66. 6, Jelf, Gr. § 647. a. 
 The real dif&culty is to determine 
 what letter is here referred to. Setting 
 aside attempts to identify it with the 
 ist Bp. to Tim. (Theoph. ; see subsor. 
 at end in Bee), the ist Ep. of St 
 John (Dr Lightf. ), the Ep. to Phile- 
 mon — an essentially private letter 
 (Wieseler, Ghronol. p. 452), two 
 opinions deserve consideration ; — (a) 
 that it is the Epistle to the Ephe- 
 sians; (b) that it is a lost Epistle. 
 For (a) we have the similarity of con- 
 tents, and the probability, from the 
 absence of greetings and local allu- 
 sions, that the Ep. to the Ephesians 
 was designed for other readers than 
 those to whom it was primarily ad- 
 dressed. Against it, the improbability 
 that the Apostle should know that his 
 Ep. to the Eph. would have reached 
 Laodieea at or near the time of the 
 delivery of his Ep. to the Colossians. 
 For (6) we may urge the probable cir- 
 cumstance that Tyohious might have 
 been the bearer of the two letters to 
 the two neighbouring cities, leaving 
 that to Laodieea first, with orders 
 for the interchange, and then con- 
 
218 
 
 IIP02 K0AA2SAEIS. 
 
 17 AaoSiKelai Iva Koi v/jteii avayvwre. Koi e'lirare 'Ap^- 
 /ttttw BXeVe rrjv SiaKoviav ^V irapeXa^es ev Kvplw iva 
 avT>]v v\>]poU, 
 
 tinuing his journey. Against it there 
 is the a priori improbability that a 
 letter, which from the present direc- 
 tion given by the Apostle stood appy. 
 in some degree of parallelism to that 
 to the Colossians (we have no right 
 to assume that it was ' of a merely 
 temporary or local nature,' Badie; 
 see contra Mey.), should have been 
 lost to the Church of Christ. The 
 fact that the orthodox early Church 
 (oomp. Jones, on the Canon, Part iii. 
 6) does not seem to have ever ac- 
 quiesced in (6) makes the decision 
 very difficult ; as however the Bp. to 
 the Colossians does appear to have 
 been written first,— as the title rots 
 iv "E^icrip (Eph. i. i), if genuine (but 
 see below), does seem to preclude our 
 assigning to that Bpistle a, farther 
 destination than to the churches 
 dependent on Ephesus (see crit. note 
 on Eph. i. i), — as there does seem a 
 trace of another lost Bp. (i Cor. v. 
 9), — as the close neighbourhood of 
 Colossse and Laodicea might pre- 
 pare us to admit a great similarity 
 in contents, and consequently a very 
 partial loss to the Church, — and 
 lastly, as a priori arguments on such 
 subjects are always to be viewed with 
 some suspicion, we incline to the 
 opinion (6), and to the belief that an 
 actual Ep. to the Laodioeans is here 
 alluded to, which, possibly from its 
 close similarity to its sister-Epistle, 
 it has not pleased God to preserve to 
 us : see Meyer, Einl. z. Eph. p. 9 sq., 
 and esp. Bp Lightfoot's detached 
 note (Comment, pp. 340 — 366), where 
 the question is fully and accurately 
 discussed. Of these two writers, 
 the former decides in favour of (6), 
 the latter in favour of (a). It may 
 
 be added in conclusion that the 
 above reasoning rests on the assump- 
 tion that the Epistle to the Ephesians 
 was written to that Church, and that 
 the words iv "&<tii<r(f are genuine. 
 It is right however to add that the 
 newly discovered X rejects them, and 
 that thus an important authority has 
 been added to the side of those who 
 deem that a blank was left for the name 
 of the Church, and that the Epistle 
 was purely encyclical. If this view 
 (which still seems doubtful) be adopt- 
 ed, the balance will probably lean 
 more to [a) ; but as, for the present, 
 we incline slightly to the belief that 
 the words hi 'E^da-ij} did form a part 
 of the original text, so here, in the 
 present question, we incline slightly 
 to (b), and stiU retain the opinion 
 expressed in the earlier part of this 
 note and in former edd. of this com- 
 mentary. The forged Ep. to the 
 Laodiceans deserves no notice, being 
 a mere cento out of St Paul's Epp. ; 
 see Jones, on the Canon, Part iii. 6, 
 and Bp Lightfoot, Commentary, pp. 
 347 — 366. Lastly, the words 
 
 Kal Tiiv Ik AaoS. k.t.X. may be re- 
 garded as dependent on the foregoing 
 TTotijiraTe, but, as the change of order 
 in the clauses (iva k.t.X. standing 
 forward in one clause and standing 
 at the end in the other) seems to 
 suggest, they seem more naturally to 
 depend on an unexpressed ^Xiwere 
 derived from the ttoi V""^ in the pre- 
 ceding clause. 
 
 1 7 . 'Ap\iirir<fl A church-offieer of 
 Colossse,— not of Laodicea (Wieseler, 
 Ghronol. p. 452, comp. Const. Apost. 
 VII. 46) ; possiblyan instructor (Theod. 
 Philem. 2), but more probably a friend 
 (Chiys. , Theoph. i6.) of the household 
 
IV. 
 
 17, li 
 
 219 
 
 \ov. /jLvij/xoveveTe julov t£»' SearfJLwv. fj yapii fied 
 vfioov. 
 
 i8. /xeB' v/xuvj So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on very 
 clearly preponderating authority: Rec. adds d/ii)^. 
 
 of Philemon, — if indeed, as we may 
 suppose from the position of Arch, in 
 the salutation (Philem. 2), not more 
 nearly related (oomp. Olsh.). What 
 the SiuKovla of Archippus was, cannot 
 be determined; that he was a Si6.- 
 Kovos in the literal meaning (oomp. 
 Wordsw.) does not seem improbable. 
 Tradition represents him to have 
 suffered martyrdom at Chonse; see 
 Menolog. Grcsc. Nov. 23, Vol. i. p. 
 ■246. A brief notice will also be 
 found in the Acta Sanctorum, March 
 20, Vol. III. p. 82. On the some- 
 what unusual Ionic form efrare 
 (Matth. X. 27, xxi. 5), see Winer, 
 G''- § 15- BX^ire Ti)v Sia- 
 
 Kovfav] see to, take heed to, the 
 ministry; somewhat too strongly 
 Syr., ' diligens esto in,' though right- 
 ly preserving the construction : for 
 exx. of this meaning of ^Xiireiv see 
 Eisner, Obs. Vol. 11. p. 272, and 
 oomp. notes ore Eph. v. 15. Grot, 
 and others assume here a Hebraistic 
 inversion for/SX^Tre iva ivK-qp., — aneed- 
 less violation of the order of the words 
 and of the more usual meaning of tva ; 
 the object of the ^Xiireiv ttjv SiaKovlav 
 on the part of Archippus is to be Xva 
 aiT7]v irkripdi; comp. 2 John 8, and 
 notesonGai.iv.il. The expression 
 TrXripouv StaKovlav occurs again Acts 
 xii. 25, comp. 2 Tim. iv. 5, ttjc S. o-ov 
 Tr\ripo<p6pri<rov. See exx. in Eaphel, 
 Annot. Vol. 11. p. 538, Kypke, Obs. 
 Vol. II. p. 331, and Wetst. in loc. 
 xapiXaPes iv KupCcji] thou didst re- 
 ceiveintheLord; not 'perDominum,' 
 Daven., nor 'secundum Domini prse- 
 cepta,' Grot., but as always, 'in Do- 
 
 mino,' Vulg., Clarom., al. The Lord 
 was, as it were, the sphere in which 
 he had received his SiaKovla, and out 
 of which it found no place ; see notes 
 on Eph. iv. 17, vi. 1, Phil. ii. 19, and 
 elsewhere. The addition, as Meyer 
 well observes, still more enhances the 
 obligation of Archippus to fulfil a 
 SiaKovla so received. 
 
 18. Valediction. 'O d- 
 
 o-iracr|i,ds k.t.X.] Autograph saluta- 
 tion of the Apostle, to attest the 
 authenticity of the document, 2 Thess. 
 iii. 17 (contrasted with ib. ii. 2), 
 I Cor. xvi. 21 ; see notes on Gal. vi. 
 1 1 . The gen. TlaiXov is in apposition 
 to the personal pronoun involved in 
 ifj.^; see exx. in Jelf, Gr. § 467. 4. 
 (i.vr||iovoi«T^ (1.01) T<3v 86<rn<3v] Ee- 
 MEMBEB MY BONDS : p,ov belonging to 
 the subst., see notes on 1 Thess. i. 
 3. A touching exhortation, speaking 
 vividly to the hearts of his readers, 
 and breathing patience, love, and en- 
 couragement; fieyicTT] dk irapdKKTia-LS 
 airois els Traaav dXi^pLV rb fiV7]p.ove^eLV 
 llaiiXou SeSe/iivov, Theoph., comp. 
 Chrys. The remark of Eadie is just, 
 that as the Apostle used his hand to 
 write he felt his bonds yet more 
 keenly, but he should have remem- 
 bered that it was (in all probability) 
 not the left but the right hand that 
 was bound to the soldier that guarded 
 him. iq X*P''S] Grace, kot 
 
 i^oxv" i see notes on Eph. vi. 24, and 
 on the various meanings of x<i/)is, 
 Waterl. Euchar. i. Vol. iv. p. 666, 
 and the full and clear comments of 
 Gremer, Bihl.-Theol. Worterb. s. v. 
 pp. 576 sqq. 
 
/ 
 
 nPOS *IAHMONA. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THIS exquisite and interesting Epistle, alike a master-piece of 
 persuasive tact and delicacy, and an enduring model of truest 
 Christian courtesy, was written by St Paul to. Philemon closely 
 about the same time as the Epistle to the Church of Oolossse, and 
 not improbably stands first in the group of Epistles written during 
 the first captivity at Rome; comp. Davidson, Introd. Vol. iii. 
 p. 158. It would thus have been written about a.d. 61 or 62 : see 
 Introd. to Colossians. 
 
 It was addressed to Philemon, most probably a member of the 
 Church of Colossse (ver. 2, 10, compared with Col. iv. 17, 9), who 
 had originally been converted to Christianity by the Apostle (ver. 
 19), and who, from the honourable title of 'fellow-labourer' (ver. i; 
 compare ver. 24 and Col. iv. 11) coupled with the notice of 'the 
 Church in his house' (ver. 2) and the general tone of the Epistle, 
 appears to have been a person of distinction, worth, and Christian 
 zeal and earnestness (ver. 7). The bearer of the Epistle was 
 Onesimus, a slave who had run away from, and as it would seem 
 robbed Philemon (ver. i8), but who now after having had the 
 blessing of meeting with St Paul at Rome, and of being converted 
 to Christianity by him (ver. 10), was returning to the master he 
 had wronged, changed and repentant, especially commended to 
 his love and forgiveness (ver. 17), and mentioned, not without 
 honour (Col. iv. 9), to the Church of which both were now alike 
 to be members. His fellow-traveller was Tychicus, the bearer of 
 the Epistles to the Churches of Colossse and Ephesus (Col. iv. 7, 
 Eph. vi. 21), to whose care and good offices he was not improbably 
 further committed, and who might have been instructed by the 
 Apostle to induce the Colossian Christians generally to receive 
 the hitherto unprofitable servant (comp. ver. 11) with forbearance 
 and favour. 
 
224 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The object of the Epistle is very clearly set before us, — an 
 affectionate desire on the part of the Apostle to restore Onesimus 
 to the confidence and love of his master and to ensure for him a 
 reception which he might justly have been considered wholly to 
 have forfeited. The exquisite tact with which his fraudulent 
 conduct towards Philemon is alluded to (ver. i8), — the absence 
 of everything tending to excuse or palliate the misdeed, yet the 
 use of every expression and sentiment calculated to win the fullest 
 measures of Philemon's forgiveness, — has not failed to call forth 
 the reverential admiration of every expositor from the earliest 
 times down to our own day. 
 
 The originality with which the Epistle is thus stamped, and 
 the strong external testimonies of antiquity, which, short as this 
 Epistle is, are by no means wanting (Tertull. adv. Marc. v. 42, 
 Origen, Horn. xix. in Jerem., in Matth. Tract, xxxiii. xxxiv.), 
 may justly be said to place its genuineness and authenticity beyond 
 all doubt. It appears however to have been carped at in early 
 times (see Jerome, Promni. in Philem.), and has recently been con- 
 sidered by a modern critic (Baur, Apoatel Paulus, p. 475 sq.) as of 
 doubtful authorship, but on grounds so utterly untenable, that we 
 may with justice refuse to notice what the very author of the 
 criticism seems to feel (p. 476) is open to the charge of an undue 
 and unreasonable scepticism. 
 
IIPOS ^lAHMONA. 
 
 Apostolic address and 
 ssblutation. 
 
 I I AYA02 dea-fxioi j\pi<TTOV Irjcrov 
 
 TOD nyaTrrjTw kui 
 
 'KpiVTOV 'I>i 
 
 (Tvvepyw fjixuiv Kai ATrcbia tj? 
 
 Opening words (ver. i — 7). 
 I — 3. Address to Philemon and Ms 
 household. i. 8^cr|],Los Xp. 
 
 'It]o-.] a prisoner of Christ Jesus, 
 'whom Christ Jesus and His cause 
 have made a prisoner;' gen. of the 
 author of the captivity; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 30. 2. j3, and notes ore Eph. iii. 
 1 , i Tim. i. 8. Considering the sub- 
 ject of the Epistle, no title could be 
 more appropriate, or more feelingly 
 prepare Philemon for the request 
 which the Apostle is about to make 
 to him. On the titles adopted by St 
 Paul in his salutations, see notes ore 
 Phil. i. I, and esp. on Col. i. 1. 
 KaV Ti.|i.66eos] Associated with the 
 Apostle in the same way as in 2 Cor. 
 i. I, Col. i. I, each having a separate, 
 and not, as in Phil. i. i (comp. 1 and 
 2 Thess. i. i), a common title ; see 
 notes ore Phil. i. 1 , and ore Col. i. 1 . 
 The Apostle perhaps thus associ- 
 ated Timothy with himself in a 
 letter which has the character of a 
 private communication, as Chrys. 
 suggests, iSffre K&Ketvov inrb voW&v 
 d^LOijfievoi^ frnWov et^ai Kal douyai t^v 
 X&piv. $i.Xii|j,ovi] Philemon 
 
 was a member of the Church of Co- 
 losssa (comp. ver. 10 with Col. iv. 9), 
 who owed his conversion to St Paul 
 
 (ver. 19), and who by his zeal in the 
 Christian cause (ver. 5) showed him- 
 self worthy of the consideration and 
 regard which the Apostle evinces for 
 him in this Epistle. There does not 
 seem to be any good ground for the 
 opinion of Wieseler (Chronol. p. 452) 
 that Philemon belonged to Laodicea ; 
 his house at Colossse was shown in 
 the time of Theodoret (Argum. ad 
 Phil.), and tradition [Const. Apost. 
 VII. 46) represents him as having 
 been bishop of that city. In the 
 Menol. GrtBC, Nov. 23, Vol. i. p. 246, 
 he is said to have suffered martyrdom 
 with Arehippus at Chonss. 
 a-uvtpya ■^\imv] our fellow-labourer ; 
 more special designation suggested 
 by the zeal of Philemon for the 
 Gospel. The gen. riiiwv, as the single 
 article hints, belongs both to aw^pyQ 
 and the verbal Ayairtircf. Both titles 
 are dwelt upon by Chrys. and 
 Theoph.; the latter says, d iyaTt]- 
 t6s, Su)ffei 7^v X'^P'-^' ^^ cvvepyds, ou 
 Ka0i(a rbv Sov\ov dWd, ttAXiv dwo- 
 arcXet irpbs ivqpealav rov K-qpiyixaros. 
 ■L. 'AirifiCa] Most probably, as sug- 
 gested by Chrys. and the Greek com- 
 mentators, the wife of Philemon. If 
 this be so, it is not improbable that 
 Arehippus may have been their son ; 
 
226 
 
 nPOS *rAHMONA. 
 
 aSeXcprj Kai 'Apx'TT^ t^ o-wcTTpaTiwri] fjuStv koi rri 
 3 /car oiKOv (rov eKK\i](rla. X''/"'^ ^f^'^" '^'^' "/"?"'' **'"''' 
 Qeov varpos fmwv Koi Kvplov 'Iij(rov XpterTOV. 
 
 E, ^ « /-\ « ' I thank God for thy 
 
 V\apia-TW Tft) few flOV, •JravTOTe progress in faith, and 
 ' ' pray that it mayprove 
 
 beneficial to others: the proofs of thy love to the saints gladden me. 
 
 ■i. d3e\0j] So Lachm., Tiseh., Treg,, Rev,, Westc. a,n6i Hort, on greatly 
 preponderating authority ; Rec, dyavrp-^. 
 
 see notes on Col. iv. 17. The name 
 'Awiftla is commonly regarded as the 
 softened form of the Latin ' Appia ' 
 (Grot.), but has been shown by Bp 
 Lightfoot to be probably a name of 
 native origin, and connected with 
 some Phrygian root [ap. ?] implying 
 endearment: see Introd. p. sJ'Z sq. 
 'Apxfiriro)] Supposed by Wieseler 
 {Ghronol. p. 452), and Bp Lightfoot 
 {Introd. p. 375), but on very slender 
 evidence, to have been of the church 
 of Laodieea ; see notes on Col. iv. 17. 
 He is here distinguished by the ho- 
 nourable title of avvffTpanibnjs with 
 the Apostle; comp. 2 Tim. ii. 3. He 
 is thought by Bp Lightfoot to have 
 been the son of Philemon. On the 
 Alexandrian form (rvvcrp. see Winer, 
 
 ^i"- § 5- 4- ''n '"•''''' o^i*"" 
 
 o-ou eKKX.] the church in thy house ; 
 not merely the household of Phile- 
 mon, oiS^ doi\ovs TrapijKev ivraOOa, 
 Chrys., but, as the expression seems 
 regularly to designate, the assembly 
 of Christians that were accustomed 
 to meet at the house of Philemon, 
 and join with his household in public 
 prayer ; comp. notes ore Col. iv. i ^. 
 and Pearson, Creed, Art. ix. Vol. 1. 
 
 P- 397- 
 
 3. \dpi,s 4|J.tv K.T.X.] Scil. elri, not 
 ^fl-Tu (Koch) ; see notes on Bph. i. 2 : 
 the regular form of salutation in St 
 Paul's Epp. On the spiritual mean- 
 ing of the blended form of address, 
 see notes ore Gal. i. 3, Eph. i. 2. 
 Kal Kupfoi)] Scil. Kal airb Kvplov 
 
 K.T.X., as expressly in Syr., ' et a 
 Dom. nostro:' the Socinian interpre- 
 tation Kal (TTOTpJs) Kvplov seems very 
 improbable; see notes ore Phil. i. i. 
 
 4 — 7. Thanksgiving for Philemon's 
 faith and good works. 4. EJ- 
 
 Xopio-T<3] Usual eucharistio com- 
 mencement in reference to the spi- 
 ritual state of his convert ; see Eom. 
 i. 8, I Cor. i. 4, and notes ore Phil. 
 i. 3, where this mode of address is 
 briefly alluded to. For the meaning 
 and uses of eixaptiTre!;> ('gratias 
 agere ') in earlier and later Greek, 
 see notes ore Col. i. 12. As in Eom. 
 i. 8, I Cor. i. 4, Phil. i. 3, so here 
 the thanks are returned riji Qeif (lou, 
 to Him ' whose he was and whom he 
 served' (Acts xxvii. 23), a particular- 
 izing mode of address called forth 
 from the warm heart of the Apostle 
 by a remembrance of the great mer- 
 cies vouchsafed to him in having 
 thus been blessed in his labours; 
 comp. notes ore Phil. i. 3. 
 iravTOTC K.T.X.] Participial sentence, 
 defining more closely both when the 
 eixapi-arla took place, and the cir- 
 cumstances under which it was offered 
 to God; 'nunquam oro quin tui me- 
 minerim, ' Est. The adverb is here, 
 as also' in Phil. i. 4, Col. i. 3, more 
 naturally joined with the participle 
 (Chrys., Theod.) than with the pre- 
 ceding eixapio-Toi (Syr., jEth.), see 
 notes on Phil. i. 4, where the rea- 
 sons for a connexion with the par- 
 ticiple are more distinct than in the 
 
3—5- 
 
 227 
 
 fjLveiav crov iroiovfievoi eiri twv trpotrevybiiv fiov^ ukovoov 5 
 (Tov Triv dyairt]v /cat tijv vkttiv tjv e^^ef? irpoi rov 
 
 present case. (iveCav 
 
 a-ov] mention of thee, fwela receiv- 
 ing this meaning only when in 
 association with iroieiffSat, Meyer. 
 The formula is not uncommon in 
 classical Greek (comp. Plato, Frotag. 
 p. 317 is, Plusdr. p. ■254 A), and, as 
 Koch remarks, is an expansion of 
 ?X">' iJ,vdav np6i (i Thess. iii. 6, 2 Tim. 
 i. 3), the 'dynamic' middle TroieiaBai 
 not being without its force and signi- 
 ficance; oomp. Kruger,iSprac7iJ. § 52. 
 8. 1 sq., and notes on Col. iv. 1. 
 eirl TOV irpocr. \uiv] in my prayers, 
 not merely ' at the time of making 
 them, ' but, with a tinge of local force, 
 'in orationibus,' Vulg., Syr., Copt., 
 soil, when engaged in offering them ; 
 see Bernhardy, Synt. v. 23. a, p. 246, 
 and notes on Eph. i. 16. 
 
 5. aKovdiv] as I am hearing ; 
 causal participle (Donalds. Gr. § 616), 
 giving the reason for the eixaptanS, 
 or perhaps, more exactly, for the cir- 
 cumstances which especially led to its 
 being offered ; rbv ti2v SXoiv Qebv iirl 
 Tois ffols KaTopSdjfiaffLV avvfivu), Theod. : 
 contrast Rom. i. 8, where eixap. is 
 followed by the more definite 8ti, and 
 the causal sentence is expressed in a 
 passive form. ■^v 8x«is k.t.X.] 
 
 which (faith) thou hast toward the 
 Lord Jesus, and dost evince toward 
 all the saints. There is some diffi- 
 culty in these words. In the first 
 place the reading is doubtful ; Lachm., 
 Treg., Westc. and Hort (but with 
 marg.), with ACD'; 17. 137, read els 
 t6v, but appy. not with preponder- 
 ating authority; the reading pro- 
 bably being a correction suggested by 
 the somewhat unusual irlans irpis rbv 
 Klip., and the apparently anomalous 
 connexion of Trlanv with els iravras 
 Tois aylovs. Adopting the present 
 
 text, we have two explanations; (a) 
 that of Meyer, recently adopted by 
 Winer in the last ed. of his grammar 
 (§ 50- ■2) ) according to which vlans is 
 taken as equiv. to ' fidelity,' and 
 justified by Rom. iii. 3, Gal. v. 22, 
 and Tit. ii. 10, in the first of which 
 passages the meaning occurs in a 
 very different combination, while in 
 the second it is more than doubtful 
 (see notes in loe.), and in the third 
 is associated with an adjective; (6) 
 that of Grot. , al. , derived from Theo- 
 doret and followed by De Wette, 
 Alf., and most commentators, ac- 
 cording to which TTji' ay6,irqv is to be 
 referred by a kind of x'ao'A'os (comp. 
 Jelf, Gr. § 904. 3) to els irdvras rois 
 Aylovs, and tt)i> irlanv alone to roc 
 Kiipiov. Of these (a) does not seem 
 tenable, as it is surely very impro- 
 bable that irfo-Tis, when in combina- 
 tion with dyaTTi, should revert to a 
 meaning so very unusual, and in St 
 Paul's Epp. so feebly supported, as 
 that of 'fidelitas.' The second (6), 
 grammatically considered, is admis- 
 sible (see Winer, Sr. I. c), but the 
 distinctive ^v Ix^ts (see Mey.), and 
 the repetition of the art. with both 
 substt., make it very unplausible. In 
 this difficulty a third view seems to 
 deserve consideration, according to 
 which irians irpis tov KiSp. = 'a faith 
 directed towards the Lord ' (comp. 
 I Thess. i. 8), in a purely spiritual 
 reference, while tt/otis els Tra^'ras k.t.X. 
 = ' a faith evinced towards (erga) the 
 Saints,' with a more practical refer- 
 ence, scil. as shown in contributions 
 to their necessities, — a meaning sug- 
 gested to the reader by the preceding 
 ayaiTTiv, and conveyed by the studied 
 prepositional interchange. Theprepp. 
 then substantially preserve the dis- 
 
 Q 2 
 
228 
 
 nP02 $IAHMONA. 
 
 6 K.vpiov 'Itja-ovv Koi ei'y iravra? Touf dyiovf, oirw? >i 
 KOivoavla r^i iricrTem aov evepyiji jevrjrai ev eiriyvoDcrei 
 
 7 TravTO? dyadov rov ev fifxlv ei? XpKTTOV. X^P"" 
 
 6. Tifui>] So Lachm., Treg. (with marg.), TFesfc. and HorJ (with marg.), 
 on slightly preponderating authority, the i/uv heing perhaps a conformation 
 to ver. 3: Bee, Tisch., Rev. (with marg.), i/uv. At the close of the 
 verse 'Itjo-oCk is added to Xpia-rov by Bee. and former edd. of this Commentary, 
 but on authority critically inferior to that for the omission. 
 
 7. xapa"] So -EJx., Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Weste. and Hort, with 
 
 tinetion alluded to in notes on Eph. 
 iv. 12, Tit. i. r ; tt/jJs refers to a 
 more remote, di to a more immediate 
 application of the specified action, 
 whether erga (i Pet. iv. 9), contra 
 (Bom. viii. 7), or with a more neutral 
 ref. (2 Cor. x. i. Col. iii. 9); comp. 
 Winer, Gr. % 49. a. This seems also 
 confirmed by etymology, for while eh 
 {hi) incorporates the idea of locality, 
 of having reached the place (comp. 
 Donalds. Cratyl. § 170), ?rp6s pri- 
 marily presents little more than the 
 idea of simple motion forwards : see 
 Donalds, ib. % 169, 171. On the 
 
 various constructions of irlcrns and 
 iruTTeiu), see Eeuss, Theol. Chret. iv. 
 13, Vol. II. p. 129. 
 
 6. Sirws] in order that; dependent 
 on eixapiiTTw, or perhaps more imme- 
 diately on fiveiav aov TToioOfievos iTl 
 Tuv 'irpo<revx<i'v, and conveying the 
 object of the prayer (2 Thess. i. 12) 
 slightly blended with the subject of 
 it; eUxo/iai, ijyiialv, Xva ^ KoivoiHa rij! 
 iriffTciis <TOV hepyris yivqrai,, Chrys., 
 and more distinctly Theod., 5^o/tat 
 KoX &VTL^oK(2 Tov KOLVov eOepy^TTjv re- 
 Xelav (Toi SoCcai ttjv KTTJcnp tuv ayaSSv. 
 To give the particle an exclusive 
 reference to result or consequence 
 (Estius ; compare Tittmann, Synon. 
 II, pp. 55, 58), or to refer it to ver. 5 
 as giving the ' tendency ' of ffv (x^is 
 (Beng., Meyer), is very unsatisfac- 
 tory. It is singular that two such 
 good commentators as Beng. and 
 
 Mey. should agree in an interpreta- 
 tion so utterly pointless ; see Winer, 
 §53.6. On the essential meaning of 
 OTTws, and its distinction from tva, 
 see notes on 2 Thess. i. 12. 
 ■tj KoivuvCa Tijs irCo-reus <ro«] the com- 
 munication of thy faith, soil. ' parti- 
 cipation in thy faith enjoyed by 
 others,' Trlffreois being not a gen. 
 subjeeti, but a gen. objecti; comp. 
 Phil. ii. r, iii. 10, al. The clause 
 thus serves to clear up, and indeed 
 indirectly confirm the interpretation 
 of the preceding 7ri(TTt,v...ds ttcictos 
 rois aylovs. The meaning assigned to 
 Kocviiivla by CEcum., i) Koivi] Trlffris, ^ 
 Koi.voirot.fts, ' fides tua, quam com- 
 munem nobiscum habes ' (Beng.), or 
 the more concrete, ' beneficentia ex 
 fide profeeta' (Estius, comp. Beza), 
 does not seem accordant with the use 
 of Koivwvla in St Paul's Epp. when 
 associated with a gen. rei; comp. 
 notes on Phil, ii. i . mp- 
 
 ■yijs 7^VT|Tai] may become operative, 
 scil. ' reddens fructus in operibus,' 
 Syr.; yiverai hepyi}S orav ^pya ^tj, 
 Chrys. The translation ' evidens,' 
 Vulg., Augiens. , ' manifesta,' Clarom., 
 appears to have arisen from a read- 
 ing ivapyfjs, not found in any Mss. 
 €v €iriYV«o"€t iravTos d^.] in the full 
 knowledge of every good thing; sphere 
 and element in which the kvipyaa, 
 was to be displayed (see notes on 
 Phil. i. 9), serving also indirectly to 
 define the ' modus operandi;' ttuj U 
 
6, 7- 
 
 229 
 
 yap iroWtiv eari^oi' Kal •jrapaKXtjO'iv eVJ rfi ayairti 
 aov, oTi Ta (TTrXayy^va twv dylwv dvaTreiravrai Sia 
 a-ov, aS€X<j)i. 
 
 very greatly preponderating authority ; Steph. 3, X'^pi-"- This latter reading 
 might seem to have some little claim on our attention on the principle 
 ' proolivi lectioni priBStat ardua ;' such a principle, however, would not here 
 justify the reversal of a reading supported by so complete a preponderance of 
 uncial authority. toWtjv Iitxov] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Bev., Westc. 
 
 and Hort, on greatly preponderating authority : B,eo.,,^x'>P-^ TroW-qv. 
 
 ^ffrat ivepryiis ; bia. tqD iiriyvaivai ae 
 Kal irpaTTav ttoi' dvaSiii', (Ecum., who 
 however unnecessarily introduces koI 
 irpdrreiv, and incorrectly limits it to 
 Philemon, whereas the previous inter- 
 pretation of Koiviovla shows that the 
 reference is to others, to the Koaiiavol 
 Trjs 7r£(7Te<us (Tov ; see Meyer in loc. 
 On the meaning of iirlyvoKyi.s, ' ao- 
 curata cognitio,' see notes ore Eph. i. 
 17, but observe that this force of firl 
 cannot always be conveyed in trans- 
 lation; oomp. notes on 2 Tim. ii. 25. 
 Tou Iv i]H.iv] which is ire us ; with spe- 
 cial reference to them as Christians, 
 and as recipients of the good gifts 
 and graces of God. The reading is 
 slightly doubtful. Westc. and Hort 
 place ToO in brackets. Lachm. , Treg. 
 omit the article with AG; 17, but not 
 on preponderating authority. 
 eis XpioTov] unto Christ, not merely 
 'in reference to Him,' but with a 
 closer adherence to the primary 
 force of the preposition, ' for the 
 work of,' 'to the honour of,' 'erga 
 Christum,' Erasm. (compare notes 
 on ver. 5) ; ' bonum nobis exhibi- 
 tum redundare debet in Christum,' 
 Beng. The words obviously belong 
 to evepyrjs yivrfrai., not to what im- 
 mediately precedes (Syr., Vulg., and 
 more distinctly ^th. [Piatt], eh 
 being assumed = &), still less to the 
 more remote rris irlcrTeiis <rov, as 
 Grot. 
 
 7. 7ap] It is somewhat doubtful 
 whether this gives the subjective rea- 
 son for the eixapta-rla, ver. 4 (Jerome, 
 Mey.), or for the prayer immediately 
 preceding (De W., Alf.). The latter 
 is perhaps the most natural, as the 
 subject of thanksgiving seems insen- 
 sibly to have passed into that of 
 prayer. The Apostle prays that the 
 Koiviavla K.T.\. may prove ivepy^s, for 
 ('sane rebus ita comparatis,' Klotz) 
 it is at present so great as to cause 
 him great joy; (ri fwi Tva^p-qalav 
 ISdiKas iK Twv els iripovs yevonhav, 
 Chrys. 8<rxov] I had; 
 
 scil. when I first heard of your 
 Aydirriv and vlanv, ver. 5. The iro\- 
 \-/lv, as Mey. observes, appears to 
 belong to both substantives ; comp. 
 Jelf, Gr. § 391. obs. 
 IttI t^ dydirj^ <rou] in thy love; 
 literally, 'based on thy love,' iirl with 
 the dat. marking as usual the basis 
 and foundation upon which the ^apa 
 and Trap6,K\. rested ; see notes ore Phil. 
 i. 3. oTi Tci <nr\a-yxvo] 6c- 
 
 caiise the hearts; explanation of the 
 preceding iirl ry 07. (Tov ; ttoXX^s yap 
 ^p,Trlfji,ir\afi,ai 9via)SLas Hn vaproSaTTjv 
 Toisaylois Bepairelav Trpoir<p4peiS, Theod. 
 On the semi-Hebraistic airXdyxva 
 (ver. 12, 20, 2 Cor. vi. 12, al.), see 
 notes on Phil. i. 8 : there however the 
 idea of 'affection' {TvevfuiTiKri </nXo- 
 iTTopyla, Theod. ire loc.) is more pre- 
 dominant ; here the term only serves 
 
230 
 
 nP02 *IAHMONA. 
 
 8A^ -vx^'^v '^ 9ft I beseech tnee tor une- 
 
 4A10 iroWriV ev AoJO-TO) Trappijcriav simus thy once unpro- 
 „ , , \ ) « B V » fltable servant, who left 
 
 Q eVWI' eirnaa'CreiV aoi to avmOV, Ota rnv thee a servant, to return 
 ■'A. a brother; receive him 
 
 as myself. If he be a defaulter I will repay thee. 
 
 to specify the imaginary seat of it ; 
 oomp. Moke on i John iii. 17. As 
 crirXdyxva is a somewhat comprehen- 
 sive term (' proprie sunt viscera ilia 
 nobiliora vooata, cor, palmones, hepar 
 et lien,' Tittmann, Synon. i. p. 68), 
 the ethical applications may obvious- 
 ly be somewhat' varied; see Suioer, 
 Tliesawi s.v. Vol. 11. p. 997. 
 dvair^iroDToi] have been refreshed; 
 so ver. 20, I Cor. xvi. 18, 2 Cor. vii. 
 13. On the distinction between &pd- 
 vavcis, 'pause or temporary cessa- 
 tion from labour' (Matth. xii. 43, 
 Luke xi. 24, Eev. xiv. 11), and 
 dvens, 'relaxation of what had been 
 tightly strained' (Acts xxiv. 23, 2 
 Cor. ii. 13, vii. 5, viii. 13), see Trench, 
 Synon. § 41. dSeXiJie] Not 
 
 'Bruder in Wahrheit,' De W., Koch, 
 but as jEth. , ' frater mi,' — in tones of 
 earnest affection ; ' hoc infinepositum 
 multum habetTrdffos ; conf. Virg. JEn. 
 VI. 836,' Scip. Gent. ap. Poll Syn. 
 
 Bequest as to Onesimus (ver. 8 — 20). 
 8 — 20. Request to receive Onesimus 
 iach and to forgive him. 
 8. Aio] On which account, 'as I 
 have so much joy and consolation in 
 thee ; ' not in connexion with ira^p. 
 iXf^v {Smifievos, ifyqai, Sajipuv ois Bep- 
 fiQs TeiritTTevKdn, Theod.), as Syr. and 
 the Greek commentators, but in ref. 
 to the preceding xapi'" Iitxoi'...M t§ 
 ayiwji <rov, expressing more fully the 
 motive of the Sid ttjv Ay. /iaWoi' irapaK, 
 which follows ; so De W., Meyer, Alf. 
 On St Paul's use of 3i.6, see notes on 
 Gal. iv. 3 1 , and for its distinction from 
 ody and dpa, see Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. 
 p. 173, but on the two latter particles 
 contrast the more correct remarks of 
 Donalds. Gr. § 604, Gratyl. § 192. 
 
 irapp. Sx™"] though I have boldness; 
 concessive use of the simple participle, 
 see Donalds. Or. § 621, and compare 
 the remarks of Winer on the transla- 
 tion of participles, Gr. § 46. 12. On 
 the meaning of 7ra4/5., — here in its 
 derivative sense of i^ovcrla, aSua, 
 Hesych., see notes on i Tim. iii. 13. 
 This Tafifnicrla was iv Xp. ; He was 
 the element in which (not BA t^v 
 irlffTW tV c's Xp., Ghrys.) it was en- 
 tertained, and out of which it did 
 not exist : comp. notes on Eph. iv. 1 . 
 «iriTti<r(r. o-oi t6 dvrKov] to enjoin 
 upon thee that which is fitting; ex- 
 planatory infin. following a phrase 
 expressive of ability or capability; 
 pomp. Madvig, Synt. § 145. 1. The 
 verb iirnada., though not uncommon 
 elsewhere in the N.T., is only found ~ 
 here in St Paul's Bpp. : iicirayri, on 
 the contrary, occurs seven times in 
 his Epp., but not elsewhere in the 
 N.T. The neuter rd h.vT\Kov (oomp. 
 Eph. V. 4, Col. iii. 18), — not exactly 
 tJ eis xpdav /iou iXBbv, Theoph., but 
 more generically ' quod deoet faeere,' 
 Copt., 'ilia quae justa sunt,' Syr., r6 
 Trpiirov, Suid. , — marks the category 
 (Mey.) to which the action of re- 
 ceiving back Onesimus is to be re- 
 ferred. 
 
 9. Sid Tf[v dy.] on account of love, 
 for love's sake, Auth.; partially ex- 
 planatory of the preceding Sia, but 
 with a more general reference, the 
 aydiri) here not being ■qv KayCu ?x" 
 Tpos ire, Theoph., or ■^v a707rS t^ (re 
 Kal ayairuimi, Oiloum. , nor even 'cha- 
 ritas tua in Christum,' Just., but, as 
 the omission of all defining genitives 
 seems to suggest, 'Christian love' in 
 its widest sense (De W., Mey.). The 
 article gives the abstract noun its 
 
8— lo. 
 
 231 
 
 ayaTrtjv fjiaWov -TrapaKoXw. Toiovroi wv, wj IlavXo? 
 irpecr^vTrii, vvi/] Se Kal Se(riui,tof Xohttov Ititrov, irapa- lO 
 
 9. XpurroO 'ItjcroC] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on 
 clearly preponderating authority : Bee, and former edd. of this Commentary, 
 'I)j(rou XpioTou. 
 
 most generic meaning and application , 
 Middleton, Gr. Art. v. 5. i, p. 89 sq. 
 TOioiJTos wv] Being such an one, As 
 I am such an one, scil. who would 
 rather beseech for love's sake, than 
 avail myself of my ira^^rja-lav iwi.Ta<r- 
 o-eiv. There is some little difficulty 
 as to the connexion of this participial 
 clause. It is usually regarded as pre- 
 paratory to the lis UavXos which fol- 
 lows, and is conceived to explain it. 
 Meyer however, whose note on this 
 clause is very convincing, shows that 
 the undefined toioOtos, though often 
 more nearly explained and defined by 
 olos and ware, is not, and scarcely can 
 be associated with us, which naturally 
 presumes a more defined antecedent, 
 and always 'aptius conjungitur cum 
 sequentibus,' Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. 
 p. 757. This being appy. the case, 
 ToioCros ui> must be referred to ver. 8, 
 while us IlaCXos irpetT^irris, enhanced 
 by vvvl Si Kai di<riuos X.'I., belongs to 
 the second TrapaKaXd (so Lachm., De 
 W., and recently, Buttm., Alt), and 
 states the capacity in which the Apo- 
 stle makes his affectionate request. 
 Lachm., it may be observed, encloses 
 oJs IlaOXos in a parenthesis; Buttm. 
 isolates it by commas (so Chrys. , airb 
 
 TT]S TTOtOTTJTOS 'TOO TTpOffibTTOX)' O/Trb TTIS 
 
 TjXiKias ■ a7r6 tov dcKaLor^pov ttclvtujv 
 Sn Kal diirpiios k.t.X., comp. ^th. 
 [Piatt], Beng.) ; neither of these modes 
 of punctuation seems satisfactory: 
 IlaCXos seems more naturally to stand 
 in immediate union with vpea^irris 
 (Syr., Copt.) and to hint at the title 
 he might have assumed, 'Paul the 
 Apostle.' irpeo-pvTtis] 
 
 the aged, Auth., Eev. ; ' senex,' Vulg., 
 Syr., and appy. all Vv. It is quite 
 unnecessary to attempt to explain 
 away the simple meaning of this 
 word ('non setatem sed offioium hie 
 significat,.' Calv., 'ein Senior der 
 Christenheit,' Koch), or to evade the 
 almost obvious reference to age ; see 
 Wolf in loc. Even if with Wieseler 
 we assum? as late a year as a.d. 39 
 for the martyrdom of Stephen, and 
 consider the veavlas as at that time 
 no more than 25 or 26 years old, the 
 Apostle would now (probably a.d. 62) 
 be nearly 50, which age, broken as 
 he was with labour, suffering, and 
 anxieties (2 Cor. xi. 23 — 28), might 
 well entitle him to the appellation of 
 Trpea-^iTifs. If we follow the tradition 
 in Pseud. -Chrys. Orat. de Petr. et 
 Paulo ^Vol. VIII. spur. p. 10, ed. 
 Bened.), that St Paul's age was 68 
 when he suffered martyrdom, there 
 will remain no doubt as to the ap- 
 propriateness of the term. All at- 
 tempts however to fix the year of St 
 Paul's birth seem to be quite hope- 
 less; comp. Winer, BWB. Vol. 11. 
 p. 217. Bp Lightfoot appears to re- 
 gard Trpea-^irris as another form, in 
 the common dialect, of wpeo-^eiiTris, 
 and adopts the translation ' ambassa- 
 dor:' comp. Rev. marg. But in- 
 dependently of the evidence for such 
 an interchange, in the time of St 
 Paul, being weak, the sentiment of 
 the passage ('old, and a prisoner 
 too ') seems in favour of the ordinary 
 view. S£(rp.i,os X. 'I.] Not 
 
 Sioi XpuTTOv SeSe/iivos, Chrys., but 
 as in ver. i , ' one whom Christ and 
 
232 
 
 nP02 *IAHMONA. 
 
 II 
 
 Ka\w <re irepi rov ifnov tskvov, ov eyevvtjaa ev ron 
 Secr/JLOii, 'Ov^a-ifiov, tov ttots croi a)(^p>ierTov, vvvt oe (toi 
 
 10. BeanoU] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Bev., Westc. and Hort, on very 
 clearly preponderating authority : Bee. adds nov. 
 
 His cause have bound;' see notes 
 above, and Winer, Gr. § 30. 2. |8. 
 
 10. Toil 6|i.ov T6KV01)] my own child; 
 with tender reference to Onesimus as 
 having been converted by the Apo- 
 stle, and owing to him his Christian 
 existence; oomp. i Cor. iv. 14, Gal. 
 iv. 19, and Loesn. Ohs. p. 431, who 
 cites the partially parallel iiaWov 
 airov tj oix V'^tov twv yov^iav ye- 
 yivvTjKa, Philo, Cai. § 8, Vol. 11. p. 
 554 (ed. Mang.). The pronoun ifiov 
 seems here to be emphatic. Lachm, 
 (ed. min. ) and Mey. introduce iyii be- 
 fore iyippria-a, but though on internal 
 grounds not Improbable, the ex- 
 ternal authority [A; 37; Syr.-Harcl.; 
 Chrys. (i)] does not seem nearly 
 suflScient to warrant the insertion. 
 Iv Tois 8e<r|i,ots] With feeling allusion 
 to the circumstances in which he was 
 when Onesimus was converted, and 
 in which he now is while urging his 
 req^uest; TrdXiv ol deff/iol SwuttiitocoI 
 [exorandi vim habent], Chrys. 
 'Oviio-t|j.ov] Accusative, owing to an 
 inverted form of attraction ; the re- 
 lative which would more usually 
 (comp. Winer, Gr. § 24. i) have 
 been in the same gender and case as 
 TiKvov here follows the common regi- 
 men, passing into the gender of the 
 latter substantive, and attracting it 
 into its own case; see Winer, Gr. § 
 24. 2, § 66. 5. 2. 
 
 n. TOV iroTe o-oi oixp.] who was 
 once unprofitable, unserviceable, to 
 thee, soil, who once did not answer 
 to his name ((i^/ijo-i/xoc), but by run- 
 ning away, and apparently also by 
 theft (Chrys. on ver. 18), proved 
 himself axpricrros. The word axpv""''. 
 
 is an air. \ey6fi. in the N.T. (eifxpijtr- 
 Tos occurring here, 2 Tim. ii. 21, iv. 
 ri), and ia defined by Tittmann 
 {Synon, 11. p. 12) as 'quo uti recte 
 non possumus,' 'qui nullum usum 
 prsebeat.' The distinction between 
 this and dxpelos (Matth. xxv. 30, 
 Luke xvii. 10) is not very palpable : 
 perhaps the latter rather implies o5 
 o6k fori xpfi<*i '9"° ^°^ OP'^S est' 
 (Tittm.), ' one who could be dispensed 
 with,'andhence,inferentiaUy,' worth- 
 less,' axpeioii..,Kal d''<^<pe\h, Xen. 
 Mem. I. 2. 54, while axpw''" liS'S less 
 of a negative sense (01) xp'^"''!""'), 8'i"i 
 more approximates to that ofirovijpos. 
 It would seem however that axpcws 
 belongs mainly to earlier, dxpi)""''"^ 
 mainly to later Greek. The 
 
 play on the name, 'Qvriai.iwv, tov irori 
 dXP^iTTov (not noticed by the Greek 
 commentators), has been recognised 
 by the majority of modern expositors ; 
 see Winer, Gr. § 68. 2. Any further 
 allusion, xPW'os as compared with 
 Xpia-Tiaros (Koch), seems improbable 
 and even untenable, comp. Mey. 
 in loc. <ro\ Kal e|ioi evxp.] 
 
 profitable, serviceable, to thee and to 
 me. The eixpwrta here alluded to 
 has obviously a higher reference than 
 to mere earthly service (comp. Chrys.): 
 Philemon had now gained in his ser- 
 vant a brother in the faith, St Paul 
 one who owed him his hope of future 
 salvation and was a living proof that 
 he had not run in vain. In the deli- 
 cately added ifiol ('Philemonem civi- 
 liter prseponit sibi,' Beng.) it is some- 
 what coarse (Theoph., Corn, a Lap.) 
 to find a hint that Philemon was to 
 send him back to the Apostle. On 
 
II— 13. 
 
 233 
 
 Kal i/xoi evyptiaTOv, ov dveirefx\^d (rot, avTOv, tovt la 
 ecTTii' Ta e/wa cr7r\a'yj^i/a, bv eym e^ov\6fJi>]v irpbi 13 
 
 11. troi 3''] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Bev., Westc. and Hort, on very 
 clearly preponderating authority : Eec. omits o-oi. Independently of the 
 external authority which preponderates against the omission, it does not 
 seem improbable that croi should have been omitted on account of the two 
 preceding repetitions in the same verse. 
 
 12. liMv] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Horf, with differ- 
 ing modes of punctuation, but on preponderating authority : Bee. and former 
 edd. of this Commentary prefix <rii Si. After the word o-TrXavx"", Bee., on 
 clearly insufficient authority, adds Trpoo-XajSoC. 
 
 the various beauties and persuasive 
 touches in this exquisite Ep., see 
 Marshall (Nath.), Serm. xiii. Vol. 11. 
 p. 327 sq. (Lond. 1731). The inser- 
 tion of Kai before <rol (Tisch., Westc. 
 and .ffori in marg.) has fair ex- 
 ternal support, but inferior to that 
 of the text, and may easily have 
 been suggested by the xal which 
 follows. 
 
 12. ov dvi'ire[i.^a <roi\ whom I 
 have sent back to thee, or even ' I 
 send back, <&c.,' — epistolary aor. ; 
 present to the writer, but aoristio 
 to the receiver of the letter ; comp. 
 iireiMpa, Phil. ii. 28, and see exx. in 
 Winer, Gr. § 40. 5. 2. airov] 
 
 (verily) him, ' in his own person ' 
 Eev. ; the pronoun being thus em- 
 phatic (oomp. John ix. 21, 23), and 
 designed to enhance the fact that 
 the Apostle had sent the very man 
 back, whom, on spiritual, as well as 
 other grounds, he might naturally 
 wish to keep with him. The mode 
 of punctuation adopted in the text 
 seems the most easy and natural. 
 To place a full stop at croi (Bp Lightf.) 
 leaves the structure re&Uy dependent 
 on a distant verse (ver. 17), and so 
 unnecessarily dislocated. 
 xd end tnrXaTxvo] mine own heart, 
 'meinos brusts,' Goth. : ovtu y&p ai- 
 Tov (l7a7rft; KoX iv Trj ^/UXV vepupipa, 
 Theoph. The meaning adopted by 
 
 Syr. (' sicut natum meum'), Mth. 
 (Piatt ; Pol. paraphrases), Theod. (^k 
 Tuv ifiuf yeyivi^Tjrai (nrKdyx^t^J^),^^^^^, 
 al., though perfectly defensible (see 
 Suicer, Thesaur. s. v., and the perti- 
 nent exx. in Wetst.), does not here 
 seem requisite or indeed satisfactory, 
 as the paternal relation of St Paul to 
 Onesimus was a purely spiritual one, 
 and as a-irXdyx'"'- appears nearly al- 
 ways in St Paul to involve some 
 special idea of affection, or, as here, 
 the seat of it : Meyer (after Grot.) 
 quotes 'meum corculum,' Plant. 
 Cos. IV. 4. 14 (16): comp. notes on 
 ver. 7. 
 
 13. h/a ipovK6|j.T]v] I (ore my part) 
 was purposing ; contrast i]ffi\7](ra, ver. 
 14, where not only the general dis- 
 tinction between the verbs poiXo/mi 
 and diXw (see notes on i Cor. vii. 7, 
 and on i Tim. v. 14), but, as Meyer 
 remarks, between the tenses, is accu- 
 rately preserved. The imperf. points 
 to the time when the design was 
 formed, and to its non-fulfilment ; 
 comp. Bernhardy, Synt. i. 3, p. 373. 
 The use of riixdM" Eom. ix. 3, 
 though analogous, is not exactly 
 similar (Alf.), as this belongs to a 
 use of the imperf. where there is a 
 more distinct reference to a sup- 
 pressed conditional clause ; see notes 
 on Gal. iv. 20. irpos e|AaDTov] 
 
 with myself ; the proper and primary 
 
234 
 
 nPOS *IAHMONA. 
 
 efiavTOV Kare-)(eiv, 'iva vnep crov fnoi otaKOvri ev rois 
 
 14 SearfjLOii Tov evayyeXlov x'^/''^ ^^ '^^^ ""^^ yvwfitji ovSeu 
 
 ijQeXricra iroiija-ai, "va fjivi wj Kara avayKijv to ayadov 
 
 13. /iot Smkovv] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on very 
 greatly preponderating authority : Bee, Smkovi imi. 
 
 meaning of the preposition ( ' motion 
 toward, ' comp. Donalds. Cratyl. §169) 
 is often obscured in connexion with 
 persons; see notes on Gal. i. 18, and 
 Winer, Gr. § 49. h. vnlp o-ov] 
 
 in thy stead ; not simply for AvtI, but 
 with a tinge of the more usual mean- 
 ing of the prep. ' in thy place, and 
 thereby to thy benefit ; ' oomp. Eurip. 
 Alcest. 700, KaTdavGLv ...virkp aov, and 
 see Green, Gr. p. 301. This more 
 derivative meaning of the prep, 
 cannot be denied (see Winer, Or. § 
 47. 1), but has been unduly pressed in 
 doctrinal passages; comp. notes on 
 Gal. iii. 13, and Usteri, Lehrb. 11. 1. 
 1, p. 115. The exquisite turn that 
 St Paul gives to his intention of 
 retaining Onesimus, viz. as a re- 
 presentative of his master {ha rijs 
 (rrjs iwi. SMKOvlai iKrlffji to XP^O'i 
 Theod.), should not be left unno- 
 ticed. SiaKovfj] might minister; 
 present, idiomatically referring to the 
 time when the i^ovKS/irii' took place, 
 and giving a vividness to the past by 
 representing it as present; see Winer, 
 Gr. § 41. b. I, and Klotz, Devar. 
 Vol. II. p. 618: compare also Gal. i. 
 16, but observe that the use of the 
 pres. is somewhat different ; there an 
 event is referred to which was still 
 going on, here the SiaKovia, in its 
 more direct sense, had now ceased, 
 as Onesimus was all but on his way 
 home to his master. rots 
 Sc<r|j.ots ToO eiayy.] the bonds of 
 the Gospel ; scil. ' bonds which the 
 Gospel brought with it, — which 
 preaching the Gospel entailed on 
 me,' euoyv. -being a gen. of the 
 
 origin; see Winer, Gr. § 30. 2. |3. 
 note, Hartung, Casus, p. 17. Again 
 a delicate allusion to his sufferings 
 (comp. ver. 9, 10), and to a state 
 which could not fail to touch the 
 heart of Philemon. 
 
 14. xcopls Se K.T.V] but without 
 thy own approval; comp. Eaphel, 
 Annot. Vol. 11. p. 642, who very ap- 
 propriately cites Polyb. Hist. p. 983 
 (xv. 18. 4), xwpis T^s'Pw/ittW yviijf/.Tjs', 
 oomp. ib. III. 21. 7, x'^P^^ '■^s airov 
 yvibfi,t)s, ib. XXI. 8. 7, avev ttjs iKcivov 
 yvdi/ais (cited in Schweigh. iex. PoZi/6. 
 p. 89). Tfili/iri occurs only 9 times 
 in the N. T., and in slightly varied 
 senses; comp. Acts xx. 3, where it 
 has appy. the stronger sense of ' de- 
 sign,' and I Cor. i.io,vii. 25, 40,2 Cor. 
 viii. 10, where it has its more regular 
 meaning of ' sententia ' or ' judicium ; ' 
 oomp. Meyer on i Cor. i. 10, and 
 Kypke, 06s. Vol. 11. p. 205. 
 i{6€XT)a-a] I was willing; aor., see 
 notes on ver. 13. <os Kard dv.] 
 
 as by necessity, ' compulsion- wise;' 
 the kotA. marking primarily the 
 norma or manner according to which 
 the action was done (see notes on 
 Tit. iii. 5), and thence the prevailing 
 principle to which it was to be re- 
 ferred (comp. exx. in Winer, Gr. 
 § 49. d), while lis marks the aspect 
 which the action would have worn; 
 see Bernhardy, Synt. vii. 2, p. 333, 
 and notes on Eph. v. 22, Gol. iii. 23. 
 Chrys., and more fully Theoph. and 
 CEcum., rightly call attention to the 
 insertion of this particle. to 
 
 d^aSov (row] thy good, thy beneficence, 
 ' the good emanating from or per- 
 
14 — 1 6. 
 
 235 
 
 crov rj, aWa Kara eKovcriou. Taj^a yap Sia tovto 15 
 e-^oopivQui irpoi wpav, tva alaviov avTOV aireyrj^, ovxeri 16 
 
 formed by thee,' — thegen. perhaps be- 
 ingnotso muoha mere possessive gen. 
 as a gen. auctoris or causce efficientis ; 
 see notes on Col, i. 23. The exact 
 meaning of the words is slightly 
 doubtful; there seems certainly no 
 reference to any manumission of 
 Onesimus (Estius, Koch; contrast 
 Maurice, Unity of N.T. p. 659), nor 
 merely to the kind reception which 
 Philemon was to give him on his 
 arrival (Hofmann, Schriftb. Vol. 11. 
 p. 387), nor even to the ' benefioium ' 
 which in this particular instance 
 Philemon was to confer on the Apo- 
 stle, but, as the more abstract term 
 suggests, • benefioentia ' (Gal v.), whe- 
 ther as shown in this or in other 
 good and merciful acts generally. If 
 the Apostle had retained Onesimus, 
 Philemon would have doubtless con- 
 sented, but the TO &ya6av in the par- 
 ticular case would have worn the 
 appearance (ws) of a kind of con- 
 straint; St Paul however wished, as 
 in this so in all other matters, that 
 Philemon's to ayaSbv should be ij,i) 
 cis Kard avdyK'qv dX\d Kara. eKoi- 
 non. On the doubtful dis- 
 
 tinction in the N. T. between to 
 d.yae6v and to KoKbv, see notes on 
 Gal, vi. 10. Kard 
 
 6Koiio-iov] voluntarily, aw. \ty6/j„ in 
 the N.T. The more usual periphra- 
 sis for the adverb appears in earlier 
 Greek to have been Ka.$' hovalav, 
 Thupyd. VIII. 27, or^f eKoucrias, Soph. 
 Track. 727, by an ellipse of yvtifM], 
 In the present case there may have 
 been originally an ellipse of Tpb-n-ov 
 (Porphyr. de Abs. i. 9, Ka8' exoi- 
 ffioy Tpbirof) ; the expression however 
 would soon become purely adverbial : 
 comp. Lobeck, Phryn. p. 4. 
 
 15. rdxa ynp] For perhaps ; rea- 
 
 son that influenced the Apostle in 
 sending back Onesimus. The inser- 
 tion of Tax'^ (Bom. v. 7 ; more usually 
 Tax' ^'' in classical Greek) gives a 
 softening and suasive turn to the 
 admission of his convert's fault, no 
 less sound in principle ('occulta sunt 
 judicia Dei, et temerarium est quasi 
 de oerto pronuuciare quod dubium 
 est,' Hieron.) than judicious in its 
 present use; koXus t6 T&xa, tva d^ 
 6 5ea-n-6Tits, Ghrys. ; rdxa yhp Kard, 
 edav oiKovofdav l(puyev, Theoph. Both 
 Chrys. and Jerome admirably illus- 
 trate from the history of Joseph the 
 great feature of the providential go- 
 vernment of God which these verses 
 disclose, — 'prEestabilius ducere Deum 
 de malis bona faoere, quam mala 
 nulla facere,' Justin, in toe, see 
 August. Enchir. § 3. [xi.]. Vol. vi. p, 
 349 (ed. Ben. 1837). Ix«p'<r9ti] 
 
 he departed; he does not say '^(pvyev, 
 lest he should rouse up any angry 
 remembrances in the mind of Phile- 
 mon; so Chrys., (Eoum., and Theoph., 
 all of whom have admirably illus- 
 trated the delicate touches of this 
 beautiful Epistle. For exx. of this 
 sort of ' medial-passive,' in which 
 however not only the passive form, 
 but passive meaning, is clearly to be 
 recognised, see Kriiger, Sprachl. § 52. 
 6. 1. irpAs upav] for 
 
 a season; 2 Cor. vii. 8, Gal. ii. 5, 
 and more definitely, i Thess. ii. 17, 
 vpbs Kaipbv apas. In the present ex- 
 pression the duration of the time is 
 not expressly stated, but it may be 
 inferred from the antithesis not 
 to have been very long ; comp. 
 Theoph. in loc. The proper force of 
 the prep. (' motion towards ') may 
 be easily recognised in the formula, 
 especially when compared with its 
 
236 
 
 nPOS $IAHMONA. 
 
 ft)y SovXov, a\X' inrep SovXov, aSeXcpbv ayairijTov, naXt- 
 erra ifJiol, irocrcp Se /laWov crol /cat ev a-apKi Kai ev 
 
 more appreciable force in such ex- 
 pressions as TT/jos e<rir4pav (Luke xxiv. 
 29), al. ; oomp. Bernhardy, Synt. v. 
 31, p. 564. The derivation of apa 
 is uncertain; it has been connected 
 with the Sansor. vara, ' time ' (Ben- 
 fey, Wurzellex. Vol. 11. p. 328), but 
 perhaps more probably with the 
 Zend jare, Germ. ' Jahr,' as appy. 
 evinced in the Lat. ' homo ; ' comp. 
 Pott, Etym. Forsch. Vol. i. p. 8, 
 123. altiviov avTov dir.] 
 
 thou mightest possess him eternally, 
 everlastingly, not merely ' perpetu- 
 um,' Beza (Grot, compares Hor. 
 Epist. I. 10. 41, ' serviet seternum'), 
 nor with any allusion to ' perpetua 
 mancipia,'Bxod. xxi. 6, Deut. xv. 17 
 (Gent.), but 'in asternum,' Clarom., 
 ' aiveinana,' Goth. ; oi5k iv rif iraphvTi. 
 Iiovav Kaip(f dWci, Kai h ry niWovTi,, 
 tva diairavTos ^XV^ a{/Tdi', oiK^Ti Sovkov 
 SWoi Tiiuihrepov 5oi\ov, Ghrys. : so per- 
 tinently Estius, ' servitus omnis hac 
 vita finitur, at fraternitas Christiana 
 manet in eternum.' The tertiary pre- 
 dicate of time aliivtov is not an adverb 
 (Mey.), but, as its position suggests, 
 an adverbial adjective involving a 
 proleptical statement of the result ; 
 comp. Donalds. Gr. § 489 sq., and 
 see exx. in Winer, Gr. § 54. i. 
 On the compound air^x^tv, in which, 
 as in diroXa/M^di'av k.t.X., the prep, 
 does not appy. so much mark the 
 ' receiving back,' as the ' having for 
 one's own ' (' tibi haberes,' Bengel, 
 'hinweghaben,' Mey.), see notes on 
 Phil. iv. 18, comp. Winer, Verb. 
 Comp. IV. p. 8. 
 
 16. ovK^Ti us SotiXov] Changed 
 spiritual relation in which he now 
 would stand to his master ; wtrre Kai 
 T(fS xpo*'V KGK^pSaKas Kai rfj iroi6rt}Tt, 
 Chrys. The particle ws almost con- 
 
 vincingly shows that there is here no 
 reference to manumission (oomp. on 
 ver. 14): though actually a slave, he 
 is not to be regarded in the- ordinary 
 aspect of one (see ver. 14) ; the inward 
 relation was changed, the outward 
 remained the same ; comp. Hofmann, 
 Schriftb. Vol. 11. i, p. 318. 
 virip SovXov] above a slave, more than 
 a slave, ' ufar skalk,' Goth., ' prsBStan- 
 tior quam,' Syr.; sim. M^. (Piatt), 
 Copt., 'plus servo,' Vulg. (Amit.); 
 not 'pro servo,' Vulg. (ed.), Clarom., 
 which obscures the force of the pre- 
 position; comp. Matth, x. 24, 37, 
 Acts xxvi. 13, in which the force of 
 i-wkp is somewhat similar, and see 
 Winer, Gr. § 49 e. The expression 
 is explained by the following &SeK(jiov 
 6.yair-rf6v, Onesimus was not now to 
 be regarded in the light of a slave, 
 but in a higher light, viz. as a beloved 
 brother; ivrl SoiXov dxp'^o'Tov, Xfnjcr- 
 Top aSe\^bv aireOvrjtpas, CEcum. 
 luiXioTTa l(j.o£] especially, above all 
 otliers, to me ; not directly dependent 
 on dyair-qTOv (Mey.), but, as iyairrp-o^ 
 in the N.T. has to a great degree lost 
 its verbal character, a dative ' of in- 
 terest' (Kriiger, Sprachl. § 48. 4) 
 attached to aSeX0. d7a7r. ; comp. Syr., 
 Beng. He stood in the light of an 
 dde\<p. ayair. to St Paul, whom he 
 had now left, but much more so to 
 Philemon, who had formerly known 
 him as a mere doSXov, but who was 
 now to have him as his own in a 
 higher and closer relation than be- 
 fore. On the meaning and derivation 
 of fiaXicrra, comp. notes on i Tim. iv. 
 10. KaV Iv o-apK£ k.t.X.] 
 
 both in the flesh and in the Lord ; the 
 two spheres in which Onesimus was 
 to be 7rda(f) iiaWov an dde\06$ dyairrt' 
 TO! to Philemon than to the Apostle, 
 
17, i8. 
 
 237 
 
 K.vpi(p. el ovv ixe ej^eiy koivwvov, irpoaXa^ov avTov tbs 17 
 €fie. el Si Ti ^SiKtjarev ae ^ ocfyelXei, tovto ejmot eWoya. 18 
 
 17. lie] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and ifort, on vastly pre- 
 ponderating authority: Rec, ifi.4. 
 
 18. ^\X67a] So Lachm,., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on greatly 
 preponderating authority : Rec, iWoyei. 
 
 — 'in the flesh,' i.e. in earthly and 
 personal relations (Mey.), as having 
 intercourse and communication with 
 him on a footing necessarily some- 
 what altered; — ' in the Lord,' as en- 
 joying spiritual communion with him 
 which he had never enjoyed before, 
 — nearly koX h rals aufianKois vittj- 
 peo'icus Kal iv Tais irvev/iaTiKois, Schol., 
 except that the idea must not be 
 limited to vwripe<ria ; eomp. Theod., 
 CEcum. To define iv a-apd more nearly 
 (comp. Grot., al.) is neither here ne- 
 cessary, nor in harmony with the 
 general use of the word in St Paul's 
 Epp. ; see notes on Gal. v. 16, and 
 the elaborate notes of Koch, p. 99 
 sq. , ' die Gegensatze, als Mensch 
 und als Christ, sind in ihrer ganzen 
 Weite zu belassen,' Meyer. On 
 
 the force of Kal... Kal ('as well the 
 one as the other '), see notes on 
 I Tim. iv. 10. 
 
 17. A oiv] If then; summing up 
 what has been urged, and resuming 
 the request imperfectly expressed in 
 verse 12. On the 'vis collectiva' of 
 oSk (Gal. iv. 15, Phil. ii. 29, see notes) 
 and its resumptive force (Gal. iii. 5, 
 see notes), both here united, see Klotz, 
 Devar. Vol. 11. p. 717, 718. 
 Koivuvov] a partner, scil. in faith 
 and love and Christian principles 
 generally, — not merely in sentiments 
 (el ri aina fioi (ppovels, iirl rots airots 
 rp^X^is, el <pl\ov iryVt Chrys., Just.), 
 or, still less likely, in community of 
 property ('ut tua sint mea, et mea 
 tua,' Beng., comp. Beza, Pagn.), in- 
 terpretations which here improperly 
 
 limit what seems purposely left unre- 
 stricted. irpoo-XaPoC avTov 
 <5s €(*«] receive him to thee as myself; 
 ' as you would me ; ' in my spiritual 
 affection towards him he is a part of 
 my very self, comp. ver. 12. The form 
 TTpoa-Xa/i^. occurs in a very similar 
 sense, Eom. xiv. i, 3, xv. 7, the idea 
 not being so much of a mere kindness 
 of reception (comp. Acts xxviii. 2) as 
 of an admission to Christian love and 
 fellowship ; see Meyer ore Rom. xiv. 1 , 
 and Fritz, in loc, who however in his 
 translation 'in suum oontubernium 
 recipere,' somewhat puts out of sight 
 the Christian character of the recep- 
 tion which the context seems to imply. 
 18. (i 8«] But if; contrasted 
 thought (comp. All), suggested by the 
 remembrance of what might militate 
 against the warmth of the reception. 
 Thus the S^ is not iiera^aTiKov (Mey.), 
 but preserves its usual oppositive 
 force; 'qui loquitur, etiam si nihil 
 positum est in oratione, tamen ali- 
 quid in mente habet, ad quod respi- 
 ciens illam oppositionem infert,' 
 Klotz, Devar. Vol. 11. p. 365. 
 ij8Ckt)o-^v <r€] he wronged thee, more 
 specifically explained by the ' mitius 
 synonymon ' (Beng.) ^7 dcpelXei.. The 
 Greek commentators draw attention 
 to the tender way in which St Paul 
 notices that misdeed of the repentant 
 Onesimus which must have tended 
 most to keep up the irritation of 
 Philemon (ovk etirev iKKetj/ev, aXK ei- 
 ^ruMTepov TjdlKriiTevij d^elKei, Theoph.), 
 and further, the kind and wise way 
 in which he keeps it to the end of 
 
238 
 
 nP02 $IAHMONA. 
 
 19 eyu) UavXoi eypay^/a rrj ifx^ X*'P''' ^^^ airorlaw Iva 
 
 20 iiij \eyo} (Toi OTi KOI aeavTov fxoi irpocroipeiKeiis. vat, 
 
 bis letter ; ipa ttoO riduKe koL irore to 
 adlKrifjia' ^arepov /Aerct rd ttoXXA uT^p 
 Toirov Trpouretv, Chrys. 
 TO«To 4|Ji.ol, IWo^a] this set down to 
 my account, soil, o ti iiUK-riiriv ae rj 
 6(pel\et ; 'id meis rationibus imputa,' 
 Grot. Though there is no certain 
 lexical authority for fXXo^io) (it does 
 not appear in the new ed. of Steph. 
 Thesaur.), and though its existence 
 has been somewhat peremptorily 
 denied (Fritz. Rom. v. 13, Vol. r. 
 p. 311), yet still as the desiderative 
 \oydo> (Lucian, Lexiph. § 15) is an 
 acknowledged form, and as pecu- 
 liarities of orthography or errors of 
 transcription cannot be made satisfac- 
 torily to account for the assumed per- 
 mutation of ei and a [Bastius ap. Greg. 
 Cor. p. 706 (ed. Sohsef.) cited by Fritz, 
 is not in point, as referring to cursive 
 mss. ; see exx. and plates referred to], 
 we seem bound to follow the greatly 
 preponderant uncial authority. 
 
 19. i^a'TlavXoi iyp.] I Paul have 
 written, or, I write (epistolary aor.), 
 but with reference to the words just 
 traced (in which the ijii aVoTiirw is 
 mentally included), as this epistolary 
 aorist in the N.T. does not appear to 
 be used simply in reference to what 
 follows, but always more or less 
 retrospectively, whether in reference 
 to a former letter (2 Cor. ii. 3), to pre- 
 ceding passages in an all but con- 
 cluded letter (Bom. xv. 15, see Meyer 
 in loc), or to an immediately fore- 
 going portion of one in progress 
 (i Cor. ix. 15): when the ref. is to 
 what is definitely present, the simple 
 7pa0w is used in preference to the 
 idiomatic aorist; see Winer, Gr. § 
 40. 5. 2, and notes on Gal. vi, 11. 
 This would lead us to conclude that 
 St Paul wrote with his own hand 
 
 certainly the preceding verse, and 
 not improbably (Theod., Jer.) the 
 whole Epistle. It does not then 
 seem desirable, with Laehm. and 
 Buttm., to make this verse the com- 
 mencement of a new paragraph. 
 iya airorCira] I will repay, obvious- 
 ly not with any serious meaning, as if 
 the Apostle expected that Philemon 
 would demand it, but, as the Greek 
 commentators all observe, xap'^iTws 
 (Theoph.), yet perhaps, as the next 
 words convey, with a gracefully im- 
 plied exhortation, kclI hnTpeimKuis 
 a/j-a Kal xapihrois (Chrys.) ; compare 
 Theod., civrl ypa/j-fiariov r-^vde Ktirex^ 
 tV ^irKTToXlic' Tcurav airiiv iyi> 7^- 
 ypacpa. tva [iij \(ya <roi] tliat 
 
 I may not say to thee; a, rhetorical 
 turn, — ffxw" Ta/)Otria>7n}(rcws, Grot., 
 or TapaKel\j/eas, Gent., ' rhetorica pras - 
 teritio,' Est., — in which what might 
 be said is partially suppressed, or only 
 dehoately brought to the remem- 
 brance of the person addressed. The 
 iva does not seem strictly dependent 
 on iypa\pa, on iiroTlcriii (Mey.), nor 
 yet on a suppressed imper. 'yield me 
 this request' (Alf.), — which would 
 impair the graceful flow of thought, 
 but rather, as Chrys., Theoph., and 
 (Ecum. seem to suggest, on a thought 
 called up by the dTroritrw, — 'repay: 
 yes I say this, not doubting thee, 
 but not wishing to press on thee the 
 claim I might justly urge:' all was 
 to be oi Karh dvdyKrjv dXXd Kara 
 iKoinov, ver, 14. |Xoi irpocro- 
 
 <|>eCXcis] thou owest to me besides; 
 Philemon was not only an actual 
 debtor to the Apostle of any trifle 
 that he thus (/aerd xdpiTOS t^s Trvevfia- 
 TiK^s, Chrys.) offers to make good, 
 but in addition to it {irpoa-), even 
 [Kal ascensive) of his own self, his 
 
19 — 21. 
 
 239 
 
 avatrava-ov julov 
 
 ade\(pe, iyw aov ovalfiriv ev K.vpiw' 
 ra crirXay^va ev XjOdTTto. 
 
 ITe7roj0o)S' Ttj vvaKO^ (tov eypayLa 2i 
 
 I am confident that thou 
 wilt fully comply with 
 my request. Prepare me a lodging. 
 
 20. iv XpioTiJ] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hcrrt, on very 
 greatly preponderating authority : Rec. , iv KvpUji. 
 
 own Christian existence. Baphel 
 adduces somewhat similar uses of 
 Trpo<ro<pel\ei.v in Xen. Cyr. ill. p. 59 
 (in. 7. 16), (Econ. p. 684 {20. i); 
 the meaning however is sufficiently 
 obvious. A curious metaphorical 
 use of Trpoaotp. ('longe inferiorem 
 esse') will be found in Polyb. Hist. 
 XXXIX. 2. 6. Where Philemon first 
 came in contact with the Apostle 
 cannot be ascertained. They may 
 have met at Ephesus during the 
 Apostle's three years' stay in that 
 city (Acts xix. i, 10, xx. 31). 
 
 20. va£, dSeXifiE] yea, brother; 
 certainly not 'precantis' (Grot.), nor 
 ' vehementer obseerantis ' (Gent.), but 
 with the usual force of the particle 
 in the N. T., 'serio affirmantia' 
 (comp. Brasm.), in reference to the 
 request embodied in ver. 12 sq.: 
 &(pds rbv x^P"'"'"''/'^'' ToXi;' ^xerai 
 Twy TTpoT^puv TUP ffTTovSaiuv, Chrys., 
 comp. Theoph. and QiJcum. On 
 the use of pal in the N. T., see 
 notes on Phil, iv. 3. 
 lY<e <rov dvaC|i,i]v] may I reap profit 
 from thee; — I, not without emphasis ; 
 the Apostle again (comp. ver. 12, 17) 
 makes it a matter between himself 
 and Philemon, putting Onesimus for 
 the time almost out of sight; it was 
 a favour to himself. The somewhat 
 unusual dvaliirfv [2 aor. opt., see 
 Buttm. Irreg. Verbs, p. 189 Transl.], 
 coupled with the significant iydi (I not 
 merely Ones.), seems to confirm the 
 view of most modem cpmmeutt. ex- 
 
 cept De W., that there is again a 
 play on the name of Onesimus ; see 
 Winer, Gr. § 68. 2. The form 
 dvai/liiv is similarly used by Ignatius 
 {Polyc. 1, 6, Magn. 12, al.), — once 
 {Eph. 2) curiously enough, but appy. 
 by mere accident, after the mention of 
 an Onesimus. Iv KvpCu 
 
 denotes, as usual, the sphere of the 
 6prims (see on Eph. iv. ijtPhil. ii. 19, 
 al.), just as ip XpurrQ which follows 
 specifies that of the dpdwavffts; both 
 were to be characterized by being in 
 Him, they were to be such as implied 
 His hallowing influences. 
 dvoTTODirov] refresh; see notes on 
 ver. 7. (lov TO, o-irXdTxva] 
 
 my heart; not Onesimus, as in ver. 
 1 2 ( Jer. ), which would here be wholly 
 out of place, nor t^jp irept ere dydwrip 
 (Theoph., (Ecum.), but simply the 
 iTir\&yxpa of the Apostle, — the seat of 
 his love and affections; see notes on 
 ver. 7. 
 
 Messaoes anb Benediction 
 (ver. 21 — 25). 
 21,22. Hope of coming. 
 21. TleiroiOiis T'jj viraK. crow] Con- 
 cluding allusion to his Apostolic au- 
 thority, but how delicately introduced, 
 how tenderly deferred, and how en- 
 couragingly echoing the commenda- 
 tions withwhich he commenced; oirep 
 Kal apx^l^epos (tire Tafi^rj^rlap ^ap, toS- 
 To Kal hravBa X^yei els rb iina^payl' 
 trai TT/i' iiriUToKTiv, Chrys. 
 £Ypa\|/a] I have written, or / write, 
 with reference to the foregoing por- 
 
240 
 
 nP02 *IAHMONA, 
 
 afia 
 
 23 croi, elSwi on Koi inrep a Xeyco "Troi^cret^. 
 
 eroj/uate fjioi ^evlav iXwi^u) yap on Sia roiv irpocrev- 
 
 )(wv vfiSiv ■^apia-QritrotiaL vfiiv. 
 23 'A<77rd ^era/ ere 'Eiracppai 6 crvvaix- salutations. 
 
 21. a] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Hort, on clearly pre- 
 ponderating authority : Eec, 6. 
 
 23. aa-Trdi-erai] So Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Rev., Westc. and Bort, on very 
 greatly preponderating authority: Rec, aVTrofocrai. 
 
 tion of the letter; see above on ver. 
 19. itelp & Xl^d)] beyond 
 
 what I am saying ; comp. Eph. iii. 
 ■20. It is very doubtful whether this 
 alludes,however faintly, to the manu- 
 mission of Onesimus (All). The 
 tenor of the Epistle would seem to 
 imply nothing more than encourag- 
 ing confidence on the part of the 
 Apostle (a/Aa koX dtriyeipev elirthv touto, 
 Chrys.) that Philemon would show 
 to the fugitive even greater kindness 
 and a more affectionate reception 
 than he had pleaded for; compare 
 notes on ver. 14 and 16. 
 
 11. d'fia 8^ KaC k.t.X.] Moreover 
 at the same time provide me also a 
 lodging; a commission appended to 
 his request : in addition to complying 
 with the subject of the letter, Phi- 
 lemon was also to make this provision 
 for the expected Apostle. Chrys. and 
 Theod. (comp. Alf.) find in this mes- 
 sage a last thought of Onesimus, and 
 a direction tending to secure him a 
 kind reception; 'iya irpoirSoKSiv airou 
 rifv irapovdav alSeffBy [$iX.] Kal ret 
 ypa/ifmra, Theod. It may be doubt- 
 ed however whether theirs* view of 
 Theoph. and CEoum. is not more pro- 
 bable, and more worthy both of Phi- 
 lemon and of the Apostle, — viz. that 
 Philemon was not to consider the 
 Epistle merely a petition for Onesi- 
 mus {el /J,^ did, 'OvriSLHov oiii Xbyoxi 
 lie ij^lov, Theoph.), but as containing 
 
 special messages on other matters to 
 himself. The word feyfo (Hesych. 
 vToSoxVi KaToXviw.) only occurs here 
 and, also in ref. to St Paul, Acts 
 xxviii. 23. Bid twv irpocr- 
 
 6D\<3v vii'"''] through your prayers; 
 in ref. to Philemon, Appia, Archippus, 
 and the others mentioned in ver. z. 
 The same expectation of recovering 
 his liberty appears in Phil. i. 26, ii. 
 24; there however the journey con- 
 templated is to the Philippians, and 
 the date when the idea is entertained, 
 according to the general view, a year 
 or two later ; comp. Wieseler Ghronol. 
 p. 456. 
 
 23, 24. Salutations. 23. 'Atr- 
 
 ird^CTai] Greetings from the same 
 persons as those mentioned in Col. 
 iv. 10 — 14, with the exception of 
 Justus. The order observed is sub- 
 stantially the same, Mark and Aris- 
 tarchus (oJ bares ix irepiToix^s, Col. iv. 
 11) preceding Luke and Demas, ex- 
 cept that Epaphras is here placed 
 first. 'Eiracfipds] Bespecting 
 
 this person, see notes on Col. i. 7. 
 6 o-vvaixH'^^' V-'"'] "^2/ fellow pri- 
 soner; more specifically defined as Iv 
 XpiffTif 'Ii)(roC ; see notes on Eph. iv. 
 I. The title here given to Epaphras 
 is in Col. iv. 10 given to Aristarchus, 
 while the latter is here named as one 
 of the a-virepyol : for the probable rea- 
 son for this interchange see notes on 
 Col I. c. 
 
22—25. 
 
 241 
 
 fiaXwTOi fiov ev XpiaTM 'Itjerov, MdpKOf, ^Apierrap-^oi, 34 
 ArifiSf, Aou/fay, 01 crvvepyo'i ixov. 
 
 Benediction. 'pj ^(api'i To5 K.vpiov rnxoiv I^crov Xoj- 25 
 
 CTTOV fjiera tov TrvevfxaTOi vfiwv. PAfi^v.l 
 
 25. rifiSv] So Eec, Lachm., Treg., Bev. (with marg.), on preponderating 
 authority: Tisch., Westc. and Hoi-t (with marg.), omit. The last word 
 
 'A/iTji/ is very doubtful. JJcc, Rev., retain: Lachm., Tisch., Treg., Westc. and 
 Hort, omit. The external evidence for the insertion is certainly strong, but 
 apparently not sufficiently so to warrant us at present going beyond an 
 insertion in brackets. 
 
 24. MdipKos] probably John Mark 
 the Evangelist. For a brief notice of 
 him, and those mentioned in this 
 verse, see notes on Col. iv. 10, 14. 
 
 25. Benediction. 'H 
 Xdpis K.T.X.] Precisely the same 
 form of parting benediction as in 
 Gal. vi. 18, with the exception of 
 the significant conclusion ddeX^ol. 
 As there, so here (comp. also 2 Tim. 
 
 iv. 22), the Apostle prays that the 
 grace of the Lord may be /leTa. tou 
 irveifiaTOS, 'with the spirit,' of those 
 whom he is addressing, with the 
 third and highest portion of our 
 composite nature; see notes ore Gal. 
 I.C., Destiny 0/ the Creature, p. 118 
 sq., and comp. Olshaiis. Opusc. vt. 
 p. 145 sq. 
 
TRANSLATION. 
 
 R 2 
 
NOTICE. 
 
 rfIHE following translation is based on the same principles as 
 -*- those adopted in the portions of this Commentary that have 
 already appeared. My endeavour has been to avoid everything 
 that might seem arbitrary and capricious, and to cling with all 
 possible tenacity to fixed principles of correction ; still there both 
 are and must be many passages in which the context and general 
 tone of the original render one of two apparently synonymous 
 translations not only more appropriate, but even more faithful 
 and correct than the other. 
 
 Of the older English Vv., the attention of the student may be 
 especially directed to the Version of Coverdale, which, considering 
 the time and circumstances under which it was executed, appears 
 to be remarkably vigorous and faithful. The translation in his 
 Testament of 1538 is often suggestive, but is taken from the 
 Latin, and not so carefully executed as that in his Bible of 1535. 
 Some interesting remarks on these Versions, and on the subject 
 of Revision generally, will be found in a tract by ' Philalethes,' 
 entitled Tlie English Bible, 8vo, Dublin, 1857. The editions 
 used are specified in the Notice to the Translation of the Pas- 
 toral Epistles. It may however here again be observed that the 
 Genevan Version is quoted from the Bible of 1560, not from 
 the Testament of 1557 which is reprinted in the Unglish Heaxtpla. 
 [In this edition references are given to the Revised Version of 
 1881.] 
 
THE EPISTLE TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 PAUL and Timothy, servants of Christ Jesus, to all I. 
 the saints in Christ Jesus which are at Philippi, 
 with the bishops and deacons. Grace be to you, and 2, 
 peace, from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ. 
 
 I thank my God upon all my remembrance of you, 3 
 always, in every supplication of mine for you all, making 4 
 my supplication with joy, for your fellowship shewn to- 5 
 ward the Gospel from the first day until now ; being 6 
 confident of this very thing, that He which began in you 
 a good work, will perfect it until the day of Jesus Christ: 
 
 Chapter I. i. Timothy^ Timotheus, 
 AuTH., see notes ore Col. i. 1 (Transl.). 
 Servants] So Wicl., Bbv. : the ser- 
 vants, AnTH. and remaining Vv. 
 Christ Jesus (i)] * Jesus Christ, Atjtk. 
 
 ■i. And the Lord] So Gov. Test., 
 Ehem. {our L.), Bev. : and from the 
 Lord, AcTH. and the other Vv. except 
 Wioii. (0/). It is more exact to omit 
 the prep, in the second member, as 
 in the Greek : here it is unimportant, 
 but in some cases the sense and con- 
 struction are impaired by the repeti- 
 tion ; comp. Blunt, Parish Priest, p. 
 
 55. 56- 
 
 3. All my remenibrance] So Eev.; 
 
 every rem., AniH. 
 
 4. Stijyplication] So Eev. : prayer, 
 Abth. and sim. all other Vv. It is per- 
 haps better to retain the more special 
 meaning, as evincing the earnest na- 
 ture of the Apostle's prayer; comp. 
 
 notes ore i Tim. ii. 1, and notice below 
 WiOL., Gov. Test., in the translation of 
 the second Si-qais. It is curious that 
 aU the Vv. except Aijth., Bish., Eev., 
 change to the plural, ' all my prayers; ' 
 this certainly preserves the Traprixv 
 (Tis, but at the expense of accuracy. 
 My supplication] So Eev.: request, 
 AcTH. ; a bisechynge, Wicl. ; in- 
 staunte prayer. Gov. Test. ; prayer, 
 Bish. ; petition, Ehem. ; the remain- 
 ing Vv. adopt the simple verb and 
 praye (Ttnd., Gov., Cban.), or pi-ay- 
 ing (Gen.). 
 
 5. Shewn toward] In, Auth. ; in 
 furtherance of, Eev. 
 
 6. Began] So WiOL., Tynd., Eev.: 
 hath begun, Auth. In you 
 u, good work] So Wicl., Gov. Test. 
 (that g.), Ehem. : a good work in 
 you, Auth., and as to order all the 
 other Vv. Perfect] So Ehem., 
 
246 
 
 PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 7 even as it is meet for me to be thus minded con- 
 cerning you all, because I have you in my heart ; inas- 
 much as both in my bonds, and in my defence and 
 confirmation of the Gospel, ye all are partakers with me , 
 
 8 of my grace. For God is my witness, how I do long after 
 
 9 you all in the tender mercies of Christ Jesus. And this 
 I pray, that your love may yet more and more abound in 
 
 lo knowledge and in all discernment, to the intent that ye 
 prove the things that are excellent, that ye may be pure 
 
 Bev.: go forthe with, Ttnd., Cot. 
 (both); perform, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vy. 
 
 7. To be thus minded] So Eev. : 
 to think this, Auth. ; so to iudge, 
 Tynd., Gen., and sim. Gov., Cban., 
 BisH. Concerning] Of, 
 Auth. ; on behalf of, Eev. 
 
 My defence] So Gen. : the d., Auth., 
 BisH., Ehem., Eev.; defendynge, 
 WiCL., Cov. (the d.. Gov. Test., 
 Cr4N.). Partakers, &a.] 
 
 So, omitting my, Auth. (Marg.), 
 Gov., Eev., and sim. Tynd., Gran., 
 companions of grace with me : par- 
 takers of my grace, Auth., Gen., 
 BisH. ; felowis of my ioye, Wicl. ; 
 partakers of my ioye. Gov. Test., 
 Ehem. 
 
 8. Is my witness] So Ehem., Eev., 
 and sim. Wicl. : is my record, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. except Tynd. , 
 beareth me recorde. 
 
 I do long] So Cov. Test., and (omit- 
 ting do) Gov., Gen., Eev. : greatly I 
 long, Auth., Tynd., Gkan., Bish. 
 The insertion of the auxiliary seems 
 to throw a slight emphasis on the 
 action expressed by the verb, which 
 is not inappropriate after the solemn 
 adjuration. Tender mercies] 
 
 So Eev. : bowels, Auth., Wicl., 
 Bish., Ehem. The transl. of Tynd. 
 and remaining Vv. is curious, from 
 the very (om. Cov. Test.) herte rote 
 in Jes. Ghr. Christ Jesus] 
 
 * Jesus Christ, Auth. 
 
 9. Yet more and m,ore abound] So, 
 omitting yet, Ehem. : abound yet more 
 and more, Auth., Gen., Bish., Eev., 
 and, as to position of the adverbs, 
 the other Vv. The inversion seems 
 a little more closely to preserve the 
 Greek order and the connexion of 
 irepurjeiem with the particulars in 
 which the increase takes place. 
 
 All] More literally 'all manner of,' 
 cfcc, a translation actually adopted 
 by Gov., but marred by the untena- 
 ble attraction, in all manner of kn. 
 and in all experience. Dis- 
 
 cernment] So B:Ey.: judgment, Auth., 
 Gen. ; witte, Wicl. ; fealinge, Tynd.; 
 experience. Gov.; vnderstandinge, Cov. 
 Test., Cban, Bish., Ehem. 
 
 10. To the intent that] Sim. Eev., 
 so that : that, Auth, and all other 
 Vv. It seems desirable to make 
 some difference in translation be- 
 tween the more immediate ds rb 
 K.T.\. and the further and final 
 I^va Tjre K.r.\, Ye] 
 So Wicl. : ye may, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. (myght, Tynd.). 
 Prove] So Wicl., Cov. ; approve, 
 Auth., Ehem., Eev.; accepte, Tynd., 
 Gkan.; aloioe. Gov. Test.; disceme. 
 Gen., Bish. The things] 
 So Cean., Eev.: things, Auth. 
 Pure] So Tynd. and all Vv. ex- 
 cept Auth., Ehem., Eev., sincere; 
 Wicl., dene. Stumbling] 
 
Chap. I. 7 — 16. 
 
 247 
 
 II 
 
 and without stumbling, against the day of Christ ; being 
 filled with the fruit of righteousness, which is by Jesus 
 Christ, unto the glory and praise of God. 
 
 Now I would have you know, brethren, that my cir- 
 cumstances have fallen out rather unto the furtherance 
 of the Gospel ; so that my bonds have become manifest 
 in Christ in the whole Prsetorium, and to all the rest; 
 and that the greater part of the brethren, having in the 
 Lord confidence in my bonds, are more abundantly bold to 
 speak the word of God without fear. Some indeed preach 15 
 Christ even from envy and strife ; and some too from good 
 will : they that are of love so preach, as they know that I 16 
 
 13 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 Offence, Auth., Wicl., Gov. Test., 
 Gen., Bish., Ehem., Eev. The al- 
 teration is made to avoid an active 
 sense being given to offence, e. g. 
 soche as shuld hurte no mannes con- 
 science, Tynd., Gov. (om. shuld). 
 Against] So Gov. Test.: JiH, Auth., 
 BisH., and sim. Tynd., Cean., Gen., 
 vntyll; in, Wicl. ; vnto, Gov., Ehem., 
 Eev. 
 
 1 1. Fruit] Fruits, Auth. , Eev. 
 Is] Are, Auth., Eev. 
 
 12. Now] So Eev.: but, Auth., 
 Gov. Test., Biss. ; fforsothe, Wicl.; 
 and, Ehem. ; the rest omit. 
 
 Have you know] So Gov. Test, (to k.), 
 Ehem., Eev. : ye should understand, 
 Auth., Ckan., Bish.; ye vnderstode, 
 Tynd., Gov., Gen. My 
 
 circumstances] The things which hap- 
 pened unto me, Auth., Ckan., Gen. 
 [liaue come), Bish. (came), Eev. ; my 
 busynes, Tynd., Gov. (both); the 
 thingis that ben aboute me, Wicl.; the 
 things about me, Ehem. 
 
 13. Have become] Sim. Wicl., 
 Gov. Test., Ehem., weren made; be- 
 came, Eev. ; are, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vv. The perfect is 
 adopted as perhaps better continuing 
 the tense of the preceding member. 
 Manifest in Christ] So Gov. Test., 
 Ehem., Eev., and sim, Wicl. (know- 
 
 en) : Auth. and all other Vv. connect 
 in Christ with bonds. The 
 
 whole PrcEtorium] All the palace, 
 Auth. ; eche moothalle, Wicl. ; euery 
 iudgement house, Gov. Test.; al the 
 court, Ehem. ; all the iudgement hall, 
 Tynd., Gov.; the whole prcetorian 
 guard, Eev. To all 
 
 the rest] So Eev., and sim. Ehem., 
 in al the rest; Auth. Marg. , to all 
 others : in all other places, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. 
 
 14. And that] And, Auth., Bish. 
 All the other Vv. add that. 
 
 The greater part] Many, Auth. and 
 all Vv. except Wicl., ma, Eev., 
 most. Having in the Lord, 
 
 &c.] Brethren in the Lord, waxing 
 confident by my bonds, Auth. and, 
 with some variations, the other Vv. 
 except Gov. Test., which connects iv 
 Kvpl(() with ireToiSiras. 
 More abundantly] So Ehem. , Eev. ; 
 much more, Auth. Word of 
 
 God] So Eev. : *word, Auth. 
 
 15. From. .. from] For... for,^^!,.. 
 Gov. Test., Ehem.; through... of, 
 Gen.; of... of, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. Too] Also,AvTS.., Gen., Ehem., 
 BjEY.; forsothe, Wicl.; the rest omit. 
 
 16. They that are, &o.] But the 
 other of love, Auth., with a transpo- 
 sition of ver. 16 and 17; the one do 
 
248 
 
 PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 17 am set for the defence of the Gospel ; but they that are of 
 contentiousness proclaim Christ not sincerely, thinking 
 
 18 thus to raise up affliction to my bonds. What then? 
 only that, in every way, whether in pretence or in 
 truth, Christ is proclaimed, and therein I rejoice; yea, 
 
 19 and I shall rejoice; for I know that this shall issue to 
 me unto salvation, through your supplication and the 
 
 ao supply of the Spirit of Jesus Christ, according to my 
 steadfast expectation and hope that in nothing I shall be 
 put to shame, but that with all boldness, as always, so now 
 
 it of love, Eev. 
 
 As they know] Because they knowe, 
 Cban. ; because they se, Tynd. ; for 
 tliey knowe. Gov.; witynge, Wiol. ; 
 knowing, Auih. and remaining Vv. 
 
 17. But they that are, &o.] The 
 one preach Christ of contention, not 
 sincerely, supposing to add affliction 
 to my hands, Auth., but transposing 
 ver. 16 and 17: conversely, Eev. 
 Contentiousness] There is some little 
 difficulty in finding a suitable trans- 
 lation for ipidela. On the one hand, 
 the older translation, stryfe, Tynd., 
 Cov., Cban., Bish., is certainly open 
 to the objection of confounding ipts 
 and ipiSela, from which that of Adth., 
 Cov. Test,, Gen., Ehem., viz. conten- 
 tion, is scarcely free : on the other 
 hand, the more lexically exact, 'a spirit 
 of intrigue' {faction, Eev.), seems to 
 present an inadequate antithesis to 
 dydirri. In this difficulty perhaps the 
 term chosen in the text sufficiently 
 maintains the antithesis, while in its 
 etymological formation it approaches 
 lexical accuracy by keeping in view 
 the spirit, the spirit of faction and 
 dissension, that actuated the op- 
 ponents. Proclaim] So 
 Eev. : preach, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vv. except Wicl., Cov. Test., 
 schewen. Thinking thus] Sup- 
 posing, Auth. ; thinking, Eev. 
 To raise up] So Eev. : *to add, Auth. 
 
 18. Only that] So Eev.: ^notwith- 
 standing, k.vTn. In every way] So 
 Eev.: every way, Auth, ; on al maner, 
 Wiol. ; all maner wayes, Tynd., Cov. 
 (of w.), Gen.; anie maner of waye, 
 Cov. Test., Cban., Bish.; by al 
 meanes, Ehem. Proclaimed] 
 So Eev. : preached, Auth. and all 
 other Vv. except Wicl., scliewide. 
 Therein I] So Eev. : I therein, Auth.: 
 changed to avoid any false emphasis 
 on the pronoun. Rejoice] So 
 Eev. : do rej., Auth. 
 
 And T] And, Auth., Eev. 
 
 ShalV] So Wiol.: will, Auth. and 
 
 remaining Vv. 
 
 19. Issue to me unto salv.] Sim. 
 Bhem., fall out to me vnto salv. : turn 
 to my salv., Auth., Cov. Test., Gen., 
 Bish., Eev. ; come to me in to helthe, 
 Wiol. ; chaunce to my salv., Tynd., 
 Cov., Cban. Supplication] 
 So Eev. : prayer, Auth. and all the 
 other Vv. {preyers, Wicl.). 
 
 20. Steadfast expectation] Bar- 
 nest expect. , Auth., Eev. ; expecta- 
 cion, Cov. Test., Cban. , Bish. , Ehem. ; 
 abydynge, Wiol. Hope] So 
 Wiol., Cov. Test., Cban., Ehem., 
 Eev.: my hope, Auth., Bish. Put 
 to shamji] So Eev. : confoundide or 
 schamyde, Wioi^. ; confounded, E^EM. ; 
 ashamed, Auth. and remaining Vv. : 
 it seems desirable to preserve and 
 express the passive alaxvvB-fiaoii.ai.. 
 
Chap. I. 17 — 25. 
 
 249 
 
 also, Christ shall be magnified in my body, whether it 
 be by life, or by death. For TO me to live is Christ, and 31 
 to die is gain. But if to live in the flesh, — if this is to a a 
 me the fruit of my labour, then what I should choose I 
 wot not. Yea I am held in a strait by the two, having 23 
 my desire toward departing and being with Christ, for it 
 is very far better : yet to abide in the flesh is more need- 34 
 ful . for your sakes. And being persuaded of this, I 35 
 
 22. But if to live, &c.] Sim. Rev.: 
 but if I live in the flesh, this is the 
 fruit of my labour, Auth., Bish. , and 
 similarly as to construction, Gov, 
 Test, and also Tynd., Cban. : Gov. 
 gives but in as mock as to lyue in 
 y' flesh is frutefull to me for the 
 worke, in which though the touto 
 is overlooked, that division between 
 protasis and apodosis is preserved 
 which seems, on the whole, most 
 probable: similarly, in this respect, 
 WicL., Ehem. ' In Gen. the clause 
 is rightly divided but altogether 
 wrongly translated, and whether to 
 Hue in the flesh were profitable for 
 me. Then whaf] So Rev. : 
 
 yet what, Atjih. ; and what, Wicl., 
 Tynd., Ckan., Gen., Bish.; what... 
 also, Gov. Test. I should 
 
 choose] I shall c., Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. except Tynd., Gen., to 
 chose, — an idiomatic translation, but 
 tending to obscure the deliberative 
 future. Wot not] 
 
 So Auth., Tynd., Gov., Gean., Bish., 
 Rav. : scarcely exact, yet forcible 
 and firm in cadence. The transl. of 
 Gov. Test., can not tel, is idiomatic, 
 and preferable to knoioe not, Wicl., 
 Gen. , Rhem. 
 
 ■23. Yea] But, Rev. ; */07-, Auth. 
 I am held in u, strait] I am in a 
 strait, Auth., Bish., Eev. ; I am 
 kepte in u. strayte. Gov. Test. ; I am 
 constreynyde, Wici-., Tynd., Gean. ; 
 I am straitened, Rhem. Two trans- 
 
 lations are noteworthy, both these 
 thinges lye harde vpon me. Gov.; I 
 am greatly in doute on bothe sides, 
 Gen. By] Betwixt, Auth., 
 
 Bish., Rev.; o/, Wicl., Tynd., Gkan., 
 Rhem. ; wyth, Gov. Test. The 
 
 two] So Rhem., Rev.: two, Auth., 
 BisH. ; two thingis, Wicl., Tynd., 
 Gov. Test. ; both these thinges. Gov. ; 
 these two thinges, Cban. ; bothe sides, 
 Gen. Having my desire] 
 
 H. a desire, Auth. , Gov. Test. , Bish. ; 
 h. desire, Wicl., Rhem. ; I desyre, 
 Tynd., Gov., Chan.; desiring. Gen.; 
 h. the desire. Rev. Toward 
 
 departing] To depart, Auih., Rev. 
 Being] To be, Auth., Rev. For 
 
 it is, (fee] SoRev. : which is farbetter, 
 Auth. ; if is myche more better to me, 
 Wicl.; which thinge is best of all, 
 Tysi>.,G^n. [om..thinge) ; whichthinge 
 were moch better (for me), Gov. ; the 
 whych were moch more better, Gov. 
 Test.; which is moche and far better, 
 Gean., Bish. (om.ared) ; a thing much 
 more better, Rhem. 
 
 24. Yet] So Rev. ; forsothe, Wicl. ; 
 but, Gov. (both), Rhem. ; nevertheless, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. For 
 your sakes] So Gov. Test., Rev. {sake) : 
 for you, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 25. Being persuaded of this] Hav- 
 ing this confidence, Auth. , Rev. ; 
 tristynge this thing, Wicl., and Gov. 
 Test., Rhem., omitting thing; the 
 transl. this am I sure of, Tynd., Gov., 
 Gkan., Gen., Bish., is due to joining 
 
250 
 
 PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 know that I shall abide and shall continue here with you 
 
 26 all for your furtherance in and joy of Faith, in order that 
 your ground of boasting may abound in Christ Jesus in 
 me through my presence with you again. 
 
 27 Only let your conversation be worthy of the Gospel 
 of Christ ; that whether I come and see you, or remain 
 absent, I may hear of your affairs, that ye are standing in 
 one spirit, with one soul striving together for the faith 
 
 38 of the Gospel, and not terrified in any thing by your ad- 
 versaries ; the which is to them an evidence of perdition, 
 29 but of your salvation, and this from God: because to 
 
 TTeTTOi^us with olda. Shall con- 
 
 tinue herewith] Continue with, A.vts., 
 with a difference of reading, which 
 however does not affect the transla- 
 tion. The Tv. are all nearly identical 
 with AuTH., except Wiol., parfitely 
 dwelle to alle you; Cov. Test., continue 
 with you all vnto the ende; Rev., 
 abide. Your furtherance in, &c.] 
 
 Your furtherance and joy off., Auth. , 
 BisH., Ehem. {the /.), and Cban., 
 Gen., giving youref.; your profite 
 and ioye off, WiCL. ; the furth. and 
 ioye of youre /., Ttnd., Cov. ; your 
 profite and reioysyng off, Cov. Test. ; 
 your progress and joy in the faith, 
 Bev. 
 
 26. In order that] That, Adth. 
 and all Vv. Ground of boasting] 
 
 Rejoicing, AniH., Cov. Test., Cean., 
 BiSH. ; thankynge, Wicl. ; gratula- 
 tion, Ehem. ; glorying, Eev. 
 Abound] So Wiol., Ehem., Eev. , and 
 sim. Cov. Test., be plenteous : be more 
 abundant, Auth., and Cban., Bish., 
 y m. Tynd., Cov., Gen., translate 
 the clause, that ye maye nware (om. 
 Cov.) aboundantVy reioyce. 
 Christ Jesvs] Jes. Ghr., Auth. In 
 
 me] So Wiol., Chan, (but giving 
 thorowe J. C), Ehem., Eev.: for me, 
 Auth., Gen., Bish.; thorowe me, 
 Tynd., Cov. (both). Through 
 
 my presence with you] So Eev. : by 
 
 my coming to you, Auth. and all Vv. 
 {vnto, Cov. Test.) — but perhaps less 
 exact than in the text. 
 
 27. Worthy of] So Ehem., Eev., 
 and sim. Wiol., worthily to : as it 
 becometh, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 Remain] Else be, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. (om. else, Cov. Test., Eev.), 
 except Wicl., which omits. 
 
 Are standing] Sim. Wicl., Ehem., 
 stonden: standfast, Auth., Eev. ; con- 
 tynue, Ttnd. and remaining Vv. 
 Soul] So Tynd., Cov., Ckan., Bish., 
 Eev. : mind, Auth. , Gen., Ehem. ; 
 wille, Wicl. 
 
 28. Not terrified, &o.] In nothing 
 terrified by, Auth.; in no thing be 
 aferde of, Wiol., Cov. Test, {ye be); 
 in nothynge fearinge, Tynd., Gov., 
 Cban., Bish. ; in nothing feare. Gen.; 
 in nothing be ye terrified of, Ehem. ; 
 in nothing affrighted by, Eev. 
 
 The which] So Wiol., Cov. Test.: 
 which, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 Evidence] Evident token, Auth., 
 Eev. ; cause, Wicl., Cban., Ehem. ; 
 token, Tynd., Cov. (both), Gen., 
 Bish. Of your] * To you of, 
 
 Auth. This from] This thing 
 
 of, Wicl., Ehem. (om. thing) ; that 
 from, Eev. ; tliat of, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. 
 
 29. Because] So Eev. : for, Auth. 
 and aU other Vv. Was granted] 
 
Chap. I. 26 — II. 3. 
 
 251 
 
 you was granted, in the behalf of Christ, not only to 
 believe in Him, but also in behalf of Him — to suffer; 
 ye having the same conflict as ye saw in me, and now 30 
 hear of in me. 
 
 If then there he any exhortation in Christ, if any com- II. 
 fort of love, if any fellowship of the Spirit, if any tender 
 mercies and compassions, make ye full my joy, that ye a 
 mind the same thing, having the same love, with united 
 souls minding the one thing ; minding nothing in the 3 
 way of contentiousness, nor in the way of vain-glory. 
 
 Sim. Eev., it hath been (jr.: it is 
 given, Auth. and all Vv. In 
 
 Him] So WiCL. {into), Gov. Test., 
 Gen., Bhbm. . on him, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. (on Ghr., Tynd., Gov.). 
 It seems very desirable, on aooomit 
 of the etymological affinity of els [ivs) 
 and ii) (Donalds. Cratyl. § 170), to 
 translate iriareveiv cis, ' believe in ' 
 (where a more literal translation is 
 not possible), and to reserve ' ore ' 
 for iriareieiv iiri : for the construc- 
 tion of this verb in the N.T., see 
 notes on i Tim. i. 16, Beuss, TMol. 
 Chret. IV. 14, Vol. i. p. 129, and 
 Transl. of St John by Five Clergy- 
 man, p. X. In behalf of 
 Him, &o.] Sim. Eev., in his behalf: 
 suffer for his sake, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. except Wicl., Gov. Test., 
 Ehem., s. for hym. The reasons for 
 this change may be gathered from 
 notes in loc. 
 
 30. Te having] Having, Auth., 
 Eev. As] So Gov. Test., 
 
 Cean., Ehem. {like as) ; which, Atjih. 
 and remaining Vv. exc. Wicl. (what 
 maner <6). Hear of] Hear to 
 
 be, Adih., Gen., Eev. ; hane herde, 
 WiOL., Ehem. ; hear, Tynd. and re- 
 maining Vv. 
 
 Chapter II. i. If then there be] If 
 there be therefore, Auth., Gov. Test., 
 Cban., Gen., Bish., Eev. (there is); 
 therfore yif, Wicl. ; if therfore there 
 
 be, Ehem. ; Tynd. and Gov. omit ouv, 
 but insert amonge you. Ex- 
 
 hortation] Consolation, Auth. and 
 the other Vv. except Wicl., Eev., 
 coumfort. Tender mercies 
 
 and compassions] So Bbv. : bowels, 
 and mercies, Auth.; entraylis of 
 mercy doinge, Wiol. ; inwarde mo- 
 cion of pytie, Gov. Test. ; bowels 
 of commiseration, Ehem.; compassion 
 and mercy, Tynd. (or), and remain- 
 ing Vv. 
 
 ■i. Make ye full] Fulfil ye, kvuB., 
 Eev. Mind the same thing] 
 
 Sim. Wicl., vndirstonde the same 
 thing : be like minded, Auth., Gbajs., 
 Gen. , Bish. ; drawe one waye, Tynd., 
 Gov. ; do mynde one thynge. Gov. 
 Test. ; be of one meaning, Ehem. ; 
 be of the same mind, Eev. 
 With united souls, &e.] Being of one 
 accord, of one mind, Auth., Bish., 
 Bbv., and (giving and of) Tynd., 
 Gov., Cban. ; of one wille, felynge 
 the same thing, Wicl. ; beyng of one 
 accorde, meanynge one thynge. Gov. 
 Test. ; being of one accorde and of 
 one iudgmente. Gen. ; of one minde, 
 agreing in one, Ehem. 
 
 3. Minding, &o.] Let nothing be 
 done through, Auth., Bish. ; no thing 
 by, WiCL., Ehem.; that nothinge be 
 done thorow, Tynd. ; that there be n. 
 done thorow, Gov. ; doing re. through, 
 Eev. Contentiousness] Con- 
 
252 
 
 PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 but with due lowliness esteeming each other superior to 
 
 4 yourselves ; not looking each of you to your own things, 
 
 5 but each of you to the things of others also. Have 
 this mind in you, which was also in Christ Jesus: 
 
 6 who, though existing in the form of God, esteemed not 
 His being on an equality with God a prize to be seized 
 
 7 on, but emptied Himself, taking upon Him the form of 
 
 tention, Gen., Ehem. ; faction, Ebv. : 
 strife, AuTH. and remaining Vv. ; 
 see notes on ch. i. 17 (Transl.). 
 Nor in the way of] *0r, Auth. : or 
 through, Eev. With due lowli- 
 
 ness] In lowliness of mind, Auth., 
 Eev. ; in melcenesse, Wicl. ; in meke- 
 nes of mynde, Tynd., Gov. (thorow), 
 Ckan. , Gen., Bish. ; in humbly nesse, 
 Gov. Test. ; in humilitie, Ehem. As 
 the art. does not appear merely used 
 to give TaTTciv. its more abstract force, 
 but to mark tlie ' due, befitting ' lowli- 
 ness by which the PhiUppians were to 
 be influenced, the insertion of such a 
 word would seem justifiable. 
 Esteeming each] Let each esteem, 
 Auth. No Vv. except Wiol., Gov. 
 Test. , Ehem., Eev. (counting other) , re- 
 tain the participial construction. 
 Superior to] Better than, Auth. and 
 all Vv. except Wicl. (which appy. 
 gives Mger to, but the clause is con- 
 fused). Yourselves] Them- 
 selves, AtjTH., Wicl., Ehem. ; him 
 selfe, Tynd. and remaining Vv. 
 
 4. Not Uioking, &o.] So Eev. ; 
 *Iook not * every man on, Auth., Gran. 
 (not ye). Gen., Bish. ; not eche by 
 )iem selfe biholdynge, Wiol. ; and 
 that no man consyder, Tynd. ; and let 
 euei'y man lake not for. Gov. ; euery 
 one consyderynge not, Gov. Test., 
 Ehem. (not cons.). Your] His, 
 
 Auth., Eev. Each of you, &c.] 
 
 Sim. Eev. (each of you also, d:c.) : 
 * every man also on, Auth., Gen., 
 Bish., the only other Vv. that notice 
 in translation the ascensive Kal. 
 
 5. Have this mind] So Eev. : let 
 this mind be in you, Auth., and 
 (giving tlie same m.) Tynd., Gov. 
 (both), Gean., Gen., Bish. ; feeU yee 
 this thing in you, Wicl. ; this thinke 
 in your selues, Ehem. The particle 
 yap is retained in Bee, but is omitted 
 in translation in Auth. and the other 
 Vv., except Wicl., forsothe; Ehem., 
 for. 
 
 6. Though existing] Being, Auth., 
 Tynd., Gov., Gen. , Bish., Eev. ; whan 
 he was, Wiol. and remaining Vv. 
 Esteemed not, &o.] Thought it not 
 robbery to be equal with God, Auth., 
 Tynd., Gov., Bish., and (no r.) Gov. 
 Test., Gean., Gen. ; thought it no 
 robberie, him self to be equal to God, 
 Ehem. ; demyde not raueyne hym self 
 for to be euen to god, Wicl. ; counted 
 it not a prize to be on an equality 
 with God, Eev. 
 
 7. Emptied Himsele] So Eev.: 
 made himself of no reputation, Auth. 
 and the other Vv. except Wiol., 
 mekide hym self; Ehem., exinanited 
 him self. Taking] So Wicl. , 
 Gov. Test., Gean., Bish., Ehem., 
 Eev. : and took, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vv. There is some little diffi- 
 culty in the translation of the modal 
 aorist participle, when, as in the 
 present case, the action of the parti- 
 ciple is synchronous with that of 
 the finite verb. On the whole, the 
 pres. part, in English seems the best 
 and most idiomatic equivalent, espe- 
 cially as in practice the tense of the 
 finite verb seems so far reflected on 
 
Chap. II. 4 — 15. 
 
 253 
 
 a servant, being made in the likeness of men : and being 8 
 found in fashion as a man, He humbled Himself, becom- 
 ing obedient, even unto death, yea death on the cross. 
 Wherefore God did also highly exalt Him, and granted 9 
 Him the name which is above every name, that in the 10 
 name of Jesus every knee should bend, of things in hea- 
 ven, and things on earth, and things under the earth ; 
 and that every tongue should confess that Jesus Christ 1 1 
 is Lord, unto the glory of God the Father. 
 
 So then, my beloved, even as ye were always obedi- la 
 ent, not as in my presence only but now much more in 
 my absence work out your own salvation with fear and 
 trembling. For it is God which work'eth in you, both to 13 
 will and to work, of His good pleasure. Do all things 14 
 without murmurings and doubtings ; that ye may be 15 
 blameless and simple, children of God without blemish, 
 
 the participle, that though really pre- 
 sent in form, it becomes almost aoris- 
 tic in sense. Being made] 
 
 So Bev. : made, Wicl. , Bhem. ; and 
 made, BisH. ; and was made, Auth. , 
 Gen.; and became, Tynd., Gov. (om. 
 and), Gov. Test., Gran. 
 
 8. Becmning} So Bev.: made, 
 WiOL., BisH., Bhem.; and became, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. Even 
 unto] So Bev.: unto, Auth. and aU 
 Vv. Yea death] Sim. Bev., 
 yea the death: forsothe to the deth, 
 Wicl. ; euen vnto the d., Gov. ; even 
 the d., Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 On the cross] Of the cross, Auth. and 
 all Vv. (om. the, Wicl.) : the slight 
 change seems to add somewhat to 
 perspicuity, and is compatible with 
 the present use of the gen., which is 
 one of 'more remote relation.' 
 
 9. God did also, &c.] So Gov. 
 Test. : God also hath. . .exalted, Auth. , 
 Oban., Bish., Bhem., Bev. (omits 
 hath) ; hath God also e., Gov. ; God 
 hathe also...e., Gen. The change 
 seems to have the advantage of placing 
 the contrasting Kal in more distinct 
 connexion with iirepifaa-er. 
 
 Granted] Sim. Wicl., Gov. Test., 
 Bev., gave : given, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. except Bhem., hath 
 giuen. The name] So Bev. : a 
 
 name, Auth. and all other Vv. 
 
 10. In the name] So all Vv. ex- 
 cept Auth., Gen., at the Name. 
 Bend] Bow, Auth. and all Vv. {be 
 bowide, Wicl. ) . Things ore earth] 
 
 So Bev., Gov. (vpon) : th. in earth, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. except 
 Wicl., erthely; Bhem. terrestrials. 
 
 12. So then] So Bev. : and so, Wicl. ; 
 therfore. Gov. Test., Bhem. ; where- 
 fore, Auth. and the other Vv. 
 Even as] So Bev. : as, Auth. and all 
 other Vv. Ye were always ob.] 
 Euermore yee hane obeschide, Wicl. ; 
 ye have always obeyed, Auth. and 
 the other Vv. {you, Bhem.). 
 
 13. To work] So Bev.: to do, 
 Auth., Bish.; to parfourme, Wicl., 
 Gov. Test. ; to accomplish, Bhem. 
 
 14. Doubtings] So Wicl., Gov. 
 Test., and sim. Bhem., staggerings : 
 disputings, Auth., Gov., Bev., and, 
 in the sing., Tynd., Chan., Bish.; 
 reasonings. Gen. 
 
 15. Simple] So Wicl., Bhem.: 
 
254 
 
 PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 amidst a crooked and perverse generation, among whom 
 
 1 6 ye appear as heavenly lights in the world, holding forth 
 the word of life ; that I may have whereof to boast against 
 the day of Christ, that I did not run in vain nor yet 
 
 17 labour in vain. Howbeit if I be even poured out, in ad- 
 dition to the sacrifice and service of your faith, I joy, 
 
 18 and rejoice with you all. And for the same cause do ye 
 also joy, and rejoice with me. 
 
 1 9 Yet I hope in the Lord Jesus shortly to send to you 
 
 harmless, Auth. (Marg., sincere), 
 Eev. ; pure, Ttnd., Gov., Gen., Bish.; 
 innocent. Gov. Test. ; vnfayned, 
 Ckan. Children'] So Gov. 
 
 (both), Ehem. , Eev. ; the sons, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. (Gkan. omits 
 the). Blemish] So Eev. : 
 
 reprone, WiCL. ; reprehension, Ehem. ; 
 *reTmke, Auth. and remaining Tv. 
 Amidst] *In the midst of, Auth. 
 Generation] So Gov. Test. , Bhem. : 
 nation, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 Appear] Shine, Auth. and all the 
 Vv. except Eev., are seen. Heavenly 
 lights] Lights, Auth. and all the Vv. 
 except WiCL., gyuers of ligt. 
 
 16. That I may have, Ac] Sim. 
 Eev.: that I may rejoice, Auth., 
 Gkan., Gen. ; to my glorie, WiCL., 
 Ehem. ; vnto my reioysynge, Tynd., 
 Gov. (both), Bish. {to). 
 Against] So Gov. Test. : in, Auth. 
 and all other Vv. Did not 
 
 run] So Eev. : have not run, Auth. 
 and all Vv. The change to the 
 aoristie form seems in this case 
 clearly proper and necessary: the 
 form with the auxiliary is here 
 chosen for the sake of preserving the 
 rhythm of Auth., which can rarely 
 be neglected without some loss to 
 the general cadence of the verse. 
 Nor yet] Neither, Auth. and all Vv. 
 except Ehem., nor. The change is 
 here made in accordance with the 
 rule generally followed in this re- 
 vision — to adopt the weaker transla- 
 
 tion ('nor,' or 'neither') of the dis- 
 junctive o6d4, where the meanings of 
 the words it disjoins are more similar 
 and accordant, the stronger and 
 more emphatic (' nor yet '), where 
 they are less so ; see notes on i Tim. 
 i. 4 (Transl.). Labour] 
 
 So Eev. : laboured, Auth. 
 
 17. Howbeit if] Yea, and if, 
 Auth. , Eev. ; but although, Gov. 
 Test. ; but and if, WicL., Ehem. (an 
 archaic, but not otherwise unsatis- 
 factory translation) ; yee and though, 
 Tynd. and remaining Vv. Be 
 even poured out] Sim. Auth. Marg., 
 be powred foorth : be offered, Auth. ; 
 aTO ojfcred, Eev. ; be offered vp, Tynd., 
 Gov., Gean. , Gen. , Bish. ; am off. 
 vp. Gov. Test. ; be immolated, Ehem. 
 In addition to the] Upon the, Auth. 
 and all the Vv. ; it seems however 
 desirable to mark in translation that 
 iwl has here probably not a local but 
 an ethical reference ; see notes in loc. 
 
 18. And for, &c.] For the same 
 cause also do ye joy, Auth., and sim. 
 Tynd., Gean., Gen., Bish. : tlie same 
 thing forsothe c&yee hane ioye, WiOL. ; 
 be ye glad aso of the same. Gov. 
 Test. ; and the selfsame thing doe you 
 also reioyce, Ehem.; in the same 
 munner, Eev. 
 
 19. Yet I hope] But I trust, Auth. 
 (Marg., moreouer), Bish. ; / trust, 
 Tynd., Gov. (both), Gkan. ; and I tr.. 
 Gen.; and I hope, Ehem.; but I 
 hope, Eev. Shortly to, &c.] 
 
Chap. IT. i6 — 25. 
 
 255 
 
 Timothy, that I also may be of good comfort, when I 
 know your state. For I have no man likeminded, who 20 
 will have a true care for your state. For they all seek ai 
 their own things, not the things of Jesus Christ. But 32 
 ye know the proof of him, that, as a child serveth a father, 
 he served with me in furthering the Gospel. Him then 23 
 I hope to send forthwith, so soon as I shall see how it 
 will go with me. But I trust in the Lord that I myself 24 
 also shall come shortly. 
 
 Yet I supposed it necessary to send unto you Epa- 25 
 
 To send Timotheus shortly unto you, 
 AijTH. and the other Vv. except 
 WiOL., for to sende tymothe soone to 
 you ; Ehem. , to send T. vnto you 
 quickly. The change is made to 
 endeavour to show that i/up is the 
 transmissive dative, and not the same 
 as irpds u/iSs, ver. 25, where see notes. 
 
 20. Will have a true, &C.] Will 
 naturally care for your state, Auth., 
 BiSH. ; is bisie for you mth clene 
 effeceioun {or desire), Wicl. ; with so 
 pure affeccion carethfor youre matters, 
 TysB., Gov. (both) [you], Ckan. (wyll 
 care) ; wil faithfully care for your m., 
 Gen. ; with sincere affection is care- 
 ful for you, Ehem. ; will care truly 
 for your state, Eev. 
 
 21. They all] So Gov. Test., Rev., 
 and somewhat sim. Tynd., Gov., 
 Cean., all other: all, Auth., Gen., 
 BisH., Ehem. ; alle men, Wicl. 
 Own things] Own, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. except Wicl., Gov. Test., 
 Ehem., tho thingis that ben liere 
 owne. Of Jesus Christ] So Eev.: 
 whichare Jesus Christ's, Auth.jGban., 
 BisH., and sinj. all the other Vv. 
 The change in the text seems to 
 leave the translation equally unoir- 
 oumsoribed with the Greek : the pos- 
 sessive gen. in English seems to be 
 more limited. 
 
 22. The proof] So Auth. and all 
 the Vv. except Wiol., the asaye; 
 
 Ehem., an experiment: the meaning 
 really amounts to 'proved character' 
 (see notes), but as so many of the Vv. 
 retain the literal meaning of SoKi/iij, a 
 change may he deemed unnecessary. 
 A child serveth a father] So Rev. : u. 
 childevntothefather, Gov. (both); ason 
 with the father, Auth. and the other 
 Vv. except Wicl., a sone to the f. ; 
 Ehem. , a Sonne the f. Served] So 
 Wiol., Rev. : hath served, Auth., 
 Gen., Bish., Ehem. In further- 
 
 ing the Oospel] Sim. Rev. : in the 
 Gospel, Auth. and all Vv. except 
 Ttnd. who translates the clause be- 
 stowed he his labour apon the g. 
 
 23. Then]Forsothe,'^ici^.; there- 
 fore, Auth. and the other Vv. except 
 Ttnd., Gov., which omit ovv in trans- 
 lation. Forthwith] So Rev.: pre- 
 sently , A.vts. How it will, &c.] 
 This expression is due to Tynd. , and 
 has been retained by succeeding Vv. 
 except Gov. Test., my busynes ; Bish. , 
 my state; Rhem., the things that con- 
 cerne me. 
 
 24. I myself also] So Gov. Test., 
 Rhem. (omitting I), Rev. : I also my- 
 self, Auth. and remaining Vv. ex- 
 cept Wiol. 
 
 25. Unto you] To you, AuTB., 'Bey. 
 The distinction preserved throughout 
 between the transmissive dative and 
 the cases where a prep, is used is 
 noticed here on account of the di- 
 
256 
 
 PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 phroditus, my brother and fellow-worker and fellow- 
 soldier, but your messenger and minister to my need, 
 
 26 since he was longing after you all, and was full of heavi- 
 
 27 ness, because that ye heard that he had been sick. For 
 indeed he was sick like to death: howbeit God had 
 mercy on him ; and not on him only, but on me also, 
 
 28 that I should not have sorrow upon sorrow. I have been 
 therefore the more zealous in sending him, that when ye 
 see him ye may rejoice again, and I too may be the less 
 
 rect contrast in ver. 19, ■where see 
 notes. Fellow-worker] So Eev. : 
 
 companion in labour, Auth. 
 And minister, &o.] So Eev., and 
 sim. BisH., and the minister of my 
 neede ; and the seruaunt of my nede, 
 WicL. ; and my minister at my nedes, 
 Ttnd., Cot. (both) [need] ; and he 
 that ministered to my wants, Auth. ; 
 which also ministreth vnto me at nede, 
 Ckan. ; and he that ministered vnto 
 me suche things as I wanted, Gen. 
 
 26. Since] So Rev. -. for sothely, 
 WiCL. ; for so moch as, Cov. (an 
 archaic, but not inexact transla- 
 tion) ; because in deede, Ehem. ; for, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 Was longing after] Longed after, 
 Auth. and the other Vv. (I. for, Cov. 
 Test.) except WiOL. , desiride ; Ehem., 
 hud a desire toward. Heard] 
 
 So WicL. : had heard, Auth. and the 
 remaining Vv. {had h. saye, Tynd., 
 Ckan.). In the next member the 
 English idiom seems clearly to re- 
 quire the pluperfect in translation ; 
 in this member it may apparently be 
 dispensed with. 
 
 27. Like to death] To the deth, 
 WicL. ; vntyll death, Cov. Test. ; euen 
 to death, Ehem. ; nigh unto d., Auth., 
 BiBH., Eev.; and that nye vnto d., 
 Ttnd., Cov.; in somoch that he was 
 nye vnto d., Cban. ; verie nere vnto 
 d.. Gen. Howbeit] But, 
 Auth. and all Vv. That I 
 
 should not have] Sim. Bbv. {might): 
 lest I should have, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. except Wicl., leste I hadde ; 
 Tynd. , Cov. , lest I shuld have had, 
 
 28. I have been therefore, &c.] / 
 sent him therefore the more care- 
 fully, Auth., Eev. (have. ..diligently). 
 The inverted translation of the 
 text seems necessary, to show, more 
 clearly than Auth., that the Apostle 
 displayed avovSrl in sending Epa- 
 phroditus. The change of tense 
 from the aorist (Auth.) to perfect 
 seems to be necessary, as ireiiij/a is 
 in all probability the epistolary aorist 
 (see notes on Philem. 12), Epaphro- 
 ditus being appy. the bearer of this 
 Epistle. It may be doubted whether 
 the present ought not to be adopted : 
 English idiom however seems to be 
 in favour of the perfect ; comp. notes 
 on Col. iv. 8 {Transl.). There- 
 
 fore] So Auth. and all Vv. ; and 
 appy. rightly, as this seems to be 
 one of the cases in which oBx has a 
 slightly inferential force, which is 
 inadequately expressed by 'then;' 
 see notes on i Tim. ii. i {Transl.). 
 Rejoice again] So Tynd., Gov., Cban., 
 Bhem., and similarly Wiol., and 
 Cov. Test. : again is joined with see 
 him by Auth., Gen., Bish., Eev. 
 Perhaps the insertion of the adverb 
 between the auxiliary and the verb 
 might seem more consonant with the 
 order of the Greek (irdXic xop^"), 
 
Chap. II. 26 — 30. 
 
 257 
 
 sorrowful. Receive him then in the Lord with all joy, 29 
 and hold such men in honour; because for the work of 30 
 Christ he went nigh even unto death, having hazarded 
 his life, to supply that which you lacked in your service 
 unto me. 
 
 and also with our present mode of 
 expression : as however it has a tend- 
 ency to suggest an undue emphasis 
 on 'again,' and is perhaps a modern 
 collocation, we retain the order of 
 the older Vv. And] So 
 
 WiCL., Tynd., Gen., Ehbm. : and 
 that, AiiTH. and remaining Vv. 
 I too] Sim., I also. Gov. : I, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. The insertion of 
 iyili ( = 'I on my side') suggests this 
 shght addition. 
 
 29. Then] Therefore, Auth. and 
 all Vv. except Wicl., and so : see 
 notes in lac. Joy] So Wicl., 
 Ehem., Be v.: gladness, Auth. and 
 the remaining Vv. It certainly seems 
 undesirable to depart from the usual 
 and almost semi-theological ren- 
 dering of x"/"^- Such men] 
 Sim. Wicl., suche maner men: such, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 Honour] So Wicl., Bhem., Eev. : 
 reputation, Auth. The clause is 
 translated by Tynd. and remaining 
 Vv., make moche of soche. 
 
 30. He loent nigh, &c.] So Gov. 
 Test, (euen nye) : he was nigh unto 
 death, Auth. , Gbn. (nere), Bish. ; 
 vnto the deth he wente, Wicl.; he 
 loent so farre, that he was nye vnto 
 d., Tynd., Gov. (fame nye), Ckan. ; he 
 came to the point of death, Ehem. ; 
 came nigh unto, Bev. Having 
 hazarded] *Not regwrding, Auth., 
 Bish. ; gyuynge, Wicl. ; and regard- 
 ed not, Tynd., Gov., Gran., Gen.; 
 and put... in ieopardy. Gov. Test.; 
 yelding, Ehem. ; hazarding, Eev. 
 The translation of the aor. part., 
 when associated with the finite verb, 
 
 E. 
 
 needs attention. Besides the usual 
 periphrastic translations by means 
 of temporal or causal particles, we 
 have three forms of translation, — 
 (a) the present participle; (6) the 
 past participle with the auxiliary 
 'having;' (c) the idiomatic conver- 
 sion into the finite verb with 'and.' 
 Of these, [a) is especially admissible 
 when the part, defines more closely 
 the manner of the action expressed 
 by the finite verb, or the circum- 
 stances' under which it took place 
 (see notes on ver. 7, Transl.); (6) is 
 often useful when it is necessary to 
 mark the priority of the action of the 
 part, to that of the finite verb; (c) 
 sometimes serves to mark their con- 
 temporaneity. In the present case 
 the choice seems to be between (6) 
 and (c), as the irapa§6K. may be 
 regarded partly as having preceded, 
 and partly as accompanying the 
 ^7710-6!'. As, logically considered, 
 the former idea seems here distinctly 
 more prominent, we adopt the second 
 form of translation. That 
 
 which, &c.] So somewhat similarly 
 Tynd., Gov., Gran, (omitting seraice), 
 Gen., that service which was lackynge 
 on ymire parte toiiiarde me : your 
 lack of service toward me, Auth., 
 Bish. ; that that faylide to you 
 anentis my seruyce, Wicl. — not an 
 incorrect view of the gen. (see notes) ; 
 it that was wantyng on your hehalfe 
 towarde my wyllynge sendee. Gov. 
 Test. ; that which on your part want- 
 ed toward my seruice, Ehem. ; that 
 which was lacking in your service 
 toward me, Eev. 
 
 S 
 
258 
 
 PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 III. Finally, my brethren, rejoice in the Lord. To write 
 
 the same things to you to me indeed is not irksome, 
 
 a while for you it is safe. Look to the dogs, look to the 
 
 3 evil workers, look to the CONCISION. For we are the cir- 
 cumcision, which by the Spirit of God do serve Him, 
 and make our boast in Christ Jesus, and put no confi- 
 
 4 dence in the flesh; though myself possessed of confidence 
 also in the flesh. If any other man deemeth that he can 
 
 Ohaptbk in. I. Irksome] So 
 Eev.: grievous, Auth.; sJowe, Wicl.; 
 grefe. Gov. Test. ; tedious, Bhbm. ; 
 Tynd. and remaining Vv. translate 
 the clause, it greveth me not. 
 While] But, Auth., Gov. Test., Eev.; 
 forsothe, Wicl. ; and. Gov., Gen., 
 Ehem. ; for, Tynd., Gran., Bish. It 
 would at first sight seem desirable 
 to suppress the /i^v in translation; 
 as however the opposition fiiv...6i is 
 sparingly used in the N.T., and only 
 when a somewhat decided contrast is 
 intended, it is best to retain indeed, 
 as Adth. 
 
 ■i. Look to (3 times)] Sim. Wicl., 
 se yee ; Ehem., see : heware of, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. 
 The dogs] So Ehem., Eev.: the ar- 
 ticle is omitted by Auth. and the 
 remaining Vv. The presence of the 
 article with the two following sub- 
 stantives seems to show that here 
 the article is not merely generic, but 
 distinctive and definitive ; ' indicat 
 eum de certis quibusdam loqui, quos 
 illi noverint,' Erasm. in loc. 
 The evil] So Ehem. , Eev. : the ar- 
 ticle is omitted by Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vv. 
 
 3. By the Spirit of, &c.] Worship 
 *God in the spirit, Auth.; worship 
 by the Spirit of God, Eev. It seems 
 permissible to add Him to the abso- 
 lute XarpciJocTcs in accordance with 
 Auth. in Luke ii. 37, Acts xxvi. 7. 
 Make our boast] Glorien, WiOL., 
 Ehem., Eev. : rejoice, Auth. and re- 
 
 maining Vv. Fut] Have, 
 
 Auth., Eev. On account of the next 
 clause, it seems desirable here to 
 avoid the use of 'have.' 
 
 4. Myself possessed of conf. also] 
 I might also have conf., Auth., Gen., 
 BiSH., Ehem. (om. might); I myself 
 might have confidence even, Eev. ; I 
 haue triste (&, Wicl. ; I have wher of 
 I myght reioyce, Tynd., Gov., Gov. 
 Test. (Z also h.); I myght also re- 
 ioyce, Gean. The change to 'pos- 
 sessed of is an endeavour to mark 
 the ' habens non utens ' implied here 
 by ^x"") and to draw a distinction in 
 translation between TreTroiSis and ^ui' 
 irevolSrj<riv. It will be observed that 
 Wicl., Eev. alone insert the transl. 
 of Kal in the proper place, and that 
 Tynd., Gov. , omit it. 
 
 Deemeth] Is seen, Wicl. ; seme, Gov. 
 Test,, Ehem.; thinketh, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. (thynke. Gov.). The 
 slightly stronger ' deemeth ' appears 
 best to coincide with the view of 
 SoKef adopted in the notes. 
 That he can put conf] For to triste, 
 Wicl.; that he hath whereof he 
 mighte reioyce, Gov.; to haue wherof 
 to reioyse, Gov. Test. ; to haue con- 
 fidence, Ehem., Eev.; that he hath 
 whereof he might trust, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. 
 
 5. Race] Stock, Auth., Ehem., 
 Eev. Hebrews] So Eev.: the 
 Hebrews, Auth. As regards] As 
 touching, Auth., Eev.-; a/ti?-,. Wicl., 
 Gov, Test., Bish.; as concernynge. 
 
Chap. III. i— 8. 
 
 259 
 
 5 
 
 as 6 
 
 put confidence in the flesh, I more: circumcised the 
 eighth day, of the race of Israel, of the tribe of Ben- 
 jamin, an Hebrew of Hebrews; as regards the law, a 
 Pharisee; as regards zeal, persecuting the church; 
 regards the righteousness which is in the law, having 
 lived blameless. Howbeit what things were gain to me, 7 
 these for Christ's sake I have counted loss. Nay more, I 8 
 do also count them all to be loss for the excellency of 
 the knowledge of Christ Jesus my Lord ; for whose sake 
 
 Tynd., Gov., Oban.; by, Gen.; ac- 
 cording to, Ehem. It will be seen 
 from next verse that WiOL., Ehem. 
 and Eey. are the only Vv. which 
 preserve the same translation of Kard, 
 in the three clauses: this certainly 
 seems desirable, as more clearly di- 
 recting the reader's attention to the 
 three theological characteristics of 
 the Apostle, which are not improba- 
 bly climactic in arrangement. 
 
 6. As regards (i)] Concerning, 
 AuTH., Gen., Bish. ; aftir, Wiol. ; 
 as eoncernynge, Tynd., Gov. (both), 
 Gban. ; according to, Ehem.; as touch- 
 ing, Ebv. As regards (2)] 
 Touching, Auth., Gen., Bish.; aftir, 
 WiCL. ; as touchynge, Tynd., Gov. 
 (both), Gran., Eev.; according to, 
 Ehem. Saving lived blame- 
 less] Lyuynge with outen playnte, 
 Wiol.; my conuersacion was without 
 blame. Gov. Test. ; conuersing without 
 blame, Ehem. : blameless, Auth. ; 
 found blameless, Eev. ; I was blame- 
 lesse, Bish. ; I was vnrebukable, 
 Tynd., Gov., Gran., Gen. The three 
 Vv. which foUow the Vulg. (' con- 
 versatus') mark, though not quite 
 adequately, the yevbiievos which Auth. 
 leaves unnoticed. 
 
 7. Hotcfteit] So Eev.; 6mJ, Auth. 
 and all Vv. The adversative dXX4 
 seems here to require a stronger 
 translation than the merely opposi- 
 tive'but,' T/ifise] So WiCL., 
 
 Eev.: those, Auth., Gran., Bish., 
 Ehem. ; the same. Gov. Test., Gen. ; 
 omitted by Tynd. , Gov. For 
 
 Christ's sake] So Tynd., Gov. (both),- 
 Gran., Bish.: for Christ, Auth., 
 Wiol., Ehem., Eev. All Vv. place 
 these words at the end of the sen- 
 tence, except Ehem. which preserves 
 precisely the order of the Greek : 
 the change perhaps keeps up the an- 
 tithesis between Kipdos and f>)/i£a with 
 a little more emphasis. 
 I have counted] So Gov. (both), Eev. 
 [haue I]; I haue demyde, Wicl. ; 
 haue I esteemed, Ehem. : I counted, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 8. Nay more] *Yea doubtless, 
 Auth,, Gen.; netheles, Wiol.; ye, 
 Tynd., Gov. (both), Gran., Bish.; 
 yea but, Ehem.; *yea verily, Eev. 
 I do also count them all] And I count 
 all things, Auth., Gov. Test. (om. 
 and), Eev.; Igesse alle thingis, Wiol.; 
 I esteems al things, Ehem. ; I thinke 
 all thynges, Tynd. and remaining 
 Vv. The insertion of 'them,' and 
 the change to ' do also count,' seem 
 required to show that the real em- 
 phasis does not rest on iravra, but 
 on ■^yoSfiai. as contrasted with ijyiifiat, 
 whUe irdvra refers back to the. pre- 
 ceding anva k.t.\.; oomp. Meyer in 
 loc. To be loss] So Eev. ; 
 
 for to be peyrement, Wiol.; to be 
 detriment, Ehem.: but loss, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. For 
 
 S2 
 
260 
 
 PtIILIPPIANS. 
 
 I suffered the loss of all things, and do count them to be 
 
 9 dung, that I may win Christ, and be found in Him, not 
 
 having mine own righteousness, which is of the law, but 
 
 that which is through Faith in Christ, even the righteous- 
 
 10 ness which cometh of God by Faith : that I may know 
 Him, and the power of His resurrection, and fellow- 
 ship of His sufferings, being fashioned to the likeness of 
 
 1 1 His death, if by any means I may attain unto the resur- 
 13 rection from the dead. Not that I have already 
 
 whose sake] For whom, Auth. and 
 all Vv. : change for the sake of 
 accordance with the transl. of Sid 
 rbv Xp.,. ver. 7. Suffered] 
 
 So Eev.: have suffered, Auth., and 
 similarly all other Vv. except Wicl. 
 insert the auxiliary have. To be 
 
 (2)] So Gen.: as, WioL., Gov. Test., 
 Ehem. ; but, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 9. Faith in] SoRsv. ; sim. Tynd., 
 the fayth which is in : the faith of, 
 Auih. and remaining Vv. 
 
 Even] So Chan., Gen.: thatis,WiCh., 
 Ehem. {which) ; I meane, Tynd. ; 
 {namely), Gov. ; Auth., Bish., Eev. 
 omit, and Gov. Test, alters the con- 
 struction. The insertion, thus sanc- 
 tioned by six of the Vv., seems to 
 add both to perspicuity and empha- 
 sis. Cometh] So Tynd., Gov., 
 Gban., Bish. : is, Auth., Gov. Test., 
 Gen., Eev. The concluding words, 
 by Faith, Auth., Eev. [in feith, 
 Wicl., Gov. (both), Ehem.; thorowe 
 fayth, Tynd., Gkan., Gen., Bish.], 
 are scarcely an exact translation of 
 ivl T^ irla-ra (see notes), but are per- 
 haps a sufficiently close approxima- 
 tion to it to be preferable to any 
 periphrasis (' grounded on faith, ' 
 'resting on faith') which an adhe- 
 sion to the literal meaning of the 
 prep, would render necessary. 
 
 10. Fellowship] The fellowship, 
 Auth. , Eev. Being fashioned 
 to, &c.] Gonfiguride {or made liik), to, 
 
 WiOL.; that I may e be lyke fashioned 
 vnto. Gov. Test. ; configured to, 
 Ehem. ; * being n/ide conformable 
 imto, Auth. and sim. remaining 
 Vv. The expression in the original 
 {(TUiiiiopipl^eaBai ffamrifi), though per- 
 fectly intelligible, is so far unusual 
 as to require some slight periphrasis 
 in English. The shorter transla- 
 tion, ' being conformed to ' {becoming 
 conf. unto, Eev.), is perhaps open to 
 objection as involving a use of ' con- 
 form,' which, though sanctioned by 
 Hooker, is now of rare occurrence. 
 
 11. May] So Gov. Test., Ehem., 
 Eev.: might, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. except Wicl., schal. 
 
 From the dead] So Gov., Eev.: from 
 deeth, Tynd.; *of the dead, Auth., 
 Cean., Gen., Bish. The three Vv. 
 which follow the Vulg. all translate 
 riv ('qusB est ex m.,' Vulg.), — that is 
 of deade {men), Wicl. ; that is from 
 the deed, Gov. Test., Ehem. {which); 
 the insertion of the article is cer- 
 tainly intended emphatically to spe- 
 cify what follows, but appy. falls 
 short of the very distinctive force 
 conveyed by the parallel insertion of 
 the relative in English. 
 
 12. Not that I have] So Wicl., 
 Gov. (both), Gban., Ehem., Eev.: not 
 as though I had, Auth., Tynd., Gen., 
 Bish. On the use of the auxiliary 
 ' have ' in the translation of the aor. 
 with rjSr), see notes on Eph. iii. 
 
Chap. III. 9 — 15. 
 
 261 
 
 attained, or am already made perfect; but I am pressing 
 onward if that I may even lay hold on that for which 
 also I was laid hold on by Christ. Brethren, I count 13 
 not MYSELF to have gotten hold : but one thing I do, 
 forgetting the things that are behind, and stretching 
 forth after the things that are before, I press on toward 14 
 the mark unto the prize of the heavenly calling of God 
 in Christ Jesus. Let so many of us then as are perfect 15 
 be of this mind : and if in any thing ye are differently 
 
 5 {Transl.), and on i Tim. i. 20 
 {Transl.). Or am already, 
 
 &c.] So Bev.: or nowe am parfite, 
 WiOL., Rhbm. ; or that I am allready 
 p., Gov., Gov. Test, {now). Gran.; 
 either were already perfect, Auth., 
 Tynd., Gen., Bish. On the transla- 
 tion of the perfect, see notes on Col. 
 i. 16 (Transl.). Am pressing 
 
 onward] Sim. Kev. {press on) : follow 
 after, Auth.; sue, Wicl. ; pursue, 
 Bhem. ; folowe, Tynd. and remaining 
 Vv. May even] May, Auth., 
 
 Bey. Lay hold on . .was laid 
 
 hold on] Apprehend... am apprehend- 
 ed, Axstb., Eev. {was); comprehende... 
 am comprehendide, Wicl. and re- 
 maining Vv. By] So Bev. : of, 
 Auth. and all other Vv. Christ] 
 "Christ Jesus, Auth., Eev. 
 
 13. Gotten hold] Sim. Tynd., Gov. 
 (both), G^in., gotten it: apprehended, 
 Auth., Eev.; comprehendide, Wicl., 
 Bhem.; atteined to it. Gen.; at- 
 tained, Bish. One thing] 
 So all Vv. except Auth.jGean., Bish., 
 this one thing. I do] So 
 Auth., Gen., Bev.: I saye, Tynd. 
 and all the other Vv. except Wicl., 
 Bhem., which omit. The things 
 (bis)] So Gov. Test., Bev.; the th... 
 those, Bhem. : those things, Auth., 
 Wicl., Gban., Bish. ; that, Tynd., 
 Gov., Gen. That (bis)] So 
 Wicl., Gov. Test., Bhem.: which, 
 Auth. and the remaining Vv. If the 
 
 distinction alluded to on Eph. i. 23 
 {Transl.) be correct, ' that ' would 
 seem here slightly more exact than 
 'which.' Stretching forth after] 
 
 Sim. Wicl., Tynd., Gov. (both), 
 Bhem. , Eev. {forward to) : reach- 
 ing forth unto, AuiH. ; endeiumre my 
 selfe vnto, Gban., Gen., Bish., with 
 a different construction. 
 
 14. Press on] So Bev. : pursue, 
 Wicl., Ehem. ; followe hard, Gen.; 
 press, Auth. and remaining Vv. In 
 this verse the simple English present 
 is more suitable than the auxiliary 
 with the part., as in ver. 12. There 
 the adverb ijdTj and the past tenses 
 IXa^ov and rereXeiujuat suggest a 
 contrast in point of time; here the 
 iterative force involved in the English 
 present (Latham, Engl. Lang. § 573) 
 is more appropriate. 
 
 Unto] So Eev. : for, Auth. 
 Heavenly] High, Auth. and the 
 other Vv. except Ehem. , supernal. 
 
 15. Let so many, &o.] Let us there- 
 fore as many, Auth. and aU Vv. ex- 
 cept WioL., which translates the 
 clause, therfore who euer loe ben par- 
 fite. As are] So Gov. Test, 
 (om. as), Ehem. : as he, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. except Wicl. (see above). 
 Be of this mind] Feele we this thing, 
 Wicl. (see above) ; be thus wyse mind- 
 ed, Tynd., Gov., Gkan. ; be thus 
 minded, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 In any thing] So Auth., Bev. ; 
 
262 
 
 PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 i6 minded, even this will God reveal to you. Nevertheless, 
 whereto we have attained, — in the same direction walk 
 ye onward. 
 
 17 Brethren, be followers together of me, and mark them 
 
 18 which are walking so as ye have us for an ensample. For 
 many walk, of whom many times I used to tell you, and 
 now tell you even weeping, that they are the enemies of 
 
 19 the cross of Christ: whose end is perdition, whose God 
 is their belly, and whose glory is in their shame, who are 
 
 30 minding earthly things. For OUR commonwealth is in 
 heaven ; from whence we also tarry for, as a Saviour, the 
 
 21 Lord Jesus Christ : who shall transform the body of our 
 humiliation so that it be fashioned like to the body of His 
 glory, according to the working whereby He is able even 
 
 omitted by remaining Vv. except 
 WiOL., Ehem., for which see below. 
 Are differently minded] Be otherwise 
 m., AuTH., Eev. (are), and all Vv. 
 except Ehem. {any otherwise), and 
 WiCL. which gives vndirstonden other 
 maner any thing. Even this 
 
 will God, &e.] Sim. Eev. (shall) : God 
 shall reveal even this unto you, Auth. 
 
 16. Attained} Already attained, 
 Auth., Eev. ; attayned vnto, Cean., 
 BiSH, ; conien, Wicl. and remaining 
 Vv. In the same direction, &e.] 
 *Let tis walk by the same rule, let vs 
 mind the same thing, Auth.; hy that 
 same rule let us walk, Eev. 
 
 17. Are walking] Walk, Auth. 
 and all Vv. It seems desirable to 
 make some slight distinction between 
 the pres. participle in this verse and 
 the pres. indie, in ver. 18, where 
 Gov. Test, alone gives do walke. 
 
 18. Many times I used, &o.] I 
 haue ofte tolde you. Gov. Test. ; often 
 I told you, Ehem. ; I have told you 
 often, Auth., Eev. (omits have), and 
 remaining Vv. {seyde to you ofte, 
 WioL.). The change is made to pre- 
 serve the true force of ac7oc, and 
 the jrapiix'!"'''; 'ToX\a...7ro\\iKi.s. 
 
 19. Perdition] So Rev. : destruc- 
 tion, Auth., Ehem. ; deth {or peris- 
 chynge), Wicl.; death, Gov. Test.; 
 dampnacion, Tynd. and remaining 
 Vv. Compare notes on i Tim. vi. g. 
 Are minding, &o.] Mind earthly things, 
 Auth., Gov. Test, {dom.), Gen.,Bish., 
 Ehem. {worldly), Eev. ; saueren e. th., 
 Wicl. ; are worldely mynded,TYSi),, 
 Cean. ; are earthly mynded. Gov. 
 
 ■20. Commonwealth] Conversation, 
 Auth. and all Vv. except Wicl., 
 lyuynge; Eev., citizenship. 
 We also tarry for, &a.] Also we look 
 for the Saviour, Auth., Gen., Bish. ; 
 we dbiden the saueour, Wicl.; we 
 loke for a saveour, Tynd., Cov. {the), 
 Cean. {the) ; tve do wayte for the s., 
 Cov. Test.; we expect the Sauiowr, 
 Ehem. ; also we wait for a 8. , Eev. 
 
 21. Transform] Conferme, Wicl.; 
 reforme, Ehem. ; change, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. except Eev., fashion 
 anew. The body of our 
 
 humiliation] So Eev., and sim. Ehem., 
 the body of our humilitie; Wicl., 
 the body of owe mekenesse: our vile 
 body, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 {bodies, Tynd.). So that it be} 
 
 *That it may be, Auth. The body 
 
Chap. III. i6— IV. 6. 
 
 263 
 
 to subdue all things to Himself. Wherefore, my IV. 
 
 brethren dearly beloved and longed for, my joy and 
 crown, so stand fast in the Lord, dearly beloved. 
 
 I exhort Euodia, and I exhort Syntyche, to be of the 2 
 same mind in the Lord. Yea I entreat thee also, true 3 
 yoke-fellow, give them aid, since they laboured with me in 
 the Gospel, in company with Clement also, and the rest of 
 my fellow-labourers whose names are in the book of life. 
 
 Rejoice in the Lord alway: again I will say, Re- 
 joice. Let your forbearance be known to all men. The 
 Lord is at hand. Be anxious about nothing; but in 
 every thing by your prayer and your supplication with 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 6 
 
 of His glory] So Ehem., and sim. 
 
 WiOL., the body of clerenes: his 
 
 glorious 6., Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 To Himself] Unto h., Auth., Eev. 
 
 Chaptbe IV. 1. Wherefore] So 
 Gov. (both), Eev. : therefore, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. {herfore, T:end.) 
 except WiCL., and so. The more 
 exact translation 'so then' is here 
 somewhat awkward, on account of 
 the following ' so.' Dearly 
 
 beloved (2)] My d. b., Adth., Eev. 
 (omits dearly); my deerest, Ehem.; 
 mostdere bretheren, Wicl. ; ye beloved, 
 Ttnd. and remaining Vv. {moost 6., 
 Gov. Test.). 
 
 2. Exhort (bis)] So Eev. : beseech 
 (bis), Auth.; desire... beseeche,'EiKEM.; 
 preye...biseche, Wiol. and remainiag 
 Vv. As irapaKoKd is a word of very 
 frequent occurrence in St Paul's 
 Epp. (comp. notes on i Tim. i. 3), 
 the translation must vary with the 
 context: here perhaps the slightly 
 stronger 'exhort' is more suitable 
 than the now weaker 'beseech.' 
 
 To be] So Eev.: that they be, Auth. 
 
 3. Yea] *And, Auth. Give 
 them, &o.] Sim. Eev. (help these 
 women, for they) : helpe thou the ilke 
 {'wymmen)that,'WiCL.; heVpethewemen 
 
 which, Tynd., Gov., Chan. ; help those 
 women which, AuiH. and remaining 
 Vv. {that, Ehem.). In com- 
 
 pany with] With, Auth. and aU the 
 other Vv. The rest of my] So 
 
 Ehem. (om. of), Eev. : other myn, 
 WiOL. ; my other. Gov., Gov. Test. 
 (mine); other my, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. 
 
 4. Again] So Gov. Test., Gen., 
 Ehem., Eev., and sim. Wicl., efte: 
 and again, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 I will say] So Eev. : f sa^, Auth. and 
 all other Vv. To] Unto, Auth. , Be v. 
 
 5. Forbearance] So Eev.: mo- 
 deration, AuiH. ; temperaunce (or 
 pacience), WiOL. ; softenes, Tynd., 
 Gov. (both), Cban. ; patient minde, 
 Gen., Bish. ; modestie, Ehem. 
 
 6. Anxious about nothing] Sim, 
 Eev. (in nothing be anxious) : careful 
 for n., Auth., Gean., Bish. ; no thing 
 bisie, Wicl.; not carfull, Tynd., 
 Gov.; nothynge carefull, Gov. Test., 
 Gen., Ehem. Your (bis)] 
 Omitted by Auth. and all Vv. The 
 Vv. which erroneously connect iravrl 
 with TJ7 vpoaevxa are Wicl., Gov. 
 Test., and, what is singular, Gran., 
 as this Version was not made from 
 the Vulgate, and was preceded by 
 the correct translations of Tynd. and 
 
264 
 
 PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 thanksgiving let your requests be made known before 
 
 7 God. And the peace of God, which passeth every under- 
 standing, shall keep your hearts and your thoughts in 
 
 8 Christ Jesus. Finally, brethren, whatsoever things 
 are true, whatsoever things are seemly, whatsoever things 
 are just, whatsoever things are pure, whatsoever things 
 are lovely, whatsoever things are of good report, what- 
 ever virtue there is, and whatever praise there is, think 
 
 9 on these things. The things also which ye learned and 
 received, and heard and saw in me, these do: and the 
 God of peace shall be with you. 
 
 Now I rejoiced in the Lord greatly, that now at 
 
 length ye flourished again in respect of your care for me, 
 
 wherein ye were also careful, but ye lacked opportunity. 
 
 II Not that I speak in consequence of want: for I have 
 
 lO 
 
 Gov. Before] So Co7. : unto, 
 
 AuTH. and remaining Vv. except 
 WiOL., at; Rhem., with. Though 
 not perfectly exact, the above trans- 
 lation of irpos is slightly preferable 
 to 'unto,' as not seeming to imply to 
 the English reader that a dat. is 
 used in the original. 
 
 J. Every understanding] Allunder- 
 standing, Auih. and all Vv. except 
 WiOL., Gov. Test., al witte. 
 Your thoughts] So Eev. : minds, Auth. 
 and all Vv. except Wicl., Gov. Test. 
 {your vnd. ), undirstondyngis ; Ehem., 
 intelligences. In'] So all Vv. 
 
 except Auth. , Ckan., Bish., through. 
 
 8. Seemly] Honest, Auth. and all 
 Vv. except Wicl., clmste; Eev., 
 honourable : Auth. Marg. gives vener- 
 able. Whatever virtue, &o.] 
 If there be any virtus, and if there be 
 any praise, Auth., Bish., Eev., and 
 sim. all other Vv. 
 
 g. The things] So Gov, Test., Ebv. : 
 those things, Auth.; the remaining 
 Vv. omit. Also which ye 
 
 learned] The whiche & yee liane I., 
 Wicl. ; which ye have both I., Auth. , 
 Eev. (omits have), and remaining 
 
 Vv. {y'. Gov. Test.; you, Ehem.). 
 Saw] So Eev. : seen, Auth. and all 
 Vv. These do] Do yee thes 
 
 thingis, Wicl. ; th. th. doe ye, Ehem. : 
 do, Auth. ; do the same, Gov. Test. ; 
 those thynges do, Tynd., Eev. {these), 
 and remaining Vv. 
 
 10. Now] Sim. Gen., now. ..also: 
 but, Auth., Bish., Eev.; fforsothe, 
 Wicl.; and, Ehem.; the rest omit. 
 At length] So Eev., and sim. Ehem., 
 at the length : at the last, Auth. and 
 the other Vv. except Wicl., summe 
 tyme aftirwarde (but omitting now, , 
 as also does Gov. Test.). Ye 
 flourished again,. &e.] Your care of 
 me hath flourished again, Auth.; yee 
 agen floureden for to feel for ms, 
 Wicl. ; ye are revived agayne to care 
 for me, Tynd., Gov. (both), Gen., 
 Bish. {you); youre care is reuyued 
 agayne fair me, Gban. ; you haue re- 
 florished to care for me, Ehem. ; ye 
 have revived your thought for me, 
 Ebv. 
 
 11. In consequence of] In respect 
 of, Auth., Eev.; as /or, Wicl.; as it 
 were for, Ehem. ; because of, Tynd. 
 and remaining Vv. The translation 
 
Chap. IV. 7 — 15. 
 
 265 
 
 learned, in what state I am, therein to be content. I 
 know also how to be abased, I know too how to abound : 
 in every thing and in all things I have been fully taught 
 both to be full and to be hungry, both to abound and to 
 suffer want. I can do all things in Him that strength- 
 eneth me. Notwithstanding ye did well that ye had fel- 
 lowship with my affliction. Moreover, Philippians, your- 
 selves also know that in the beginning of the Gospel, 
 when I departed from Macedonia, no church communi- 
 cated with me as touching any account of giving and 
 
 la 
 
 13 
 
 15 
 
 in the text is probably a modem 
 lorm of expression, but is apparently 
 exact : that of Auth., though not in- 
 correct, is somewhat ambiguous. 
 What] So Gov. Test. : whiehe, Wiol. ; 
 whatsoever, Auth. and the remaining 
 Vt. except Ehem. which translates 
 the clause, I haue learned, to be con- 
 tent with the things that I haue. 
 Therein} So Eet. : therewith, Auth. 
 and the other Vv. except Rhem. (see 
 above), and Wicl., Gov. Test., which 
 omit. 
 
 12. / know also how to] *I know 
 both how to, Auth. , Ehem. (om. how) ; 
 lean both, Ttnd., Gov. Test.; I can, 
 Gov.; and I can, Gbh. ; Iknowehowe 
 to, Cban., Bish. It may here be re- 
 marked in passing that the position 
 of KoX in Greek, and that of 'also,' 
 ' even,' or ' too,' in English, will not 
 always exactly correspond. Here 
 for instance xal belongs to raTrcicouo-- 
 8ai (see notes), whereas in English 
 the 'also' seems idiomatically to 
 take an earlier place in the sentence. 
 I know too hoto to] And I know how to, 
 Auth., Gban., Bish., Eev. {know 
 also) ; I can also, Ttnd. ; and I can. 
 Gov. (both). Gen. ; I know also to, 
 Ehem. In every thing, &o.] 
 
 So Ebv. : every where, and in all 
 things, Auth. and all Vv. (Gov. 
 Test., Gen., omit and). Have 
 
 b6en fully taught] Sim. Gov. Test., 
 
 am taught : am ordeynyde, Wiol. ; am 
 mete. Gov.; have I learned the secret, 
 Eev.; am instructed, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. Want] So Gen., 
 Eev. -. nyseyste, Wicl. ; penurie, 
 Ehem. ; need, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. The change is made to preserve 
 the waprixnm, iffT^pricriv (ver. ii)... 
 
 13. In Him that] So Wicl., 
 Ehem., Eev. : thorow him that. Gov. 
 Test.; *through Christ which, Auth., 
 Gov., Cban,, Bish.; thorow the helpe 
 of Christ which, Tynd., Gen. 
 Strengtheneth] So Auth. and all Vv, 
 except Wiol., Gov. Test., comfortith. 
 The force of ivdw. (see notes) cannot 
 be expressed without weakening the 
 emphasis of the verse, and impairing 
 the rhythm. 
 
 14. Did well] So Eev.: have well 
 done, Auth. and the other Vv. except 
 Wicl., Gov. (both), Ehem., hanedone 
 wel. Had fellowship] 
 So Eev., and Auth. in Eph. v. ii ; 
 did communicate, Auth. 
 
 15. Moreover] Now, Avis..; ffor- 
 sothe, Wiol. ; but. Gov. (both) ; and. 
 Gen., Ehem., Eev.; omitted by Ttnd., 
 Cean., Bish. Philippians, 
 &c.] Ye P. know also, Auth., Gov. 
 Test., Gen., Bish.; and yee philipen- 
 ses witen, Wicl.; ye of Philippos 
 knowe, Tsnd., Gov., Gban. (adding 
 also); you also know 6 P., Ehem. 
 
266 
 
 PHILIPPIANS. 
 
 16 receiving, but ye only: since even in Thessalonica ye 
 
 17 sent to me both once and again unto my need. Not 
 that I seek after your gift; but I seek after the fruit that 
 
 18 multiplieth unto your account. But I possess all things 
 and abound: I am full, now that I have received from 
 Epaphroditus the things which came from you, a savour 
 of sweet smell, a sacrifice acceptable, well-pleasing, to 
 
 19 God. But my God shall fill up every need of yours 
 
 ye yourselves also know, ye P., Eev. 
 As touching any, &o.] As concerning, 
 AuTH., Tynd., Gov. (omitting as), 
 Gran., Bish. ; in resoune of, WiOL. ; 
 in the waye of, Gov. Test. ; concern- 
 ing the matter of, Gen., Eev. {in 
 the m.) ; m the account of, Bhem. 
 Perhaps the insertion of the indefi- 
 nite ' any ' may be considered per- 
 missible as serving slightly to clear 
 up the meaning. 
 
 16. Since] For, AuiH., and all 
 Vv. To me] So Wiol. (but 
 translating the clause, into vse to 
 me): Aoth. and all the other Vv. 
 omit. Both once] Once, 
 AuTH. and all Vv. Unto] 
 So AuiH. and aU Vv. (Wiol., into; 
 Gov. Test., Ehem., to) except Gen., 
 for. Need] So Tynd. 
 (nedes),EEV.: necessity, Avtb. : Tynd., 
 Gen., alone keep the same transl. of 
 XP^la here and in ver. 19, Gen. gives 
 necessitie... necessities, 
 
 1 7. That] So all Vv. except Auih. , 
 because ; Wiol., for. Seek after 
 (bis)] Sim. Eev. {seek for) ; seek... 
 agen seek, Wiol.; seke...requyre, Gov. 
 Test., both following the Vulg. 'quse- 
 ro. . .require ;' seke. . .seke. Gov., Ehem.: 
 desire... desire, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. Your gift] A gift, 
 Auth., Gen., Bish.; gifte, Wiol.; 
 gyftes, Tynd., Gov., Gban. ; anye 
 gyfte, Gov. Test.; the gift, Ehem., 
 Eev. Seek after] Sim. Eev. {for) : 
 desire, &.xiin. Thefruit] So Coy., 
 Gen., Ehem., Eev.: fruit, Auth. 
 
 That multiplieth unto] That may 
 abound to, Auth. ; that increaseth to, 
 Eev. The change is made to preserve 
 in the translation the different words 
 used in the original here and in ver. 
 18, 7rXeo^t£feo' and irepiaaeieiv. 
 
 18. Possess] Receaved, Tynd., 
 Cras., and, giving haue r., Auth. 
 Marg., Gen., Bish. ; have, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. The transl. in the 
 text is perhaps the nearest approach 
 that can be made to the meaning of 
 dTT^X"! see PhUem. 15. 
 
 All things] So Wiol., Ehem., Eev.: 
 all, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 Now that I have] After that I 
 had, Tynd., Gen., Bish.: having, 
 Auth., Eev.; whan I, Gov. (both); 
 after that I, Cean., Ehem. (om. 
 that). From ( i)] So Eev.: of, Auth. 
 and aU other Vv. Which came 
 
 from you] So Tynd., Gov., Gen., 
 and sim. Eev. {that): which were 
 sent from you, Auth., Gban., Bish.; 
 the whiche yee senten, Wiol., and 
 sim. Gov. Test., Ehem. 
 Savour of sweet smell] Sim. Gov. 
 Test. , sauoure of swetnesse : odour of 
 a sweet smell, Auth., Gkan., Bish., 
 Eev. ; odour e of swetnesse, Wiol., 
 Gov., Ehem.; odour that smelUth 
 swete, Tynd., Gen. 
 
 19. Shall Jill up] Fulfilde, Wiol.; 
 fulfill, Tynd., Gov.; shal fulfil. Gen., 
 Eev. ; shall supply, Auth., Cran., 
 Bish., Ehem. (om. shalT); accom- 
 plysh. Gov. Test. Every... 
 of yours] So Eev. : all your, Auth. 
 
Chap. IV. i6 — 23. 
 
 267 
 
 according to His riches in glory in Christ Jesus. Now ao 
 to God and our Father be glory for ever and ever. Amen. 
 
 Salute every saint in Christ Jesus. The brethren 21 
 which are with me salute you. All the saints salute you, 2 a 
 but especially they that are of Caesar's household. 
 
 The grace of the Lord Jesus Christ be with your 23 
 spirit. 
 
 and all other Vv. Need] See 
 
 notes on ver. i6 {Transl.). In {2)] 
 So all Vv. except Auth., Cban., btj. 
 
 20. To] Unto, Auth., Eev. This 
 slight change is made, as in oh. iii. 
 ■21 and elsewhere, to distinguish be- 
 tween the simple dat. and the aoo. 
 with a preposition. 
 
 21. Salute... salute] So Gov. (both), 
 Ehem., Eev.: grete..,greten, Wiol. ; 
 salute... greet, Auth. and remaining 
 
 Vv. A change of translation in the 
 same verse does not seem desirable. 
 
 21. But especially] So Gov. (both), 
 Ehem., Eev. (omits but) : chiefly, 
 Adth.; moste sothely, Wicl. ; and 
 most of all, Tynd., Gen.; most of 
 all, Cban., Bish. 
 
 23. The Lord] *Our Lord, Auth. 
 Your spirit] So Eev.: *you all, Auth. 
 Auth. and all Vv. except 
 Eev. add *A'men. 
 
THE EPISTLE TO THE COLOSSIANS. 
 
 I. T)AUL, an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God, 
 a J- and Timothy our brother, to the saints in Colossse 
 
 and faithful brethren in Christ. Grace be to you, and 
 
 peace, from God our Father. 
 
 3 We give thanks to God the Father of our Lord Jesus 
 
 4 Christ, praying always for you, having heard of your 
 faith in Christ Jesus, and of the love which ye have to- 
 
 5 ward all the saints, because of the hope which is laid up 
 for you in heaven, whereof ye heard before in the word of 
 
 Chapter I. i. Christ Jesm] So 
 Eev.: * Jesus Christ, Auth. 
 Timothy] So Wicl., Gov. Test., 
 Ehem., Eev.: Timotheus, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. The principle put 
 forward in the Translators' Preface 
 to Auth., though appy. not always 
 followed, seems sound and reason- 
 able, viz. to adopt, in the case of 
 proper names, those forms which 
 are most current, and by which the 
 bearers of the names are most popu- 
 larly known. 
 
 ■i. Saints in Colossce, &c.] Sim. 
 Tynd., Gov., Gban., sayntes which 
 are at C, &c.: Saints and faithful 
 brethren in Christ, which are at C, 
 Auth., Eev., sim. Gov. Test.; them 
 that ben at colocence, holy and feith- 
 ful br. in crist Ihu, Wicl., and sim. 
 Gen., Bish., Ehem. Grace 
 
 be to you] Grace be unto you, Auth. ; 
 Gi'ace to you, Eev. Owr 
 
 Father] Auth. adds *and the Lord 
 Jesus Christ. 
 
 3. God the Father] So Eev.: 
 *God, and the Father, Auth. 
 
 4. Having heard] So Eev. : he- 
 rynge, Wioii., Gov. Test., Ehem.; 
 for we haue hearde, Cran.; since we 
 heard, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 The transl. of Auth., al., is perhaps 
 somewhat ambiguous, ' since ' having 
 as much a causal as a temporal re- 
 ference. As the latter seems to be 
 the most probable reference in the 
 present case (see notes in loc), it 
 will perhaps be best to adopt what 
 seems a more definitely temporal 
 translation ; see notes on Phil. ii. 30 
 (Traml.). Toward] So Gov. 
 Test., Gen., Ehem., Eev. : to, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. {into, Wicl.). 
 
 5. Because of the hope] So Gov. 
 Test., Eev.:/o9' the h., Auth., Wicl., 
 Ehem.; for the hopes sake, Tynd. 
 and remaining Vv. Word 
 of Truth, &a.] So Gov.; and sim. 
 Wicl., Gov. Test., Bish., giving of 
 the g.: loord of the truth of the G., 
 
Chap. I. i — lo. 
 
 269 
 
 Truth in the Gospel; which is come unto you, as also in 6 
 all the world it is bringing forth fruit and increasing, as 
 it doth also in you, since the day ye heard of it, and came 
 to know the grace of God in truth: even as ye learned 7 
 of Epaphras our beloved fellow-servant, who is on our 
 behalf a faithful minister of Christ; who also declared to 8 
 us your love in the Spirit. 
 
 For this cause we also, since the day we heard it, do 9 
 not cease to pray for you, and to make our petition that 
 ye may be filled with the knowledge of His will in all 
 spiritual wisdom and understanding; that ye may walk 
 worthily of the Lord unto all pleasing, bringing forth 
 
 10 
 
 AuTir., Ehem., Bev. ; true worde of 
 the g., Tynd. , Ckan. ; worde of trueth, 
 which is the G., Gen. Thus the 
 true relation of the genitives seems 
 fairly expressed by four of the older 
 Vv. ; see notes. The article preceding 
 a\ij0eias appears only to mark that 
 aXi)9. is used in its most abstract 
 sense. This use of the article in the 
 case of abstract nouns is commonly 
 marked in this Eevision by a capital 
 letter. 
 
 6. As also in, &o.] *As it is in all 
 the world, and, Auth.; even as it is 
 also in all the world, Ebv. 
 
 Is bringing forth fruit] Bringeth forth 
 fruit, AtJTH., Gov. Test, (omitting 
 forth) ; makith fruyte, Wicl. ; fructi- 
 Jieth,'RsEis.; bearing fruit, Eev.; is 
 frutefull, Tynd., Cbak., Gen., Bish. 
 And increasing] Auth. *omits. 
 Came to know] Knew, Auth. and all 
 Vv. (haue...knmoen, Gov. Test.) ex- 
 cept Tynd., Gean., had experience 
 in,— a translation which similarly 
 with the text endeavours to express 
 the force of eniyvoiTe (see notes on 
 ver. 9), and deserves consideration. 
 
 7. Even as ye] So Eev.: as ye 
 *also, Auth. The translation of 
 KaSiis, whether ' as ' or ' even as,' 
 must depend on the general tone of 
 
 the passage : here the latter seems 
 to connect the present verse a little 
 more closely with the concluding 
 words of ver. 6. Beloved] 
 
 So Eev. . moste derworth, Wicl. ; 
 moost dearly beloued. Gov. Test. ; 
 deerest, Ehem. ; dear, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. : see notes on 1 Tim. i. 
 1 (TransL). On <mr behalf] 
 
 So Eev. ; *fw you, Auth. and all 
 other Vv. To] Unio, Auth., Eev. 
 
 9. Make our petition] Sim. Eev. 
 (make request); desire, Auth. and 
 four other Vv. and sim. Tynd., 
 Ehem. , employing the participle ; so 
 also Wicl., Gov. Test., which give 
 axinge. May] So Gov. Test., 
 Ehem., Eev.: might, Auth. and the 
 remaining Vv. except Wicl., which 
 omits. Spiritual wisdom and 
 und.] So Gov. Test., Ebv.: wisdom 
 and spiritual und., Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. (gostly vnd., Wicl.). 
 
 10. May] Might, Auth. : see note 
 on the previous verse. Eev. adopts 
 the simple infin., to walk, &o. 
 Worthily] So Wicl., Gov. Test., 
 Eev.: worthy, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. Bringing forth fruit] 
 So Gov. Test. : being fruitful, Auth. 
 All Vv. except Auth. preserve the 
 same translation as in ver. 6. 
 
270 
 
 COLOSSIANS. 
 
 fruit in every good work, and increasing by the know- 
 
 11 ledge of God; being strengthened with all strength, ac- 
 cording to the might of His glory, unto all patience 
 
 12 and long-suffering; with joy giving thanks to the Father, 
 who made us meet for the portion of the inheritance 
 
 13 of the saints in light : who delivered us out of the 
 power of darkness, and translated us into the kingdom 
 
 14 of the Son of His love; in whom we have Redemption, 
 
 15 even the forgiveness of our sins. Who is the image 
 of the invisible God, the firstborn before every creature : 
 
 By the\ *In the, Auth. 
 
 II. Being strengthened] So Gov. 
 Test.: comfortyde, Wiol.; and to be 
 strengthed, Gov. ; strengthened, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. Strength] 
 
 Vertue, Wiol.: power. Gov. (both), 
 Ehem., Bev. ; might, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. It is perhaps desirable 
 to keep the Tra/jiJx'J"'" of the original, 
 and reserve ' might ' for Kparos, see 
 next note. The might of 
 
 His glory] So Gov. (both), Ehem., 
 Kev., and sim. Wicl. {clerenesse) : 
 his glorious power, Auth. and the re- 
 maining Vv. Joy] So 
 Wiol., Gov. Test., Ehem., Eev.: joy- 
 fulness, Auth. and the remaining 
 Vv. : comp. notes on Phil. ii. 29 
 (Tran^l.). This is connected with 
 ■what follows, as in the text, by Gov. 
 Test., and appy. Ttnd., Ehem. ; 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. join it to 
 what precedes : see notes in loc. 
 
 i-z. To the F.] Unto the F., Auth., 
 Eev. Who] So Eev.: which, Auth. 
 Made] So Wicl., Eev.: hath made, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 For the portion, &e.] Into the parte 
 of sorte, Wicl. ; for the enheritaunce. 
 Gov.; vnto the part of the Zot, Ehem.; 
 to be partakers of the inheritance, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. It will be 
 observed that Wicl. and Ehem. alone 
 preserve a strictly literal meaning of 
 K\rjpos. , , 
 
 13. Delivered] So Wicl., Eev. : 
 hath delivered, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. Out of] So Gov. 
 Test., Eev.: from, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. Translated] 
 So Wicl., Eev. : hath translated, 
 Auth. and the remaining Vv. (Gov. 
 omits hath here, but gives it with 
 delyuered). The Son of 
 His love] So Ehem., Eev., Auth. 
 Marg., Wicl. (louynge) : his dear Son, 
 Auth. and the remaining Vv. {be- 
 loued. Gov. Test.). 
 
 14. Redemption] Auth. adds 
 *through his blood. Our sim] So 
 Eev,: sins, Auth, and all other Vv. 
 
 15. Firstborn] So Auth., Gov. 
 Test., Gen., Bish. , Ehem.. Eev. ; 
 Jirste bigoten, Wicl., Tynd., Gov., 
 CBiN. It is appy. not of much mo- 
 ment which of these expressions is 
 adopted, as the meaning is substan- 
 tially the same. In Eom. viii. 29 
 Auth. adopts the former, in Kev. i. 
 5 the latter : in expressions of this 
 peculiar and mystical nature it seems 
 desirable to preserve a uniform trans- 
 lation : see ver. 18. Before] 
 So Gov.: of, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. This latter translation was re- 
 tained in ed. i, as most inclusive; 
 the arguments however for the transl. 
 in the text (see notes) seem suffi- 
 ciently strong to justify the altera- 
 tion, 
 
Chap. I. ii — 20. 
 
 271 
 
 because in Him were all things created, in the heavens 16 
 and on the earth, the things visible and the things in- 
 visible, whether they he Thrones or Dominions or Princi- 
 palities or Powers, — all things have been created by Him 
 and for Him; and He is before all things, and in Him all 17 
 things subsist. And He is the head of the body, the 18 
 church ; who is the beginning, the firstborn from among 
 the dead, in order that in all things He Himself might 
 have the pre-eminence: because in Him it pleased all 19 
 the fulness of the Godhead to dwell, and through Him to 20 
 reconcile all things unto Himself, having made peace 
 through the blood of His cross; through Him, I say, 
 
 16. Because] So Rhem. : for, 
 Adth. and remaining Vv. In 
 (i)] So WioL., Ehem., Ebv. : by, 
 AuTH. and remaining Vv. In the 
 heavens and on the earth] So Eev. 
 {upon) : *that are in heaven, and that 
 are in earth, Atjth. The 
 tilings, &o.] Sim. Eev. (omits the): 
 visible and invisible, Auth. 
 
 Have been created^ So Eev. : ben 
 made of nougt, WiCL. ; are ereatyd, 
 Tynd., Gov. (both); were cr., Adth. 
 and remaining Vv. As the Greek per- 
 fect expresses both ' have been ' and 
 ' are,' there is sometimes a diflBoulty 
 in knowing which of the two to se- 
 lect : perhaps as a general rule 
 (where idiom will permit, and there 
 is no danger of misconception) it is 
 best to adopt the former when past 
 time seems to come more in promi- 
 nence, the latter when present effects 
 are more immediately the subject of 
 consideration. 
 
 17. In] So aU Vv. except Auth., 
 Gran., by. Subsist] Ben, Wicl.; 
 have their beynge, Tynd., Gov., Gkan.; 
 consist, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 18. Who] So Auth., Ehem., Eev.: 
 the whiche, Wicl. ; he, Tynd. and re- 
 maining Vv. The relative translation 
 is scarcely sufficient, as it does not 
 fully convey the explanatory force in 
 
 the relative 'being as He is.' As 
 however the translation in the com- 
 mentary 'seeing He is,' though per 
 se expressing clearly this force of iis, 
 is perhaps somewhat too strong when 
 placed in connexion with what pre- 
 cedes and follows, it seems better 
 to leave Auth. unchanged. 
 From among] From, Auth., Gov. 
 (both), Eev. ; of, Wicl. and remain- 
 ing Vv. In order that] That, 
 Auth. and all Vv. The occasional 
 insertion of 'in order' seems useful 
 where it is required to exhibit clearly 
 the purpose involved in the ante- 
 cedents. He Himself] He, 
 Auth. and all Vv. 
 
 19. Because] So Ehem. : /or, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. In Him, 
 
 &c.] It pleased the Father that in 
 him should all fullness dwell, Auth., 
 Tynd., Cean., Gen., Bish., and sim. 
 Gov. (both), Eev. The two remain- 
 ing Vv. alone do not supply any word 
 in translation, Wicl. giving in hym 
 it pleside to gedir al plente to in- 
 habite, and Ehem., in him it hath 
 vvel pleased, al f. to inhabite. 
 
 ■20. Through him (bis)] So Eev. : by 
 h., Auth. Having made . . . cross] 
 
 Auth. places this clause in the first 
 part of the verse immediately after 
 'and.' All the other Vv. retain the 
 
272 
 
 COLOSSIANS. 
 
 whether they he the things on the earth, or the things in 
 21 the heavens. And you also, though ye were in 
 
 times past alienated and enemies in your understanding 
 33 in wicked works, yet now hath He reconciled in the body 
 
 of His flesh through His death, to present you holy and 
 
 23 blameless and without charge in His sight: if at least ye 
 continue in the faith, grounded and stable, and not moved 
 away from the hope of the Gospel, which ye heard, and 
 which was preached in the hearing of every creature which 
 is under heaven; whereof I Paul became a minister. 
 
 24 Now I rejoice in my sufferings for you, and am filling 
 fully up the lacking measures of the afflictions of Christ 
 
 order of the Greek. The 
 
 things on the earth} Things in e., 
 AuTH. ; things upon the earth, Eev. 
 The things in the heavens} Things in 
 h., AuTH. ; things in the heavens, 
 Bev. 
 
 21. Andyou also] And you, Atjtb., 
 Bev. On this translation of Kal, see 
 notes on Eph. ii. i. Though 
 ye werel Sim., where as ye were, Cov. 
 Test. , Ehem. (you) ; whan yee weren, 
 WiOL. : that were, Auth. ; which were, 
 Tynd. and remaining Vv. except Eev., 
 being. In times past] So 
 Tynd., Gov., Gen. and sim. Bev. 
 {time) : sometimes, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. (-me). Under- 
 standing] So Auth. in Eph. iv. 18: 
 wit, WiOL. ; cogitation, BiSH. ; sense, 
 Ehbm.; mind, Auth., Cov. Test., 
 Bev. ; myndes, Tynd. , Cov. , Gen. 
 In (2)] So WiCL., BisH., Bhem., 
 Eev. : iy, Auth. The remaining Vv. 
 give a' paraphrastic and not altogether 
 correct interpretation of the clause, 
 because youre myndes were set in 
 evyll workes, Tynd., Cov., Cban., 
 Gen.; youre minde beynge set in e. 
 w., Cov. Test. 
 
 22. His death] Death, Auth. and 
 all Vv. Blameless and with- 
 out charge] XJnblameable, and unre- 
 proveable, Auth. ; vnwemmyde and 
 
 with outen reproue, Wiol. ; vnspotted 
 and vnblameable, Cov. Test. ; imma- 
 culate, and blameles, Ehem. ; without 
 blemish and unreproveable, Bev.; vn- 
 blameable, and with out faut, Tynd. 
 and remaining Vv. 
 
 23. If at least] Yifnetheles, Wiol. ; 
 so that, Cov. Test.; if yet, Bhem.; if 
 so be that, Eev. ; if, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. Stable] So 
 WicL., Bhem. : stedfast, Cov. Test., 
 Eev.; settled, Auth.; stably sshed, 
 Tynd. and remaining Vv. 
 
 Not moved away] So Eev. : un- 
 mouable, Wicl., Cov. Test., Ehem. ; 
 be not moved away, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. Heard] So 
 Bev. : have heard, Auth. and all 
 Vv. In the hearing of, &c.] 
 To every creature, Auth., Gen., Bish.; 
 in al creature, Wiol. ; in all creation, 
 Eev.; amonge all creatures, Tynd. 
 and remaining Vv. Became] 
 Am, Gen. ; was made, Eev. ; am 
 made, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 24. Now I] * Who now, Auth. 
 Am filling fully up] Fill up, AuiH. ; 
 fill up on my part, Eev. ; do accom- 
 plish, Ehem. ; fulfille, Wiol. and 
 remaining Vv. The 
 lacking measures] Tho thingis that 
 faylen, Wicl.; the thynges that are 
 lackyng, Cov. Test.; those th. that 
 
Chap. I. 21 — 11. 2. 
 
 273 
 
 in my flesh for His body's sake, which is the church: 
 whereof I became a minister, according to the dispensa- 25 
 tion of God which was given to me for you, to fulfil the 
 word of God; even the mystery which hath lain hid from 36 
 the ages and from the generations, but now hath been 
 made manifest to His saints: to whom God willed to 37 
 make known what are the riches of the glory of this 
 mystery among the Gentiles, which is Christ among you, 
 the hope of Glory: whom we proclaim, admonishing 38 
 every man and teaching every man in all wisdom, that 
 we may present every man perfect in Christ: to which 39 
 end I also labour, striving according to His working, 
 which worketh in me with power. 
 
 For I would have you know what great conflict I have II. 
 for you, and them in Laodicea, and as many as have not 
 seen my face in the flesh; that their hearts may be com- 2 
 forted, they being knit together in love and unto all 
 
 want, Ehem. ; the rest. Gen.; that 
 which is lacking. Rev. ; that which is 
 behind, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 ■25. Becamel A'm,G-E,TS.; wasmade, 
 Eev. ; am made, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vv., as in ver. 23. Was 
 given] So Ttnd., Gran., Eev.: is 
 given, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 26. Lain] Been, Auth., Eev. Per- 
 haps the slight change may better 
 convey the force of the perf. par- 
 ticiple. From the ages and 
 from the gen.] From ages, and from 
 gen., Auth.; from all ages and gen., 
 Eev. Hath been] Sim. Rev. : 
 is, Auth. and all other Vv. 
 
 ■27. Willed to] Was pleased to, 
 Eev. ; would, Auth. and all other Vv. 
 Are] Is, Auth., Eev. Among [i)] So 
 Gov. Test., Auth. Marg. : in, Auth., 
 Rev. and remaining Vv. 
 
 28. Proclaim] So Eev.: preach, 
 Auth. and all other Vv. except Wicl., 
 schewen. Admonishing] 
 
 So Gen., Rhem., Rev. : reprouynge, 
 Wicii. ; rebukynge, Gov. Test. ; warn- 
 
 ing, Auth. and remaining Vv. (and 
 wame, Gov.). Christ] 
 
 * Christ Jems, Auth. 
 
 ■29. To which end] Whereunto, 
 Auth., Gen., Bish., Eev.; inwhiche 
 thing, Wiol.; wherln, Tynd. and 
 remaining Vv. With power] 
 
 Similarly Ehem. (in p.), and Wicl. 
 (in vertue) : mightily, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. 
 
 Ghaptek II. I . Would have you 
 know] So Rev., and similarly Rhem. 
 (vvil h.) : would that ye knew, Auth., 
 Gkan. , Bish. ; wole you for to wite, 
 Wicl. ; wolde ye knewe, Ttnd., Gov. 
 (both). Gen. And them] 
 
 And for them, Auth. and aU Vv. 
 In] Of, Tynd., Gov., Gen. ; at, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. (all except Auth., 
 Eev. prefixing that are). And as 
 many] And for as many, Auth., 
 Eev. 
 
 ■i. May] So Ehem., Eev.: might, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. except 
 Wiol. which omits. TJiey 
 
274 
 
 COLOSSIANS. 
 
 riches of the full assurance of the understanding, unto 
 the full knowledge of the mystery of God, even Christ ; 
 
 3 in whom are, hidden, all the treasures of wisdom and 
 
 4 knowledge. This I say, that no one may beguile you 
 
 5 with enticing speech. For if I am absent verily in the 
 flesh, yet still I am with you in the spirit, joying with 
 you and beholding your order, and the firm foundation of 
 your faith in Christ. 
 
 6 As then ye received Christ Jesus the Lord, so walk 
 
 7 ye in Him : rooted and being built up in Him, and being 
 stablished in your faith, even as ye were taught, abound- 
 
 being] *Bemg, Auth. The 
 
 understanding] Understanding, Auth. 
 and all Vv., omitting the art. The 
 clause however is translated ryches 
 of fullvnderstondyngehjTTia)., Gov. 
 (both), Cran. Full know- 
 
 ledgeJAcknowledgement, Auth. ; know- 
 ynge, WiCL. ; knowledge, Gov. (both) ; 
 that they may know, Ebv. The jux- 
 taposition of iTriyvoKTiS and yvans 
 seems here to justify this translation; 
 comp. notes. Of God, even Christ] 
 Of God, *and of the Father, and of 
 Christ, Auth. 
 
 3. Hidden] Sim. Eev., but placing 
 hidden at end of sentence : hid, Auth. 
 and all other Vv. 
 
 4. This] So Eev.: *and this, 
 Auth. That no one] So Eev. : 
 lest * any man, Auth. May] 
 So Eev.: omitted by WiOL., Gov. 
 Test., Ehem. ; should, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. Enticing 
 speech] Heygthe of wordis, Wicl.; 
 hye wordes. Gov. Test.; perswasion 
 of wordes, BiSH. ; loftines of wordes, 
 Ehem. ; persuasiveness of speech, Eev.; 
 enticing words, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. 
 
 5. If I am absent verily] Whi 
 and I be abs. , Wicl. ; though I am 
 abs.. Gov. Test., Eev. ; though I 
 be abs., Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 {although, Ehem.). Yet still 
 
 I am] But. ..I am, Wicl.; yet... I am, 
 Ehem.; yet am I, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. Joying with 
 you] No Version inserts with you. 
 Firm foundation] Stedfastness, Auth., 
 Gov. (both), Eev. ; sadnes, Wicl. ; 
 constancie, Ehem. 
 
 6. As then ye] As ye have there- 
 fore, Auth. and all Vv. (therfor as 
 yee hane, Wicl., Ehem.) except Eev., 
 as therefore ye rec. 
 
 7. Being built up] Beynge rooted 
 and buylded. Gov. Test.; and be r. 
 and b.. Gov. ; so that ye be r. and b. 
 Gran.; Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 omit being. The insertion is an 
 attempt to mark the difEerenee of 
 tense in the two participles. The 
 true force of the tense in each case 
 (as is suggested in notes in loc.) is 
 very discernible; they had already 
 been rooted and were now remaining 
 so (pert), they were being buUt up 
 (pres.) — the process was going on 
 from day to day. What was under- 
 neath was firm and was remaining 
 so, what was above was receiving 
 continual increase and accession. 
 Being stablished] No Version inserts 
 being, but Gov., Gran., change the 
 construction : see previous note. 
 Fo!()']SoEev.: !7ic, Auth. and th?other 
 
Chap. II. 3 — 12. 
 
 275 
 
 ing therein, with thanksgiving. Beware lest there 8 
 
 shall be any one that maketh you his booty through 
 philosophy and vain deceit, after the tradition of men, 
 after the rudiments of the world, and not after Christ. 
 Because IN Him doth dwell in bodily fashion all the 9 
 fulness of the Godhead, and because ye are in Him made 10 
 full; who is the head of every Principality and Power: in 11 
 whom ye were also circumcised with a circumcision not 
 wrought by hand, in the putting off of the body of the 
 flesh, in the circumcision of Christ; having been buried la 
 
 Vv, except Gov. (both), Ckan., which 
 omit. Even as ye %oere] So 
 
 Eev. : as ye have been, Auth., Gen., 
 
 BiSH. 
 
 8. Lest there shall be any one that, 
 Ac] Lest any man spoil you, Aoth., 
 Gov., Gran., Bish. ; tliat no man de- 
 ceyue you, Wiol. ; lest eny man come 
 and spoyle you, Tynd. ; lest any man 
 deceaue you, Gov. Test. , Ehem. : lest 
 there be anie man that spoils you. 
 Gen., and sim. Eev., any one that 
 maketh spoil of you. 
 
 9. Because] For, Auth. and all 
 Vv. The introduction of the auxili- 
 ary appears to add a slight force to 
 the important verb KoroiKei. The 
 principal emphasis falls on iv ain-i^; 
 the verb however, both from meaning 
 and position, is not without promi- 
 nence. In bodily fashion] 
 Bodily, Auth. and all Vv. except 
 Ekem., corporally. Also Wiol. alone 
 places the adverb in the position it 
 has in the text; the remaining Vv. 
 put it at the end of the verse. 
 
 10. And because] And, Avts.,'Rev.: 
 see notes in loc. In Him made 
 full] So Eev. {in him ye are (&c.), 
 and sim. Ehem., in him replenished: 
 complete in him, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. except Wiol. {fulfilde 
 in h.). Who] So Bev. : 
 which, Auth. This change, other- 
 wise unnecessary, adds here to per- 
 
 spicuity. Every] All, Auth. 
 
 and all Vv. 
 
 II. Ye were also circumcised] So 
 Eev.: also ye are circ, Auth. and 
 all Vv. ((& yee ben, Wiol.) except 
 Ehem., al you are c. [an error]. 
 A circumcision] So Gov. Test., Eev., 
 and similarly all the other Vv. (ex- 
 cept Auth.), circumcision: the circ, 
 Auth.. Not wrought by 
 
 hand] Made without hands, Auth., 
 Ttnd., Gen., Bish.; without handes. 
 Gov. ; not made with handes, Wiol., 
 Gov. Test., Eev.; which is done with 
 out handes, Gban. ; not made by hand, 
 Ehem. In the putting off 
 
 of] So Eev. : in putting off, Auth. ; 
 by puttings of, Ttnd., Gov., Gen., 
 Bish.; in spoyling of, Gov. Test., 
 Ehem.; for asmoche as ye haue put 
 of, Gban. The transl. of Wiol. is 
 very curious, in nakidnesse of. The 
 insertion of the article is required, 
 as showing that iv t§ ore/c5. is not 
 to be regarded as modal, much less 
 causal, as Gban. Of the 
 
 flesh] * Of the sins of thefl., Auth. 
 In (ult.)] So WiCL., Bish., Ehem., 
 Eev.: by, Auth.; thorow, Tynd., 
 Gban., Gen.; with. Gov. (both). 
 
 12. Having been buried] So Eev. : 
 buried, Auth. , Bish., Ehem. ; beynge 
 buryed. Gov. Test.; in that ye are 
 buryed, Tynd., Gov., Gban., Gen. . 
 comp. notes on Phil. ii. 30 (Transl.). 
 
 T2 
 
276 
 
 COLOSSIANS. 
 
 with Him in your baptism, wherein ye were also raised 
 with Him thro\igh your faith in the operation of God, 
 
 13 who raised Him from the dead. And you also, being 
 dead by your trespasses and the uncircumcision of your 
 flesh, — He quickened you together with Himself, having 
 
 14 forgiven us all our trespasses, blotting out the hand- 
 writing in force against us by its decrees, which was 
 contrary to us; and He hath taken it out of the way. 
 
 Your baptisiii] Baptism, Auth. and 
 all Vv. Ye xoere also raised] 
 
 So Eev. : also you are risen, Auth. 
 The Kal is rightly joined in transla- 
 tion with (Tvvriyipd. by Ttnd., Gov., 
 Cean., Gen., Bish. Your 
 
 faith in] Feith of, WiCL. ; fayth, 
 that is wrought by, Tynd., Gov., 
 Gran. ; faith in, Eev. ; the faith of, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. The per- 
 sonal address seems here to render 
 the transl. of the article by the pos- 
 sessive pronoun correct and appro- 
 priate. Operation] So all 
 Vv. except Wicl., Gov, Test., Eev., 
 worchynge. On the translation of 
 this word, see notes on i Thess. ii. 
 1 3 : the rendering here adopted by 
 Auth. may perhaps be allowed to 
 stand; the term 'operation,' though 
 not usually a good translation, here 
 not unsuitably representing the ' po- 
 tentia in actum se exserens' (Calv. 
 on Phil. iii. 21) alluded to and exem- 
 plified in the clause which follows. 
 Raised] So all Vv. (r....vp. Gov., 
 Ehem.) except Auth., Bish., hath 
 raised. 
 
 13. You also] No Version inserts 
 also except Gov. Test., which omits 
 and. See however notes ore Eph. ii. 
 I. By your] *In your, 
 
 Auth. Trespasses] So Eev., 
 
 and Auth. in Eph. ii. i, and later in 
 the present verse: sins, Auth., Gov. 
 (both), Gen.; giltis, Wicl.; synne, 
 Tynd., Gkan. , Bish. ; the offenses, 
 Ehem. Be quickened] So 
 
 Wicl., Gov., and sim. Ehem., Eev., 
 did he quicken: hath he quickened, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. You 
 
 (2)] Auth. "omits. Him- 
 
 self] Him, Auth. and all Vv. 
 Us] * You, Auth. , Our tres- 
 
 passes] So Tynd., Gean., Gen. (your), 
 Bish. {your), Eev.: (res|)asscs, Auth. ; 
 giltis, WioL.; synnes. Gov. (both); 
 offenses, Ehem. 
 
 14. Blotting out] So Auth. : hav- 
 ing blotted out, Eev. As this par- 
 ticiple seems contemporary with the 
 preceding, and to mark the circum- 
 stances under which the preceding 
 act took place, the present participle 
 in English may here be retained; 
 comp. notes on Phil. ii. 30 {Transl.). 
 In force against us, &o.] Of ordi- 
 nances, tliat was against us, Auth., 
 Gen., Bish.; of decree {or doom) 
 that was agens you, Wicl. ; that was 
 agaynst vs, contayned in the lawe 
 written, Tynd., Gov., Ckan. ; of the 
 ohligacion that was agaynst vs, Gov. 
 Test. ; of decree that was against vs, 
 Ehem. ; the bond written in ordinan- 
 ces that was against us, Eev. 
 
 Hath taken] So Tynd. and all Vv. 
 except Auth., Wicl., Gen., took. 
 Auth. also is the only Version that 
 omits the personal pronoun ; the in- 
 sertion, of it, coupled with the slight 
 change in punctuation, seems to clear 
 up the construction, and render the 
 connexion of clauses somewhat more 
 perspicuous. 
 
 15. Stripping, &c.] Having spoils 
 
Chap. II. 13—18. 
 
 277 
 
 nailing it to His cross; and stripping away from Himself 15 
 the Principalities and the Powers, He made a show of 
 them with boldness, triumphing over them in it. 
 
 Let not any man then judge you in eating or in 16 
 drinking, or in the matter of an holy day, or of a new 
 moon, or of a sabbath; which are a shadow of the things 17 
 to come, but the body is Christ's. Let no man rob you 18 
 of your reward, desiring to do it in false lowliness and 
 worshipping of the angels, taking his stand upon the 
 thiags which he hath seen, vainly puffed up by the mind 
 
 ed, AuTH.; spouylyng, WiOL., Gov. 
 Test., BisH., Bhbm. ; having put off 
 from himself, Bbv.; hath spoyled... 
 and, Tynd. and remaming Vv. 
 The Princ. and the Powers] So Rev.: 
 Princ. and Powers, Auth. 
 With boldness] Tristily, Wiol. ; bolde- 
 ly. Gov. Test.; confidently, Ehem. 
 (all three following the Vulg., 'oon- 
 fidenter ') : openly, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. 
 
 i6. Let not, &o.] Let no man 
 therefore, Auth. and all Vv. except 
 Wiol. (therfore no man). 
 Eating or in drinking] Meat, or in 
 drink, Auth., Bish., Ehem., Eev. ; 
 mete or dr., Wiol., Gov. (both); 
 meate and dr., Tynd., Cean., Gen. 
 In the matter of] In respect of, Auth., 
 Gen., Eev. ; in party of, Wiol., 
 Bish., Ehem. ; for a pece of, Tynd., 
 Gov., Gban. ; in aparte of, Gov. Test. : 
 see notes m loc. A new moon] 
 
 So Eev.: the New m., Auth. and all 
 other Vv. except Wiol. (noememye). 
 A sabbath] Sdbotis, Wiol., Gov. Test. 
 (the s.), Ehem. ; a sabbath day, Eev. ; 
 th-e Sabbath days, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vv. As a-d^^ara is used with 
 the force of a singular in Matth. xii. 
 I, Luke iv. i6, al., and as the pre- 
 ceding terms are in the singular, it 
 seems better to revert to that form 
 in translation. 
 
 17. The things] So Gov., Eev.: 
 
 things, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 Christ's] So Gov. Test., Ehem., Eev. : 
 of Christ, Auth., Wicl., Bish. ; in 
 Christ, Tynd., Gov., Cean., Gen. 
 
 18. Bob] So Eev. : beguile, 
 Auth. Desiring to do it, 
 
 &o.] In a voluntai-y humility, and 
 worshipping of Angels, Auth. ; by a 
 vol. hum. and worsh. of the angels, 
 Eev. No help in translating this 
 difficult verse can be derived from the 
 other Vv. : the translation of Tynd. 
 is given as a specimen: Let no man 
 make you shote at a wronge (marke), 
 which after his awne ymaginacion 
 walketh in the humblenes and holynes 
 of angels, thinges which he never same. 
 The epithet false is only inserted 
 as an exegetical gloss to assist the 
 general reader. The angels] 
 
 So Eev. ; angels, Auth. and all other 
 Vv. The insertion of the article 
 is perhaps not a certain correction, 
 as it may be used in the Greek only 
 to specify the genus. It seems how- 
 ever plausible to consider it as re- 
 ferring to the special class to whom 
 this unbecoming adoration was 
 habitually offered. Taking his 
 
 stand upon] Intruding into, Auth. ; 
 walking, Wiol., Ehem., sim. Tynd.; 
 Cean. omits; avancing himself, Gen.; 
 dwelling in, Eev. The things] 
 
 SoGean., Ehem., Eev. . thtse things, 
 Auth., Gen., Bish. Hath 
 
278 
 
 COLOSSIANS. 
 
 19 of his flesh, and not holding fast the Head, from 
 whom the whole body by means of its joints and 
 bands being supplied and knit together, increaseth 
 
 20 with the increase of God. If ye died with Christ 
 from the rudiments of the world, why, as if ye were 
 
 31 living in the world, do ye submit to ordinances. Handle 
 %% not, nor taste, nor touch, — which things are all to be 
 
 destroyed in their consumption, — after the command- 
 23 ments and doctrines of men? All which things have 
 
 indeed a reputation of wisdom in voluntary worship, and 
 
 sceni] * Hath not seen, A-Tiim The 
 
 mind of his Jksh] Witte of his fl., 
 WicL. ; the sense of his fl., Ehem. ; 
 his fleshly mind, Atjth. and remain- 
 ing Vv. [his owne. Gov. (both)]. 
 
 ig. Holding fast] So Eev. : hold- 
 ing, AuTH., Wicii., Bhem. 
 Whom] So Bev. : which, Auth. 
 The whole hody] So Gov. (both), 
 Bhem. . all the hody, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. By means of 
 
 its] By, Auth. and all Vv. exc. Eev., 
 through. Being sii/pplied] So 
 
 Eev.: having nourishment ministered, 
 Auth. ; undir mynystrid, Wiol. ; re- 
 ceaveth norisshment, Tynd. , Cban. ; 
 furnished. Gen. ; Jieing served, Bhem. 
 
 20. If] * Wherefore if, Auth. 
 Died] So Bev. : be dead, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. As if ye were 
 
 living] As though living, Auth., 
 BisH, , Eev. ; as men lyuynge, Wiol. 
 (with great exactness), Ehem. (om. 
 men); as though ye yet lived, Tynd., 
 Ckan., and Gov., Gen., omitting j/et ; 
 as they that be lyuynge. Gov. Test. 
 JDo ye submit, &o.] Are ye subject to 
 ordinances, Auth. ; are ye ledde with 
 tradicions, Tynd., Oban., Bish. ; are 
 ye holden then with soch trad.. Gov.; 
 are ye burdened with trad.. Gen.; 
 do ye subject yourselves to ord., Bev. 
 The change in the text is intended 
 to express that SoyfiaTl^eaSe is here 
 taken as in the middle voice. 
 
 21. Handle not, &g.] So Eev.: 
 tov^h not, taste not, handle not, 
 Auth. and the other Vv. (Tynd. 
 prefixes of them that saye, and Gen. , 
 as) except Wicl., nether yee schulen 
 touche nether taste, nether trete with 
 handis tho thingis (continuing, the 
 whiche al ben, &o.); Gov., as whan 
 they saye: Touch not this, taist not 
 that, handle not that. 
 
 22. Which things] So Gov. Test., 
 Bhem.; which, Auth., Tynd., Gean., 
 Gen., Bish. ; all which things are, 
 Eev. Are all, &c.] All are to 
 perish with the using, Auth. (sim. 
 Bev.); al ben into deth by the ilke vse, 
 Wiol. ; all perysshe with the vsinge of 
 tftcm, Tynd., Gen. (om. of them); all... 
 do hurte vnto men, because of the abuse 
 of them. Gov. ; all do hurte wyth the 
 very vse, Gov. Test. ; all perisshe 
 thorowe y" very abuse, Gban. ; all be 
 in corruption, in abusyng, Bish.; are 
 al vnto destruction by the very vse, 
 Bhem. A remarkable variety of 
 translations. Those of Gov. (both) 
 are unusually incorrect, especially 
 that of Gov., which goes on, which ab- 
 use commeth onely of the commaunde- 
 mentes, &c. The change from which 
 all are to which things are all is 
 made to preserve not only the order, 
 but a distinction between the definite 
 and indef . relative : see next verse. 
 
 23. All which things] Which things. 
 
Chap. II. 19— III. 3. 
 
 279 
 
 lowliness, and unsparing treatment of the body ; not of 
 any real value as against repletion of the flesh. 
 
 If then ye were raised with Christ, seek the things III. 
 that are above, where Christ is, sitting on the right hand 
 of God. Set your minds on the things that are above, not a 
 on the things that are on the earth. For ye died, and 3 
 
 AuTH. and all Vv. except Wicl. (the 
 wh.), Gov. Test., Rhem., whiche. 
 A reputation] A shoio, Auth., Bibh., 
 Gen., Ehem., Eev. ; resoune, Wiol. ; 
 the similitude, Ttnd., Oban.; ashyne. 
 Gov. ; an aperance, Gov. Test. 
 Voluntary worship] Similarly Gen., v. 
 religion: mil-worship, Auth., Eev.; 
 chosen holynes, Tynd. ; chosen spiritu- 
 altie, Gov.; superstueion (or veyne reli- 
 gion or honoure), WioL. ; supersticion, 
 Gov., Test., Bibh., Ehem. Lowli- 
 
 ness] Humility, Auth., Eev. Possibly 
 here the epithet 'false' might be in- 
 serted as in ver. 18. Unsparing 
 treatment of] Neglecting of, Auth. ; 
 not for to spare, Wicl., Ehem. (cm. 
 for); in that they spare not, Ttnd., 
 Gov. (both) ; in not sparing, Gen. ; 
 in hurtyng of, Bish.; severity to, 
 Eev. Not of any real value, &c.] 
 Not in any honour to the satisfying 
 of the flesh, Auth., Bish., sim. Ehem. 
 (filling) ; in any honoure to the ful- 
 nesse offl,. , Wiol. (not omitted appy. 
 by error) ; and do the flesshe no wor- 
 shype vnto his nede, Tynd., Gov., 
 sim. Chan, (in that they do. ..vnto the 
 n. therof) ; ner do it any honoure, 
 to the sufficiency of the fl., Gov. 
 Test.; nether haue they it in anie 
 estimation to satisfie the fl., Gen.; 
 not of any value against the indul- 
 gence of the flesh, Eev. 
 
 Ghapiee in. I. If thenye] So Eev. : 
 if ye then, Auth. Were raised] 
 
 SoEev.: be risen, Avts.,Gen.,B,b:em.; 
 hane risen to gedir, Wicl., Gov. 
 Test. (be...r.); be...rysen agayne, 
 
 Tynd., Cban., Bibh.; be rysen now. 
 Gov. The things that are] So 
 
 Gov. Test., Ehem., Eev. ; those things 
 which are, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 (that ben, Wicl.). The lighter re- 
 lative ' that ' seems here more suit- 
 able, and accords with the transla- 
 tion in ver. ■/. On the supposed dis- 
 tinction between ' that ' and ' which, ' 
 eomp. notes on Eph. i. 23 (Transl.), 
 and Brown, Gramm. of Grammars, 
 II. 5, p. 293 (ed. i). Perhaps, as 
 a vei^ rough rule, it may be> said 
 that 'which' is a little more ap- 
 propriately used when the clause in- 
 troduced by the relative tends to form 
 a distinct and separable predication 
 in reference to the antecedent ; ' that ' 
 when the relative so coalesces with its 
 concomitants as either to form with 
 them a species of epithet, or to ex- 
 press a predominant and prevailing, 
 rather than an accidental charac- 
 teristic. Christ is, sitting] So 
 Wicl., Gov. (both), Ehem., sim. 
 Eev., is, seated: Ghr. sitteth, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. 
 
 ■i. Set your minds on] So Gov. 
 Test., and Gov. , Eev. (mynde) : 
 sauer yee, Wicl. ; minde, Ehem. ; set 
 your affection on, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vv. (affections. Gen.). 
 The things that are (bis)] So Gov. 
 (but giving which in the first clause), 
 Ehem., Eev. : things (bis), Auth., 
 Bish. ; tho thingis that ben...tho that 
 ben, Wiol., Gov. Test. ; thynges that 
 arc.thynges which are, Tynd., Gen. 
 (which bis). 
 
 3. Died] So Eev. : are dead, Auth. 
 
280 
 
 COLOSSIANS. 
 
 4 your life hath been hidden with Christ in God. When 
 Christ our Life shall be manifested, then shall ye also be 
 manifested with Him in glory. 
 
 5 Make dead then your members which are upon the 
 earth; fornication, uncleanness, lustfulness, evil concu- 
 
 6 piscence, and covetousness, the which is. idolatry: for 
 which things' sake the wrath of God doth come on the 
 
 7 sons of disobedience; among whom ye also once walked, 
 
 8 when ye were living in these sins. But NOW do ye also 
 lay aside all of them ; anger, wrath, malice, railing, coarse 
 
 and all other Vv. ; see notes. 
 Hath been] Is, Auth. and aU Vv. 
 Hidden] Hid, Acth. and all Vv. 
 
 4. Our Life] So Gov., and sim. 
 WiCL., Gov. Test., Ehem., reading 
 youre : who is our I. , Auth. , Eev. ; 
 which is owe I., Tynd., Gran., Gen., 
 BisH. Be manifested (bis)] So 
 Kev. : shewe himsilfe...appere,'lY]'iD., 
 Gov., Cean. ; appear (bis), Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. The change seems 
 necessary to keep up the antithesis 
 between K^KpvTrai and <pavepu8^. 
 
 5. Make dead then] Mortify there- 
 fore, Auth. and all Vv. except Wiol., 
 therfore slee yee. Which] So 
 Auth, and the other Vv. {the wh., 
 Wiol.) except Gov. Test., Ehem., 
 that; and Gran., which gives youre 
 erthy membres. Here 'that' seems 
 inexact ; the original is to, /iAij v/iuv 
 Tci iirl T^s 7^s. Lustfulness] 
 Similarly Ehem., lust : inordinate af- 
 fection, Auth., Gen. {the in.), Bish.; 
 leccherie, Wicl. ; vnnaturall lust, 
 Tynd., Gov. (both). Gran.; passion, 
 Eev. The which] So Wicl., 
 Eev.: which, Auth., and all remain- 
 ing Vv. 
 
 6. Doth come] So Gov. Test. , and 
 somewhat similarly Cean., vseth to 
 come: cometh, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. {come, Wicl.). Sons] So 
 Wicl,, Eev.: children, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. 
 
 7. Among whom] So Gran. ; in 
 the which, Auth., Wicl., Bish., Eev. ; 
 in the which thinges, Gov. (both) ; in 
 which, Ehem.; in which thynges, 
 Tynd.; wherein. Gen. A singular 
 variety of translation. Once] 
 So Tynd., Gen, -. walked aforetime, 
 Bev. ; sometime, Auth. and remain- 
 ing Vv. Auth. places sometime after 
 walked. Were living] Lived, 
 Auth. and all Vv. except Gov. Test., 
 dyd lyue. These sins] *Them, Auth. 
 
 8. Bo ye also] You also, Auth.: 
 the other Vv. (exc. Eev., put ye also 
 away) adopt the simple imperative, 
 but thereby somewhat obscure the 
 connexion of /coi with u^eis. 
 
 Lay aside] Laye awaye, Gov. Test., 
 Ehem. : put off, Auth. ,Bish. ; putte. . . 
 awey, Wicl., Gen.; put... aioaye from 
 you, Tynd., Gov., Gran. It is desir- 
 able to preserve a distinction between 
 dirodecrde and aTre/cSutrd/iecoi, ver. 9. 
 All of them] All these, Auth., Eev. 
 The text represents rh ir&vra more 
 correctly. Eai7OT(7]SoEEV.,aud 
 
 Auth. in i Tim. vi. 4 : cursed speak- 
 ynge, Tynd., Gov., Gran., Gen.; 
 blasphemy, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. Coarse speaking] Filthy 
 
 communication, Auth., Gov. Test., 
 Gban., Bish.; foule wordis, Wiol.; 
 filthy speakynge,TYSi}., Gen. ifylthie 
 wordes. Gov.; filthie talke, Ehem.; 
 shameful speaking, Eev. 
 
Chap. III. 4 — 14. 
 
 281 
 
 speaking, out of your mouth: do not lie one to another, 9 
 seeing that ye have put off from you the old man with 
 his deeds, and have put on the new man, which is being 10 
 renewed unto knowledge after the image of Him that 
 created him: where there is no Greek and Jew, circum- 11 
 cision and uncircumcision, Barbarian, Scythian, bond- 
 man, free-man; but Christ is all, and in all. 
 
 Put ye on then, as elect of God, holy and beloved, a i a 
 heart of mercy, kindness, lowliness, meekness, .longsuffer- 
 ing ; forbearing one another, and forgiving each other, if 13 
 any man have a complaint against any ; as the Lord for- 
 gave you, even so doing also yourselves. But over all 14 
 
 9. Do not Ue[ Lie not, Adth. and 
 all Vv. except Wicl. (nyl yee). 
 
 Off from you] AniH., Bev. omit /rom 
 yaru, but it seems required to express 
 the double compound. 
 
 10. Being renewed] So Eev. No 
 other Version inserts being. 
 
 Unto] So Bhem., Bev., and similarly 
 WioL., Gov. Test., Gran., Bish., into: 
 in, AuiH. and remaining Vv. 
 
 11. There is no] There is neither, 
 AuiH. ; there cannot be, Eev. 
 
 And (bis)] So Wicl., Bhem., Bev. : 
 nor, AuTH. and remaining Vv. except 
 Gov., which omits both. 
 Bondman, free-man] So Eev. : as to 
 the omission of any copula, so Gov., 
 Gen., Bish. ; nor, Adth. As to the 
 terms, se)Tta«nf.../remara, Wicl. ; bond 
 . . .free, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 12. Ye] So Gov. Test., Bhem.: 
 AuiH. and remaining Vv. omit. The 
 insertion of the pronoun is perhaps 
 desirable at the beginning of a new 
 paragraph. Then] Therefore, 
 Auth., Eev. Elect] So Tynd., 
 Ckan., Bev.: the elect, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. {the chosun, Wicl.). 
 A heart] So Bev. : bowels, Auth. 
 Mercy] *Mercies, Adth. Low- 
 liness] So Gov. Test, (and Auth. in 
 Eph. iv. 2): mekenes, Wicl. (giving 
 temperav/nce for irpavrriTa) ; hwmilitie. 
 
 Bhem., Eev. ; humbleness of mind, 
 Adth. and remaining Vv. (myndes, 
 Tynd.). 
 
 13. Each other] So Bev. ; one 
 another, Auth. and remaining Vv, 
 except Wicl. which preserves a dis 
 tinction between dXXijXwi' and eav- 
 ToXs, to gedir...youre self ('invioem. 
 vobismetipsis,' Vulg.). Covi- 
 plaint] So Gov. Test., Adth. Marg., 
 Eev. : quarrel, Adth. and remaining 
 Vv. Wicl. however gives querel (or 
 pleynte). As] So Chan. : as (&, 
 Wicl. ; like as. Gov. ; as also, Bhem. ; 
 even as, Adth. and remaining Vv. 
 In the attempt to express the true 
 participial structure, idiom seems to 
 require the union of ' even ' with the 
 latter member ; see next note. 
 
 The Lord] So Eev.: * C/irist, Adth. 
 Even so, &o,] So also do ye, Adth., 
 Bish., Bev.; so i& yee, Wicl.; even 
 so do ye, Tynd., Gran., Gen.; euen 
 so do ye also. Gov.; so do ye also. 
 Gov. Test. ; so you also, Bhem. 
 
 14. But] So Gov., Bhem.; and, 
 Adth., Gov. Test., Gen., Bish., Bev.; 
 omitted by Tynd., Gean. Over] 
 Vpon, Wicl. ; above, Auth. and all 
 remaining Vv., some of which (Gov., 
 Bish., give aboue all thinges) pro- 
 bably here gave to M a decided 
 ethical reference. These] Adth. 
 
282 
 
 COLOSSIANS. 
 
 15 these put on Love, which is the bond of perfectness. And 
 let the peace of Christ rule in your hearts, to the which 
 ye were also called in one body ; and be ye thankful. 
 
 16 Let the word of Christ dwell in you richly, teaching and 
 admonishing one another in all wisdom, with psalms, 
 hymns, and spiritual songs, in Grace singing in your 
 
 17 hearts to God. And every thing, whatsoever ye do in 
 word or deed, do all in the name of the Lord Jesus, giving 
 thanks to God the Father through Him. 
 
 18 Wives, submit yourselves to your husbands, as it is 
 
 19 becoming in the Lord. Husbands, love your wives, and 
 be not bitter towards them. 
 
 ao Children, obey your parents in all things ; for this is 
 a I well-pleasing in the Lord. Fathers, provoke not your 
 children, lest they be disheartened. 
 
 and all Vv. add things. Perhaps the 
 indeterminate 'these,' i.e. 'qualities, 
 principles, virtues,' is more exact. 
 Love\ So all Vv. except Auth., Wicl., 
 Ehem., charity. See notes ore 1 Tim. 
 i. 5 (Transl.). 
 
 15. Ghrisf\ *God, AuiH. 
 
 Were] So Rev.: are, Auth. and all 
 other Vv. Also called] Sim. 
 
 Cov., called also : also is placed be- 
 fore ye by Auth., Cov. Test., Bibh., 
 Ehem., Eev. ; it is omitted by Tynd., 
 Cban., Gen. 
 
 16. In all wisdom] Auth. and all 
 Vv.placethese words after the adverb, 
 and connect them with it. With] 
 So Gov., Ehem., Eev. : in, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. Hymns] Auth. 
 prefixes *and not in italics ; so also 
 before spiritual songs. In Grace 
 singing] So Wicl., Ehem. : syngynge 
 thankfully, Cov. Test.; singing with 
 grace, Auth., Cban., Gen. (a gr.), 
 BiSH., Eev. The change from with 
 to in is made to obviate such mis- 
 understandings as Tynd., Cov., spre- 
 tuall songes which have favour with 
 them (an entirely wrong connexion), 
 and also the adverbial rendering given 
 
 by Cov. Test. It is also especially 
 desirable here to preserve the order 
 of the Greek, as q.Sea> h rals xapS. 
 stands in distinct contrast to another 
 and audible kind of singing. 
 God] *Thc Lord, Auth. 
 
 17. And every thing, whatsoever] 
 ^ndwftatsower.AuTH.jEEv. Itseems 
 rightto preserve the slight irregularity 
 of the original as setting forth the 
 studied inclusiveness of the command. 
 God the Father] God *and the F., 
 AcTH. Through] So Eev. : by, 
 AtTTH. and all other Vv. 
 
 18. Your] Your *own, Auth. 
 
 It is becoming] It is fit, Auth. ; it 
 bihoueth, WiOL., Ehem.; it is due, 
 Cov. Test. ; as is fitting, Eev. ; it is 
 comly, Tynd. and remaining Vv. — a 
 translation not dissimilar to the text. 
 
 19. To«;a?-(fe] So Cov. Test., Ehem.: 
 against, Auth. , Bish. , Eev. ; to, Wicl.; 
 vnto, Tynd. and remaining Vv. 
 
 10. In the Lord] * Unto the Lord, 
 Auth. 
 
 21. Provoke] Auth., Cov. Test., 
 Cban., Gen., Bish. add to anger after 
 children, and sim. Ehem., to indigna- 
 tion. This seems unnecessary; as in 
 
Chap. III. 15— IV. 2, 
 
 283 
 
 Bond-servants, obey in all things your masters accord- 32 
 ing to the flesh ; not with acts of eye service, as men- 
 pleasers, bxit in singleness of heart, fearing the Lord. 
 Whatever ye do, do it from the soul, as to Oie Lord and 33 
 not to men ; seeing ye know that from the Lord ye shall 24 
 receive the recompense of the inheritance. Serve ye the 
 Lord Christ : for the wrong-doer shall receive back that 35 
 which he did wrongfully ; and there is no respect of 
 persons. Masters, deal out to your servants justice and IV. 
 equity; seeing ye know that ye also have a Master in 
 heaven. 
 
 Persevere in prayer, being watchful therein with 3 
 
 its present use ' provoke, ' when placed 
 absolutely, nearly always involves the 
 notion of 'anger' or 'indignation:' 
 see Eph. vi. 4. Be disheartened] 
 
 Be discouraged, AniH., Gen., Bish., 
 sim. Ehem., Ebv. ; be. ..made of litil 
 inwitte {or resoun), Wiol. ; be of a 
 desperate mynde,TYNj)., Gov., Ckan.; 
 waxe...feble mynded, Gov. Test. 
 
 22. Bond-servants] Servants, Auth, 
 and all Vv. Acts of eye service] 
 Eye service, Axjtb.j'Rey.: the change 
 is made to express the force of the 
 Tplxiial6^ed\fwSov\etais. Tlie Lwd] 
 *God, Auth. 
 
 23. Whatever] *And whatsoever, 
 Auth. From the soul] Of 
 inwitte, Wiol. ; from the hart, Rhem. ; 
 heartily, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 24. Seeing ye know] Similarly 
 Ttnd., for as moche as ye knowe : and 
 be sure. Gov.; knoioing, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. (witynge, Wiol.). 
 From] So Eev. : of, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. Recompense] So 
 Bev. : reward, Auth. and aU other Vv. 
 except Wiol., retribucon {or agen 
 yildynge); Ehem., retribution. 
 Serve ye] *Forye serve, AvTS.plaoing 
 a colon after inheritance and a full 
 stop after Christ. 
 
 25. For] *But, Auth. 
 
 The wrong-doer] He that doith iniurie, 
 
 WiCL. [adding {or wronge)], Ehem.; 
 he y' doth synne, Gban. ; he that doeth 
 wrong, AuiH. and remaining Vv. 
 {who so d.. Gov. Test.). Receive 
 
 back] Sim. Eev., receive again: re- 
 ceyue, WiCL., Ehem.; receive for, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. That 
 which he did wrongfully] Sim. Ehem., 
 that which he hath done vniustly: 
 that that he dide euyl, Wiol.; kys 
 synne, Gean. ; for the wrong, Eev. ; 
 the vnvng which he liath done, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. (giving that except 
 Bish. which omits). 
 
 Ghaptee IV. I. Deal out] Give, 
 Auth., Wicl., Gov. Test. ; render, 
 Eev.; do, Tynd. and remaining Vv. 
 Justice and equity] That which is 
 just and equal, Auth. and all Vv. 
 except Wiol., t/Miisi««Se and euen. 
 Seeing ye know] So Ttnd. : and knowe. 
 Gov. ; beynge sure. Gov. Test. ; know- 
 ing, Auth. and remaining Vv. (wityng, 
 
 WlOL.). 
 
 ■i. Persevere] Continue, Auth. and 
 the other Vv. except Wiol., be yee 
 bisie; Ehem., be instant; Eev., con- 
 tinue stedfastly. Being watch- 
 ful] Sim, Wicl., wakynge; Gov. Test., 
 Ehem., Eev., watchynge: and watch, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 Therein] So Gov. Test., Eev.: in it, 
 
284 
 
 COLOSSIANS. 
 
 3 thanksgiving ; withal praying also for us, that God would 
 open to us a door of the word, to speak the mystery of 
 
 4 Christ, for the sake of which I am also in bonds, in order 
 
 5 that I may make it manifest, as I ought to speak. Walk 
 in wisdom toward them that are without, buying up for 
 
 6 yourselves the opportunity. Let your speech he alway 
 with grace, seasoned with salt, so that ye may know how 
 ye ought to answer every man. 
 
 7 All my state shall Tychicus declare to you, our be- 
 loved brother, and faithful minister, and fellow-servant 
 
 8 in the Lord: whom I have sent unto you for this very 
 purpose, that ye may know our estate, and that he may 
 
 9 comfort your hearts; with Onesimus our faithful and 
 beloved brother, who is one of you. They shall make 
 known to you all things that are done here. 
 
 lo Aristarchus my fellow-prisoner saluteth you, and 
 
 WioL., Ehem.; in the same, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. 
 
 3. Of the word'\ So Gov. (both), 
 and sim. Wiol. (om. the) : of speache, 
 Bhem. ; for the word, Bev. ; of utter- 
 ance, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 For the sake of which'] For which, 
 Auth., Wicl., Bev.; for the whych 
 thynge. Gov. Test., Bhem. (cm. 
 thynge) ; wherfore, Tynd. and re- 
 maining Vv. 
 
 4. In order that] That, AuiH. 
 and all Vv. 
 
 5. Buying up, &o.] Redeeming the 
 time, Auth., Gov. Test., Bish.,Ehem., 
 Eev. ; agen byinge t, Wiol.; and 
 redefine the t., Tynd., Gov., Gen. ; and 
 lose no oportimite, Cean. : see notes on 
 Eph. V. 16. 
 
 6. So that] That, Atiih. The 
 slight change is made to express dis- 
 tinctly the infin. of consequence, and 
 to prevent ' that ' being regarded as in- 
 dicative of purpose, and as a transla- 
 tion of iva with the subjunctive. 
 
 Ye may] You may, Auth. ed. 161 1. 
 
 7. Our beloved] So Gen., and sim. 
 Bhem.; our deerest: who is a beloved. 
 
 Auth., Bish. ; my moste dere, Wiol.; 
 the deare, Tynd., Gov.; the mooste 
 deare. Gov. Test. ; the beloued, Cean., 
 Eev. : see notes ore Phil. iv. i 
 (Transl). Faithful] So Eev. : 
 
 a faithful, Auth. 
 
 8. Have sent] So Auth. and all 
 Vv. except Wicl., sente. As Tychi- 
 cus appears certainly to have been the 
 bearer of this letter (comp. notes on 
 Phil. ii. 28, Transl., and Philem. 12, 
 Transl.), the pres. ' send' was adopted 
 in ed. 1. Our English perfect how- 
 ever seems to be used idiomatically 
 with a similar epistolary reference to 
 present time, and may thus be left un- 
 changed. This very] So 
 Eev. : tlie same, Auth. and the other 
 Vv. except Wicl., Bhem., this same; 
 and Gov. Test., which translates eh 
 airb tovto therfore. Ye may 
 know our estate, and that he may 
 comfort] So Bev. : * he might know 
 •your estate, and comfort, Auth. The 
 change of might to may preserves the 
 proper succession of tenses. 
 
 9. Our] So Gov. Test. : the, Ehem., 
 Bev.; a, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
Chap. IV. 3 — 16. 
 
 285 
 
 Mark the cousin of Barnabas, touching whom ye received 
 commandments (if he come unto you, receive him), and 11 
 Jesus which is called Justus, who are of the circumcision : 
 these only are my fellow-labourers unto the kingdom of 
 God, men who have proved a comfort to me. Epaphras, 12 
 who is one of you, a servant of Christ Jesus, saluteth you, 
 always striving for you in his prayers, that ye may stand 
 fast, perfect and fully assured in all the will of God. 
 For I bear him witness, that he hath much labour for 
 you, and for them in Laodicea, and for them in Hierapolis. 
 Luke the beloved physician saluteth you, and Demas. 
 Salute the brethren that are in Laodicea, and Nymphas, 15 
 and the chxirch which is in their house. And when this 16 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 except WicL., which omits. 
 That are done] So Eev. : which are 
 done, AuTH. ; which are adoynge, 
 Ttnd., Gov., Gran. 
 
 10. Mark] So Wiol., Gov. Test., 
 Ehem., Eev. : Marcus, Auth. and re- 
 maining Vv. ; see notes on ch. i. i 
 [Transl.). The cousin of B.] So 
 WicL., Eev., and sim. Ehem., the 
 cosin-german of B.: sisters son to B., 
 Auth.; Barnabassis systers sonne, 
 Ttnd. and remaining Vv. It seems 
 very doubtful whether this is to be 
 considered a mistake: it is not im- 
 probably an archaic mode of expres- 
 sion, equivalent to the ' Geschwister- 
 kind' of the German. 
 
 11. Fellow-labourers] So Auth. in 
 Phil. iv. 3, PhUem. i, 24: felloiv 
 workers, Auth., Eev. Men 
 who have proved] Sim. Eev., men 
 that have been : which have been, 
 Auth., Cban., Gen., Bish. (hath, an 
 error), Ehem.; that weren, Wiol. ; 
 which were, Tynd. , Gov. 
 
 fz. Christ Jems]* Christ, kvTB.. 
 Striving] So Auth. Marg., Eev.; 
 and...striueth, Gen.: labouring fer- 
 vently, Auth., Bish.; and...laboreth 
 fervently, Tynd., Gov., Gban. ; bisie 
 for you, Wim.; beyng..xarefull. Gov. 
 Test., Ehem. (om. beyng). His 
 
 prayers] So Eev. ; prayers, Auth. and 
 all other Vv. Stand fast] Stand, 
 
 Auth. and all Vv. The addition of 
 the epithet is useful as implying what 
 really seems involved in the a-ra9TJTe, 
 and as also leaving the secondary 
 predicates rAeioi and irevkripoipopyi- 
 lihoi more independent and em- 
 phatic. Fully assured] 
 So Eev.: *complete, Auth. 
 
 13. Witness] So Eev., and sim. 
 'Wioi^.fWitnessynge : testimonie, Ehem.; 
 record, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 MvA:h labour] So Eev. : *a great zeal, 
 AtfTH. For them... for them] 
 So Eev. : them that are... them, Auth., 
 Gov. Test. [om. tliem (i)] : them that 
 ben. ..that ben, Wiol., Ehem. [giv- 
 ing are for ben (2)]; them... them, 
 Tynd., Gov. [om. them (2)], Gen.; 
 them that are... them that are. Gran., 
 Bish. 
 
 14. Saluteth you] So Gov. (both), 
 Ehem., and, in the same order, Tynd., 
 Ckan., Gen., Bish., greteth you: 
 greet you (at the end of the verse), 
 Auth., Wiol. (adding wel); salute 
 you, Eev. 
 
 15. That are] So Wiol., Gov. 
 Test., Ehem., Eev.: which are, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. Their] So 
 Eev,: *his, Auth, 
 
286 COLOSSIANS. 
 
 epistle shall have been read among you, cause that it be 
 read also in the church of the Laodiceans ; and see that 
 
 17 ye also read the epistle from Laodicea. And say to 
 Archippus, Take heed to the ministry which thou re- 
 ceivedst in the Lord, that thou fulfil it. 
 
 18 The salutation with mine own hand of me Paul. 
 Remember my bonds. Grace be with yoxj. 
 
 16. Shall have been] Schal be, and all Vv. except WiOL., hast take. 
 WiCL., Rhem.; is, Auth. and re- 18. With mine own hand of me 
 maining Vv. except Eev. , ftaift 6cen. Paul] Sim. Eev., of me Paul with 
 See that] That, Adth., Eev. mine own hand : by the hand of me 
 Also] So Eev.: Kftemse, Auth. PauZ, Atjth. With you] Auth. 
 
 17. Receivedst]Hastreceived, kxjT-R. adds *Amen. 
 
THE EPISTLE TO PHILEMON. 
 
 PAUL a prisoner of Christ Jesus, and Timothy our 
 brother, to Philemon our dearly beloved and fellow- 
 labourer, and to Apphia our sister, and to Archippus our i 
 fellow-soldier, and to the church in thy house. Grace 3 
 he to you, and peace, from God our Father and the Lord 
 Jesus Christ. 
 
 I thank my God, always making mention of thee in 4 
 my prayers, hearing, as I do, of thy love, and of the faith 5 
 which thou hast toward the Lord Jesus, and dost show 
 toward all the saints; that the communication of thy 6 
 faith may become effectual in the knowledge of every 
 
 1. Christ Jesus] Jes. Chr.,A.ViS.. 
 Beloved and] The comma placed 
 between these two words by Auth. 
 should be removed, as -qiiCv appy. be- 
 longs both to dyaTrriT(f and (Twepyif. 
 
 2. Apphia our sister] * Our beloved 
 Apphia, Auth. To Arch.] So 
 all Vv. except Auth., which omits to. 
 
 3. Grace be] Grace, Auth., Rev. 
 The insertion of 'be' with 'to' or 
 ' unto ' is the form adopted by Auth. 
 elsewhere in St Paul's Epistles except 
 Eom. and 2 Thess. * 
 
 4. Always making mention] So, iij 
 point of order, Ehem. The other Vv. 
 differ, in their mode of placing the 
 adverb : Auth. places it after of 
 thee ; Wicl. , Eev. connect it with the 
 foregoing clause; Gov. Test, places 
 it after makynge; Ttnd. and re- 
 maining Vv. insert it directly after 
 mencion. It seems best to follow 
 the order of the Greek, and so to re- 
 
 tain the slight emphasis which the 
 position implies. 
 
 5. Hearing, as I do] When I 
 heare, Tynd., Oban., Gen. j for so 
 moch as I heare. Gov.; hearing, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. The participle 
 explains the circumstances which led 
 to the prayer being offered. 
 
 Of the faith] So Eev. : faith, Auth. 
 and remaining Vv. except Gov. Test., 
 the faith. 
 
 Dust shew toward] Toward, Auth. 
 and all Vv. except Wicl., into; Gov. 
 Test., vnto. The saints] So 
 
 Ehem., Eev. : no other Version in- 
 serts the article. 
 
 6. In (i)] So Wicl., Gov. Test., 
 Oban., Bish., Ehem., Eev. : by, 
 Auth.; tkorow, Tynd., Gov. 
 
 The knowledge] So Gov. Test., 
 GiuN., Bish., Eev.: kn., Tynd., Gov.; 
 the acknowledging, Auth. ; the agni- 
 tion, Ehem.; knowynge, Wicl. The 
 
288 
 
 PHILEMON. 
 
 7 good thing which is in us, unto Christ. For I had much 
 joy and consolation in thy love, because the hearts of the 
 saints have been refreshed by thee, brother. 
 
 8 Wherefore^ though I have much boldness in Christ to 
 
 9 enjoin thee that which is becoming, for love's sake I 
 rather beseech thee. Being such an one, as Paul the 
 
 10 aged, and now also a prisoner of Christ Jesus, I beseech 
 thee for my own child Onesimus, whom I begat in my 
 
 1 1 bonds ; which in time past was to thee unprofitable, but 
 
 12 now profitable to thee and to me; whom I have sent 
 back to thee, — verily him, that is, mine own heart; 
 
 13 whom I was purposing to retain with myself, that in 
 thy stead he might minister to me in the bonds of the 
 
 clause is paraphrased by Gen., that 
 whatsoeuer good thing is in you 
 through Christ lesus, may be Icnowen, 
 Us] *You, AcTH. Unto Christ] 
 
 So Rev. : *in Christ Jesus, Auth. 
 
 7. I had] *We have, Adth. 
 Much] So Eev. : great, Auth. and all 
 other Vv. Hearts] So Tynd., 
 Gov. Test., Cban., Gen., Eev.; bowels, 
 Auth., Bish., Ehbm. ; entrayles, Wicl. 
 Have been] So Eev.: are, Auth. and 
 the other Vv. except Wici., Ehem., 
 which follow the Vulg. 'requieverunt. ' 
 
 8. Though I have, &o.] I hauynge 
 myche triste, Wicl. ; hauing great con- 
 fidence, Ehem. ; though I might be 
 much bold, Auth., Bish. ; though I 
 be b., Tynd., Gov. Test, (maye be), 
 Cban. (myght be); thogh I be verie b., 
 Gen.; though I haue great boldnes. 
 Gov., Eev. {all b.). Is 
 becoming] Sim. Ttnb., Gov., becom- 
 meth the : is convenient, Auth., Gen., 
 Bish. ; belongeth vnto the, Gov. Test.; 
 was thy dewtye to do, Gkan. ; per- 
 taineth to the purpose, Ehem. ; is be- 
 fitting, Eev. 
 
 9. For] Auth. and all Vv. ex- 
 cept WiOL., Ehem., insert yet at the 
 beginning of the verse. Thee] 
 Auth. places a comma after thee, 
 
 and a full stop at the end of the 
 verse ; so all the other Vv. except 
 Wicl., Ehem., which following the 
 Vulg., ' cum sis talis,' refer toioOtos 
 w»' to Philemon; and Eev., which 
 closes the verse with a colon. 
 Christ Jesus] * Jesus Christ, Auth. 
 
 10. Own child] Son, Auth. and 
 all Vv. except Eev., child. 
 Begat] So Wicl., Tynd.; have be- 
 gotten, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 
 12. Have sent] So Auth. and all 
 Vv. except Wiol., sente: see notes 
 on Col. iv. 8 (Transl.). Back 
 
 to thee] So Ehem., Eev.: again, 
 Auth., omitting *to thee. 
 Verily him] *Thou therefore receive 
 him, Auth. Heart] So Gov. 
 
 (both), Eev. : entraylis, WiOL.; bowels, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 • 13. Was purposing to retain] 
 Would have retained, Auth., Gen., 
 Bish., Ehem.; wolde withhold, Wicl.; 
 wolde fayne have retayned, Tynd., 
 Chan, , Eev. {kept); wolde haue kepte, 
 Gov. (both) [Gov. adds styll]. 
 Myself] Me, Auth. and all Vv. 
 Might minister] So Ehem., Eev. : 
 might have ministered, Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. except Wiol., schulde 
 serue. 
 
-20. 
 
 289 
 
 Gospel : but without thine approval would I do nothing, 14 
 that the good thou doest should not be done as it were 
 of necessity, but willingly. For perhaps he therefore 15 
 departed for a season, that thou mightest possess him 
 eternally; no longer as a servant, but above a servant, a 16 
 brother beloved, specially to me, but how much more to 
 thee, both in the flesh, and in the Lord ? If then thou 1 7 
 countest me a partner, receive him as myself But if he 18 
 wronged thee, or oweth thee aught, this set down to my 
 account; I Paul have written with mine own hand, I 19 
 will repay it: that I may not say to thee how thou 
 owest to me even thine own self besides. Yea, brother, 2,0 
 
 14. Approval] Mind, AniH. and 
 all Vv. except Wiol., Gov. Test., 
 Ehem., counseyl. The good thou 
 doest] So Gov. {which thou), Gov. 
 Test, {that thou), Cean. (whychthou): 
 that good which springeth of the, 
 Tynd.; thy benefit, Auth., Gen., 
 BiSH.; thi good, Wiol., Ehem.; thy 
 goodness, Eev. Be done] Be, 
 Atjih. and all Vv. 
 
 15. Therefore] So Auth. and all 
 Vv.; and appy. with good reason, 
 for the more usual translation 'for 
 this cause ' seems to fail in connect- 
 ing the first and second members 
 with sufiScient closeness, unless em- 
 phasis is laid on ' this.' 
 
 Mightest] So Gov. Test., Ehem. ; 
 shmddest, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 Possess] Beceive, Auth. and all Vv. 
 except Ehem., take...againe; Eev., 
 have : see notes on Phil. iv. 18 
 {Transl.). Eternally] 
 
 For ever, Auth. and all Vv. except 
 WiCL., into with outen ende. 
 
 16. No longer] So Eev. : not now, 
 Auth. and aU Vv. except Wiol., 
 Ehem., now not. 
 
 17. If then] So Eev.; therefore 
 yif, WiCL.; if therefore, Gen., Ehem.: 
 therefore is placed after me by Auth., 
 Gov. Test., Gean.,Bish., and omitted 
 by Tynd. Countest] So 
 
 E. 
 
 Eev., and similarly as to mood, 
 Wiol., haste; Gov. Test., holdest... 
 for: holde ...for, Gov.; take ...for, 
 Ehem. ; count, Auth. and remaining 
 Vv. On the proper use of the indi- 
 cative and subjunctive with ' if,' see 
 Latham, Engl. Lang. § 614 (ed. 3), 
 and notes on 2 Thess. iii. 14 {Transl.). 
 
 18. But if] So Gov. (both), Eev.: 
 forsothe yif, Wiol. ; and if, Ehem.; 
 if, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 Wronged] Hath wronged, Auth., and, 
 in respect of the insertion of the 
 auxiliary, aU Vv. This 
 set dovm, &c.] Put that on mine ac- 
 count, Auth., Gen. {that put,..ac- 
 countes), Eev. {to mine); rette thou 
 this thing to me, Wiol.: that laye to 
 my charge, Tynd., Gov., Gov. Test. 
 {laye that). Gran., Bish.; that im- 
 pute to me, Ehem. It will be observed 
 that six out of the ten Vv. retain the 
 emphatic position of tovto. 
 
 19. Have written] So Ehem. ; 
 sim. WicL. {wrote) : write, Eev. 
 Auth., Eev. and remaining Vv. 
 supply ' it,' except Gen. which gives 
 'this.' That I may not 
 say] Albeit I do not say] Auth., 
 Gen., Bish.; I seye not, Wiol. ; so 
 that I do not saye, Tynd., Gov. 
 (both), Gkan.; not to say, Ehem.; 
 that I say not, Eev. 
 
 U 
 
290 
 
 PHILEMON. 
 
 may I reap profit from thee in the Lord: refresh my 
 
 heart in Christ. 
 2,1 Having confidence in thy obedience I have written 
 
 to thee, knowing that thou wilt do even above what I 
 a a say. Moreover at the same time prepare me also a 
 
 lodging: for I hope that through your prayers I shall 
 
 be granted to you. 
 
 23 Epaphras my fellow-prisoner in Christ Jesus saluteth 
 
 24 thee, Mark, Aristarchus, Demas, Luke, my fellow- 
 labourers. 
 
 35 The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with your 
 spirit. [Amen.] 
 
 20. May I reap profit from] Let 
 me have joy of, Auth., Eev. ; I schal 
 vse, WiOL. ; let me enioye, Tynd., 
 Cov. (both), Ckan. ; let me obteine 
 this pleasure of, Gen., Bish. (enioy); 
 God graunt I may enjoy, Rhem. 
 Heart] So Cov. (both), Eev. : en- 
 trayles, Wiol. ; bowels, Adih. and 
 remaining Vv. Christ] *The 
 Lord, AuiH. 
 
 21. Have jurittem] So Cov. (both), 
 Bhem. ; write, Eev. : wrote, AyiH. 
 and remaining Vv. Do even] 
 So Gen., Eev.: also do, Auih., Cean., 
 Bish.: Tynd., Cov. (both), omit ml 
 in translation ; and Ehem. gives 
 aboue that also which. Above 
 what] Sim. Cov. Test, (it that), 
 Ehem. (that . . . which) : more than, 
 Auth. and remaining Vv. except 
 Wiol. (ouer that that), Eev. (beyond 
 what). 
 
 22. Moreover at the savie time] 
 But withal, Auth., Eev., Ehem. (and); 
 also forsothe, Wiol. (continuing. ..(^ 
 make reedy); and, Cov. Test; nwre- 
 over, Tynd. and remaining Vv. 
 Hope] So WicL., Gov., Ehem., Eev.: 
 trust, Auth. and remaining Vv. 
 Granted] So Eev. : given, Auth. 
 and all other Vv. except Cov. Test., 
 restored. 
 
 23. Sahiteth thee] So Eev., and 
 sim. as to number and position, 
 Wicii. gretith thee wel : Cov. gives 
 There saluteth the at the beginning 
 of ver. 23; Cov. Test, gives salute 
 the at the end of ver. 24 ; Auth. and 
 remaining Vv. give There salute thee 
 in the same position as Cov. 
 
 24. Mark.. .Luke] So Eev. : Mar- 
 cus.. .Lucas, Auth. ; see notes on Gol. 
 i. I (Transl.). 
 
 THE END. 
 
 OAMEKIDGE : PKINTBD BY 0. J. CLAY, M.A. AND SONS, AT THE UNIVEESITY PRESS. 
 
February 1888, 
 
 ©afaloguc of ^ook^i 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 MESSES. LOS&IAUS, &REEIf, & CO. 
 
 S9 PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON. E.G. 
 
 Abbey. — Ti/e English Church and 
 ITS Bishops, 1700-1800. By Charles 
 J. Abbey, Rector of Checkendon. 2 
 vols. 8vo. 24J. 
 
 Abbey and Overton. — The Eng- 
 lish Church m the 'Eighteenth 
 Century. By Charles J. Abbey,- 
 Rector of Checkendon, and John H. 
 Overton, Rector of Epworth and 
 Canon of Lincoln. Crown 8vo. ^s. 6d, 
 
 Abbott. — The Elements of Logic. 
 By T. K. Abbott, B.D. i2mo. 3^. 
 
 Acton. — Modern Cookery for 
 Private Families. By Eliza Acton. 
 With 1 50 Woodcuts. Fcp. 8vo. 4-f . 6d. 
 
 Adams. — Public Debts : an Essay 
 on the Science of Finance. By Henry 
 C. Adams, Ph.D. 8vo. 12s. bd. 
 A. K. H. '^,— The Essays and Con- 
 tributions OP A. K. H. B. — Uniform 
 Cabinet Editions in crown 8vo. 
 
 Autumn Holidays of a Country Parson, 3J. ()d. 
 
 Changed Aspects of Unchanged Truths, 
 3J. M. 
 
 Commonplace Philosopher, 3^. (>d. 
 
 Counsel and Comfort from a City Pulpit, 
 y. 6d. 
 
 Critical Essays of a Country Parson, y. 6d. 
 
 Graver Thoughts of a Country Pa<son. 
 Three Series, 3s. 6d. each. 
 
 Landscapes, Churches, and Moralities, 
 2s. 6d. 
 
 Leisure Hours in Town, 3s. 6d. 
 
 Lessons of Middle Age, 3s. 6d. 
 
 Our Little Life. Two Series, 3^. 6d. each. 
 
 Our Homely Comedy and Tragedy, 3^. 6d. 
 
 Present Day Thoughts, 3^. 6d. 
 
 Recreations of a Country Parson. Three 
 Series, 3s. 6d. each. 
 
 Seaside Musings, 3^. 6d. 
 
 Sunday Afternoons in the Parish Church of 
 a Scottish University City, 3^. 6d. 
 
 Amos. — Works by Sheldon Amos. 
 
 A Primer of the English Con- 
 stitution AND Government, Crown 
 8vo. 6s. 
 
 A Systematic View of the 
 Science OF Jurisprudence. SvOi i8.f. 
 
 Aristotle. — The Works of. 
 The Politics, G. Bekker's Greek 
 Text of Books I. HI. IV. (VII.) with 
 an English Translation by W. E. 
 BOLLAND, M.A. ; and short. Introductory 
 Essays by A, Lang, M.A. Crown 8vo. 
 Is. 6d. 
 
 The Politics : Introductory Essays. 
 By Andrew Lang. (From BoUand and 
 Lang's ' Politics. ') Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d, 
 
 The Ethics; Greek Text, illustrated 
 with Essays and Notes. By Sir Alexan- 
 der Grant, Bart. M.A. LL.D. 2 vols, 
 8vo. 32s. 
 
 The Nicomachean Ethics, Newly 
 Translated into English. By Robert 
 Williams, Barrister-at-Law. Crovra 
 8vo. "]$. 6d. 
 
 Armstrong. — Works by George 
 Francis Armstrong, M.A. 
 
 Poems : Lyrical and Dramatic. Fcp. 
 
 8vo. 6s. 
 King Saul. (The Tragedy of Israel, 
 
 Part I.) Fcp. 8vo. $5. 
 
 King Da vid. (The Tragedy of Israel, 
 Part II.) Pep. 8vo. 6s. 
 
 King Solomon. (The Tragedy of 
 Israel, Part III.) Fcp. 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Ugone: a Tragedy. Fcp. 8vo. 6s. 
 
 A Garland from Greece; Poems. 
 
 Fcp. 8vo. gs. 
 Stories of Wickloiv; Poems. Fcp. 
 
 8vo. gj. 
 Victoria Regina et Imperatrix: 
 
 a Jubilee Song from Ireland, 1887. 4tOL 
 
 5j. cloth gilt. 
 The Life and Letters ofEdmund 
 
 J. ARMSTRONG. Fcp. 8vo. "Js, 6d. 
 
 hvmslccotvg.— Works by EnntaifD 
 y, Armstrong. 
 
 Poetical Works, Fcp. 8vo. sa 
 
 Essays AND Skstches, Fcp.8vo,Sf. 
 
 A 
 
CATALOGUE OP General and Scientific Books 
 
 Arnold. — Works by Thomas 
 Arnold, D.D. Late Headmaster of 
 Rugby School. 
 
 Introductory Lectures on Mo- 
 dern History, delivered in 1841 and 
 1842. 8vo. 7^. bd. 
 
 Sermons Preached mostly in 
 THE Chapel op Rugby School. 6 
 vols, crown 8vo. 30j.or separately, 5 j. each. 
 
 Miscellaneous Works. 8vo. 7.?. ^d, 
 
 Arnold. — A Manual of English 
 Literature, Historical and Critical. 
 By Thomas Arnold, M. A. Crown 8vo, 
 ^s, 6d. 
 
 Arnott. — The Elements of Phy- 
 sics OR Natural Philosophy. By 
 Neil Arnott, M.D. Edited by A. Bain, 
 LL.D. and A. S. Taylor, M.D. F.R.S. 
 Woodcuts. Crown 8vo. 12s. 6d. 
 
 Ashby. — Notes on Physiology 
 FOR the Use of Students Preparing 
 for Examination. With 120 Wood- 
 cuts. By Henry AShby, M.D. Lond. 
 Fcp. Svo. 5^. 
 
 Atelier (The) du Lys ; or, an Art 
 
 Student in the Reign of Terror. By the 
 Author of ' Mademoiselle Mori. ' Crown 
 Svo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Bacon. — The Works and Life of. 
 
 Complete Works. Edited by 
 R. L. Ellis, M.A. J. Spedding, 
 M.A. and D. D. Heath. 7 vols. 8vo. 
 £'i. ly. (,d. 
 
 Letters and Life, including all 
 HIS Occasional Works. Edited by J. 
 Spedding. 7 vols. Svo. £^. ^s. 
 
 The Essa ys ; with Annotations. By 
 Richard Whately, D.D., 8vo. 10s, 6d. 
 
 The Essays; with Introduction, 
 Notes, and Index. By E. A. Abbott, 
 D.D. 2 vols. fcp. 8vo. price 6s. Text 
 and Index only, without Introduction 
 and Notes, in i vol. fcp. Svo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Bagehot. — Works by Walter 
 Bagehot, M.A. 
 
 Biographical Studies. 8vo. i2j. 
 
 Economic Studies. Svo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 Literary Studies.. 2 vols. Svo. zBs. 
 
 The Postulates of English Po- 
 litical BcoNguy. Crown Svo, 2J, dd. 
 
 The BADMINTON LIBRARY, 
 
 edited by the D0KE OF Beaufort, K.G. 
 assisted by Alfred E. T. Watson. 
 
 Hunting. By the Duke of Beau- 
 fort, K.G. and Mowbray lyioRjiis. 
 With Contributions by the Earl of Suffolk 
 and Berkshire, Rev. E. W. L. Davies, 
 Digby Collins, and Alfred E. T. Watson. 
 With Coloured Frontispiece and 53 Illus- 
 trations by J. Sturgess, J. Charlton, and 
 Agnes M. Biddulph. Crown Svo. loj. dd. 
 
 Fishing. By H. Cholmondeley- 
 
 Pennell. With Contributions by the 
 Marquis of Exeter, Henry R.' Francis, 
 M.A., Major John P. Traheme, G. 
 Christopher Davies, R. B. Marston, &c. 
 
 Vol. I. Salmon, Trout, and Grayling. 
 With 150 Illustrations. Cr. SVo. loj. 6rf. 
 
 Vol. II. Pike and other Coarse Fish. 
 With 58 Illustrations. Cr. Svo. lOs. f>d. 
 
 Racing and Steeplechasing. By 
 
 the Earl of Suffolk and Berkshire, 
 W. G. Craven, The Hon. F. Lawley, 
 A. Coventry, and A. E. T. Watson. 
 With Coloured Frontispiece and 56 Illus- 
 trations by J. Sturgess. Cr. Svo. los. dd. 
 
 Shooting. By Lord Walsingham 
 and Sir Ralph Payne-Gallwey, Bart, 
 with Contributions by Lord Lovat, Lord 
 Charles Lennox Kerr, The Hon. G. 
 Lascelles, and Archibald Stuart Wortley. 
 With 21 full-page Illustrations and I49 
 Woodcuts by A. J. Stuart-Wortley, C. 
 Whymper, J. G. Millais, &c. 
 
 Vol. I. Field and Covert. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 Vol. II. Moor and Marsh. Cr. Svo. los. dd. 
 
 Cycling. By Viscount Bury, 
 K.C.M.G. and G. Lacy Hillier. With 
 19 Plates and 61 Woodcuts by Viscount 
 Bury and Joseph Pennell. Cr. Svo. los. 6d. 
 
 Athletics and Football. By 
 
 Montague Shearman. With Intro- 
 troduction by Sir Richard Webster, Q.C. 
 M.P. With 6 full-page Illustrations and 
 45 Woodcuts from Drawings by Stanley 
 Berkeley, and from Instantaneous Photo- 
 graphs by G. Mitchell. Cr. Svo. loj. 6d. 
 
 *** Other volumes in preparation, 
 
 Bagwell. — Ireland under the 
 TuDORS, with a Succinct Account of 
 the Earlier History. By Richard Bag- 
 well, M.A. Vols. I. and II. From the 
 first invasion of the Northmen to the year 
 IS78> 2 vols. Svo, 32J. 
 
PUBLISHED BV MESSRS. LONGMANS, GrBEN, &» Co. 
 
 BY Alexander 
 
 Bain. — Works 
 Bain' LL.D. 
 
 Mental and Moral Science; a 
 Compendium of Psychology and Ethics. 
 Crown 8vo. los. dd. 
 
 The Senses and the Intellect. 
 8vo. 15^. 
 
 The Emotions and the Will. 
 8vo. IS J. 
 
 Practical Essays. Cr. 8vo. 4^. 6d. 
 
 Logic, Deductive and Inductive. 
 Part I. Deduction, ^s. Part II. In- 
 duction, 6s. 6d. 
 
 /AMES Mill; a Biography. Cr.8vo.2j. 
 
 /oHN Stuart Mill; a Criticism, 
 writh Personal Recollections. Cr. 8vo. is. 
 
 Baker. — Works by Sir Samuel 
 
 W. Baker, M.A. 
 Eight Years in Ceylon. Crown 
 
 8vo. Woodcuts. 5j. 
 The Rifle and the Hound in 
 Ceylon. Crown 8vo. Woodcuts. 5^. 
 
 Bale. — A Handbook for Steam 
 Users ; being Notes on Steam Engine 
 and Boiler Management and Steam 
 Boiler Explosions. By M. Powis Bale, 
 M.I.M.E. A.M.I.C.E. Fcp. 8vo. 2.s. 6d. 
 
 Ball. — The Reformed Church of 
 Ireland (1537-1886). By the Right Hon. 
 J. T. Ball. LL.D. D.C.L. 8vo. is. dd. 
 
 Barker. — A Short Manual of 
 Surgical Operations, having Special 
 Reference to many of the Newer Pro- 
 cedures. By A. E. J. Barker, F.R.C.S. 
 Surgeon to University College Hospital. 
 With 61 Woodcuts. Crown 8vo. 12s. 6d. 
 
 Burrett.— English Glees and 
 Part-Songs. An Inquiry into their 
 Historical Development. By William 
 Alexander Barrett. 8vo. ys. 6d. 
 
 Beaconsfield.— Works by the 
 
 Earl of Beaconsfield, K. G. 
 Novels and Tales. The Hugh- 
 enden Edition. With 2 Portraits and II 
 Vignettes. 11 vols. Crovm 8vo. 42J. 
 Endymion. 
 Lothair. Henrietta Temple. 
 
 Coningsby. . Contarini Fleming, &c. 
 
 Sybil. Alroy, Ixion, &c. 
 
 Tancred, The Young Duke, &c. 
 
 Venetia. Vivian Grey. 
 
 Novels and Tales. Cheap Edition, 
 complete in II vols. Crown 8vo. is. 
 each, boards ; \s. 6d. each, cloth. 
 The Wit and Wisdom of the 
 Earl of Beaconsfield, Crown 8vo, 
 \s. boards, \s. 6d. cloth. 
 
 Becker. — Works by FrofessOr 
 Becker, translated from the German by 
 the Rev. F. Metcalf. 
 
 Gallus ; or, Roman Scenes in the 
 Time of Augustus. Post 8vo'. p. 6d. 
 
 Charicles ; or. Illustrations of the 
 Private Life of the Ancient Greeks, 
 Post 8vo. is. (sd. 
 
 Bentley. — A Text-Book of Organic 
 Materia Medic a. Comprising a De- 
 scription of the Vegetable and Animal 
 Drugs of the British Pharmacopceia, 
 with some others .in common use. Ar- 
 ranged Systematically and especially De- 
 signed for Students. By Robt. Bentley, 
 M.R.C.S.Eng. F.L.S. With 62 Illus- 
 trations. Crown 8vo. "js. 6d. 
 
 Boultbee. — A Commentary on the 
 39 Articles of the Church of England. 
 By the Rev. T. P. Boultbee, LL.D. 
 Crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Bourne. — Works by John 
 Bourne, C.E. 
 
 Catechism of the Steam Engine 
 in its various Applications in the Arts, to 
 which is now added a chapter on Air and 
 Gas Engines, and another devoted to 
 Useful Rules, Tables, and Memoranda. 
 Illustrated by 212 Woodcuts. Crovm 8vo. 
 •js. 6d. 
 
 Handbook of the Steam Engine; 
 a Key to the Author's Catechism of the 
 Steam Engine. With 67 Woodcuts. Fcp. 
 8vo. gj. 
 
 Recent Improvements in the 
 Steam Engine. With 124 Woodcuts. 
 Fcp. 8vo. 6^-. 
 
 Bowen. — Harrow Songs and 
 other Verses. By Edward E. 
 Bowen. Fcp. 8vo. zs. 6d.; or printed 
 on hand-made paper, 5^-. 
 
 Brassey. — Works by Lady 
 Brassey. 
 
 A Voyage in the 'Sunbeam,' our 
 Home on the Ocean tOR Eleven 
 Months. 
 
 Library Edition. With 8 Maps and 
 
 Charts, and 118 Illustrations, 8vo. 2 1 j. 
 
 Cabinet Edition. With Map and 66 
 
 Illustrations, crown 8vo. Is. 6d. 
 School Edition. With 37 Illustrations, 
 fcp. 2s. cloth, or 3J. white parchment 
 with gilt edges. 
 Popular Edition, With 60 Illustrations, 
 4to. 6d. sewed, is. cloth. 
 
 {Continued on next page. 
 
Catalogus op General and SciBNTiprc Books 
 
 Brassey. — Works by Lady 
 Srassby — continued. 
 
 Sunshine and Storm in the East.- 
 Library Edition. With 2 Maps and 
 
 114 Illustrations, 8vo. Zls. 
 Cabinet Edition. With 2 Maps and 
 1 14 Illustrations, crown 8vo. "Js. dd. 
 Popular Edition. With 103 Illustra- 
 tions, 4to. dd. sewed, \s. cloth. 
 
 In the Trades, the Tropics, and 
 THE ' Roaring Eortibs.' 
 
 Cabinet Edition, With Map and 220 
 
 Illustrations, crown 8vo. "js. 6d. 
 Popular Edition. With 183 Illustra- 
 tions, 4to, 6d, sewed, is. cloth. 
 
 Three Voyages in the 'Sunbeam.^ 
 Popular Edition, With 346 Illustrations, 
 4to. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Browne. — An Exposition of the 
 39 Articles, Historical and Doctrinal. 
 By E. H. Browne, D.D., Bishop of 
 Winchester. 8vo, l6s, 
 
 Bryant, — Educational Ends ; or, 
 the Ideal of Personal Development. By 
 Sophie Bryant, D.Sc.Lond. Crown 
 8vo. 6j-. 
 
 Buckle, — Works BY Henry Thomas 
 Buckle. 
 
 History of Civilisation in Eng- 
 land AND France, Spain and Scot- 
 land. 3 vols, crown 8vo. 24^. 
 
 Miscellaneous and Posthumous 
 Works. A New and Abridged Edition. 
 Edited by Grant Allen. 2 vols, crown 
 8vo. Zls, 
 
 Buckton. — Works by Mrs. C. M. 
 
 BUCKTON. 
 
 Food -and Home Cookery. With 
 1 1 Woodcuts. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Health in the House. With 41 
 Woodcuts and Diagrams. Crown 8vo. 2s. 
 
 Our Dwellings. With 39 Illustra- 
 tions. Crown 8vo. 3^. 6d. 
 
 Bull. — Works by Thomas Bull, 
 M.D. 
 
 Hints to Mothers on the Man- 
 agement OP their Health during the 
 Period of Pregnancy and in the Lying-in 
 Room. Fcp. 8vo. is. 6d. 
 
 The Maternal Management of 
 Children in Health and Disease, 
 Fcp, Svo, IS. 6d, 
 
 Bullinger. — A Critical Lexicon 
 and Concordance to the English 
 AND Greek New Testament. To- 
 gether with an Index of Greek Words 
 and several Appendices. By the Rev, 
 E. W. Bullinger, D.D. Royal Svo. 15^. 
 
 Burrows, — The Family of Brocas 
 op Beaurepaire and Roche Court, 
 Hereditary Masters of the Royal Buck- 
 hounds. With some account of the English 
 Rule in Aquitaine. By Montagu 
 Burrows, M.A. F.S.A. With 26 
 Illustrations of Monuments, Brasses, 
 Seals, &c. Royal 8vo. 42^'. 
 
 Cabinet Lawyer, The ; a Popular 
 
 Digest of the Laws of England, Civil, 
 Criminal,and Constitutional. Fcp.Svo.gj. 
 
 Canning^, — Some Official Corres- 
 pondence OF George Canning. Edi- 
 ted, with Notes, by Edward J. 
 Stapleton. 2 vols. Svo, 28j. 
 
 Carlyle. — Thomas and Jane 
 Welsh Carlyle. 
 
 Thomas Carlyle, a History of the 
 first Forty Years of his Life, 1795-1835. 
 By J. A. Froude, M.A, With 2 Por- 
 traits and 4 Illustrations, 2 vols. Svo. 32J, 
 
 Thomas Carlyle, a History of his 
 Life in London : from 1834 to his death 
 in 1881. By J. A, Froude, M.A. 2 vols. 
 Svo, 32J. 
 
 Letters and Memorials of Jane 
 Welsh Carlyle. Prepared for pub- 
 lication by Thomas Carlyle, and edited 
 by J. A. Froude, M.A. 3 vols. Svo, 36J, 
 
 Gates. — A Dictionary of 
 General Biography. Fourth Edition, 
 with Supplement brought down to the 
 end of 1884. By W. L. R. Gates, Svo, 
 2Sj, cloth ; 35.?. half-bound russia. 
 
 Clerk. — The Gas Engine. By 
 Dugald Clerk. With loi Illustrations 
 and Diagrams. Crown Svo. 7^. 6d. 
 
 Clodd. — The Story of Creation: 
 a Plain Account ,of Evolution. By 
 Edward Clodd, Author of ' The Child- 
 hood of the World ' &c. With 77 lUus- 
 trations. Crown Svo. 6^. 
 
 Coats. — A Manual of Pathology. 
 By Joseph Coats, M.D. Pathologist 
 to the Western Infirmary and the Sick 
 Children's Hospital, Glasgow, With 339 
 Illustrations engraved on Wood, Svo. 
 Zis. 6d. 
 
PUBLISHED sy Messrs. Longmans, -Green, &' Co. 
 
 Colenso. — Tub Pentateuch and 
 Book off Joshua Critically Ex- 
 amined. By J. W. Colenso, D.D. 
 late Bishop of Natal. Crown 8vo. 6j. 
 
 .Comyn. — Atherstone Priory: a 
 Tale. By L. N. Comyn. Crown 8vo. 
 2,5. dd. 
 
 Conder. — A Handbook to the 
 Bible, or Guide to the Study of the Holy 
 Scriptures derived from Ancient Monu- 
 ments and Modern Exploration. By F. 
 R. Conder, and Lieut. C. R. Conder, 
 R,E. Post 8vo. 7 J. dd. 
 
 Conington. — Works by John 
 
 CONINGTON, M.A. 
 
 The ^neid op Virgil. Trans- 
 lated into English Verse; Crown 8vo. gj. 
 
 The Poems of Virgil. Translated 
 into English Prose. Crown 8vo. <js, 
 
 Conybeare & Howson. — The 
 
 Life and Epistles of St. Pa ul. 
 By the Rev. W. J. Conybeare, M.A. 
 and the Very Rev. J. S. Howson, D.D. 
 Library Edition, with Maps, Plates, and 
 Woodcuts. 2 vols, square crown 8vo. 
 
 2.1S. 
 
 Student's Edition, revised and condensed, 
 with 46 Illustrations and Maps. I vol. 
 crown 8vo. 'Js. dd. 
 
 Cooke. — Tablets of Anatomy. 
 By Thomas Cooke, F.R.C.S. Eng. 
 B.A. B.Sc. M.D. Paris. Fourth Edition, 
 being a selection of the Tablets believed 
 to be most useful to Students generally. 
 Post 4to. is. 6d. 
 
 Cox. — The First Century of 
 Christianity. By Homersham Cox, 
 M.A. 8vo. 12s, 
 
 Cox.— A General History of 
 Greece: from the Earliest Period to the 
 Death of Alexander the Great ; with a 
 Sketch of . the History to the Present 
 Time. By the Rev. Sir G. W. Cox, 
 Bart., M.A. With 11 Maps and Plans. 
 Crown Svo. "Js. 6d. 
 
 *^* For other Works by Sir G. Cox, 
 f«« 'Epochs of History,' p. 24. 
 
 Creighton. — History of the 
 Papacy During the Reformation. 
 By the Rev. M. Creighton, M.A. 
 Svo. Vols. I. and II. 1378-I464, 33^. ; 
 Vols. III. and IV. 1464-1518, 24J. 
 
 Crookes. — Select Methods in 
 Chemical Analysis (chiefly Inorganic). 
 By William Crookes, F.R.S. V.P.C.S. 
 With 37 Illustrations. Svo. 24?. 
 
 Crozier. — Civilization and Pro- 
 gress. By John Beattie Crozier. 
 New and Cheaper Edition. Svo. ^s. 
 
 Crump. — A Short Enquiry into 
 the Formation of Political Opinion, 
 from the Reign of the Great Families to 
 the Advent of Democracy. By Arthur 
 Crump. Svo. 7^. 6d. 
 
 Culley. — Handbook of Practical 
 Telegraphy. By R. S. Culley, 
 M. Inst. C.E. Plates and Woodcuts. 
 Svo. i6s. 
 
 Dante. — The Divine Comedy of 
 Dante Alighieri. Translated verse for 
 verse from the Original into Terza Rima. 
 By James Innes Minchin. Crown 
 Svo. 1 5 J. 
 
 Davidson. — An Introduction to 
 THE Study of the New Testament, 
 Critical, Exegetical, and Theological. 
 By the Rev. S. Davidson, D.D. LL.D. 
 Revised Edition. 2 vols. 8vo. 3OJ. 
 
 Davidson. — Works by William 
 L. Davidson, M.A. 
 
 The Logic of Definition Ex- 
 plained and Applied. Crown Svo. 6s. 
 
 Leading and Important English 
 Words Explained and Exemplified. 
 Fcp. Svo. 3 J. 6d. 
 
 Decaisne & Le Maout. — A 
 
 General System of Botany. Trans- 
 lated from the French of E. Le Maout, 
 M.D., and J. Decaisne, by Mrs. 
 Hooker ; with Additions by Sir J, D. 
 Hooker, C.B, F.R.S. Imp. Svo. with 
 S,Soo Woodcuts, 3IJ. 6d. 
 
 De Salis. — Works by Mrs. Db 
 Salis. 
 
 Savouries A la Mode. Fcp. Svo. 
 IS. boards. 
 
 Entries A la Mode. Fcp. Svo. 
 IS. 6d. boards. 
 
 Soups and Dressed Pish A la 
 Mode, Fcp. Svo. is. 6d. boards. 
 
 Oysters a la Mode. Fcp. Svo. 
 IS. 6d. boards. 
 
 Sweets and Supper Dishes 2 la 
 Mode. Fcp. Svo, is. 6d. boards. 
 
Catalogue of General and Scientific Books 
 
 De Tocqueville. — Democracy in 
 America. By Alexis de Tocque- 
 ville. Translated by Henry Reeve, 
 C.B. 2 vols, crown 8vo. i6s. 
 
 Dickinson. — On Renal and 
 Urinary Affections. ByW.HowsHip 
 Dickinson, M.D.Cantab. F.R.C.P.&C. 
 With 12 Plates and 122 Woodcuts. 3 
 vols. 8vo. ;£'3. 4J. dd. 
 
 Dixon. — Rural Bird Life ; Essays 
 on Ornithology, virith Instructions for 
 Preserving Objects relating to that 
 Science. By Charles Dixon. With 
 45 Woodcuts. Crown 8vo. 5.f. 
 
 Dove. — Domesday Studies: being 
 the Pa,pers read at the Meetings of the 
 Domesday Commemoration 1886. With 
 a Bibliography of Domesday Book and 
 Accounts of the MSS. and Printed Books 
 exhibited at the Public Record Office and 
 at the British Museum. Edited by P. 
 Edward Dove, of Lincoln's Inn, Bar- 
 rister-at-Law, Honorary Secretary of the 
 Domesday Commemoration Committee. 
 Vol. I. 4to. i8j.; Vol. II. 4to. i8j. 
 
 Dowell. — A History of Taxation 
 and Taxes in England from the 
 Earliest Times to the Year 1885. 
 By Stephen Dowell, Assistant Solici- 
 tor of Inland Revenue. Second Edition, 
 Revised and Altered. (4 vols. 8vo.) 
 Vols. I. and II. The History of Taxation, 
 21s. Vols. III. and IV. The History of 
 Taxes, 21s, 
 
 Doyle. — The Official Baronage 
 OF England. By James E. Doyle. 
 Showing the Succession, Dignities, and 
 Offices of every Peer from lo66 to 1885. 
 Vols. I. to III. With 1,600 Portraits, 
 Shields of Arms, Autographs, &c. 3 vols. 
 4to. £S. is. 
 Large-paper Edition, 3 vols. £1^. l^s. 
 
 Doyle. — Works by J. A.Doyle, 
 
 Fellow of All Souls College, Oxford. 
 
 The English in America: Vir- 
 ginia, Maryland, and the Carolinas. 
 8vo. 1 8 J. 
 
 The English in America : The 
 Puritan Colonies. 2 vols. 8vo. 36^. 
 
 Dublin University Press Series 
 
 (The) : a Series of Works undertaken 
 by the Provost and Senior Fellows of 
 Trinity College, Dublin. 
 Abbott's (T. K.) Codex Rescriptus Dublin- 
 ensis of St. Matthew. 4to. 21s. 
 
 Evangeliorum Versiq.Ante- 
 
 hieronymianaex CodiceUsseriano (Dublin- 
 ensi). 2 vols, crown 8vo. 21s. 
 Burnside (W. S.) and Panton's (A. W.) 
 
 Theory of Equations. 8vo. \2s. 6d. 
 Casey's (John) Sequel to Euclid's Elements. 
 Crown 8vo. 3^. 6d. 
 
 Analytical Geometry of the 
 
 Conic Sections. Crown 8vo. "js. 6d. 
 Davies's (J. F.) Eumenides of ^schylus. 
 
 With Metrical English Translation. 8vo. 
 
 Is. 
 Dublin Translations into Greek and Latin 
 
 Verse. Edited by R. Y. Tyrrell. 8vo. 
 I2J-. 6d. 
 Graves's (R. P.) Life of Sir William 
 
 Hamilton. (3 vols.) Vols. I. and II. 
 
 8vo. each 15J. 
 Griffin (R. W.) on Parabola, Ellipse, and 
 
 Hyperbola, treated Geometrically. Crown 
 
 8vo. 6^. 
 Haughton's (Dr. S.) Lectures on Physical 
 
 Geography. 8vo. I5J-. 
 Hobart's (W. K.) Medical Language of St. 
 
 Luke. 8vo. \6s. 
 Leslie's (T. E. Cliflfe) Essays in Political 
 
 and Moral Philosophy. 8vo. lox. 6d. 
 Macalister's (A. ) Zoology and Morphology 
 
 of Vertebrata. 8vo. 10s. dd. 
 MacCullagh's (James) Mathematical and 
 
 other Tracts. 8vo. 15^. 
 Maguire's (T.) Parmenides of Plato, Greek 
 
 Text with English Introduction, Aiialysis, 
 
 and Notes. 8vo. 7j. dd. 
 Monck's (W. H. S.) Introduction to Logic. 
 
 Crown Svo. <,s. 
 Purser's (J. M. ) Manual of Histology. Fcp. 
 
 Svo. Sj. 
 Roberts's (R. A.) Examples in the Analytic 
 
 Geometry of Plane Curves. Fcp. Svo. Sj. 
 Southey's(R.) Correspondence wil3i Caroline 
 
 Bowles. Edited by E. Dowden. 8vo. 14^. 
 Thornhill's (W. J.) The ^neid of Virgil, 
 
 freely translated into English Blank 
 
 Verse. Crown Svo. yj. dd. 
 Tyrrell's (R. Y.) Cicero's Correspondence. 
 
 Vols. I. and II. Svo. each I2j-. 
 The Acharnians of Aristo- 
 phanes, translated into English Verse. 
 
 Crown Svo. 2s, dd. 
 Webb's (T. E.) Goethe's Faust, Transla- 
 tion and Notes* Svo. I2j. dd. 
 ■ The Veil of Isis : a Series 
 
 of Essays on Idealism. Svo. 10s. dd. 
 Wilkins's (G.) The Growth of the Homeric 
 
 Poems. Svo. ds. 
 
PUBLISHED By MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREBN, &=■ Co. 
 
 Edersheim. — Works by the Rev. 
 Alfred Edersheim, D.D. 
 The Life and Times of Jesus 
 
 THE Messiah. 2 vols. 8vo. 24J. 
 Prophecy and History in rela- 
 tion TO THE Messiah: the Warburton 
 Lectures, delivered at Lincoln's Inn 
 Chapel, 1880-1884. 8vo. I2J. 
 
 EUicott. — Works by C. y. 
 Ellicott, D.D. Bishop of Gloucester 
 and Bristol. 
 
 A Critical and Grammatical 
 Commentary ON St. Paul's Epistles. 
 8vo. 
 
 I. Corinthians, ids, 
 
 Galatians. 8j. 6d. 
 
 Ephesians. Zs. dd. 
 
 Pastoral Epistles, los, 6d. 
 
 Philippians, Colossians, and Philemon. 
 lar. 6d. 
 
 Thessalonians. "js. 6d. 
 
 Historical Lectures on the Life 
 op Our Lord Jesus Christ. 8vo. 12s. 
 
 English Worthies. Edited by An- 
 drew Lang, M.A. Fcp. 8vo. 2s. 6d. 
 each. 
 
 Darwin. By Grant Allen. 
 
 Marlborough. By G. Saintsbury. 
 
 Shaftesbury ( TTie First Earl). By 
 H. D. Traill. 
 
 Admiral Blake. By David 
 Hannay. 
 
 Raleigh. By Edmund Gosse. 
 
 Steele. By Austin Dobson. 
 
 Ben JoNsoN. By J- A. Symonds. 
 
 Canning. By Frank H, Hill. 
 
 Claverhouse. By Mowbray 
 Morris. 
 
 Epochs of Ancient History. 
 
 10 vols. fcp. 8vo. 2s. 6d. each. See p. 24. 
 
 Epochs of Church History. 8 vols. 
 
 fcp. 8vo. 2s. 6d. each. See p. 24. 
 
 Epochs of Modern History. 
 
 18 vols, fcp. 8vo. 2s. 6d. each. See p. 24. 
 
 Erichsen. — Works by John Eric 
 
 Erichsen, F.R.S. 
 The Science and Art of Sur- 
 gery: Being a Treatise on Surgical In- 
 juries, Diseases, and Operations. With 
 984 Illustrations. 2 vols. 8vo. 42^. 
 On Concussion of the Spine, Ner- 
 vous Shocks, and other Obscure Injuries 
 of the Nervous System, Cr. 8vo. \os. 6d, 
 
 Ewald. — Works by Professor 
 Heinrich EwALD, of Gottitigen. 
 
 The Antiquities of Israel, 
 Translated from the 'German by H. S, 
 Solly, M.A. 8vo. \2s. 6d. 
 
 The History of Israel. Trans- 
 lated from the German. 8 vols. 8vo. 
 Vols. I. and II. 24^. Vols. III. and 
 IV, 2IJ-, Vol, V, 18s. Vol, VI. 16s. 
 Vol. VII. 2ii-. Vol. VIII. with Index 
 to the Complete Work, i8j. 
 
 Fairbairn. — Works by Sir W, 
 Fairbairn, Bart. C.E. 
 
 A Treatise on Mills and Mill- 
 work, vfith 18 Plates and 333 Woodcuts, 
 I vol. 8vo. 25^'. 
 
 Useful Information for Engi- 
 neers. With many Plates and Wood- 
 cuts. 3 vols, crown 8vo. 3 1 J, dd. 
 
 Farrar. — Language and Lan- 
 guages. A Revised Edition of Chapters 
 on Language and Families of Speech. By 
 F, W, Farrar, D.D. Crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Firbank. — The Life and Work of 
 Joseph Firbank, J. P. D.L. Rail- 
 way Contractor. By Frederick 
 McDermott, Barrister-at-Law. 8vo. Sj, 
 
 Fitzwygram. — Horses and 
 
 Stables. By Major-General Sir F. 
 Fitzwygram, Bart, With 19 pages of 
 Illustrations, 8vo, ^s, 
 
 Forbes. — A Course of Lectures 
 on Electricity, delivered before the 
 Society of Arts. By George Forbes, 
 M.A. F,R.S. (L, & E.) With 17 Illus- 
 trations. Crown 8vo, ^s. 
 
 Ford. — The Theory and Practice 
 OF Archery. By the late Horace 
 Ford. New Edition, thoroughly Revised 
 and Re-written by W. Butt, M.A, With 
 a Preface by C. J. Longman, M.A. 
 F.S.A. 8vo. 14^. 
 
 Fox. — The Early History of 
 Charles James Fox. By the Right 
 Hon. Sir G. O. Trevelyan, Bart. 
 Library Edition, 8vo. iZs, 
 Cabinet Edition, cr. 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Francis. — A Book on Anglings- 
 ox, Treatise on the Art of Fishing in every 
 branch ; including full Illustrated Lists 
 of Salmon Flies. By Francis Francis, 
 Post 8vo, Portrait and Plates, 15^, 
 
Catalogue op (JsmRAL and Scientific Books 
 
 Freeman.— 7'iV^ Historical Geo- 
 graphy OF Europe. By E. A. Free- 
 man, D.C.L. With 6S Maps. 2 vols. 
 Svo. sij-. 6d. 
 
 Froude. — Works by James A. 
 Froude, M.A. 
 
 The History of England, from 
 the Fall of Wolsey to the Defeat of the 
 Spanish Armada. 
 
 Cabinet Edition, 12 vols. or. 8vo.;^3. 12J. 
 Popular Edition, 12 vols. cr. 8vo. ;f 2. 2s, 
 
 Short Studies on Great Sub- 
 jects. 4, vols, crown Svo. 24^. 
 C^SAR : a Sketch. Crown Svo. 6s. 
 
 The English in Ireland in the 
 Eighteenth Century. 3 vols, crown 
 Svo. \%s. 
 
 Oceana; or, England and Her 
 Colonies. With 9 Illustrations. Crown 
 Svo. 2s. boards, 2s. 6d. cloth. 
 
 The English in the West Indies; 
 OR, THE Bow OP Ulysses. With 9 
 Illustrations. Svo, iZs. 
 
 Thomas Carlyle, a History of the 
 first Forty Years of his Life, 1795 t° 
 1835. 2 vols. Svo. 32J. 
 
 Thomas Carlyle, a History of His 
 Life in London from 1834 to his death in 
 1 88 1. With Portrait engraved on steel. 
 2 vols. Svo. 32J. 
 
 Galloway. — The Fundamental 
 Principles OF Chemistry Practically 
 Taught by a New Method. By 
 Robert Galloway, M,R,I,A, F,C.S, 
 Crown Svo, bs. bd. 
 
 Ganot. — Works by Professor 
 Ganot. Translated by E. Atkinson, 
 Ph,D, F,C.S. 
 Elementary Treatise on Phy- 
 SICS. With 5 Coloured Plates and 923 
 Woodcuts, Crown Svo, l^s. 
 
 Natural Philosophy for Gene- 
 ral Readers and Young Persons. 
 With 2 Plates, 518 Woodcuts, and an 
 Appendix of Questions. Cr. Svo. ^s. 6d. 
 
 Gardiner. — Works by Samuel 
 Rawson Gardiner, LL.D. 
 
 History of England, from the 
 Accession of James I. to the Outbreak of 
 the Civil War, 1603-1642. Cabinet 
 Edition, thoroughly revised. 10 vols, 
 crown Svo. price ds. each. 
 
 A History of the Great Civil 
 War, 1642-1649. (3 vols.) Vol, I. 
 1642-1644, With 24 Maps. Svo. 2ij, 
 [Continued above. 
 
 Gardiner. — Works by S. R. Gar. 
 
 ^INER, LL.D. — continued. 
 Outline of English History, 
 B.C. 55-A,D. 1886, With 96 Woodcuts, 
 fcp, Sto. 2s. 6d. 
 
 *,* For other Works, see ' Epochs of 
 Modern History,' p. 24. 
 
 Garrod. — Works by Sir Alfred 
 
 Baring Garrod, M.D. F.R.S. 
 A Treatise on Gout and RheU' 
 matic Gout {Pheumatoid Arthritis). 
 With 6 Plates, comprising 21 Figures 
 (14 Coloured), and 27 Illustrations en- 
 graved on Wood. Svo. 21s. 
 
 The Essentials of Materia 
 Medica and Therapeutics. New 
 Edition, revised and adapted to the New 
 Edition of the British Pharmacopoeia, 
 by Nestor Tirard, M.D. Crown Svo, 
 12s. 6d. 
 
 Gilkes. — Boys AND Masters: aStory 
 of School Life. By A. H, Gilkes, M.A, 
 Head Master of Dulwich College. Crown 
 Svo. y. 6d. 
 
 Goethe. — Faust. A New Translation, 
 chiefly in Blank Verse ; with Introduc- 
 tion and Notes. By James Adey Birds, 
 B.A. F.G.S. Crown Svo, 12s. 6d. 
 Paust. The German Text, with an 
 English Introduction and Notes for Stu- 
 dents. By Albert M. Selss, M.A. 
 Ph.D. Crown Svo. Ss. 
 
 Goodeve. — Works by T. M. Good- 
 eve, M.A. 
 
 Principles of Mechanics. With 
 253 Woodcuts. Crown Svo. 6s. 
 
 The Elements of Mechanism. 
 With 342 Woodcuts. Crown Svo. 6s. 
 
 A Manual of Mechanics : an 
 Elementary Text-Book for Students of 
 Applied Mechanics, With 138 Illustra- 
 tions and Diagrams, and 141 Examples, 
 Fcp, Svo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Grant. — The Ethics of Aristotle. 
 
 The Greek Text illustrated by Essays 
 and Notes. By Sir Alexander Grant, 
 Bart, LL,D, D,C.L, &c, 2 vols. 
 Svo, 32s. 
 
 Gray. — Anatomy, Descriptive 
 AND Surgical. By Henry Gray, 
 F,R.S. late Lecturer on Anatomy at 
 St. George's Hospital, With 569 Wood- 
 cut Illustrations, a large number of 
 which are coloured. Re-edited by T. 
 Pickering Pick, Surgeon to St, George's 
 Hospital. Royal Svp, 36^, 
 
PUBLISHED BY MESSRS. LONGMANS, GrEEN, 6^ Co. 
 
 Green. — The Works of Thomas 
 Hill Grben, late Fellow of Balliol 
 College, and Whyte's Professor of Moral 
 Philosophy in the University of Oxford. 
 Edited by R. L. Nettleship, Fellow 
 of Balliol College, Oxford (3 vols.) 
 Vols. I. and II. — Philosophical Works. 
 8vo. i(>s. each. 
 
 Greville. — A Jovrnal of the 
 
 Reigns of King George IV. King 
 William IV. and Queen Victoria. 
 By the late Charles C. F. Greville, 
 Esq. Clerk of the Council to those Sove- 
 reigns. Edited by Henry Reeve, C.B. 
 D.C.L. Corresponding Member of the 
 Institute of France. 8 vols. Crown 8vo. 
 6s. each. (In course of Publication in 
 Monthly Volumes.) 
 
 Grove. — The Correlation of 
 Physical Forces. By the Hon. Sir 
 W. R. Grove, F.R.S. &c. 8vo. 15^. 
 
 Gwilt. — An Encyclopedia of 
 Architecture. By Joseph Gwilt, 
 F.S.A. Illustrated with more than 1,100 
 Engravings on Wood. Revised, with 
 Alterations and Considerable Additions, 
 by Wyatt Papworth. 8vo. t,2s. 6d. 
 
 Hagrgard. — Works by H. Rider 
 Haggard. 
 
 She : A History of Adventure, 
 Crown 8vo. 6j. 
 
 Allan Quatermain. With 31 Illus- 
 trations by C. H. M. Kerr. Crown 
 8vo. 6y. 
 
 Halliwell-Phillipps.— <9£7ri/ivs5 of 
 
 THE Life of Shakespeare. By J. O. 
 Halliwell-Phillipps, F.R.S. 2 vols. 
 Royal 8vo. los. 6d. 
 
 Harte. — Novels by Bret Harte. 
 In the Carqvinez Woods. Fcp. 
 8vo.''lj. boards ; \s. dd. cloth. 
 
 On the Frontier. Three Stories. 
 
 l6mo. I^. 
 By Shore and Sedge. Three 
 Stories. i6mo. \s. 
 "^zxt-vng.— Works by Dr. G. 
 
 Hartwig. 
 7 HE Sea and its Living Wonders. 
 With 12 Plates and 303 Woodcuts. 8vo, 
 lOs. 6d. 
 The Tropical World. With 8 Plates, 
 
 and 172 Woodcuts. 8vo. \os. 6d. 
 The Polar World. With 3 Maps, 
 8 Plates, and 85 Woodcuts. 8vo. \os. dd. 
 \Contimted ahove. 
 
 Hartwig. — Works by JDr, G. 
 Hartwig. — continued. 
 The Subterranean World. With 
 3 Maps and 80 Woodcuts. 8vo, los, 6d. 
 
 The Aerial World. With Map, 
 8 Plates, and 60 Woodcuts. 8vo. ioj. 6d. 
 
 The following books are extracted from the 
 
 foregoing works by Dr. Hartwig : — 
 Heroes of the Arctic Regions. 
 
 With 19 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. zs. 
 
 cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 Wonders OF the Tropical Forests. 
 
 With 40 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 2s. 
 
 cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 Workers Under the Ground ; 
 
 or, Mines and Muiing. With 29 Illus- 
 trations. Crown 8vo. 2s. cloth extra, gilt 
 
 edges. 
 Marvels Over Our Heads. With 
 
 29 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 2s. cloth 
 
 extra, gilt edges. 
 Marvels Under Our Feet. With 
 
 22 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 2j, cloth 
 
 extra, gilt edges. 
 Dwellers in the Arctic Regions. 
 
 With 29 Illustrations. Crown Svo. 2s. 6d, 
 
 cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 Winged Life in the Tropics. 
 
 With 55 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. zs, 6d. 
 
 cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 
 Volcanoes and Earthquakes. 
 With 30 Illustrations. Crown Svo. 2s. 6d. 
 cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 
 Wild Animals of the Tropics. 
 With 66 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. y. 6d. 
 cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 
 Sea Monsters and Sea Birds. 
 With 75 Illustrations. Crown Svo. zs. 6d. 
 cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 
 Denizens of the Deep. With 
 117 Illustrations. Crown Svo. Zs, (>d. cloth 
 extra, gilt edges. 
 
 Hassall. — The Inhalation Treat. 
 MENT OF Diseases of the Organs of 
 Respiration, including Consumption. 
 By Arthur Hill Hassall, M.B. 
 With 19 Illustrations of Apparatus, Cr. 
 Svo. izs. 6d. 
 
 Havelock. — Memoirs of Sir 
 Henry Hayelock, K.C.B. By John 
 Clark Marshman. Crown Svo. 3^. (>d. 
 
 Heart!. — The Government of Eng- 
 land; its Structure and its Development. 
 By William Epward Hearn, Q.C. 
 Svo. i6j. 
 
Catalogue of General and Scientific Books 
 
 Heltnholtz. — Works by Pro- 
 
 ' FESSOR HeLMHOLTZ. 
 
 On the Sensations of Tone as a 
 Physiological Basis for the Theorv 
 of Music. Royal 8vo. 28^. 
 
 Popular Lectures on Scientific 
 SusyBCTS. With 68 Woodcuts. 2 vols. 
 Crown 8vo. 15^. or separately, 7j. 6d. each. 
 
 Herschel. — Outlines of Astro- 
 nomy. By Sir J. F. W. Herschel, 
 Bart. M.A. With Plates and Diagrams. 
 Square crown 8vo. 12s. 
 
 Hester's Venture : a Novel. By 
 
 the Author of 'The Atelier du Lys.' 
 Crown 8vo. 2J. dd. 
 
 Hewitt. — The Diagnosis and 
 Treatment of Diseases of Women, 
 including the Diagnosis of Preg- 
 nancy. By Graily Hewitt, M.D. 
 With 211 Engravings. 8vo. 24J. 
 
 Historic Towns. Edited by E. A. 
 
 Freeman, D.C.L. and Rev. William 
 Hunt, M.A. With Maps and Plans. 
 Crown 8vo. 3j. 6d. each. 
 
 London. By W. E. Loftie. 
 
 Exeter. By E. A. Freeman. 
 
 Bristol. By W. Hunt. 
 
 Oxford. By C. W. Boase. 
 
 Hobart. — Sketches from My Life. 
 By Admiral Hobart Pasha. With 
 Portrait. Crown 8vo. 7j. dd. 
 
 Holmes. — A System of Surgery, 
 Theoretical and Practical, in Treatises by 
 various Authors. Edited by Timothy 
 Holmes, M.A. and J. W. Hulke, 
 F.R.S. 3 vols, royal 8vo. ^^4. 4s. 
 
 Homer. — The Iliad of Homer, 
 Homometrically translated by C. B. Cay- 
 LEY. 8vo, 1 2 J. dd. 
 
 The Iliad of Homer. The Greek 
 Text, with a Verse TranslaHon, by W. C. 
 Green, M.A. Vol. I. Books I.-XII. 
 Crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Hopkins. — Christ the Consoler; 
 a Book of Comfort for the Sick. By 
 Ellice Hopkins. Fcp. 8vo. zs. dd. 
 
 Howitt. — Visits to Remarkable 
 Places, Old Halls, Battle-Fields, Scenes 
 illustrative of Striking Passages in English 
 History and Poetry. By William 
 Howitt. With 80 Illustrations engraved 
 on Wood, Crown 8vo, y. 
 
 Hudson & Gosse.— 7"^^ Rotifera 
 OR ' Wheel-Animalcules.' By C. T. 
 Hudson, LL.D. and P. H. Gosse, 
 F.R.S. With 30 Coloured Plates. In 6 
 Parts. 4to. los. dd. each. Complete in 
 2 vols. 4to. £z. los. 
 
 HuUah. — Works by John Hul- 
 lah, LL.D. 
 
 Course of Lectures on the His- 
 tory OP Modern Music. 8vo. 8j. dd. 
 
 Course of Lectures on the Tran- 
 sition Period of Musical History. 
 8vo. ioj. dd. 
 
 Hume. — ThePhilosophical Works 
 op David Hume. Edited by T. H. 
 Green, M.A. and the Rev. T. H. 
 Grose, M.A. 4 vols. 8vo. 56 j. Or 
 separately, Essays, 2 vols. 28j. Treatise 
 of Human Nature. 2 vols. 28^. 
 
 Huth. — The Marriage of Near 
 Kin, considered with respect to the Law 
 of Nations, the Result of Experience, 
 and the Teachings of Biology. By 
 Alfred H. Huth. Royal 8vo. 2ij. 
 
 In the Olden Time : a Tale of 
 
 the Peasant War in Germany. By the 
 Author of 'Mademoiselle Mori.' Crown 
 8vo. 2J. dd. 
 
 Ingelow. — Works by Jean Inge- 
 low. 
 
 Poetical Works. Vols, i and 2 
 Fcp. 8vo. I2J. 
 
 Lyrical and Other Poems. Se- 
 lected from the Writings of JEA.N 
 Ingelow. Fcp. 8vo. 2s. dd. cloth plain ; 
 3J. cloth gilt. 
 
 Jackson. — Aid to Engineering 
 Solution. By Lowis D'A. Jackson, 
 C.E. With III Diagrams and 5 Wood- 
 cut Illustrations. 8vo. 2IJ. 
 
 James. — The Long White Moun- 
 tain; or, a Journey in Manchuria, with 
 an Account of the History, Administra- 
 tion, and Religion of that Province. By 
 H. E. James, of Her Majesty's Bombay 
 Civil Service. With Illustrations and a 
 Map. I vol. 8vo. 24J. 
 
 Jameson. — Works by Mrs Jame- 
 son. 
 Legends of the Saints and Mar- 
 tyrs. With 19 Etchings and 187 Wood- 
 cuts. 2 vols. 3IJ-. dd. 
 Legends of the Madonna, the 
 Virgin Mary as represented in Sacred 
 and Legendary Art. With 27 Etchings 
 and 165 Woodcuts, i vol. 21s. 
 
 [Continued on next page. 
 
PUSLtSHBD BY MESSRS. LONGMANS, GrBBN, &° Co, 
 
 Jameson. — Works by Mrs. Jame- 
 son — continued. 
 
 Legends OF THE Monastic Orders. 
 With II Etchings and 88 Woodcuts. 
 1 vol. 2 1 J. 
 
 History OF the Saviour, His Types 
 and Precursors. Completed by Lady 
 Eastlake. With 13 Etchings and 281 
 Woodcuts. 2 vols. 42J. 
 
 Jeans. — Works by J. S. Jeans. 
 
 England's Supremacy: its Sources, 
 Economics, and Dangers. 8vo. Sj. 6d. 
 
 £ailway Problems: An Inquiry 
 into the Economic Conditions of Rail- 
 way Working in Different Countries. 
 Svo. I2s. 6d. 
 
 Jenkin. — Papers, Literary, 
 Scientific, &=€. By the late Fleeming 
 Jenkin, F.R.S.S. L. & E. Professor of 
 Engineering in the University of Edin- 
 burgh. Edited by Sidney Colvin, M. A. 
 ■ and J. A. EviriNG, F.R.S. With Memoir 
 by Robert Louis Stevenson, and 
 Facsimiles of Drawings by Fleeming 
 Jenkin. 2 vols. Svo. 32J-. 
 
 Johnson. — The Patentee's Man- 
 ual ; a Treatise on the Law and Practice 
 of Letters Patent. By J. Johnson and 
 J. H. Johnson. Svo. ioj. dd. 
 
 Johnston. — A General Diction- 
 ary OF Geography, Descriptive, Physi- 
 cal, Statistical, and Historical-; a com- 
 plete Gazetteer of the World. By Keith 
 Johnston. Medium Svo. 42J. 
 
 Johnstone.—^ Short Introduc- 
 tion to the Study of Logic. By 
 Laurence Johnstone. Crown Svo. 
 2s. 6d. 
 
 Jordan. — Works by William 
 Leighton Jorda n, Fi R. G. S. 
 
 The Ocean: a Treatise on Ocean 
 Currents and Tides and their Causes. 
 Svo. a I J. 
 
 The New Principles of Natural 
 Philosophy. With 13 plates. Svo. 2\s. 
 
 The Winds : an Essay in Illustration 
 of the New Principles of Natural Philo- 
 sophy. Crown Svo. 2s. 
 
 ■ The Standard of Value. Crown 
 ■Svo, Sj. 
 
 Jukes. — Works by Andrew Jukes. 
 
 The New Man and the Eternal 
 Life. Crown Svo. ds. 
 
 The Types of Genesis. Crown 
 Svo. Is. (sd. 
 
 The Second Death and the Re- 
 stitution of all Things. Crown Svo. 
 3^. 6d. 
 
 The Mystery of the Kingdom. 
 Crown Svo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Justinian, — The Institutes of 
 
 yusTlNlAN; Latin Text, chiefly that of 
 Huschke, with English Introduction, 
 Translation, Notes, and Summary, By 
 Thomas C. Sandars, M.A, Svo. iZs, 
 
 Kalisch. — Works- by M. M. 
 Kalisch, M.A. 
 
 Bible Studies. Part I. The Pro- 
 phecies of Balaam. Svo. loj. (>d. Part 
 11. The Book of Jonah. Svo. lOJ. 6a?. 
 
 Commentary on the Old Testa- 
 ment; with a New Translation. Vol.1. 
 Genesis, Svo. iSj. or adapted for the 
 General Reader, 12^. Vol. II. Exodus, 
 15J. or adapted for the General Reader, 
 \2s. Vol. III. Leviticus, Part I. \t,s. or 
 adapted for the General Reader, %s. 
 Vol. IV. Leviticus, Part II. 15^. or 
 adapted for the General Reader, Sj. 
 
 Hebrew Grammar. With Exer- 
 cises. Part I. Svo. \2s. 6d, Key, ^s. 
 Part II. 12s. dd. 
 
 Kant. — Works byEmmanuelKant. 
 Critique of Practical Reason. 
 Translated by Thomas Kingsmill Abbott, 
 B.D. Svo. I2J. 6d. 
 Introduction to Logic, and his 
 Essay on the Mistaken Subtiltv 
 OF the Four Figures. Translated by 
 Thomas Kingsmill Abbott, B.D. With 
 a few Notes by S. T. Coleridge. Svo. 6s, 
 
 Kendall. — Works by May Ken- 
 dall. 
 From A Garret. Crown 8vo.,6f. 
 , Dreams to Sell; Poems. Pep, 
 Svo. 6s. 
 
 Killick. — Handbook to Mill's 
 System of Logic. By the Rev. A. H. 
 Killick, M.A. Crown Svo. 3^. 6d. 
 
 Kirkup. — An Inquiry into Social- 
 ism. By Thomas Kirkup, Author of 
 the Article on ' Socialism ' in the ' Ency- 
 clopasdia Britannica.' Crown Svo. p. 
 
 Knowledge Library. (&e Proctor's 
 
 Works, p. 17.) 
 
ii 
 
 Catalogue of CenSral and ScIbntific Booits 
 
 Kolbe. — A Short Text-book of 
 Inorganic Chemistry. By Dr. Her- 
 mann Kolbe. Translated from the 
 German by T. S. Humpidge, Ph.D. 
 With a Coloured Table of Spectra and 
 66 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. "js. 6<f. 
 
 Ladd. — Elements op Physiolo- 
 gical Psychology: a Treatise of the 
 Activities and Nature of the Mind from 
 the Physical and Experimental Point of 
 View. By George T. Ladd. With 113 
 Illustrations and Diagrams. 8vo. 2\s. 
 
 Lang^. — Works by Andrew Lang. 
 Myth, Ritual, and Religion. 2 
 
 vols, crown 8vo. 21s. 
 Custom AND Myth ; Studies of Early 
 
 Usage and Belief. With 15 Illustrations. 
 
 Crown 8vo. 7^. 6d. 
 Letters to Dead Authors. Fcp. 
 
 8vo. 6s. 6d. 
 Books and Bookmen. With 2 
 
 Coloured Plates and 17 Illustrations. Cr. 
 
 8vo. 6^. 6d. 
 Johnny Nut and the Golden 
 
 Goose. Done into English by Andrew^ 
 
 Lang, from the French of Charles 
 
 Deulin. Illustrated by Am. Lynen. 
 
 Royal Svo. loj. dd. gilt edges. 
 Ballads of Books. Edited by 
 
 Andrew Lang. Fcp. Svo. 6^. 
 
 Larden. — Electricity for Public 
 Schools and Colleges. With nu- 
 merous Questions and Examples with 
 Answers, and 214 Illustrations and Dia- 
 grams. By W. Larden, M.A. Crown 
 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Laughton. — Studies in Naval 
 History; Biographies. By J. K. 
 Laughton, M.A. Professor of Modern 
 History at King's College, London. 
 Svo. los. 6d. 
 
 Lecky. — Works byW.E.H. Lecky. 
 
 History of England in the 
 Eighteenth Century. Svo. Vols. 
 I. & II. 1700-1760. 36J. Vols. HI. 
 & IV. 1 760-1 784. 36J, Vols. V. &VL 
 1784-1793- 36J. 
 
 The HisTORYOF European Morals 
 from Augustus to Charlemagne. 
 2 vols, crown Svo, l6s. 
 
 History OF the Rise and Influ- 
 ence of the Spirit of Rationalism 
 IN Europe, 2 vols, crown Svo. i6s. 
 
 Lewes. — The History of Philo- 
 sophy, from Thales to Comte. By 
 George Henry Lewes, a vols; Svo, 32^, 
 
 Lindt. — Picturesque Netv Guinea. 
 By J. W. LiNDT, F.R.G.S. With 50 
 Full-page Photographic Illustrations re- 
 produced by the Autotype Company. 
 Crown 4to. 42^. 
 
 Liveing. — Works by Robert Live- 
 iNG, M.A. and M.D. Cantctb. 
 
 Handbook on Diseases of the 
 Skin. With especial reference to Diag- 
 nosis and Treatment. Fcp Svo. '^s. 
 
 Notes on the Trea tment of Skin 
 Diseases. iSmo. 3^. 
 
 Lloyd. — A Treatise on Magnet- 
 ism, General and Terrestrial. By H, 
 Lloyd, D.D. D.C.L. Svo. \os. 6d. 
 
 Lloyd. — The Science of Agricul- 
 ture. By F. J. Lloyd. Svo. 12s. 
 
 Longman. — History of the Life 
 AND Times of Edward III. By 
 William Longman, F.S.A. With 
 9 Maps, S Plates, and 16 Woodcuts, 2 
 vols. Svo. 28^, 
 
 Longman. — Works by Frederick 
 W. Longman, Balliol College, Oxon. 
 
 Chess Openings. Fcp. Svo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Frederick the Great and the 
 Seven Years' War. With 2 Coloured 
 Maps. Svo. zs. 6d. 
 
 A New Pocket Dictionary of 
 THE German and English Lan- 
 guages. Square iSmo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Longman's Magazine. Published 
 
 Monthly. Price Sixpence. 
 Vols. l-io, Svo. price t,s. each. 
 
 Longmore. — Gunshot Injuries ; 
 
 Their History, Characteristic Features, 
 Complications, and General Treatment. 
 By Surgeon-General Sir T. Longmore, 
 C.B., F.R.C.S. With 58 Illustrations. 
 Svo. 3IJ. 6d. 
 
 Loudon. — Works by J. C. Loudon, 
 F.L.S. 
 Encyclopaedia of Gardening ; 
 the Theory and Practice of Horticulture, 
 Floriculture, Arboriculture, and Land- 
 scape Gardening, With 1,000 Woodcuts. 
 Svo. 21S. 
 
 Encyclopmdia of Agriculture; 
 the Laying-out, Improvement, and 
 Management of Landed Property; the 
 Cultivation and Economy of the Produci- 
 tlons of Agriculture. With 1,100 Wood- 
 cuts. Svo. 2\s. 
 
 Encyclopedia of Plants; the 
 Specific Character, Description, Culture, 
 History, &c. of all Plants found in Great 
 Britain. With 12,000 Woodcuts. Svo. ifls. 
 
PUBLISHED BY MESSRS. LONGMANS, GrBEN, &' CO. 
 
 13 
 
 Lubbock.— T/f^ Origin of Civili- 
 zation and THE Primitive Condition 
 OF Man. By Sir J. Lubbock, Bait. 
 M.P. F.R.S. With Illustrations. 8vo. 
 i8j. 
 
 Lyall. — The Autobiography of a 
 Slander. By Edna Lyall, Author 
 of 'Donovan,' 'We Two,' &c. Fcp. 
 8vo. \s. sewed. 
 
 Lyra Germanica ; Hymns Trans- 
 lated from the German by Miss C. 
 WiNKWORTH. Fcp. Svo. 5j. 
 
 Macaulay. — Works and Life of 
 Lord Macaulay. 
 
 History of England from the 
 Accession OF yAMBs the Second: 
 
 Student's Edition, 2 vols, crown Svo. 12s. 
 
 People's Edition, 4 vols, crown Svo. i6j. 
 ■ Cabinet Edition, 8 vols, post Svo. 48J. 
 
 Library 'Edition, 5 vols. Svo. £^. 
 
 Critical and Historical Essays, 
 with Lays of Ancient Rome, in i 
 volume : 
 
 Authorised Edition, crown Svo. 2s. dd, or 
 y. 6d. gilt edges. 
 
 Popular Edition, crown Svo. 2s, 6d. 
 
 Critical and Historical Essays: 
 Student's Edition, I vol. crown Svo. 6s. 
 People's Edition, 2 vols, crown Svo. Sj. 
 Cabinet Edition, 4 vols, post Svo. 24^, 
 Library Edition, 3 vols. Svo, 2i6s. 
 
 Essays which may be had separ- 
 ately price 6d. each sewed, is. each cloth ; 
 Addison and Walpole. 
 Frederick the Great. 
 Croker's Boswell's Johnson, 
 Hallam's Constitutional History, 
 Warren Hastings, (3^. sewed, 6d. cloth.) 
 The Earl of Chatham (Two Essays). 
 Ranke and Gladstone. 
 Milton and Machiavelli. 
 Lord Bacon. 
 Lord Clive. 
 
 Lord Byron, and The Comic Dramatists of 
 the Restoration. 
 
 The Essay on Warren Hastings annotated 
 by S. Hales, is. 6d. 
 ■ The Essay on Lord Clive annotated by 
 h. courthope bowem, m.a. 2s, 6d. 
 
 Speeches : 
 People's Edition, crown Svo. 3j. 6d, 
 
 Miscellaneous Writings: 
 
 Library Edition, 2 vols. Svo. 21s. 
 People's Edition, l vol, crown Svo, 4J. 6d, 
 [Coniinued abcfve. 
 
 Macaulay — Works and Life of 
 Lord MACAULAY^coniinued. 
 Lays of Ancient Rome, &=€. 
 
 Illustrated by G. Scharf, fcp. 4to. lOx. 6d. 
 
 Popular Edition, 
 
 fcp. 4to, 6d. sewed, is. cloth. 
 
 Illustrated by J. R. Weguelin, crown Svo, 
 3^. 6d. cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 
 Cabinet Edition, post Svo. y. 6d. 
 
 Annotated Edition, fcp. Svo. is. sewed ls.6d, 
 cloth, or 2s. 6d, cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 
 Selections from the Writings 
 OF Lord Macaulay. Edited, with Oc- 
 casional Notes, by the Right Hon, Sir 
 G. O. Trevelyan, Bart. Crown Svo. 6s, 
 
 Miscellaneous Writings and 
 Speeches : 
 
 Student's Edition, in ONE Volume, crown 
 Svo. 6s. 
 
 Cabinet Edition, including Indian Penal 
 Code, Lays of Ancient Rome, and Mis- 
 cellaneous Poems, 4 vols, post Svo. -241. 
 
 The Complete Works of Lord 
 
 Macaulay. Edited by his Sister, Lady 
 
 Trevelyan, 
 Library Edition, with Portrait, 8 vols. 
 
 demy Svo. ;^5. 5^. 
 Cabinet Edition, 16 vols, post Svo. ^^, i6ji 
 The Life and Letters of Lord 
 
 Macaulay. By the Right Hon, Sir 
 
 G. O. Trevelyan, Bart. 
 Popular Edition, I vol. crown Svo. 
 Cabinet Edition, 2 vols, post Svo. 
 Library Edition, 2 vols, Svo, 36^, 
 
 Macdonald. — Works by George 
 
 Macdonald, LL.D. 
 Unspoken Sermons. First Series. 
 
 Crown Svo. 3f. 6d. 
 Unspoken Sermons. Second Series. 
 
 Crown Svo. 3^. 6d, 
 The Miracles of Our Lord. 
 
 Crown Svo. 3^'. 6d. 
 A Book of Strife, in the form 
 
 of The Diary of an Old Soul! 
 
 Poems. l2mo. 6s, 
 
 Macfarren. — Works by Sir G. Ai 
 
 Macfarren. 
 Lectures on Harmony, Svo. i2Ji 
 Addresses AND Lectures. Crown 
 Svo. 6s. 6d. 
 
 Macleod. — Works by Henry D. 
 
 MACLEOD, M.A. 
 
 The Elements of Economics. In 
 
 2 vols. Vol. I. crown Svo. 7j. 6di Voh 
 
 II. Part i, crown Svo. Ts. 6d. 
 The Elements of Banking, 
 
 Crown Svo. ^s. 
 The Theory and Practice of 
 
 Banking. Vol, I. Svo, izs. Vol. II. 14/. 
 
14 
 
 Catalogue of General and Scientific Books 
 
 McCuIloch. — The Dictionary 
 OF Commerce and Commercial Navi- 
 gation of the late j; R. McCulloch, 
 of H.M. Stationery Office. Latest Edi- 
 ' ■ tion, containing the most recent Statistical 
 Information by A, J. Wilson, i vol. 
 medium 8vo. with 1 1 Maps and 30 Charts, 
 price 6y. cloth, or yoj. strongly half- 
 bound in russia. 
 
 Mademoiselle Mori : a Tale of 
 
 Modem Rome. By fte Author of ' The 
 Atelier du Lys.' Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 MahafTy. — A History of Clas- 
 sical Greek Literature. By the Rev, 
 J. P. Mahaffy, M.A. Crown 8vo. 
 Vol. I. Poets, ^s. 6d. Vol. II. Prose 
 Writers, 7j:. 6cl. 
 
 Malmesbury. — Memoirs of an 
 
 Bx-Minister: an Autobiography. By 
 the Earlof Malmesbury, G.C.B. Crown 
 8vo. 7^-. 6d. 
 
 Manning. — The Temporal Mis- 
 sion of THE Holy Ghost; or, Reason 
 arid Revelation. By H. E. Manning, 
 D.D. Cardinal-Archbishop. Crown 8vo, 
 8j. 6d. 
 
 Martin. — Navigation and Nauti- 
 cal Astronomy. Compiled by Staff- 
 Commander W. R. Martin, R.N. In- 
 structor in Surveying, Navigation, and 
 Compass Adjustment ; Lecturer on 
 Meteorology at the Royal Naval College, 
 Greenwich. Sanctioned for use in the 
 - Royal Navy by the Lords Commissioners 
 of the Admiralty. Royal 8vo. l8j. 
 
 Martineau — Works by James 
 
 Martineau, D,D. 
 Hours of Thought on Sacred 
 
 Things. Two Volumes of Sermons. 
 
 2 vols, crown 8vo. "js. dd. each. 
 Endeavours AFTER the Christian 
 
 Life. Discourses. Crown 8vo. "js. 6d. 
 
 Maunder's Treasuries. 
 
 Biographical Treasury. Recon- 
 structed, revised, and brought down to 
 the year 1882, by W. L. R. Cates. 
 Fcp. ,8vo. 6s, 
 
 Treasury of Natural History; 
 
 or. Popular Dictionary of Zoology. Fcp. 
 
 8vo. with 900 Woodcuts, 6s. 
 Treasury OF Geography, Physical, 
 
 Historical, Descriptive, and Political. 
 
 With 7 Maps and 16 Plates. Fcp. 8vo. 6s. 
 Historical Treasury: Outlines of 
 
 Universal History, Separate Histories of 
 
 all Nations. Revised by the Rev. Sir G. 
 
 W. Cox, Bart. M.A. Fcp. 8vo. 6s. 
 [Continued above. 
 
 Maunder's Treasuries— continued. 
 
 Treasury of Knowledge and 
 Library of Reference. Comprising 
 an English Dictionary and Grammar, 
 Universal Gazetteer, Classical Dictionary, 
 Chronology, Law Dictionary, &c, Fcp. 
 8;V0. 6s. 
 
 Scientific and Literary Trea- 
 sury: a Popular Encyclopjedia of Science, 
 Literature, and Art. Fcp. 8vo. 6s, 
 
 The Treasury of Bible Know- 
 ledge; being a Dictionary of the Books, 
 Persons, Places, Events, and other matters 
 of which mention is made in Holy Scrip- 
 ture. By the Rev. J. Ayre, M.A. With 
 5 Maps, IS Plates, and 300 Woodcuts. 
 Fcp. 8vo. 6s. 
 
 The Treasury of Botany;, or 
 Popular Dictionary of the Vegetable 
 Kingdom. Edited by J. LmDLEY,F.R.S. 
 and T, MooKE, F. L. S. With 274 Wood: 
 cuts and 20 Steel Plates. Two Parts, 
 fcp. 8vo. 12 J. 
 
 Max Miiller.— Works by F. Max 
 
 MULLER, M.A. 
 
 Biographical Essays. Crown 8vo. 
 Is. 6d. 
 
 Selected Essays on Language, 
 Mythology and Religion. 2 vols, 
 crown 8vo. ifij. 
 
 Lectures oir the Science of Lan- 
 guage. 2 vols, crown 8vo. \6s, 
 
 India, What Can it Teach Ust 
 A Course of Lectures delivered before the 
 University of Cambridge. 8vo. izs. 6d. 
 
 Hibbert Lectures on the Origin 
 AND Growth of Religion, as illus- 
 trated by the Religions of India. Crown 
 8vo. 7j. 6d. 
 
 Introduction to the Science of 
 Religion: Four Lectures delivered at the 
 Royal Institution. Crown 8vo. 7^. 6d. 
 
 The Science OF TnottGfiT. 8vo."2i^. 
 
 Biographies of Words, and the 
 Home of the Aryas. Crown Svo. "js. 6d. 
 
 A Sanskrit Grammar for Be- 
 ginners. New and Abridged Edition, 
 accented and transliterated throughout, 
 with a chapter on Syntax and an Ap- 
 pendix on Classical Metres. By A. A. 
 MacDonell, M.A. Ph.D. Crown8vo.6j. 
 May.— Works by the Right Hon. 
 Sir Thomas Erskine Ma y, K. C.B. 
 
 The Constitutional History of 
 England since the Accession of 
 George in. 1760-1870. 3 vols, crown 
 Svo. i8j. 
 
 Democracy in Europe; a History. 
 2 vols. 8 32J. 
 
PUBLISHED BY Messrs. I^onguans, Green, &= Co. 
 
 IS 
 
 Meath. — Works by the Earl of 
 Meath {Lord Brabazori). 
 
 Social Arrows: Reprinted Articles 
 on various Social Subjects. Crown 8vo. 
 IS. boards, 5j. cloth. 
 
 Prosperity or Pauperism? Phy- 
 sical, Industrial, and Technical Training, 
 (Edited bythe Earl of Meath). 8vo. ^s. 
 
 Melville.— iVoF^i.? SK G.f. Whyte 
 
 Melville. Crown 8vo. is. each, boards ; 
 i^. 6d. each, cloth. 
 
 The Gladiators. 
 The Interpreter. 
 Good for Nothing. 
 The Queen's Maries, 
 
 Holmby House. 
 Kate Coventry. 
 Digby Grand. 
 General Bounce. 
 
 Mendelssohn. — The Letters of 
 Felix Mendelssohn. Translated by 
 Lady Wallace. 2 vols, crown 8vo. 10s. 
 
 Merivale. — Works by the Very 
 Rev. Charles Merivale, D.D. 
 Dean of Ely. 
 
 History of the Romans under 
 
 - THE Empire. 8 vols, post 8vo. 48^. 
 
 The Fall of the Roman Repub- 
 lic : a Short History of the Last Century 
 tury of the Commonwealth. l2mo. Js. 6d. i 
 
 General History of Rome from 
 B.C. 7S3 TO A.D. 476. Crown 8vo. •js. 6d. i 
 
 The Roman Triumvirates. With 
 Maps. Fcp, Svo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Meyer. — Modern Theories of 
 ■ Chemistry. By Professor Lothar 
 Meyer. Translated, from the Fifth 
 Edition of the German, by P. Phillips 
 Bedson, D.Sc. (Lond.) B.Sc. (Vict.) 
 F.C.S. ; and W. Carleton Williams, 
 B.Sc. (Vict.) F.C.S. Svo. iSj. 
 
 MilL — Analysis of the Pheno- 
 mena OF THE Human Mind. By 
 James Mill. With Notes, Illustra- 
 tive and Critical. 2 vols. 8vo. 28j. 
 
 Mill. — Works by John Stuart 
 
 Mill. 
 ' Principles of Political Economy. 
 
 Library Edition, 2 vols, Svo. jps. 
 
 People's Edition, I vol. crown Svo. 5^. 
 A System of Logic, Ratipcinative 
 
 and Inductive. Crown Svo. 5^. 
 On Liberty. Crown Svo. is. /yl. 
 On Representative Government. 
 
 Crown Svo. 2s. 
 Utilitarianism. Svo. 5^. 
 Examination of Sir William 
 
 Hamilton's Philosophy. Svo. 16s. 
 Nature, the Utility of Religion, 
 
 and Theism. Three Essays, Svo. 5^. 
 
 Miller. — Works by W. Allen 
 
 Miller, M.D. LL.D. 
 The Elements of Chemistry, 
 
 Theoretical and Practical. Re-edited, 
 
 with Additions, by H, MACLEOD, F.C.S. 
 
 3 vols. Svo. 
 Vol. I. Chemical Physics, ids. 
 Vol. II, Inorganic Chemistry, 24^. 
 Vol. III. Organic Chemistry, 31J. (>d. 
 An Introduction to the Study 
 
 op Inorganic Chemistry. With 71 
 
 Woodcuts. Fcp. Svo. y. 6d, 
 
 Mitchell.—^ Manual of Prac- 
 tical Assaying. By John Mitchell, 
 F.C.S. Revised, with the Recent Dis- 
 coveries incorporated; By W. Crookes, 
 F.R.S. Svo. Woodcuts, 31s. 6d. 
 
 Molesworth. — Marrying and 
 Giving in Marriage: a Novel. ''By 
 Mrs. Molesworth. Fcp. 8vo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Monsell. — Works by the Rkv. 
 J. S. B. Monsell, LL.L>. 
 
 Spiritual Songs for the' Sun- 
 days and HOLYDAYS throughout THE 
 ViAR. Fcp. Svo. Ss. l8mo, zs. 
 
 The Beatitudes. Eight Sermons. 
 Crown Svo. 3^. 6d. 
 
 His Presence not His Memory. 
 Verses. i6mo. is. 
 
 Mulhall. — HisTOR Y OF Prices since 
 THE Year 1850. By Michael G. 
 Mulhall. Crown Svo. 6j. 
 
 Munk. — Euthanasia ; or, Medical 
 Treatment in Aid • of an Easy Death. 
 By William Munk, M.D, F.S.A, Fellow 
 and late Senior Censor of the Royal 
 College of Physicians, &c. Crown Svo. 
 4^. 6d. 
 
 Murchison. — Works by Charles 
 
 MuRCHisoN, M.D. LL.D: ^c. 
 A Treatise on the Continued 
 Fevers op Great Britain, ■ , Revised 
 by W. Cayley, M.D. PHysician to the 
 ^fiddlesex Hospital. Svo. with numerous 
 illustrations, 25^. 
 Clinical Lectures on Diseases 
 OP THE Liver, jfAUNDicE, and AbdoM' 
 INAL Dropsy. Revised by T. Lauder 
 Brunton, M. D. and Sir Joseph Fayrer, 
 M.D. Svo. with 43 Illustrations, '24?. 
 
 Napier.— T'/f^ Life^ of Sir Joseph 
 Napier, Bart. Ex-Lord Chancellor 
 of Ireland. From his Private Corre- 
 spondence. By Alex. Charles Ewald, 
 F. S. A. With Portrait on Steel, engraved 
 by G. J. Stodart, from a Photograph. 
 Svo. lis. 
 
i6 
 
 Catalogue of General and Scientific Books 
 
 Nelson. — Letters andDespa tches 
 ofHoratio, Viscount Nelson. Selected 
 and arranged by John Knox Laughton, 
 M.A. 8vo. ids. 
 
 Nesbit. — Lays and Legends. By 
 E. Nesbit. Crown 8vo. Sj. 
 
 Newman. — Works by Cardinal 
 Newman. 
 
 Apologia pro VitA SvA. Crown 
 8vo. ds. 
 
 The Idea of a University defined 
 
 AND ILLUSTRATED. Crown Svo. "JS. 
 
 Historical Sketches. 3 vols, 
 crown Svo. ds, each. 
 
 The Arians of the Fourth Cen- 
 tury, Crown Svo. ds. 
 
 Discussions and Arguments on 
 Various Subjects. Crown Svo. 6s. 
 
 An Ess a y on the Development of 
 Christian Doctrine. Crown Svo. 6s, 
 
 Certain Difficulties felt by 
 Anglicans in Catholic Teaching 
 Considered. Vol. i, crown Svo. 7j. 6cl.; 
 Vol. 2, crown Svo. 5^. 6d. 
 
 The Via Media of the Anglican 
 Church, illustrated in- Lectures 
 &'C. 2 vols, crown Svo. 6s. each. 
 
 Essays, Critical and Historical. 
 2 vols, crown Svo. 12s. 
 
 Essays on Biblical and on Eccle- 
 siastical Miracles. Crown Svo. 6s. 
 
 An Essay in Aid of a Grammar 
 OP Assent, is. 6d. 
 
 The Dream of Gerontius. i6mo. 
 6d. sewed. 
 
 Noble. — Hours with a Three-inch 
 Telescope. By Captain W. Noble, 
 F.R.A.S. &c. With a Map of the Moon. 
 Crown Svo. 4J. 6d. 
 
 Northcott. — Lathes and Turn- 
 ing, Simple, Mechanical, and Ornamen- 
 tal. By W. H. Northcott. With 33S 
 Illustrations. Svo. iSj. 
 
 O'Hagan. — Selected Speeches 
 and Arguments of the Right 
 Honourable ThomasBaron O'Hagan. 
 Edited by George Teeling. With a. 
 Portrait. Svo. l6s. 
 
 Oliphant. — Novels by Mrs. Oli- 
 
 PHANT. 
 
 Madam. Crown Svo. i^. boards ; 
 
 IS. 6d. cloth. 
 In Trust. — Crown Svo. is. boards; 
 
 IS, 6d. cloth. 
 
 Oliver. — Astronomy for Ama- 
 teurs : a Practical Manual of Telescopic 
 Research adapted to Moderate Instru- 
 ments. Edited by J. A. Westwood 
 Oliver, with the assistance of E. W. 
 Maunder, H. Grubb, J. E. Gore, 
 W. F. Denning, W. S; Franks, T. G. 
 Elger, S. W. Burnham, J. R. Capron, 
 T. W. Backhouse, and others. With 
 several Illustrations. Crown Svo. "Js. 6d. 
 
 Overton. — Life in the English 
 Church (1660-1714). By J. H. Over- 
 ton, M.A. Rector of Epworth. Svo. l+r. 
 
 Owen. — The Comparative Ana- 
 tomy AND Physiology of the 
 Vertebrate Animals. By Sir 
 Richard Owen,K.C.B. &c. Willi 1,472 
 Woodcuts. 3 vols. Svo. £,Z- ^V- 6^- 
 
 Paget. — Works by Sir James 
 Paget, £art. F.R.S. D.C.L. dvc. 
 Clinical Lectures and Essays, 
 Edited by F. Howard Marsh, Assistant- 
 Surgeon to St. Bartholomew's Hospital. 
 Svo. i$s. 
 Lectures on Surgical Patho- 
 logy. Re-edited by the Author and 
 W. Turner, M.B. Svo. vrith 131 
 Woodcuts, 21s. 
 
 Pasteur. — Louis Pasteur, his Life 
 and Labours. By his Son-in-Law. 
 Translated from the French by Lady 
 Claud Hamilton. Crown Svo. 7j. 6d. 
 
 Payen. — Industrial Chemistry; 
 a Manual for Manufacturers and for Col- 
 leges or Technical Schools ; a Translation 
 of Payen's ' Precis de Chimie Indus- 
 trielle.' Edited by B. H. Paul. With 
 69S Woodcuts. Medium Svo. 42s, 
 
 Payn. — Novels by James Payn. 
 TheLuckoftheDarrells. Crown 
 
 Svo. Is. boards; is. 6d. cloth. 
 Thicker than Wa ter. Crown Svo. 
 IS. boards ; is. 6d. cloth. 
 
 Pears. — The Fall of Constanti- 
 nople: being the Story of the Fourth 
 Crusade. By Edwin Pears, LL.B. 
 Barrister-at-Law, late President of the 
 European Bar at Constantinople, and 
 Knight of the Greek Order of the 
 Saviour. Svo. 16s. 
 
 Pennell. — Our Sentimental Jour- 
 ney through France and Italy. 
 By Joseph and Elizabeth Robins 
 Pennell. With a Map and 120 Illus- 
 trations by Joseph Pennell. Crown ^Svo. 
 6s. cloth or vegetable vellum. 
 
 Perring. — Hard Knots in Shake- 
 speare. By Sir Philip Peering, Bart. 
 Svo. Is, 6d. 
 
PUBLISHSD BY Messrs. Longmans, Green, 6» Co. 
 
 «7 
 
 Piesse. — The Art of Perfumery, 
 and the Methods of Obtaining the Odours 
 of Plants ; with Instructions for the 
 Manufacture of Perfumes, &c. By G. 
 W. S. PlESSE, Ph.D. F.C.S. With 
 96 Woodcuts, square crown 8vo. 2IJ. 
 
 Pole. — The Theory of the Mo- 
 dern Scientific Gams of Whist. 
 By W. Pole, F.R.S. Fcp. 8vo. 2s, 6d. 
 
 Prendergast. — Ireland, from the 
 Restoration to the Revolution, 1660- 
 i69o..By JohnP. Prendergast. 8vo. 5s. 
 
 Proctor. — Works BY R. A. Proctor. 
 
 The Orbs Around Us ; a Series of 
 Essays on the Moon and Planets, Meteors 
 and Comets. With Chart and Diagrams, 
 crown 8vo. 5^. 
 
 Other Worlds than Ours; The 
 Plurality of Worlds Studied under the 
 Light of Recent Scientific Researches. 
 With 14 Illustrations, crown 8vo. S^f- 
 
 The Moon; her Motions, Aspects, 
 Scenery, and Physical Condition. With 
 Plates, Charts, Woodcuts, and Lunar 
 Photographs, crown 8vo. 6^. 
 
 Universe of Stars; Presenting 
 Researches into and New Views respect- 
 ing the Constitution of the Heavens. 
 With 22 Charts and 22 Diagrams, 8vo. 
 lar. 6a?. 
 
 Larger Star Atlas for the Library, 
 in 12 Circular Maps, with Introduction 
 and 2 Index Pages. Folio, 15^. or Maps 
 only, 12s. 6d. 
 
 New Star Atlas for the Library, 
 the School, and the Observatory, in 12 
 Circular Maps (with 2 Index Plates). 
 Crown 8vo. S-''- 
 
 Light Science for Leisure Hours; 
 Familiar Essays on Scientific Subjects, 
 Natural Phenomena, &c. 3 vols, crown 
 8vo. ^s. each. 
 
 Chance and Luck; a Discussion of 
 the Laws of Luck, Coincidences, Wagers, 
 Lotteries, and the Fallacies of Gambling 
 &c. Crown 8vo. S^. 
 
 Studies of Venus- Trans its ; an 
 Investigation of the Circumstances of the 
 Transits of Venus in 1874 and 1882. 
 With 7 Diagrams and 10 Plates. 8vo. S^- 
 
 Old and New Astronomy. 
 
 *j* In course of publication, in twelve 
 monthly parts and a supplementary sec- 
 tion. In each there will be 64 pages, 
 imp. 8vo. many cuts, and 2 plates, or one 
 large folding plate. The price of each 
 part will be 2J. 6d. ; that of the supple- 
 mentary section, containing tables, index, 
 and preface, is. The price of the com- 
 plete -vyork, in cloth, 36^. 
 
 The • KNOWLEDGE' LIBRARY. Edi- 
 ted by Richard A. Proctor. 
 ITow TO Play Whist: with the 
 Laws and Etiquette of Whist, 
 By R. A. Proctor. Crown 8vo. S^. 
 
 IToME Whist: an Easy Guide to 
 CorrectPlay. ByR.A.PROCTOR. i6mo.lJ. 
 
 The Poetry of Astronomy. A 
 Series of Familiar Essays, By R. A. 
 Proctor. Crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Nature Studies. By Grant Allen, 
 A. Wilson, T. Foster, E. Clodd, and 
 R. A. Proctor. Crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Leisure Readings. By E. Clodd, 
 A.Wilson, T. Foster, A. C. Runyard, 
 and R. A. Proctor. Crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 The Stars in their Seasons. 
 An Easy Guide to a Knowledge of the 
 Star Groups, in 12 Large Maps. By R. 
 A. Proctor. Imperial 8vo. S^. 
 
 Star Primer. Showing the Starry 
 Sky Week by Week, in 24 Hourly Maps. 
 By R. A. Proctor. Crown 4to. 2s. 6d. 
 
 The Seasons Pictured in 48 Sun- 
 Views of the Earth, and 24 Zodiacal 
 Maps, &c. By R. A. Proctor. Demy 
 4to. t)S. 
 
 Strength and Happiness, By 
 R. A. Proctor. Crown 8vo, 5^. 
 
 Rough Wa ys Made Smooth. Fami- 
 liar Essays on Scientific Subjects. By 
 R, A. Proctor. Crown 8vo. Jj. 
 
 Our Place Among Infinities. A 
 Series of Essays contrasting our Little 
 Abode in Space and Time with the Infi- 
 nities Around us. By R. A. Proctor. 
 Crown 8vo. S-^- 
 
 The Expanse of Hea ven. Essays 
 on the Wonders of the Firmament. By 
 R. A. Proctor. Crown 8vo. S^f- 
 
 The Great Pyramid, Observa- 
 tory Tomb, and Temple. With 
 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Pleasant Ways in Science. By 
 R. A. Proctor. Crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Myths and Marvels of AstrO" 
 NOMY. By R. A. Proctor. Cr. 8vo. 6s, 
 
 Prothero. — The Pioneers and 
 Progress of English Farming. By 
 Rowland E. Prothero. Crown Svo. 
 
 Pryce. — The Ancient British 
 Church : an Historical Essay. ByJoSN 
 Prvce, M. a. Canon of Bangor, Crown 
 Svo, 6s. 
 
iS 
 
 Catalogue op General and Scibntipic Books 
 
 Quain's Elements of Anatomy. 
 
 The Ninth Edition. Re-edited by Allen 
 Thomson, M.D. LL.D. F.R.S.S. L. & E. 
 Edward Albert Schafer, F.R.S. and 
 George Dancer Thane. With up- 
 wards of l,ooo Illustrations engraved on 
 Wood, of which many are Coloured. 
 2 vols. 8vo. i8j. each. 
 
 Quain. — A Dictionary of Medi- 
 cine. By Various Writers. Edited by R. 
 ^ Quain, M.D. F.R.S. &c. With 138 
 Woodcuts. Medium 8vo. 3IJ. 6d. cloth, 
 or 40J. half-russia ; to be had also in 
 2 vols. 34^. cloth. 
 
 Reader. — Works by Emily E. 
 Reader. 
 
 The Ghost of Brankinshaw and 
 other Tales. With 9 Full-page Illustra- 
 tions. Fcp. 8vo. 2J. ()d. cloth extra, gilt 
 edges. 
 
 Voices from Flower-Land, in 
 Oripnal Couplets. A Birthday-Book and 
 Language of Flowers. l6mo. \s. 6d. limp 
 cloth ; 2s. 6d. roan, gilt edges, or in vege- 
 table vellum, gilt top. 
 
 Fairy Prince Follow-my-Lead ; 
 or, the Magic Bracelet. Illustrated 
 by Wm. Reader. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d. 
 gilt edges; or y. 6d. vegetable vellum, 
 gilt edges. 
 
 The Three Giants <Sr»f. Royal 
 l6mo. IS, cloth. 
 
 The Model Boy &'c. Royal i6mo. 
 IS. cloth. 
 
 Be Yt Hys who Fynds Yt. Royal 
 i6mo. \s. cloth. 
 
 Reeve. — Cookery and House- 
 keeping. By Mrs. Henry Reeve. With 
 8 Coloured Plates and 37 Woodcuts. 
 Crown 8vo. Sj, 
 
 Rich. — A Dictionary of Roman 
 and Greek Antiquities. With 2,000 
 Woodcuts, By A, Rich, B.A. Cr. 8vo. 
 7j. 6d. 
 
 Richardson. — Works by Benjamin 
 Ward Richardson, M.D. 
 
 The Health of Na tions : a Review 
 of the Works — Economical, Educational, 
 Sanitary, and Administrative — of Edwin 
 Chadwick, C.B. With a Biographical 
 Dissertation by Benjamin Ward Rich- 
 ardson, M.D. F.R.S. 2 vols. 8vo. 2Ss. 
 
 The Commonhealth : a Series of 
 Essays on Health and Felicity for Every- 
 Day Readers. Crown 8vo. 6j. 
 
 Richey. — A Short History of the 
 Irish People, down to the Date of the 
 Plantation of Ulster. By the late A. G. 
 Richey, Q.C. LL.D. M.R.I.A. Edited, 
 with Notes, by Robert Romney Kane, 
 LL.D. M.R.I.A. 8vo. I4J-. 
 
 Riley. — Athos; or, the Mountain of 
 the Monks. By Athelstan Riley, 
 M.A. F.R.G.S. With Map and 29 
 Illustrations. 8vo. 21^. 
 
 Rivers. — Works by Thomas 
 Rivers. 
 
 The Orchard-House. With 25 
 Woodcuts. Crown 8vo. 5*. 
 
 The Miniature Fruit Garden; 
 or, the Culture of P3rramidal and Bush 
 Fruit Trees, with Instructions for Root 
 Pruning, With 32 Illustrations. , Fcp. 
 8vo, 4j, 
 
 Roberts.-— Greek the Language 
 OF Christ and His Apostles. By 
 Alexander Roberts, D,D. 8vo. \%s, 
 
 Robinson. — The New Arcadia, 
 
 and other Poems. By A. MARY F. 
 Robinson. Crown 8vo. (ts. 
 
 Koget.^ Thesaurus of English 
 Words and Phrases, Classified and 
 Arranged so as to facilitate the Expression 
 of Ideas and assist in Literary Com- 
 position. By Peter M. Roget. Crown 
 8vo. los. 6d, 
 
 Ronalds. — The Fly-FiSher's 
 Entomology. By Alfred Ronalds, 
 With 20 Coloured Plates, 8vo. I4r. 
 
 Saintsbury. — Manchester ; a Short 
 History. By George Saintsbury. With 
 2 Maps. Crown 8vo. y. 6d. ^ 
 
 Schafer. — The Essentials of 
 Histology, Descriptive and Practi- 
 cal. For the use of Students. By E. 
 A. Schafer, F.R.S. With 281 Illus- 
 trations. 8vo. 6s. or Interleaved with 
 Drawing Paper, 8j. 6d, 
 
 Schellen. — Spectrum Analysis 
 IN ITS Application to Terrestrial 
 Substances, and the Physical Constitu- 
 tion of the Heavenly Bodies, By Dr, 
 H. Schellen. Translated by Jane aind 
 Caroline Lassell. Edited by Capt. 
 W. De W. Abney. With 14 Plates 
 (including Angstrom's and Cornu's Maps) 
 and 291 Woodcuts. 8vo. 31J, 6d. 
 
 Scott. — Weather Charts and 
 Storm Warnings. By Robert H. 
 Scott, M.A, F.R.S. With numerous 
 Illustrations, Crown 8vo, 6s: 
 
PUBLISHED BV JMBaasa. SjSmMANS, GkBEN, &' CO. 
 
 19 
 
 Seebohm. — Works by Frederic 
 Seebohm. 
 
 The Oxford Reformers — John 
 CoLBT, Erasmus, and Thomas More; 
 a History of their Fellow- Work. 8vo. 14J, 
 
 The English Village Community 
 Examined in its Relations to the Manorial 
 and Tribal Systems, &c, 13 Maps and 
 Plates. 8vo. i6j. 
 
 The Era of the Protestant Revo- 
 lution. With Map. Fcp. 8vo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Sennett. — The Marine Steam 
 Eng'ine; a Treatise for the use of Engi- 
 neering Students and Officers of the 
 Royal Navy. By Richard Sennett, 
 Engineer-in-Chief of the Royal Navy. 
 With 244 Illustrations. 8vo. 21s, 
 
 Sewell. — Stories and Tales. 
 
 By ELizABET]^..1iI. Sewell. Crovfn 8vo. 
 
 li. each, boards ; is. 6d. each, cloth plain ; 
 
 2s. 6d. each, cloth extra, gilt edges :— 
 Amy Herbert. Margaret Perciyal. 
 
 The Earl's Daughter. Laneton Parsonage. 
 The Experience of Life. Ursula. 
 A Glimpse of the World. Gertrude. 
 Cleve Hall. Ivors. 
 
 Katharine Ashton. . 
 
 Shakespeare. — Bowdler's Fa. 
 
 MiLY Shakespeare. Genuine Edition, 
 in I vol. medium 8vo. large type, with 
 36 Woodcuts, 14J. or in 6 vols. fcp. 8vo. 
 2ls. 
 
 Outlines of the Life op Shake- 
 speare. By J. O. Halliwell-Phil- 
 Lipps, F.R.S. 2 vols. Royal 8vo. 
 loj. dd. 
 
 Shilling Standard Novels. 
 
 By the Earl of Beaconsfield. 
 
 Vivian Grey, 
 Venetia. 
 Tanered. ■'<'' 
 SybU. 
 Coningsby. 
 Alroy, Ixion, &c. 
 Price \s. each, boards ; l,f. (sd. each, cloth 
 
 By G. J. Whyte-Melville. 
 
 The Young Duke, &c. 
 Contarini Fleming, &c. 
 Henrietta Temple. 
 Lothair. 
 Endymion. 
 
 Shilling Standard Novels-^""''^- 
 
 By Elizabeth M. Sewell. 
 
 The Gladiators 
 The Interpreter. 
 Good for Nothing 
 Queen's Maries, 
 
 Holmby House. 
 Kate Coventry. 
 Digby Grand. 
 General Bounce. 
 
 Price IS. each, boards ; is. 6d. each, cloth. 
 
 By Robert Louis Stevenson. 
 
 The Dynamiter. 
 
 Strange Case of Dr. Tekyll and Mr. Hyde. 
 Price IS. each, sewed ; is. dd. each, cloth. 
 [Coniinued above. 
 
 Amy Herbert. 
 Gertrude. 
 Earl's Daughter. 
 The Experience 
 
 of JLife. 
 Cleve Hall. 
 
 AGlimpse of theWorld. 
 
 Ivors. 
 
 Katharine Ashton, 
 
 Margaret Percival. 
 
 Laneton Parspnage. 
 
 Ursula. 
 
 Price IS. each, boards ; is. 6d. each, cloth, 
 plain; 2s. 6d. each, cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 
 By Anthony Trollope. . 
 
 The Warden. | Barchester Towers. 
 Price IS. each, boards; is. 6d, each, cloth. 
 
 By Bret Harte. 
 
 In the Carquinez Woods, is. boards ; 
 
 IS. 6(f.' cloth. 
 On the Frontier (Three Stories). i,r. sewed. 
 By Shore and Sedge (Three Stories), is. 
 sewed. 
 
 By Mrs. Oliphant. 
 In Trust. | Madam. 
 
 By James Fayn. 
 
 Thicker than Water. 
 
 The Luck of the Darrells. 
 Price IS. each, boards ; l,r. dd. each, cloth. 
 
 Short. — Sketch of the History 
 OF the Church of England to the 
 Revolution OP 1688. By T. V. Short, 
 D.D. Crown 8vo. Is. 6d. 
 
 Smith. — Liberty and Liberalism ; 
 a Protest against the Growing Tendency 
 toward Undue Interference by the State 
 Viriith Individual Liberty, Private Enter- 
 prise, and the Rights of Property. By 
 Bruce Smith, of the Inner Temple, 
 Barrister-at-Law. Crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Smith, H. 'F.—The Handbook for 
 MiDWiVES. By Henry Fly Smith,, 
 M.B. Oxon. M.R.C.S. late Assistant- 
 Surgeon at the Hospital for Sick Women, 
 Soho Square. With 41 Woodcuts. 
 Crown 8vo. S^. 
 
 Smith, R. Bosworth. — Car- 
 thage and the Carthaginians. By 
 R. Bosworth Smith, M.A. Maps, 
 Plans, &c. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 Smith, Rev. Sydney.— ^r^ IVit 
 
 AND Wisdom op the Rev. Sydney 
 Smith. Crown 8vo. is. boards ; is. id, 
 cloth. 
 
 Smith, T. — A Manual of Opera- 
 tive Surgery on the Dead Body, 
 By Thomas Smith, Surgeon to St. 
 Bartholomew's Hospital. A New Edi- 
 tion, re-edited by W. J. Walsham. 
 With 46 Illustrations. 8vo. 12s. 
 
Catalogue of General and Scientific Books 
 
 Sputhey. — The Poetical Works 
 OF Robert Southey, with the Author's 
 last Corrections and Additions. Medium 
 8vo. with Portrait^ 14^. 
 
 Stanley. — A Familiar History 
 OF Birds. By E. Stanley, D.D. 
 Revised and enlarged, with 160 Wood- 
 cuts. Crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Steel. — Works bv /. H. Steel, 
 M.R.C.V.S. 
 
 A Treatise on the Diseases of 
 the Dog; being a Manual of Canine 
 Pathology. Especially I adapted for the 
 Use of Veterinary Practitioners and 
 Students. With 88 Illustrations. 8vo. 
 I Of. 6d. 
 
 A Treatise on the Diseases 
 OF the Ox; being a Manual of Bovine 
 Pathology specially adapted for the use 
 of Veterinary Practitioners and Students. 
 With 2 Plates and 117 Woodcuts. 8vo. 
 15^. 
 
 Stephen. — Essays in Ecclesias- 
 tical Biography. By the Right Hon. 
 Sir J. Stephen, LL.D. Crown 8vo. 
 7^. 6d. 
 
 Stevenson. — Works by Robert 
 Louis Stevenson. 
 
 A Child's Garden of Verses. 
 Small fcp, 8vo. ^s. 
 
 The Dynamiter. Fcp. 8vo. is. swd. 
 IS. 6d. cloth. 
 
 Strange Case of Dr. Jekyll and 
 Mr. Hyde. Fcp. 8vo. \s. sewed ; i^. dd. 
 cloth. 
 
 ' Stonehenge.' — The Dog in 
 
 Health and Disease. By 'Stone- 
 henge.' With 84 Wood Engravings. 
 Square crown 8vo. "js. 6d. 
 
 The Greyhound. By 'Stonehenge.' 
 With 25 Portraits of Greyhounds, &c. 
 Square crown 8vo. 15^. 
 
 Stoney. — The Theory of the 
 Stresses on Girders and Similar 
 Structures. With Practical Observa- 
 tions on the Strength and other Properties 
 of Materials. By Bindon B. Stoney, 
 LL. D. F. R. S. M. I. C. E. With 5 Plates, 
 and 143 Illustrations in the Text, Royal 
 8vo, 36X. 
 
 Sully. — Works by James Sully. 
 
 Outlines of Psychology, with 
 Special Reference to the Theory of Edu- 
 cation. 8vo. 12s. 6d. 
 
 The Teacher's Handbook of 
 Psychology, on the Basis of ' Outlines 
 of Psychology.' Crown 8vo. ds. 6d. 
 
 Supernatural Religion; an In- 
 quiry into the Reality of Divine Reve- 
 lation. Complete Edition, thoroughly 
 revised. 3 vols. 8vo. 36J. 
 
 Swinburne. — Picture Logic; an 
 Attempt to Popularise the Science of 
 Reasoning. By A. J. Swinburne, B. A. 
 Post 8vo. SJ. 
 
 Taylor. — Student's Manual of 
 THE History op India, from the Earliest 
 Period to the Present Time. By Colonel 
 Meadows Taylor, C.S.I. Crown 8vo. 
 •js. 6d. 
 
 Taylor. — An Agricultural Note- 
 Book: to Assist Candidates in Pre- 
 paring for the Science and Art and other 
 Examinations in Agriculture. By W. C. 
 Taylor. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Thompson. — Works by D. Green- 
 leaf Thompson. 
 
 The Problem of Evil : an Intro- 
 duction to the Practical Sciences. 8vo. 
 los. 6d. 
 
 A System of Psychology. 2 vols. 
 8vo. 36J. 
 
 Thomson's Conspectus.— Adapted 
 
 to the British Pharmacopoeia of 1885. 
 Edited by Nestor Tirard, M.D. Lond. 
 F.R.C.P. New Edition, with an Ap- 
 pendix containing notices of some of the 
 more important non-of&cial medicines 
 and preparations. l8mo. 6s. 
 
 Thomson. — An Outline of the 
 Necessary Laws of Thought; a 
 Treatise on Pure and Applied Logic. By 
 W. Thomson, D.D. Archbishop of 
 York, Crown 8vo. 6s. 
 
 Three in Norway. By Two of 
 
 Them. With a Map and 59 Illustra- 
 tions on Wood from Sketches by the 
 Authors. Crown 8vo. 2s, boards; 2S, 6d, 
 cloth. 
 
iniBUSHED BY MESSRS. LONGMANS, GrEEN, & CO. 
 
 21 
 
 Todd. — Ojt Parliamentary Go- 
 vernment IN England.: its Origin, 
 Development, and Practical Operation. 
 By Alpheus Todd, LLiD. C.M.G. 
 Librarian of Parliament for the Dominion 
 of Canada. Second Edition, by his Son. 
 In Two Volumes— Vol. I. 8vo. 2\s. 
 
 Trevelyan. — Works by the Right 
 
 Hon. Sir G. O. Trevelyan, Bart. 
 
 The Life and Letters of Lord 
 
 Macaulay. 
 
 Library Edition, 2 vols. 8vo. 36^. 
 
 Cabinet Edition, 2 vols, crown 8vo. 
 
 1 2 J. 
 Popular Edition, i vol. crown Svo. 
 bs. 
 The Early History of Charles 
 James Fox. Library Edition, Svo. i8j. 
 Cabinet Edition, crown Svo. 6j. 
 
 TroUope. — Novels by Anthony 
 Trollope. 
 
 The Warden. Crown Svo. is. 
 
 boards ; is. dd. cloth. 
 Barchester Towers. Crown Svo. 
 
 Ij, boards ; is. dd. cloth. 
 
 Twiss. — Works by Sir Travers 
 Twiss. 
 The Rights and Duties of Na- 
 tions, considered as Independent Com- 
 munities in Time of War. Svo. 2lx.- 
 The Rights and- Duties of 
 Nations in Time op Peace. 8vo. 
 19- 
 Tyndall. — Works by John Tyn- 
 
 dall, F.R.S. &'c. 
 Fragments of Science. 2 vols. 
 
 crown Svo. 16^. 
 
 Heat A Mode of Motion. Crown 
 Svo. 12s. 
 
 Sound. With 204 Woodcuts. 
 Crown Svo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 Essays on the Floating-Matter 
 OF THE Am in relation to Putrefaction 
 and Infection. With 24 Woodcuts. 
 Crown Svo. ^s. 6d. 
 
 Lectures on Light, delivered in 
 America in 1872 and 1873. With S7 
 Diagrams. Crown Svo. e,s. 
 
 Lessons in Electricity at the 
 Royal Institution, 1875-76. With 
 58 Woodcuts. Crown Svo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Notes of a Course of Seven 
 Lectures on Electrical Pheno- 
 mena AND Theories, delivered at the 
 Royal Institution. Crown Svo. is. sewed, 
 IS, ()d, cloth, 
 
 [Continued above. 
 
 Tyndall. — Works by John Tyn- 
 dall, F.R.S. dfC. — continued. 
 
 Notes of a Course of Nine Lec- 
 tures ON Light, delivered at the Royal 
 Institution. Crown Svo. is. sewed, is, 6d. 
 cloth. 
 
 Faraday as a Discoverer, Fcp, 
 8vo. 3j. 6d, 
 
 Ville. — On Artificial Manures, 
 their Chemical Selection and Scientific 
 Application to Agriculture, By GEORGES 
 Ville. Translated and edited by W. 
 Crookes, F,R,S. With 31 Plates, 
 Svo. 21^. 
 
 Virgil. — PuBLi Vergili Maronis 
 BucoLicA, Georgica, Mnbis ; the 
 Works of Virgil, Latin Text, with 
 English Commentary and Index. By 
 B. H. Kennedy, D.D. Crown Svo. 
 loj. dd. 
 
 The ^neid of Virgil. Translated 
 into English Verse, By John Coning- 
 ton, M.A. Crown Svo. ^s. 
 
 The Poems of Virgil. Translated 
 into English Prose. By John Coning- 
 ton, M.A, Crown Svo. gj. 
 
 Vitzthum. — St. Petersburg and 
 London in the Years 1852-1864 : 
 Reminiscences of Count Charles Fred- 
 erick Vitzthum von Eckstoedt, late 
 Saxon Minister at the Court of St. James'. 
 Edited, with a Preface, by Henry Reeve, 
 C.B. D.C.L. 2 vols. Svo. 30^; 
 
 Walker. — The Correct Card; 
 or, How to Play at Whist ; a Whist 
 Catechism. By Major A. Campbell- 
 Walker, F.R.G.S. Fcp. Svo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Walpole. — History of England 
 prom the Conclusion op the Great 
 War in 1815. By Spencer Walpole. 
 5 vols. Svo. Vols. I. and II. 1S15-1832, 
 36J. ; Vol. III. 1832-1841, i8j.; Vols. IV, 
 and V. 1841-1858, 36f. 
 
 Waters. — Parish Registers in 
 England: their History and Contents. 
 With Suggestions for Securing their better 
 Custody and Preservation. By Robert 
 E. Chester Waters, B.A. Svo, 5j. 
 
 Watson. — Marahuna .- a Romance. 
 By H. B. Marriott Watson, Crown 
 Svo. 6s. 
 
 Watts. — A Dictionary OF Chemis- 
 try AND THE Allied Branches op 
 other Sciences. Edited by Henry 
 Watts, F.R.S. 9 vols, medium Svo, 
 lii- 2S. dd. 
 
Catalogue of General and Sciei^tipic Books 
 
 Webb. — Celestial Objects for 
 Common TsLESCOPis. By the Rev. 
 T. W. Webb. Map, Plate, Woodcuts. 
 Crovfn 8vo. gj. 
 
 Wellington. — Life of the Duke 
 OP Wellington. By the Rev. G. R. 
 Gleig, M.A. Crown 8vo. Portrait, 
 
 West. — Works by Charles West, 
 M.D, dj'e. Founder of, and formerly 
 Physician to, the Hospital for Sick 
 Children. 
 
 Lectures on the Diseases of In- 
 fancy AND Childhood. 8vo. i8j. 
 
 The Mother's Manual of Chil- 
 dren's Diseases. Crown 8vo. as. 6d, 
 
 Whately. — English Synonyms. 
 By E. Jane Whately. Edited by her 
 Father, R. Whately, D.D. Fcp. 8vo, 
 
 Whately. — Works by R. Whately, 
 D.D. 
 
 Elements of Logic. Crown 8vo. 
 
 4^. f>d. 
 Elements of Rhetoric. Crown 
 
 8vo. 4^. 6d. 
 Lessons on Reasoning. Fcp. 8vo. 
 
 IS, 6d. 
 Bacon's Essays, with Annotations, 
 
 8vo. 10^. 6d. 
 
 White and 'R\A6ie.— A Latin-Eng- 
 lish Dictionary. By J. T. White, 
 D.D. Oxon. and J. J. E. Riddle, M.A. 
 Oxon. Founded on the larger Dictionary 
 of Freund. Royal 8vo. 2\s. 
 
 White. — A Concise Latin-Eng- 
 lish Dictionary, for the Use of Ad- 
 vanced Scholars and University Students 
 By the Rev. J. T. White, D.D. Royal 
 
 SVO. 12S. 
 
 Whiteing. — The Island.: an Adven- 
 ture of a Person of Quality ; a Novel. 
 By Richard Whiteing, Crown 8vo. 6j. 
 
 Wilcocks. — The Sea Fisherman. 
 Comprising the Chief Methods of Hook 
 and Line Fishing in the British and other 
 Seas, and Remarks on Nets, Boats, and 
 Boating. • By J. C. Wilcocks. Pro- 
 fusely Illustrated. Crown 8vo. 6s, 
 
 Wilkinson.— y^s Friendly So- 
 ciety Movement: Its Origin, Rise, and 
 Growth; its Social, Moral, and Educational 
 Influences. — The Affiliated Orders. 
 — By the Rev. John Frome Wilkinson, 
 M.A. Crown Svo. 2s. 6d, 
 
 Williams. — Pulmonary Consump- 
 tion ; .its Etiology, Pathology, and 
 Treatment. With an Analysis of l,oao 
 Cases to Exemplify its Duration and 
 Modes of Arrest. By C. J. B. Williams, 
 M.D. LL.D. F.R.S. F.R.C.P. and 
 Charles Theodore Williams, M.A. 
 M.D.Oxon. F.R.C.P. With 4 Coloured 
 Plates and 10 Woodcuts^^ 8vo. xds. 
 
 Williams. — Manual of Tele- 
 graphy. By W. Williams, Superin- 
 , tendent of Indian Government Telegraphs. 
 Illustrated by 93 Wood Engravings. 8vo. 
 loj. bd. 
 
 Willich. — Popular Tables for 
 giving Information for ascertaining the 
 value of Lifehold, Leasehold, and Church 
 Property, the Public Funds, &c. By 
 Charles M. Willich. Edited by 
 H. Bence Jones, Crawn Svo. loj. bd, 
 
 Wilson. — A Manual of Health- 
 Science. Adapted for Use in Schools 
 and Colleges, and suited to the Require- 
 ments of Students preparing for the Ex- 
 aminations in Hygiene of the Science 
 and Art Department, &c. By Andrew 
 Wilson, F.R.S.E. F.L.S. &c. With 
 74 Illustrations. Crown Svo. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Witt. — Works by Prof. Witt. 
 Translated from the German by Frances 
 Younghusband. 
 
 The Trojan War. With a Preface 
 by the Rev. W. G. Rutherford, M.A. 
 Head-Master of Westminster School. 
 Crown Svo. 2s. 
 
 Myths of Hellas; or, Greek Tales. 
 Crown Svo. y. 6d. 
 
 The Wanderings of Ulysses. 
 Crown Svo. 3J. 6d. 
 
 Wood. — Works by Rev. J. G. 
 Wood. 
 
 Homes Without Hands ; a De- 
 scription of the Habitations of Animals, 
 classed according to the Principle of Con- 
 struction. With 140 Illustrations. Svo. 
 lor. bd. 
 
 Insects at Home ; a Popular 
 Account of British Insects, their Struc- 
 ture, Habits, and Transformations. With 
 700 Illustrations. Svo. lar. bd. 
 
 Insects Abroad; a Popular Account 
 of Foreign Insects, their Structure, 
 Habits, and Transformations. With 
 600 Illustrations. Svo. los. 6d. 
 
 [Continued on next page. 
 
PUBLISHED BY MESSRS. LONGMANSt GSBSN, &= CO. 
 
 23 
 
 Wood. — Works bv Rev. J. G. 
 Wood — continued. 
 
 Bible Animals ; a Description of 
 every Living Creature mentioned in the 
 Scriptures. With 1 12 Illustrations. 8vo, 
 lOJ. bd. 
 
 Strange Dwellings ; a Description 
 of the Habitations of Animals, abridged 
 from 'Homes without Hands.' With 
 60 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 5^. Popular 
 Edition, 4to. dd. 
 
 Horse and Man: their Mutual 
 Dependence and Duties, With 49 Illus- 
 trations, 8vo. 14;. 
 
 Illustrated Stable Maxims. To 
 be hung in Stables for the use of Grooms, 
 Stablemen, and others who are in charge 
 of Horses. On Sheet, 4^. 
 
 Odt of Doors; a Selection of 
 Original Articles on Practical Natural 
 History. With 11 Illustrations. Crown 
 8vo. Sj. 
 
 Petland Revisited. With 33 
 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 7j. ()d. 
 
 The following books are .extracted from the 
 foregoing worj^by the Rev. J. G. Wood : 
 
 Social Habitations and Parasitic 
 Nests. With 18 Illustrations, Crown 
 8vo. 2s. cloth extra, gilt edges, 
 
 The Branch Builders. With 28 
 Illustrations". Crown 8vo. is. 6d. cloth 
 extra, gilt ed^es. ' ' ' 
 
 Wild Animals, of the Bible. 
 With 29 Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 3^. 6d, 
 cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 
 Domestic Animals of the Bible. 
 With 23 Illustrations. Crown Svo. 3^. 6d. 
 cloth extra, gilt_ edges, 
 
 Bird-Life of the Bible, With 32 
 Illustrations. Crown Svo. y. 6d, cloth 
 extra, gilt edges. 
 
 Wonderful Nests. With 30 Illus- 
 trations. Crown Svo. 3^. 6d. cloth extra, 
 gilt edges. 
 
 Homes Undmr the Ground. With 
 
 2S Illustrations. Crown Svo. 3^. 6d. cloth 
 extra, gilt e3ges. 
 
 Wood-Martin. — The Lake 
 Dwelling^ of Ireland-: or Ancient 
 Lacustrine Habitations of Erin, common- 
 ly caJled Crannogs. By W. G. Wood- 
 Martin, M.R.I.A. Lieut. -Colonel 8th 
 Brigade North Irish Division, R.A. 
 With SO Plates. Royal Svo, 2f,s. 
 
 Wright. — Hip Disease in Child- 
 hood, with Special Reference to its Treat- 
 ment by Excision. By G. A, Wright, 
 B.A. M.B.Oxon. F.R.C.S.Eng, With 
 48 Original Woodcuts, Svo, los. 6d. 
 
 Wylie. — History of England 
 under Henry the Fourth. By James 
 Hamilton Wylie, M.A. one of Her 
 Majesty's Inspectors of Schools. (2 vols, ) 
 Vol. I, crown Svo. los. 6d. 
 
 Wylie. — Labour, Leisure, and 
 Luxury; a Contribution to Present 
 Practical Political Economy, By 
 Alexander Wylie, of Glasgow. Crown 
 Svo, js, 
 
 Youatt. -T- Works by William 
 
 YOUATT. 
 
 The Horse. Revised and enlarged 
 by W. Watson, M.R,C,V,S. Svo, 
 Woodcuts, "]!. ftd. 
 
 The Dog. Revised and enlarged, 
 Svo, Woodcuts, &, 
 
 Younghusband.— Tks Story of 
 
 Our Lord, told in Simple Language 
 for Children. By Frances Young- 
 husband. With 25 Illustrations on Wood 
 from Pictures by the Old Masters, and 
 numerous Ornamental Borders, Initial 
 Letters, &c. from Longmans' Illustrated 
 New Testament. Crown Svo. zs. 6d. cloth 
 plain ; 3^-. 6d. cloth extra, gilt edges. 
 
 Zeller. — Works by Dr. E. 
 Zeller. 
 
 History OF Eclecticism in Greek 
 Philosophy. Translated by Sarah 
 F. Alleyne. Crown Svo. iw. f>d. 
 
 The Stoics, Epicureans, and 
 Sceptics. Translated by the ,Kev. O. 
 J. Reichel, M.A. Crown ivo. 15^. 
 
 Socrates and the Socratic 
 Schools. Translated by the Rev, O. J. 
 Reichel, M.A. Crown Svo, los. bd. 
 
 Plato and the Older Academy. 
 Translated by Sarah F. Alleyne and 
 Alfred Goodwin, B,A, Crown Svo, 
 iSj. 
 
 The Pre-Socratic Schools : a His- 
 tor)r of Greek Philosophy from the Earliest 
 Period to the time of Socrates. Trans- 
 lated by Sarah F, Alleyne, 2 vols, 
 crown Svo, y}s. 
 
 Outlines of the History of 
 Greek Philosophy. Translated by 
 Sarah F, Alleyne and EvelVn 
 Abbott, Crovra Svo. los. 6d, 
 
24 
 
 General and Scientific Books published by Longmans &■ Co. 
 
 EPOCHS OF ANCIENT HISTORY. 
 
 Edited by the Rev. Sir G. W. Cox, Bart. M 
 fcp. 8vo. with Maps, 
 
 The Gracchi, Marius, and Sulla. By 
 
 A. H. Beesly, M.A. With 2 Maps. 
 
 The Early Roman Empire. From the 
 
 Assassination of Julius Caesar to the Assassination 
 of Domitian. By the Rev. W. Wolfe Capes, M.A. 
 With 2 Maps. 
 
 The Roman Empire of the Second Cen- 
 
 iury^ or the Age of the Antonines. By the Rev. 
 W. Wolfe Capes, M.A. With 2 Maps. 
 
 The Athenian Empire from the Flight 
 
 of Xerxes to the Fall of Athens. By the Rev. 
 Sir G. W. Cox, Bart. M.A. With 5 Maps. 
 
 The Rise of the Macedonian Empire. 
 
 By Arthur M. Cukteis, M.A. With 8 Maps. 
 
 A. and by C, Sankey, M.A. 10 volumes, 
 ;, price 2s, 6d. each. 
 
 The Greeks and the Persians. By the 
 
 Rev. Sir G. W. Cox, Bart. M.A. With 4 Maps. 
 
 Rome to its Capture by the Gauls. 
 
 By WiLHELM Ihne. With a Map. 
 
 The Roman Triumvirates. By the Very 
 Rev. Charles Merivale, D.D. Dean of Ely. 
 With a Map. 
 
 The Spartan and Theban Supremacies. 
 
 By Charles Sankey, M.A. With 5 Maps. 
 
 Rome and Carthage, the Punic Wars. 
 
 By R. BoswoRTH Smith, M.A. With 9 Maps 
 and Flans. 
 
 EPOCHS OF MODERN HISTORY. 
 
 Edited by C. Colbeck, M.A. 18 volumes, fcp. Svo. with Maps, price 2s. 6d. each. 
 The Beginning op the Middle Ages. 
 
 By the Very Rev. Richard William Church, 
 M.A. &c. Dean of St. Paul's. With 3 Maps. 
 
 The Normans in Europe. By Rev. A. 
 
 H. Johnson, M.A. With 3 Maps. 
 The Crusades. By the Rev. Sir G. W. 
 
 Cox, Bart. M.A. With a Map. 
 
 The Early Plantagenbts. By the 
 Right Rev. W. Stubbs, D.D. Bishop of Chester. 
 With 2 Maps. 
 
 Edward the Third. By the Rev. W. 
 
 Warburton, M.A. With 3 Maps and 3 Genea- 
 logical Tables. 
 
 THE ' Houses of Lancaster and York; 
 
 ■with the ConqTcest and Loss of France. By 
 James Gairdner. With s Maps, 
 
 The Early Tudors. By the Rev. C. E. 
 
 Moberlv, M.A. 
 
 The Era of the Protestant Revolu- 
 
 tion. By F. Seebokm. With 4 Maps and 12 
 Diagrams. 
 
 By the Rev. M. 
 With 5 Maps and 
 
 The Age of Elizabeth. 
 
 Creighton, M.A. LL.D. 
 4 Genealogical Tables. 
 
 The First Two Stuarts and th'b Puri- 
 
 ian Revolution, 1603-1660. By Samuel Rawsom 
 Gardiner. With 4 Maps. 
 
 The Fall of the Stuarts ; and Western 
 
 Europe front 1678 to 1697. By the Rev. Edward 
 Hale, M.A. With 11 Maps and Flans. 
 
 The Age of Anne. By E, E. Morris, 
 
 M.A. With 7 Maps and Plans. 
 
 The Thirty Years' War, 1618-1648. 
 
 Samuel Rawson Gardiner. With a Map. 
 
 The Early Hanoverians. By E. 
 
 Morris, M.A. With 9 Llaps and Plans. 
 
 Frederick the Great and the Seven 
 
 Years' War. By F. W. Longman. With 2 Maps. 
 
 The War of American Independence, 
 
 1775-1783. By J. M. LrDLOw. With 4 Maps. 
 
 The French Revolution, 1789-1795. By 
 
 Mrs. S. R. Gardiner. With 7 Maps. 
 
 The Epoch of Reform, 1830-1850. By 
 Justin McCarthy, M.P. 
 
 By 
 E. 
 
 EPOCHS OF CHURCH HISTORY* 
 
 Edited by the Rev. Mandell Creighton. Fcp. Svo. price 2s. 6d. each. 
 
 The English Church in other Lands. 
 
 By the Rev. H. W. Tuckek, M.A. 
 
 The History of the Reformation j.v 
 
 England, By the Rev. George G. Ferry, M.A. 
 
 The Church of the Early Fathers. 
 
 By Alfred Flummer, D.D. 
 
 The Evangelical Revival in the 
 
 Eighteenth Century. By the Rev. J. H. Over- 
 
 ton, M.A. 
 
 •»* Otiter Volumei 
 
 The History of the University or 
 
 Oxford. By the Hon. G. C. Brodrick, D.CL. 
 
 The Church and the Roman Empire. 
 
 By the Rev. A. Carr. 
 
 The Church and the Puritans, 1570- 
 
 t66o. By Henry Offley Wakeman, M.A. 
 
 The Church and the Eastern Empire. 
 
 By the Rev. H. F. Tozee, M.A. 
 HiLDEBRAND AND HiS TiMES. By the 
 Rev. W. R. W. Stephens, M.A, 
 are in preparation. 
 
 Spoltiswoode & Co. Printers^ New-street Square, London.